JP2023160955A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of enhancing an interest in a game.SOLUTION: There is provided displacement means displaceable to a first position in which game balls can enter second ball entry means and a second position in which game balls cannot easily enter the second ball entry means. The displacement means is displaced from the second position to the first position on the basis of satisfaction of a predetermined condition in a specific game state occurring on the basis that a result of determination by determination means is a specific determination result, and the displacement means is displaced from the first position to the second position on the basis of satisfaction of a second condition in a situation in which the displacement means is positioned in the first position by first displacement control. When game balls enter first ball entry means, a predetermined game value is granted to a player. A first mode based on execution of determination, a second mode based on occurrence of a specific game state, and a third mode based on predetermined entry of game balls into the second ball entry means may at least occur. Accordingly, an interest in a game can be enhanced.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 1

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine typified by a pachinko machine.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, aim to increase the player's interest in the game by suggesting to the player that the lottery result is a winning result, depending on the content of the variable performance that is executed. be.

Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2006-345901

In gaming machines such as those described above, it is desired to further improve the interest of gaming.

An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can improve the interest of gaming.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine of the present invention includes a firing means capable of firing a game ball into a gaming area, a first ball entering means into which a game ball launched by the firing means can enter, and an acquisition device capable of acquiring predetermined information when a predetermined condition that can be satisfied based on the game ball entering the first ball entry device; and an acquisition device capable of storing the predetermined information acquired by the acquisition device; a storage means; and a determination means capable of executing a determination based on the predetermined information stored in the storage means when a first execution condition is met, and the result of the determination by the determination means is specified. means capable of generating a specific game state based on the determination result of 2. A ball entering means, a first position where a game ball can enter the second ball entering means, and a game ball entering the second ball entering means from the first position. a first displacement control for displacing the displacement means located at the second position to the first position; and a second displacement control for displacing the displacement means to the second position.

The displacement control means executes the first displacement control based on a first condition that can be satisfied in the specific gaming state, and the first displacement control causes the displacement means to move to the first position. The second displacement control is configured to be executed based on the establishment of a second condition that can be established in the situation in which the vehicle is located.

Furthermore, the gaming machine of the present invention is configured such that when a game ball enters at least the first ball entering means, a predetermined value is given to the player, and The configuration is such that at least the first aspect based on the execution of the determination can occur.

Furthermore, the gaming machine of the present invention is configured such that at least the second aspect based on the occurrence of the specific gaming state can occur.

Furthermore, the gaming machine of the present invention is configured such that at least the third mode based on the predetermined ball entering the second ball entering means can occur.

According to the game machine of the present invention, a firing means capable of firing a game ball into a gaming area, a first ball entering means into which a game ball launched by the firing means can enter, and the first ball entering means an acquisition means that can acquire predetermined information when a predetermined condition that can be satisfied based on the game ball entering the ball; a storage means that can store the predetermined information acquired by the acquisition means; and a determining means capable of executing a determination based on the predetermined information stored in the storage means when one execution condition is satisfied, and whether the result of the determination by the determining means is a specific determination result. means capable of generating a specific gaming state based on the above-mentioned shooting means; and a second ball entering means into which the game ball fired by the shooting means is different from the first ball entering means. , a first position where it is possible to enter the game ball into the second ball entry means, and a second position where it is more difficult to enter the game ball into the second ball entry means than at the first position. a first displacement control for displacing the displacement means located at the second position to the first position; and a first displacement control for displacing the displacement means located at the second position to the first position; and a displacement control means capable of at least executing second displacement control for displacing to the second position.

The displacement control means executes the first displacement control based on a first condition that can be satisfied in the specific gaming state, and the first displacement control causes the displacement means to move to the first position. The second displacement control is configured to be executed based on the establishment of a second condition that can be established in the situation in which the vehicle is located.

Furthermore, the gaming machine of the present invention is configured such that when a game ball enters at least the first ball entering means, a predetermined value is given to the player, and The configuration is such that at least the first aspect based on the execution of the determination can occur.

This makes it possible to generate the first aspect.

In addition, the gaming machine of the present invention is configured such that at least the second aspect based on the occurrence of the specific gaming state can occur.

This makes it possible to generate the second aspect.

Furthermore, the gaming machine of the present invention is configured such that at least the third mode based on the predetermined ball entering the second ball entering means can occur.

This makes it possible to generate the third aspect.

In other words, with the gaming machine of the present invention, it is possible to generate various aspects.

Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

It is a front view of a pachinko machine in a first embodiment. It is a front view of a game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine. FIG. 3 is a front perspective view of the operating unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the operating unit. FIG. 3 is a front view of the operating unit. FIG. 3 is a front view of the operating unit. FIG. 3 is a front view of the rotating body lifting and lowering unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the rotary body elevating unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the rotary body elevating unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the central unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the central unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the left unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the left unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the right unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the container. (a) is a side view of the container as seen in the direction of arrow XVIIIa in FIG. 17, and (b) is a front view of the container as seen in the direction of arrow XVIIIb in FIG. 18(a). FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the first rotating body. It is a table showing combinations of figures of a first rotating body and a second rotating body. FIG. 3 is a schematic side view of the first rotating body and the second rotating body showing a transition state when the first rotating body and the second rotating body are rotated. FIG. 3 is a schematic side view of the first rotating body and the second rotating body showing a transition state when the first rotating body and the second rotating body are rotated. It is a front view of a light emitting decoration unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the light emitting decoration unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the light emitting decoration unit. (a) is a front view of the central rotation unit in a state arranged in a retracted position, and (b) is a front view of the central rotation unit in a state arranged in an extended position. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the central rotation unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the central rotation unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the right rotation unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the right rotation unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the right rotation unit. (a) is a front view of the connecting displacement member, (b) is a side view of the connecting displacement member as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXIIb in FIG. 32(a), and (c) is a side view of the connecting displacement member in FIG. 32(a). FIG. 3 is a cross-sectional view of the connecting displacement member taken along the line XXXIIa-XXXIIa. FIG. 6 is a front view of the right rotation unit in each state when operating between a retracted position and an extended position. FIG. 6 is a front view of the right rotation unit in each state when operating between a retracted position and an extended position. FIG. 6 is a rear view of the right rotation unit in each state when operating between a retracted position and an extended position. FIG. 6 is a rear view of the right rotation unit in each state when operating between a retracted position and an extended position. FIG. 7 is a schematic rear view of the right rotation unit in each state when operating between a retracted position and an extended position. FIG. 7 is a schematic rear view of the right rotation unit in each state when operating between a retracted position and an extended position. (a) is a schematic front view for explaining the positional relationship between the front base and the connecting displacement member, and (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the front base and the connecting displacement member taken along the XXXIXb-XXXIXb line in FIG. 39(a). It is a diagram. (a) is a schematic front view for explaining the positional relationship between the front base and the first displacement member, and (b) is a schematic front view of the front base and the first displacement member as viewed in the direction of arrow XLb in FIG. 40(a). 40(c) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the front base and the first displacement member taken along line XLc-XLc in FIG. 40(a). FIG. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the left rotation unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the left rotation unit. FIG. 3 is a partially exploded perspective view of the left rotation unit. FIG. 7 is a front view of the left rotation unit in each state when operating between a retracted position and an extended position. FIG. 7 is a rear view of the left rotation unit in each state when operating between a retracted position and an extended position. FIG. 6 is a schematic rear view of the left rotation unit in each state when operating between a retracted position and an extended position. FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the left rotation unit for explaining the engagement action by the base-side engagement member and the displacement-side engagement member. (a) is a partially enlarged view of the first displacement member and the second displacement member in the XLVIII section of FIG. 47(c), and (b) is a partial enlarged view of the first displacement member as viewed in the direction of arrow XLVIIIb of FIG. 48(a). and a side view of the second displacement member. It is an exploded front perspective view of a winning device. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a winning device. (a) is a front view of the winning device, (b) is a rear view of the winning device, and (c) is a top view of the winning device. (a) and (b) are cross-sectional views of the winning device taken along the LIIa-LIIa line in FIG. 51. (a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the winning device taken along the line LIIIa-LIIIa in FIG. 52(a), and (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the winning device taken along the line LIIIb-LIIIb in FIG. 52(b). It is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the winning device along the LIV-LIV line in FIG. 52(b). It is a back schematic diagram of the winning device. FIG. 3 is a partially enlarged view of the game board in which the LVI section of FIG. 2 is partially enlarged. FIG. 3 is a partially enlarged view of the game board in which the LVI section of FIG. 2 is partially enlarged. FIG. 3 is a front perspective view of the center frame. FIG. 3 is a front view of the region forming section. 60 is a cross-sectional view of the area forming portion taken along the line LX-LX in FIG. 59. FIG. It is a front view of the game board in 2nd Embodiment. It is an exploded front perspective view of the right rotation unit in a 3rd embodiment. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the right rotation unit. FIG. 6 is a front view of the right rotation unit in each state when operating between a retracted position and an extended position. FIG. 6 is a front view of the right rotation unit in each state when operating between a retracted position and an extended position. FIG. 7 is a schematic rear view of the right rotation unit in each state when operating between a retracted position and an extended position. FIG. 7 is a schematic rear view of the right rotation unit in each state when operating between a retracted position and an extended position. It is an exploded front perspective view of the right rotation unit in a 4th embodiment. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the right rotation unit. FIG. 6 is a front view of the right rotation unit in each state when operating between a retracted position and an extended position. FIG. 6 is a front view of the right rotation unit in each state when operating between a retracted position and an extended position. FIG. 7 is a schematic rear view of the right rotation unit in each state when operating between a retracted position and an extended position. FIG. 7 is a schematic rear view of the right rotation unit in each state when operating between a retracted position and an extended position. It is an exploded front perspective view of the right rotation unit in a 5th embodiment. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the right rotation unit. FIG. 6 is a front view of the right rotation unit in each state when operating between a retracted position and an extended position. FIG. 6 is a front view of the right rotation unit in each state when operating between a retracted position and an extended position. FIG. 7 is a schematic rear view of the right rotation unit in each state when operating between a retracted position and an extended position. FIG. 7 is a schematic rear view of the right rotation unit in each state when operating between a retracted position and an extended position. It is a top view of the right rotation unit in each state when operating between a retracted position and an extended position. It is a top view of the right rotation unit in each state when operating between a retracted position and an extended position. It is an exploded front perspective view of the right rotation unit in a 6th embodiment. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the right rotation unit. FIG. 6 is a front view of the right rotation unit in each state when operating between a retracted position and an extended position. FIG. 6 is a front view of the right rotation unit in each state when operating between a retracted position and an extended position. FIG. 7 is a schematic rear view of the right rotation unit in each state when operating between a retracted position and an extended position. FIG. 7 is a schematic rear view of the right rotation unit in each state when operating between a retracted position and an extended position. (a) to (c) are schematic front views of a right rotation unit in a fourth embodiment, and (d) to (g) are schematic front views of a right rotation unit in a sixth embodiment. It is an exploded front perspective view of the right rotation unit in a 7th embodiment. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the right rotation unit. FIG. 6 is a front view of the right rotation unit in each state when operating between a retracted position and an extended position. FIG. 6 is a front view of the right rotation unit in each state when operating between a retracted position and an extended position. FIG. 7 is a schematic rear view of the right rotation unit in each state when operating between a retracted position and an extended position. FIG. 7 is a schematic rear view of the right rotation unit in each state when operating between a retracted position and an extended position. It is an exploded front perspective view of a left rotation unit in an 8th embodiment. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the left rotation unit. It is a front view of a guide part. FIG. 6 is a front view of the left rotation unit in various states when it moves on the outward path from the retracted position to the extended position. FIG. 6 is a front view of the left rotation unit in various states when it moves on the outward path from the retracted position to the extended position. FIG. 7 is a schematic rear view of the left rotation unit in various states when it moves on the outward path from the retracted position to the extended position. FIG. 7 is a schematic rear view of the left rotation unit in various states when it moves on the outward path from the retracted position to the extended position. FIG. 7 is a front view of the left rotation unit in various states when operating on the return path from the extended position to the retracted position. FIG. 7 is a front view of the left rotation unit in various states when operating on the return path from the extended position to the retracted position. FIG. 7 is a schematic rear view of the left rotation unit in various states when it moves back from the extended position to the retracted position. FIG. 7 is a schematic rear view of the left rotation unit in various states when it moves back from the extended position to the retracted position. It is an exploded front perspective view of the left rotation unit in a 9th embodiment. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the left rotation unit. FIG. 6 is a front view of the left rotation unit in various states when it moves on the outward path from the retracted position to the extended position. FIG. 6 is a front view of the left rotation unit in various states when it moves on the outward path from the retracted position to the extended position. FIG. 7 is a schematic rear view of the left rotation unit in various states when it moves on the outward path from the retracted position to the extended position. FIG. 7 is a schematic rear view of the left rotation unit in various states when it moves on the outward path from the retracted position to the extended position. FIG. 7 is a front view of the left rotation unit in various states when operating on the return path from the extended position to the retracted position. FIG. 7 is a front view of the left rotation unit in various states when operating on the return path from the extended position to the retracted position. FIG. 7 is a schematic rear view of the left rotation unit in various states when it moves back from the extended position to the retracted position. FIG. 7 is a schematic rear view of the left rotation unit in various states when it moves back from the extended position to the retracted position. It is a back surface schematic diagram of the left rotation unit in 10th Embodiment. (a) is a front view of the cage, (b) is a sectional view of the cage along line CXVIIb-CXVII b in (a), and (c) is a sectional view of the cage along line CXVIIc-CXVIIc in (a). It is a sectional view of a cage. FIG. 7 is a schematic rear view of the left rotation unit in various states when it moves on the outward path from the retracted position to the extended position. FIG. 7 is a schematic rear view of the left rotation unit in various states when it moves on the outward path from the retracted position to the extended position. FIG. 7 is a schematic rear view of the left rotation unit in various states when it moves back from the extended position to the retracted position. FIG. 7 is a schematic rear view of the left rotation unit in various states when it moves back from the extended position to the retracted position. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the left rotation unit in 11th Embodiment. FIG. 6 is a front view of the left rotation unit in various states when it moves on the outward path from the retracted position to the extended position. FIG. 6 is a front view of the left rotation unit in various states when it moves on the outward path from the retracted position to the extended position. FIG. 7 is a schematic rear view of the left rotation unit in various states when it moves on the outward path from the retracted position to the extended position. FIG. 7 is a schematic rear view of the left rotation unit in various states when it moves on the outward path from the retracted position to the extended position. FIG. 7 is a front view of the left rotation unit in various states when operating on the return path from the extended position to the retracted position. FIG. 7 is a front view of the left rotation unit in various states when operating on the return path from the extended position to the retracted position. FIG. 7 is a schematic rear view of the left rotation unit in various states when it moves back from the extended position to the retracted position. FIG. 7 is a schematic rear view of the left rotation unit in various states when it moves back from the extended position to the retracted position. It is a partially exploded perspective view of the left rotation unit in 12th Embodiment. (a) is a partially enlarged front view of the front base, and (b) is a sectional view of the front base along the line CXXXIIb-CXXXIIb in (a). FIG. 3 is a schematic partial cross-sectional view of the left rotation unit for explaining the engagement action by the base-side engagement member and the displacement-side engagement member. It is a partially exploded perspective view of the left rotation unit in 13th Embodiment. (a) is a partially enlarged front view of the front base, and (b) is a sectional view of the front base taken along the line CXXXVb-CXXXVb in (a). FIG. 3 is a schematic partial cross-sectional view of the left rotation unit for explaining the engagement action by the front base and the displacement side engagement member. It is a partially exploded perspective view of the left rotation unit in a 14th embodiment. (a) is a partially enlarged front view of the left rotation unit in a state where the second displacement member is placed in the retracted position, and (b) is a partially enlarged cross section of the left rotation unit taken along the CXXXVIIIb-CXXXVIIIb line in (a). It is a schematic diagram. (a) is a partially enlarged front view of the left rotation unit in a state where the second displacement member is placed in the extended position, and (b) is a partially enlarged front view of the left rotation unit taken along the line CXXXIXb-CXXXIXb in (a). It is a cross-sectional schematic diagram. It is a partially exploded perspective view of the left rotation unit in 15th Embodiment. (a) is a partially enlarged front view of the front base, and (b) is a sectional view of the front base taken along the line CXLIb-CXLIb in (a). FIG. 3 is a schematic partial cross-sectional view of the left rotation unit for explaining the engagement action by the base-side engagement member and the displacement-side engagement member. It is a partially exploded perspective view of the left rotation unit in 16th Embodiment. (a) is a partially enlarged front view of the front base, and (b) is a sectional view of the front base taken along the line CXLIVb-CXLIVb in (a). FIG. 3 is a schematic partial cross-sectional view of the left rotation unit for explaining the engagement action by the front base (opening) and the displacement side engagement member. It is a partially exploded perspective view of the left rotation unit in a 17th embodiment. FIG. 6 is a schematic top view of the left rotation unit for explaining the engagement action by the rear base and the displacement side engagement member. It is an exploded perspective view of the right rotation unit in an 18th embodiment. FIG. 7 is a front view of the right rotation unit in various states in the first half section when operating from the extended position to the retracted position. FIG. 7 is a rear view of the right rotation unit in various states in the first half section when operating from the extended position to the retracted position. FIG. 7 is a schematic rear view of the right rotation unit in each state in the first half section when operating from the extended position to the retracted position. It is an exploded front perspective view of the right rotation unit in a 19th embodiment. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the right rotation unit. FIG. 6 is a front view of the right rotation unit in each state when operating between a retracted position and an extended position. FIG. 6 is a front view of the right rotation unit in each state when operating between a retracted position and an extended position. FIG. 7 is a schematic rear view of the right rotation unit in each state when operating between a retracted position and an extended position. FIG. 7 is a schematic rear view of the right rotation unit in each state when operating between a retracted position and an extended position. FIG. 7 is a front view of the right rotation unit in various states in the first half section when operating from the extended position to the retracted position. FIG. 7 is a rear view of the right rotation unit in various states in the first half section when operating from the extended position to the retracted position. FIG. 7 is a schematic rear view of the right rotation unit in each state in the first half section when operating from the extended position to the retracted position. It is an exploded front perspective view of the winning device in a 20th embodiment. (a) is a sectional view of the winning device in a state where the seesaw member forms the first state, and (b) is a sectional view of the winning device in a state where the seesaw member forms the second state. (a) and (b) are partially enlarged cross-sectional views of the winning device in the twenty-first embodiment. (a) and (b) are partially enlarged sectional views of the winning device in the twenty-second embodiment. (a) and (b) are partially enlarged sectional views of the winning device. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the winning device in a 23rd embodiment. (a) and (b) are partially enlarged sectional views of the winning device. (a) and (b) are partially enlarged sectional views of the winning device. It is an exploded front perspective view of the winning device in a 24th embodiment. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a winning device. (a) is a front view of the rotating shaft, and (b) is a side view of the rotating shaft as viewed in the direction of arrow CLXXIb in (a). (a) is a sectional view of the winning device in a state where the seesaw member forms the first state, and (b) is a sectional view of the winning device in a state where the seesaw member forms the second state. (a) is a sectional view of the winning device along the CLXXIIIa-CLXXIIIa line in FIG. 172(a), and (b) is a sectional view of the winning device along the CLXXIIIb-CLXXIIIb line in FIG. 172(b). It is an exploded front perspective view of the winning device in a 25th embodiment. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a winning device. (a) is a sectional view of the winning device in a state where the seesaw member forms the first state, and (b) is a sectional view of the winning device in a state where the seesaw member forms the second state. (a) is a cross-sectional view of the winning device along the line CLXXVIIa-CLXXVIIa in FIG. 176(a), (b) is a cross-sectional view of the winning device along the line CLXXVIIb-CLXXVIIb in FIG. 176(a), and (c ) is a cross-sectional view of the winning device along the line CLXXVIIc-CLXXVIIc in FIG. 176(b), and (d) is a cross-sectional view of the winning device along the line CLXXVIId-CLXXVIId in FIG. 176(b). It is a front view of the center frame of a pachinko machine. (a) and (b) are enlarged views of the CLXXIX section in FIG. 178. It is a diagram schematically showing the time-measured change in the operation of the flow path solenoid and the time-measured change in the opening/closing timing of the opening/closing plate for each jackpot type. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing a method of transitioning from one game state to another game state with respect to three types of game states set in a pachinko machine. (a) is a diagram schematically showing area division settings and effective line settings of a display screen, and (b) is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display contents when all the upper, middle, and lower symbol rows are fluctuating in a fluctuating display performance, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of display contents when all the symbol rows of the upper, middle, and lower rows are fluctuating, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of display contents when the stop symbols of the jackpot are statically displayed. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing an example of display content when a reach effect that suggests to the player that there is a high possibility that the game will be played is generated. (a) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of display contents of a reach effect. (a) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of display contents of a reach effect. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a state where the result of the variable display of the first special symbol is a failure in a normal state or a variable probability state, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a customer waiting demo screen. (c) is a diagram showing an example of a demonstration screen during special figure 2 fluctuation. (a) is a diagram showing an example of symbol fluctuation in a potential state, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of display contents within 30 seconds after the fluctuating display ends. c) is a diagram showing an example of display contents after 30 seconds after the end of the variable display. (a) is a diagram showing the end screen of this probable state, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a result screen displayed after the probable state ends. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating an example of a revival performance, which is a type of performance performed during a potential state. 2 is a schematic diagram schematically showing counters and the like provided in a RAM 203 of the main control device 110. FIG. FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of a ROM of a main control device in a first control example. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first winning random number table, (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small winning random number table, and (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small winning random number table. It is a schematic diagram which showed the content of the 2nd winning random number table typically. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the jackpot type selection table, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small win type selection table. FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the structure of a variation pattern selection table. FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a normal table. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a normal table, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a potential table. FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a general figure fluctuation pattern table. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of a RAM of the main control device in a first control example. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM of the audio lamp control device in the first control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the RAM of the audio lamp control device in the first control example. FIG. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a screen display selection table. FIG. 2 is a block diagram of an electrical configuration of a display control device in a first control example. (a) to (c) are explanatory diagrams illustrating images when the power is turned on. (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the back surface A, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the rear surfaces B to D. (a) to (c) are explanatory diagrams illustrating the back surface E. FIG. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a display data table. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a drawing list. 3 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart showing special symbol variation processing executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation start process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart showing the first special symbol jackpot determination process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation pattern selection process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart showing the game state update process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart showing the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation start process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart showing the second special symbol jackpot determination process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 2 off fluctuation|variation process performed by MPU in a main control device. It is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation pattern selection process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 2 off variation pattern selection process performed by MPU in a main control device. It is a flowchart showing the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 2 off stop process performed by MPU in a main control device. It is a flowchart showing the starting prize winning process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart showing normal symbol variation processing executed by the MPU in the main control device. 3 is a flowchart showing a through gate passage process executed by an MPU in the main control device. 3 is a flowchart showing NMI interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main control device. 3 is a flowchart showing startup processing executed by an MPU in the main control device. 3 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by an MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart showing jackpot operation setting processing executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart showing jackpot end processing executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart showing the first winning process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit control process performed by MPU in a main control device. It is a flowchart showing a small winning operation setting process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd prize winning process performed by MPU in a main control device. 3 is a flowchart showing startup processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device. 3 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device. It is a flowchart showing the customer waiting effect processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device. 3 is a flowchart showing command determination processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device. 3 is a flowchart showing a stop type command reception process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device. 3 is a flowchart showing status command processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device. 3 is a flowchart showing standby command processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device. 12 is a flowchart showing a remaining number of times updating process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device. 3 is a flowchart showing a variable display setting process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device. 3 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. 3 is a flowchart showing boot processing executed by an MPU in the display control device. (a) is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. be. 3 is a flowchart showing command determination processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. (a) is a flowchart showing variation pattern command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing stop type command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. be. (a) is a flowchart showing opening command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing round number command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. . 3 is a flowchart showing ending command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. (a) is a flowchart showing back image change command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing error command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. be. 3 is a flowchart showing display setting processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. 3 is a flowchart showing a warning image setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device. 3 is a flowchart showing pointer update processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. (a) is a flowchart showing the transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device. be. 3 is a flowchart showing normal image transfer setting processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. 3 is a flowchart showing a drawing process executed by an MPU in a display control device. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in a second control example. FIG. 7 is a front view showing the inside of the distribution unit in a second control example. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the transition method of the gaming state in a 2nd control example. It is a timing chart which showed an example of the flow of special figure fluctuation in a 2nd example of control. (a) is a schematic diagram illustrating a display screen when no additional performance is performed during the remaining period, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing a display screen when additional performance A is performed as the type of additional performance during the remaining period. FIG. (a) is a schematic diagram showing a display screen when additional performance B is executed as the type of additional performance during the remaining period, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing a display screen when additional performance C is executed as the type of additional performance during the remaining period. It is a schematic diagram which shows the display screen when it is executed. It is a schematic diagram showing a display screen when additional performance D is executed as a type of additional performance during the remaining period. (a) and (b) are timing charts showing an example of the flow of special symbol fluctuations in the second control example. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a demo display A screen (customer waiting demo screen) on the third symbol display device, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a demo display B screen (customer waiting demo screen) on the third symbol display device. ) is a diagram showing an example. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the special display A screen in the third symbol display device, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the special display B screen in the third symbol display device. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the first winning type counter C2 and the jackpot type in the second control example, and (b) is a diagram of the variation pattern selection table in the second control example. FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the normal table (for use within 2 times after the completion of potential confirmation) in the second control example; FIG. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the probability variation table in the second control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the potential probability table in the second control example. It is. It is a block diagram showing the composition of RAM of the main control device in a 2nd example of control. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the audio lamp control device in the second control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the screen display selection table in the second control example. It is. FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of an additional effect selection table in a second control example. FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a RAM of the audio lamp control device in a second control example. It is a flowchart showing special symbol variation processing 2 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the second control example. It is a flow chart showing gaming state update processing 2 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the second control example. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol variation execution process performed by MPU in the main control device in the 2nd control example. It is a flowchart showing the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 2 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the second control example. It is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation start process 2 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the second control example. It is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation execution process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the second control example. It is a flowchart showing the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing 2 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the second control example. It is a flowchart which shows the starting winning process 2 performed by MPU in the main control device in the 2nd control example. It is a flowchart showing the jackpot end process 2 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the second control example. 12 is a flowchart showing command determination processing 2 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the second control example. 12 is a flowchart showing remaining number update processing 2 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the second control example. 12 is a flowchart showing temporary stop related processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in a second control example. It is a flowchart which showed the fluctuation restart process performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in a 2nd example of control. It is a timing chart which showed an example of the flow of special figure fluctuation in another example of the 2nd example of control. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in another example of the second control example. It is a timing chart which showed an example of the flow of special figure fluctuation in the 3rd example of control. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the jackpot end screen when the gaming state shifts to the probable state, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the jackpot end screen when the gaming state shifts to the probable state. ) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a display screen. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents displayed when additional effect D (see point D in Fig. 290) is executed during the special symbol fluctuation in the potential state, and (b) is , is a schematic diagram schematically showing the content of the final performance during the potential state. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a winning performance during a potential state. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the audio lamp control device in the third control example, and (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the audio lamp control device in the third control example. be. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the additional effect table in the third control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the winning effect table in the third control example. be. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st prize winning process 2 performed by MPU in a main control device in a 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd prize winning process 2 performed by MPU in the main control device in the 3rd example of control. 12 is a flowchart showing command determination processing 3 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in a third control example. It is a flowchart which showed special figure 2 fluctuation setting processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device in a 3rd example of control. 12 is a flowchart showing state command processing 3 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in a third control example. It is a flowchart which showed the win related command processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device in a 3rd example of control. It is a flowchart showing winning command processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the third control example. 12 is a flowchart showing variable display setting processing 2 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in a third control example. It is a flowchart which showed special figure 2 fluctuation start processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device in a 3rd example of control. (a) to (c) are diagrams showing the display mode when the hold notice performance is executed. (a) to (c) are diagrams showing the display mode when the press-on addition effect is executed. (a) and (b) are diagrams showing a display mode when a press-down additional effect is executed. (a) and (b) are diagrams showing a display mode when a non-display mode in which the remaining number of times is hidden in the probable state is set. (a) and (b) are diagrams showing a non-display mode in a potential state. (a) is a diagram showing the display contents when the remaining number of actual potential states becomes 0 and the potential state ends in the non-display mode, and (b) is a diagram showing the display contents in the non-display mode. It is a diagram showing a display mode (pinch escape effect) when a jackpot is set and the remaining number of times in the potential state is 5 or less. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the audio lamp control device in the fourth control example, and (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the audio lamp control device in the fourth control example. be. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the additional effect selection table in the fourth control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the participation degree normal table in the fourth control example. It is a schematic diagram. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the low participation level table in the fourth control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the jackpot table in the fourth control example. FIG. 6C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of a press period table in the fourth control example. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the normal table in the fourth control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special table in the fourth control example. be. FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a suspension notice determination table in a fourth control example. It is a flowchart which showed frame button input monitoring and production processing performed by MPU in an audio lamp control device in a 4th example of control. It is a flowchart which showed the press-down process during an additional production performed by MPU in an audio lamp control device in a 4th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the press-down process during a pending notice performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device in a 4th control example. 12 is a flowchart showing command determination processing 4 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in a fourth control example. It is a flowchart which showed special figure 2 fluctuation start processing performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in a 4th control example. It is a flowchart showing the additional effect setting process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fourth control example. 12 is a flowchart showing a hold notice setting process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in a fourth control example. 12 is a flowchart showing residual probability variation number command processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the non-display setting process performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus in a 4th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the fixed command process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control device in a 4th example of control. (a) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a ROM in the main controller in a first modification of the first control example, and (b) is a variation pattern selection in the first modification of the first control example. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of a table. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the potential (second half) table in the first modification of the first control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram in the first modification of the first control example. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a variation pattern scenario table. It is a block diagram showing the composition of RAM of the main control device in the 1st modification of the 1st example of control. It is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 5 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first modification of the first control example. It is a flowchart showing game state update processing 5 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first modification of the first control example. It is a flowchart showing jackpot end processing 5 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first modification of the first control example. It is a figure showing an example of a display screen in a 3rd pattern display device. FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a screen display selection 3 table in a second modified example of the first control example. (a) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of a display screen in a third symbol display device. (a) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of a display screen in a third symbol display device. (a) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of a display screen in a third symbol display device. It is a figure showing an example of a display screen in a 3rd pattern display device. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of a ROM of a sound lamp control device in a first modification of the fourth control example, and (b) is a block diagram of the sound ramp control device in the first modification of the fourth control example. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a RAM. FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a second normal table (for use after the third time after the end of the potential state) in the first modification of the fourth control example. 12 is a flowchart showing a frame button input monitoring/presentation process 2 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first modified example of the fourth control example. It is a flowchart which showed the press-down process during reach performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device in the 1st modification of the 4th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the press-down process during the big hit performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in the 1st modification of the 4th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the process at the time of the completion|finish of a press performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus in the 1st modification of a 4th control example. It is a flow chart showing special figure 2 fluctuation start processing 6 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first modified example of the fourth control example. 12 is a flowchart showing residual probability variation number command processing 6 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first modified example of the fourth control example. 12 is a flowchart showing command determination processing 6 executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first modification of the fourth control example. It is a flowchart which showed the press related command process performed by MPU in a display control device in a 1st modification of a 4th control example. It is a flowchart which showed press-down command processing during a reach performed by MPU in a display control device in a 1st modification of a 4th control example. It is a flowchart which showed scroll change command processing performed by MPU in a display control device in a 1st modification of a 4th control example. (a) is a flowchart showing scroll non-change command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first modification of the fourth control example, and (b) is a flowchart showing the first modification of the fourth control example. It is a flowchart showing the press command processing during jackpot executed by the MPU in the display control device in the example. (a) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of a display screen in a third symbol display device. (a) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of a display screen in a third symbol display device. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the character storage area in the second modification of the fourth control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram of the character storage area in the second modification of the fourth control example. It is a schematic diagram which schematically showed the content, and (c) is a schematic diagram which schematically showed the content of the storage area for symbol arrangement in the 2nd modification of the 4th control example. It is a flowchart which showed pointer update processing 2 performed by MPU in a display control device in a 2nd modification of a 4th control example.

<First embodiment>
Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 60, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko game machine (hereinafter simply referred to as "pachinko machine") 10 will be described as a first embodiment. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer shell 11 whose outer shell is formed by wooden frames combined into a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer shell formed to have substantially the same external shape as the outer frame 11. The inner frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two locations, upper and lower on the left side when viewed from the front (see Fig. 1), in order to support the inner frame 12. A frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64, etc. is removably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball (game ball) flows down the front surface of the game board 13 to play a pinball game. The inner frame 12 includes a ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that fires a ball to the front area of the game board 13, and a ball firing unit 112a that guides the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, there are provided a front frame 14 that covers the upper front side of the inner frame 12, and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side of the front frame 14. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached at two locations, upper and lower on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the front frame serves as an opening/closing axis on the side where the hinges 19 are provided. 14 and a lower tray unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side. Note that the locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are respectively unlocked by inserting a special key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, etc., and is provided with a window 14c having a substantially elliptical opening in its substantially central portion. A glass unit 16 having two glass plates 16a is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front side of the game board 13 can be seen on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

On the front frame 14, an upper tray 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface and protrudes forward, and prize balls, rental balls, etc. are discharged into this upper tray 17. The bottom surface of the upper tray 17 is formed to be sloped downward to the right side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the inclination guides the balls thrown into the upper tray 17 to the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 4). Furthermore, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. This frame button 22 is operated by the player when, for example, changing the stage of the performance displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the content of the super reach performance. Ru.

The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, at the corners). These light-emitting means are controlled to change the light-emitting mode by lighting up or blinking in response to changes in the game state such as when hitting a jackpot or when reaching a predetermined reach, thereby playing a role in enhancing the performance effect during the game. Illumination sections 29 to 33 containing light emitting means such as LEDs are provided around the periphery of the window section 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination parts 29 to 33 function as performance lamps such as jackpot lamps, and each illumination part 29 to 33 lights up by lighting or blinking the built-in LED when there is a jackpot or a reach effect. Or it will blink to notify you that you are hitting the jackpot, or that you are one step away from hitting the jackpot. Further, in the upper left part of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 which has a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and can display when a prize ball is being paid out or when an error has occurred.

In addition, a small window 35 is formed on the lower side of the right illumination part 32 by attaching transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be seen, and a small window 35 is formed in the pasting space K1 on the front side of the game board 13 (Fig. 2)) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin and plated with chrome is attached to the area around the illumination parts 29 to 33 in order to create a more dazzling appearance.

A ball rental operation section 40 is arranged below the window section 14c. The ball rental operation section 40 is provided with a frequency display section 41, a ball rental button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball rental operation section 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. placed in a card unit (ball rental unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball rental unit 40 is operated according to the operation. The loan is made. Specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area where information on the remaining amount of the card or the like is displayed, and a built-in LED lights up to display the remaining amount in numbers as the remaining amount information. The ball rental button 42 is operated to obtain rental balls based on information recorded on a card, etc. (recording medium), and rental balls are supplied to the upper tray 17 as long as there is a balance on the card, etc. be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the card unit. Note that the ball lending operation section 40 is not necessary in a pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper tray 17 from a ball lending device etc. without going through a card unit, a so-called cash machine. It is also possible to add a decorative sticker or the like to the installation part so that the component configuration is the same. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be used in common.

The lower tray unit 15 located below the upper tray 17 has a substantially box-shaped lower tray 50 with an open top surface formed in the center thereof for storing balls that cannot be stored in the upper tray 17. There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operating handle 51 is provided which is operated by the player to drive a ball to the front of the game board 13.

Inside the operating handle 51, there are a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball firing unit 112a, a firing stop switch 51b for stopping firing of balls during a period of being pressed, and rotation of the operating handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) for detecting the amount of dynamic operation (rotation position) by a change in electrical resistance is built-in. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the amount of rotation operation, and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes. The ball is fired with a strength (launching strength) corresponding to the player's operation, thereby driving the ball into the front of the game board 13 with a flight distance corresponding to the player's operation. Furthermore, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are off.

A ball removal lever 52 is provided at the front lower part of the lower tray 50 to operate when discharging the balls stored in the lower tray 50 downward. This ball removal lever 52 is always biased to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the bias, the bottom opening formed on the bottom of the lower plate 50 opens. The ball falls naturally from the bottom opening and is ejected. This operation of the ball removal lever 52 is normally performed with a box (generally referred to as a "senryo box") placed below the lower tray 50 for receiving the balls ejected from the lower tray 50. The operating handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower tray 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower tray 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 that is cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, and includes a large number of nails (not shown) for guiding balls, a windmill, rails 61, 62, and general prize winnings. It is constructed by assembling a mouth 63, a first ball entry port 64, a second ball entry port 1640, a variable winning device 65, a first through gate 66, a second through gate 67, a variable display unit 80, etc., and its peripheral portion is It is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1). The base plate 60 is made of wood with thin plates pasted together, and is formed so that the various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 cannot be seen from the front side of the base plate 60 by the player. The general winning hole 63, the first ball entrance hole 64, the second ball entrance hole 1640, the variable prize winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and the game board It is fixed from the front side of 13 with tapping screws or the like.

The front central portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window 14c of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 1). The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below, mainly with reference to FIG. 2.

On the front surface of the game board 13, an outer rail 62 formed by bending a band-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is installed, and a band-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 62 is installed at the inner side of the outer rail 62. An arcuate inner rail 61 formed by is erected. The front outer periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, and the front and back sides are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area where games are played is formed by the behavior of the players. The game area is an area defined by the front surface of the game board 13 and defined by the two rails 61 and 62 and an outer edge member 73 made of resin that connects the rails (a region where prize openings, etc. are arranged, and where shots are fired). (area where the ball falls).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left in FIG. 2) to prevent a ball that has been guided to the top of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide path again. be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight part of the ball, and when a ball is launched with more than a predetermined force, it hits the return rubber 69 and loses its momentum. is reflected toward the center while being attenuated.

First symbol display devices 37A and 37B each having a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are disposed at the lower left side of the gaming area when viewed from the front (lower left side in FIG. 2). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display information according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the gaming status of the pachinko machine 10. In this embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are configured to be used differently depending on whether the ball enters the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 1640. . Specifically, when the ball enters the first ball entry port 64, the first symbol display device 37A is activated, while when the ball enters the second ball entry port 1640, the first symbol display device 37A operates. The symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the changing probability mode, shortening time mode, or normal mode, and to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the variable mode mode by the lighting condition. , The lighting state indicates whether the stopped symbol corresponds to a guaranteed variable jackpot, a symbol corresponding to a normal jackpot, or a missed symbol, and the number of pending balls is indicated by the lighting state, and a 7-segment display device indicates whether the round is in the middle of a jackpot. Displays numbers and errors. Note that the plurality of LEDs are configured so that the respective LEDs emit light in different colors (for example, red, green, and blue), and by combining the emitted light colors, it is possible to indicate various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. can.

In this pachinko machine 10, a lottery is held when a prize is won in either the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 1640. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a jackpot (jackpot lottery), and if it is determined to be a jackpot, it also determines the type of jackpot. The types of jackpots determined here are 15R probability variable jackpot, 4R probability variable jackpot, and 15R normal jackpot. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the result of the lottery is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the variation ends, but also display a symbol according to the type of jackpot if it is a jackpot. .

Here, the "15R surefire jackpot" is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15 and then shifts to a high probability state, and the "4R surefire jackpot" is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 4. It is a variable jackpot that transitions to a high probability state after . In addition, "15R normal jackpot" is a jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds is 15 rounds, after which the jackpot transitions to a low probability state, and the time is shortened for a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). be.

In addition, "high probability state" refers to a state in which the probability of a subsequent jackpot is increased as an added value after the end of a jackpot, so-called probability fluctuation (probability fluctuation).In other words, a game that is easy to transition to a special gaming state. It refers to the state of The high probability state (probability change) in this embodiment includes a game state in which the winning probability of the second symbol described later increases and the ball is likely to enter the second ball entrance 1640. "Low probability state" refers to a time when the probability of winning is not changing, and the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state where the jackpot probability is lower than when the probability is changing. In addition, the time saving state (medium time saving) of the "low probability states" is a state in which the jackpot probability is normal, and the jackpot probability remains the same, but only the winning probability of the second symbol increases, and the second entry point is increased. 1640 Refers to a game state in which it is easy for a ball to win. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state, it is a state in which the game is neither changing probability nor shortening the time (a state in which neither the jackpot probability nor the winning probability of the second symbol has increased).

During the probability change and time saving, not only the probability of winning the second symbol increases, but also the time during which the electric accessory 1640a attached to the second ball entrance 1640 is opened is changed, and it takes a longer time than during normal. is set. When the electric accessory 1640a is in the open state (open state), the ball enters the second ball entrance 1640 compared to when the electric accessory 1640a is in the closed state (closed state). It becomes easy to do. Therefore, during the probability change or time saving period, the ball is likely to enter the second ball entrance 1640, and the number of times the jackpot lottery is held can be increased.

In addition, during the probability change or time saving, instead of changing the opening time of the electric accessory 1640a attached to the second ball entrance 1640, or in addition to changing the opening time, A change may be made to increase the number of times the electric accessory 1640a is opened than usual. In addition, during the probability change or time saving, the winning probability of the second symbol does not change, and the electric accessory 1640a is released at the time when the electric accessory 1640a attached to the second ball entrance 1640 is opened and at one hit. It is also possible to change at least one of the number of times. In addition, during the probability change and time saving, the time when the electric accessory 1640a attached to the second ball entrance 1640 is released and the number of times the electric accessory 1640a is released in one hit are not determined, and the second symbol is Only the winning probability may be changed to be higher than the normal winning probability.

A plurality of general winning holes 63 are arranged in the gaming area, from which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. Furthermore, a variable display unit 80 is arranged in the central part of the gaming area. The variable display device unit 80 is triggered by a win (starting win) at either the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 1640, and synchronizes with the variable display on the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B. A third symbol display device 81 is configured with a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as “display device”) that displays a variable third symbol, and the passing of the ball through the first through gate 66 and the second through gate 67 is used as a trigger. A second symbol display device (not shown) composed of an LED that variably displays a second symbol is provided.

Further, a center frame 86 is disposed in the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81. The third symbol display device 81 is made visible through an opening opened in the center of the center frame 86. Furthermore, when the rotating body lifting unit 300, central floating unit 400, and left/right rotation unit 500, which will be described later, are operated, at least a portion of their relative displacement member 450 and driven member 560 protrudes into the opening of the center frame 86, causing the opening to open. It is made visible through the section.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large 9-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), so that, for example, the upper, middle, and lower three Two symbol rows are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbols), and these third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbols are variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It looks like this. The third symbol display device 81 of this embodiment is different from the first symbol display device 37A, 37B that displays the gaming state under the control of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 4). A decorative display is made in accordance with the display on the symbol display devices 37A and 37B. Note that instead of the display device, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, reels or the like.

The second symbol display device displays an "○" symbol and an "x" symbol as display symbols (second symbols (not shown)) every time the ball passes through the first through gate 66 and the second through gate 67 This is a fluctuating display in which the and is alternately lit for a predetermined period of time. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the first through gate 66 and the second through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if it is a win, the symbol "○" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the second symbol is displayed in a fluctuating manner. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a loss, the "x" symbol is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the third symbol is displayed in a variable manner.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device stops at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, the symbol "○"), the electric accessory 1640a attached to the second ball entrance 1640 moves to a predetermined symbol. It is configured to be activated (opened) for only a certain amount of time.

The time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set to be shorter when the gaming state is changing probability or during time saving than when the gaming state is normal. As a result, during the probability change and time saving periods, the variable display of the second symbol is performed in a short period of time, so it is possible to perform more winning lots than during normal times. Therefore, the chances of winning in the winning lottery increase, so that the player can be given more opportunities to have the electric accessory 1640a of the second ball entrance 1640 in the open state. Therefore, during the probability change and time saving periods, it is possible to create a state in which it is easy for balls to enter the second ball entry port 1640.

In addition, during the probability change or time reduction, the second ball entrance 1640 may be opened during the probability change or time reduction by other methods, such as increasing the probability of winning or increasing the opening time or the number of times the electric accessory 1640a is opened per hit. If the ball is in a state where it is easy to win, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, if you set the time required for the variable display of the second symbol to be shorter during the probability change or time saving period than during the normal period, the winning probability may be made constant regardless of the gaming state, or the winning probability may be set to be constant regardless of the gaming state. The opening time and number of openings of the electric accessory 1640a may be constant regardless of the game state.

The first through gate 66 is assembled to the game board in the left region of the variable display unit 80, and the second through gate 67 is assembled to the game board in the right region of the variable display unit 80. The first through gate 66 and the second through gate 67 are configured so that a portion of the balls flowing down the game board, among the balls fired at the game board, can pass through. When the ball passes through the first through gate 66 and the second through gate 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, a variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a win, an "○" symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the variable display, and even if the result of the winning lottery is a loss, the symbol "○" is displayed. For example, an "x" symbol is displayed as a stop symbol in the variable display.

The number of times the ball passes through the first through gate 66 and the second through gate 67 is held up to a maximum of 4 times, and the number of held balls is displayed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, and the second symbol is displayed. A hold lamp (not shown) is also lit. Four second symbol holding lamps are provided, corresponding to the maximum number of holding lamps, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

In addition, the variable display of the second symbol can be performed by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in this embodiment, as well as by changing the display of the second symbol by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device. This may be done using a part of the symbol display device 81. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be lit in a part of the third symbol display device 81. Furthermore, the maximum number of balls that can be held for passing through the first through gate 66 and the second through gate 67 is not limited to four times, but can be less than three times, or more than five times (for example, eight times). You can also set it to . Further, the number of through gates to be assembled is not limited to two, and may be three or more. Further, the mounting position of the through gate is not limited to the left and right sides of the variable display unit 80, and may be, for example, below the variable display unit 80. Further, since the number of reserved balls is shown by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol retention lamp.

A first ball entrance 64 through which a ball can enter is provided below the variable display unit 80. When a ball enters the first ball entry port 64, a first ball entry switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and due to the turning on of the first ball entry switch, the A jackpot lottery is performed by the control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and a display according to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A.

On the other hand, a second ball entrance port 1640 is provided to the right of the first ball entrance port 64 when viewed from the front. When a ball enters the second ball entry port 1640, a second ball entry switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control is activated due to the turning on of the second ball entry switch. A jackpot lottery is made in the device 110 (see FIG. 4), and a display according to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37B.

In addition, the first ball entry port 64 is a winning port from which three balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters a prize (entering a ball), and the second ball entry port 1640 is a winning opening where a ball enters a prize (entering a ball). Then, one ball becomes one of the winning holes from which the ball is paid out as a prize ball. In this embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 is different from the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second ball entrance 1640. is the same number of prize balls that will be paid out when a ball enters the first ball entry port 64 and the number of prize balls that will be paid out when a ball enters the second ball entry port 1640 (for example, both are 5 balls). It may also be configured as

Further, an electric accessory 1640a is attached to the second ball entrance 1640. This electric accessory 1640a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the electric accessory 1640a is in a closed state (reduced state), making it difficult for balls to enter the second ball entrance 1640. On the other hand, when the "○" symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the variable display of the second symbol triggered by the passage of the ball to the second through gate 67, the electric accessory 1640a is in an open state. (enlarged state), and the ball is in a state where it is easy to enter the second ball entrance 1640.

As mentioned above, during probability change and time saving, the probability of winning the second symbol is higher than during normal time, and the time required for the second symbol to fluctuate is also shorter, so in the second symbol fluctuate display, "○" ” becomes easier to display, and the number of times the electric accessory 1640a is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Furthermore, during the probability change or time saving period, the time during which the electric accessory 1640a is opened is also longer than during normal times. Therefore, during the probability change or time saving period, a state can be created in which it is easier for balls to enter the second ball entrance 1640 compared to normal times.

Here, the probability of winning the jackpot is the same when the ball enters the first ball entry port 64 and when the ball enters the second ball entry port 1640, whether in the low probability state or the high probability state. be. However, the probability of a 15R variable jackpot as the type of jackpot selected in the event of a jackpot is higher when the ball enters the second ball entry port 1640 than when the ball enters the first ball entry port 64. It is also set high. On the other hand, the first ball entrance 64 does not have an electric accessory 1640a like the second ball entrance 1640, and is in a state where balls can always be won.

Therefore, during normal play, the electric accessory attached to the second ball entrance 1640 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win at the second ball entrance 1640, so the first ball entrance without the electric accessory is closed. 64, so that the ball passes to the left of the variable display unit 80 (so-called "left-handed hitting"), and by landing the ball in the first ball entrance 64, there are many opportunities for a jackpot lottery. , it is more advantageous for the player to aim for a jackpot.

On the other hand, when the ball passes through the second through gate 67, the electric accessory 1640a attached to the second ball entry port 1640 is likely to be in the open state during the probability change or time saving period, and the second ball entry port 1640 enters the prize. Therefore, the ball is fired toward the second ball entrance 1640 so that it passes to the right of the variable display device 80 (so-called "right-handed hitting"), and the ball passes through the second through gate 67. It is more advantageous for the player to open the electric accessory 1640a and aim for a 15R jackpot by hitting the second ball entrance 1640.

In this way, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment allows players to shoot balls depending on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether the game is changing probability, shortening time, or normal). You can change the way the ball is played between "left-handed" and "right-handed." Therefore, since the player can change the way he or she hits the ball, the player can enjoy the game.

A variable winning device 65 is disposed above the second ball entrance 1640, and an opening/closing plate that prevents a ball from entering the variable winning device 65 when closed is provided on the right side of the second ball entrance 1640. 65f1 is provided. In the pachinko machine 10, when a jackpot lottery conducted due to a winning in the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 1640 becomes a jackpot, after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed, the jackpot will be announced. The occurrence of a jackpot is indicated by lighting up the first symbol display device 37A or 37B so as to display the stop symbol, and displaying the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot on the third symbol display device 81. Thereafter, the game state changes to a special game state (jackpot) in which the ball is likely to win. In this special game state, the opening/closing plate 65f1, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined period of time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or until five balls have been won).

This opening/closing plate 65f1 is closed after a predetermined time has elapsed, and after the closing, the opening/closing plate 65f1 is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening/closing operation of the opening/closing plate 65f1 can be repeated up to, for example, 15 times (15 rounds). The state in which this opening/closing operation is performed is a form of special gaming state that is advantageous for the player, and the player is paid out a larger amount of prize balls than usual as a reward for the game (gaming value). will be held.

Specifically, the variable winning device 65 includes an opening/closing plate 65f1 that prevents the ball from entering the entrance portion (specific winning opening 65a) of the variable winning device 65, and is driven to open and close to the right around the lower side of the opening/closing plate. It is equipped with a large opening solenoid (not shown). The opening/closing plate 65f1 is normally in a closed state in which a ball cannot enter a prize or it is difficult to enter a prize. In the event of a jackpot, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening/closing plate to the lower front side, temporarily forming an open state in which the ball can easily enter the special winning hole 65a, and changing the open state and the normal closed state. It operates by alternating between states.

Note that the special game state is not limited to the form described above. A large opening opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the gaming area, and when an LED corresponding to a jackpot is lit on the first symbol display device 37A, 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time and the A special game is a game state in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened a predetermined number of times for a predetermined time when a ball enters the variable winning device 65 while the specific winning opening 65a is open. It may be formed as a state. Further, the number of variable winning devices 65 is not limited to one, and a plurality (for example, three) may be arranged. Further, the arrangement position is not limited to above the second ball entry port 1640, and may be placed to the left of the variable display unit 80, for example.

At the lower right corner of the game board 13, a pasting space K1 is provided for pasting a certificate stamp, identification label, etc. 35 (see FIG. 1).

The game board 13 is provided with a first outlet 71. Balls flowing down the gaming area that do not win in any of the winning ports 63, 64, 65a, 640, and 82 are guided through the first out port 71 to a ball discharge path (not shown). Ru. The first out port 71 is arranged below the first ball entry port 64.

A large number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the balls, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are also arranged.

As shown in FIG. 3, the back side of the pachinko machine 10 is mainly provided with control board units 90, 91 and a back pack unit 94. The control board unit 90 is formed into a unit by mounting a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp controller 113), and a display control board (display controller 114). The control board unit 91 is formed into a unit by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a firing control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 is made up of a back pack 92 forming a protective cover portion and a dispensing unit 93. In addition, each control board includes an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, and a controller used for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit and the like are installed as necessary.

The main control device 110, the audio lamp control device 113, the display control device 114, the payout control device 111, the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base, and the box base and box cover are connected to each other to accommodate each control device and each board.

Further, the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) have a box base and a box cover connected in an unopenable manner (caulking structure) by a sealing unit (not shown). connection). Furthermore, a seal (not shown) is affixed to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover, spanning the box base and the box cover. This seal is made of a brittle material, and if you try to peel off the seal to open the board boxes 100, 102 or forcefully open the board boxes 100, 102, the box base side and box cover It is cut into two sides. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100, 102 have been opened.

The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opening upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a tank rail 131 located downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side, and a dispensing device 133 provided at the most downstream part of the case rail 132 and dispensing balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 4). ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the payout device 133 pays out the required number of balls as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to eliminate the ball jam (return to normal state) when a dispensing error occurs, such as a ball jam in the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 4), for example. The operating knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to its initial state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 4, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data etc. when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are built-in. In the main control device 110, the MPU 201 performs main processing of the pachinko machine 10, such as jackpot lottery, display settings on the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results on the second symbol display device. Execute.

In addition, in order to instruct sub-control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the audio lamp control device 113 to operate, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub-control devices by the data transmission/reception circuit. Such commands are sent in only one direction from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers.

In addition to various areas, counters, and flags, the RAM 203 has a stack area where the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, and various flags, counters, I/O, etc. It has a work area (work area) in which values are stored. Note that the RAM 203 is configured to be able to retain (back up) data by being supplied with backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

When the power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power outage or the like, the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of the power cutoff (including when the power cut occurs; the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including power-on due to resolution of a power outage; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off, based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by a main process (not shown) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed during a startup process (not shown) when the power is turned on. Note that the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power outage signal SG1 from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to a power outage, etc., and the power outage signal SG1 is input to the MPU 201. When input to , NMI interrupt processing (not shown) as processing during a power outage is immediately executed.

An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 includes the payout control device 111, the audio lamp control device 113, the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B, the second symbol display device, the second symbol holding lamp, and the lower side of the opening/closing plate 65f of the variable winning device 65. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for opening/closing to the right side and a solenoid for driving electric accessories is connected as a shaft, and the MPU 201 issues various commands and commands to these via the input/output port 205. Send control signals.

The input/output port 205 also includes various switches 208 including a switch group (not shown) and a sensor group including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotational position detection sensor R, and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 (described later) provided in the power supply device 115. is connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is a calculation device, has a ROM 212 that stores control programs executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

Like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, the RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal register of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , and a work area (work area) in which values such as I/O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, similar to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured so that a power outage signal SG1 is input from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power outage, etc., and the power outage signal SG1 is When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (not shown) is immediately executed as processing during a power outage.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like. Further, although not shown, a prize ball detection switch for detecting paid-out prize balls is connected to the payout control device 111. Note that the prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but not to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotational operation of the operating handle 51 when the main controller 110 issues an instruction to launch the ball. . The ball firing unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on the condition that the firing stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation operation (rotation position) of the handle 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operating handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 controls the output of audio from an audio output device (such as a speaker not shown) 226, the output of turning on and off a lamp display device (illumination sections 29 to 33, display lamps 34, etc.) 227, and the output of fluctuation effects (fluctuation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114, such as display) and preview presentation. The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 222 that stores control programs executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, display control device 114, audio output device 226, lamp display device 227, other devices 228, frame button 22, etc. are connected to the input/output port 225, respectively. Other devices 228 include drive motors 420, 530, 630.

The audio lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and uses the determined display mode as a command. The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). In addition, the audio lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81, or changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the content of the time presentation. When the stage is changed, a back image change command including information regarding the changed stage is sent to the display control device 114 in order to display a back image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is the main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to commands sent from the audio lamp control device 113.

The audio lamp control device 113 also receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the audio lamp control device 113 outputs a sound corresponding to the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the audio output device 226, and The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 is controlled in accordance with the displayed content.

The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and controls the variation effects of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81 based on commands received from the voice ramp control device 113. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command to notify the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 to the audio lamp control device 113. The audio lamp control device 113 matches the display of the third symbol display device 81 with the audio output from the audio output device 226 by outputting audio from the audio output device 226 in accordance with the display content indicated by this display command. be able to.

The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, etc., and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). It has an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply section 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power path (not shown). As an overview, the power supply section 251 takes in an AC 24 volt voltage supplied from the outside, and generates a 12 volt voltage for driving various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc. are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are used to supply necessary voltages to each control device 110 to 114, etc.

The power outage monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power outage signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the dispensing control device 111 when the power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power outage or the like. The power outage monitoring circuit 252 monitors a stable DC voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power outage (power outage, power interruption) has occurred when this voltage becomes less than 22 volts. Then, a power outage signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the dispensing control device 111. By outputting the power outage signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the dispensing control device 111 recognize the occurrence of a power outage and execute NMI interrupt processing. Note that even after the stable DC voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 continues to output the 5 volt voltage, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient time to execute the NMI interrupt processing. is configured to maintain normal values. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data and sends a payout initialization command to the payout control device 111 to clear the backup data. It is transmitted to the device 111.

Next, a schematic configuration of the operating unit 200 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 to 8. 5 is a front perspective view of the operating unit 200, and FIG. 6 is an exploded front perspective view of the operating unit 200. Moreover, FIGS. 7 and 8 are front views of the operation unit 200.

In addition, FIG. 7 shows a state in which the rotating body lifting unit 300 is placed in the lowered position, and the central rotating unit 500, right rotating unit 600, and left rotating unit 700 are respectively placed in the extended position. A state is shown in which the body lifting unit 300 is placed at the raised position, and the central rotation unit 500, right rotation unit 600, and left rotation unit 700 are placed at the retracted position.

As shown in FIGS. 5 to 8, the operation unit 200 includes a back case 210 formed in a box shape, and in the inner space of the back case 210, a rotating body lifting unit 300 is arranged below to emit light upward. A decoration unit 400 and a central rotation unit 500 are provided, and a right rotation unit 600 and a left rotation unit 700 are provided on the left and right sides, respectively.

The back case 210 is a box that includes a bottom wall 211 and an outer wall 212 erected from the outer edge of the bottom wall 211, and one side (front left side in the paper of FIG. 6) is open by each of these walls 211 and 212. formed into a shape. A rectangular opening 211a is formed in the center of the bottom wall portion 211 of the back case 210, and the back case 210 is formed into a rectangular frame shape when viewed from the front. The opening 211a is formed in a size that corresponds to the outer shape of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) (that is, allows the third symbol display device 81 to be disposed therein).

The rotating body lifting/lowering unit 300 includes a box-shaped container 330 in which a plurality of (three in this embodiment) are arranged in parallel in the width direction, and a plurality (in this embodiment, two) of box-shaped containers 330 accommodated in each container 330 respectively. ) (a first rotating body 340a and a second rotating body 340b).

The plurality of containers 330 are each formed to be able to move up and down in the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIGS. 7 and 8). In this case, in the lowered position (see FIG. 7), the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are arranged on the back side of the game board 13 and are not visible to the player. On the other hand, in the raised position (see FIG. 8), the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are raised to the opening of the game board 13 (center frame 86), and are visible to the player through the opening. be done.

The first rotary body 340a and the second rotary body 340b are rotatably supported by the housing body 330, and as a result of their rotation, a plurality of (three in this embodiment) figures drawn on the outer peripheral surface are sequentially visible to the player. let Note that the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are formed as columnar bodies with a triangular cross section, and different shapes are drawn on three surfaces of the outer periphery.

In this embodiment, the drive source for the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b is shared by one drive motor 350, and while it is possible to reduce parts costs, the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body By making the combinations of the figures 340b changeable, a total of nine combinations can be visually recognized by the player (see FIG. 20). Note that details will be described later.

The light emitting decoration unit 400 mainly includes a base body 410 and a light emitting device 420 disposed in the center of the base body 410, and emits light from a plurality of LEDs 421 disposed inside the light emitting device 420. By changing the mode (for example, the number of LEDs 421 to emit light), a light emission effect is performed. Note that details will be described later.

The central rotation unit 500 includes a back base 510 and a pair of displacement members 530 whose base ends are rotatably supported by the back base 510, and is disposed on the back side of the light emitting decoration unit 400. The pair of displacement members 530 have an overhang position (see FIG. 7) that overhangs into the opening of the game board 13 (center frame 86), and a retracted position toward the back side of the light-emitting decoration unit 400 so that they are no longer visible to the player. It is rotated between the retracted position (see FIG. 8). Note that details will be described later.

The right rotation unit 600 includes a base body (a back base 610 and a front base 620) disposed in front of the front base 315 of the rotating body lifting unit 300, and a displacement unit whose base end side is rotatably supported by the base body. members (a first displacement member 630 and a second displacement member 640). On the other hand, the left rotation unit 700 has a base body (a back base 610 and a front base 620) disposed in front of the front base 317 of the rotary body lifting unit 300, and a proximal end thereof is rotatably supported by the base body. displacement members (first displacement member 630 and second displacement member 640). Each displacement member has an overhang position (see FIG. 7) in which it protrudes into the opening of the game board 13 (center frame 86), and a retracted position (in which it is retracted to the back side of the game board 13 and is invisible to the player). (see Figure 8). Note that details will be described later.

Next, detailed configurations of the rotating body lifting unit 300, the light emitting decoration unit 400, the central rotating unit 500, the right rotating unit 600, and the left rotating unit 700 will be described with reference to FIGS. 9 to 60. First, the detailed configuration of the rotating body lifting/lowering unit 300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 9 to 22.

FIG. 9 is a front view of the rotating body elevating unit 300. Further, FIG. 10 is an exploded front perspective view of the rotating body elevating unit 300, and FIG. 11 is an exploded rear perspective view of the rotating body elevating unit 300.

As shown in FIGS. 9 to 11, the rotating body elevating unit 300 includes a central unit 300C for elevating the central container 330, and a left unit 300L and a right unit 300R for elevating the left and right containers 330, respectively. It is formed from three units. The left unit 300L is stacked on the front side of the center unit 300C, and the right unit 300R is connected to the right end of the center unit 300C, so that three containers 330 are arranged in parallel in the width direction.

Here, detailed configurations of the central unit 300C, left unit 300L, and right unit 300R will be described with reference to FIGS. 12 to 19. First, the central unit 300C will be explained with reference to FIGS. 12 and 13. FIG. 12 is an exploded front perspective view of the central unit 300C, and FIG. 13 is an exploded rear perspective view of the central unit 300C.

As shown in FIGS. 12 and 13, the central unit 300C includes a back base 311 that is L-shaped in front view, a front base 312 that is overlapped on the front side of the back base 311, and a front base 312 that is overlapped on the front side of the front base 312. A drive motor 320 is provided, a storage body 330 that is raised and lowered with respect to the back base 311 and the front base 312 by the driving force of the drive motor 320, and a first rotating body 340a and a first rotary body 340a housed in the housing body 330. It mainly includes two rotating bodies 340b and a transmission mechanism that is housed between opposing surfaces of the back base 311 and the front base 312 and transmits the driving force of the drive motor 320 to the housing body 330.

The transmission mechanism in the central unit 300C includes a drive gear 321 fixed to a drive shaft of a drive motor 320, a transmission gear 322 meshed with the drive gear 321, and a pinion gear 323 meshed with the transmission gear 322. A rack gear 324 is meshed with the pinion gear 323 and is formed as a rack with gears cut on the side surface of a flat plate-like member, and the rack gear 324 is disposed on one side and a storage body 330 is disposed on the other side. A connecting member 325 is provided.

A pair of shafts protrudes from the front of the rear base 311, and a transmission gear 322 and a pinion gear 323 are rotatably supported on each of these shafts. In addition, slide guides 351 and 352 are arranged in parallel on the front of the rear base 311 with the guiding direction being the up-down direction (the up-down direction in FIG. 12). ) and the container 330 are guided in the vertical direction. That is, the moving direction of the connecting member 325 and the container 330 is restricted in the vertical direction.

Therefore, when the rotational driving force of the drive motor 320 is transmitted to the pinion gear 323 via the drive gear 321 and the transmission gear 322, and the pinion gear 323 is rotated, the rotational motion of the pinion gear 323 is converted into the linear motion of the rack gear 324. With the linear movement of the rack gear 324, the container 330 is vertically displaced (elevated) together with the connecting member 325 (see FIGS. 7 and 8).

In this case, the connecting member 325 connects the vertically elongated portion where the rack gear 324 is disposed and the vertically elongated portion where the container 330 is disposed at their lower end sides with the horizontally elongated portion. It is formed in a U-shape when viewed from the front. As a result, even if the left container 330 is placed in the lowered position and the center container 330 is placed in the raised position, the horizontally elongated portion of the connecting member 325 can be positioned on the back surface of the front base 312. , it is possible to avoid being visually recognized by the player.

Note that the slide guide 351 is a linear guide consisting of a guide groove formed on the front surface of the back base 311 and a sliding body that is formed to be slidable along the guide groove and is fixed to the back surface of the connecting member 325. Formed as a mechanism. The same applies to a left unit 300L and a right unit 300R, which will be described later. Further, the slide guide 352 includes a first rail fixed to the back base 311, a second rail fixed to the connecting member 325 or the container 330, and a slide guide 352 interposed between the first rail and the second rail. It is formed as a telescoping linear guide mechanism consisting of an intermediate rail for allowing relative displacement in the longitudinal direction.

Here, since the left container 330 is arranged side by side (left side in FIG. 12) of the center container 330 (see FIG. 9), the width of the connecting member 325 (in the left-right direction in FIG. ) dimensions become longer. Furthermore, as described above, since the horizontally elongated portion is interposed to avoid visual recognition from the player, the connecting member 325 is formed into a U-shape when viewed from the front, and its rigidity is reduced. Therefore, the posture of the central container 330 tends to become unstable (swings in the left-right direction tend to occur).

In contrast, in this embodiment, a telescopic linear guide mechanism (slide guide 352) is provided on the back side of the central container 330, so that the central container 330 is placed in the raised position. However, the extended slide guide 352 can restrict the swinging in the left-right direction and stabilize the posture of the central storage body 330. On the other hand, when the central container 330 is placed in the lowered position (see FIG. 9), the slide guide 352 can be shortened to avoid being seen by the player.

Next, the left unit 300L will be explained with reference to FIGS. 14 and 15. FIG. 14 is an exploded front perspective view of the left unit 300L, and FIG. 15 is an exploded rear perspective view of the left unit 300L.

As shown in FIGS. 14 and 15, the left unit 300L includes a back base 313 that is vertically elongated when viewed from the front and is disposed in front of the front base 312 (see FIG. 12) of the central unit 300C; An intermediate base 314 stacked on the front side, a front base 315 stacked on the front side of the intermediate base 314, a drive motor 320 disposed on the back side of the intermediate base 314, and a driving force of the drive motor 320. A housing body 330 that is raised and lowered relative to each base 313 to 315 by the housing body 330, a first rotating body 340a and a second rotating body 340b housed in the housing body 330, and a housing body 330 housed between the opposing surfaces of each base 313 to 315. and a transmission mechanism that transmits the driving force of the drive motor 320 to the housing body 330.

The transmission mechanism in the left unit 300L includes a drive gear 321 fixed to the drive shaft of a drive motor 320, transmission gears 322a and 322b meshed with the drive gear 321, and a pinion gear 323 coaxially fixed to the transmission gear 322b. , a rack gear 324 that is meshed with the pinion gear 323 and formed as a rack with gears cut on the side surface of a flat member, and a connecting member 326 that connects the rack gear 324 to the housing 330.

A shaft is provided protruding from the front of the intermediate base 314, and the transmission gear 322a is rotatably supported on the shaft. Further, a shaft support hole is bored in the intermediate base 314, and the transmission gear 322b and the pinion gear 323 are coaxially fixed and rotatably supported in the shaft support hole.

A slide guide 351 is disposed on the front of the rear base 313 with the guiding direction being in the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 14), and the connecting member 326 (rack gear 324) is guided in the vertical direction by this slide guide 351. . Furthermore, a guide plate 353 is fastened and fixed to the front of the front base 312 (see FIG. 12) of the central unit 300. A guide groove 353a, which is an elongated opening, is provided in the guide plate 353 and extends in the vertical direction. Interpolated. Therefore, the container 330 is guided in the vertical direction along the guide groove 353a of the guide plate 353. That is, the moving direction of the connecting member 326 and the container 330 is restricted in the vertical direction.

Therefore, when the rotational driving force of the drive motor 320 is transmitted to the pinion gear 323 via the drive gear 321 and the transmission gears 322a and 322b, and the pinion gear 323 is rotated, the rotational movement of the pinion gear 323 is converted into the linear movement of the rack gear 324. With the linear movement of the rack gear 324, the container 330 is vertically displaced (raised and lowered) together with the connecting member 326 (see FIGS. 7 and 8).

Next, the right unit 300R will be explained with reference to FIG. 16. FIG. 16 is an exploded front perspective view of the right unit 300R.

As shown in FIG. 16, the right unit 300L includes a rear base 316 which is formed in a substantially L-shape from the front and is connected to the right end of the rear base 311 (see FIG. 12) of the central unit 300C; A front base 317 overlapped with the front side of the rear base 313, a drive motor 320 disposed on the front side of the front base 317, and a drive force of the drive motor 320 to move up and down with respect to the rear base 316 and the front base 317. A first rotary body 340a and a second rotary body 340b housed in the housing body 330 are housed between the facing surfaces of the rear base 316 and the front base 317, and accommodate the driving force of the drive motor 320. It mainly includes a transmission mechanism for transmitting information to the body 330.

The transmission mechanism in the right unit 300R includes a drive gear 321 fixed to the drive shaft of a drive motor 320, a pinion gear 323 meshed with the drive gear 321, and a flat plate-shaped member meshed with the pinion gear 323. It includes a rack gear 324 formed as a rack with gears cut on its side, and a connecting member 327 that connects the rack gear 324 to a housing 330.

A shaft is provided protruding from the front surface of the rear base 316, and a pinion gear 323 is rotatably supported on this shaft. A slide guide 351 is disposed on the front of the rear base 316 with the guiding direction being in the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 16), and the connecting member 327 (rack gear 324) is guided in the vertical direction by this slide guide 351. . Further, in the front base 316, a guide groove 316a, which is an elongated hole-shaped opening, is provided extending along the vertical direction. (not shown). Therefore, the container 330 is guided in the vertical direction along the guide groove 316a of the back base 316. That is, the moving direction of the connecting member 327 and the container 330 is restricted in the vertical direction.

Therefore, when the rotational driving force of the drive motor 320 is transmitted to the pinion gear 323 via the drive gear 321 and the pinion gear 323 is rotated, the z of the pinion gear 323 is converted into the linear motion of the rack gear 324, and the rotation of the rack gear 324 is Along with the linear movement, the container 330 is vertically displaced (elevated) together with the connecting member 327 (see FIGS. 7 and 8).

As described above, in the central unit 300C, the width dimension of the connecting member 325 becomes long (see FIG. 12), and the posture of the central container 330 tends to become unstable (swinging in the left-right direction tends to occur). On the other hand, in the left unit 300L and right unit 300R, since the rack gear 323 is provided at a position close to the side surface of the left housing body 330 and the right housing body 330, the width of the connecting members 326, 327 (Figs. 14 and 16 The rigidity can be increased by shortening the horizontal (left and right) dimensions. Therefore, it is possible to stabilize the postures of the left and right containers 330 (make them difficult to swing in the left-right direction).

Accordingly, there is no need to provide a telescopic linear guide mechanism (slide guide 352) on the back side of the left and right containers 330, and the guide plate 353 or the guide grooves 353a, 316a of the back base 316 can be used for guidance. The posture can be sufficiently stabilized. As a result, parts costs can be reduced.

Next, the container 330 and the first rotating body 340a and second rotating body 340b accommodated in the container 330 will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 to 19.

FIG. 17 is an exploded front perspective view of the container 330. 18(a) is a side view of the container 330 as seen in the direction of arrow XVIIIa in FIG. 17, and FIG. 18(b) is a front view of the container 330 as seen in the direction of arrow XVIIIb in FIG. 18(a). It is. Note that FIGS. 18(a) and 18(b) illustrate a state in which the side wall body 332, the partition wall body 334, and the decorative body 335 are removed.

As shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, the container 330 includes a base body 331, left and right side walls 332 and 333 disposed on the left and right sides of the base body 331, and an inner surface of the left side wall body 332. The main body 331 has a partition wall body 334 and a decorative body 335 disposed on the front surface of the base body 331, and these parts 331 to 335 are integrated by fastening and fixing to form a box shape.

The base body 331 is a member that forms the back surface (the back side of the page in FIG. 18(b)), the upper surface, and the lower surface (the upper side and the lower side in FIG. 18(b)) of the container 330, and is made by combining three plate-shaped members. It is formed in one piece. A reflection section RF formed as a mirror that reflects visible light is disposed on the front side of a portion forming the back surface of the container 330 .

The reflecting portion RF is formed in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and has a size that projects from the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b at least in the vertical direction when viewed from the front. (See FIG. 18(b)).

The side wall bodies 332 and 333 are rectangular plate-shaped members that form the left and right side surfaces of the housing body 330, and are provided with holding holes 332a and 333a at two locations, respectively. The holding holes 332a and 333a are holes through which fixed shafts 341 of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b, which will be described later, are inserted, and hold the fixed shafts 341 non-rotatably. Note that the holding holes 332a and 333a have a cross-sectional shape perpendicular to the axis of the inner circumferential surface of the holding holes 332a, 333a, which is a circular shape with one section separated by connecting two points on the circumference with a straight line removed.

The partition wall body 334 is a rectangular plate-shaped member having substantially the same external shape as the side wall body 332, and rotatably supports the transmission gear 352 and the intermediate gear 354 between surfaces facing the side wall body 332. Further, the partition wall body 334 is provided with two insertion holes 334a through which the first gear 353 and the second gear 355 are inserted.

The decoration body 335 is a member that decorates the front side of the housing body 330, and is formed into a frame shape when viewed from the front by forming a rectangular opening 335a in the center. The player can visually confirm the rotation mode of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b and the figures drawn on the outer peripheral surfaces of both the rotating bodies 340a and 340b through the opening 335 (see FIG. 9). ).

The container 330 formed in this manner includes a drive motor 350 disposed on the partition wall 334, a first rotating body 340a and a second rotating body 340b rotated by the driving force of the drive motor 350, and a driving motor 350. A transmission mechanism that transmits the driving force of the motor 350 to the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b, and a detection mechanism that detects the rotational position of the first rotating body 340a are mainly housed.

The transmission mechanism in the housing 330 includes a drive gear 351 fixed to the drive shaft of a drive motor 350, a transmission gear 352, a first gear 353, an intermediate gear 354, and a second gear 355 that mesh with the drive gear 351 in this order. A gear train consisting of: The transmission gear 352 and the intermediate gear 354 are rotatably held between the opposing surfaces of the side wall body 332 and the partition wall body 334, and the first gear 353 and the second gear 355 are connected to the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b. Each is fixed to the axial end face.

Here, with reference to FIG. 19, detailed configurations of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b will be described. FIG. 19 is an exploded front perspective view of the first rotating body 340a.

Note that the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b have substantially the same configuration except that the shapes drawn on the outer circumferential surfaces are different. Therefore, in the following, the first rotating body 340a will be used as a representative example. The second rotating body 340b will be explained as follows, and the explanation of the second rotating body 340b will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 19, the first rotating body 340a includes a fixed shaft 341, a pair of end plates 342 rotatably supported at both axial ends (shaft portions 341a) of the fixed shaft 341, and It mainly includes three display boards (a first display board 343A, a second display board 343B, and a third display board 343C) installed between the end plates 342.

The fixed shaft 341 includes a body portion 341b and a shaft portion 341a connected to both ends of the body portion 341b in the axial direction. The fixed shaft 341 is a part that is non-rotatably held by the side walls 332, 333 (see FIG. 17) of the container 330, and connects a pair of shaft parts 341a located at both ends in the axial direction and a pair of shaft parts 341a. A body portion 341b is provided.

The shaft portion 341a has a cross-sectional shape perpendicular to its axis that is a circular shape that is divided by connecting two points on the circumference with a straight line and removing one section (a shape in which a part of the outer circumferential surface of a cylinder is chamfered with a flat surface). The holding holes 332a, 333a (see FIG. 17) of the side wall bodies 332, 333 have a similar shape, which is slightly smaller. Therefore, by inserting the shaft portion 341a into the holding holes 332a, 333a of the side walls 332, 333, the fixed shaft 341 can be held non-rotatably in the housing 330 (side walls 332, 333).

A plurality of (four in this embodiment) LEDs 344 are attached to the body portion 341b, and the light emitted from the LEDs 344 can be irradiated onto the inner surfaces of the first display board 343A to the third display board 343C.

In this case, when the shaft 341a of the body 341b is inserted into the holding holes 332a, 333a of the side walls 332, 333 and is held unrotatably, the irradiation direction of the LED 344 is directed to the front surface of the container 330 (the decorative body 335). The opening 335a is arranged in a posture (rotated position) facing the opening 335a (the surface on the near side of the paper in FIG. 18(b)). Therefore, it is possible to irradiate the light emitted from the LED 344 onto the inner surface of the display board located on the front side of the container 330 (the "visible position" to be described later) among the first display board 343A to the third display board 343C. can.

Note that the fixed shaft 341 (shaft portion 341a, body portion 341b) is formed in a hollow cylindrical shape with both ends opened in the axial direction, so the internal space is used to route the wiring of the LED 344 and to route the wiring around the axis. It can be drawn out of the container 330 from the opening at the end. Further, as described above, the fixed shaft 341 cannot rotate with respect to the housing 330, so even if the first rotating body 340a is rotated, no external force such as twisting or pulling will act on the wiring of the LED 344. can be avoided.

The end plate 342 is a member formed in a triangular shape when viewed from the front, and a shaft support hole 342a having a circular cross section perpendicular to the axis is bored in the center. The inner diameter of the shaft support hole 342a is set to be slightly larger than the outer diameter of the shaft portion 341a of the fixed shaft 341. Therefore, by inserting the shaft portion 341a into the shaft support hole 342a, the end plate 342 is rotatably supported with respect to the fixed shaft 341. Thereby, the end plate 342 is rotatably held inside the container 330 via the fixed shaft 341.

Here, since the body 341b of the fixed shaft 341 is formed to have a larger diameter than the shaft 341a, the end plate 342 is formed between the side walls 332, 333 of the housing 330 and the body 341b of the fixed shaft 341. The axial position can be defined, and the fixed shaft 341 can be held between the pair of side walls 332 and 333 via the end plate 342.

A first gear 353 of the transmission mechanism is fixed to one of the pair of end plates 342, and a base gear 361 of the detection mechanism, which will be described later, is fixed to the other. In addition, although the second gear 355 of the transmission mechanism is fixed to one of the pair of end plates 342 of the second rotating body 340b, the attachment of the base gear 361 to the other side is omitted (see FIG. 17 and FIG. (see 18).

The first display board 343A to the third display board 343C are plate-shaped members each having a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and by connecting the outer edges at both ends in the longitudinal direction to the outer edges (three sides) of the end face plate 342, a pair of It is installed between the end plates 342, and forms a triangular prism-shaped body together with the end plates 342.

Each of the first to third display plates 343A to 343C has a figure drawn on its outer surface. Therefore, when the triangular prism body is rotated, the figures drawn on the outer surfaces of the respective display boards 343A to 343C are sequentially made visible to the player through the opening 335a of the decoration body 335.

At least a portion of the outer surface of the first display panel 343A to the third display panel 343C is curved into an outwardly convex arc shape when viewed in the axial direction of the fixed shaft 341. As a result, as will be described later, even if there is a deviation of a predetermined rotation angle (for example, 12 degrees) in the rotational position between the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b, each display plate 343A It is possible to make it difficult for the player who visually recognizes the figure drawn on the outer surface of ~343C to recognize the deviation of the predetermined rotation angle.

Note that in this embodiment, when viewed in the axial direction of the fixed shaft 341, the widthwise ends of the first display plate 343A to the third display plate 343C are curved in an arc shape convex outward; The center portion in the width direction is formed into a substantially flat surface. Thereby, it is possible to achieve both ensuring the visibility of the figure and making it difficult to recognize the deviation between the rotating bodies 340a and 340b. In addition, the radius of the arc of the curved arc-shaped portion is set to a value larger than the maximum distance from the axis of the fixed shaft 341 to the outer surface of each display panel 343A to 343C (for example, twice or more and four times below).

Here, in the following, the front surface of the container 330 (the surface on the near side of the paper in FIG. 18(b)) is used as the arrangement position of the first display plate 343A to the third display plate 343C when the triangular prism body is rotated. The position where the figure drawn on the outer surface is visible to the player through the opening 335a of the decoration body 335 is referred to as the "visible position". The position where the figure drawn on the outer surface is not visible to the player through the opening 335a of the decorative body 335 is referred to as the "shielding position".

Therefore, for example, when the first display board 343A is placed at the visible position, the second display board 343B and the third display board 343C are placed at the shielding position (see FIGS. 18(a) and 18(b)). . When the triangular prism-shaped body is rotated by 120 degrees in the forward or reverse direction from this state, one of the second display plate 343B or the third display plate 343C is placed in the visible position, and the second display plate 343B or the third display plate The other of the plates 343C and the first display plate 343A are arranged at a shielding position.

In this case, in this embodiment, the first display plate 343A is formed in a form that does not transmit light in its entirety, while the second display plate 343B and the third display plate 343C have a transmitting portion PN through which light can pass. It is formed with a part of it. Further, a reflecting portion RF formed as a mirror that reflects visible light is provided on the inner surface of the first display plate 343A.

As described above, the LED 344 is arranged at a position where it can illuminate the inner surface of the display board located at the visible position of the first display board 343A to the third display board 343C. Therefore, when the second display board 343B or the third display board 343C is placed at the visible position, the light emitted from the LED 344 is transmitted through the transparent part PN of each display board 343B, 343C and is directly visible to the player. can be done.

On the other hand, when the first display board 343A is placed at the visible position (see FIGS. 18(a) and 18(b)), the light emitted from the LED 344 is The light is reflected by the reflective part RF of the base 331 of the container 330, and then reflected by the reflective part RF of the base 331 of the container 330. This can be indirectly visually recognized by the player.

For example, by stopping the first rotating body 340a at a rotational position where the first display plate 343A is placed at a visible position and causing the LED 344 to emit light, the reflected light reflected by the reflection part RF in the base body 331 of the container 330 is visually recognized. The player can be reminded of the figure on the second display board 343B or the third display board 343C, which is placed in a position that is invisible to the player (shielded position). This can make the player expect or suggest that the first rotating body 340a will be rotated to a position where the graphics on the second display board 343B or the third display board 343C are visible.

In particular, in this embodiment, since the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are formed with a triangular cross section, when each rotating body 340a, 340b is rotated, the reflection plate The distance between the RF and the outer surface of each rotating body 340a, 340b (each display board 343A to 343C), the distance between the outer surface of each rotating body 340a, 340b (vertical distance in FIG. 18(b)), or The apparent diameter of each rotating body 340a, 340b (vertical dimension in FIG. 18(b)) can be increased or decreased, and the outer surface of each rotating body 340a, 340b (each display plate 343A to 343C) is opposed to the reflector RF. The angle can be changed. That is, with the rotation of both rotating bodies 340a and 340b, the player who visually recognizes the light emitted from the LED 344 and irradiated from the transparent part PN as reflected light from the reflective part RF of the base 331, can see the reflected light. The aspect (for example, the size of the area where the light is visible) can be changed periodically.

The explanation will be given by returning to FIGS. 17 and 18. The detection mechanism includes a base gear 361 fixed to the end plate 342 of the first rotating body 340a, an intermediate gear 362 meshed with the base gear 361, and a gear meshed with the intermediate gear 362. The terminal gear 363 includes a detection plate 363a extending outward in the direction, and a sensor device 364 for detecting the detection plate 363a of the terminal gear 363.

The intermediate gear 362 and the terminal gear 363 are rotatably held by the side wall body 333, and the sensor device 364 is disposed on the base body 331 with the detection region disposed on the movement locus of the detection target plate 363a. Therefore, the sensor device 364 can detect the rotational position of the first rotating body 340a based on the detection state of the detection target plate 363a. That is, based on the detection results of the sensor device 364, the rotational positions of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b can be controlled (for example, stopped at arbitrary positions).

Next, the rotational operations of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b will be explained. When the drive motor 350 is rotated, the rotation is transmitted to the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b via the transmission mechanism, and both of these rotating bodies 340a and 340b are rotated.

Specifically, when the drive motor 350 rotates, the rotation is transmitted to the first gear 353 via the drive gear 351 and the transmission gear 352, and the first gear 353 is rotated. As a result, the first rotating body 340a is rotated. Further, when the first gear 353 is rotated, the rotation is transmitted to the second gear 355 via the intermediate gear 354, and the second gear 355 is rotated. Thereby, the second rotating body 340b is rotated in the same direction as the first rotating body 340a. Furthermore, when the rotation direction of the drive motor 350 is reversed, the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are rotated in the opposite direction to the above-described case.

As a result, the combination of the graphics of the first rotating body 340a and the graphics of the second rotating body 340b that are visually recognized by the player is sequentially changed. In this case, in the conventional product, the number of combinations of the shapes of both rotating bodies 340a and 340b was limited to three.

That is, since the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are rotationally driven synchronously by one drive motor, a possible combination is, for example, the first display plate 343A of the first rotating body 340a and the first display plate 343A of the first rotating body 340a. A first combination in which the first display plate 343A of the two rotating bodies 340b is placed at the display position, and the second display plate 343B of the first rotating body 340a and the second display plate 343B of the second rotating body 340b are placed at the display position. There were only three combinations: a second combination in which the third display plate 343C of the first rotating body 340a and a third display plate 343C of the second rotating body 340b are disposed at the display position.

On the other hand, by adopting a structure in which the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are rotated independently by different drive motors, it is possible to form up to nine combinations, and the combinations can be It can be made to appear arbitrarily. However, in this case, two drive motors are required, resulting in an increase in parts cost.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, while keeping the number of drive motors 350 to one, it is possible to form nine combinations of the shapes of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b, and the combinations can be It can be made to appear arbitrarily. Furthermore, in this embodiment, nine combinations can be quickly created by allowing a predetermined amount of deviation in the rotational positions without requiring the rotational positions of the first rotational body 340a and the second rotational body 340b to completely match. You can make it come out. The combination of the figures of both rotating bodies 340a and 340b will be explained with reference to FIGS. 20 and 21.

FIG. 20 is a table showing combinations of figures of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b. 21 and 22 are schematic side views of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b showing transition states when the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are rotated. (a) to FIG. 21(e) are shown in FIG. 22(a) to 22(e) are in the states shown as No. 1 to 5 in FIG. They correspond to the states shown as 6 to 10, respectively.

In addition, in FIG. 20, as a combination of the figures of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b, the state in which the first display plate 343A is placed at the visible position is indicated by the symbol "A" or "A'". The state where the second display board 343B is placed at the visible position is indicated by the symbol "B" or "B'", and the state where the third display board 343C is located at the visible position is indicated by the symbol "C" or "C'", respectively. be done.

For example, No. 20 in FIG. 10 "A, C'" is a state in which the first display plate 343A of the first rotating body 340a and the third display plate 343C of the second rotating body 340b are respectively arranged at visible positions, and the first rotating body A figure drawn on the first display board 343A from 340a and a figure drawn on the third display board 343C from the second rotating body 340b respectively correspond to the state that is visually recognized by the player.

In addition, in FIG. 21, in order to simplify the drawing and make it easier to understand, the first display plate 343A to the third display plate 343C of the first rotating body 340a are denoted by “A to C”, and the second The first to third display plates 343A to 343C of the rotating body 340b are illustrated using symbols "A' to C'," respectively.

Here, the numbers of teeth of the first gear 353 and second gear 355 fixed to the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are set to different values. In this embodiment, the number of teeth of the first gear 353 is 14 and the number of teeth of the second gear 355 is 20. When the first rotating body 340a is rotated 120 degrees, the second rotating body 340b is rotated 108 degrees. It is formed to

No. 20 in FIG. 1 and FIG. 21(a), from the state where the first display plate 343A of the first rotating body 340a and the first display plate 343A of the second rotating body 340b are respectively arranged at the visible position (No. 1 in FIG. 20). 1 "A', A", first combination), when the first rotating body 340a is rotated 120 degrees and its second display plate 343B is placed in the visible position, No. 1 "A', A" in FIG. 2 and FIG. 21(b), the second rotating body 340b places the second display plate 343B at a visible position. Thereby, the second combination (No. 2 "B', B" in FIG. 20) can be formed.

In this case, since the second rotating body 340b rotates 108 degrees while the first rotating body 340a rotates 120 degrees, there is a difference (shift) of 12 degrees in the rotational position of the two, but each rotating body 340a , 340b from the direction perpendicular to the axis, it is difficult for the player to recognize the difference in rotation angle of 12 degrees. It can be recognized that the figures drawn on the outer surface of 343B are respectively arranged at visible positions (a second combination is formed).

In particular, in this embodiment, as described above, the outer surfaces of the first to third display plates 343A to 343C are curved in an outwardly convex arc shape when viewed in the axial direction of the fixed shaft 341. (that is, the surface on which the figures are drawn is curved along the rotational direction of each rotating body 340a, 340b), so that it is difficult for the player who looks straight at the figures drawn on the outer surface of each of these display boards 343A to 343C to , it may be difficult to recognize the difference (shift) in the rotational positions of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b.

No. 20 in FIG. When the first rotating body 340a is rotated 120 degrees from the state shown in No. 2 and FIG. 21(b) and the third display plate 343C is placed in the visible position, No. As shown in FIG. 3 and FIG. 21(c), the second rotating body 340b is arranged at a rotational position shifted from the first rotating body 340a. That is, in this state, a difference in rotation angle of 24 degrees is formed between the two, so the player is made to recognize the misalignment of the shapes (the combination is not established, No. 3 "-, C" in FIG. 20). be able to.

Similarly, No. 20 in FIG. 20 from the state shown in No. 4 and FIG. 21(d). 9 and the state shown in FIG. 22(d), the first rotating body 340a disposes each display plate 343A to 343C at a visible position every 120 degrees of rotation, while the second rotating body 340b is arranged at a position shifted from the rotational position of the first rotating body 340a. As a result, it is possible for the player to recognize the deviation of the figures (the combination is not established, No. 4 "-, A" to No. 9 "-, C" in FIG. 20).

No. 20 in FIG. 9 and FIG. 22(d) (No. 9 "-, C" in FIG. 20), when the first rotary body 340a is rotated 120 degrees and the first display plate 343A is placed in the visible position, as shown in FIG. 20 no. 10 and FIG. 22(e), the second rotating body 340b places the third display plate 343C at a visible position. As a result, the third combination (No. 10 "C', A" in FIG. 20) can be formed.

According to the present embodiment, the second rotation is performed even in the section where a figure deviation (the combination is not established, No. 3 "-, C" to No. 9 "-, C" in FIG. 20) is formed. Since the rotation of the body 340b can be continued and the figures visible to the player can be continuously switched, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict which figures will be combined in the third combination.

Thereafter, the process is substantially the same as that described above (rotation in the section from the state shown in No. 1 of FIG. 20 and FIG. 21(a) to the state shown in No. 9 of FIG. 20 and FIG. 22(e)). The aspect is repeated two more times to complete a cycle (the table is cycled from start to end).

In this case, No. 20 in FIG. 11～No. In the section of the state shown in FIG. 20, the phase of the first rotating body 340a in FIGS. 21 and 22 may be changed by 120 degrees, and the fourth combination (No. 11 "A', A fifth combination (No. 12 "B', C" in FIG. 20) and a sixth combination (No. 20 "C', B" in FIG. 20) can be formed.

Also, No. 20 in FIG. 21~No. In the section of the state shown in No. 30, the phase of the first rotating body 340a in FIGS. 21 and 22 may be changed by 240 degrees, and the seventh combination (No. 21 "A', C"), an eighth combination (No. 22 "B', A" in FIG. 20), and a ninth combination (No. 30 "C', C" in FIG. 20) can be formed.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the transmission mechanism that transmits the rotation of the drive motor 350 to each of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b includes a plurality of gears (drive gear 351 to second gear 355). The rotation of the drive motor 350 can be transmitted to the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b at different rotation ratios.

Thereby, the rotation period of the first rotating body 340a and the rotation period of the second rotating body 340b can be made different. As a result, even with only one drive motor 350, nine combinations of the shapes of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b can be formed, and the combinations can be arbitrarily changed (as desired). any combination can appear).

In addition, by forming the transmission mechanism as a gear train, it is possible to simplify the structure, reduce parts costs, improve durability and reliability, and ensure that each gear is always meshed. Therefore, by switching the rotation direction of the drive motor 350 between forward and reverse directions, the traveling direction of the table shown in FIG. 20 can be switched.

Therefore, for example, by proceeding through the table in FIG. 20 in the forward direction (downward in FIG. 20), the section (for example, No. 3 to No. 9 in FIG. 20) where a figure deviation (combination is not established) is formed is detected. Then, after or just before the third combination (No. 10 "C', A" in FIG. 20) appears, the rotation direction of the drive motor 350 is reversed, and the table in FIG. 20 is reversed. The series of actions of returning to the direction (upward in FIG. 20) can be repeated, thereby making it possible to create an effect that makes the player expect the third combination to appear.

Alternatively, for example, from the state in which the first combination (No. 1 "A', A" in FIG. 20) is formed, the ninth combination (No. 30 "C', C" in FIG. 20) is developed. In addition to advancing the table in FIG. 20 in the forward direction (downward in FIG. 20) to reveal the ninth combination, the table in FIG. 20 is also advanced in the reverse direction (upward in FIG. 20) It is also possible to proceed to , and to reveal a ninth combination. That is, in the former case, it is necessary to repeat the 120 degree rotation of the first rotating body 340a 30 times, whereas in the latter case, it is necessary to repeat the 120 degree rotation of the first rotating body 340a once. Since all you have to do is to do this, you can quickly create a desired combination of figures.

Here, in the case where the second rotating body 340b is rotated 60 degrees with respect to the 120 degree rotation of the first rotating body 340a (that is, the rotation of the second rotating body 340b is replaced by the rotation of the first rotating body 340a). On the other hand, when set to "1/integer" times), it is possible to form a plurality of combinations of figures without causing a difference (shift) in the rotational position of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b. I can do it. However, in this case, the maximum number of possible combinations of figures is three.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, as described above, the first, fourth and seventh combinations (No. 1 "A', A", No. 11 "A', B" and No. 1 in FIG. 20) are used. 21 "A', C"), in the remaining six combinations (second, third, fifth, sixth, eighth and ninth combinations), the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body A difference (shift) of a predetermined rotation angle is allowed to occur in the rotation position of 340b. This allows the number of possible combinations of figures to be nine.

That is, in a structure in which the first rotary body 340a and the second rotary body 340b are rotated by one drive motor 350, setting the number of possible combinations of shapes to nine means that the rotation of the drive motor 350 is rotated by the first rotary body 340a. This cannot be achieved simply by forming a transmission mechanism for transmitting data to each of the first and second rotating bodies 340b as a gear train. This became possible for the first time by allowing a difference (shift) in the predetermined rotation angle to occur. Thereby, it is possible to improve the performance effect by increasing the number of possible combinations of figures, and at the same time to suppress the required number of drive motors 350 and to reduce product costs.

In this case, a combination of figures (second, third, fifth, sixth, eighth, and ninth combination), the stopping positions at which the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are stopped may be corrected.

For example, in the second, fifth, and eighth combinations (No. 2 "B', B" in FIG. 20, No. 12 "B', C" and No. 22 "B', A"), FIG. As shown in (b), since the phase of the second rotating body 340b is delayed, the first rotating body 340a is stopped at a rotational position where the phase is advanced by a predetermined angle. That is, since the positional deviation from the reference plane is concentrated only in the second rotating body 340b, the first rotating body 340a is not stopped at a rotational position rotated by 120 degrees from the state shown in FIG. 21(a). , for example, to stop at a rotation position rotated by 126 degrees. Thereby, the positional deviation from the reference plane can be dispersed to the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b, thereby making it less noticeable.

Similarly, for example, in the third, sixth and ninth combinations (No. 10 "C', A", No. 20 "C', B" and No. 30 "C', C" in FIG. 20), , as shown in FIG. 22(e), since the second rotating body 340b is preceded in phase, the first rotating body 340a is stopped at a rotational position whose phase is delayed by a predetermined angle. That is, since the positional deviation from the reference plane is concentrated only in the second rotating body 340b, the first rotating body 340a is not stopped at a rotational position rotated by 120 degrees from the state shown in FIG. 22(d). , for example, to stop at a rotation position rotated by 114 degrees. Thereby, the positional deviation from the reference plane can be dispersed to the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b, thereby making it less noticeable.

As described above, the rotating body elevating unit 300 is formed so that each housing body 300 can be raised and lowered in the vertical direction, and in the lowered position (see FIG. 7), the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are moved up and down from the game board 13. It can be placed on the back of the player to make it invisible to the player. Therefore, a desired combination of the graphics of the first rotating body 340a and the graphics of the second rotating body 340b can be quickly displayed at the required timing.

That is, in this embodiment, since nine combinations of figures can be formed, the table becomes long (the number of stages of the table in FIG. 20 increases). It is necessary to rotate the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b relatively many times, and the time increases accordingly.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, by arranging each container 300 in the lowered position (see FIG. 7), the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b can be evacuated to a position where they are invisible to the player. I can do it. As a result, the rotation of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b can be rotated to a predetermined rotational position in advance without the player being aware of the rotation. When the timing has arrived, each container 300 is placed in the raised position (see FIG. 8), and the remaining rotations of the first rotary body 340a and the second rotary body 340b are performed to quickly create the desired combination. can be made to appear.

Note that the placement of each container 300 in the lowered position may be performed only when the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are rotated in a specific variation pattern. For example, in a variation pattern in which the time from the start of rotation of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b to the display of the result (stopping of rotation) is relatively short, each accommodation body 300 is not placed in the lowered position, and each While the rotation of the rotating bodies 340a, 340b is started and stopped at a position that is visible to the player, the time from the start of the rotation of each of the rotating bodies 340a, 340b to the display of the result (stopping of rotation) is relatively long. In the variation pattern, each rotating body 340a, 340b may be rotated in advance at a position that is invisible to the player.

In this case, in this embodiment, the preliminary rotation of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b in the lowered position is performed when a predetermined operating means is operated. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing the prior rotation of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b.

That is, when the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are rotated, a relatively loud sound is generated, so even if they are moved to the lowered position and are no longer visible to the player, the There is a possibility that the generated sound may make the player recognize that the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are being rotated in advance.

On the other hand, by rotating the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b when the predetermined operating means is operating, it is possible to incorporate the rotation into the operation. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the prior rotation of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b.

Note that, as the operating means, for example, the dispensing device 133, the audio output device 226, or the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 3 or FIG. 4) are exemplified. When these operating means are operated, a relatively loud sound is generated, for example, in conjunction with the discharging of the ball, the output of sound, or the firing of the ball. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the rotation of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b in advance.

In addition, instead of this, or in addition to this, when the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) is a predetermined effect, the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b It may also be possible to perform prior rotation. When the performance displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is a predetermined performance, since the player's consciousness can be concentrated on the predetermined performance, the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body This makes it difficult for the player to recognize the rotation of the body 340b in advance.

Next, the light emitting decoration unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 23 to 25. FIG. 23 is a front view of the light emitting decoration unit 400. 24 is an exploded front perspective view of the light emitting decoration unit 400, and FIG. 25 is an exploded rear perspective view of the light emitting decoration unit 400.

As shown in FIGS. 23 to 25, the light emitting decoration unit 400 includes a base body 410 that is horizontally rectangular in front view and is disposed on the bottom wall 211 of the rear case 210 (see FIG. 6), and a width of the base body 410. A light-emitting device 420 disposed at the front center in the direction, a light-shielding member 430 covered on the front surface of the light-emitting device 420, and a cover member 440 made of a light-transmitting material and covered on the front surface of the light-shielding member 430. The light emitting device 420 , the light shielding member 430 , and the cover member 440 are surrounded by peripheral decorative bodies 450 and 460 that are annular in front view.

On the front side of the light-emitting device 420, a plurality of (15 in this embodiment) light-emitting bodies (LEDs 421) are arranged in a distributed manner over the entire surface, and are formed to be able to irradiate light to the back surface of the light-shielding member 430. . Here, the light-shielding member 430 includes a main body 431 made of a light-shielding material (light-impermeable material), and partition walls 432 erected from the front and back sides of the main body 431.

The body portion 431 of the light shielding member 430 has a plurality of openings 431a (15 in this embodiment) that are circular in front view. These plurality of openings 431a are arranged at positions corresponding to each of the plurality of LEDs 421 of the light emitting device 420 when viewed from the front. Therefore, the light emitted from the LED 421 can pass through the opening 431a of the light shielding member 430 and reach the back surface of the cover 440.

The partition wall 432 is formed in an annular shape when viewed from the front and has a diameter smaller than that of the main body 431, and is arranged at a position eccentric from the center of the main body 431. As a result, the space between the light emitting device 420 and the cover body 440 is divided into a first space that is circular in front view surrounded by the partition wall 432 and a first space that is approximately crescent-shaped in front view and located on the outer peripheral side of the partition wall 431. It is divided into two spaces.

By forming the divisions by the division walls 431 in this manner, the outline of the light visible from the cover member 440 can be made clear. That is, when only the LED 421 in the first space emits light, a circular shape can be visually recognized, and when only the LED 421 in the second space emits light, a crescent moon shape can be visually recognized.

Next, the central rotation unit 500 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 26 to 28. FIG. 26(a) is a front view of the central rotation unit 500 in the retracted position, and FIG. 26(b) is a front view of the central rotation unit 500 in the extended position. . 27 is an exploded front perspective view of the central rotation unit 500, and FIG. 28 is an exploded rear perspective view of the central rotation unit 500.

As shown in FIGS. 26 to 28, the central rotation unit 500 includes a rear base 510 disposed on the bottom wall 211 (see FIG. 6) of the rear case 210, and a front surface overlapped with the front surface of the rear base 510. A base 520, a pair of displacement members 530 whose proximal ends are rotatably supported by the rear base 510 and the front base 520, and a drive motor 540 that generates a driving force to rotationally drive the displacement members 530. It mainly includes a transmission mechanism that transmits the driving force of the drive motor 540 to the displacement member 530.

Support holes 511 and 521 for rotatably supporting the base end side (rotation shaft 531) of the displacement member 530 are recessed in the front surface of the rear base 510 and the rear surface of the front base 520, respectively. Further, a support shaft 512 for rotatably supporting a crank gear 542 in the transmission mechanism is protruded from the front of the rear base 510.

The displacement member 530 is a member whose front face on the distal end side is decorated, and mainly includes a rotating shaft 531, a connecting gear 532, and a crank groove 533. As described above, the rotation shaft 531 is a shaft supported by the support holes 511 and 521 of the back base 510 and the front base 520, and is provided to protrude from the front and back surfaces of the displacing member 530 on the base end side.

The connecting gear 532 is a gear carved on the outer circumferential surface of the base end side of the displacement member 530 with the rotating shaft 531 as the center of rotation. When one displacement member 530 is rotated about the rotating shaft 531, the connecting gear 532 transmits the rotation to the other connecting gear 532 to rotate it. As a result, the other displacement member 530 is rotated about the rotating shaft 531.

The crank groove 533 is a linear groove in front view into which a connecting pin 542a of a crank gear 542 (described later) of the transmission mechanism is slidably inserted, and is one of the pair of displacement members 530 (left side in FIG. 27, left side in FIG. 28). It is recessed in the back surface of the displacement member 530 on the right side). As will be described later, the rotation of the crank gear 542 is transmitted to the crank groove 533 via the connecting pin 542a, thereby causing one displacement member 530 to rotate about the rotating shaft 531.

As described above, the transmission mechanism is a mechanism for transmitting the driving force of the drive motor 540 to the displacement member 530, and includes a pinion 541 fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 540 and a pinion 541 meshed with the pinion 541. It mainly includes a crank gear 542. The crank gear 542 includes a connecting pin 542a that projects at a position eccentric from its rotation center (support shaft 512) and is inserted into the crank groove 533 of the displacement member 530.

According to the central rotation unit 500 configured in this way, the rotation of the drive shaft of the drive motor 540 is transmitted to the crank gear 542 via the pinion 541, and when the crank gear 542 is rotated, the rotation of the drive shaft of the drive motor 540 is transmitted to the crank gear 542. With the rotation, the connecting pin 542a is displaced while drawing an arcuate trajectory, and the displacement of the connecting pin 542a acts on the inner wall surface of the crank groove 533, causing displacement of one side (the left side in FIG. 27 and the right side in FIG. 28). The member 530 is rotated about a rotating shaft 531 as a rotation center. In this case, the other displacement member 530 is also rotated synchronously via the coupling gear 532. As a result, the pair of displacement members 530 are retracted to the overhanging position (see FIGS. 7 and 26(a)) that overhangs into the opening of the game board 13 (center frame 86) and to the back of the light emitting decoration unit 400. It is possible to rotate between the retracted position (see FIG. 8 and FIG. 26(b)).

Next, the right rotation unit 600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 29 to 40. FIG. 29 is an exploded front perspective view of the right rotation unit 600, and FIGS. 30 and 31 are exploded rear perspective views of the right rotation unit 600. Note that FIG. 31 shows a partially assembled state of the right rotation unit 600.

As shown in FIGS. 29 to 31, the right rotation unit 600 includes a base body consisting of a back base 610 and a front base 620, and a first displacement unit disposed movably on the front side of the front base 620 of the base body. The member 630 and the second displacement member 640, the drive motor 650 that generates a driving force for displacing the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 640, and is disposed on the back surface of the rear base 610, and the drive motor 650 It mainly includes a transmission mechanism that transmits the driving force of the motor 650.

Part of the transmission mechanism (first pinion 651, rack member 652, and second pinion 653) is housed between the opposing surfaces of the rear base 610 and the front base 620. A bearing recess 621 for rotatably supporting the first pinion 651 is provided on the back surface of the front base 620, and a sliding groove of the rack member 652 is provided to define the moving direction of the rack member 652. A pair of insertion pins 622 are provided to protrude through 652a.

In addition, the front base 620 has shaft support holes 624 and 625 that are circular in front view and are formed through the front base 620 to rotatably support the rotation shaft 631 of the first displacement member 630 and the rotation shaft 654a of the transmission member 654, respectively. They are arranged in parallel at a predetermined interval in the width direction (short direction) of the front base 620.

Note that the shaft support hole 624 that pivotally supports the first displacement member 630 is located closer to the opening of the game board 13 (the extended position side of the first displacement member 630, FIG. 29) than the shaft support hole 625 that pivotally supports the transmission member 654. As will be described later, the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 640 can secure an overhang area toward the opening side of the game board 13 in the extended position, while at the retracted position The transmission member 654 can be easily hidden behind the first displacement member 630 between the and extended positions.

A protrusion 626 and a bearing portion 627 are provided on the front surface of the front base 620 in a protruding manner. The protrusion 626 is a horizontally long protrusion extending along the width direction of the front base 620, and has a substantially triangular cross section. The top of the protruding rim 626 is curved in an arc shape centered on the shaft support hole 624 when viewed from the front. When the second displacement member 640 (connection displacement member 642) is displaced, the tops of the protrusions 626 can be brought into contact, and as will be described later, compared to the case where the front surface of the front base 620 is in contact with the entire surface. In this way, the contact area can be reduced to suppress sliding resistance, and it is also possible to suppress the formation of fogging due to rubbing on the connecting displacement member 642 made of a light-transmitting material.

On the left side of the front base 620 when viewed from the front (the left side in FIG. 29, that is, the opening side of the game board 13), an inclined surface 620a is provided, which is formed by chamfering the side and front ridge lines thereof. . Therefore, as will be described later, when retracting to the retracted position, it is possible to prevent the second displacement member 640 (connected displacement member 642) from being locked to the side surface of the front base 620 and unable to be displaced (see FIG. 33).

The bearing portion 627 is formed as a cylindrical body concentric with the shaft support hole 624, and rotatably supports the rotating shaft 631 of the first displacement member 630 on its inner circumferential surface together with the shaft support hole 624. A protrusion 628 is formed radially outward from the outer peripheral surface of the bearing 627 and protrudes downward from the front base 620 . The protruding portion 628 can restrict the rotation of the first displacement member 630 within a predetermined range, and can also suppress forward tilting of the first displacement member 630. The details will be described later (see FIG. 40).

In this embodiment, the bearing recess 621 is provided on the back surface of the front base 620, so that the first pinion 651 is moved between the opposing surfaces of the rear base 610 and the front base 620 using the bearing recess 621. Can be held rotatably. Therefore, it is not necessary to fasten and fix the first pinion 651 to the drive shaft of the drive motor 650, so the number of parts can be reduced, and parts costs and assembly costs can be reduced.

On the other hand, when the bearing recess 621 is recessed in the back surface of the front base 620, the protruding portion 623 protrudes from the front surface of the front base 620 due to the recess formation. In this embodiment, since a part of the second displacement member 640 is pivotally supported on the distal end side of the first displacement member 630, when the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 640 are displaced, Although the second displacement member 640 may easily interfere with the protrusion portion 623, the protrusion 626 is formed to be able to suppress such interference. The details will be described later (see FIG. 39).

The transmission mechanism includes a first pinion 651 attached to the drive shaft of the drive motor 650, a second pinion 653 fastened and fixed to the rotating shaft 654a of the transmission member 654, and the first pinion 651 and the second pinion 653 have teeth. A rack member 652 is provided, which is formed as a rack in which a rack gear to be fitted is cut into a side surface of a flat member.

The rack member 652 includes two sliding grooves 652a extending along its longitudinal direction and having an elongated hole shape when viewed from the front, and a pair of insertion pins 622 of the front base 620 are inserted into each of these sliding grooves 652a. By doing so, the direction of movement is maintained in a defined state. That is, the rack member 652 is held between the opposing surfaces of the rear base 610 and the front base 620 so as to be capable of linear movement.

The transmission member 654 includes a rotating shaft 654a protruding from the back surface of one end, a driving pin 654b protruding from the front surface of the other end opposite to the rotating shaft 654a, and the rotating shaft 654a and the driving pin. The rotary shaft 654a is inserted into the shaft support hole 625, so that the shaft can be rotated to the front side of the front base 620. be supported.

The drive pin 654b is a shaft-like body with a circular cross section, and is inserted into a first groove 635 and a second groove 641b, which will be described later, of the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 640. The circular arc shape of the recessed notch 654c when viewed from the front is formed in a shape corresponding to the outer shape of the bearing portion 627 of the front base 620 (that is, a shape that allows the bearing portion 627 to be received on the inner peripheral side thereof).

Therefore, while the arrangement position of the rotation shaft 654a of the transmission member 654 is brought close to the arrangement position of the rotation shaft 631 of the first displacement member 630, interference with the bearing portion 627 of the front base 620 is suppressed, and the transmission member The rotatable range of 654 can be increased. Therefore, as will be described later, the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 640 can be displaced more greatly while reducing the size of the entire right rotation unit 600 (see FIGS. 37 and 38).

According to the transmission mechanism, when the first pinion 651 is rotated by the rotational driving force of the drive motor 650, the rotation of the first pinion 651 is transmitted to the second pinion 653 via the linear movement of the rack member 652. By rotating the second pinion 653, the transmission member 654 is rotated around the shaft support hole 625 of the front base 620. As will be described later, by rotating the transmission member 654 and causing its drive pin 654b to act on the first groove 635 and the second groove 641b, the displacement according to the shapes of the first groove 635 and the second groove 641b can be changed to the second groove. This can be performed independently by each of the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 640 (see FIGS. 37 and 38).

A rotation shaft 631, support shafts 632, 633, and a contact portion 634 are provided on the back surface of the first displacement member 630, and a first groove 635 is recessed therein. As described above, the rotating shaft 631 is a shaft-like body that is inserted into the supporting hole 624 of the front base 620, and the first displacement member 630 is inserted into the front base 620 through the rotating shaft 631 and the supporting hole 624. Rotatably supported on the shaft. Note that a holder C having a diameter larger than the inner diameter of the shaft support hole 624 is fastened and fixed to the axial end surface of the rotation shaft 631, thereby restricting the rotation shaft 631 from coming out of the shaft support hole 624.

The support shafts 632 and 633 are shaft-like bodies with circular cross sections for rotatably supporting the driven member 641 and the connected displacement member 642 of the second displacement member 640, respectively. That is, the driven member 641 and the connected displacement member 642 of the second displacement member 640 are rotatably held on the back surface of the first displacement member 630 via support shafts 632 and 633, respectively.

A pair of abutting portions 634 are arranged at a predetermined interval in the circumferential direction around the rotating shaft 631 . A protruding portion 628 of the front base 620 is disposed between the pair of abutting portions 634 in a state in which the first displacement member 630 is assembled to the front base 620. Therefore, as will be described later, when the first displacement member 630 is rotated about the rotation axis 631 with respect to the front base 620, the contact portion 634 comes into contact with the side surface of the protrusion 628 of the front base 620. Thus, the rotation of the first displacement member 630 with respect to the front base 620 can be restricted within a predetermined range.

The first groove 635 is a concave groove into which the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 is slidably inserted, and is bent into a substantially dogleg shape when viewed from the front. Specifically, the first groove 635 has an action section 635a extending linearly along the longitudinal direction of the first displacement member 630, and a first displacement section 635a that is curved in an arc shape with a concave side toward the rotating shaft 631. It includes a non-interference section 635b extending along the width direction of the member 630 (that is, formed in a shape obtained by dividing an annular shape concentric with the rotating shaft 631). Note that, as described later, the action section 635a is a section that receives the action from the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654, and the non-interference section 635b is a section where the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 does not interfere.

The second displacement member 640 is formed by being divided into two members, a driven member 641 and a connected displacement member 642. A shaft support hole 641a is formed through the driven member 641 at the center in the longitudinal direction, and a second groove 641b and a connecting groove 641c are formed at one end and the other end in the longitudinal direction, respectively. Note that the connecting displacement member 642 is formed from a light-transmitting resin material.

As described above, the shaft support hole 641a is a hole with a circular cross section through which the support shaft 632 of the first displacement member 630 is rotatably inserted. It is rotatably supported on the back surface of the member 630. Note that a screw having a head having a larger diameter than the inner diameter of the shaft support hole 641a is fastened to the axial end surface of the support shaft 632, thereby restricting the support shaft 632 from coming out of the shaft support hole 641a. .

The second groove 641b is a groove-shaped opening into which the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 is slidably inserted, and extends linearly along the longitudinal direction of the driven member 641. When the driven member 641 is pivotally supported on the back surface of the first displacement member 630, the second groove 641b overlaps the first groove 635 of the first displacement member 630. Therefore, the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 can be inserted into the first groove 635 via the second groove 641b. Note that the second groove 641b is formed as an action section that receives an action from the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654, as will be described later.

The connection groove 641c is a groove-shaped opening that extends linearly along the longitudinal direction of the driven member 641, and a connection pin 643 of a connection displacement member 642, which will be described later, is slidably inserted therethrough. That is, the second displacement member 640 is formed to be able to transmit the rotation of the driven member 641 to the connection displacement member 642 via the connection groove 641c and the connection pin 643.

A shaft support hole 642a is formed through the connection displacement member 642, and a decorative portion 642b and an overhanging portion 642c are formed to project outward with the shaft support hole 642a in between. Further, the connecting displacement member 642 is provided with a connecting pin 643 that projects toward the front side thereof.

As described above, the shaft support hole 642a is a hole with a circular cross section through which the support shaft 633 of the first displacement member 630 is rotatably inserted. It is rotatably supported on the back surface of the member 630. Note that a holder C having a diameter larger than the inner diameter of the shaft support hole 642a is fastened and fixed to the axial end surface of the support shaft 633, thereby restricting the rotation shaft 633 from coming out of the shaft support hole 642a.

As described above, the connecting pin 643 is inserted into the connecting groove 641c of the driven member 641, so that the rotation of the driven member 641 can be transmitted to the connecting displacement member 642. That is, by rotating the driven member 641 about the support shaft 632 as the center of rotation, rotation of the connected displacement member 642 about the support shaft 633 can be formed.

In this way, the second displacement member 640 is divided into two parts, the driven member 641 and the connecting displacement member 642, and the driving member 641 and the connecting displacement member 642 are connected by the connecting groove 641c and the connecting pin 643. Since the link mechanism is configured by being rotatably supported by the displacement member 640, the first displacement of the connected displacement member 642 (decorative portion 642b) is The amount of relative displacement with respect to the member 630 can be increased (see FIG. 37). As a result, the performance effect can be enhanced.

Here, the detailed configuration of the connection displacement member 642 will be explained with reference to FIG. 32. 32(a) is a front view of the connecting displacement member 642, FIG. 32(b) is a side view of the connecting displacement member 642 as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXIIb in FIG. 32(a), and FIG. 32(c) is a front view of the connecting displacement member 642. is a sectional view of the connecting displacement member 642 taken along the line XXXIIa-XXXIIa in FIG. 32(a).

As shown in FIG. 32, the connecting displacement member 642 is formed with an overhanging portion 642c that overhangs on the side opposite to the decorative portion 642b across the shaft support hole 642a. The overhanging portion 642c can serve as a weight for balance when lifting or after lifting.

In this case, the protruding portion 642c is formed so as to protrude from the front side (lower side in FIG. 32(b)) than the decorative portion 642b, and is formed so as to be able to come into contact with the back surface of the first displacement member 630, which will be described later. As such, when the second displacement member 640 is displaced (rotated), it is possible to suppress rattling of the connected displacement member 642 with respect to the first displacement member 630. Furthermore, since the overhanging portion 642c serves both as a weight and as a portion that abuts the first displacement member 630, the structure can be simplified and component costs can be reduced accordingly.

Furthermore, the overhanging portion 642c is formed by four side walls erected on the back side from four sides of the bottom wall that forms the front side of the connecting displacement member 642 (the side facing the back side of the first displacement member 630). , is formed into a box shape with an open back side. Therefore, weight and rigidity can be ensured while reducing the external size. Therefore, as will be described later, when the second displacement member 640 is displaced (rotated), a state in which the overhanging portion 642c is hidden behind the first displacement member 630 (that is, a state in which it is not visible from the front) is ensured. At the same time, it is possible to reliably perform the function as a weight and the function of suppressing rattling by abutting on the first displacement member 630.

Note that a protrusion 642c1 is formed on the protruding portion 642c and extends from the bottom wall of the protrusion 642c along an arc centered on the shaft support hole 642a, and the top of the protrusion 642c1 is connected to the first displacement member. It is formed so that it can come into contact with the back surface of 630. Therefore, sliding resistance can be suppressed compared to the case where the entire bottom wall of the overhanging portion 642c comes into contact with the back surface of the first displacement member 630.

The connecting pin 643 is made of a metal material (brass material in this embodiment), which has higher hardness than a resin material, and its rear end surface (the upper surface in FIG. 32(c)) is the back surface of the connecting displacement member 642 (i.e., the upper surface in FIG. 32(c)). , the surface facing the front base 620) and is embedded (insert molded) in the connecting displacement member 642 in a manner that it is exposed from the side facing the front base 620.

In this case, the top of the protrusion 626 on the front base 620 extends along the displacement locus of the connecting pin 643 when the coupling displacement member 642 is displaced, so the top of the protrusion 626 on the front base 620 The rear end surface of the connecting pin 643 can be mainly brought into contact with the connecting pin 643 . Therefore, it is possible to suppress the formation of fog on the connecting displacement member 642 made of a light-transmissive resin material due to rubbing between the convex strip 626 of the front base 620. Therefore, the effect of transmitting light through the connecting displacement member 642 can be continuously exhibited.

Next, the operation of the right rotation unit 600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 33 to 39. 33 and 34 are front views of the right rotation unit 600 in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position, and FIGS. 35 and 36 are front views of the right rotation unit 600 when operating between the retracted position and the extended position. FIG. 6 is a rear view of the right rotation unit 600 in each state when the rotation unit 600 is rotated to the right. Moreover, FIGS. 37 and 38 are schematic rear views of the right rotation unit 600 in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position.

Note that FIG. 33(a) corresponds to FIG. 35(a) and FIG. 37(a), FIG. 33(b) corresponds to FIG. 35(b) and FIG. 37(b), and FIG. 35(c) and FIG. 37(c), FIG. 34(a) is the same as FIG. 36(a) and FIG. 38(a), and FIG. 34(b) is the same as FIG. ), FIG. 38(b), and FIG. 34(c) are in the same state as FIG. 36(c) and FIG. 38(c), respectively. In this case, FIG. 33(c) is the same as FIG. 34(a), FIG. 35(c) is the same as FIG. 36(a), and FIG. 37(c) is the same as FIG. 38(a). be.

As shown in FIGS. 33(a), 35(a), and 37(a), in the retracted position, the first displacement member 630 is in the upright state, and the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 640 are in the front It is arranged in front of the base 620.

From this state, when the transmission member 654 is rotationally driven in the forward direction (clockwise in FIG. 37(a)), the first groove 635 (action section 635a) of the first displacement member 630 and the second The inner wall surface of the groove 641b is pushed in the extending direction (to the right in FIG. 37(a)) by the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654, so that the inner wall surface of the groove 641b is As shown, the first displacement member 630 is rotated in the extending direction about the rotating shaft 631. In this case, since the second groove 641b has the same outer shape as the working section 635b of the first groove 635, the second displacement member 640 is not displaced relative to the first displacement member 630, and the first displacement member 640 is not displaced relative to the first displacement member 630. It is displaced together with member 630.

When the transmission member 654 is further rotationally driven in the forward direction (clockwise in FIG. 37(b)) from the states shown in FIGS. , the inner wall surfaces of the first groove 635 (action section 635a) of the first displacement member 630 and the second groove 641b of the second displacement member 640 are moved in the projecting direction (FIG. 37(b)) by the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654. As a result, the first displacement member 630 is rotated in the extending direction about the rotation axis 631, and the second displacement member 640 is displaced together with the first displacement member 630.

After passing through the states shown in FIGS. 33(b), 35(b), and 37(b), the states shown in FIGS. 33(c), 35(c), and 37(c) (i.e., FIG. ), the state shown in FIG. 36(a) and FIG. 38(a)), the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 moves between the action section 635a and the non-interference section 635b in the first groove 635 of the first displacement member 630. The connection part is reached.

Note that in the states shown in FIGS. 33(c), 35(c), and 37(c) (that is, FIG. 34(a), FIG. 36(a), and FIG. 38(a)), the first displacement member 630 One of the pair of contact parts 634 is brought into contact with one side surface of the protruding part 628 of the front base 620, thereby preventing the first displacement member 630 from rotating in the extending direction. Regulated.

Therefore, when the transmission member 654 is rotated in the forward direction (clockwise in FIG. 38(a)) from the states shown in FIGS. 34(a), 36(a), and 38(a), the transmission member 654 The drive pin 654b moves along the non-interference section 635b with respect to the first groove 635 of the first displacement member 630 without interfering with the inner wall surface thereof. Thereby, the first displacement member 630 is maintained in the state (position) shown in FIG. 38(a).

On the other hand, the inner wall surface of the second groove 641b of the second displacement member 640 is pushed downward (lower side in FIG. 38(a)) by the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654, so that the second displacement member 640 is , as shown in FIGS. 36(b) and 38(b), the driven member 641 is rotated about the support shaft 632 in a direction that raises the connecting groove 641c (counterclockwise in FIG. 38(b)). The rotation of the driven member 641 is transmitted to the connection displacement member 642 through the connection of the connection groove 641c and the connection pin 643, and the connection displacement member 642 lifts the decorative portion 642b around the support shaft 633 ( 38(b) clockwise). That is, while the first displacement member 630 is stopped, the second displacement member 640 (connected displacement portion 642) is displaced relative to the first displacement member 630.

When the transmission member 654 is further rotated in the forward direction (clockwise in FIG. 38(b)) from the state shown in FIGS. While the first displacement member 630 is stopped, the second displacement member 640 (connected displacement portion 642) is displaced relative to the first displacement member 630. Thereafter, the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 reaches the end of the non-interference section 635b in the first groove 635 of the first displacement member 630 and the second groove 641b of the second displacement member 640, and as a result, as shown in FIG. ), as shown in FIGS. 36(c) and 38(c), the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 640 are arranged at the extended position.

Contrary to the case described above, the transmission member 654 rotates in the opposite direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 38(c)) from the extended position shown in FIGS. 34(c), 36(c), and 38(c). When driven, the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 moves along the non-interference section 635b in the first groove 635 of the first displacement member 630, so that the first displacement member 630 moves as shown in FIG. 38(c). It is maintained in the state (position) shown.

On the other hand, the inner wall surface of the second groove 641b of the second displacement member 640 is pushed upward (upper side in FIG. 38(c)) by the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654, so that As shown in FIGS. 36(b) and 38(b), the driven member 641 is rotated about the support shaft 632 in the direction of lowering the connecting groove 641c (clockwise in FIG. 38(b)), and the connecting displacement member 642 is rotated about the support shaft 633 in the direction of swinging down the decorative portion 642b (counterclockwise in FIG. 38(b)). That is, while the first displacement member 630 is stopped, the second displacement member 640 (connected displacement portion 642) is displaced relative to the first displacement member 630.

When the transmission member 654 is further rotationally driven in the opposite direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 38(b)) from the states shown in FIGS. 34(b), 36(b), and 38(b), the above case occurs. Similarly, while the first displacement member 630 is stopped, the second displacement member 640 (connected displacement portion 642) is displaced relative to the first displacement member 630 in the direction of swinging down the decorative portion 642b.

After passing through the states shown in FIGS. 34(b), 36(b), and 38(b), the states shown in FIGS. 34(a), 36(a), and 38(a) (i.e., FIG. ), the state shown in FIG. 35(c) and FIG. 37(c)), the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 moves between the action section 635a and the non-interference section 635b in the first groove 635 of the first displacement member 630. The connection part is reached.

Therefore, when the transmission member 654 is rotationally driven in the opposite direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 37(c)) from the states shown in FIGS. 33(c), 35(c), and 37(c), the first displacement The inner wall surfaces of the first groove 635 (action section 635a) of the member 630 and the second groove 641b of the second displacement member 640 are pushed in the upright direction (to the left in FIG. 37(c)) by the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654. Then, as shown in FIGS. 33(b), 35(b), and 37(b), the first displacement member 630 is rotated in the upright direction about the rotating shaft 631. In this case, since the second groove 641b has the same outer shape as the working section 635b of the first groove 635, the second displacement member 640 is not displaced relative to the first displacement member 630, and the first displacement member 640 is not displaced relative to the first displacement member 630. It is displaced together with member 630.

When the transmission member 654 is further rotationally driven in the reverse direction (clockwise in FIG. 37(b)) from the states shown in FIGS. Then, the first displacement member 630 is rotated in the upright direction about the rotation shaft 631, and the second displacement member 640 is displaced together with the first displacement member 630. Thereafter, the driving pin 654b of the transmission member 654 reaches the working section 635a of the first groove 635 of the first displacement member 630 and the starting end of the second groove 641b of the second displacement member 640, as shown in FIG. 33(a). , as shown in FIGS. 35(a) and 37(a), the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 640 are placed in the retracted position.

Note that in the upright position shown in FIGS. 33(a), 35(a), and 37(a), the other of the pair of contact portions 634 of the first displacement member 630 is By coming into contact with the other side surface of the protrusion 628 of the first displacement member 620, rotation of the first displacement member 630 in the upright direction is restricted.

In this way, the right rotation unit 600 is configured such that the first displacement member 630 is in a state in which the first groove 635 and the second groove 641b are superimposed (overlapping) in the thickness direction (for example, in the direction perpendicular to the paper surface of FIGS. 33 and 34). Since the second displacement member 640 is disposed on the front side of the front base 620, these first grooves 635 The planar space required for arranging the second groove 641b (that is, the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 640) can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to reduce the size of the external shape (planar space) when viewed from the front.

Here, the pachinko machine 10 is required to have a larger display device (third symbol display device 81). However, even in this case, there is a relatively large amount of space in the thickness direction (front-back direction, for example, the direction perpendicular to the paper plane of FIGS. 10 and 11). Therefore, as in this embodiment, if the first groove 635 and the second groove 641b are overlapped and a relatively generous space in the thickness direction is utilized, the outer shape of the right rotation unit 600 in front view can be reduced. This is particularly effective for increasing the size of the display device.

Further, if the first groove 635 and the second groove 641b are configured to overlap each other, one drive pin 654b transmits the rotational driving force of the transmission member 654 to the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 640, respectively. This eliminates the need to separately provide drive pins (transmission members) for each of the first groove and the second groove, unlike conventional products. In other words, the parts can be used in common, and the cost of parts can be reduced accordingly.

As described above, the second displacement member 640 is divided into two parts, the driven member 641 and the connecting displacement member 642, and the driven member 641 and the connecting displacement member 642 are connected by the connecting groove 641c and the connecting pin 643. Since a link mechanism is configured by being rotatably supported by the support shafts 632 and 633 of the first displacement member 630, the amplification effect of the link mechanism can be utilized. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 34, 36, and 38, the amount of relative displacement of the connecting displacement member 642 (ornamental portion 642b) with respect to the first displacement member 630 can be increased. As a result, the performance effect can be enhanced.

In this case, in this embodiment, the second displacement member 640 is divided into a driven member 641 and a connected displacement member 642 to form a link mechanism, and a support shaft that pivotally supports the driven member 641 and the connected displacement member 642. 632 and 633 along the longitudinal direction of the first displacement member 630, the driven The member 641 and the connecting displacement member 642 can form an overlapping posture.

This makes it easier to hide the second displacement member 640 behind the first displacement member 630 (make it easier to make it invisible to the player). Therefore, in the retracted position, not only can the outer shape of the right rotation unit 600 be reduced in size when viewed from the front (see FIG. 33(a)), but also when the first displacement member 630 is tilted from the upright position to the extended position. (see FIGS. 33(a) to 33(c)), after the first displacement member 630 is tilted to the extended position while hiding the existence of the second displacement member 640 (decorative portion 642b) from the player, The second displacement member 640 can be made to pop out from the back side of the first displacement member 630 (see FIGS. 34(a) to 34(c)), making it easier to perform performances that give an impact to the player.

As described above, the operation of the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 640 from the retracted position shown in FIG. 33(a) to the extended position shown in FIG. 34(c) is first performed from FIG. As shown in FIG. 33(c), the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 640 are displaced (rotated) integrally in the extending direction (that is, the direction in which they fall down, referred to as the "first direction"), and as shown in FIG. 33(c) and 34(a), after the displacement (rotation) of the first displacement member 630 is stopped, as shown in FIGS. 34(a) to 34(c), the second displacement member 630 This is an operation in which the connecting displacement member 642 of the member 640 displaces (rotates) the decorative portion 642b thereof in a lifting direction (referred to as a "second direction"). That is, the first direction and the second direction are opposite directions.

As a result, the inertial force caused by stopping the first displacing member 630, which has been displaced in the first direction, can be canceled out by the inertial force when the second displacing member 640 starts displacing in the second direction. As a result, the series of operations from the retracted position to the extended position can be performed smoothly, which not only enhances the performance effect, but also reduces the load on parts due to the action of inertial force, improving durability. can be achieved.

In this case, in this embodiment, the weight of the first displacement member 630 is made heavier than the weight of the second displacement member 640, so from the retracted position shown in FIG. 33(a) to the extended position shown in FIG. 34(c). In the operation of displacing the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 640, the heavier first displacement member 630 can be stopped first, and the lighter second displacement member 640 can be stopped last. Thereby, the load on the drive motor 650 and the gears in the transmission mechanism (first pinion 651, rack member 652, and second pinion 653, see FIGS. 29 and 30) can be reduced.

That is, from the above-mentioned state in which the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 640 are displaced in the extending direction (first direction) while being integral (see FIGS. 33(a) to 33(c)), The displacement of the first displacement member 630 is stopped (see FIGS. 33(c) and 34(a)), and the connected displacement member 642 of the second displacement member 640 moves in the direction (second direction) of lifting its decorative portion 642b. The transition to the displaced state (see FIG. 34(a) to FIG. 34(c)) occurs when the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 moves from the action section 635a of the first groove 635 to the non-interference section 635b. Therefore, the drive motor 650 and the gears (first pinion 651, rack member 652, and second pinion 653) in the transmission mechanism can continue to rotate. Therefore, even if the first displacement member 630 is stopped in the middle of such a state transition, the load on the gears of the drive motor 650 transmission mechanism due to the stoppage can be avoided.

On the other hand, the displacement of the first displacement member 630 is stopped (see FIGS. 33(c) and 34(a)), and the connected displacement member 642 of the second displacement member 640 moves in the direction (in the direction of lifting the decorative portion 642b). The transition from the state in which the second displacement member 640 is displaced in two directions (see FIGS. 34(a) to 34(c)) to the state in which the second displacement member 640 is stopped (see FIG. 34(c)) is caused by the drive motor 650 It is necessary to stop the rotation of the gears (first pinion 651, rack member 652, and second pinion 653) of the transmission mechanism, and the inertia force when the second displacement member 640 is stopped is applied to the gears. However, since the only member that is stopped in this case is the second displacement member 640, which is light in weight, the load on the gear can be reduced accordingly.

Here, as described above, the connecting displacement member 642 of the second displacement member 640 extends outward to the opposite side from the decorative portion 642b across the portion (the shaft support hole 642a) that is pivotally supported by the first displacement member 630. It is provided with an overhanging portion 642c that is formed to overhang (see FIG. 32), and is formed so that the overhanging portion 642c can play the role of a weight.

As a result, as shown in FIGS. 34, 36, and 38, when the connecting displacement member 642 is rotated and the decorative portion 642b thereof is lifted upward, a projecting portion 642c is formed on the side opposite to the decorative portion 642b. By using the weight of the overhanging portion 642c, it is possible to easily lift the decorative portion 642b upward. Therefore, it is possible to quickly lift the decorative portion 642b, thereby increasing the presentation effect and suppressing the driving force of the drive motor 650 required for the lifting operation.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 34(c), 36(c), and 38(c), after the decorative portion 642b is lifted, the weight of the decorative portion 642b and the weight of the overhanging portion 642c are suspended. Therefore, compared to a cantilevered state in which only the decorative portion 642b is formed, the posture in which the decorative portion 642b is lifted can be stabilized, and the The driving force of the drive motor 650 can be suppressed.

In this case, as described above, the protruding portion 642c of the connecting displacement member 642 is formed so that its bottom wall (projection 642c1, see FIG. 32) can come into contact with the back surface of the first displacement member 630. As shown in FIGS. 34, 36, and 38, when displacing (rotating) the connection displacement member 642, the overhanging portion 642c is brought into contact with the back surface of the first displacement member 630, thereby causing the connection displacement. Shaking of the member 642 (decorative portion 642b) can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to stabilize the posture of the decorative portion 642b when it is displaced, thereby increasing the presentation effect, and also suppressing wear and damage of the shaft portion due to rattling.

Furthermore, since the projecting portion 642c serves not only as a weight but also as abutting against the first displacement member 630 and suppressing rattling, it is preferable to provide separate portions for both of these roles. This can be omitted, and the structure of the connecting displacement member 642 can be simplified accordingly. As a result, parts costs can be reduced.

Furthermore, the projecting portion 642c of the connecting displacement member 642 is formed into a substantially box shape as described above (see FIG. 32). Thereby, weight and rigidity can be ensured while reducing the external shape of the overhanging portion 642c. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 34, FIG. 36, and FIG. 38, when the overhanging portion 642c is hidden behind the first displacement member 630 (that is, in a state where it is not visible to the player in front), the connected displacement While ensuring that the member 642 (decorative portion 642b) is displaced, the projecting portion 642c reliably performs the function of a weight and the function of suppressing rattling by coming into contact with the back surface of the first displacement member 630. can be done.

Here, as described above, in the front base 620, the shaft support hole 624 that pivotally supports the first displacement member 630 is located closer to the opening of the game board 13 (the 1 displacement member 630 (see FIGS. 29 to 31), the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 630 are disposed at the extended position (see FIGS. 29 to 31). While it is possible to secure an overhanging area for the 640 to overhang toward the opening side of the game board 13, the transmission member 654 can be easily hidden on the back surface of the first displacement member 630 while being displaced from the retracted position to the overhanging position.

In this case, as described above, the front base 620 includes the bearing part 627 that pivotally supports the rotating shaft 631 of the first displacement member 630 (see FIG. 29), and the transmission member 654 As shown in (c), when the second displacement member 640 is displaced to the extended position, it is formed so that it can come into contact with the bearing portion 627, so that the relative position of the second displacement member 640 with respect to the first displacement member 630 is Rotation can be regulated within a predetermined range. That is, the transmission member 654, which serves to transmit the driving force of the drive motor 650, can also serve as a stopper that restricts the relative rotation of the second displacement member 640 with respect to the first displacement member 630 within a predetermined range. Therefore, the structure can be simplified and component costs can be reduced accordingly.

Furthermore, since the bearing portion 627 is a portion for raising the first displacement member 630 from the front base 620 and arranging the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 640 in an overlapping posture (see FIG. 29), the rigidity is relatively high and a dead space is formed on the outer circumferential side, and as shown in FIG. Therefore, it is possible to ensure the rigidity of the portion that restricts the relative rotation of the second displacement member 640 with respect to the first displacement member 630, thereby improving durability, and making it possible to effectively utilize dead space. It is possible to aim for

Further, as described above, the transmission member 654 is provided with a recessed notch 654c corresponding to the outer shape of the bearing portion 627 (see FIGS. 29 to 31), and as shown in FIG. When the displacement member 640 is extended to the extended position, the bearing portion 627 is formed to be receivable in the recessed notch 654c, so that the movable range of the transmission member 654 can be increased accordingly. Therefore, the amount of displacement of the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 640 can be secured accordingly. In other words, the rotating shaft 654a of the transmitting member 654 can be positioned close to the bearing portion 627 while ensuring the movable range of the transmitting member 654. This allows the outer shape of the first displacement member 630 to be suppressed and the position shown in FIG. 38, while the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 640 are displaced between the retracted position and the extended position, the transmission member 654 is hidden behind the first displacement member 630 (i.e., , a state in which the player cannot be seen from the player in front) can be easily created.

As described above, the front base 620 is formed to be inclined on the left side in front view (the opening side of the game board 13, for example, the left side in FIG. 33(c)) by chamfering the side and front ridgeline portions. An inclined surface 620a is provided. Therefore, from the state shown in FIG. 34(c), the connecting displacement member 642 is displaced (rotated) in the direction of lowering the decorative portion 642b, and the state shown in FIG. 34(b) is changed to the state shown in FIG. 34(a). In this case, the inclined surface 620a can prevent the connecting displacement member 642 from being locked to the side surface of the front base 620 and unable to be displaced. Similarly, the second displacement member 640 (connected displacement member 642) is displaced (rotated) toward the retracted position from the state shown in FIG. Even when the state shown in FIG. 33(a) is formed after passing through the state shown in FIG.

In particular, in this embodiment, the first displacement member 630 is disposed in a cantilevered state with its rotation axis 631 as a fulcrum, and the second displacement member 640 is disposed on the first displacement member 630, Because of the bulk, the first displacement member 630 is likely to sway in the front-rear direction (perpendicular to the plane of FIG. It is easily locked to the side surface of the front base 620. Therefore, the configuration in which the front base 620 is provided with the inclined surface 620a is particularly effective.

Further, as described above, the front base 620 includes the protrusion 626 that projects from the front surface and extends along the displacement direction (rotation direction) of the first displacement member 630. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 33, FIG. 35, and FIG. can be brought into contact with. Therefore, compared to the case where the entire front surface of the front base 620 comes into contact with the second displacement member 640, the contact area can be made smaller and sliding resistance can be suppressed. As a result, the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 640 can be smoothly displaced, and the driving force required for the drive motor 650 can be suppressed.

Here, the relationship between the protruding strip 626 of the front base 620 and the second displacement member 640 (connection displacement member 642) will be described with reference to FIG. 39. 39(a) is a schematic front view for explaining the positional relationship between the front base 620 and the connecting displacement member 642, and FIG. 39(b) shows the front base 620 along the XXXIXb-XXXIXb line in FIG. 39(a). and a schematic cross-sectional view of a connecting displacement member 642.

As described above, the connecting displacement member 642 of the second displacement member 640 is formed from a light-transmitting resin material. Therefore, the decorative effect can be enhanced by transmitting the light emitted from the light emitting body or the display device. On the other hand, since the connecting displacement member 642 is a member disposed facing the front base 620 (see FIGS. 29 to 31), shaking or rattling may occur when the second displacement member 640 is displaced. Accordingly, it comes into contact with the front of the front base 620. In this case, when the front surface of the front base 620 comes into contact with the coupling displacement member 642, the coupling displacement member 642 becomes cloudy due to friction with the front surface of the front base 620, and light transmittance is impaired.

In contrast, in this embodiment, as described above, the protruding strip 626 is formed on the front surface of the front base 620, and only the top of the protruding strip 626 can be brought into contact with the connecting displacement member 642. It is possible to partially suppress fogging (portion where light transmittance is impaired) due to friction formed on the connecting displacement member 642.

Further, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 39, the second displacement member 640 includes a metal connecting pin 643 for connecting the driven member 641 and the connecting displacement member 642. The protruding strip 626 of the front base 620 moves along the trajectory of the connecting pin 643 when the second displacement member 640 is displaced together with the first displacement member 630 (see FIGS. 33, 35, and 37). It will be extended.

As a result, when the second displacement member 640 is displaced together with the first displacement member 630, the rear end surface of the connecting pin 642 (the right side surface in FIG. 39(b)) is brought into contact with the top of the protrusion 626. can be brought into contact. Therefore, the surface pressure acting on the connection displacement member 642 from the top of the protrusion 626 can be transferred to the rear end surface of the connection pin 642, and the surface pressure acting on other parts of the connection displacement member 642 can be weakened accordingly. can. As a result, it is possible to suppress the formation of fog on other parts of the connecting displacement member 642 due to friction between the connecting displacement member 642 and the protruding strip 626, and to suppress the loss of the light transmitting function.

Next, with reference to FIG. 40, the function of the protrusion 628 of the front base 620 will be described. 40(a) is a schematic front view for explaining the positional relationship between the front base 620 and the first displacement member 630, and FIG. 40(b) is a front view of the front base as viewed in the direction of arrow XLb in FIG. 40(a). 40(c) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the front base 620 and the first displacement member 630 taken along line XLc-XLc in FIG. 40(a).

As shown in FIG. 40, the front base 620 includes a bearing part 627 that rotatably supports the first displacement member 630. Since the second displacement member 640 is pivotally supported in a raised state, a space can be formed between the front of the front base 620 and the back of the first displacement member 630 in which the second displacement member 640 is disposed. That is, as described above, the second displacement member 640 can be disposed on the back surface of the first displacement member 630 in an overlapping manner (see FIGS. 29 to 31).

As described above, the front base 620 includes the projecting portion 628 that projects radially outward from the outer peripheral surface of the bearing portion 627, and the first displacement member 630 projects from the back surface thereof. The contact portion 634 of the first displacement member 630 is brought into contact with the protrusion 628 of the front base 620, so that the relative rotation of the first displacement member 630 with respect to the front base 620 is controlled within a predetermined range. can be regulated within

In this case, the bearing portion 627 of the front base 620 is a large-diameter cylindrical body that stands upright from the front of the front base 620 to increase its rigidity and to form a dead space on the outer circumferential side. A protruding part 628 is provided to protrude radially outward from the outer circumferential surface of the bearing part 627, and the abutting part 634 of the first displacement member 630 is brought into contact with the protruding part 628, whereby the first displacement The rigidity of the portion that restricts the relative rotation of the member 630 with respect to the front base 620 can be ensured to improve durability, and dead space can be used effectively, resulting in a corresponding reduction in size.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the outer shape of the lower side (lower side in FIG. 40(a)) of the first displacement member 630 is set to a size that includes the protrusion 628 of the front base 620 when viewed from the front. That is, the front side of the protruding portion 628 of the front base 620 (the front side in the plane of FIG. 40(a)) is formed so as to be able to come into contact with the back surface of the first displacement member 630. Thereby, rattling when the first displacement member 630 is displaced and tilting of the first displacement member 630 forward (in the direction of arrow Fr in FIG. 40(c)) can be suppressed.

In addition, the protruding part 628 of the front base 620 has a side surface that receives the abutting part 634 of the first displacement member 630 and serves as a stopper that regulates relative displacement. Since it can also serve the role of receiving and suppressing rattling and tilting, it is not necessary to separately provide parts for both of these roles, and the structure can be simplified accordingly. As a result, parts costs can be reduced.

In particular, in this embodiment, the first displacement member 630 is disposed in a cantilevered state with its rotating shaft 631 (bearing portion 627 of the front base 620) as a fulcrum, and the first displacement member 630 has a second Since the displacement member 640 is disposed and has a large weight, the first displacement member 630 is likely to sway in the front-rear direction (direction perpendicular to the plane of the paper in FIG. 40(a)). The swing in the direction in which the first displacement member 630 approaches the front base 620 (the direction opposite to the arrow However, the swinging of the first displacement member 630 in the direction in which it moves away from the front base 620 (in the direction of the arrow Fr in FIG. 40(c)) cannot be restricted, and as described above, Because it is bulky, it tends to cause damage near the fulcrum. Therefore, a configuration in which the front side of the protruding portion 628 of the front base 620 is brought into contact with the back surface of the first displacement member 630 to suppress forward swinging (tilting) of the first displacement member 630 is particularly effective.

In this case, the protrusion 628 of the front base 620 protrudes from the outer peripheral surface of the bearing 627 and is connected to the front of the front base 620, so that the rigidity of the protrusion 628 can be increased. In particular, when the first displacement member 630 is tilted forward (in the direction of arrow Fr in FIG. Since the rigidity in the direction sandwiched between the first displacement member 630 and the front surface can be increased, forward tilting of the first displacement member 630 can be effectively suppressed.

Next, the left rotation unit 700 will be described with reference to FIGS. 41 to 48. 41 is an exploded front perspective view of the left rotation unit 700, and FIG. 42 is an exploded rear perspective view of the left rotation unit 700. Further, FIG. 43 is a partially exploded perspective view of the left rotation unit 700.

As shown in FIGS. 41 to 43, the left rotation unit 700 has a base body consisting of a back base 710 and a front base 720, and a proximal end of the base body is disposed movably on the front side of the front base 720. A first displacement member 730, a second displacement member 740 disposed displaceably on the distal end side of the first displacement member 730, and a driving force for displacing the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740. A drive motor 750 that generates the power of It mainly includes a first connecting member 760 and a second connecting member 770), and a cover body 780 that is placed over the front surface of the lower end of the front base 720.

Part of the transmission mechanism (first pinion 751, rack member 752, and second pinion 753) is housed between the opposing surfaces of the rear base 710 and the front base 720. A pair of insertion pins 722 are protrudingly provided on the back surface of the front base 720 to be inserted into the sliding grooves 752a of the rack member 752 in order to define the moving direction of the rack member 752.

The front base 720 is formed with shaft support holes 723, 724, 725 which are circular in front view. The rotating shaft 754a and the rotating shaft 761 of the first connecting member 760 are each rotatably supported. Similarly, a shaft support hole 781 that is circular in front view is formed through the cover body 780, and a rotating shaft 731 of the first displacement member 730 is rotatably supported in this shaft support hole 781.

Furthermore, a base-side engaging member 726 is provided protruding from the front surface of the front base 720, and a receiving recess 727 is provided therein. The base-side engaging member 726 includes a base 726a that stands upright from the front of the front base 720, and a bent portion 726b that is formed by bending the tip of the base 726a and has an inner surface as an engagement surface. In this case, the second displacement member 740 is formed so that its engagement surfaces can be engaged with a displacement-side engagement member 742, which will be described later. Thereby, as will be described later, forward tilting of the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 with respect to the front base 720 can be suppressed (see FIG. 47).

The receiving recess 727 is a generally rectangular recess in a front view that is recessed at a position facing the bent portion 726b of the base-side engaging member 726, and is a recessed portion that is substantially rectangular in front view. By being formed with an opening area larger than the outer shape, the bent portion 742b of the displacement-side engaging member 742 can be received. Thereby, as will be described later, in the retracted position, relative displacement of the second displacement member 730 in the approach direction with respect to the front base 720 is allowed, and damage due to a collision can be suppressed (see FIG. 47(c)).

The transmission mechanism includes a first pinion 751 attached to the drive shaft of the drive motor 750, a second pinion 753 fastened and fixed to the rotating shaft 754a of the transmission member 754, and the first pinion 751 and the second pinion 753 have teeth. A rack member 752 is provided, which is formed as a rack in which a rack gear to be fitted is cut into a side surface of a flat member.

The rack member 752 includes two sliding grooves 752a extending along its longitudinal direction and having an elongated hole shape when viewed from the front, and a pair of insertion pins 722 of the front base 720 are inserted into each of these sliding grooves 752a. By doing so, the direction of movement is maintained in a defined state. That is, the rack member 752 is held between the opposing surfaces of the rear base 710 and the front base 720 so as to be capable of linear movement.

The transmission member 754 includes a rotating shaft 754a that projects from the back surface of one end, and a drive pin 754b that projects from the front surface of the other end opposite to the rotating shaft 754a. By being inserted into the shaft support hole 724, it is rotatably supported on the front side of the front base 720. The drive pin 754b is a shaft-like body with a circular cross section, and is inserted into a drive groove 762, which will be described later, of the first connecting member 760.

According to the transmission mechanism, when the first pinion 751 is rotated by the rotational driving force of the drive motor 750, the rotation of the first pinion 751 is transmitted to the second pinion 753 via the linear movement of the rack member 752. By rotating the second pinion 753, the transmission member 754 is rotated around the shaft support hole 724 of the front base 720.

When the transmission member 754 is rotated, as will be described later, the drive pin 754b of the transmission member 754 acts on the drive groove 762 of the first connection member 760, and the first connection member 760 and the second connection member 770 are driven. . As a result, while the second displacement member 740 is relatively displaced with respect to the first displacement member 730 via the first connection member 760 and the second connection member 770, the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 can be displaced relative to the front base 720 (see FIG. 46).

The first displacement member 730 has a rotating shaft 731 protruding from one end in the longitudinal direction (lower side in FIG. 42), and a shaft at the other end in the longitudinal direction opposite to the rotating shaft 731 (upper side in FIG. 42). A support hole 732 is formed through the first displacement member 730, and a sliding groove 733 having an oval shape when viewed from the front is recessed in the back surface of the first displacement member 730, and a connecting pin 734 is provided in a protruding manner. Further, an engaged portion 735 is formed on the outer edge of the first displacement member 730 on the other end side in the longitudinal direction and on the side of the shaft support hole 732.

As described above, the rotating shaft 731 is a shaft-shaped body that is inserted into the supporting hole 723 of the front base 720 and the supporting hole 781 of the cover body 780, and the first displacement member 730 has its rotating shaft 731 as the shaft. By being inserted through the support holes 723 and 781, the support is rotatably supported on the front side of the front base 720. That is, the first displacement member 730 is rotatably supported at its proximal end between the facing surfaces of the front base 720 and the cover body 780.

The shaft support hole 732 is a circular hole when viewed from the front, and rotatably supports the rotation shaft 741 of the second displacement member 740. The sliding groove 733 is a concave groove extending along the longitudinal direction of the first displacement member 730, into which the end of the connecting shaft 790 is slidably inserted. Note that the connecting shaft 790 supports the other ends of the first connecting member 760 and the second connecting member 770 such that they can rotate relative to each other. As will be described later, when the first connecting member 760 and the second connecting member 770 are driven, the connecting shaft 790 acts on the sliding groove 733 with respect to the first displacement member 730, so that the first displacement member 730 is It is displaced (rotated) with respect to the base 720 (see FIG. 45).

The connecting pin 734 is a shaft-like body with a circular cross section that is inserted into a sliding groove 772 (described later) of the second connecting member 770, and is located on an extension of the sliding groove 733 of the first displacement member 730 in the extending direction thereof. will be placed in Therefore, the direction in which the connecting shaft 790 slides along the sliding groove 733 of the first displacement member 730 and the direction in which the connecting pin 734 slides along the sliding groove 772 of the second connecting member 770 are made to match. I can do it. That is, as will be described later, when the first connecting member 760 and the second connecting member 770 are driven, the form of relative displacement of the second connecting member 770 with respect to the first displacement member 730 is linear movement (sliding displacement). (See Figure 45).

The engaged portion 735 is a portion formed on the outer edge of the first displacement member 730 that extends to a position where it overlaps with the second displacement member 740 in rear view, and in the extended position, the second displacement member 740 is displaced as described below. The side engagement member 742 (the engagement surface of the bent portion 742b) is formed to be engageable (see FIG. 48). Thereby, as will be described later, it is possible to suppress rattling of the second displacement member 740 with respect to the first displacement member 730 in the extended position (see FIG. 48).

The second displacement member 740 includes a rotating shaft 741 and a displacement-side engaging portion 742 protruding from its back surface, a receiving recess 743 recessed from its back surface, and a flange member fastened and fixed to the end surface of the rotating shaft 741. 744.

As described above, the rotating shaft 741 is a shaft-like body that is inserted into the shaft support hole 732 of the first displacement member 730, and when the rotation shaft 741 is inserted into the shaft support hole 732, the first displacement member A second displacement member 740 is rotatably supported on the distal end side in the longitudinal direction of 730 . The base end side of the flange member 744 that is fastened and fixed to the rotating shaft 741 is formed to have a larger diameter than the inner diameter of the supporting hole 732, thereby restricting the rotating shaft 741 from coming out of the supporting hole 732.

A connecting pin 744a is protruded from the back surface of the flange member 744 at a position eccentric from the axis of the rotating shaft 741. The connecting pin 744a is a shaft-like body with a circular cross section, and is inserted into a connecting groove 772 of the second connecting member 770, which will be described later. As will be described later, when the first connecting member 760 and the second connecting member 770 are driven, the connecting pin 744a of the flange member 744 receives an action from the connecting groove 772 of the second connecting member 770, thereby causing the second displacement. The member 740 is displaced (relatively rotated) relative to the first displacement member 730 (see FIG. 46).

The displacement-side engagement member 742 includes a base 742a that stands upright from the back surface of the second displacement member 740, and a bent portion 742b that is formed by bending the tip of the base 742a and has an inner surface as an engagement surface. As described above, in the retracted position, the engaging surfaces of the front base 720 are formed to be engageable with the displacement-side engaging member 726, and in the extended position, the engaged surfaces of the first displacement member 730 are formed to be engageable with each other. The engagement surface is formed to be engageable with the engagement portion 735 .

The receiving recess 743 is a generally rectangular recess in a front view that is recessed at a position facing the bent portion 742b of the displacement side engaging member 742, and is larger than the outer shape of the bent portion 726b of the base side engaging member 726 of the front base 720. Since the opening area is also formed to have a large opening area, the bent portion 726b of the base-side engaging member 726 can be received. Thereby, as will be described later, in the retracted position, relative displacement of the second displacement member 730 in the approach direction with respect to the front base 720 is allowed, and damage due to a collision can be suppressed (see FIG. 47(c)).

The first connecting member 760 has a rotary shaft 761 protruding from the back surface of one end in the longitudinal direction (bottom side in FIG. 42), and a sliding groove 762 is opened at approximately the center in the longitudinal direction. A connecting groove 771 and a sliding groove 772 are opened at one longitudinal end (upper side in FIG. 42) and at the longitudinal center, respectively.

The rotation shaft 761 of the first connecting member 760 is rotatably supported in the shaft support hole 725 of the front base 720, and the connecting groove 771 of the second connecting member 770 has a connecting shaft 761 in the flange member 744 of the second displacement member 740. Pin 744a is inserted. Further, the other longitudinal ends of the first connecting member 760 and the second connecting member 770 are supported by a connecting shaft 790 inserted into the sliding groove 733 of the first displacement member 730 so as to be relatively rotatable.

That is, one longitudinal end of the first connecting member 760 is movably connected to the front base 720, and one longitudinal end of the second connecting member 770 is movably connected to the second displacement member 740. A connecting portion (connecting pin 790) between the other longitudinal ends of the second connecting member 770 is movably connected to the first displacement member 730.

As a result, as will be described later, while allowing the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 to be displaced relative to each other and relative to the front base 720, the first connecting member 760 and the second connecting member 770 can be moved to the first position. It can be hidden behind the displacement member 730 to make it difficult for the player to see it. As a result, it is possible to prevent the first connecting member 760 and the second connecting member 770 from being exposed in the extended position and deteriorating the appearance (see FIGS. 44(c) and 45c(c)).

As described above, the drive pin 754b of the transmission member 754 is inserted into the drive groove 762 of the first connection member 760, and the first displacement member 730 is inserted into the sliding groove 772 of the second connection member 770. The connecting pin 734 is inserted.

Next, the operation of the left rotation unit 700 will be described with reference to FIGS. 44 to 46. FIG. 44 is a front view of the left rotation unit 700 in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position, and FIG. 45 is a front view of the left rotation unit 700 in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position. 7 is a rear view of the left rotation unit 700. FIG. Further, FIG. 46 is a schematic rear view of the left rotation unit 700 in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position.

Note that FIG. 44 shows a state in which the cover body 780 is omitted. Moreover, FIG. 44(a) shows FIGS. 45(a) and 46(a), FIG. 44(b) shows FIGS. 45(b) and 46(b), and FIG. 44(c) shows FIG. 45(c) and FIG. 46(c), respectively.

As shown in FIGS. 44(a), 45(a), and 46(a), in the retracted position, the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are in an upright state, and are disposed in front of the front base 720. will be established.

When the transmission member 754 is rotationally driven in the forward direction (clockwise in FIG. 46(a)) from this state, the inner wall surface of the drive groove 762 of the first coupling member 760 is extended by the drive pin 754b of the transmission member 754. By being pushed in the direction (to the left in FIG. 46(a)), the first connecting member 760 is rotated in the extending direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 46(a)) about its rotation axis 761.

When the first connecting member 760 is rotated in the extending direction, the inner wall surface of the sliding groove 733 of the first displacement member 730 becomes a connecting shaft that connects the other ends of the first connecting member 760 and the second connecting member 770. 790 in the extending direction (to the left in FIG. 46(a)), the first displacement member 730 shifts its rotational axis as shown in FIG. 44(b), FIG. 45(b), and FIG. 6(b). It is rotated in the extending direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 46(a)) with 731 as the rotation center.

Further, when the first connecting member 760 is rotated in the extending direction, the first connecting member 760 and the second connecting member 770 whose other ends are connected to each other by the connecting shaft 790 move downward (lower side in FIG. 46(a) ), and the inner wall surface of the connecting groove 771 of the second connecting member 770 pushes down the connecting pin 744a of the flange member 744 of the second displacement member 740, so that As shown in FIG. 46(b), the second displacement member 740 is displaced relative to the first displacement member 730 (relative rotation) in the first direction (clockwise in FIG. 46(a)) with the rotation axis 741 as the rotation center ) to be done.

In this case, the second connecting member 770 extends along the extending direction of the sliding groove 733 of the first displacement member 730 and the sliding groove 772 of the second connecting member 770. By sliding the connecting pins 734, respectively, the first displacement member 730 is linearly moved (slidingly displaced) along the longitudinal direction.

From the states shown in FIGS. 44(b), 45(b), and 46(b), the transmission member 754 is further rotationally driven in the forward direction (clockwise in FIG. 46(b)), and the first connecting member 760 is rotated in the forward direction (clockwise in FIG. 46(b)). When rotated in the extending direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 46(b)) about the rotating shaft 761, the first displacement member 730 rotates in the extending direction about the rotating shaft 731, as in the case described above. (FIG. 46(b) counterclockwise), and the second displacement member 740 rotates in a first direction (FIG. 46(b) clockwise) with respect to the first displacement member 730 about its rotation axis 741. relative displacement (relative rotation) to.

Thereafter, as the transmission member 754 reaches the end of its movable range, the first displacement member 730 is tilted and the first displacement member 730 is tilted as shown in FIGS. The first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are placed in the extended position, and a state is formed in which the second displacement member 740 is maximally displaced (relatively rotated) with respect to the first displacement member 730.

Contrary to the case described above, the transmission member 754 rotates in the opposite direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 46(c)) from the extended position shown in FIGS. 44(c), 45(c), and 46(c). When driven, the inner wall surface of the driving groove 762 of the first connecting member 760 is pushed in the retracting direction (to the right in FIG. 46(c)) by the driving pin 754b of the transmitting member 754, so that the first connecting member 760 It is rotated in the retracting direction (clockwise in FIG. 46(c)) about the rotating shaft 761 as the rotation center.

When the first connecting member 760 is rotated in the retracting direction, the inner wall surface of the sliding groove 733 of the first displacement member 730 moves to a connecting shaft 790 that connects the other ends of the first connecting member 760 and the second connecting member 770. As shown in FIGS. 44(b), 45(b), and 6(b), the first displacement member 730 moves its rotation axis 731 by being pushed in the retreat direction (to the right in FIG. 46(c)). It is rotated in the retraction direction (clockwise in FIG. 46(c)) about the rotation center.

Further, when the first connecting member 760 is rotated in the retracting direction, the first connecting member 760 and the second connecting member 770 whose other ends are connected by the connecting shaft 790 move upward (upper side in FIG. 46(c)). The inner wall surface of the sliding groove 772 of the second connecting member 770 pushes up the connecting pin 744a of the flange member 744 of the second displacement member 740, so that 6(b), the second displacement member 740 undergoes relative displacement (relative rotation) relative to the first displacement member 730 in a second direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 46(b)) about its rotation axis 741. ) to be done.

From the state shown in FIG. 44(b), FIG. 45(b), and FIG. 46(b), the transmission member 754 is further rotationally driven in the opposite direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 46(b)), and the first connecting member 760 is rotated. When the first displacement member 730 is rotated in the retracting direction (clockwise in FIG. 46(b)) about the rotating shaft 761 as the center of rotation, the first displacement member 730 moves in the retracting direction (clockwise in FIG. 46(b) clockwise), and the second displacement member 740 is rotated relative to the first displacement member 730 in a second direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 46(b)) about its rotation axis 741. Displaced (relative rotation).

Thereafter, when the transmission member 754 reaches the starting end of its movable range, the first displacement member 730 is erected and the first displacement member 730 is erected, as shown in FIGS. The first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are placed in the retracted position, and a state is created in which the relative displacement (relative rotation) of the second displacement member 740 with respect to the first displacement member 730 is minimized.

As described above, the left rotation unit 700 includes the connecting member (the first connecting member 760 and the second connecting member 770) that connects the front base 720 and the second displacement member 740. By acting between the front base 720 and the second displacement member 740, the second displacement member 730 is displaced relative to the first displacement member 730 (relative rotation) as the first displacement member 730 is displaced (rotated). ) can be done.

In this case, in the conventional product in which the connecting member is installed between the front base 720 and the second displacement member 740, the first displacement member 730 is displaced in the direction in which the first displacement member 730 is projected and separated from the front base 720 (projection direction). Then, the connecting member is exposed between the front base 720 and the second displacement member 740 and becomes visible to the player, which impairs the appearance.

In contrast, according to the present embodiment, the connecting member is divided into two members, the first connecting member 760 and the second connecting member 770, and one longitudinal end of the first connecting member 760 is connected to the front base 720. The other end in the longitudinal direction of the second connecting member 770 is connected to the second displacement member 740, and the other ends in the longitudinal direction of the first connecting member 760 and the second connecting member 770 are connected so as to be relatively displaceable. Since the connecting shaft 790 is displaceably connected to the first displacement member 730, even when the first displacement member 730 is displaced in the direction of overhanging and separating from the front base 720 (the extending direction), the connecting member (The first connecting member 760 and the second connecting member 770) can be hidden behind the first displacement member to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize them. As a result, it is possible to prevent the connecting member from being exposed and spoiling the appearance.

In this case, as described above, the second connecting member 770 is held by the first displacing member 730 in a form that moves linearly (slidingly displaces) along the longitudinal direction of the first displacing member 730. The amount of displacement (rotation angle) by which 730 is displaced (rotated) in the direction in which it is projected and separated from the front base 720 (projection direction) is large (that is, the amount of displacement of the first connecting member 760 and the second connecting member 770 is Even if the second connecting member 770 is hidden behind the first displacement member 730, it is possible to avoid being visible to the player. As a result, it is possible to prevent the connecting member from being exposed and spoiling the appearance.

Here, in this embodiment, the second displacement member 740 includes a light emitter (not shown), and the electrical connection line W that supplies power to the light emitter is wired to the back surface of the first displacement member 730. (See Figure 45). In this case, the connection line W is introduced from an opening formed on the back surface of the flange member 744 of the second displacement member 740 and connected to the light emitter. Therefore, the connection line W is wired on the back surface of the first displacement member 730 along the longitudinal direction of the first displacement member 730. Therefore, when the connecting member is displaced on the back surface of the first displacement member 730, there is a possibility that the connecting member interferes and damages the connecting wire W.

In this case, as described above, the connecting member (second connecting member 770) is disposed on the first displacement member 730 in such a manner that it moves linearly (slides) along the longitudinal direction of the first displacement member 730. , interference of the second connecting member 770 with the connecting line W can be suppressed. Therefore, interference with the second connecting member 770 can be avoided without having to secure a large space for wiring the connecting wire W (that is, the dimension in the width direction of the first displacement member 730). The space for arranging the line W can be reduced, and the front view shape (particularly the dimension in the width direction) of the first displacement member 730 can be made smaller accordingly.

Here, if the above-mentioned connecting members (the first connecting member 760 and the second connecting member 770) are provided, the driving force of the drive motor 750 is applied to the first displacement member 730 (that is, the first displacement member 730 is Even if a drive groove is provided and the drive pin 754b of the transmission member 754 is connected to the drive groove), it is possible to cause the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 to perform the same operation as in the above case. can.

However, this configuration results in an increase in the size of the first displacement member 730 when viewed from the front. That is, it is necessary for the connecting member to displaceably connect the connecting portion between the other ends of the first connecting member 760 and the second connecting member 770 to the sliding groove 733 of the first displacement member 730. It is arranged between the opposing surfaces of the displacement member 730 and the front base 720. Therefore, when a drive groove is provided in the first displacement member 730 and the drive pin 754b of the transmission member 754 is connected to the drive groove, the transmission member 754 and the connection member (the first connection member 760 and the second connection member 770) are connected to each other. In order to avoid interference, it is necessary to provide a drive groove in the first displacement member 730 at a position that does not overlap with the displacement locus of the connecting member. Therefore, the front view shape of the first displacement member 730 needs to have a size (area) that includes both the displacement locus of the connecting member and the drive groove, and the front view shape of the first displacement member 730 must accordingly Become larger.

In contrast, in this embodiment, a drive groove 762 is provided in the first connection member 760, and the drive pin 754b of the transmission member 754 is connected to the drive groove 762 of the first connection member 760, so that the driving force of the drive motor 750 is Since the configuration is such that the first displacement member 760 is provided with the first displacement member 760, it is possible to reduce the size of the first displacement member 730 when viewed from the front.

That is, there is no need to avoid interference between the transmission member 754 and the connecting members (the first connecting member 760 and the second connecting member 770), and the front view shape of the first displacement member 730 corresponds only to the displacement locus of the connecting member. The size (area) of the first displacement member 730 can be reduced accordingly, and the size (area) of the first displacement member 730 when viewed from the front can be made smaller.

Next, the engagement action by the base-side engagement member 726 and the displacement-side engagement member 742 will be described with reference to FIGS. 47 and 48.

FIG. 47 is a sectional view of the left rotation unit 700 for explaining the engagement action by the base side engagement member 726 and the displacement side engagement member 742, and corresponds to the cross section taken along the XLVIIa-XLVIIa line in FIG. 45(a). do.

Note that FIG. 47(a) shows the state immediately before the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are arranged in the retracted position, and FIG. 47(b) shows the state immediately before the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 A state in which the displacement member 740 is disposed at the retracted position is illustrated. Further, FIG. 47(c) illustrates a state in which the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are displaced in a direction approaching the front base 720 in FIG. 47(b).

As described above, the base-side engaging member 726 is provided protruding from the front surface of the front base 720, and the displacement-side engaging member 742 is provided protrudingly from the back surface of the second displacement member 740. The engaging member 726 and the displacement-side engaging member 742 are arranged with their open sides (the distal ends of the bent portions 726b) facing each other (see FIGS. 41 to 43).

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 47(a), when the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are displaced in the retracting direction (upper side in FIG. 47) with respect to the front base 720, the bent portions 726b of each other are displaced. , 742b into the inner surfaces of the mating bent portions 726b, 742b, and the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are disposed at the retracted position, as shown in FIG. 47(b). Then, the inner surfaces (engaging surfaces) of the bent portions 726b and 742b can be engaged with each other.

Here, in the conventional product in which the connecting member is installed between the front base 720 and the second displacement member 740, the front base 720 and the second displacement member The member 740 is connected by a connecting member. Therefore, in the retracted position, even if the first displacement member 730 tries to tilt its end portion (i.e., the second displacement member 740) on the opposite side to the rotation axis 731 in a direction (forward) away from the front base 720, the front The action of the connecting member interposed between the base 720 and the second displacement member 740 can suppress the tilting thereof.

However, in this embodiment, one longitudinal end of the second coupling member 770 is coupled to the second displacement member 740, while one longitudinal end of the first coupling member 760 is relatively connected to the rotation axis 731 of the first displacement member 730. It is connected to the front base 720 at a nearby position. Therefore, in the retracted position, the rotation shaft 731 of the first displacement member 730 becomes the base end (fulcrum), and the distal end portion on the opposite side to the rotation shaft 731 (i.e., the second displacement member 740 side) becomes a cantilevered end. In this state, the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are in the upright position. Therefore, due to its own weight and the weight of the second displacement member 740, the first displacement member 730 moves toward the free end (the side opposite to the rotation axis 731 of the first displacement member 730, that is, the second displacement member 740 side). ) is likely to be tilted in a direction that separates it from the front base 720 (forward, to the right in FIG. 47(b)).

On the other hand, when the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are disposed at the retracted position, as shown in FIG. 740 , the distal end portion (second displacement member 740 ) of the first displacement member 730 on the opposite side to the rotation axis 731 is moved away from the front base 720 (forward, 47(b) right side) can be suppressed.

Note that the displacement-side engaging member 742 may be provided to protrude from the back surface of the first displacement member 730; however, in this embodiment, the displacement-side engaging member 742 is provided to protrude from the back surface of the second displacement member 740. be done. Therefore, the engagement position between the base side engagement member 726 and the displacement side engagement member 742 can be set away from the rotation axis 731 of the first displacement member 730. This effectively prevents the tip portion (second displacement member 740) of the first displacement member 730 on the opposite side from the rotation axis 731 from tilting in the direction away from the front base 720 (forward, right side in FIG. 47(b)). can be suppressed to

On the other hand, when the displacement-side engaging member 742 is formed on the second displacement member 740, since the displacement-side engaging member 742 is located away from the rotation axis 731 of the first displacement member 730, the first displacement member 730 in the longitudinal direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 47), and the positional relationship between the base-side engagement member 726 and the displacement-side engagement member 742 becomes unstable. Therefore, when the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are displaced toward the retracted position, it becomes difficult to engage the base side engagement member 726 and the displacement side engagement member 742.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the displacement-side engaging member 742 has a second engagement surface on the inner surface of the bent portion 742b as it goes from the distal end side of the bent portion 742b toward the proximal end side (base portion 742a side). The displacement member 740 is formed to be inclined in a direction approaching the rear surface thereof. This makes it possible to widen the gap between the engagement surface and the back surface of the second displacement member 740 on the receiving side of the displacement side engagement member 742 (the tip side of the bent portion 742b, the upper side of FIG. 47(a)). Even if shaking occurs when the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are displaced toward the retracted position, the base-side engagement member 726 and the displacement-side engagement member 742 can be easily engaged. .

In this way, while making it easier to engage the base-side engaging member 726 and the displacement-side engaging member 742, when these engagements are started, the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are moved to the retracted position. As the second displacement member 740 is displaced toward the front base 720 (left side in FIG. 47(b)), the engagement surface of the base side engagement member 742 (bent portion 742b) becomes inclined. be able to.

As a result, in the retracted position, the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 separate their tip portions (second displacement member 740 side) from the front base 720 using the rotation axis 731 of the first displacement member 730 as a fulcrum. Not only can it suppress tilting in the direction (forward, right side in FIG. 47(b)), it can also suppress the protrusion dimension of the second displacement member 740 from the front base 720, and it can also suppress the protrusion of the second displacement member 740 from the front base 720 due to the above-mentioned inclination. , the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are slightly elastically deformed as a whole, and the front bases of the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are It is possible to suppress rattling relative to 720 and stably maintain its posture in a stopped state.

On the other hand, the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 move their tip portions (second displacement member 740 side) toward the front base 720 (forward , left side in FIG. 47(b)) is permitted. In this case, the base-side engaging member 726 and the displacement-side engaging member 742 are plate-shaped bodies bent to have a substantially doglegged cross section, and when the above-mentioned tilting occurs, the base-side engaging member 726 and the displacement-side engaging member 742 If it collides with the front of 720, it will deform in the direction of bending, so there is a high risk of breakage.

In contrast, according to the present embodiment, as described above, receiving recesses 727 and 743 for receiving the mating bent portions 726b and 742b are formed on the front surface of the front base 720 and the back surface of the second displacement member 740. 47(c), the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are tilted toward the front base 720 (forward, left side in FIG. 47(b)). When this is done, the mating bent portions 726b and 742b can be received in the receiving recesses 727 and 743. Thereby, breakage due to collision between the base-side engaging member 726 and the displacement-side engaging member 742 can be suppressed.

In addition, during the above-mentioned tilting, the front surface of the front base 720 is collided with the entire surface of the rear surface of the second connecting member 770 that faces parallel to the front surface, so that the surface pressure at the time of collision is reduced. (dispersion). Therefore, damage can be suppressed.

48(a) is a partially enlarged view of the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 in the XLVIIIa section of FIG. 45(c), and FIG. 48(b) is a partially enlarged view in the direction of the arrow XLVIIIb of FIG. 48(a). FIG. 7 is a side view of the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 when viewed from above.

As described above, when the left rotation unit 700 is moved from the retracted position to the extended position, the first displacement member 730 is extended, and the second displacement member 740 is moved relative to the first displacement member 730. is relatively displaced (rotated) around the rotation axis 741 (see FIGS. 45(a) to 45(c)).

As shown in FIGS. 48(a) and 48(b), according to the present embodiment, when the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are disposed at the extended position (FIG. 45(c) ), the engagement surface of the displacement-side engagement member 742 (bent portion 742b) is engaged with the engaged portion 735 of the first displacement member 730, and thereby the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 can be combined. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the second displacement member 740 from shaking relative to the first displacement member 730 in the extended position.

In particular, since the engagement surface of the displacement-side engagement member 742 is inclined as described above, the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are slightly elastically deformed due to the inclination. They can be displaced toward each other. Therefore, in the retracted position, rattling between the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 can be suppressed, and the posture thereof can be stably maintained in a stopped state.

In addition, the displacement-side engaging member 742 has the role of engaging with the base-side engaging member 726 of the front base 720 in the retracted position to couple the second displacement member 740 to the front base 720, and also has the role of connecting the second displacement member 740 to the front base 720 in the extended position. Since the second displacement member 740 can be engaged with the engaged portion 735 of the first displacement member 730 and have the role of coupling the second displacement member 740 to the first displacement member 730, the parts for these two roles can be separately provided. There is no need to provide one, and the structure can be simplified accordingly. As a result, parts costs can be reduced.

Next, the winning device 65 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 49 to 55. FIG. 49 is an exploded front perspective view of the winning device 65, and FIG. 50 is an exploded rear perspective view of the winning device 65. 51(a) is a front view of the winning device 65, FIG. 51(b) is a rear view of the winning device 65, and FIG. 51(c) is a top view of the winning device 65.

52(a) and 52(b) are cross-sectional views of the winning device 65 taken along the LIIa-LIIa line in FIG. 51, and FIG. 53(a) and FIG. and a schematic cross-sectional view of the winning device 65 taken along the LIIIa-LIIIa line and the LIIIb-LIIIb line in FIG. 52(b).

Note that illustration of the opening/closing plate 860 is omitted in FIG. 51, and illustration of the guide rib 813a is omitted in FIG. 53. Further, FIG. 52(a) shows a state in which the seesaw member 840 forms a first state, and FIG. 52(b) shows a state in which the seesaw member 840 forms a second state.

As shown in FIGS. 49 to 51, the winning device 65 includes a front base 810, an intermediate base 820 superimposed on the back side of the front base 810, and a back base 830 superimposed on the back side of the intermediate base 820. It is formed mainly of a seesaw member 840 and a driven member 850 that are arranged between the facing surfaces of the front base 810 and the intermediate base 820, and an opening/closing plate 860 that opens and closes the winning opening 65a.

The winning device 65 is formed into a box shape having an internal space by a front base 810, a front base 820, and a back base 830, and the internal space has a guide path through which a winning ball is guided from the winning opening 65a. When the game ball passes through the guide path, the weight of the game ball acts on the seesaw member 840.

When the weight of the game ball is not applied to the seesaw member 840, the seesaw member 840 forms a first state in which one end side (one end decoration part 853) is lowered and the other end side (other end decoration part 843) is raised (Fig. 52(a)), when the weight of the game ball is applied to the other end, a second state is formed in which one end is raised and the other end is lowered (see FIG. 52(b)).

That is, the winning device 65 uses the weight of the game ball passing through the guide path to cause the seesaw member 840 to alternately appear in the first state and the second state, and one end side of the seesaw member 840 (one end decoration The decorative body 853) and the other end side (the other end decorative body 843) are formed so as to be able to perform an effect of vertically displacing them.

Here, as will be described later, in the seesaw member 840, the lengths of the inclined surface 845 and the discharge surface 846 are larger than the length of the receiving surface 844 in the direction connecting one end side and the other end side. Ru. Therefore, when a plurality of balls pass successively, the game balls stay on the inclined surface 845 and the discharge surface 846, and the second state is likely to be maintained. In contrast, in this embodiment, even when a plurality of game balls pass successively, the seesaw member 840 is prevented from remaining in the second state due to the weight of the game balls, and the seesaw member 840 is kept in the first state and the second state. The system is configured to reliably perform a performance that alternately appears. The configuration of the winning device 65 for performing such effects will be explained below.

The front base 810 includes a front substrate 811 forming the front surface thereof, a front first side wall 812, a front second side wall 813, a front first bottom wall 814, and a front second bottom wall 815 protruding from the back surface of the front substrate 811. Mainly prepare for.

In the front base 810, recessed parts 811a and 811b formed by recessing the lower edge thereof are arranged in parallel at a predetermined interval in the width direction. A portion of the driven member 850 (one end decorative portion 853 and the other end decorative portion 843) is exposed so as to be visible to the player.

The first front side wall 812 and the second front side wall 813 are portions that form the side walls of a guide passage for guiding game balls, and are arranged facing each other with a predetermined interval. The first front bottom wall 814 and the second front bottom wall 815 form the bottom wall of the guide passage, and are connected to the lower end sides of the first front side wall 812 and the second front side wall 813, respectively.

The opening between the first front side wall 812 and the second front side wall 813 on the upper end side serves as a prize opening 65a, and game balls flow into the guide path from this open part (winning opening 65a). In this case, the second front side wall 813 is formed substantially vertically, while the first front side wall 812 and the first front bottom wall 814 are inclined downward toward the second front bottom wall 815, and The front second bottom wall 815 is arranged at a lower position than the wall 814. Therefore, the game ball flowing into the guide passage from the prize opening 65a can be guided to the front second bottom wall 815 by the downward slope of the front first side wall 812 and the front first bottom wall 814.

The second front bottom wall 815 is formed with a guide bottom surface 815a that slopes downward toward the side away from the front substrate 811 (that is, toward the intermediate base 830 side). Therefore, the game ball guided by the front second bottom wall 815 rolls along the downward slope of the guide bottom surface 815a and is guided to the guide path (receiving port 821b) of the intermediate base 830.

Note that guide ribs 813a are erected at a plurality of locations (three locations in this embodiment) on the front second side wall 813. The guide rib 813a is formed in such a shape that its standing height from the front second side wall 813 decreases as it is spaced apart from the front base 811, so that its standing end surface is an inclined surface. As a result, for example, as a result of colliding with the front first side wall 812 and being bounced back when flowing (falling) from the prize opening 65a into the guide passage, the game ball advances toward the front second side wall 813 at a relatively high speed. Even in this case, the game ball can be smoothly guided toward the guide path of the intermediate base 830 by the inclined surface of the upright tip of the guide rib 813a.

The intermediate base 820 includes an intermediate substrate 821 facing the front substrate 811 of the front base 810 at a predetermined distance, an intermediate first side wall 822, an intermediate second side wall 823, and an intermediate bottom wall protruding from the back surface of the intermediate substrate 821. 824.

The intermediate board 821 is formed with an opening/closing plate advance/retreat opening 821a, a receiving port 821b, a sending port 821c, and a discharge port 821d.The front of the intermediate board 821 is provided with a support shaft 821e and a bearing 821f. , stopper portions 821g, 821h are provided in a protruding manner.

The opening/closing plate advancing/retracting opening 821a of the intermediate board 821 is an opening for allowing the opening/closing plate 860 to move forward or backward, and when the opening/closing plate 860 is advanced (projected) toward the front base 810 side from the opening/closing plate advancing/retracting opening 821a, a prize is won. When the opening 65a is closed and the opening/closing plate 860 is retreated (evacuated) to the opening/closing plate advancing/retracting opening 821a, the winning opening 65a is opened.

The reception opening 821b of the intermediate board 821 is an opening for receiving the game ball guided from the front second bottom wall 815 (guide bottom surface 815a) of the front base 810 into the guide path on the intermediate base 820 side, and the bottom surface of the opening (Receiving bottom surface 821b1) is formed so as to be continuous with the guide bottom surface 815a of the front second bottom wall 815.

The outlet 821c of the intermediate substrate 821 is an opening for sending game balls from the guide passage on the intermediate base 820 side to the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840, and the bottom surface of the opening is the guide bottom surface 824a of the intermediate bottom wall 824, which will be described later. formed by That is, the game ball that has passed through the guide path on the intermediate base 820 side rolls on the guide bottom surface 824a of the intermediate bottom wall 824, and is sent out from the outlet 821c to the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840.

The discharge port 821d of the intermediate board 821 is an opening for receiving the game ball discharged from the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840, and the bottom surface of the opening is formed by the discharge bottom wall 825. The game ball discharged from the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840 and received by the discharge port 821d rolls on the discharge bottom wall 825 to a discharge passage (not shown) connected to the rear side of the rear base 830. Sent out.

The support shaft 821e of the intermediate board 821 is a shaft-shaped body for rotatably supporting the seesaw member 840, and is inserted into the bearing 841 of the seesaw member 840. The bearing 821f of the intermediate board 821 is a shaft hole for rotatably supporting the driven member 850, and the rotating shaft 851 of the driven member 850 is inserted therethrough.

The stopper portions 821g and 821h of the intermediate board 821 are portions that come into contact with the lower surface of the seesaw member 840 to restrict rotation of the seesaw member 840, and the stopper portion 821g is located at the other end of the seesaw member 840 in the longitudinal direction. The stopper portion 821h is formed to be able to come into contact with the lower surface (the surface opposite to the receiving surface 844) of the seesaw member 840 on one longitudinal end side. be done.

Note that the first state of the seesaw member 840 is formed by the rotation of the seesaw member 840 being restricted by the stopper portion 821h (see FIG. 52(a)), and the second state is formed by the rotation of the seesaw member 840 being restricted by the stopper portion 821h. It is formed by being regulated by the portion 821g (see FIG. 52(b)).

Here, as described above, the stopper portion 821g is formed at a position where it can come into contact with the lower surface of the seesaw member 840 opposite to the ejection surface 846, so that the ejection of the game balls can be stabilized. That is, when a game ball is placed on the ejection surface 846 of the seesaw member 840 and the second state is formed by its weight, the stopper portion 821g supports the lower surface on the opposite side to the ejection surface 846, so for example, the stopper portion 821h Compared to the case where the stopper portion 821g supports a position close to the support shaft 821e (for example, the lower surface on the opposite side to the inclined surface 845) as shown in FIG. As a result, the ejection of game balls from the ejection surface 846 can be stabilized.

The intermediate first side wall 822 and the intermediate second side wall 823 are parts that form the side walls of the guide passage on the intermediate base 820 side (the passage that guides the game balls received from the receiving port 821b to the sending port 821c), and are spaced at a predetermined interval. They are arranged facing each other while being separated from each other. That is, the intermediate first side wall 822 and the intermediate second side wall 823 receive the game balls sent out from the guide path on the front base 810 side in the horizontal direction (left-right direction in FIG. 52(a)) from the receiving opening 821b, and also The received game ball is guided toward the intermediate bottom wall 824 along a substantially vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 52(a)).

The intermediate bottom wall 824 is a portion forming the bottom wall of the guide passage on the intermediate base 820 side, and is connected to the lower end sides of the intermediate first side wall 822 and the intermediate second side wall 823, respectively. The intermediate bottom wall 824 is formed with a guide bottom surface 824a that slopes downward toward the outlet 821c side (that is, the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840). The game ball guided through the guide path on the intermediate base 820 side rolls on the guide bottom surface 824a of the intermediate bottom wall 824, and passes through the outlet 821c to the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840 in a substantially horizontal direction (Fig. 52(a) horizontal direction).

In this way, the guide path on the intermediate base 820 side is provided with an intermediate bottom wall 824 (guide bottom surface 824a), and the game ball rolling on the guide bottom surface 824a is moved horizontally to the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840. Since it is guided from the side, it is possible to guide the game balls one by one to the receiving surface 844, and as in the case where the game balls are dropped from above the receiving surface 844, a plurality of game balls can be This prevents balls from stacking up. Thereby, as will be described later, even if a plurality of game balls pass through the guide path in succession, the seesaw member 840 can be easily switched between the first state and the second state.

Here, among the guide passages on the intermediate base 820 side, the extended length of the guide passage that guides the game ball along a substantially horizontal direction toward the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840 is twice the diameter of the game ball. It is preferable to set the following. In this embodiment, the horizontal distance L (see FIG. 52(a)) from the extending tip of the guide bottom surface 824a to the later-described back wall 831 of the back base 830 is set to 1.5 times the diameter of the game ball. be done. Thereby, as will be described later, even when a plurality of game balls pass through the guide path in succession, the game balls can be guided one by one on the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840 at intervals.

Moreover, the opposing interval between the intermediate first side wall 822 and the intermediate second side wall 823 is set to a dimension equivalent to the diameter of the game ball. Therefore, the position of the game ball can be defined between the opposing surfaces of the intermediate first side wall 822 and the intermediate second side wall 823, so that the game ball rolled on the guide bottom surface 824a and sent out from the outlet 821c is always kept in the position of the seesaw member 840. can be received by the receiving surface 844 (guided to the same position on the receiving surface 844).

In this case, in the first state, the guide bottom surface 824a of the intermediate bottom wall 824 is formed such that the height position of its downwardly inclined end is higher than the height position of the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840 ( (See FIG. 53(a)). Thereby, as will be described later, the game ball can be smoothly guided from the guide bottom surface 824a to the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840, and the transition to the second state can be quickly performed.

On the other hand, in the second state, the height position of the end of the downward slope is formed to be lower than the height position of the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840 (see FIG. 53(b)). Thereby, as will be described later, the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840 can be easily lowered by using the step formed between the guide bottom surface 824a and the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840, and the first state is formed. It can be made easier.

The rear base 830 mainly includes a rear wall 831, a discharge side wall 832, and a discharge ceiling wall 833. The rear wall 831 is in contact with the rear side end surfaces of the intermediate first side wall 822, the intermediate second side wall 823, and the intermediate bottom wall 824 of the intermediate base body 820 (that is, it is covered by the open part on the rear side). This part forms the wall on the back side of the guide passage (rear wall).

The discharge side wall 832 and the discharge ceiling wall 833 are parts that form the side wall and ceiling wall of a guide passage for guiding game balls from the discharge port 821d of the intermediate base 820 to the discharge passage (not shown). It extends along the outer edge of the That is, the cross-sectional shape of the guide passage taken in by the discharge bottom wall 825 of the intermediate base 820, the discharge side wall 832, and the discharge ceiling wall 833 of the rear base 830 is approximately the same shape as the shape of the discharge port 821d of the intermediate base 820. Ru. As a result, the width of the guide passage can be secured, so that a plurality of game balls can be guided smoothly. Moreover, even if a subsequent game ball collides with a previous game ball on the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840 and is thrown up, the subsequent game ball can be smoothly guided. Details will be described later.

The seesaw member 840 includes a bearing 841 formed approximately at the central portion in the longitudinal direction, a connecting pin 842 formed at one end in the longitudinal direction, a decorative portion 843 at the other end formed at the other end in the longitudinal direction, and a decorative portion 843 formed at the other end in the longitudinal direction. It mainly includes a receiving surface 844, an inclined surface 845, a discharge surface 846, and a claw portion 847 erected on the discharge surface 846.

As described above, the bearing 841 is a hole with a circular cross section into which the support shaft 821e protruding from the intermediate substrate 821 of the intermediate base 820 is rotatably inserted. 840 is rotatably supported between opposing surfaces of the front base 810 and the intermediate base 820.

The connecting pin 842 is a shaft-like body with a circular cross section, and is slidably inserted into a connecting groove 852, which will be described later, of the driven member 850. Thereby, rotation of seesaw member 840 can be transmitted to driven member 850. That is, when the seesaw member 840 is rotated about the support shaft 821e, the coupling pin 842 acts on the coupling groove 852, so that rotation about the rotation axis 851 of the driven member 850 can be formed. .

The other end decorative portion 843 is a portion decorated with a pattern or the like on the front, and is exposed to the player through the recessed notch 811b of the front base 810, as described above.

The receiving surface 844 is a flat surface portion that receives the game ball rolled on the guide bottom surface 824a and sent out from the outlet 821c in the guide path of the intermediate base 820, and the inclined surface 845 is a part where the receiving surface 844 is This is a flat portion for rolling the received game ball to the ejection surface 846.

These receiving surfaces 844 and inclined surfaces 845 are in an unloaded state (i.e., the first state, see FIG. 52(a) ) is formed in a shape having a downward slope toward the discharge surface 846. Therefore, in either the first state or the second state, the game balls received by the receiving surface 644 can be rolled from the receiving surface 644 and the inclined surface 643 toward the ejection surface 646.

Here, in this embodiment, the receiving surface 844 is located closer to one longitudinal end of the seesaw member 840 than the axis of the bearing 841 (left side in FIG. 52(a)), so the receiving surface 844 is in the second state (the other end is lowered). When the receiving surface 844 receives a game ball in the state in which the one end side is raised (see FIG. 52(b)), the one end side in the longitudinal direction (receiving surface 844 side) is raised due to the weight of the received game ball. It can be lowered. As a result, as will be described later, even if a plurality of game balls are dropped in succession, it is possible to easily switch between the first state and the second state.

The discharge surface 846 is a flat surface portion for sending (discharging) the game balls from the seesaw member 840 to the discharge port 821d of the intermediate base 820, and is a flat portion for sending (discharging) the game balls from the seesaw member 840 to the discharge port 821d of the intermediate base 820. It is formed by sloping downward from the front side to the back side of the page. Therefore, when the game ball is rolled to the discharge surface 846, the game ball can be rolled toward the discharge port 821d of the intermediate base 820 due to the downward slope of the discharge surface 846.

The claw portion 847 is for switching the rolling direction of the game ball toward the discharge port 821d of the intermediate base 820 when the game ball rolls on the discharge surface 846 along the longitudinal direction of the seesaw member 840. It is provided with a guide surface 847a formed as an inclined surface that guides the abutted game ball toward the discharge port 821d. Thereby, the game balls rolling on the discharge surface 846 can be easily made to quickly flow into the discharge port 821d. Therefore, as will be described later, the time during which the game ball is placed on the ejection surface 846 of the seesaw member 840 (that is, the time during which the second state is formed) is shortened, and the first state and the second state are changed. The alternating switching can be performed smoothly.

In this case, the claw portion 847 is formed on the other end of the seesaw member 840 in the longitudinal direction, and is biased towards the side closer to the front base 810 (opposite the outlet 821d) in the width direction of the seesaw member 840. will be established. As a result, as will be described later, when the position of the game ball rolling on the exit surface 846 varies in the width direction of the seesaw member 840, the time during which the game ball is placed on the ejection surface 846 of the seesaw member 840 (i.e. , the time during which the second state is formed) can be easily kept constant, and as a result, the alternating switching between the first state and the second state can be performed smoothly.

The driven member 850 has a rotating shaft 851 protruding from the back surface of the other longitudinal end of the driven member 850, and an elongated hole-shaped hole in the front view arranged in parallel below the rotating shaft 851. The connecting groove 852 is formed in the front of the driven member 850 and is visually exposed to the player through the recessed notch 811b of the front base 810. Prepare for.

As described above, the rotating shaft 851 is a shaft-shaped body that is rotatably inserted into the bearing 821f that protrudes from the intermediate substrate 821 of the intermediate base 820, and the driven member 850 is inserted through the rotating shaft 851 and the bearing 821f. is rotatably supported between opposing surfaces of the front base 810 and the intermediate base 820.

As described above, the connecting groove 852 is a concave groove into which the connecting pin 842 of the seesaw member 840 is slidably inserted. , the driven member 850 is rotated as the seesaw member 840 rotates.

Note that when the seesaw member 840 is transitioned from the first state to the second state, the inner wall surface of the connecting groove 852 is pushed up by the connecting pin 842 of the seesaw member 840, and the driven member 850 rotates around the rotating shaft 851 as shown in FIG. (a) By rotating clockwise, the interlocking member 850 (one end decorative portion 853) is raised (see FIG. 52(b)). On the other hand, when the seesaw member 840 is transitioned from the second state to the first state, the inner wall surface of the connecting groove 852 is pushed down by the connecting pin 842 of the seesaw member 840, and the driven member 850 rotates about the rotating shaft 851 as shown in FIG. (a) By rotating clockwise, the interlocking member 850 (one end decorative portion 853) is lowered (see FIG. 52(a)).

In this embodiment, in this way, the connecting pin 842 of the seesaw member 840 is connected to the connecting groove 852 of the driven member 850 to constitute a link mechanism that rotates the driven member 850 as the seesaw member 840 rotates. The link ratio of the link mechanism is set to a ratio that amplifies the rotation angle of the driven member 850 relative to the rotation angle of the seesaw member 840. Thereby, the movable range of the driven member 850 (one end decorative portion 853) can be expanded, and the performance effect accompanying its displacement can be enhanced.

Here, since the seesaw member 840 is rotated using the weight of the game ball, the transition from the first state to the second state can be easily performed at high speed and can be performed in a relatively short time. On the other hand, in the transition from the second state to the first state, the seesaw member 840 needs to be rotated only by its own weight, so the operation becomes slow and takes a long time. In order to reliably switch the seesaw member 840 between the first state and the second state when a plurality of game balls successively pass through the guide path, it is necessary to change the transition from the second state to the first state. It is necessary to do so promptly.

In this case, according to the present embodiment, the driven member 850 is connected to one longitudinal end of the seesaw member 840, so that the weight of the driven member 850 is reduced by an external force that lowers the one longitudinal end of the seesaw member 840. (that is, an auxiliary force for transitioning from the second state to the first state). Thereby, the time required for transition from the second state to the first state can be shortened, and as a result, even when a plurality of game balls pass through the guide path in succession, the first state of the seesaw member 840 It is possible to easily switch between the first state and the second state.

Next, the operation of the winning device 65 will be explained. When game balls flow into the guide path on the front base 810 side from the prize opening 65a, the game balls are collected on the front second bottom wall 815 and roll on the guide bottom surface 815a of the front second bottom wall 815. As a result, it is guided in a substantially horizontal direction (to the right in FIGS. 53(a) and 53(b)), and flows into the guide passage on the intermediate base 820 side from the receiving port 821b of the intermediate base 820.

The game ball that has flowed into the guide path on the intermediate base 820 side moves between the opposing surfaces of the intermediate first side wall 822 and the intermediate second side wall 823 in a substantially vertical direction (downward in FIGS. 53(a) and 53(b)). and reaches the intermediate bottom wall 824. When the game ball reaches the intermediate bottom wall 824, its guiding direction is switched. That is, the game ball is guided in a substantially horizontal direction (to the left in FIGS. 53(a) and 53(b)) by rolling on the guide bottom surface 824a of the intermediate bottom wall 824, and the intermediate base 820 is moved. It is sent out from the outlet 821c to the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840.

As shown in FIG. 52(a), when the seesaw member 840 forming the first state receives a game ball on its receiving surface 844, the game ball rolls the receiving surface 844 and the inclined surface 845 toward the ejection surface 846. The weight of the game ball causes the seesaw member 840 to rotate clockwise as shown in FIG. A second state is formed, as shown at 52(b). However, in FIG. 52(b), illustration of the game ball is omitted.

When the game ball is discharged from the discharge surface 846 to the discharge port 821d of the intermediate base 820 and a no-load state is formed in which the weight of the game ball is not applied to the seesaw member 840, the seesaw member 840 rotates the rotating shaft 841 by its own weight. It is rotated counterclockwise in FIG. 52(b) about the center (the other end in the longitudinal direction (the other end decorative portion 843 side) is raised), and the first state is formed as shown in FIG. 52(a). (The seesaw member 840 is returned to the first state).

In this case, when a plurality of game balls are successively guided by the seesaw member 840, the seesaw member 840 is moved to the second state (the other end in the longitudinal direction (the other end decorative portion 843 side) is lowered due to the weight of the game balls). There is a possibility that the first state and the second state cannot be alternately switched.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840 is located closer to one end in the longitudinal direction (on the left side in FIG. 52(b)) than the rotating shaft 841. As shown, even when the seesaw member 840 forming the second state receives a game ball on its receiving surface 844, one end in the longitudinal direction can be lowered by the weight of the game ball supported by the receiving surface 844. That is, the seesaw member 840 is rotated counterclockwise as shown in FIG. 52(b) about the rotating shaft 841 (the other longitudinal end side (the other end decorative portion 843 side) is raised), as shown in FIG. 52(b). The second state can be formed (or made easier to form). As a result, even when a plurality of game balls are guided in succession, it is possible to easily switch between the first state and the second state.

Here, in this embodiment, as described above, a guide passage for guiding game balls is formed in the internal spaces of the front base 810, intermediate base 820, and back base 830, so a plurality of game balls are released from the winning opening 65a. Even when continuously flowing in, it is possible to store a plurality of game balls by using the guide passage, and to guide the plurality of game balls to the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840 in order. can.

However, even in the case where a plurality of game balls are stored using the guide passage and the game balls are sequentially guided to the guide surface 844 of the seesaw member 840 in this way, the game balls do not reach the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840. In the form where the game balls are guided by falling from above, these plurality of game balls tend to pile up on the receiving surface 844, and rolling the game balls from the receiving surface 844 to the inclined surface 845 is inhibited, so the seesaw member 840 It is not possible to alternately switch between the first state and the second state.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, a horizontal passage (intermediate bottom wall 824 ) is formed, and the game ball rolling on the guide bottom surface 824a of the horizontal path is guided to the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840 from a substantially horizontal direction (left and right directions in FIGS. 53(a) and 5(b)). I can do it. As a result, the game balls can be guided one by one from the horizontal path to the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840 (that is, the receiving surface 844 can receive the game balls one by one from the horizontal path), and It is possible to avoid stacking a plurality of game balls vertically on the receiving surface 844. Therefore, the seesaw member 840 can be easily switched between the first state and the second state.

In this case, as described above, the guide path on the intermediate base 820 side guides the game ball along the substantially vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 52(a)) between the opposing surfaces of the intermediate first side wall 822 and the intermediate second side wall 823. A horizontal passageway (intermediate bottom wall 824) is connected to the downstream side of the upstream passageway, and the extended length of the horizontal passageway is made shorter than twice the diameter of the game ball. Thereby, even when a plurality of game balls are stored in the guide path, the game balls can be guided one by one on the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840 while being spaced apart from each other.

That is, by setting the extended length of the horizontal passage (intermediate bottom wall 824) to a dimension smaller than twice the diameter of the game ball (in this embodiment, from the extended end of the guide bottom surface 824a to the back surface (The horizontal distance L of the base 830 to the back wall 831, which will be described later, is approximately 1.5 times the diameter of the game ball), only one game ball can exist in this horizontal passage, and Since the extending direction of the horizontal passage and the extending direction of the upstream passage are different from each other, when the ball flows from the upstream passage to the horizontal passage, it becomes necessary to change the direction of the inflow, and the The time required for flowing into the horizontal passage can be increased by the change in direction.

Therefore, when the first game ball existing in the horizontal passage (intermediate bottom wall 824) is guided to the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840, the game ball after the upstream passage (the next game ball) changes direction. It takes time for the game ball to flow into the horizontal passage, and the subsequent game ball is guided from the horizontal passage to the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840. That is, the later game ball is spaced apart from the previous game ball. As a result, the game balls can be guided one ball at a time to the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840 at intervals.

As shown in FIGS. 52(b) and 53(b), in the second state, the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840 is located above the downwardly inclined end of the guide bottom surface 824a of the horizontal passage (intermediate bottom wall 824). Therefore, a step in the height direction (vertical direction in FIG. 53(b)) can be formed between the receiving surface 844 and the guide bottom surface 824a. As a result, in the second state, when rolling the guide bottom surface 824a of the horizontal passage to guide the game ball to the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840, the game ball is caused to ride on the receiving surface 844 (collide with a step). This riding motion (collision) can be used to make it easier to lower the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840 (move downward in FIG. 53(b)). That is, it is possible to easily lower one end side in the longitudinal direction of the seesaw member 840, and it is possible to easily form the first state. As a result, even when a plurality of game balls are guided in succession, the first state The state and the second state can be easily switched alternately.

On the other hand, when the seesaw member 840 forms the first state (see FIGS. 52(a) and 53(a)), the seesaw member 840 is in an unloaded state and the guide bottom of the horizontal passage (intermediate bottom wall 824) The game ball guided from 824a and received by the receiving surface 844 is quickly rolled toward the inclined surface 845 and the discharge surface 846, and the weight of the game ball is applied to the other end of the seesaw member 840 in the longitudinal direction. It is desired to lower it (to form a second state).

In this case, as shown in FIGS. 52(a) and 53(a), in the first state, the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840 is lower than the downwardly inclined end of the guide bottom surface 824a of the horizontal passage (intermediate bottom wall 824). Since the ball is also located below, there is no need for the game ball to ride on the receiving surface 844 (collide with the step) as in the case of the second state described above, and it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a time lag in such an operation. Therefore, the game ball can be quickly rolled from the receiving surface 844 toward the inclined surface 845 and the ejection surface 846 to easily form the second state.

In addition, in the first state, the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840 is formed to be at the same height position (flush position) as the downwardly inclined end of the guide bottom surface 824a of the horizontal passageway (intermediate bottom wall 824). It is preferable to do so. When the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840 is located below the guide bottom surface 824a of the horizontal passage, the game ball is dropped from the guide bottom surface 824a to the receiving surface 844, so the game ball bounces and This is because a time lag occurs and the load on the rotating shaft 841 of the seesaw member 840 increases due to the impact of the fall, but these can be eliminated if the positions are at the same height.

Next, the claw portion 847 of the seesaw member 840 will be explained with reference to FIG. 54. FIG. 54 is a partially enlarged sectional view of the winning device 65 taken along the line LIV-LIV in FIG. 52(b).

As shown in FIG. 54, the seesaw member 840 has a claw portion 847 erected from its discharge surface 846. The claw portion 847 includes a guide surface 847a that is formed to be inclined so as to approach the discharge port 821d from the inclined surface 825 side toward the other end decorative portion 843 side. As a result, when the game ball rolls along the longitudinal direction of the seesaw member 840 (left-right direction in FIG. 54) on the ejection surface 846 toward the other end decorative portion 843 side (right side in FIG. 54), the game ball can be brought into contact with the guide surface 847a of the claw portion 847 to switch its rolling direction to the direction toward the discharge port 821d of the intermediate base 820 (upward in FIG. 54). The time during which the game ball is placed on the ejection surface 846 of the seesaw member 840 (that is, the time during which the second state is formed) can be shortened, and as a result, the alternating switching between the first state and the second state can be reduced. It can be done smoothly.

In this case, as described above, the claw portion 847 is located on the other longitudinal end side of the seesaw member 840 (the other end decorative portion 843 side, the right side in FIG. 54) on the discharge surface 846, and In the vertical direction in FIG. 54), it is biased toward the side closer to the front base 810 (the side opposite to the discharge port 821d, the lower side in FIG. 54). As a result, when the position of the game ball rolling on the ejection surface 846 varies in the width direction of the seesaw member 840, the time the game ball is placed on the ejection surface 846 of the seesaw member 840 (i.e., the second state is As a result, the alternating switching between the first state and the second state can be smoothly performed.

That is, in the width direction of the seesaw member 840 (vertical direction in FIG. 54), the game ball rolling on the discharge surface 846 on the side close to the front base 810 (the side opposite to the discharge port 821d, the bottom side in FIG. 54) is located at the discharge port. A game ball that has a long distance to the discharge port 821d and rolls on the discharge surface 846 on the side close to the intermediate base 820 (the side close to the discharge port 821d, the upper side in FIG. 54) has a short distance to the discharge port 821d.

Therefore, by arranging the claw portion 847 biased toward the side closer to the front base 810 (the side opposite to the discharge port 821d, the lower side in FIG. 54) in the width direction of the seesaw member 840, the claw portion 847 can be disposed closer to the front base 810. The former game ball that rolls on the ejection surface 846 on the side (lower side in FIG. 54) collides with the guide surface 847a of the claw part 847 at an early stage, and is ejected from the ejection surface 846 to the ejection port 821d. Regarding the latter game ball rolling on the ejection surface 846 on the side close to 820 (upper side in FIG. 54), the collision with the guide surface 847a of the claw portion 847 can be delayed or prevented from colliding. Thereby, in each of the former and latter, the total time the game ball is rolling on the ejection surface 846 can be made close to the same. As a result, even if the rolling position of the game ball varies in the width direction of the seesaw member 840, the time during which the weight of the game ball acts on the discharge surface 846 can be easily kept constant.

Next, the discharge port 821d of the intermediate base 820 will be described with reference to FIG. 55. 55 is a schematic back view of the winning device 65, in which FIG. 55(a) is in the first state shown in FIG. 52(a), and FIG. 55(b) is in the second state shown in FIG. 52(b). correspond to each.

As shown in FIGS. 55(a) and 55(b), the width dimension of the discharge port 821d (the horizontal dimension in FIGS. 55(a) and 55(b)) is larger than twice the diameter of the game ball. The size is set to be large (approximately 2.5 times larger in this embodiment). As a result, while the previous game ball is present at the other end in the longitudinal direction of the seesaw member 840 (the left side in FIGS. 55(a) and 55(b)), the next game ball is further moved to the other end in the longitudinal direction. Even when the game balls are rolled toward each other, each of these game balls can smoothly flow into the discharge port 821d.

For example, the next game ball collides with the first game ball rolling on the ejection surface 846, and the second game ball is bounced back to the opposite side to the rolling direction (that is, the distance between both game balls (see FIG. 55). 55(b) is expanded in the width direction of the ejection port 821d), even if these game balls are ejected to the ejection port 821d, the width dimension of the ejection port 821 is sufficient. By ensuring that each of them is secured, each can be flowed smoothly.

Further, the height dimension of the discharge port 821d (the vertical dimension in FIGS. 55(a) and 55(b)) is the height dimension on the inclined surface 845 side than the height dimension on the discharge surface 846 side of the seesaw member 840. is set to a larger size. With this also, in a state where the previous game ball is present on the other end side in the longitudinal direction of the seesaw member 840 (the left side in FIGS. 55(a) and 55(b)), the next game ball is further placed on the other end side in the longitudinal direction. Even when the balls are rolled toward the ball, each of these game balls can smoothly flow into the discharge port 821d.

That is, the next game ball collides with the first game ball rolling on the ejection surface 846, and the next game ball is thrown upward, or is bounced to the opposite side to the rolling direction and hits the inclined surface. Even when the ball is flipped upward at 845, the height of the outlet 821d on the side of the inclined surface 845 can be used to smoothly flow the subsequent game ball into the outlet 821. On the other hand, even if the first game ball is collided with the next game ball, it is difficult to be thrown up, so by keeping the height of the discharge port 821d on the discharge surface 846 side low, the space required for the discharge port 821d can be reduced. By suppressing this, space for arranging other members can be secured accordingly.

Next, the game area will be explained with reference to FIGS. 56 to 60. 56 and 57 are partially enlarged views of the game board 13 in which the LVI portion of FIG. 2 is partially enlarged. Note that FIG. 57 shows a state in which the center frame 86 is removed.

As shown in FIGS. 56 and 57, the game board 13 has nails, windmills, inner rails 61, outer rails 62, various prize openings (see FIG. 2), a center frame 86, etc. assembled on a wooden base plate 60. As mentioned above, the area on the front side of the game board 13 divided by the inner rail 12 is the game area (the area where nails, prize openings, etc. are arranged, and where the fired balls flow down). Ru.

An opening is formed in the center of the game board 13, and a third symbol display device 81, which is a display device, can be visually recognized. In this case, conventionally, the opening of the game board 13 is made larger than the external shape of the third symbol display device 81, and a production device disposed movably toward the back side of the game board 13 (base board 60). An area where people can be seen is secured. However, there is a limit to increasing the opening of the game board 13 because it is necessary to secure an area for the ball to flow down.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the center frame 86 that is installed inside the opening of the game board 13 (the opening 60a of the base plate 60) is formed from a light-transmitting material, and a part of the center frame 86 (hereinafter referred to as (referred to as "area forming part R") forms a part of the gaming area. Thereby, the presentation device (in this embodiment, the left rotation unit 700) can be visually recognized through the area forming portion R of the center frame 86 (through it). Therefore, the area in which the left rotation unit 700 can be visually recognized can be increased while ensuring an area for the ball to flow down. However, in FIG. 56, in order to simplify the drawing, illustration of the left rotation unit 700 that is visible through the region forming part R is omitted.

In this case, in this embodiment, the opening of the game board 13 (the opening 60a of the base plate 60) is formed such that its inner edge reaches the outer edge of the game area (i.e., the inner rail 61), so the center frame The area where the production device (left rotation unit 700) can be visually recognized can be secured to the maximum extent through the area forming portion R of 86.

On the other hand, since the width of the area forming part R of the center frame 86 is set to a size that allows only one game ball to pass through, the area forming part R of the center frame 86 is (without going through part R), it is possible to secure the maximum area where the production device (left rotation unit 700) can be directly viewed.

Hereinafter, the detailed configuration of the area forming portion R in the center frame 86 will be described with reference to FIGS. 58 to 60. 58 is a front perspective view of the center frame 86, and FIG. 59 is a front view of the region forming portion R. Further, FIG. 60 is a cross-sectional view of the region forming portion R taken along the line LX-LX in FIG. 59. Note that in FIG. 60, the left rotation unit 700 is schematically illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 58, the center frame 86 includes a frame plate base 910 formed in a frame shape when viewed from the front, and an inner frame erected from the back side of the frame plate base 910 and fitted into the opening 60a of the base plate 60. It mainly includes a fitting wall part 920 and an inner edge defining wall part 930 that is erected from the front surface of the frame base 910 opposite to the inner fitting wall part 920 and defines the inner edge of the game area.

The frame board base 910 is a part that is superimposed on the front surface of the base board 60, and the front side thereof is used as the area where the game ball is flowed down. The frame plate base 910 is provided with a plurality of insertion holes 911 through which tapping screws for fastening and fixing the center frame 86 to the base plate 60 are inserted. Further, the outer edge of the frame board base 910 is formed to be sloped downward so as to smoothly connect to the front surface of the base board 60. This inclination allows the game ball to roll smoothly.

As shown in FIGS. 59 and 60, in the area forming portion R of the center frame 86, a columnar portion 940, a side wall portion 950, and a downstream wall portion 960 are provided upright from the front surface of the frame plate base 910.

The columnar portion 940 is formed as a columnar body having a substantially diamond-shaped cross section, and is disposed at an intermediate position between the inner rail 61 and the inner edge defining wall portion 930 (see FIG. 56). As a result, in the upstream portion of the region forming portion R, a first path M1 is defined between the columnar body 940 and the inner rail 61, and a second path M1 is defined between the columnar body 940 and the inner edge defining wall portion 930. M2 is partitioned.

The side wall portion 950 is formed as a wall portion arranged in parallel with the inner rail 61 on the downstream side of the columnar body 940, and defines a third path M3 between the side wall portion 950 and the inner edge defining wall portion 930. In this case, the portion of the inner edge defining wall portion 930 that faces the side wall portion 950 is closer to the inner rail 61 than the portion that faces the columnar body 940.

Thereby, the downstream side of the second path M2 is bent toward the inner rail 61 side (side wall portion 450 side). On the other hand, since the first route M1 and the third route M3 are routes formed along the inner rail 61, they are connected to each other in a substantially straight line. Moreover, the first path M1 and the third path M3 are formed as linear paths that cause the ball to flow down in an inclined direction when viewed from the front.

A groove 971 is provided in the front surface of the frame plate base 910 . The concave groove 971 is a part for suppressing the falling speed of the game ball, and is formed as a concave part having an inverted triangular cross section, and repeats bending from side to side like a saw blade when viewed from the front. It extends along the direction of the three routes M3.

Protrusions 972 are provided on opposing surfaces of the side wall portion 950 and the inner edge defining wall portion 930, respectively. The protrusion 972 is a part for suppressing the downward speed of the game ball, has a substantially semicircular cross section, and extends along the direction in which both the walls 930 and 950 are erected. Each of these protrusions 972 is arranged at a position out of phase with the bent portion of the groove 971 along the path direction of the third path M3.

The downstream wall portion 960 is formed as a wall portion connected to the downstream end of the side wall portion 950, and faces the downstream side of the third path M3. Specifically, it is formed as a wall section substantially perpendicular to the downstream direction of the third path M3. In this case, a portion of the inner edge defining wall 930 corresponding to the downstream wall 940 is formed along the downstream wall 960, so that a fourth A route M4 is defined.

Note that the width dimension of the first route M1 (the opposing interval between the inner rail 61 and the columnar body 640), the width dimension of the second route M2 (the opposing interval between the columnar body 640 and the inner edge defining wall portion 930), and the width of the third route M3. The dimensions (the opposing distance between the side wall portion 950 and the inner edge defining wall portion 930) and the width dimension of the fourth path M4 (the opposing distance between the downstream wall portion 960 and the inner edge defining wall portion 930) allow only one game ball to pass through. Each width dimension is set. In this embodiment, it is set to approximately 1.2 times the diameter of the game ball.

Next, an explanation will be given of the effect that the region forming portion R formed in this way has on the game ball flowing down. A game ball that is guided by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 and flows down from the upper area of the game area is bounced off a nail or rolled along the inner edge defining wall part 930, and then passes through the first path M1 or the first path M1. It flows into the region forming part R from either of the two paths M2. The game ball passing through the first path M1 or the second path M2 and flowing down the third path M3 collides with the downstream wall portion 960, and flows down to the lower area of the game area via the fourth path M4.

Here, since the region forming portion R is a part of the center frame 86 and is formed from a resin material, nails cannot be implanted therein. Therefore, the falling speed of the game balls cannot be reduced, and there is a possibility that it becomes difficult for the player to visually recognize the falling game balls.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, the downstream wall portion 960 is provided upright in the region forming portion R on the downstream side of the third path M3 (the confluence portion of the third path M3 and the fourth path M4). By colliding with the downstream wall portion 960, the speed of the game ball flowing down can be reduced, making it easier for the player to visually recognize the game ball flowing down.

In this case, the downstream wall portion 960 is erected from the frame plate substrate 910, that is, it is formed integrally with the center frame 86, so it can be easily molded by resin molding with a mold, and the downstream wall portion 960 There is no need to perform complicated work such as forming the frame as a separate part and fastening it to the frame board 910. Therefore, manufacturing costs can be reduced accordingly.

On the other hand, the third path M3 is formed in a straight line, and the downstream wall portion 960 made of a resin material is responsible for the part where the game balls are repeatedly collided with, where the falling speed of the game balls is relatively high. , there is a risk of damage. On the other hand, since the downstream wall portion 960 is connected to the downstream side of the side wall portion 950, the rigidity of the downstream wall portion 960 can be increased, and damage to the downstream wall portion 960 can be suppressed.

In this case, an inclined surface 961 that slopes toward the fourth path M4 is formed at the connecting portion between the side wall portion 950 and the downstream wall portion 960. Thereby, the connecting portion between the side wall portion 950 and the downstream wall portion 960 can be formed into a triangular shape when viewed from the front as shown in FIG. 59, so that the rigidity of the downstream wall portion 960 can be increased accordingly.

In addition, when the game ball flowing down the third route M3 collides with the downstream wall portion 960 after colliding with the inclined surface 961, it is possible to suppress the game ball from bouncing in the direction of flowing backward through the third route M3. , it is possible to flow down toward the exit of the third path M3 while reducing the flow speed. Thereby, the game ball can be smoothly guided to the fourth path M4, and the burden on the downstream wall portion 960 can be reduced. Therefore, from this point as well, damage to the downstream wall portion 960 can be suppressed.

Note that the side wall portion 950 is also a portion that is formed integrally with the center frame 86 and can be easily molded by resin molding with a mold, so it may be formed as a separate component in the same way as the downstream wall portion 960. There is no need to perform complicated work such as fastening and fixing to the frame plate substrate 910, and manufacturing costs can be reduced accordingly. Further, since the side wall portion 950, which serves to partition the third path M3, can also serve to increase the rigidity of the downstream wall portion 960, the structure can be simplified and the cost of parts can be reduced accordingly. I can do it.

Here, in the conventional game machine, the manner in which the game ball flowing down the game area collides with the inner rail 61 is after colliding with a nail and bouncing, so the speed is relatively slow and this collision is Damage to the inner rail 61 was unlikely to occur.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, as described above, an area where the production device (left rotation unit 700) can be directly seen through the opening of the center frame 86 (i.e., not through the area forming part R). In order to ensure the maximum width, the width of the region forming portion R is set to a narrow dimension (in this embodiment, the third path M3 is set to a width dimension that allows passage of only a 1-to-1 game ball). That is, the width of the gaming area is narrowed down by the area forming portion R. Therefore, on the upstream side of the area forming part R, it is necessary to greatly change the direction of the game balls flowing down the game area (in this embodiment, it is necessary to form the second path M2). In such a form, a part of the game ball (the game ball flowing down the second path M2) collides with the inner rail 61 at a relatively high speed, which may cause damage to the inner rail 61 (bending due to the collision). .

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, since the side wall portion 750 is arranged in parallel with the inner rail 61, the side wall portion 950 catches the game ball flowing down the second path M2 and prevents it from colliding with the inner rail 61. It can be avoided. As a result, damage (bending due to collision) to the inner rail 61 can be suppressed.

That is, it is conceivable to not form the side wall portion 750 and to allow the inner rail 61 to also serve the role of dividing the third path M3, but in this case, it is necessary to avoid collision of the game ball with the inner rail 61. Therefore, the width cannot be reduced on the upstream side of the region forming portion R, and the opening of the center frame 86 (inner edge defining wall portion 930) must be arranged in a direction away from the inner rail 61. Therefore, the area where the presentation device (left rotation unit 700) can be directly viewed is reduced accordingly. Therefore, this embodiment in which the side wall portion 750 is arranged in parallel with the inner rail 61 results in maximizing the area in which the presentation device (left rotation unit 700) can be directly viewed.

As described above, since the side wall portion 750 is integrally formed as a part of the center frame 86 made of a light-transmitting material, there is no light from the light emitting body on the back side of the center frame 86 (the side wall portion 950, the groove 971, etc.). It can function as a light guide that guides the emitted light P to the gaming area. For example, the light P emitted from the back side and introduced into the side wall section 950 can be guided to the upright end surface of the side wall section 950 (the upper surface in FIG. 60) and irradiated from the upright end surface. Not only can the effect of the emitted light P be produced, but also the light P guided to the side surface of the side wall section 950 (the surface facing the inner edge defining wall section 930) can be irradiated from the side surface of the side wall section 950. can do. As a result, the light is guided to the front of the frame board base 910 (top side in FIG. 60) and the side of the inner edge defining wall 930 (the surface facing the side wall 950), and together with the light P irradiated from the top or side, the game A production effect can be produced by the light P that illuminates the area where the ball rolls (or the game ball when the game ball rolls).

In particular, in this embodiment, since the side wall portion 950 is arranged in parallel with the inner rail 61, the light P emitted from the back side of the center frame 86 and introduced into the side wall portion 750 is directed toward the inner rail 61 side (inner edge defining wall). The inner rail 61 can reduce leakage to the outside from the side surface (the side opposite to the portion 930). That is, the inner rail 61 can reflect the light P toward the upright end surface or the side surface (the side surface facing the inner edge defining wall portion 930). Therefore, it is possible to increase the amount of light that can be irradiated from the standing end face or side surface of the side wall portion 950, and as a result, the presentation effect of the guided light P can be enhanced.

Note that the light emitting body is disposed in the left rotation unit 700 (not shown), and the retracted position of the left rotation unit 700 is the back surface of the area forming portion R. Therefore, when the left rotation unit 700 is placed in the retracted position, the left rotation unit 700 is visible through the region forming part R, and the light P emitted from the light emitter is guided through the side wall part 950. The game player can then visually recognize the game. That is, the shape of the left rotation unit 700 that is visually recognized through the area forming part R and the light P irradiated from the upright end surface of the side wall part 950 can be associated with each other, and the player can see the shape, and as a result, The production effect of the light P can be enhanced.

Here, as described above, protrusions 972 are provided to protrude from the opposing surfaces of the side wall portion 950 and the inner edge defining wall portion 930, respectively. Therefore, the game ball flowing down the third path M3 can collide with the protrusion 972, thereby inhibiting the game ball from flowing down. Thereby, in the region forming part R where nails cannot be planted, the falling speed of the game ball can be slowed down, making it easier for the player to visually recognize the falling game ball.

In this case, the protrusion 972 that protrudes from the side wall portion 950 and the protrusion 972 that protrudes from the inner edge defining wall portion 930 are arranged with phases shifted from each other along the path direction of the third path M3. That is, they are arranged in a staggered manner on the left and right opposing surfaces. Therefore, when the game ball flows down the third path M3, the game ball can alternately collide with the left and right protrusions 972 to cause the game ball to meander left and right. Thereby, it is possible to easily slow down the falling speed of the game ball, and to give the game ball a displacement component in a direction perpendicular to the flowing direction (route direction of the third path M3), thereby changing the movement of the game ball. I can do it.

Furthermore, the front surface of the frame plate base 910 is provided with a groove 971 having a sawtooth shape when viewed from the front, as described above. Therefore, when the game ball flows down the third path M3, the game ball can be guided along the inner surface of the groove 971 and meandered left and right. Therefore, this also makes it easier to slow down the falling speed of the game ball, and also gives the game ball a displacement component in a direction perpendicular to the flowing direction (the path direction of the third path M3), thereby changing the movement of the game ball. can be given.

In addition, when the light emitted from the back side of the area forming part R is guided toward the front of the game area, the groove 971 formed in the front of the frame plate base 910 is used to diffuse or condense the light. Since it can be used as a lens that emits light, the effect of the guided light can be enhanced.

In this case, the bent portion of the groove 971 is arranged in phase along the path direction of the third path M3 with respect to the projection 972 projecting from the side wall 950 and the projection 972 projecting from the inner edge defining wall 930. It is arranged by shifting the . Therefore, when the game ball flows down the third path M3, the game ball that is guided by the inner surface of the groove 971 and meandering left and right can be made to collide with the left and right protrusions 972 alternately. A synergistic effect can be obtained by utilizing both the effect of the protrusion 971 and the effect of the protrusion 972. As a result, it is possible to more easily slow down the falling speed of the game ball, and it is also possible to increase the change in the movement of the game ball.

In addition, these protrusions 972 and grooves 971 slow down the speed of the game balls flowing down the third path M3, thereby suppressing damage to the downstream wall portion 960 and preventing the game balls from flowing from the third path M3 to the fourth path M4. Contributes to smooth guidance of the ball.

Further, the terminal end side of the groove 971 (the portion arranged in parallel with the inclined surface 961) has an extension direction that overlaps the downstream wall portion 960 and is directed toward the exit of the third path M3. Thereby, the game ball guided to the terminal end side of the groove 971 can collide with the downstream wall portion 960 from an oblique direction. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the game ball from bouncing in the direction of flowing backward through the third path M3, and also to flow down toward the exit of the third path M3 while reducing the speed of the game ball flowing down. Thereby, the game ball can be smoothly guided to the fourth path M4, and the burden on the downstream wall portion 960 can be reduced.

<Second embodiment>
Next, the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 61. FIG. 61 is a front view of the game board 2013 in the second embodiment. Note that the same parts as in the first embodiment are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 61, in the game board 2013 according to the second embodiment, compared to the game board 13 according to the first embodiment, the formation range of the area forming portion R is expanded to approximately the top of the game area. As a result, the presentation devices (in this embodiment, the central rotation unit 400, the central rotation unit 500, and the left rotation unit 700) can be directly connected to each other through the opening of the center frame 2086 (that is, without going through the area forming part R). The visible area can be further expanded than in the first embodiment.

In the region forming member R, the formation of the columnar body 940 (see FIG. 59) is omitted, and the inner edge defining wall portion 2930 is provided to extend along the outer rail 62. Thereby, in a region above the return ball prevention member 68, a fifth path M5 and a sixth path M6 are defined between the outer rail 62 and the inner edge defining wall portion 2930.

Note that the facing interval between the outer rail 62 and the inner edge defining wall portion 2930 is set to a dimension larger than twice the diameter of the game ball and smaller than three times the diameter. In this embodiment, it is set to approximately 2.5 times the diameter of the game ball. As a result, a path (fifth path M5 and sixth path M6) in which game balls can pass each other without colliding with each other is formed between the opposing outer rail 62 and inner edge defining wall 2930, and the center frame 2086 is The above-mentioned area where the production device can be directly viewed through the opening can be secured to the maximum extent.

Further, the wind turbine WM has its rotation axis disposed approximately at the center between the opposing outer rail 62 and the inner edge defining wall portion 2930. This allows the game ball to pass between the outer rail 62 and the rotation axis of the windmill WM, and between the rotation axis of the windmill WM and the inner edge defining wall portion 2930, respectively.

According to the area forming part R formed in this way, the game ball that is fired from the ball firing unit and guided to the upper area of the game area by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 is guided along the outer rail 62. By doing so, after passing the windmill WM, the vehicle is moved along the fifth route M5. In this case, by setting the firing strength to a value larger than the standard value, it is possible to make the game ball flow down to the right side area beyond the upper top of the gaming area, while setting the firing strength to a value smaller than the standard value. By doing so, it is possible to make the game ball flow down along the inner edge defining wall portion 2930 (move the sixth path M6) without letting it go over the upper top of the game area. The game ball that has moved along the sixth route M6 passes through the windmill WM, and then flows down to the third route M3.

<Third embodiment>
Next, a third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 62 to 67. In the right rotation unit 600 of the first embodiment, a case will be described in which two members, the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 640 (connected displacement member 642), can be displaced in accordance with the displacement of the transmission member 654. However, in the right rotation unit 3600 in the third embodiment, three members, the first displacement member 3630, the second displacement member 3640 (connected displacement member 642), and the third displacement member 3660, are moved as the transmission member 654 is displaced. can be displaced. Note that the same parts as in each of the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 62 is an exploded front perspective view of the right rotation unit 3600 in the third embodiment, and FIG. 63 is an exploded rear perspective view of the right rotation unit 3600. Note that FIGS. 62 and 63 show a state in which a part of the right rotation unit 3600 (the back base 610 and the front base 620) is assembled.

As shown in FIGS. 62 and 63, the right rotation unit 3600 in the third embodiment includes a third displacement member 3660 that is slidably disposed in front of one end of the first displacement member 3630 (upper side in FIG. 62). Be prepared. As will be described later, the tip of the connecting pin 3641d of the second displacement member 3640 (driven member 3641) is connected to the sliding groove 3661 of the third displacement member 3660 through the through groove 3636 formed in the first displacement member 3630. By rotating the driven member 3641 relative to the first displacement member 3630, the third displacement member 3660 can be displaced (sliding displacement) relative to the first displacement member 3630. .

The through groove 3636 is a groove-shaped opening curved in an arc shape centered on the support shaft 632, and the width of the groove is set to be slightly larger than the diameter of the connecting pin 3641d of the driven member 3641. be done. Therefore, by displacing the connecting pin 3641d along the extending direction of the through groove 3636, rotation of the driven member 3641 about the support shaft 632 of the first displacement member 3630 is allowed.

The connecting pin 3641d is a shaft-like body with a circular cross section that is inserted into the through groove 3636, and its protrusion height is set to a size that allows it to protrude from the front of the first displacement member 3630. That is, in the assembled state, the distal end side of the connecting pin 3641d can be inserted into a sliding groove 3661 (described later) of the third displacement member 3660 via the through groove 3636 of the first displacement member 3630.

A sliding groove 3661 is recessed in the back surface of the third displacement member 3660, and a slide rail 3662 is provided above the sliding groove 3661. As described above, the sliding groove 3661 is a concave groove into which the connecting pin 3641d of the driven member 3641 is slidably inserted, and is formed linearly with a constant groove width, and the groove width is The dimension is set to be slightly larger than the diameter of the connecting pin 3641d of the driven member 3641.

The slide rail 3662 is a telescopic linear guide mechanism interposed between the first displacement member 3630 and the third displacement member 3660, and includes a rear side rail fixed to the first displacement member 3630 and a rear side rail fixed to the first displacement member 3630. It consists of a front side rail connected to the front side of the rail so that relative displacement in the longitudinal direction is possible. The slide rail 3662 is expanded and contracted by the relative displacement in the longitudinal direction of the back side rail and the front side rail, so that the third displacement member 3660 can be slid with respect to the first displacement member 3630.

When the third displacement member 3660 is disposed on the front side of the first displacement member 3630, only a portion of the sliding groove 3661 overlaps the through groove 3636 of the first displacement member 3630 (the sliding groove 3661 and (intersected by the through groove 3636). Therefore, by rotating the driven member 3641 around the support shaft 632 of the first displacement member 3630 and displacing the connecting pin 3641d along the extending direction of the through groove 3636, the connecting pin 3641d is moved to the third displacement member. 3660 (by pressing the inner wall surface of the sliding groove 3661 with the connecting pin 3641d), the third displacement member 3660 can be slid relative to the first displacement member 3630.

Next, the operation of the right rotation unit 3600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 64 to 67. 64 and 65 are front views of the right rotation unit 3600 in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position, and FIGS. 66 and 67 are front views of the right rotation unit 3600 when operating between the retracted position and the extended position. FIG. 7 is a schematic rear view of the right rotation unit 3600 in each state when the rotation is performed.

Note that FIGS. 64(a) to 64(c) correspond to FIGS. 66(a) to 66(c), and FIGS. 65(a) to 65(c) correspond to FIGS. 67(a) to 67(c). c) and are in the same state. In this case, FIG. 64(c) is the same as FIG. 65(a), and FIG. 66(c) is the same as FIG. 67(a), respectively.

Here, in the third embodiment, by sliding the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 in the first groove 635 of the first displacement member 3630, the first displacement member 3630, the second displacement member 3640, and the third displacement member 3660 are respectively displaced, the manner in which the first displacement member 3630 and the second displacement member 3640 are displaced is the same as in the first embodiment described above, so a detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 64(a) and 66(a), in the retracted position, the slide rail 3662 of the third displacement member 3660 is in a shortened state, and the connecting pin of the driven member 3641 in the second displacement member 3640 3641d is located at one end of the sliding groove 3661 of the third displacement member 3660 (the end farthest from the support shaft 632 and the shaft support hole 641a, on the right side in FIG. 66(a)). In this case, the length from the base end of the first displacement member 3630 to the tip of the third displacement member 3660 is defined as the dimension h1.

From this state, when the transmission member 654 is rotationally driven in the forward direction (clockwise in FIG. 66(a)), the state shown in FIG. 64(b) and FIG. As shown in 66(c), the first displacement member 3630 is rotated in the extending direction about the rotation axis 631. In this case, as described above, the second displacement member 3640 is not displaced relative to the first displacement member 3630, but is displaced integrally with the first displacement member 3630.

Therefore, the second displacement member 3640 is not displaced relative to the third displacement member 3660 either. Therefore, since the connecting pin 3641d of the driven member 3641 in the second displacement member 3640 does not slide in the sliding groove 3661 of the third displacement member 3660, the third displacement member 3660 is also integrated with the first displacement member 3630. Displaced. That is, in the sections shown in FIGS. 64(a) to 64(c) and FIGS. 66(a) to 66(c), the length from the base end of the first displacement member 3630 to the tip of the third displacement member 3660 is maintained at the dimension h1.

When the transmission member 654 is rotationally driven in the forward direction (clockwise in FIG. 67(a)) from the state shown in FIGS. 65(a) and 67(a), the first displacement member 3630 moves as shown in FIG. The second displacement member 3640 (connected displacement member 642) is displaced relative to the first displacement member 3630 while maintaining the state (position) shown in FIG. 65(b) and FIG. 67(b). After that, it is placed in the extended position shown in FIGS. 65(c) and 67(c).

In this case, when the driven member 3641 is rotated about the support shaft 632, the rotation of the driven member 3641 causes the connection pin 3641d to be moved to the other end side of the sliding groove 3661 in the third displacement member 3660 (the support shaft 632 and the end near the shaft support hole 641a (left side in FIG. 67(a)).

Therefore, the inner wall surface of the sliding groove 3661 in the third displacement member 3660 (the inner wall surface on the side far from the support shaft 632 and the shaft support hole 641a, the upper side in FIG. 67(a)) is moved by the connecting pin 3641d of the driven member 3641. The slide rail 3662 (see FIG. 63) is pushed up in the direction of extension. As a result, the third displacement member 3660 is slidably displaced relative to the first displacement member 3630, and in the sections shown in FIGS. 65(a) to 65(c) and 67(a) to 67(c), The length from the base end of the first displacement member 3630 to the tip of the third displacement member 3660 is changed (increased) from the dimension h1 to the dimension h3 via the dimension h2 (h1<h2<h3).

Contrary to the above case, when the transmission member 654 is rotationally driven in the opposite direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 67(c)) from the states shown in FIGS. 65(c) and 67(c), the first displacement While the member 3630 is maintained in the state (position) shown in FIG. 67(c), the second displacement member 3640 (connected displacement member 642) is relatively displaced in the opposite direction with respect to the first displacement member 3630, and as shown in FIG. After going through the states shown in FIG. 65(a) and FIG. 67(a), it is arranged in the state shown in FIG. 65(a) and FIG. 67(a).

In this case, the rotation of the driven member 3641 about the support shaft 632 causes the connection pin 3641d to move toward one end of the sliding groove 3661 in the third displacement member 3660 (the end far from the support shaft 632 and the shaft support hole 641a). 67(c) (clockwise in FIG. 67(c)).

Therefore, the inner wall surface of the sliding groove 3661 in the third displacement member 3660 (the inner wall surface on the side closer to the support shaft 632 and the shaft support hole 641a, the lower side in FIG. 67(c)) is moved by the connecting pin 3641d of the driven member 3641. Since the slide rail 3662 (see FIG. 63) is pushed down in the direction of shortening, the third displacement member 3660 is slid with respect to the first displacement member 3630, and the third displacement member 3660 is moved from the base end of the first displacement member 3630 to the third displacement member 3660. The length to the tip is shortened to the dimension h1.

When the transmission member 654 is further rotated in the opposite direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 66(c)) from the state shown in FIGS. It is rotated as a rotating shaft in the upright direction and placed in the retracted position shown in FIGS. 64(a) and 66(a). In this case, as described above, the second displacement member 3640 is not displaced relative to the first displacement member 3630, so that the connecting pin 3641d of the driven member 3641 is connected to the sliding groove 3660 of the third displacement member 3660. , the second displacement member 3640 and the third displacement member 3660 are displaced together with the first displacement member 3630.

In this way, according to the present embodiment, the second displacement member 3640 and the third displacement member 3660 are not displaced relative to the first displacement member 3630, and the first displacement member 3630, the second displacement member 3640, and the third displacement member 3660 are not displaced relative to each other. The third displacement member 3660 is integrally displaced (see FIGS. 64 and 66), and the second displacement member 3640 and A configuration in which the third displacement members 3660 are individually relatively displaced (see FIGS. 65 and 67) can be formed.

<Fourth embodiment>
Next, a fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 68 to 73. In the third embodiment, a case has been described in which the right rotation unit 3600 is formed such that the third displacement member 3660 can be slid with respect to the first displacement member 3630, but the right rotation unit 4600 in the fourth embodiment is The third displacement member 4660 is rotatable with respect to the first displacement member 4630. Note that the same parts as in each of the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 68 is an exploded front perspective view of the right rotation unit 4600 in the fourth embodiment, and FIG. 69 is an exploded rear perspective view of the right rotation unit 4600. Note that FIGS. 68 and 69 illustrate a state in which a portion of the right rotation unit 4600 (the back base 610 and the front base 620) is assembled.

As shown in FIGS. 68 and 69, the right rotation unit 4600 in the fourth embodiment includes a third displacement member 4660 rotatably supported on the front side of one end (upper side in FIG. 68) of the first displacement member 4630. . As will be described later, the tip of the connecting pin 3641d of the second displacement member 3640 (driven member 3641) is connected to the sliding groove 4661 of the third displacement member 4660 through the through groove 3636 formed in the first displacement member 4630. When the driven member 3641 is rotated relative to the first displacement member 4630, the third displacement member 4660 can be displaced (rotated) relative to the first displacement member 4630.

A sliding groove 4661 is recessed in the back surface of the third displacement member 4660, and a rotating shaft 4662 is provided protruding above the sliding groove 4661. As described above, the sliding groove 4661 is a concave groove into which the connecting pin 3641d of the driven member 3641 is slidably inserted, and is formed linearly with a constant groove width, and the groove width is The dimension is set to be slightly larger than the diameter of the connecting pin 3641d of the driven member 3641.

The rotating shaft 4662 is a shaft-shaped body that is inserted into a shaft supporting hole 4637 bored at one end side (upper side in FIG. 68) of the first displacement member 4630, and through the rotating shaft 4662 and the shaft supporting hole 4637, A third displacement member 4660 is rotatably supported by the first displacement member 4630. Note that a holder C having a larger diameter than the inner diameter of the shaft support hole 4637 is fastened and fixed to the axial end surface of the rotation shaft 4662, thereby restricting the rotation shaft 4662 from coming out of the shaft support hole 4637.

When the third displacement member 4660 is disposed (spinally supported) on the front side of the first displacement member 4630, only a portion of the sliding groove 4661 overlaps the through groove 3636 of the first displacement member 4630 (sliding (The moving groove 4661 and the through groove 3636 intersect). Therefore, by rotating the driven member 3641 around the support shaft 632 of the first displacement member 4630 and displacing the connecting pin 3641d along the extending direction of the through groove 3636, the connecting pin 3641d is moved to the third displacement member. 4660 (by pressing the inner wall surface of the sliding groove 4661 with the connecting pin 3641d), the third displacement member 4660 can be rotated relative to the first displacement member 4630.

Next, the operation of right rotation unit 4600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 70 to 73. 70 and 71 are front views of the right rotation unit 4600 in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position, and FIGS. 72 and 73 are front views of the right rotation unit 4600 when operating between the retracted position and the extended position. FIG. 6 is a schematic rear view of the right rotation unit 4600 in each state when the rotation is performed.

Note that FIGS. 70(a) to 70(c) correspond to FIGS. 72(a) to 72(c), and FIGS. 71(a) to 71(c) correspond to FIGS. 73(a) to 73(c). c) and are in the same state. In this case, FIG. 70(c) is the same as FIG. 71(a), and FIG. 72(c) is the same as FIG. 73(a), respectively.

Here, in the fourth embodiment, by sliding the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 in the first groove 635 of the first displacement member 4630, the first displacement member 4630, the second displacement member 3640, and the third displacement member 4660 are respectively displaced, the manner in which the first displacement member 4630 and the second displacement member 3640 are displaced is the same as in the first embodiment described above, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 70(a) and 72(a), in the retracted position, an imaginary line L1 passing through the axis of the shaft support hole 4637 (rotating shaft 4662) and along the longitudinal direction of the first displacement member 4630 , and an imaginary line L2 passing through the axis of the shaft support hole 4637 (rotating shaft 4662) and extending along the longitudinal direction of the third displacement member 4660 is defined as an intersection angle θ1.

From this state, when the transmission member 654 is rotationally driven in the forward direction (clockwise in FIG. 72(a)), the state shown in FIG. 70(b) and FIG. As shown in 72(c), the first displacement member 4630 is rotated in the extending direction about the rotation axis 631. In this case, as described above, the second displacement member 3640 is not displaced relative to the first displacement member 4630, but is displaced integrally with the first displacement member 4630.

Therefore, the second displacement member 3640 is not displaced relative to the third displacement member 4660, and the connecting pin 3641d of the driven member 3641 in the second displacement member 3640 is in the sliding groove 4661 of the third displacement member 4660. Since the third displacement member 4660 does not slide, the third displacement member 4660 is also displaced together with the first displacement member 4630. That is, in the sections shown in FIGS. 70(a) to 70(c) and FIGS. 72(a) to 72(c), the first displacement member 4630 (imaginary line L1) and the third displacement member 4660 (imaginary line The angle formed with L2) is maintained as the intersection angle θ1.

When the transmission member 654 is rotationally driven in the forward direction (clockwise in FIG. 73(a)) from the state shown in FIGS. 71(a) and 73(a), the first displacement member 4630 is The second displacement member 3640 (connected displacement member 642) is displaced relative to the first displacement member 4630 while being maintained in the state (position) shown in FIG. After that, it is placed in the extended position shown in FIGS. 71(c) and 73(c).

In this case, when the driven member 3641 is rotated about the support shaft 632, the rotation of the driven member 3641 is caused by The inner wall surface (upper side in FIG. 73(a)) is pushed up by the connecting pin 3641d of the driven member 3641.

As a result, the third displacement member 4660 is rotated relative to the first displacement member 4630, and in the sections shown in FIGS. 71(a) to 71(c) and 73(a) to 73(c), , the angle formed by the first displacement member 4630 (imaginary line L1) and the third displacement member 4660 (imaginary line L2) is changed (decreased) from the intersection angle θ1 to the intersection angle θ3 via the intersection angle θ2 (θ3< θ2<θ1).

Contrary to the above case, when the transmission member 654 is rotationally driven in the opposite direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 73(c)) from the states shown in FIGS. 71(c) and 73(c), the first displacement While the member 4630 is maintained in the state (position) shown in FIG. 73(c), the second displacement member 3640 (connected displacement member 642) is relatively displaced in the opposite direction with respect to the first displacement member 4630, and as shown in FIG. After going through the states shown in FIG. 71(a) and FIG. 73(a), it is arranged in the state shown in FIG. 71(a) and FIG. 73(a).

In this case, the rotation of the driven member 3641 about the support shaft 632 is caused by the inner wall surface of the sliding groove 4661 in the third displacement member 4660 (the inner wall surface on the advancing direction side of the connecting pin 3641d, the lower side of FIG. 73(c) ) is the direction in which the connecting pin 3641d of the driven member 3641 pushes down. Therefore, the third displacement member 4660 is rotated relative to the first displacement member 4630, and the angle formed by the first displacement member 4630 (imaginary line L1) and the third displacement member 4660 (imaginary line L2) crosses The angle θ1 is increased.

When the transmission member 654 is further rotated in the opposite direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 72(c)) from the state shown in FIGS. It is rotated as a rotating shaft in the upright direction and placed in the retracted position shown in FIGS. 70(a) and 72(a). In this case, as described above, the second displacement member 3640 is not displaced relative to the first displacement member 4630, so that the connecting pin 3641d of the driven member 3641 is connected to the sliding groove 4661 of the third displacement member 4660. Since the second displacement member 3640 and the third displacement member 4660 are displaced together with the first displacement member 4630, the second displacement member 3640 and the third displacement member 4660 are displaced together with the first displacement member 4630.

In this way, according to the present embodiment, the second displacement member 3640 and the third displacement member 4660 are not displaced relative to the first displacement member 4630, and the first displacement member 4630, the second displacement member 3640, and the third displacement member 4660 are not displaced relative to each other. The third displacement member 4660 is integrally displaced (see FIGS. 70 and 71), and the second displacement member 3640 and A configuration in which the third displacement members 4660 are individually relatively displaced (see FIGS. 71 and 73) can be formed.

<Fifth embodiment>
Next, a fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 74 to 81. In the third embodiment, a case has been described in which the right rotation unit 3600 is formed such that the third displacement member 3660 can be slid with respect to the first displacement member 3630, but the right rotation unit 5600 in the fifth embodiment is A third displacement member 5660 can move forward and backward relative to the first displacement member 5630. Note that the same parts as in each of the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 74 is an exploded front perspective view of the right rotation unit 5600 in the fifth embodiment, and FIG. 75 is an exploded rear perspective view of the right rotation unit 5600. Note that FIGS. 74 and 75 illustrate a state in which a portion of the right rotation unit 5600 (back base 610 and front base 620) is assembled.

As shown in FIGS. 74 and 75, the right rotation unit 5600 in the fifth embodiment has a third displacement member 5660 in the front and back direction (for example, in FIG. a) It is arranged so that it can appear and retract in the direction perpendicular to the page. As will be described later, the tip of the connecting pin 5641d of the second displacement member 5640 (driven member 5641) connects to the sliding slope portion of the third displacement member 5660 through the through groove 3636 formed in the first displacement member 5630. 5663, and when the driven member 5641 is rotated relative to the first displacement member 5630, the third displacement member 5660 is displaced relative to the first displacement member 5630 (in the front-rear direction). can be caused (infestation).

A pair of sliding holes 5638 are bored in the first displacement member 5630. The sliding hole 5638 is a hole with a circular cross section into which a sliding guide rod 5664 (described later) of the third displacement member 5660 is inserted, and its inner diameter is set to be slightly larger than the outer diameter of the sliding guide rod 5664. Ru. That is, the sliding guide rod 5664 is supported so as to be slidable along the direction in which the sliding hole 5638 is formed, and thereby the third displacement member 5660 is supported so as to be retractable in the front and back directions with respect to the first displacement member 5630. be done.

The connecting pin 5641d is a shaft-like body with a circular cross section that is inserted into the through groove 3636, and is set at a protrusion height such that its tip is located within the through groove 3636. That is, in the assembled state, the tip of the connecting pin 5641d contacts the sliding slope portion 5663 of the third displacement member 5660 within the through groove 3636 of the first displacement member 5630.

A sliding inclined portion 5663 and a sliding guide rod 5664 are protruded from the back surface of the third displacement member 5660. As described above, the sliding inclined portion 5663 is a plate-shaped portion on which the connecting pin 5641d of the driven member 5641 slides, and the back surface on which the connecting pin 5641d slides is from one end (right side in FIG. 75). It is formed as an inclined surface that slopes upward toward the other end (left side in FIG. 75). That is, the height of the sliding inclined portion 5663 protruding from the third displacement member 5660 is gradually increased from one end to the other end. Therefore, as the driven member 5641 rotates, when the connecting pin 5641d slides on the back surface of the sliding inclined portion 5663 from one end to the other end (or in the opposite direction), the driven member 5641 rotates. The distance between 5641 and third displacement member 5660 is expanded (reduced).

Here, the sliding inclined portion 5663 has a plate thickness set to be slightly smaller than the groove width of the through groove 3636, and has a curved shape corresponding to the through groove 3636 in rear view. That is, in the assembled state, the protruding distal end side of the sliding inclined portion 5663 is inserted into the through groove 3636 in a state where it can slide in the front-rear direction. Therefore, when the third displacement member 5660 moves forward and backward with respect to the first displacement member 5630, not only the sliding guide rod 5664 but also the sliding inclined portion 5663 prevents the third displacement member 5660 from sliding. Since the movement of the third displacement member 5660 can be supported (that is, supported at three locations), forward tilting of the third displacement member 5660 can be suppressed, and its protrusion and retraction movements can be stabilized.

As described above, the sliding guide rod 5664 is a shaft-like body with a circular cross section that is slidably supported in the sliding hole 5638 of the first displacement member 5630, and the sliding hole 5638 is formed on the axial end surface of the sliding guide rod 5664. A holding body C having a diameter larger than the inner diameter of the holding body C is fastened and fixed, thereby preventing the sliding guide rod 5664 from coming out of the sliding hole 5638.

In this case, a biasing member S formed as a coil spring is interposed between the holding body C and the first displacement member 5630 in an elastically compressed state (a state in which the overall length is shortened). The elastic recovery force of the biasing member S acts in a direction to move the holding body C away from the back surface of the first displacement member 5630. As a result, the third displacement member 5660 is urged in a direction toward the first displacement member 5630, and the sliding inclined portion 5663 is inserted into the through groove 3636.

Therefore, by rotating the driven member 5641 around the support shaft 632 of the first displacement member 5630 and displacing the connecting pin 5641d along the extending direction of the through groove 3636, the tip of the connecting pin 5641d is The third displacement member 5660 is moved forward and backward relative to the first displacement member 5630 by acting on the back surface of the sliding slope portion 5663 of the third displacement member 5660 (sliding the connecting pin 5641d along the back surface of the sliding slope portion 5663). It can be made to appear in any direction.

Next, the operation of right rotation unit 5600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 76 to 80. 76 and 77 are front views of the right rotation unit 5600 in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position, and FIGS. 78 and 79 are front views of the right rotation unit 5600 when operating between the retracted position and the extended position. FIG. 6 is a schematic rear view of the right rotation unit 5600 in each state when the rotation is performed. 80 and 81 are top views of the right rotation unit 5600 in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position.

Note that FIGS. 76(a) to 76(c) are similar to FIGS. 78(a) to 78(c), FIGS. 80(a) to 80(c), and FIGS. 77(a) to 77(c). ) are the same states as in FIGS. 79(a) to 79(c) and FIGS. 81(a) to 81(c), respectively. In this case, FIG. 76(c) is the same as FIG. 77(a), FIG. 78(c) is the same as FIG. 79(a), and FIG. 80(c) is the same as FIG. 81(a). be.

Here, in the fifth embodiment, by sliding the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 in the first groove 635 of the first displacement member 5630, the first displacement member 5630, the second displacement member 5640, and the third displacement member 5660 are respectively displaced, the manner in which the first displacement member 5630 and the second displacement member 5640 are displaced is the same as in the first embodiment described above, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 76(a), 78(a), and 80(a), in the retracted position, the third displacement member 5660 is in close proximity to the first displacement member 5630, and the second displacement member 5640 The connecting pin 5641d of the driven member 5641 in FIG. ) and the right side of FIG. 80(a)). In this case, the amount of protrusion from the front of the first displacement member 5630 to the front of the third displacement member 5660 is defined as the dimension J1.

From this state, when the transmission member 654 is rotationally driven in the forward direction (clockwise in FIG. 78(a)), the state shown in FIG. 76(b), FIG. 78(b), and FIG. As shown in FIG. 76(c), FIG. 78(c), and FIG. 80(c), the first displacement member 5630 is rotated in the extending direction about the rotating shaft 631. In this case, as described above, the second displacement member 5640 is not displaced relative to the first displacement member 5630, but is displaced integrally with the first displacement member 5630.

Therefore, the second displacement member 5640 is not displaced relative to the third displacement member 5660 either. Therefore, since the connecting pin 5641d of the driven member 5641 in the second displacement member 5640 does not slide on the back surface of the sliding inclined portion 5663 of the third displacement member 5660, the third displacement member 5660 is also integrated with the first displacement member 5630. and is displaced. That is, in the sections shown in FIGS. 76(a) to 76(c), FIGS. 78(a) to 78(c), and FIGS. 80(a) to 80(c), the third displacement member 5660 1 is maintained closest to the displacement member 5630 (a state in which the amount of protrusion is set to the dimension J1).

When the transmission member 654 is rotationally driven in the forward direction (clockwise in FIG. 67(a)) from the states shown in FIGS. 77(a), 79(a), and 81(a), the first displacement member 5630 While maintaining the state (position) shown in FIG. 79(a), the second displacement member 5640 (connected displacement member 642) is displaced relative to the first displacement member 5630, and as shown in FIGS. After going through the states shown in b) and FIG. 81(b), it is placed in the extended position shown in FIGS. 77(c), 79(c), and 81(c).

In this case, when the driven member 5641 is rotated about the support shaft 632, the rotation of the driven member 5641 causes the tip of the connecting pin 5641d to be moved to the rear surface of the sliding slope portion 5663 of the third displacement member 5660. The direction of sliding toward the end side (the end of the third displacement member 5660 with a higher protrusion height from the back surface, the upper left side in FIG. 79(a), the left side in FIG. 81(a)) (see FIG. 79(a) ) counterclockwise) rotation.

Therefore, the back surface of the sliding inclined portion 5663 of the third displacement member 5660 is pushed forward (to the upper side in FIG. 81(a)) by the connecting pin 5641d of the driven member 5641. As a result, the third displacement member 5660 is projected forward with respect to the first displacement member 5630, and FIGS. 77(a) to 77(c), FIGS. ) to FIG. 81(c), the amount of protrusion from the front of the first displacement member 5630 to the front of the third displacement member 5660 changes (increases) from dimension J1 to dimension J3 via dimension J2 (J1 <J2<J3).

Contrary to the case described above, the transmission member 654 is rotationally driven in the opposite direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 79(c)) from the states shown in FIGS. 77(c), 79(c), and 81(c). Then, while the first displacement member 5630 is maintained in the state (position) shown in FIG. After being displaced and passing through the states shown in FIGS. 77(b), 79(b), and 81(b), it is placed in the states shown in FIGS. 77(a), 79(a), and 81(a). Ru.

In this case, rotation of the driven member 5641 about the support shaft 632 causes the connecting pin 5641d to move from one end side of the back surface of the sliding inclined portion 5663 of the third displacement member 5660 (a protrusion from the back surface of the third displacement member 5660). The rotation is in the direction (clockwise in FIG. 79(c)) of sliding toward the lower end of the installation height (lower right side in FIG. 79(c), right side in FIG. 81(c)).

Therefore, by moving the connecting pin 5641d to one end side of the back surface of the sliding slope portion 5663 in the third displacement member 5660, the sliding slope portion 5663 retreats (retracts) backward (back side) by that amount. is allowed, the third displacement member 5660 is brought closer to the first displacement member 5630 due to the elastic recovery force of the biasing member S, and the distance from the front of the first displacement member 5630 to the front of the third displacement member 5660 is The amount of protrusion is reduced to the dimension J1.

When the transmission member 654 is further rotated in the opposite direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 78(c)) from the state shown in FIGS. 76(c), 78(c), and 80(c), the first displacement member 5630 is rotated in the upright direction about the rotating shaft 631 and placed in the retracted position shown in FIGS. 76(a), 78(a), and 80(a). In this case, as described above, the second displacement member 5640 is not displaced relative to the first displacement member 5630, so that the connecting pin 5641d of the driven member 5641 is connected to the sliding inclined portion of the third displacement member 5660. 5663, the second displacement member 5640 and the third displacement member 5660 are displaced together with the first displacement member 5630.

In this way, according to the present embodiment, the second displacement member 5640 and the third displacement member 5660 are not displaced relative to the first displacement member 5630, and the first displacement member 5630, the second displacement member 5640, and the third displacement member 5660 are not displaced relative to each other. The third displacement member 5660 is integrally displaced (see FIGS. 76, 78, and 81), and the first displacement member 5630 is maintained in a stopped state while the second displacement member 5630 is displaced. A configuration can be formed in which the member 5640 and the third displacement member 5660 are individually relatively displaced (see FIGS. 77, 79, and 81). In particular, according to the fifth embodiment, since the displacement direction of the third displacement member 5660 is the front-rear direction, interference with displacement in other adjacent units can be avoided, and the movable range of such other units can be avoided. can be secured. Further, by protruding the third displacement member 5660 forward, the third displacement member 5660 can be brought closer to the player, and an impressive performance can be performed.

<Sixth embodiment>
Next, a sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 82 to 88. In the third embodiment, a case has been described in which the clockwise rotation unit 3600 is formed such that the period in which the second displacement member 3640 is displaced and the period in which the third displacement member 3660 is displaced coincides with each other. In the right rotation unit 6600, the period during which the second displacement member 6640 is displaced is different from the period during which the third displacement member 4660 is displaced. Note that the same parts as in each of the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 82 is an exploded front perspective view of a right rotation unit 6600 in the sixth embodiment, and FIG. 83 is an exploded rear perspective view of the right rotation unit 6600. Note that FIGS. 82 and 83 illustrate a state in which a portion of the right rotation unit 6600 (back base 610 and front base 620) is assembled.

As shown in FIGS. 82 and 83, the right rotation unit 6600 in the sixth embodiment has a third displacement member on the front side of one end (upper side in FIG. 82) of the first displacement member 4630, as in the case of the fourth embodiment. 4660 is rotatably supported, and the driven member 6641 is rotated relative to the first displacement member 4630, so that the second displacement member 6640 (connected displacement member 642) and the third displacement member 4660 are moved to the first displacement. It is displaced (rotated) relative to member 4630.

In this case, in the fourth embodiment, the connecting groove 641c of the driven member 3641 is formed in a straight line, whereas in the sixth embodiment, the connecting groove 6641c of the driven member 6641 has an action section 6641c1 as described later. and the non-interference section 6641c2 in a substantially dogleg shape when viewed from the front.

As a result, while the connecting pin 643 passes through the action section 6641c1, both the second displacement member 6640 (connected displacement member 642) and the third displacement member 4660 are rotated relative to the first displacement member 4630, while the connecting pin 643 passes through the non-interference section 6641c2, only the third displacement member 4660 can be rotated with respect to the first displacement member 4630 while the second displacement member 6640 is stopped.

The connection groove 6641c is a groove-shaped opening into which the connection pin 643 of the connection displacement member 642 is slidably inserted, and has an action section 6641c1 extending linearly along the longitudinal direction of the driven member 6641; It extends along the width direction of the driven member 6641 while being curved in an arc shape with the shaft support hole 641a (support shaft 632) side concave (i.e., a shape obtained by dividing an annular shape concentric with the rotating shaft 631). ) is provided with a non-interference section 6641c2.

Note that, as described later, the action section 6641c1 is a section that acts on the connection pin 643 of the connection displacement member 642, and the non-interference section 6641c2 is a section that does not interfere with the connection pin 643 of the connection displacement member 642.

Next, the operation of right rotation unit 6600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 84 to 87. 84 and 85 are front views of the right rotation unit 6600 in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position, and FIGS. 86 and 87 are front views of the right rotation unit 6600 when operating between the retracted position and the extended position. FIG. 6 is a schematic rear view of the right rotation unit 6600 in each state when the rotation is performed.

Note that FIGS. 84(a) to 84(c) correspond to FIGS. 86(a) to 86(c), and FIGS. 85(a) to 85(c) correspond to FIGS. 87(a) to 87(c). c) and are in the same state. In this case, FIG. 84(c) is the same as FIG. 85(a), and FIG. 86(c) is the same as FIG. 87(a), respectively.

Here, the right rotation unit 6600 in the sixth embodiment is substantially different from the right rotation unit 4600 in the fourth embodiment except for the shape of the connecting groove 6641c of the driven member 6641. Since they are formed identically, a description of the identical parts will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 84 and 86, when the transmission member 654 is rotationally driven in the forward direction (clockwise in FIG. 86(a)) from the retracted position shown in FIGS. As described above, while the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 passes through the action section 635a of the first groove 635, the second displacement member 6640 (driven member 6641) is not displaced relative to the first displacement member 4630. , the second displacement member 6640 and the third displacement member 4660 are displaced together with the first displacement member 4630.

That is, in the sections shown in FIGS. 84(a) to 84(c) and FIGS. 86(a) to 86(c), the first displacement member 4630 (virtual line L1) and the third displacement member 4660 (imaginary line L2) is maintained at the intersection angle θ1.

In the state shown in FIGS. 85(a) and 87(a), the connecting pin 643 of the connecting displacement member 642 is connected to the starting end of the working section 6641c1 (the working section 6641c and the non-interference section 6641c2) in the connecting groove 6641c of the driven member 6641. It is located at the end opposite to the connection part (right side in FIG. 87(a)). Note that in this case, the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 is located at the connection portion between the action section 635a and the non-interference section 635b of the first groove 635.

When the transmission member 654 is rotationally driven in the forward direction (clockwise in FIG. 87(a)) from the state shown in FIGS. 85(a) and 87(a), the first displacement member 4630 moves as shown in FIG. The driven member 6641 whose inner wall surface of the second groove 641b is pushed downward (lower side in FIG. 87(a)) by the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 while being maintained in the state (position) shown in FIG. It is rotated in a direction that raises the connecting groove 6641c (counterclockwise in FIG. 87(b)).

Due to this rotation of the driven member 6641, the connecting pin 643 of the connecting displacement member 642 slides on the working section 6641c1 in the connecting groove 6641c of the driven member 6641, and is pushed upward by the inner wall surface of the working section 6641c1. As a result, the connecting displacement member 642 is rotated about the support shaft 633 in the direction of lifting the decorative portion 642b (clockwise in FIG. 87(a)). As a result, the connecting pin 643 reaches the connection portion between the working section 6641c1 and the non-interference section 6641c2 of the connecting groove 6641c, and the state shown in FIGS. 85(b) and 87(b) (the decorative portion 642b is lifted upwards) state) is formed.

In this case, the connecting pin 643 of the connecting displacement member 642 is arranged on the same side (left side in FIG. 87(b)) as the decorative portion 642b (i.e., the center of gravity of the connecting displacement member 642) with respect to the shaft support hole 642a, The connecting groove 6641c of the driven member 6641 is formed such that the inner wall surface of the non-interference section 6641c2 can support the connecting pin 643 from below. That is, the non-interference section 6641c2 is formed as a surface whose inner wall surface intersects at a predetermined angle with the moving direction of the connecting pin 643 when the connecting displacement member 642 rotates by its own weight around the shaft support hole 642a. be done.

Therefore, in the state shown in FIG. 85(b) and FIG. 87(b), the inner wall surface of the non-interference section 6641c2 supports the connecting pin 643 from below (restricts the movement of the connecting pin 643), so that the connecting displacement member 642 can be prevented from rotating around the shaft support hole 642a due to its own weight. That is, the connected displacement member 642 can be maintained in a stopped state with respect to the first displacement member 4630.

Note that in the state shown in FIGS. 85(b) and 87(b), the inner wall surface of the sliding groove 4661 of the third displacement member 4660 is pushed up by the connecting pin 3641d of the driven member 6641, as described above. As a result, it is rotated relative to the first displacement member 4630, and the angle formed by the first displacement member 4630 (imaginary line L1) and the third displacement member 4660 (imaginary line L2) changes to an intersection angle θ2 ( decrease) (θ2<θ1).

When the transmission member 654 is rotationally driven in the forward direction (clockwise in FIG. 87(b)) from the state shown in FIG. 85(b) and FIG. The wall surface is pushed up by the connecting pin 3641d of the driven member 6641, and as shown in FIGS. 85(c) and 87(c), the first displacement member 4630 (imaginary line L1) and the third displacement member 4660 (imaginary line L2) is changed (reduced) to an intersection angle θ3 (θ3<θ2<θ1).

In this case, since the non-interference section 6641c2 of the connecting groove 6641c is curved in an arc shape centered on the support shaft 632 (the shaft support hole 641a), the driven member 6641 Even when the center is rotated counterclockwise in FIG. 87(b), the inner wall surface of the non-interference section 6641c2 supports the connecting pin 643 of the connecting displacement member 642 from below, and the connecting displacement member 642 supports the shaft support hole 642a. Although rotation is restricted by its own weight around the center, the connecting pin 643 is not pushed upward, and therefore the connecting displacement member 642 is not rotated around the support shaft 633 in a direction that lifts the decorative portion 642b. That is, the connection displacement member 642 can be maintained in a substantially stopped state, and the third displacement member 4660 can continue to rotate.

Contrary to the above case, when the transmission member 654 is rotationally driven in the opposite direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 87(c)) from the state shown in FIGS. 85(c) and 87(c), the connecting displacement member While the connecting pin 643 of 642 passes through the non-interference section 6641c2, the connecting displacement member 642 is maintained in the state (position) shown in FIGS. 85(c) and 87(c) (FIG. 85(b) and FIG. 87(b)), while the connecting pin 643 of the connecting displacement member 642 passes through the working section 6641c1, the connecting pin 643 is pushed down by the inner wall surface of the working section 6641c1, thereby lowering the decorative portion 642b. The connecting displacement member 642 is rotated about the support shaft 633 in the direction.

The operation mode of the right rotation unit 6600 in the sixth embodiment formed in this way will be explained with reference to FIG. 88 in comparison with the operation mode of the right rotation unit 4600 in the fourth embodiment.

88(a) to 88(c) are schematic front views of a right-handed rotation unit 4600 in the fourth embodiment, and FIGS. 88(d) to 88(g) are right-handed rotation units in the sixth embodiment. FIG. 6600 is a schematic front view of the device 6600, illustrating each state when operating between a retracted position and an extended position.

In the clockwise rotation unit 4600 in the fourth embodiment, as described above, the second displacement member 3640 and the third displacement member 4660 are not displaced relative to the first displacement member 4630, and the first displacement member 4630 and the third displacement member 4660 are not displaced relative to the first displacement member 4630. There is a mode in which the second displacement member 3640 and the third displacement member 4660 are displaced together (a mode between FIGS. 88(a) and 88(b)), and a mode in which the first displacement member 4630 is maintained in a stopped state. A configuration in which the second displacement member 3640 and the third displacement member 4660 are displaced relative to the first displacement member 4630 (a configuration between FIG. 88(b) and FIG. 88(c)) can be formed. can. In this case, in the latter form, the displacement period (initial period and final period) of the second displacement member 3640 substantially coincides with the displacement period (initial period and final period) of the third displacement member 4660.

On the other hand, in the clockwise rotation unit 6600 in the sixth embodiment, the first displacement member 4630, the second displacement member 6640, and the third displacement member 4660 are integrally displaced (see FIG. 88(d) and FIG. 88(e)). A mode in which the second displacement member 6640 and the third displacement member 4660 are displaced relative to the first displacement member 4630 while maintaining the first displacement member 4630 in a stopped state (FIG. 88 (e) and FIG. 88(f)), the first displacement member 4630 and the second displacement member 6640 are maintained in a stopped state, and the first displacement member 4630 and the second displacement member 6640 are Accordingly, a form in which the third displacement member 4660 is relatively displaced (a form between FIG. 88(f) and FIG. 88(g)) can be formed.

That is, in the sixth embodiment, the displacement period (starting period and final period) of the second displacement member 6640 and the displacement period (starting period and final period) of the third displacement member 4660 can be made different. More specifically, while starting the displacement of the second displacement member 6640 and the third displacement member 4660 at the same time, the timing of stopping the displacement of the second displacement member 6640 and the third displacement member 4660 is staggered (the second displacement member 6640 (the displacement of the third displacement member 4660 can be stopped first, and then the displacement of the third displacement member 4660 can be stopped).

<Seventh embodiment>
Next, a seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 89 to 94. In the third embodiment, a case has been described in which the connecting displacement member 642 and the third displacement member 3660 are respectively displaceably disposed on the first displacement member 3630 to form the clockwise rotation unit 3600, but in the seventh embodiment In the right rotation unit 7600, a third displacement member 7660 is disposed movably on the first displacement member 7630, and a connected displacement member 642 is movably disposed on the third displacement member 7660. Note that the same parts as in each of the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 89 is an exploded front perspective view of a right rotation unit 7600 in the seventh embodiment, and FIG. 90 is an exploded rear perspective view of the right rotation unit 7600. Note that FIGS. 89 and 90 show a state in which a portion of the right rotation unit 7600 (the back base 610 and the front base 620) is assembled.

As shown in FIGS. 89 and 90, in the right rotation unit 7600 in the seventh embodiment, a third displacement member 7660 is rotatably supported on the front side of one end (upper side in FIG. 89) of a first displacement member 7630. , the connecting displacement member 642 is rotatably supported by the third displacement member 7660. As will be described later, when the driven member 7641 is rotated relative to the first displacement member 7630 and the third displacement member 7660 is rotated with respect to the first displacement member 7630, the rotation of the third displacement member 7660 Accordingly, the connecting displacement member 642 is rotated while changing the position of its rotation center along a curved trajectory.

The first displacement member 7630 has a notch 7639 formed in the edge of one end (upper side in FIG. 90), and the space created by the notch 7639 serves as a support shaft 7665 of the third displacement member 7660, which will be described later. installation space. A connecting groove 7641c is bored in the driven member 7641 of the second displacement member 7640. The connection groove 7641c is a groove-shaped opening extending linearly along the longitudinal direction of the driven member 7641, and the connection pin 643 of the connection displacement member 642 is slidably inserted therethrough.

Note that the width of the connecting groove 7641c is set to be slightly larger than the diameter of the connecting pin 643. Further, the total length (groove length) of the connecting groove 7641c is longer than that of the connecting groove 641c in the fourth embodiment. Thereby, the amount of relative displacement (relative rotation angle) of the connected displacement member 642 with respect to the driven member 7641 can be ensured.

A support shaft 7665 is provided protruding from the back surface of the third displacement member 7660. The support shaft 7665 is a shaft-like body with a circular cross section that is inserted into the shaft support hole 642a of the connection displacement member 642, and the connection displacement member 642 is connected to the third displacement member 7660 through the support shaft 7665 and the shaft support hole 642a. is rotatably supported on the back of the

Note that a holder C having a diameter larger than the inner diameter of the shaft support hole 642a is fastened and fixed to the axial end surface of the support shaft 7665, thereby restricting the indicator shaft 7665 from coming out of the shaft support hole 642a. Further, the support shaft 7665 has a large diameter portion on the base side and a small diameter portion smaller than the large diameter portion on the distal end side, and the small diameter portion is inserted into the shaft support hole 642a. That is, the large diameter portion is a portion for raising the connection displacement member 642 from the back surface of the third displacement member 7660, and by raising the height of this large diameter portion, the connection displacement member 642 is moved in the front-rear direction (for example, , the positional relationship in FIG. 91(a) (direction perpendicular to the paper surface) is set to be the same as in the fourth embodiment.

Next, the operation of right rotation unit 7600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 91 to 94. 91 and 92 are front views of the right rotation unit 7600 in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position, and FIGS. 93 and 94 are front views of the right rotation unit 7600 when operating between the retracted position and the extended position. FIG. 7 is a schematic rear view of the right rotation unit 7600 in each state when the rotation is performed.

Note that FIGS. 91(a) to 91(c) correspond to FIGS. 93(a) to 93(c), and FIGS. 92(a) to 92(c) correspond to FIGS. 94(a) to 94(c). c) and are in the same state. In this case, FIG. 91(c) is the same as FIG. 92(a), and FIG. 93(c) is the same as FIG. 94(a), respectively.

Here, in the seventh embodiment, by sliding the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 in the first groove 635 of the first displacement member 7630, the first displacement member 7630, the second displacement member 7640, and the third displacement member 7660 are respectively displaced, the manner in which the first displacement member 7630 and the third displacement member 7660 are displaced is the same as in the fourth embodiment described above, so a detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 91 and 93, when the transmission member 654 is rotationally driven in the forward direction (clockwise in FIG. 93(a)) from the retracted position shown in FIGS. As described above, while the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 passes through the action section 635a of the first groove 635, the second displacement member 7640 (driven member 7641) is not displaced relative to the first displacement member 7630. , the second displacement member 7640 and the third displacement member 7660 are displaced together with the first displacement member 7630.

That is, in the sections shown in FIGS. 91(a) to 91(c) and 93(a) to 93(c), the first displacement member 7630 (virtual line L1) and the third displacement member 7660 (imaginary line L2) is maintained at the intersection angle θ1.

When the transmission member 654 is rotationally driven in the forward direction (clockwise in FIG. 94(a)) from the state shown in FIGS. 92(a) and 94(a), the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 By passing through the non-interference section 635b, the driven member 7641 rotates around the support shaft 632 (shaft support hole 641a) while the first displacement member 7630 is maintained in the state (position) shown in FIG. The connecting groove 7641c and the connecting pin 3641d are rotated in a direction (counterclockwise direction in FIG. 94(a)).

As a result, the inner wall surface of the sliding groove 4661 in the third displacement member 7660 is connected to the connecting pin 3641d of the driven member 7641, and the connecting pin 643 of the connected displacement member 642 is connected to the inner wall surface of the connecting groove 7641c of the driven member 7641. , are each pushed upward (upper side in FIG. 94(a)).

Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 92 and 94, the third displacement member 7660 is rotated relative to the first displacement member 7630, and the first displacement member 7630 (imaginary line L1) and the third displacement member 7660 (imaginary line The angle between the connecting displacement member 642 and the line L2 changes (decreases) from the intersection angle θ1 to the intersection angle θ3 via the intersection angle θ2 (θ3<θ2<θ1), and the connection displacement member 642 ) is rotated in the clockwise direction in FIG. 94(a) as the center of rotation, and the decorative portion 642b is lifted upward.

In this case, the third displacement member 7660 is rotated about the rotating shaft 4662 in a direction that lifts the support shaft 7665 upward, so the rotation of the third displacement member 7660 is used to rotate the third displacement member 7660. The connecting displacement member 642 itself, which is supported by the support shaft 7665, can be lifted upward.

That is, according to the seventh embodiment, the connecting displacement member 642 is rotated with respect to the third displacement member 7660 about the support shaft 7665 and is rotated with respect to the first displacement member 7630 in an arcuate trajectory. It can be displaced (lifted) upward. As a result, the displacement of the connecting displacement member 642 (decorative portion 642b) can be linked with the displacement of the third displacement member 7660 to create a more complicated aspect, and the amount of upward protrusion of the decorative portion 642b (the first An intersection angle θ4) which is an angle formed by an imaginary line L3 passing through the axis of the shaft support hole 642a (support shaft 7665) and along the longitudinal direction of the connecting displacement member 64 with respect to the displacement member 4630 (imaginary line L1). can be enlarged to make it stick out more upwardly.

<Eighth embodiment>
Next, the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 95 to 105. In the first embodiment, the aspect of the relative displacement of the second displacement member 740 with respect to the first displacement member 730 is the same in the outward path from the retracted position to the extended position and the return path from the extended position to the retracted position. In the left rotation unit 8700 in the eighth embodiment, the aspect of relative displacement of the second displacement member 740 with respect to the first displacement member 730 is different between the forward path and the return path. It's different. Note that the same parts as in each of the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 95 is an exploded front perspective view of a left rotation unit 8700 in the eighth embodiment, and FIG. 96 is an exploded rear perspective view of the left rotation unit 8700. Further, FIG. 97 is a front view of the guide portion 8773. Note that FIGS. 95 and 96 illustrate a state in which a portion of the left rotation unit 8700 (back base 710 and front base 720) is assembled.

As shown in FIGS. 95 to 97, in the left rotation unit 8700 according to the eighth embodiment, a guide portion 8773 is recessed in the front of one longitudinal end (upper side in FIG. 95) of a second connecting member 8770. As will be described later, the guide portion 8773 is formed as a circular path, and the connecting pin 8744a of the flange member 8744 is guided along the guide portion 8773, thereby changing the relative position of the second displacement member 740 with respect to the first displacement member 730. The form of displacement can be different on the outward and return journeys.

The connecting pin 8744a is a shaft-like body with a circular cross section that projects from the back surface of the flange member 8744 and is placed eccentrically from the axis of the rotating shaft 741, and its diameter is slightly larger than the groove width of the guide portion 8773. By setting the dimensions to be small, it is possible to move along the guide portion 8773. Note that an elastic body (not shown) made of a coil spring is stored in an elastically compressed state in the second connecting member 8770, and the elastic recovery force of the elastic body causes the connecting pin 8744a to move into the second connecting member 8770. is applied in a direction that causes it to protrude from the back surface of the body. Therefore, when the connecting pin 8744a moves along the guide section 8773, the state in which the tip of the connecting pin 8744a is kept in contact with the bottom surface of the guide section 8773 is maintained.

The guide portion 8773 is a concave groove having a substantially U-shaped cross section for guiding the connecting pin 8744a, and is formed as a circumferential path, and has a plurality of steps (first to third steps 8773h to 8773j) in the path. is formed with directionality (see FIG. 97).

In detail, the guide portion 8773 is a guide portion 8773 that extends substantially linearly in a front view along the width direction (direction substantially orthogonal to the longitudinal direction, left-right direction in FIG. 97) of the second connecting member 8770 starting from position P1. 1 groove 8773a, and a first groove 8773a that is connected to the terminal end of the first groove 8773a and extends substantially linearly in a front view along the longitudinal direction (vertical direction in FIG. 97) of the second connecting member 8770 with the starting end at position P2. The second groove 8773b is connected to the terminal end of the second groove 8773b, and extends while curving in an arc shape (in this embodiment, an arc shape convex in the direction away from position P2) with the starting end at position P3. A third groove 8773c has a terminal end connected to a starting end of the first groove 8773a.

A first step 8773h is formed at the connection portion between the first groove 8773a and the second groove 8773b. The first step 8773h is formed by making the bottom surface of the starting end side (position P2) of the second groove 8773b lower than the bottom surface of the terminal end side of the first groove 8773a (located on the back side of the paper in FIG. 97). It is a vertical plane that connects things. As a result, movement of the connecting pin 8744a from the end of the first groove 8773a to the starting end of the second groove 8773b is allowed, while movement of the connecting pin 8744a from the starting end of the second groove 8773b to the ending end of the first groove 8773a is allowed. It can be regulated by one step difference 8773h.

Similarly, a second step 8773i and a third step 8773j are formed at the connecting portion between the second groove 8773b and the third groove 8773c, and at the connecting portion between the third groove 8773c and the first groove 8773a, respectively. The second step 8773i is such that the bottom surface on the starting end side (position P3) of the third groove 8773c is lower than the bottom surface on the terminal end side of the second groove 8773b. (Position P1) is formed by making the bottom surface of the third groove 8773c lower than the bottom surface of the terminal end side of the third groove 8773c.

As a result, movement of the connecting pin 8744a from the end of the second groove 8773b (third groove 8773c) to the starting end of the third groove 8773c (first groove 8773a) is allowed, while the movement of the connecting pin 8744a is allowed. Movement of the connecting pin 8744a from the starting end of the second groove 8773b (third groove 8773c) to the terminal end of the second groove 8773b (third groove 8773c) can be restricted by the second step 8773i (third step 8773j).

In other words, the connecting pin 8744a is only allowed to move around the guide portion 8773 by sequentially moving the first groove 8773a, the second groove 8773b, and the third groove 8773c along the directions of arrows L1, L2, and L3. .

Next, the operation of left rotation unit 8700 will be described with reference to FIGS. 98 to 105.

Here, in the eighth embodiment, the drive pin 754b of the transmission member 754 slides in the drive groove 762 of the first connection member 760 (presses the inner wall surface), so that the first connection member 760 and the second connection member 8770, the first displacement member 730, and the second displacement member 740 are respectively displaced, the manner of displacement of the first coupling member 760, the second coupling member 8770, and the first displacement member 730 is the same as in the first embodiment described above. Since it is the same as the case of the form, detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIGS. 98 to 101, the operation of the left rotation unit 8700 when moving on the outward path from the retracted position to the extended position will be described.

98 and 99 are front views of the left rotation unit 8700 in each state when operating on the outward path from the retracted position to the extended position, and FIGS. FIG. 8 is a schematic rear view of the left rotation unit 8700 in various states when operating on the forward path.

As shown in FIGS. 98(a) and 100(a), in the retracted position, the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are in an upright state and are disposed in front of the front base 720.

In this case, an imaginary line M1 passing through the axis of the shaft support hole 732 (rotary shaft 741) and along the longitudinal direction of the first displacement member 730, and a virtual line M1 passing through the axis of the shaft support hole 732 (rotation shaft 741) and The angle between the second displacement member 740 and the virtual line M2 along the longitudinal direction is the intersection angle α1. Further, the connecting pin 8744a of the flange member 8744 is located at position P1 (starting end of the first groove 8773a) of the guide portion 8773 (see FIG. 97), and the connecting second member 8770 is located at the uppermost position (uppermost side in FIG. 100(a)). ).

From this state, when the transmission member 754 is rotationally driven in the forward direction (clockwise in FIG. 100(a)), the first connecting member 760 is rotated about the rotating shaft 761 in the extending direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 100(a)). The first displacement member 730 is rotated in the extending direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 100(a)) about the rotating shaft 731 as the rotation center. As a result, the first displacement member 730 is tilted in the extending direction, as shown in FIGS. 98(b) and 100(b).

Further, when the first connecting member 760 is rotated in the extending direction, the second connecting member 8770 is pulled downward (lower side in FIG. 101(a)), and the guide portion 8773 (the first The inner wall surface of the groove 8773a) pushes down the connecting pin 8744a of the flange member 8744 of the second displacement member 740, so that the connecting pin 8744a located at position P1 moves the guide portion 8773 along the first groove 8773a. and is guided in the direction of arrow L1 (see FIG. 97).

As a result, as shown in FIGS. 98(b) and 100(b), the second displacement member 740 rotates in the first direction (see FIG. rotation), and the angle formed by the first displacement member 730 (imaginary line M1) and the second displacement member 740 (imaginary line M2) changes (increases) from the intersection angle α1 to the intersection angle α2. (α1<α2).

When the transmission member 754 is further rotationally driven in the forward direction (clockwise in FIG. 100(b)) from the state shown in FIGS. 98(b) and 100(b), the first connecting member 760 is rotated in the extending direction (FIG. 100(b) counterclockwise) about the rotating shaft 761, the first displacement member 730 is rotated in the extending direction (FIG. 100(b) counterclockwise) about the rotating shaft 731. ) counterclockwise) and further tilted in the projecting direction as shown in FIGS. 99(a) and 101(a).

Further, when the first connecting member 760 is rotated in the extending direction, the second connecting member 8770 is further drawn downward (lower right side in FIG. 101(b)), and the guide portion 8773 of the second connecting member 8770 ( The inner wall surface of the first groove 8773a) pushes down the connecting pin 8744a of the flange member 8744 of the second displacement member 740, so that the connecting pin 8744a moves the guide portion 8773 along the first groove 8773a in the direction of arrow L1. Further guidance is provided (see Figure 97).

As a result, as shown in FIGS. 99(a) and 101(a), the second displacement member 740 rotates in the first direction (see FIG. 100(b) clockwise The angle between the first displacement member 730 (imaginary line M1) and the second displacement member 740 (imaginary line M2) changes (increases) from the intersection angle α2 to the intersection angle α3. ) (α1<α2<α3).

Thereafter, as the transmission member 754 reaches the end of its movable range, the first displacement member 730 is tilted to the maximum and the first displacement A state is formed in which the second displacement member 740 is maximally displaced (relatively rotated) with respect to the member 730. That is, the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are placed at the extended position.

In this case, the connecting pin 8744a is guided along the guide portion 8773 in the direction of arrow L1 along the first groove 8773a, passes (jumps down) the first step 8773h, and then hits the inner wall surface of the second groove 8773b. , located at position P2 (see FIG. 97). As a result, the angle formed by the first displacement member 730 (imaginary line M1) and the second displacement member 740 (imaginary line M2) is changed (increased) from the intersection angle α3 to the intersection angle α4 (α1<α2<α3 <α4).

Next, with reference to FIGS. 102 to 105, the operation of the left rotation unit 8700 during the return trip from the extended position to the retracted position will be described.

FIGS. 102 and 103 are front views of the left rotation unit 8700 in each state when moving back from the extended position to the retracted position, and FIGS. FIG. 7 is a schematic rear view of the left rotation unit 8700 in various states when the left rotation unit 8700 operates on the return trip. Note that FIG. 98(a) is the same as FIG. 103(b), and FIG. 99(b) is the same as FIG. 102(a), respectively.

Here, the rotational position of the first displacement member 730 shown in FIGS. 102(b) and 104(b) is the same as the rotational position of the first displacement member 730 shown in FIGS. 99(a) and 101(a). The rotational position of the first displacement member 730 shown in FIGS. 103(a) and 105(a) is the same as the rotational position of the first displacement member 730 shown in FIGS. 98(b) and 100(b). .

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 102(a) and 104(a), in the extended position, the connecting pin 8744a of the flange member 8744 is located at position P2 (starting end of the second groove 8773b) of the guide portion 8773 ( (See FIG. 97), the second connecting member 8770 is brought to the lowest position (lower right side in FIG. 104(a)).

Contrary to the case described above (the outward path shown in FIGS. 98 to 101), the transmission member 754 moves in the opposite direction (FIG. 104(a) counterclockwise) from the extended position shown in FIGS. 102(a) and 104(a). When the first connecting member 760 is rotated in the retracting direction (clockwise in FIG. 104(a)) about the rotating shaft 761, the first displacement member 730 rotates around the rotating shaft 731. It is rotated in the retracting direction (clockwise in FIG. 104(a)) about the rotation center. As a result, the first displacement member 730 is rotated (erected) in the retracting direction, as shown in FIGS. 102(b) and 104(b).

Furthermore, when the first connecting member 760 is rotated in the retracting direction, the second connecting member 8770 is pushed upward (upper left side in FIG. 8773 is guided in the direction of arrow L2 along the second groove 8773b (see FIG. 97). In this case, as described above, the second groove 8773b extends along the longitudinal direction of the second connecting member 8770, and the relative displacement of the second connecting member 8770 with respect to the first displacement member 730 is It is considered to be a linear movement (sliding displacement) in the direction along the direction.

Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 102(b) and 104(b), in the section where the connecting pin 8744a is guided along the second groove 8773b (see FIG. 97), the second displacement member 730 is Relative displacement (relative rotation) about the rotation axis 741 of 740 is not formed. Thereby, the angle formed by the first displacement member 730 (imaginary line M1) and the second displacement member 740 (imaginary line M2) is maintained at the intersection angle α4.

When the transmission member 754 is further rotated in the opposite direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 104(b)) from the state shown in FIGS. 102(b) and 104(b), the first connection As the member 760 is rotated in the retracting direction (clockwise in FIG. 104(b)) about the rotating shaft 761, the first displacement member 730 is rotated in the retracting direction (clockwise in FIG. 104(b)) about the rotating shaft 731. 103(a) and 105(a), further rotated (erected) in the retracting direction.

Further, when the first connecting member 760 is rotated in the retracting direction, the second connecting member 8770 is further pushed upward (upper left side in FIG. 104(b)), so that the connecting pin 8744a moves the guide portion 8773 It is further guided in the direction of arrow L2 along the groove 8773b, passes (jumps down) the second step 8773i, and then hits the inner wall surface of the third groove 8773c, thereby being located at position P3 (see FIG. 97).

As described above, in the section where the connecting pin 8744a is guided along the second groove 8773b, relative displacement (relative rotation) about the rotation axis 741 of the second displacement member 740 with respect to the first displacement member 730 is not formed. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 103(a) and 105(a), the angle between the first displacement member 730 (imaginary line M1) and the second displacement member 740 (imaginary line M2) is maintained at the intersection angle α4. be done.

Thereafter, as the transmission member 754 reaches the end of its movable range, the first displacement member 730 is erected to its maximum position and the first displacement A state is created in which the relative displacement (relative rotation) of the second displacement member 740 with respect to the member 730 is minimized. That is, the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are placed at the retracted position.

In this case, by pushing up the second connecting member 8770 to the uppermost position, the connecting pin 8744a is guided along the guide portion 8773 in the direction of arrow L3 along the third groove 8773c, and passes through the third step 8773j ( After jumping down), it hits the inner wall surface of the first groove 8773a and is positioned (returned) to position P1 (see FIG. 97). As a result, the angle formed by the first displacement member 730 (imaginary line M1) and the second displacement member 740 (imaginary line M2) is returned (decreased) from the intersection angle α4 to the intersection angle α1.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the displacement (rotation ) may be the same, while the relative displacement of the second displacement member 740 with respect to the first displacement member 730 may be different.

Specifically, on the outward journey, the angle formed by the first displacement member 730 (imaginary line M1) and the second displacement member 740 (imaginary line M2) is While increasing gradually in proportion to the amount (rotation amount), on the return trip, the angle between the first displacement member 730 (imaginary line M1) and the second displacement member 740 (imaginary line M2) is maintained at the intersection angle α4. It is possible to create an aspect in which the intersection angle α4 is reduced to the intersection angle α1 in a short time just before the intersection angle α4 is displaced toward the retracted position.

Furthermore, since the connecting pin 8744a is guided along each groove 8773a to 8773c of the guide portion 8773, even when the transmission member 754 (first displacement member 730) is rotationally driven (displaced) at a relatively high speed, Shaking of the second displacement member 740 with respect to the first displacement member 730 can be suppressed.

<Ninth embodiment>
Next, a ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 106 to 115. In the eighth embodiment, a case has been described in which the guide portion 8773 is formed as a circumferential path in which a concave groove having a U-shaped cross section is endlessly continued. However, in the guide portion 9773 in the ninth embodiment, the connecting pin 744a is It is formed as an opening that is loosely fitted. Note that the same parts as in each of the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 106 is an exploded front perspective view of a left rotation unit 9700 in the ninth embodiment, and FIG. 107 is an exploded rear perspective view of the left rotation unit 9700. Note that FIGS. 106 and 107 illustrate a state in which a portion of the left rotation unit 9700 (the back base 710 and the front base 720) is assembled.

As shown in FIGS. 106 and 107, in the left rotation unit 9700 according to the ninth embodiment, a guide portion 9773 is formed at one end in the longitudinal direction of a second connecting member 9770 (upper side in FIG. 106). As will be described later, by displacing the connecting pin 744a of the flange member 744 within the guide portion 9773, the form of relative displacement of the second displacement member 740 with respect to the first displacement member 730 can be changed to different forms on the outward and return journeys. can do.

The guide portion 9773 is connected to a first inner wall 9773a extending substantially linearly in a front view along the width direction (direction substantially perpendicular to the longitudinal direction) of the second connecting member 9770, and an end of the first inner wall 9773a. and a second inner wall 9773b that extends substantially linearly in a front view along the longitudinal direction (vertical direction in FIG. 106) of the second connecting member 9770, and a second inner wall 9773b that is connected to the terminal end of the second inner wall 9773b and has an arcuate shape. (In this embodiment, the third inner wall 9773a has a circular arc shape that is convex in the direction away from the connecting portion of the first inner wall 9773a and the second inner wall 9773b.) The inner wall 9773c is formed as an opening with an inner wall surface.

Next, the operation of left rotation unit 9700 will be described with reference to FIGS. 108 to 115.

Here, in the ninth embodiment, the drive pin 754b of the transmission member 754 slides in the drive groove 762 of the first connection member 760 (presses the inner wall surface), so that the first connection member 760 and the second connection member 9770, the first displacement member 730, and the second displacement member 740 are respectively displaced, the manner of displacement of the first coupling member 760, the second coupling member 9770, and the first displacement member 730 is the same as in the first embodiment described above. Since it is the same as the case of the form, detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIGS. 108 to 111, the operation of the left rotation unit 9700 when moving on the outward path from the retracted position to the extended position will be described.

108 and 109 are front views of the left rotation unit 9700 in each state when operating on the outward path from the retracted position to the extended position, and FIGS. FIG. 9 is a schematic rear view of the left rotation unit 9700 in various states when operating on the forward path.

As shown in FIGS. 108(a) and 110(a), in the retracted position, the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are in an upright state and are disposed in front of the front base 720.

In this case, an imaginary line M1 passing through the axis of the shaft support hole 732 (rotary shaft 741) and along the longitudinal direction of the first displacement member 730, and a virtual line M1 passing through the axis of the shaft support hole 732 (rotation shaft 741) and The angle between the second displacement member 740 and the virtual line M2 along the longitudinal direction is the intersection angle β1. Further, the connecting pin 744a of the flange member 744 is located at the connecting portion between the first inner wall 9773a and the third inner wall 9773c of the guide portion 9773 (the starting end of the first inner wall 9773a), and the connecting second member 9770 is located at the uppermost part (in the figure). 110 (a) upper side).

In addition, the center of gravity G, which is the center of mass of the second displacement member 740 (the point of action of the resultant force of gravity acting on the second displacement member 740), is the center of gravity when viewed in the axial direction of the rotation shaft 741 (shaft support hole 732) (i.e., 110(a)), the side opposite to the connecting pin 744a (the left side in FIG. 110(a) ) is located.

Therefore, the second displacement member 740 is rotated by its own weight around the rotating shaft 741 in a direction that lifts the connecting pin 744a upward (counterclockwise in FIG. 110(a)). As the second displacement member 740 rotates due to its own weight, the connecting pin 744a comes into contact with (is pressed against) the first inner wall 9773a of the guide portion 9773.

From this state, when the transmission member 754 is rotationally driven in the forward direction (clockwise in FIG. 110(a)), the first connecting member 760 is rotated about the rotating shaft 761 in the extending direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 110(a)). The first displacement member 730 is rotated in the extending direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 110(a)) about the rotating shaft 731 as the rotation center. As a result, the first displacement member 730 is tilted in the extending direction, as shown in FIGS. 108(b) and 110(b).

Furthermore, when the first connecting member 760 is rotated in the extending direction, the second connecting member 9770 is pulled downward (lower side in FIG. 110(a)), and the inner wall surface of the guide portion 9773 of the second connecting member 9770 (The first inner wall 9773a) pushes down the connecting pin 744a of the flange member 744 of the second displacement member 740, so that the connecting pin 744a moves the guide portion 9773 along the first inner wall 9773a toward the second inner wall 9773b. You will be guided in the direction.

As a result, as shown in FIGS. 108(b) and 110(b), the second displacement member 740 rotates in the first direction (see FIG. 110(a) clockwise rotation), and the angle formed by the first displacement member 730 (imaginary line M1) and the second displacement member 740 (imaginary line M2) changes (increases) from the intersection angle β1 to the intersection angle β2. (β1<β2).

When the transmission member 754 is further rotationally driven in the forward direction (clockwise in FIG. 110(b)) from the state shown in FIGS. 108(b) and 110(b), the first connecting member 760 is rotated in the extending direction (FIG. 110(b) counterclockwise) about the rotating shaft 761, the first displacement member 730 is rotated in the extending direction (FIG. 110(b) counterclockwise) about the rotating shaft 731. ) counterclockwise) and further tilted in the projecting direction as shown in FIGS. 109(a) and 111(a).

Furthermore, when the first connecting member 760 is rotated in the extending direction, the second connecting member 9770 is further drawn downward (lower right side in FIG. 110(b)), and the guide portion 9773 of the second connecting member 9770 is pulled downward. The inner wall surface (first inner wall 9773a) pushes down the connecting pin 744a of the flange member 744 of the second displacement member 740, so that the connecting pin 744a moves the guide portion 9773 along the first inner wall 9773a to the second inner wall 9773b. You will be further guided in the direction towards.

As a result, as shown in FIGS. 109(a) and 111(a), the second displacement member 740 is rotated in the first direction (see FIG. 110(b) clockwise) relative to the first displacement member 730 with The angle between the first displacement member 730 (imaginary line M1) and the second displacement member 740 (imaginary line M2) changes (increases) from the intersection angle β2 to the intersection angle β3. ) (β1<β2<β3).

Thereafter, as the transmission member 754 reaches the end of its movable range, the first displacement member 730 is tilted to the maximum and the first displacement A state is formed in which the second displacement member 740 is maximally displaced (relatively rotated) with respect to the member 730. That is, the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are placed at the extended position.

In this case, the connecting pin 744a is guided by the guide portion 9773 along the first inner wall 9773a and abuts against the inner wall surface of the second inner wall 9773b. 9773b). As a result, the angle formed by the first displacement member 730 (imaginary line M1) and the second displacement member 740 (imaginary line M2) is changed (increased) from the intersection angle β3 to the intersection angle β4 (β1<β2<β3 <β4).

Next, with reference to FIGS. 112 to 115, the operation of the left rotation unit 9700 during the return trip from the extended position to the retracted position will be described.

112 and 113 are front views of the left rotation unit 9700 in each state when operating the return path from the extended position to the retracted position. FIG. 9 is a schematic rear view of the left rotation unit 9700 in various states when operating on a return trip. Note that FIG. 112(a) is the same as FIG. 109(b), and FIG. 113(b) is the same as FIG. 108(a).

Here, the rotational position of the first displacement member 730 shown in FIGS. 112(b) and 114(b) is the same as the rotational position of the first displacement member 730 shown in FIGS. 109(a) and 111(a). The rotational position of the first displacement member 730 shown in FIGS. 113(a) and 115(a) is the same as the rotational position of the first displacement member 730 shown in FIGS. 108(b) and 110(b). .

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 112(a) and 114(a), in the extended position, the connecting pin 744a of the flange member 744 The second connecting member 9770 is located at the starting end of the second inner wall 9773b), and the second connecting member 9770 is pulled most downward (lower right side in FIG. 114(a)).

Furthermore, the center of gravity G of the second displacement member 740 is relative to the vertical line Z when viewed in the axial direction of the rotation shaft 741 (the shaft support hole 732) (i.e., the state shown in FIG. 114(a)). They are located on the same side (right side in FIG. 114(a)). Therefore, the second displacement member 740 is rotated by its own weight around the rotating shaft 741 in a direction that pushes down the connecting pin 744a (clockwise in FIG. 114(a)). As the second displacement member 740 rotates due to its own weight, the connecting pin 744a comes into contact with (is pressed against) the second inner wall 9773b of the guide portion 9773.

From this state, contrary to the case described above (the forward path shown in FIGS. 108 to 111), the transmission member 754 moves in the opposite direction (FIG. 114 ( a) counterclockwise), the first connecting member 760 is rotated about the rotating shaft 761 in the retracting direction (clockwise in FIG. 114(a)), and the first displacement member 730 is rotated. It is rotated in the retracting direction (clockwise in FIG. 114(a)) about the rotating shaft 731 as the rotation center. As a result, the first displacement member 730 is rotated (erected) in the retracting direction, as shown in FIGS. 112(b) and 114(b).

Further, when the first connecting member 760 is rotated in the retracting direction, the second connecting member 9770 is pushed upward (to the upper left side in FIG. 114(a)). As described above, the connecting pin 744a is in contact with (pressed against) the second inner wall 9773b of the guide portion 9773 due to the rotation of the second displacement member 740 due to its own weight. It is guided along the second inner wall 9773b toward the third inner wall 9773c.

In this case, as described above, the second inner wall 9773b extends along the longitudinal direction of the second connecting member 9770, and the relative displacement of the second connecting member 9770 with respect to the first displacement member 730 is It is considered to be a linear movement (sliding displacement) in the direction along the direction.

Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 112(b) and 114(b), in the section where the connecting pin 744a is guided along the second inner wall 9773b, the rotation axis 741 of the second displacement member 740 relative to the first displacement member 730 No relative displacement (relative rotation) is formed around the center of rotation. Thereby, the angle formed by the first displacement member 730 (imaginary line M1) and the second displacement member 740 (imaginary line M2) is maintained at the intersection angle β4.

When the transmission member 754 is further rotationally driven in the opposite direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 114(b)) from the state shown in FIGS. 112(b) and 114(b), the connection first As the member 760 is rotated in the retracting direction (clockwise in FIG. 114(b)) about the rotating shaft 761, the first displacement member 730 is rotated in the retracting direction (clockwise in FIG. 114(b)) about the rotating shaft 731. 113(a) and 115(a), further rotated (erected) in the retracting direction.

Further, when the first connecting member 760 is rotated in the retracting direction, the second connecting member 9770 is further pushed upward (upper left side in FIG. 114(b)), so that the connecting pin 744a moves the guide portion 9773 It is further guided along the inner wall 9773b in the direction toward the third inner wall 9773c, and by hitting the inner wall surface of the third inner wall 9773c, the connecting portion of the second inner wall 9773b and the third inner wall 9773c (starting end of the third inner wall 9773c) be located.

As described above, in the section where the connecting pin 744a is guided along the second inner wall 9773b, relative displacement (relative rotation) about the rotation axis 741 of the second displacement member 740 with respect to the first displacement member 730 is not formed. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 113(a) and 115(a), the angle formed by the first displacement member 730 (imaginary line M1) and the second displacement member 740 (imaginary line M2) is maintained at the intersection angle β4. be done.

Thereafter, as the transmission member 754 reaches the end of its movable range, the first displacement member 730 is erected to its maximum position and the first displacement A state is created in which the relative displacement (relative rotation) of the second displacement member 740 with respect to the member 730 is minimized. That is, the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are placed at the retracted position.

In this case, by pushing up the second connecting member 9770 to the uppermost position, the connecting pin 744a guides the guide portion 9773 in the direction toward the first inner wall 9773a along the third inner wall 9773c, and By abutting against the inner wall surface of , it is positioned (returned) to the connecting portion of the first inner wall 9773a and the third inner wall 9773c (the starting end of the first inner wall 9773a). As a result, the angle formed by the first displacement member 730 (imaginary line M1) and the second displacement member 740 (imaginary line M2) is returned (decreased) from the intersection angle β4 to the intersection angle β1.

In this embodiment, when transitioning from the state shown in FIG. 115(a) to the state shown in FIG. 115(b), the center of gravity G of the second displacement member 740 crosses the vertical line Z. , and can be rotated prior to being pushed up by the second connecting member 9770.

Specifically, when the center of gravity G of the second displacement member 740 is located on the same side as the connecting pin 744a (the right side in FIG. 115(a)) with respect to the vertical line Z, the second displacement member 740 Since the connecting pin 744a is pressed against the third inner wall 9773c by rotation due to its own weight, it gradually rotates counterclockwise as shown in FIG. 115(a) as the second connecting member 9770 is pushed upward (synchronized). On the other hand, due to this rotation, when the center of gravity G of the second displacement member 740 crosses the vertical line Z and is located on the opposite side of the connecting pin 744a (left side in FIG. 115(a)), the second displacement member 740 is rotated by its own weight in a direction that lifts the connecting pin 744a upward. That is, prior to being pushed up by the second connecting member 9770, it is rotated.

Therefore, according to the present embodiment, the displacement (rotation) of the first displacement member 730 with respect to the back base 710 and the front base 720 is While the aspect can be the same, the aspect of the relative displacement of the second displacement member 740 with respect to the first displacement member 730 can be different, and on the return trip, the first displacement member 730 (imaginary line M1) and the second The angle formed with the member 740 (imaginary line M2) is displaced toward the retracted position while maintaining the intersecting angle β4, and immediately before being placed at the retracted position, the intersecting angle β4 is changed to the intersecting angle β1 at high speed (in a short time). It is possible to form a mode of reducing the amount of water.

<Tenth embodiment>
Next, the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 116 and 117. Note that the same parts as in each of the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

Here, the left rotation unit 10700 according to the tenth embodiment differs from the left rotation unit 9700 according to the ninth embodiment only in that it includes a retainer 10746, and the other components are the same, so a description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 116 is a schematic rear view of the left rotation unit 10700 in the tenth embodiment, and shows a state in which the center of gravity G of the second displacement member 740 is located on the vertical line Z. As shown in FIG. 116, in the left rotation unit 10700 in the tenth embodiment, a retainer 10746 is disposed on the back surface of the second displacement member 740. Here, the cage 10746 will be explained with reference to FIG. 117.

117(a) is a front view of the cage 10746, FIG. 117(b) is a cross-sectional view of the cage 10746 taken along the CXVIIb-CXVIIb line in FIG. 117(a), and FIG. 117(c) is a front view of the cage 10746. 117(a) is a cross-sectional view of the retainer 10746 taken along the line CXVIIc-CXVIIc in FIG. 117(a).

As shown in FIG. 117, the holder 10746 is formed into a cylindrical shape having an internal space with a circular cross section, and a predetermined heavy object is displaceably housed in the internal space. In this embodiment, the predetermined heavy object is the liquid LQ, and approximately ⅓ of the volume of the internal space is filled with the liquid LQ. Therefore, according to the inclination of the holder 10746, the liquid LQ can be displaced toward one end or the other end of the holder 10746 in the longitudinal direction (right side or left side in FIG. 117(c)) (see FIGS. 118 to 121).

The explanation will be returned to FIG. 116. The retainer 10746 is in a posture (horizontal posture) in which its longitudinal direction (left-right direction in FIG. 116) is orthogonal to the vertical line Z when viewed in the axial direction of the rotating shaft 741 (support hole 732) (that is, the state in FIG. 116). It is disposed on the back surface of the second displacement member 740 at a position where its longitudinal center coincides with the center of gravity G of the second displacement member 740.

Therefore, when the second displacement member 740 is rotated to one side or the other side about the rotation axis 741, the retainer 10746 in the horizontal position is placed in an inclined position with one longitudinal side or the other side positioned downward. , displaces the housed heavy object (liquid LQ) to one side or the other side in the longitudinal direction (that is, to the same side as the moving direction of the center of gravity G).

As a result, when the second displacement member 740 is rotated about the rotation axis 741, the second displacement member 740 and the retainer 10746 are integrated into a single member, compared to a case where the retainer 10746 is not provided. The amount of change in the position of the center of mass (center of gravity G') can be made larger.

Next, the operation of the left rotation unit 10700 will be described with reference to FIGS. 118 to 121. 118 and 119 are schematic rear views of the left rotation unit 10700 in each state when moving forward from the retracted position to the extended position, and FIGS. 120 and 121 are rear views of the left rotation unit 10700 from the extended position to the retracted position. FIG. 7 is a schematic rear view of the left rotation unit 10700 in various states when operating on a return trip toward the vehicle.

As shown in FIGS. 118 to 121, the transmission member 754 is rotationally driven in the forward or reverse direction, and the first displacement member 730 is rotated with respect to the back base 710 and the front base 720. When the second displacement member 740 is relatively displaced (rotated) with respect to the second displacement member 730, the retainer 10746 is tilted according to the rotational position of the second displacement member 740, and the liquid LQ filled in the internal space of the retainer 10746 is The retainer 10746 can be displaced to one end or the other end in the longitudinal direction.

As a result, the center of gravity G' of the second displacement member 740 and the holder 10746 can be located farther from the vertical line Z than in the case where the holder 10746 is not provided.

Therefore, in the section in which the connecting pin 744a is displaced along the first to third inner walls 9773a to 9773c of the guide portion 9773, rotation by the own weight of the second displacement member 740 using the center of gravity G' is ensured, and the connecting pin 744a is can be easily maintained in a state in which it is in contact with the first to third inner walls 9773a to 9773c. As a result, wobbling of the second displacement member 740 with respect to the first displacement member 730 can be suppressed, and the relative displacement (rotation) thereof can be stabilized.

On the other hand, in a section where the second displacement member 740 is rotated by its own weight prior to being pushed up by the second connecting member 9770, the center of gravity G' can be used to ensure that the second displacement member 740 leads. As a result, the rotation from the crossing angle β4 to the crossing angle β1 can be performed at a higher speed (in a shorter time) immediately before being placed in the retracted position.

<Eleventh embodiment>
Next, an eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 122 to 130. In the first embodiment, a case will be described in which a relative displacement of the second displacement member 740 with respect to the first displacement member 730 is formed in both the outward path from the retracted position to the extended position and the return path from the extended position to the retracted position. However, in the left rotation unit 11700 in the eleventh embodiment, the relative displacement of the second displacement member 740 with respect to the first displacement member 730 is formed only on the outward path, and not on the return path. Note that the same parts as in each of the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 122 is an exploded rear perspective view of the left rotation unit 11700 in the eleventh embodiment. Note that FIG. 122 shows a state in which a portion of the left rotation unit 11700 (back base 710 and front base 720) is assembled.

As shown in FIG. 122, in the left rotation unit 11700 in the eleventh embodiment, the second displacement member 740 and the second connecting member 11770 are connected by a rack and pinion mechanism including a pinion gear 11747 and a rack gear 11774. In this case, as will be described later, since the pinion gear 11747 is configured as a one-way clutch, the linear motion of the second coupling member 11770 is converted into the rotational motion of the second displacement member 740 on the outward journey, while the second By restricting conversion of linear motion of member 11770 into rotational motion of second displacement member 740, relative displacement of second displacement member 740 with respect to first displacement member 730 can be formed only on the outward path.

The pinion gear 11747 is formed as a cam-type one-way clutch in which a roller and a spring are interposed between the inner ring and the outer ring. A gear is engraved to mesh with the . In this case, when the outer ring is rotated clockwise in the rear view of the second displacement member 740, the pinion gear 11747 transmits the rotation to the inner ring (second displacement member 740), while the outer ring rotates counterclockwise. Then, the transmission of the rotation to the inner ring (second displacement member 740) is cut off.

The rack gear 11774 is a gear carved on the side surface of the second connecting member 11770, and meshes with the pinion gear 11747. Note that the carved range of the rack gear 11774 is the range in which the meshing with the pinion gear 11747 is released when the second connecting member 11770 is pulled downward to the maximum (see FIG. 126(b) and FIG. 129). ).

A biasing spring SP formed as a metal torsion spring is interposed between the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740. The biasing spring SP has a coil portion fitted onto the rotating shaft 741 and elastically torsionally deformed, and an arm extending from one end of the coil portion is locked to the first displacement member 730. An arm extending from the other end of the coil part is locked to the second displacement member 740, and its elastic recovery force is transferred to the first displacement member 730 (imaginary line M1) and the second displacement member 740 (imaginary line M2). act in a direction to maintain the angle formed by the intersection angle γ1.

Next, the operation of left rotation unit 11700 will be described with reference to FIGS. 123 to 130.

Here, in the eleventh embodiment, the drive pin 754b of the transmission member 754 slides in the drive groove 762 of the first connection member 760 (presses the inner wall surface), so that the first connection member 760 and the second connection member 11770, the first displacement member 730, and the second displacement member 740 are respectively displaced, the manner of displacement of the first coupling member 760, the second coupling member 11770, and the first displacement member 730 is the same as in the first embodiment described above. Since it is the same as the case of the form, detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIGS. 123 to 126, the operation of the left rotation unit 11700 when moving on the outward path from the retracted position to the extended position will be described.

123 and 124 are front views of the left rotation unit 11700 in each state when operating on the outward path from the retracted position to the extended position. FIG. 7 is a schematic rear view of the left rotation unit 11700 in various states when operating on the forward path.

As shown in FIGS. 123(a) and 125(a), in the retracted position, the angle formed by the first displacement member 730 (imaginary line M1) and the second displacement member 740 (imaginary line M2) is the intersection angle It is assumed to be γ1. In this case, the second connecting member 11770 is pushed up most upwardly (upper side in FIG. 125(a)).

From this state, when the transmission member 754 is rotationally driven in the forward direction (clockwise in FIG. 125(a)), the first connecting member 760 is rotated about the rotating shaft 761 in the extending direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 125(a)). The first displacement member 730 is rotated in the extending direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 110(a)) about the rotating shaft 731 as the rotation center. As a result, the first displacement member 730 goes through the states shown in FIGS. 123(b) and 125(b), and is tilted in the extending direction as shown in FIGS. 124(a) and 126(a).

Further, when the first connecting member 760 is rotated in the extending direction, the second connecting member 11770 is pulled downward (lower side in FIG. 125(a)), so that the rack gear 11774 of the second connecting member 11770 is connected to the pinion gear. 11747 (outer ring) is rotated clockwise in FIG. 125(a). The rotation of the outer ring in this direction is a rotation in a direction that transmits the rotation to the inner ring (second displacement member 740).

Therefore, after passing through the states shown in FIGS. 123(b) and 125(b), as shown in FIGS. 124(a) and 126(a), the second displacement member 740 is moved to ) is further elastically deformed in the torsional direction and rotated relative to the first displacement member 730, so that the angle formed by the first displacement member 730 (imaginary line M1) and the second displacement member 740 (imaginary line M2) is The crossing angle is changed (increased) from the crossing angle γ1 to the crossing angle γ3 via the crossing angle γ2 (γ1<γ2<γ3).

Thereafter, as the transmission member 754 reaches the end of its movable range, the first displacement member 730 is extended to the maximum as shown in FIGS. 124(b) and 126(b), and the first displacement member 730 and second displacement member 740 are placed in the extended position.

In this case, in this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 124(b) and 126(b), when the second connecting member 11770 is pulled to the lowest position, the meshing of the rack gear 11774 and the pinion gear 11747 is released. As a result, the second displacement member 740 receives the elastic recovery force of the biasing spring SP (see FIG. 122) and is returned to the initial position. That is, the angle formed by the first displacement member 730 (imaginary line M1) and the second displacement member 740 (imaginary line M2) is returned (reduced) from the intersection angle γ3 to the intersection angle γ1.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 127 to 130, the operation of the left rotation unit 11700 during the return trip from the extended position to the retracted position will be described.

127 and 128 are front views of the left rotation unit 11700 in each state when moving back from the extended position to the retracted position. FIG. 7 is a schematic rear view of the left rotation unit 11700 in various states when operating on a return trip. Note that FIG. 127(a) is the same as FIG. 124(b), and FIG. 128(b) is the same as FIG. 123(a), respectively.

Here, the rotational position of the first displacement member 730 shown in FIGS. 127(b) and 129(b) is the same as the rotational position of the first displacement member 730 shown in FIGS. 124(a) and 126(a). The rotational position of the first displacement member 730 shown in FIGS. 128(a) and 130(a) is the same as the rotational position of the first displacement member 730 shown in FIGS. 123(b) and 125(b). .

Contrary to the case described above (the outward path shown in FIGS. 123 to 126), the transmission member 754 is moved in the opposite direction (FIG. 129(a) counterclockwise) from the extended position shown in FIGS. 127(a) and 129(a). When the first connecting member 760 is rotated in the retracting direction (clockwise in FIG. 129(a)) about the rotating shaft 761, the first displacement member 730 rotates around the rotating shaft 731. It is rotated in the retracting direction (clockwise in FIG. 129(a)) about the rotation center. As a result, the first displacement member 730 passes through the states shown in FIGS. 127(b), 128(a), 129(b), and 130(a), and then passes through the states shown in FIGS. ), it is placed in the retracted position (standing up).

Further, when the first connecting member 760 is rotated in the retracting direction, the second connecting member 11770 is pushed upward (upper left side in FIG. 129(a)), so that As shown, the rack gear 11774 is meshed with the pinion gear 11747, and the second connecting member 11770 is further pushed upward, so that the rack gear 11774 rotates the pinion gear 11747 (outer ring) counterclockwise in FIG. 129(b). The rotation of the outer ring in this direction is a rotation in a direction that cuts off the transmission of the rotation to the inner ring (second displacement member 740).

Therefore, from the state shown in FIG. 127(b) and FIG. 129(b), through the state shown in FIG. 128(a) and FIG. 130(a), the evacuation position shown in FIG. 128(b) and FIG. 130(b) is reached. In the section until the second displacement member 740 is disposed in The angle formed by this is maintained at the intersection angle γ1.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, on the outward trip, as the first displacement member 730 rotates (tilts) in the projecting direction with respect to the back base 710 and the front base 720, the first displacement member 730 Gradually displacing the two displacement members 740 relative to each other, increasing the angle formed by the first displacement member 730 (imaginary line M1) and the second displacement member 740 (imaginary line M2) from the intersection angle γ1 to the intersection angle γ3, At the extended position, the displacement mode changes to the crossing angle γ1, while on the return trip, the second displacement member 740 is not displaced relative to the first displacement member 730 (that is, the first displacement member 730 (imaginary line M1) and the second displacement member 740 (imaginary line M2) while maintaining the intersection angle γ1), the first displacement member 730 rotates (stands up) in the retracting direction with respect to the back base 710 and the front base 720. It is possible to form a displacement mode that

<Twelfth embodiment>
Next, a twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 131 to 133. In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the base-side engaging member 726 is fixedly installed in a state protruding from the front of the front base 720. However, the base-side engaging member 12726 in the twelfth embodiment is It is arranged so that it can appear in front of it. Note that the same parts as in each of the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 131 is a partially exploded perspective view of a left rotation unit 12700 in the twelfth embodiment. 132(a) is a partially enlarged front view of the front base 12720, and FIG. 132(b) is a sectional view of the front base 12720 taken along the line CXXXIIb-CXXXIIb in FIG. 132(a).

As shown in FIGS. 131 and 132, in the left rotation unit 12700 in the twelfth embodiment, a base side engagement member 12726 and a transmission member 12728 are housed in the internal space of a front base 12720, and a second displacement member An insertion member 12745 is disposed on the back side of 12740.

The base-side engaging member 12726 is a sliding portion that is disposed so as to be slidable in the front-rear direction (vertical direction in FIG. 132(a), vertical direction in FIG. 132(b)) along a guide groove (not shown) of the front base 12720. 12726c, and a base portion 726a and a bent portion 726b are formed on the front surface of the sliding portion 12726c (the front side in FIG. 132(a) and the lower side in FIG. 132(b)).

The base side engaging member 12726 moves the base portion 726a and the bent portion 726b from the receiving recess 727 to the front side (FIG. 132(a) At the same time, the slide portion 12726c slides along a guide groove (not shown) toward the back side (back side in FIG. 132(a) and upper side in FIG. 132(b)). By being displaced, the base portion 726a and the bent portion 726b can be recessed into the receiving recess 727.

In this case, between the front surface of the slide portion 12726c and the back surface of the front base 12720, a biasing spring SP1 made of a coil spring is arranged in an elastically compressed and deformed state, and the biasing spring SP1 is elastically recovered. The force maintains the base-side engaging member 12726 in the retracted state (the state shown in FIG. 132(b)). Note that in this retracted state, the front of the bent portion 726b and the front of the front base 12720 are arranged flush, making it difficult for the player to recognize the presence of the base-side engaging member 12726.

The side surface (left side in FIG. 132(b)) of the slide portion 12726c is formed as an inclined surface that is inclined in a direction away from the transmission member 12728 toward the rear side, and the inclined surface of the transmission member 12728 is formed on the inclined surface. be touched.

The transmission member 12728 is disposed so as to be slidable in the left-right direction (the left-right direction in FIG. 132(a), the left-right direction in FIG. 132(b)) along a guide groove (not shown) of the front base 12720, and is disposed on one end side (see FIG. 132(b)). b) Right side) is exposed through an insertion opening 12720a formed in the side surface of the front base 12720. Further, on the other end side of the transmission member 12728 (left side in FIG. 132(b)), an inclined surface is formed that is inclined in a direction that moves away from the base-side engaging member 12726 toward the front side. , the inclined surface of the base-side engaging member 12726 is brought into contact.

Therefore, by slidingly displacing the transmission member 12728 in the direction approaching the base side engagement member 12726 by the action of the inclined surfaces of the base side engagement member 12726 and the transmission member 12728, the base side engagement member 12726 is moved toward the front side. By slidingly displacing (projecting) the transmission member 12728 in the direction away from the base-side engaging member 12726, the base-side engaging member 12726 can be slid toward the back side (into the receiving recess 727). It can be displaced (immersed).

Note that a biasing spring SP2 made of a coil spring is disposed between the transmission member 12728 and the front base 12720 in an elastically tensile deformed state, and the elastic recovery force of the biasing spring SP2 causes the transmission member to 12728 is maintained at a position separated from the base-side engaging member 12726 (the position shown in FIG. 132(b), that is, the position where the base-side engaging member 12726 is retracted).

The pressing member 12745 includes a base 12745a erected from the back surface of the second displacement member 12740, and an insertion portion 12745b formed by bending the tip of the base 12745a. In the pressing member 12745, the height of the base 12745a is set higher than the height of the base of the displacement side engagement member 742 so that the insertion portion 12745b can be inserted into the insertion port 12720a of the front base 12720. At the same time, the extending direction of the insertion portion 12745b is the same direction (parallel) as the extending direction of the bent portion 742b of the displacement-side engaging member 742.

Next, with reference to FIG. 133, the engagement action by the base-side engagement member 12726 and the displacement-side engagement member 742 will be described.

FIG. 133 is a schematic partial cross-sectional view of the left rotation unit 12700 for explaining the engagement action by the base side engagement member 12726 and the displacement side engagement member 742, in which the second displacement member 12740 is displaced toward the retracted position. The transition state when the process is performed is schematically illustrated. Note that as the state shown in FIG. 133(a) moves toward the state shown in FIG. 133(c), the second displacement member 12740 approaches the retracted position, and the state shown in FIG. 133(d) is the state shown in FIG. Corresponds to the state in which it is placed in the retracted position.

As shown in FIG. 133(a), when the second displacement member 12740 is displaced in the retracting direction (left side in FIG. 133(a)) with respect to the front base 12720, first, the insertion portion 12745b of the pressing member 12745 The distal end is brought into contact with one end side of the transmission member 12728 via the insertion port 12720a of the front base 12720.

When the second displacement member 12740 is further displaced from the state shown in FIG. 133(a) in the retracting direction (left side in FIG. 133(a)) with respect to the front base 12720, the insertion portion 12745b of the pressing member 12745 By being inserted into the front base 12720 from the insertion port 12720a against the biasing forces of the biasing springs SP1 and SP2, the transmission member 12728 is pushed in a direction approaching the base-side engagement member 12726 (slide displacement ).

As a result, as shown in FIGS. 133(b) and 133(c), the base-side engaging member 12726 is gradually projected toward the front of the front base 12720, and is also displaced toward the base-side engaging member 12726. The side engaging members 742 are brought close to each other, and each bent portion 726b, 742b enters the inner side of the other bent portion 726b, 742b. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 133(d), when the second displacement member 12740 is disposed at the retracted position, the inner surfaces (engaging surfaces) of the bent portions 726b and 742b can be engaged with each other. As a result, it is possible to suppress the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 12740 from tilting in the direction away from the front base 12720.

In particular, in this embodiment, when the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 12740 are extended to the extended position, the base-side engaging member 12726 is moved into the receiving recess 727 by the elastic recovery force of the biasing springs SP1 and SP2. You can immerse yourself inside. That is, in the retracted state, the front surface of the bent portion 726b of the base-side engaging member 12726 can be arranged flush with the front surface of the front base 12720. Thereby, even when the front of the front base 12720 is exposed, the base-side engaging member 12726 is difficult to be seen by the player, and the appearance can be improved.

<13th embodiment>
Next, a thirteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 134 to 136. In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the displacement-side engagement member 742 of the second displacement member 740 is engaged with the base-side engagement member 726 protruding from the front surface of the front base 720. The displacement side engaging member 13742 of the second displacement member 13740 in this embodiment is engaged with the front wall surface of the front base 13720. Note that the same parts as in each of the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 134 is a partially exploded perspective view of a left rotation unit 13700 in the thirteenth embodiment. 135(a) is a partially enlarged front view of the front base 13720, and FIG. 135(b) is a sectional view of the front base 13720 taken along the line CXXXVb-CXXXVb in FIG. 135(a).

As shown in FIGS. 134 and 135, the left rotation unit 13700 in the thirteenth embodiment has a front base 13720 on the front side (the front side in FIG. 135(a), the bottom side in FIG. 135(b)) and the side side. An opening 13720a continuous to the right side of FIGS. 135(a) and 135(b) is formed, and a rotating member 13726 is rotatably disposed in the space formed by the opening 13720a.

The rotating member 13726 is formed into a dogleg shape when viewed in cross section from a side surface portion 13726a that closes the side surface side of the front base 13720 of the opening 13720a and a front surface portion 13726b that closes the front side of the front base 13720. One side (the side opposite to the front part 13726b) is rotatably supported.

That is, the rotating member 13726 is rotated to one side around the pivot portion of the side surface portion 13726a, thereby being placed in the initial position (the position shown in FIGS. 134 and 135) that closes the opening 13720a, and It is recessed into the front base 13720 by being rotated to the other side around the pivot portion of the side surface 13726a.

In this case, a biasing spring SP3 made of a torsion spring is arranged between the front base 13720 and the rotating member 13726 in an elastically torsionally deformed state, and the elastic recovery force of the biasing spring SP3 allows Rotating member 13726 is maintained in the initial position. In addition, in this initial position, the front of the front part 13726b, the side of the side part 13726a, and the front and side of the front base 13720 are arranged flush with each other, making it difficult for the player to recognize the presence of the rotating member 13726.

The displacement-side engagement member 13742 includes a base 13742a that stands up from the back surface of the second displacement member 13740, and a bent portion 742b that is formed by bending the tip of the base 13742a and has an inner surface that serves as an engagement surface. Note that the height of the base portion 13742a is set to a height that allows the bent portion 742b to come into contact with the side surface portion 13726a of the rotating member 13726. As a result, when the second displacement member 13740 is displaced in the retraction direction, the bending portion 742b can rotate the rotation member 13726 in the retraction direction (see FIG. 136).

Next, with reference to FIG. 136, the engagement action by the front base 13720 and the displacement side engagement member 13742 will be described.

FIG. 136 is a schematic partial cross-sectional view of the left rotation unit 13700 for explaining the engagement action by the front base 13720 and the displacement-side engagement member 13742, in which the second displacement member 13740 is displaced toward the retracted position. The transition state of is schematically illustrated. Note that as the state shown in FIG. 136(a) moves toward the state shown in FIG. 136(b), the second displacement member 13740 approaches the retracted position, and the state shown in FIG. 136(c) is the state shown in FIG. Corresponds to the state in which it is placed in the retracted position.

As shown in FIG. 136(a), when the second displacement member 13740 is displaced toward the retraction direction (left side in FIG. 136(a)) with respect to the front base 13720, the bent portion 742b of the displacement-side engagement member 13742 The tip of the rotating member 13726 is brought into contact with the side surface 13726a of the rotating member 13726.

When the second displacement member 13740 is further displaced from the state shown in FIG. 136(a) in the retracting direction (left side in FIG. 136(a)) with respect to the front base 13720, the bent portion of the displacement side engaging member 13742 742b pushes (rotates) the rotating member 13726 in the retracting direction against the biasing force of the biasing spring SP3.

As a result, as shown in FIG. 136(b), the bent portion 742b of the displacement-side engaging member 13742 gradually enters the internal space of the front base 13720 through the opening 13720a, and as shown in FIG. 136(c). When the second displacement member 13740 is placed in the retracted position, the inner surface of the bent portion 742b of the displacement-side engagement member 13742 can be engaged with the rear surface of the front base 13720. As a result, it is possible to suppress the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 13740 from tilting in the direction away from the front base 13720.

In particular, in this embodiment, when the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 13740 are extended to the extended position, the rotation member 13726 is placed (returned) to the initial position by the elastic recovery force of the biasing spring SP3. can be done. That is, in the initial position, the front of the front part 13726b and the side of the side part 13726a can be arranged flush with the front and side of the front base 13720, respectively. Thereby, even when the front and side surfaces of the front base 13720 are exposed, the opening 13720a and the rotating member 13726 are difficult to be seen by the player, and the appearance can be improved.

<Fourteenth embodiment>
Next, a fourteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 137 to 139. In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the base-side engaging member 726 is fixedly installed in a state protruding from the front of the front base 720. However, the base-side engaging member 14726 in the fourteenth embodiment It is arranged so that it can appear in front of it. Note that the same parts as in each of the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 137 is a partially exploded perspective view of a left rotation unit 14700 in the fourteenth embodiment. FIG. 138(a) is a partially enlarged front view of the left rotation unit 14700 in a state where the second displacement member 740 is placed in the retracted position, and FIG. 138(b) is a partial enlarged front view of the left rotation unit 14700 in a state where the second displacement member 740 is placed in the retracted position. FIG. 3 is a partially enlarged schematic cross-sectional view of a left rotation unit 14700 in FIG. Further, FIG. 139(a) is a partially enlarged front view of the left rotation unit 14700 in a state where the second displacement member 740 is placed in the extended position, and FIG. 139(b) is a -CXXXIXb is a partially enlarged schematic cross-sectional view of the left rotation unit 14700.

As shown in FIGS. 137 to 139, the left rotation unit 14700 in the fourteenth embodiment has a base-side engaging member 14726 stored in the internal space of the front base 14720, and one longitudinal end of the rack member 14752 ( A transmission portion 14752b is formed on the front side (upper side in FIG. 137).

The base-side engaging member 14726 includes a slide portion 14726c disposed so as to be slidable in the front-rear direction (left-right direction in FIGS. 138(b) and 139(b)) along a guide groove (not shown) of the front base 14720. , a base portion 726a and a bent portion 726b are formed on the front surface of the sliding portion 14726c (left side surface in FIGS. 138(b) and 139(b)).

The base side engaging member 14726 moves the base portion 726a and the bent portion 726b from the receiving recess 727 to the front side (left side in FIG. 138(b)) by sliding the sliding portion 14726c toward the front along a guide groove (not shown). ) (see FIG. 138), and the slide portion 14726c is slid toward the back side (right side in FIG. 139(b)) along a guide groove (not shown), thereby receiving the base portion 726a and the bent portion 726b. It can be inserted into the recess 727 (see FIG. 139).

In this case, a biasing spring SP4 made of a coil spring is provided between the back surface of the slide portion 14726c and the front surface of the rear base 710 in an elastically tensile deformed state, and the biasing spring SP4 is elastically recovered. The force maintains the base-side engaging member 14726 in the retracted state (the state shown in FIG. 139(b)). In this retracted state, the front of the bent portion 726b and the front of the front base 14720 are arranged flush, making it difficult for the player to recognize the presence of the base-side engaging member 14726.

The back surface (right side in FIGS. 138(b) and 139(b)) of the slide portion 14726c is inclined in a direction away from the rack member 14752 as it goes upward (upper side in FIGS. 138(b) and 139(b)). It is formed as an inclined surface, and the inclined surface (front surface) of the transmission portion 14752b of the rack member 14752 comes into contact with the inclined surface.

On the front side of the transmission part 14752b (on the left side in FIGS. 138(b) and 139(b)), there is a base-side engaging member 14726 (sliding part) as it goes downward (lower side in FIGS. 138(b) and 139(b)) 14726c) is formed, and the inclined surface of the slide portion 14726c comes into contact with the inclined surface.

Therefore, as the rack member 14752 is displaced downward, the base side engaging member 14726 slides toward the front side (in the direction of protruding from the receiving recess 727) due to the action of the inclined surfaces of the base side engaging member 14726 and the transmission portion 14752b. In addition, as the rack member 14752 is displaced upward, the base-side engaging member 14726 can be slid toward the back side (in the direction of recessing into the receiving recess 727).

As a result, as shown in FIG. 138, when the rack member 14752 is displaced to the lowest position and the second displacement member 740 is placed in the retracted position, the inner surfaces (engaging surfaces) of the bent portions 726b and 742b are The first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 can be prevented from tilting away from the front base 14720.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 139, when the rack member 14752 is displaced upward and the second displacement member 740 is placed in the extended position, the elastic recovery force of the biasing spring SP4 engages the base side. Member 14726 may be recessed into receiving recess 727. That is, in the retracted state, the front surface of the bent portion 726b of the base-side engaging member 14726 can be arranged flush with the front surface of the front base 14720. Thereby, even when the front of the front base 14720 is exposed, the base side engaging member 14726 is difficult to be seen by the player, and the appearance can be improved.

<15th embodiment>
Next, a fifteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 140 to 142. In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the base-side engaging member 726 is fixedly installed in a state protruding from the front of the front base 720. However, the base-side engaging member 15726 in the fifteenth embodiment is It is slidably disposed in front of the Note that the same parts as in each of the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 140 is a partially exploded perspective view of a left rotation unit 15700 in the fifteenth embodiment. 141(a) is a partially enlarged front view of the front base 15720, and FIG. 134(b) is a sectional view of the front base 15720 taken along the line CXLIb-CXLIb in FIG. 141(a).

As shown in FIGS. 140 and 141, the left rotation unit 15700 in the fifteenth embodiment has a front base 15720 on the front side (the front side in FIG. 141(a), the bottom side in FIG. 141(b)) and the side side. An opening 15720a is formed that continues to the front side of the front base 15720 (lower side of FIG. 141(b)) in the space formed by the opening 15720a. A base-side engaging member 15726 is slidably disposed at the portion.

The base-side engaging member 15726 is formed into a flat plate shape having approximately the same shape as the front side of the front base 15720 of the opening 15720a (that is, a shape that closes the opening 15720a in front view), and It is disposed so as to be slidable in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIGS. 141(a) and 141(b)) along the first guide groove 15720b1 and the second guide groove 15720b2.

The first guide groove 15720b1 is formed to have a first inclination angle with respect to the left-right direction of the front base 15720 (the left-right direction in FIG. 141(b)) when viewed from above as shown in FIG. The guide groove 15720b2 is formed to have a smaller inclination angle (second inclination angle) than the inclination angle of the first guide groove 15720b1 with respect to the left-right direction of the front base 15720 (the left-right direction in FIG. 141(b)). Ru. Note that in this embodiment, the second inclination angle is 0°. That is, the second guide groove 15720b2 is formed parallel to the left-right direction of the front base 15720.

Therefore, the base side engaging member 15726 is guided along the first guide groove 15720b1 from the initial position shown in FIG. Then, by being guided along the second guide groove 15720b2, it is slid toward the side of the front base 15720 (the left side in FIG. 141(b)), and the front It is immersed inside the base 15720.

In this case, a biasing spring (not shown) made of a coil spring is disposed between the front base 15720 and the base-side engaging member 15726 in an elastically tensile deformed state, and the biasing spring is The base-side engaging member 15726 is maintained at the initial position by the elastic recovery force. Note that in this initial position, the front surface of the base-side engaging member 15726 (the front side in FIG. 141(a) and the lower side in FIG. 141(b)) is arranged flush with the front surface of the front base 15720, and the base This makes it difficult for the player to recognize the existence of the side engaging member 15726.

Next, with reference to FIG. 142, the engagement action by the base-side engagement member 15726 and the displacement-side engagement member 742 will be described.

FIG. 142 is a partial cross-sectional schematic diagram of the left rotation unit 15700 for explaining the engagement action by the base side engagement member 15726 and the displacement side engagement member 742, in which the second displacement member 740 is displaced toward the retracted position. The transition state when the process is performed is schematically illustrated. Note that as the state shown in FIG. 142(a) moves toward the state shown in FIG. 142(c), the second displacement member 740 approaches the retracted position, and the state shown in FIG. 142(d) is the state shown in FIG. Corresponds to the state in which it is placed in the retracted position.

As shown in FIGS. 142(a) and 142(b), when the second displacement member 740 is displaced toward the retraction direction (left side in FIG. 142(a)) with respect to the front base 15720, the displacement side engagement The tip of the bent portion 742b of the member 742 is inserted into the front base 15720 through the opening 15720a, and the base 742a of the displacement side engagement member 742 is brought into contact with the side surface of the base side engagement member 15726.

From the state shown in FIG. 142(b), when the second displacement member 740 is further displaced in the retracting direction (left side in FIG. 142(b)) with respect to the front base 15720, as shown in FIG. 142(c). , the base 742a of the displacement-side engaging member 742 pushes (slides) the base-side engaging member 15726 in the retracting direction along the first guide groove 15720b1 against the biasing force of the biasing spring. When the second displacement member 740 is further displaced in the retraction direction from the state shown in FIG. ).

As a result, as shown in FIG. 142(d), when the second displacement member 740 is placed in the retracted position, the inner surface of the bent portion 742b of the displacement side engagement member 742 is placed on the back surface of the base side engagement member 15726. , can be engageably faced. As a result, it is possible to suppress the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 from tilting in the direction away from the front base 15720 (lower side in FIG. 142(c)).

In particular, in this embodiment, when the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are extended to the extended position, the base-side engaging member 15726 is placed in the initial position (returned) due to the elastic recovery force of the biasing spring. ) can be done. That is, in the initial position, the front surface of the base-side engaging member 15726 can be arranged flush with the front surface of the front base 15720. Thereby, even when the front of the front base 15720 is exposed, the opening 15720a and the base-side engaging member 15726 are difficult to be seen by the player, and the appearance can be improved.

<Sixteenth embodiment>
Next, a sixteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 143 to 145. In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the displacement-side engagement member 742 of the second displacement member 740 is engaged with the base-side engagement member 726 protruding from the front surface of the front base 720. The displacement-side engaging member 16742 of the second displacement member 16740 in this embodiment is engaged with the inner edge of the opening 16720a of the front base 16720. Note that the same parts as in each of the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 143 is a partially exploded perspective view of a left rotation unit 16700 in the sixteenth embodiment. 144(a) is a partially enlarged front view of the front base 16720, and FIG. 144(b) is a sectional view of the front base 16720 taken along the line CXLIVb-CXLIVb in FIG. 144(a).

Further, FIG. 145 is a schematic partial cross-sectional view of the left rotation unit 16700 for explaining the engagement action by the front base 16720 (opening 16720a) and the displacement side engagement member 16742, in which the second displacement member 16740 is moved to the retracted position. The transition state when being displaced towards the target is schematically illustrated. Note that as the state shown in FIG. 145(a) moves toward the state shown in FIG. 145(b), the second displacement member 16740 approaches the retracted position, and the state shown in FIG. 145(c) is the state shown in FIG. Corresponds to the state in which it is placed in the retracted position.

As shown in FIGS. 143 to 145, the left rotation unit 16700 in the sixteenth embodiment has an opening 16720a formed on the side surface of the front base 16720 (the right side surface in FIGS. 135(a) and 135(b)). .

The displacement-side engagement member 16742 includes a base 16742a that stands up from the back surface of the second displacement member 16740, and a bent portion 742b that is formed by bending the tip of the base 16742a and has an inner surface that serves as an engagement surface. Note that the height of the base portion 16742a is set to a height that allows the bent portion 742b to be inserted into the opening 16720a of the front base 16720.

Therefore, according to the present embodiment, when the second displacement member 16740 is displaced in the retracting direction, the bent portion 742b of the displacement-side engaging member 16742 is connected to the front base through the opening 16720a. 16720 and the second displacement member 16740 is placed in the retracted position, the inner surface of the bent portion 742b of the displacement side engaging member 16742 is engaged with the inner edge of the opening 16720a of the front base 16720. It is possible to meet face to face. As a result, it is possible to suppress the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 16740 from tilting in the direction away from the front base 16720.

In particular, in this embodiment, it is sufficient to open the opening 16720a in the front base 16720, and there is no need to provide a base-side engaging member, so the structure can be simplified and the product cost can be reduced. Furthermore, since the opening 16720a is disposed on the side surface of the front base 16720, when the second displacement member 16740 is displaced in the extending direction and the front of the front base 16720 is exposed, the opening 16720a cannot be visually recognized by the player. It is possible to improve the appearance by making it difficult.

<Seventeenth embodiment>
Next, the seventeenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 146 and 147. In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the displacement-side engagement member 742 of the second displacement member 740 is engaged with the base-side engagement member 726 protruding from the front surface of the front base 720. The displacement-side engaging member 17742 of the second displacement member 17740 in this embodiment is engaged with the rear surface of the rear base 710 . Note that the same parts as in each of the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 146 is a partially exploded perspective view of a left rotation unit 17700 in the seventeenth embodiment. Further, FIG. 147 is a schematic top view of the left rotation unit 17700 for explaining the engagement action by the rear base 710 and the displacement side engagement member 17742, in which the second displacement member 17740 is displaced toward the retracted position. The transition state at that time is schematically illustrated.

Note that as the state shown in FIG. 147(a) moves toward the state shown in FIG. 147(b), the second displacement member 17740 approaches the retracted position, and the state shown in FIG. 147(c) is the state shown in FIG. Corresponds to the state in which it is placed in the retracted position.

As shown in FIGS. 146 and 147, in the left rotation unit 17700 in the seventeenth embodiment, the entire front and side surfaces of one longitudinal end (upper side in FIG. 146) of a front base 17720 are formed as decorative surfaces. That is, the front base 17720 is formed in a shape in which the base-side engaging member 726 and the receiving recess 727 are omitted compared to the front base 720 in the first embodiment.

The displacement-side engagement member 17742 includes a base 17742a that stands up from the back surface of the second displacement member 17740, and a bent portion 742b that is formed by bending the tip of the base 17742a and has an inner surface that serves as an engagement surface. The height of the base 17742a is set to a height that allows the inner surface of the bent portion 742b to face the back surface of the back base 710 at a predetermined distance.

Thus, according to the present embodiment, when the second displacement member 17740 is displaced in the retracting direction, the bent portion 742b of the displacement-side engagement member 17742 is gradually moved toward the rear side of the rear base 710 as the second displacement member 17740 is displaced in the retracting direction. When the second displacement member 17740 is placed in the retracted position, the inner surface of the bent portion 742b of the displacement-side engagement member 17742 can be engaged with the rear surface of the rear base 710. As a result, it is possible to suppress the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 17740 from tilting in the direction away from the front base 17720.

In particular, in this embodiment, there is no need to provide a base-side engaging member on the front base 17720, so the structure can be simplified and product costs can be reduced.

Furthermore, since there is no need to form an opening on the side surface of the front base 17720, it is possible to avoid functional parts unrelated to decoration from being visible to the player, thereby improving the appearance of the front base 17720. Can be done. In other words, there is no need to make the side of the front base 17720 difficult to see from the player due to the second displacement member 17740 placed in the overhanging position, so the amount of overhang of the second displacement member 17740 is increased to enhance the presentation effect. be able to.

<18th embodiment>
Next, the eighteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 148 to 151. In the right rotation unit 600 of the first embodiment, the operation of displacing (erecting) the first displacement member 630 tilted in the extending direction toward the retracted position (erecting operation of the first displacement member 630) is performed by the drive motor 650. Although a case has been described in which the operation is performed using only the rotational driving force, the raising operation of the first displacement member 630 in the right rotation unit 18600 of the eighteenth embodiment utilizes the effect of inertia force in addition to the rotational driving force of the drive motor 650. will be carried out. Note that the same parts as in each of the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 148 is an exploded perspective view of a right rotation unit 18600 in the eighteenth embodiment. FIG. 149 is a front view of the right rotation unit 18600 in each state in the first half section when operating from the extended position to the retracted position, and FIG. 150 is a front view of the right rotation unit 18600 when operating from the extended position to the retracted position. FIG. 6 is a rear view of the right rotation unit 18600 in each state in the first half section of FIG.

Note that FIGS. 149(a) and 150(a) show a state in which the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 18640 are placed in the extended position (i.e., FIG. 34(c) and FIG. 36(c)). corresponds to 149(b) and 150(b) correspond to FIG. 34(b) and FIG. 36(b), and FIG. 149(c) and FIG. 150(c) correspond to FIG. 34(a) and FIG. 36(a).

Moreover, FIG. 151 is a schematic back view of the right rotation unit 18600 in each state in the first half section when operating from the extended position to the retracted position, and FIGS. 151(c) corresponds to FIG. 150(a), FIG. 150(b), and FIG. 150(c), respectively.

As shown in FIG. 148, in the right rotation unit 18600 according to the eighteenth embodiment, from the front of the front base 18620, the approximately rectangular parallelepiped-shaped abutted portion 18629 is attached to the decorative portion 642b of the connected displacement member 18642 of the second displacement member 18640. Approximately cylindrical contact portions 18644 are provided to protrude from the back surface. The contact portion 18644 is disposed at the end opposite to the shaft support hole 642a (support shaft 633) in the longitudinal direction of the connection displacement member 18642.

As shown in FIGS. 149 to 151, the abutted part 18629 and the abutting part 18644 are located on the way when the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 18640 are displaced from the extended position to the retracted position. In a predetermined section, the outer circumferential surface of the abutting part 18644 is formed so as to be able to abut on the upper surface (the upper surface in FIG. 148) of the abutted part 18629.

Specifically, from the extended position shown in FIGS. 149(a), 150(a), and 151(a), as shown in FIG. 149(b), FIG. 150(b), and FIG. 151(b), The connecting displacement member 18642 is rotated about the support shaft 633 (the shaft support hole 642a) in a direction in which it is retracted to the back surface of the first displacement member 630, and as shown in FIGS. 149(c), 150(c), and 151(c). ), when the connecting displacement member 18642 is rotated to the maximum around the support shaft 633 (the shaft support hole 642a), the abutting portion 18644 comes into contact with the upper surface of the abutted portion 18629.

From the state shown in FIGS. 149(c), 150(c), and 151(c), the first displacement member 630 starts rotating (erecting) toward the retracted position about the rotating shaft 631. (See FIGS. 33(b), 35(b), and 37(b)), the abutting part 18644 is separated from the upper surface of the abutting part 18629, and the abutting part 18629 and the abutting part 18644 are The contact is released.

In this case, in the section until the abutting section 18644 comes into contact with the abutted section 18629 (that is, the section shown in FIGS. 149, 150, and 151), the drive motor 650 only moves the second displacement member 18640. It only needs to be driven rotationally, and the driving load is relatively small. That is, since this section is a section where the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 passes through the non-interference section 635b in the first groove 635 of the first displacement member 630, only the weight of the second displacement member 18640 is rotationally driven. It is assumed that the load is Further, since the direction of displacement of the connecting displacement member 18642 is downward in the direction of gravity, the load on the drive motor 650 is also reduced from this point of view.

On the other hand, in a state where the contact portion 18644 is in contact with the contacted portion 18629, the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 reaches the action section 635a in the first groove 635 of the first displacement member 630. Therefore, from this state, not only the weight of the second displacement member 18640 but also the weight of the first displacement member 630 is added as a load for rotational driving of the drive motor 650. In particular, from such a state, the first displacement member 630 is raised against gravity, so the load on the drive motor 650 increases rapidly from this point as well.

In contrast, according to the present embodiment, the contact portion 18644 is provided at the end of the coupling displacement member 18642 opposite to the shaft support hole 642a (support shaft 633), and the coupling displacement member 18642 rotates the support shaft 633. When rotated about the center, the abutting portion 18644 abuts the abutted portion 18629 of the front base 18620 (see FIG. 151(c)).

That is, the rotation of the connecting displacement member 18642 about the support shaft 633 is regulated by the contact between the abutted portion 18629 and the abutting portion 18644, and the rotation of the connecting displacement member 18642 can be stopped suddenly. , the inertial force of the connected displacement member 18642 caused by the sudden stop is converted into a force in the direction of displacing the first displacement member 630 in the retracting direction (i.e., standing up) about the rotation axis 631 (arrow in FIG. 151(c)). F) can be applied to the first displacement member 630.

As a result, the driving pin 654b of the transmission member 654 reaches the working section 635a in the first groove 635 of the first displacement member 630, and the driving pin 654b of the transmission member 654 reaches the working section 635a in the first groove 635 of the first displacement member 630, and the weight of the first displacement member 630 is When added as a load for the rotational drive of the drive motor 650, the above-mentioned inertial force can be used as a force to assist the rotational drive force of the drive motor 650. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the load on the drive motor 650 from changing suddenly (increase), stabilize the displacement of each displacement member 630, 18640 from the extended position to the retracted position, and improve the durability of the drive motor 650. It is possible to improve sexual performance.

<Nineteenth embodiment>
Next, a nineteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 152 to 160. In the right rotation unit 18600 of the 18th embodiment, a case has been described in which the contact portion 18644 of the connection displacement member 18642 is brought into contact with the abutted portion 18629 of the front base 18620, but the connection displacement member 19642 in the 19th embodiment The contact portion 19644 is brought into contact with a contact portion 19639 provided on the first displacement member 19630. Note that the same parts as in each of the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 152 is an exploded front perspective view of a right rotation unit 19600 in the nineteenth embodiment, and FIG. 153 is an exploded rear perspective view of the right rotation unit 19600.

As shown in FIGS. 152 and 153, in the right rotation unit 19600 according to the nineteenth embodiment, the driven member 19641 of the second displacement member 19640 and the connecting portion (the connecting groove 641c and the connecting pin 643) of the connecting displacement member 19642 are It is set at a different position than in the first embodiment (see FIGS. 29 and 30).

Specifically, one end side in the longitudinal direction of the driven member 19641 (the side opposite to the second groove 641b across the shaft support hole 641a, the upper side in FIGS. 152 and 153) is curved in an arc shape and extended, and the curved portion A connecting groove 641c is provided on the extending tip side of the connecting groove 641c. This curved portion prevents interference between the driven member 19641 and the shaft support hole 642a of the coupling displacement member 19642. The connecting displacement member 19642 is formed by a plate-shaped projecting portion 19642c projecting outward from the shaft support hole 642a, and a connecting pin 643 is provided projecting from the front side of the projecting portion 19642c.

In this case, in the first embodiment described above, the axis of the shaft support hole 641a (support shaft 632) of the driven member 641 is centered, and the axis of the shaft support hole 642a (support shaft 633) of the connection displacement member 19642 is The connecting portion (the connecting groove 641c and the connecting pin 643) of the driven member 641 and the connecting displacement member 642 is located inside (center side) of the virtual circle passing through the center.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, an imaginary line centered on the axis of the shaft support hole 641a (support shaft 632) of the driven member 19641 and passing through the axis of the shaft support hole 642a (support shaft 633) of the coupling displacement member 19642 The connecting portion (the connecting groove 641c and the connecting pin 643) of the driven member 19641 and the connecting displacement member 19642 is located outside the circle.

Therefore, the direction of relative rotation of the connected displacement member 19642 with respect to the first displacement member 19630 is set to be the opposite direction to that in the first embodiment. Here, such relative rotation in the opposite direction will be explained with reference to FIGS. 154 to 157.

154 and 155 are front views of the right rotation unit 19600 in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position, and FIGS. 156 and 157 are front views of the right rotation unit 19600 when operating between the retracted position and the extended position. FIG. 7 is a schematic rear view of the right rotation unit 19600 in each state when the rotation is performed.

Note that FIGS. 154(a), 154(b), and 154(c) are in the same state as FIG. 156(a), FIG. 156(b), and FIG. 156(c), respectively. ), FIG. 155(b), and FIG. 155(c) are in the same state as FIG. 157(a), FIG. 157(b), and FIG. 157(c), respectively. Further, FIG. 154(c) is the same as FIG. 155(a), and FIG. 156(c) is the same as FIG. 157(a), respectively.

Here, in the right rotation unit 19600 in the nineteenth embodiment, the relative rotation of the connection displacement member 19642 with respect to the first displacement member 19630 is caused by the difference in the positions of the connection portions (connection groove 641c and connection pin 643) described above. Except for the point that the direction of is opposite to that of the first embodiment, other operating aspects are formed substantially the same, and therefore, description of the same parts will be omitted.

154 and 156, in the retracted position, the transmission member 654 is rotationally driven in the forward direction (clockwise in FIG. 156(a)), and the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 is in the first groove 635 (operating By pushing down the inner wall surfaces of the section 635a) and the second groove 641b in the projecting direction, the first displacement member 19630 is rotated (tilted) in the projecting direction while being integrated with the second displacement member 19640.

When the transmission member 654 is further rotationally driven in the forward direction (clockwise in FIG. 157(a)) from the state shown in FIGS. 155(a) and 157(a), the driving pin 654b is While passing through the non-interference section 635b of the first groove 635, the inner wall surface of the second groove 641b of the driven member 19641 is pushed down (downward in FIG. 157(a)).

As a result, as shown in FIGS. 155(b) and 157(b), the driven member 19641 is rotated about the support shaft 632 in a direction that raises the connecting groove 641c (counterclockwise in FIG. 157(b)). The rotation of the driven member 19641 is transmitted to the connecting displacement member 19642 through the connection of the connecting groove 641c and the connecting pin 643, and the connecting displacement member 19642 lowers the decorative portion 642b around the support shaft 633. direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 108(b)).

That is, while the first displacement member 19630 is stopped, the connected displacement portion 19642 is relatively displaced (rotated) with respect to the first displacement member 19630 in the opposite direction to that in the first embodiment. Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 155(c) and 157(c), the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 moves between the non-interference section 635b in the first groove 635 of the first displacement member 19630 and the second displacement member 19640. By reaching the end of the two grooves 641b, the first displacement member 19630 and the second displacement member 19640 are placed in the extended position.

The explanation will be returned to FIGS. 152 and 153. In this embodiment, a substantially rectangular parallelepiped-shaped abutted portion 19639 protrudes from the back surface of the first displacement member 19630, and a substantially cylindrical abutment portion 19644 protrudes from the front surface of the decorative portion 642b of the connected displacement member 19642. . The abutted portion 19639 is disposed between the rotation shaft 631 and the support shaft 632 in the longitudinal direction of the first displacement member 19630.

These abutted portions 19639 and abutted portions 19644 are connected to each other in a predetermined section in the middle when the first displacement member 19630 and the second displacement member 19640 are displaced from the extended position to the retracted position. The outer peripheral surface of the contact portion 19644 is formed so as to be able to come into contact with the side surface (the right side surface in FIG. 153). Here, the effect caused by contact between the abutted portion 19639 and the abutting portion 19644 will be described with reference to FIGS. 158 to 160.

FIG. 158 is a front view of the right rotation unit 19600 in each state in the first half section when operating from the extended position to the retracted position, and FIG. 159 is a front view of the right rotation unit 19600 when operating from the extended position to the retracted position. FIG. 6 is a rear view of the right rotation unit 19600 in each state in the first half section of FIG.

Note that FIGS. 158(a) and 159(a) show a state in which the first displacement member 19630 and the second displacement member 19640 are placed in the extended position (i.e., FIG. 155(c) and FIG. 157(c)). corresponds to 158(b) and FIG. 159(b) correspond to FIG. 155(b) and FIG. 157(b), and FIG. 158(c) and FIG. 159(c) correspond to FIG. 155(a) and FIG. 157(a).

Further, FIG. 160 is a schematic back view of the right rotation unit 19600 in each state in the first half section when operating from the extended position to the retracted position, and FIGS. 160(a), 160(b) and 160(c) corresponds to FIG. 159(a), FIG. 159(b), and FIG. 159(c), respectively.

From the extended position shown in FIGS. 158(a), 159(a) and 160(a), as shown in FIGS. 158(b), 159(b) and 160(b), the connecting displacement member 19642 is rotated around the support shaft 633 (the shaft support hole 642a) in a direction in which it is retracted to the back surface of the first displacement member 19630, as shown in FIGS. 158(c), 159(c), and 160(c). When the connecting displacement member 19642 is rotated to the maximum around the support shaft 633 (the shaft support hole 642a), the abutting portion 19644 comes into contact with the lower surface of the abutted portion 19639.

In this case, the drive motor 650 only moves the second displacement member 19640 in the section until the abutting section 19644 comes into contact with the abutted section 19639 (that is, the section shown in FIGS. 158, 159, and 160). It only needs to be driven rotationally, and the driving load is relatively small. That is, since this section is a section where the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 passes through the non-interference section 635b in the first groove 635 of the first displacement member 19630, only the weight of the second displacement member 19640 is rotationally driven. It is assumed that the load is

On the other hand, when the contact portion 19644 is in contact with the contact portion 19639, the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 reaches the action section 635a in the first groove 635 of the first displacement member 19630. Therefore, from this state, not only the weight of the second displacement member 19640 but also the weight of the first displacement member 19630 is added as a load for rotational driving of the drive motor 650. In particular, from this state, the load on the drive motor 650 is suddenly increased because the first displacement member 19630 is raised against gravity.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, a contact portion 19644 is provided on the decorative portion 642b of the connection displacement member 19642, and the connection displacement member 19642 is rotated about the support shaft 633, so that the connection displacement member 19642 is rotated. The abutting portion 19644, which has been lifted upward as a result of this, abuts against the lower surface of the abutted portion 19639 of the first displacement member 19630 (see FIG. 160(c)).

That is, the rotation of the connecting displacement member 19642 about the support shaft 633 is regulated by the contact between the abutted portion 19639 and the abutting portion 19644, and the rotation of the connecting displacement member 19642 can be stopped suddenly. , the inertial force of the connected displacement member 19642 caused by the sudden stop is converted into a force in the direction of displacing (i.e., standing up) the first displacement member 19630 about the rotation axis 631 in the retracting direction (in other words, the arrow in FIG. 160(c) F), the first displacement member 19630 can be acted upon.

As a result, the driving pin 654b of the transmission member 654 reaches the working section 635a in the first groove 635 of the first displacement member 19630, and the drive pin 654b of the first displacement member 19630 is moved not only by the weight of the second displacement member 19640 but also by the weight of the first displacement member 19630. When added as a load for the rotational drive of the drive motor 650, the above-mentioned inertial force can be used as a force to assist the rotational drive force of the drive motor 650. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the load on the drive motor 650 from changing suddenly (increase), stabilize the displacement of each displacement member 19630, 19640 from the extended position to the retracted position, and improve the durability of the drive motor 650. It is possible to improve sexual performance.

<Twentieth embodiment>
Next, the 20th embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 161 and 162. In the winning device 65 of the first embodiment, the feeding of the game ball from the sending port 821c to the seesaw member 840 (receiving surface 844) is possible regardless of the state of the seesaw member 840 (that is, either the first state or the second state). Although a case has been described in which it is permitted (in the state of be done. Note that the same parts as in each of the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 161 is an exploded front perspective view of the winning device 20065 in the twentieth embodiment. Moreover, FIG. 162(a) is a sectional view of the winning device 20065 in a state where the seesaw member 20840 forms the first state, and FIG. 162(b) is a sectional view of the winning device 20065 in a state where the seesaw member 20840 forms the second state. FIG. 3 is a cross-sectional view of device 20065. Note that FIGS. 162(a) and 162(b) correspond to FIGS. 52(a) and 52(b), respectively.

As shown in FIG. 161, in the winning device 20065 according to the 20th embodiment, a regulating portion 20848 is formed in a seesaw member 20840. The regulating portion 20848 is formed as a generally triangular portion in a front view that extends upward (upper side in FIG. 161) from the edge of the receiving surface 844 opposite to the inclined surface 845.

As shown in FIG. 162(a), when the seesaw member 20840 is in the first state, the regulating portion 20848 is located outside the opening area of the outlet 821c, thereby increasing the opening width of the outlet 821c. (Fig. 162(a) horizontal direction dimension) is maintained at a dimension W1 larger than the diameter of the game ball. Therefore, sending out of the game ball from the sending out port 821c to the receiving surface 844 is allowed.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 162(b), when the seesaw member 20840 is in the second state, the regulating part 20848 is brought closer to the outlet 821c side as the seesaw member 20840 rotates, and the regulating part 20848 is moved closer to the outlet 821c side. A part is located inside the opening area of the outlet 821c (that is, a part of the regulating part 20848 overlaps with the opening area of the outlet 821c). As a result, the opening width of the outlet 821c is reduced to the dimension W2 which is smaller than the diameter of the game ball (W2<W1). Therefore, the feeding of game balls from the feeding port 821c to the receiving surface 844 is regulated (prohibited).

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the sending out of the game ball from the guide path (outlet 821c) of the intermediate base 820 to the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 20840 is controlled (permitted) depending on the state of the seesaw member 20840. or regulation).

That is, in the first state, the seesaw member 20840 is rotated by sending out the game ball from the sending port 821c to the receiving surface 844 and rolling the game ball from the receiving surface 844 toward the inclined surface 845 and the ejecting surface 846. , the second state can be formed quickly.

Here, even after the seesaw member 20840 starts rotating toward the second state, if the game balls are sent out in succession from the delivery port 821c to the receiving surface 844, the balls are sent out first (the receiving surface 844 receives them). ) A state is formed in which the game ball is still rolling on the inclined surface 845 and the discharge surface 846, and the seesaw member 20840 is easily maintained in the second state.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, when the seesaw member 20840 starts rotating toward the second state, the regulating part 20848 narrows the opening width of the outlet 821c to the dimension W2, so that the receiving surface is moved from the outlet 821c to the receiving surface. By regulating (prohibiting) the feeding of the game balls to 844, it is possible to secure time for ejecting the game balls rolling on the inclined surface 845 and the ejection surface 846 to the ejection port 821d.

That is, until the discharge of the game balls from the inclined surface 845 and the discharge surface 846 to the discharge port 821d is completed and there are no game balls on the seesaw member 20840, the sending of the game balls from the discharge port 821c to the receiving surface 844 is waited. can be done. As a result, even when a plurality of game balls are guided in succession, it is possible to easily switch between the first state and the second state.

In addition, the dimension W2 may be a dimension larger than the diameter of the game ball as long as it is smaller than the dimension W1. That is, the dimension W2 may be a dimension that allows the game ball to be delivered from the delivery port 821c to the receiving surface 844. Even in this case, by narrowing the opening width of the outlet 821c by the regulating portion 20848, it becomes difficult for the game ball to pass through, and the time required to send the game ball from the outlet 821c to the receiving surface 844 increases accordingly. (delay the passage of the game ball). As a result, even when a plurality of game balls are guided in succession, it is possible to easily switch between the first state and the second state.

<21st embodiment>
Next, the twenty-first embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 163. In the winning device 65 of the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the game ball is discharged to the discharge port 821d by rolling along the inclined surface 845 of the seesaw member 840 and the downward slope of the discharge surface 846. The winning device 21065 in the 21st embodiment includes a rotating member 21870 for pushing out game balls and discharging them to the discharge port 821d. Note that the same parts as in each of the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

163(a) and 163(b) are partially enlarged cross-sectional views of the winning device 21065 in the 21st embodiment, and correspond to FIG. 54.

As shown in FIG. 163, the winning device 21065 in the twenty-first embodiment includes a rotating member 21870 above the seesaw member 840. Note that the rotating member 21870 does not interfere with the seesaw member 840 even if the seesaw member 840 is in the first state or the second state, and does not come into contact with the game ball on the seesaw member 840. placed at the highest possible height.

The rotating member 21870 includes a shaft support 21871 that is rotatably supported on the back surface of the front base 810 through which a support pin (not shown) is inserted, and a shaft support 21871 that extends to one side from the shaft support 21871 and has a delivery port 821c. A plate-shaped receiving plate 21872 facing the receiving plate 21872, a plate-shaped receiving plate 21872 and an extrusion plate extending from the shaft support 21871 to the other side opposite to the receiving plate 21872 and facing the discharge port 821d. 21873.

The shaft support 21871 is disposed in such a manner that its axial center direction is along the direction of gravity (direction perpendicular to the plane of the paper in FIG. 163(a)) (that is, perpendicular to the rotation axis (support shaft 821e) of the seesaw member 840). The receiving plate 21872 and the extrusion plate 21873 are connected at a predetermined intersection angle with the pivot support 21871 as the center of intersection. Therefore, the rotating member 21870 is bent into a substantially dogleg shape when viewed in the direction of the shaft support 21871 (gravitational force).

In this case, in the rotating member 21870, when the extrusion plate 21873 is in the rotating position along the longitudinal direction of the seesaw member 840 (the left-right direction in FIG. 163(a)), the receiving plate 21872 is When the receiving plate 21872 is in a rotating position along the longitudinal direction of the seesaw member 840, as shown in FIG. 163(b), The extrusion plate 21873 is in a posture in which it is projected above the inclined surface 845 and/or the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840.

That is, in the rotational position of the rotating member 21870, in which the extrusion plate 21873 is retracted to the side opposite to the discharge port 821d (lower side in FIG. 163(a)), the receiving plate 21872 is located at the discharge port, as shown in FIG. 163(a). As shown in FIG. 163(b), in the rotated position where the receiving plate 21872 is moved forward toward the side adjacent to the outlet 821c and retreated to the side opposite to the outlet 821c (lower side in FIG. 163(b)), The extrusion plate 21873 is in a posture advanced toward the side approaching the discharge port 821d.

Therefore, according to this embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 163(a), while the game ball is still rolling on the inclined surface 845 or the ejection surface 846 of the seesaw member 840, the game ball is removed from the ejection port 821c. When the game ball is sent out to the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840, the receiving plate 21872 of the rotating member 21870 receives the game ball sent out from the outlet 821c to the receiving surface 844, and the rotating member 21870 receives the game ball sent out to the receiving surface 844 from the sending port 821c. is rotated in a direction in which it protrudes above the inclined surface 845 and the discharge surface 846. By this rotation, as shown in FIG. 163(b), the game ball rolling on the inclined surface 845 or the ejection surface 846 can be pushed out by the extrusion plate 21873 and ejected to the ejection port 821d.

As a result, the game balls rolling on the inclined surface 845 or the ejection surface 846 can be easily ejected quickly to the ejection port 821d. Therefore, the time during which the game ball is placed on the inclined surface 845 or the ejection surface 846 of the seesaw member 840 (that is, the time during which the second state is formed) is shortened, and the first state and the second state are changed. Alternate switching can be performed smoothly.

Note that the receiving plate 21872 of the rotating member 21870 receives the game ball sent out from the sending port 821c, and the rotating member 21870 is placed in a position in which the extruding plate 21873 is protruded above the inclined surface 845 and the ejecting surface 846 (i.e., , the posture shown in FIG. 163(b)), the game ball received by the receiving plate 21872 (the game ball shown on the left side of FIG. 163(b)) moves backward from the push-out plate 21873 and moves toward the inclined surface 845 and Since it is rolled along the discharge surface 846, the rotating member 21870 can be returned to the posture in which the receiving plate 21872 is projected upward from the receiving surface 844 (that is, the posture shown in FIG. 163(a)).

In this way, the rotating member 21870 utilizes the rolling motion of the game ball to move to the initial position (the position where the game ball can be received by the receiving plate 21872 and pushed out by the pushing plate 21873, that is, the position shown in FIG. 163). It is possible to return to the position shown in (a). Therefore, since driving by a driving means and detection by a sensor device are not necessary, product costs can be reduced accordingly.

<Twenty-second embodiment>
Next, the twenty-second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 164 and 165. Note that the same parts as in each of the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

164(a) and 164(b) are partially enlarged cross-sectional views of the winning device 22065 in the 22nd embodiment, and correspond to FIG. 54. Further, FIGS. 165(a) and 165(b) are partially enlarged sectional views of the winning device 22065, and correspond to FIG. 52.

Here, the winning device 22065 in the 22nd embodiment is different from the winning device 21065 in the 21st embodiment in that it has an opening 22849 formed in the seesaw member 22840 and a projecting piece 22874 protruding from the rotating member 22870. The only difference is that they are further provided, and the other configurations are the same, so a description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 164 and 165, the rotating member 22870 has a plurality of (three in this embodiment) projecting pieces 22874 protruding from the lower side of the extrusion plate 21873 (seesaw member 22840 side, lower side in FIG. 165). will be established. On the other hand, a plurality of openings 22849 (three in this embodiment) for receiving the protruding pieces 22874 are formed in the plate-shaped portion of the seesaw member 22840 where the inclined surface 845 and the discharge surface 846 are formed.

The protruding piece 22874 is curved in an arc shape centered on the rotation axis of the seesaw member 22840 when viewed from the front (viewed in the direction of the rotation axis (support shaft 821e) of the seesaw member 22840, that is, the state shown in FIG. 165). Ru. On the other hand, the opening 22849 is curved in an arc shape centered on the rotation axis of the rotation member 22870 when viewed from the front (viewed in the direction of the rotation axis (shaft support 21871) of the rotation member 22870, that is, the state shown in FIG. 164). It is formed.

Therefore, the seesaw member 22840 is rotated between the first state and the second state with the support shaft 821e (bearing 841) as the rotation center, and the rotating member 22870 is rotated within its movable range with the shaft support 21871 as the rotation center. In either state, the protruding piece 22874 can be prevented from interfering with the inner edge of the opening 22849. As a result, seesaw member 22840 and rotating member 22870 can be made independent of each other and each can be rotated smoothly.

Here, if the push-out plate 21873 of the rotating member 21870 is not provided with a protruding piece as in the case of the twenty-first embodiment described above, the seesaw member 840 is in the second state (or in a state close to it). When trying to push out the game ball rolling on the inclined surface 845 or discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840 to the discharge port 821d by the push-out plate 21873, the distance between the push-out plate 21873 and the inclined surface 845 or the discharge surface 846 Since this is large, the lower part of the extrusion plate 21873 comes into contact with the upper part of the game ball (the part on the front side of the paper in FIG. 163(a)). Therefore, it takes a long time until the extrusion plate 21873 comes into contact with the upper part of the game ball, and it becomes difficult to promptly discharge the game ball to the discharge port 821d. Further, it becomes difficult to sufficiently apply the rotational energy of the rotating member 21870 formed by receiving the game ball with the receiving plate 21872 to the game ball via the extrusion plate 21873.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the protruding piece 22874 is provided on the push-out plate 21873 of the rotating member 22870 to protrude downward (towards the seesaw member 22840), so for example, as shown in FIG. 165(b), In addition, in the state where the seesaw member 22840 forms the second state, the game ball rolling on the inclined surface 845 or the ejection surface 846 of the seesaw member 22840 can be pushed out to the ejection port 821d by the projecting piece 22874.

Therefore, in this case, the projecting piece 22874 can be brought into contact with the side portion (lower portion in FIG. 164(a)) of the game ball. Therefore, the time required for the projecting piece 22874 to come into contact with the side portion of the game ball can be shortened, and the game ball can be promptly discharged (pushed out) to the discharge port 821d. In addition, the rotational energy of the rotating member 22870 formed by receiving the game ball with the receiving plate 21872 can be sufficiently applied to the game ball via the projecting piece 22874.

As a result, the game balls rolling on the inclined surface 845 or the ejection surface 846 can be easily ejected quickly to the ejection port 821d. Therefore, the time during which the game ball is placed on the inclined surface 845 or the ejection surface 846 of the seesaw member 840 (that is, the time during which the second state is formed) is shortened, and the first state and the second state are changed. Alternate switching can be performed smoothly.

<23rd embodiment>
Next, the twenty-third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 166 and 167. In the 21st embodiment, a case has been described in which the rotating member 21870 is disposed (rotatably supported) on the front base 810, but in the 23rd embodiment, the rotating member 23870 is disposed (rotatably supported) on the seesaw member 840. (pivotally supported). Note that the same parts as in each of the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 166 is an exploded rear perspective view of the winning device 23065 in the twenty-third embodiment. 167(a) and 167(b) are partially enlarged sectional views of the winning device 23065, and correspond to FIG. 54. Further, FIGS. 168(a) and 168(b) are partially enlarged sectional views of the winning device 23065, and correspond to FIG. 52.

Here, the winning device 23065 in the 23rd embodiment is different from the winning device 21065 in the 21st embodiment in the position where the rotating member 23870 is disposed and the presence or absence of the stopper part 23875, and the other configurations are the same. Therefore, its explanation will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 166 to 168, a rotating member 23870 in the twenty-third embodiment is rotatably supported on the upper surface of the seesaw member 840 by a supporting pin 23876 inserted through a supporting member 21871. In this case, in this embodiment, the rotating member 23870 is arranged in such a manner that the axial direction of the shaft support 21871 is orthogonal to the rotating shaft (support shaft 821e) of the seesaw member 840, and the rotating member 23870 is arranged in a position below the extrusion plate 21873. A side surface is opposed substantially parallel to the inclined surface 845 and the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, since the rotating member 23870 is disposed on the seesaw member 840, the seesaw member 840 is in the first state or in the first state as shown in FIGS. Regardless of which of the two states is formed, the extrusion plate 21873 can be made to face the game ball rolling on the inclined surface 845 or discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840.

Therefore, unlike the case of the twenty-first embodiment described above (i.e., the lower part of the extrusion plate 21873 is in contact with the upper part of the game ball (the part on the near side of the page in FIG. 163(a))), the extrusion plate 21873 can be brought into contact with the side portion of the game ball (lower portion in FIG. 167(a)). Therefore, the time required for the extrusion plate 21873 to come into contact with the side portion of the game ball can be shortened, and the game ball can be promptly discharged (pushed out) to the discharge port 821d. In addition, the rotational energy of the rotating member 23870 formed by receiving the game ball with the receiving plate 21872 can be sufficiently applied to the game ball via the extrusion plate 21873.

As a result, the game balls rolling on the inclined surface 845 or the ejection surface 846 can be easily ejected quickly to the ejection port 821d. Therefore, the time during which the game ball is placed on the inclined surface 845 or the ejection surface 846 of the seesaw member 840 (that is, the time during which the second state is formed) is shortened, and the first state and the second state are changed. Alternate switching can be performed smoothly.

Here, in the rotating member 23870 of this embodiment, a stopper part 23875 is provided protrudingly on the back surface of the extrusion plate 21873 (the surface opposite to the side from which the game balls are pushed out), and this stopper part 23875 comes into contact with the back surface of the front base 810. It is said that it is possible to contact When the stopper portion 23875 is in contact with the back surface of the front base 810 (see FIG. 167(a)), the extrusion plate 21873 of the rotating member 23870 moves in the longitudinal direction of the seesaw member 840 (the left-right direction in FIG. 167(a)). placed in a rotational position along the

Therefore, compared to the case where the stopper part 23875 is omitted and the extrusion plate 21873 is retreated to the position where it contacts the back surface of the front base 810, the extrusion plate is placed near the game ball rolling on the inclined surface 845 or the ejection surface 846. 21873 is placed on standby, it is possible to shorten the time until the extrusion plate 21873 comes into contact with the game ball. As a result, the game ball can be promptly discharged (pushed out) to the discharge port 821d.

Here, as described above, even if the rotating member 23870 is arranged in a posture in which its extrusion plate 21873 is projected above the inclined surface 845 and the discharge surface 846 (that is, the posture shown in FIG. 167(b)), The game ball received by the receiving plate 21872 (the game ball shown on the left side of FIG. 167(b)) is rolled along the inclined surface 845 and the discharge surface 846 while retracting the extrusion plate 21873, so that the receiving plate 21872 The rotating member 23870 can be returned to the posture in which the receiving surface 844 is projected upward (that is, the posture shown in FIG. 167(a)).

In this case, in this embodiment, since the rotating member 23870 is disposed on the seesaw member 840, a predetermined gap is formed between the extrusion plate 21873 and the front base 810. Therefore, when the extrusion plate 21873 is retreated to the position where it comes into contact with the back surface of the front base 810, the game ball may roll in the direction away from the discharge port 821d, and the rolling trajectory of the game ball may increase. Therefore, the discharge to the discharge port 821d is delayed.

On the other hand, by protruding the stopper part 23875 from the back surface of the extrusion plate 21873, the game ball received by the receiving plate 21872 (the game ball shown on the left side of FIG. When rolling along the front base 810, the extrusion plate 21873 can be prevented from being moved too far back toward the back side of the front base 810 (see FIG. 167(a)). That is, it is possible to prevent the game ball from rolling wastefully in the direction away from the discharge port 821d, and to facilitate prompt discharge to the discharge port 821d.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, since no stopper portion is formed on the back surface of the receiving plate 21872, the receiving plate 21872 can be retreated to a position where it comes into contact with the back surface of the front base 810 (see FIG. 167(b) )reference). That is, by using the gap between the rotating member 23870 and the front base 810 that is formed because the rotating member 23870 is disposed on the seesaw member 840, the receiving plate 21872 receives the game ball and rotates when the rotating member 23870 is rotated. The rotation angle of the member 23870 (the rotation angle from the rotation position shown in FIG. 167(a) to the rotation position shown in FIG. 167(b)) can be increased.

As a result, the time during which the game ball sent out from the delivery port 821c is in contact with the receiving plate 21872 can be extended (that is, the impulse received by the rotating member 23870 from the game ball can be increased). Therefore, the rotational energy of the rotating member 23870 formed by receiving the game balls on the receiving plate 21872 can be increased, and even when a plurality of game balls roll on the inclined surface 845 or the discharge surface 846, they By extruding a plurality of game balls with the extrusion plate 21873, it is possible to easily discharge the plurality of game balls to the discharge port 821d. Therefore, the time during which the game ball is placed on the inclined surface 845 or the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840 (that is, the time during which the second state is formed) is shortened, and the first state and the second state are changed. Alternate switching can be performed smoothly.

<24th embodiment>
Next, the twenty-fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 169 to 173. In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the seesaw member 840 is rotated while maintaining its rotation axis in a horizontal position, but in the seesaw member 840 in the twenty-fourth embodiment, the position of the rotation axis is tilted as the rotation is performed. be done. Note that the same parts as in each of the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 169 is an exploded front perspective view of the winning device 24065 in the twenty-fourth embodiment, and FIG. 170 is an exploded rear perspective view of the winning device 24065.

As shown in FIGS. 169 and 170, in the winning device 24065 in the twenty-fourth embodiment, bearings 24816 and 24826 are provided protruding from the back surface of the front base 24810 and the front surface of the intermediate base 24820, respectively. The bearing portions 24816 and 24826 are portions that rotatably support both ends of the rotating shaft 24877 on their inner circumferential surfaces, and are substantially U-shaped protrusions in front view that are open at the top (upper side in FIGS. 169 and 170). formed as a section.

In this embodiment, the bearing portion 24816 of the front base 24810 has a larger inner circumferential radius than the bearing portion 24826 of the intermediate base 24820. This allows rotation of one axial end of the rotating shaft 24877 (the end on the side where the cam portion 24877b is formed), as will be described later.

The rotation shaft 24877 is a shaft-shaped body for rotatably supporting the seesaw member 840 with respect to the front base 24810 and the intermediate base 24820. Here, the rotating shaft 24877 will be explained with reference to FIG. 171.

171(a) is a front view of the rotating shaft 24877, and FIG. 171(b) is a side view of the rotating shaft 24877 as viewed in the direction of arrow CLXXIb in FIG. 171(a).

As shown in FIG. 171, the rotating shaft 24877 includes a main body portion 24877a formed as a shaft-like body with a circular cross section, and a cam portion 24877b formed at an axial end of the main body portion 24877a. The cam portion 24877b is formed to protrude radially outward from the outer circumferential surface of the main body portion 24877a (that is, the distance from the axis of the main body portion 24877a to the outer circumferential surface of the cam portion 24877b changes depending on the rotation angle). ) It is formed as a so-called disc cam.

The explanation will be returned to FIGS. 170 and 171. In the rotating shaft 24877, the axial length of the main body portion 24877a is set to be larger than the axial length of the bearing 841 of the seesaw member 840. Therefore, the main body portion 24877a of the rotating shaft 24877 is fitted into the bearing 841 of the seesaw member 840, and the cam portion 24877b and main body portion 24877a protruding from both axial ends of the bearing 841 are connected to the bearing portion 24816 of the front base 24810 and the intermediate base. 24820 are each supported by bearing portions 24826 (see FIG. 173). Note that the rotating shaft 24877 is fixed to the bearing 841 of the seesaw member 840 after being positioned at a predetermined phase (rotational position).

Next, the action of the cam portion 24877b on the rotating shaft 24877 when the seesaw member 840 is rotated will be described.

FIG. 172(a) is a sectional view of the winning device 24065 in a state where the seesaw member 840 forms the first state, and FIG. 172(b) is a sectional view of the winning device 24065 in a state where the seesaw member 840 forms the second state. FIG. 173(a) is a sectional view of the winning device 24065 along the CLXXIIIa-CLXXIIIa line in FIG. 172(a), and FIG. 173(b) is a sectional view of the winning device 24065 along the CLXXIIIb-CLXXIIIb line in FIG. 172(b). FIG. Note that FIGS. 172(a) and 172(b) correspond to FIGS. 52(a) and 52(b), respectively.

As shown in FIGS. 172(a) and 173(a), in the first state, the axis of the rotating shaft 24877 is in a posture parallel to the horizontal direction (left-right direction in FIG. 173(a)). Both ends in the axial direction are supported by bearing portions 24816 of front cover 24810 and bearing portions 24826 of intermediate cover 24820, respectively. In this case, the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840 is tilted downward toward the discharge port 821d of the intermediate base 24820 at the first tilt angle.

When the seesaw member 840 is rotated from the first state shown in FIGS. 172(a) and 173(a) toward the second state, the cam portion 24877b at one axial end of the rotating shaft 24877 increases as the rotation angle increases. However, by gradually acting on the inner circumferential surface of the bearing portion 24816 of the front cover 24810, the height position of one axial end side of the rotating shaft 24877 (the side where the cam portion 24877b is formed) is gradually increased.

As shown in FIGS. 172(b) and 173(b), when the seesaw member 840 reaches the second state, the height position of one axial end of the rotating shaft 24877 (the side where the cam portion 24877b is formed) reaches its maximum height. The axis of rotation shaft 24877 is tilted downward from front base 24810 toward intermediate base 24820. As a result, the inclination angle at which the ejection surface 846 of the seesaw member 840 is inclined downward toward the ejection port 821d of the intermediate base 24820 is increased to a second inclination angle that is larger than the above-described first inclination angle.

In this manner, according to the present embodiment, as the seesaw member 840 is rotated from the first state to the second state, the inclination angle of the downward inclination of the discharge surface 846 can be increased.

Here, as in the first embodiment described above, when the seesaw member 840 is rotated while maintaining its rotation axis in a horizontal position (that is, the inclination angle of the downward inclination of the discharge surface 846 is maintained at a predetermined angle). If the inclination angle of the downward slope of the ejection surface 846 is strong (large), the ejection of game balls from the ejection surface 846 is accelerated, and the second state cannot be reliably formed. If it is loose (small), the ejection of game balls from the ejection surface 846 will be delayed and the residence time will be longer, so that the alternating change between the first state and the second state will not be performed smoothly.

In contrast, according to the present embodiment, when the seesaw member 840 is rotated from the first state to the second state, the downward slope of the discharge surface 846 is made relatively gentle (small) in the initial stage. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game balls from being ejected from the ejection surface 846 quickly (that is, to keep the game balls on the ejection surface 846), thereby making it easier to reliably form the second state. can.

On the other hand, in the final stage, the inclination angle of the downward slope of the ejection surface 846 is made relatively strong (larger), and the game balls can be quickly ejected from the ejection surface 846 to the ejection port 821d. By shortening the time during which the ball is placed (that is, the time during which the second state is formed), it is possible to smoothly switch between the first state and the second state.

<25th embodiment>
Next, the twenty-fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 174 to 177. In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the seesaw member 840 is rotated while maintaining its rotation axis in a horizontal position, but in the seesaw member 840 in the twenty-fifth embodiment, the position of the rotation axis is tilted as the rotation is performed. be done. Note that the same parts as in each of the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 174 is an exploded front perspective view of the winning device 25065 in the twenty-fifth embodiment, and FIG. 175 is an exploded rear perspective view of the winning device 25065.

As shown in FIGS. 174 and 175, in the winning device 25065 in the twenty-fifth embodiment, bearings 25816 and 24826 are provided protruding from the back surface of the front base 25810 and the front surface of the intermediate base 24820, respectively. These bearing portions 25816 and 24826 are portions that rotatably support both ends of the rotating shaft 25877 on their inner circumferential surfaces, and are formed in the same shape.

The rotating shaft 25877 is a shaft-like body with a circular cross section for rotatably supporting the seesaw member 840 with respect to the front base 25810 and the intermediate base 24820, and its axial length is equal to that of the bearing 841 of the seesaw member 840. The dimension is set to be larger than the axial length. Therefore, the rotating shaft 25877 is fitted into the bearing 841 of the seesaw member 840, and the portions of the bearing 841 protruding from both ends in the axial direction are supported by the bearing portion 25816 of the front base 25810 and the bearing portion 24826 of the intermediate base 25820, respectively. (See Figure 177).

Further, on the back surface of the front base 25810, a push-up portion 25817 is provided protruding from the side of the bearing portion 25816. The push-up portion 25817 is located on the movement locus of the discharge surface 846 forming portion when the seesaw member 840 is rotated from the first state to the second state, and is positioned on the movement trajectory of the discharge surface 846 forming portion when the seesaw member 840 is rotated from the first state to the second state, and is ejected when the seesaw member 840 approaches the second state. It comes into contact with the lower surface of the portion where the surface 846 is formed. Due to this contact, as will be described later, one side of the seesaw member 840 is pushed up by the push-up portion 25817, and the inclination angle of the downward inclination of the discharge surface 846 is increased.

Next, the action of the push-up portion 25817 when the seesaw member 840 is rotated will be explained.

FIG. 176(a) is a sectional view of the winning device 25065 in a state where the seesaw member 840 forms the first state, and FIG. 176(b) is a sectional view of the winning device 25065 in a state where the seesaw member 840 forms the second state. FIG.

177(a) is a sectional view of the winning device 25065 along the CLXXVIIa-CLXXVIIa line in FIG. 176(a), and FIG. 177(b) is a sectional view of the winning device 25065 along the CLXXVIIb-CLXXVIIb line in FIG. 176(a). FIG. 177(c) is a sectional view of the winning device 25065 along the CLXXVIIc-CLXXVIIc line in FIG. 176(b), and FIG. 177(d) is a sectional view along the CLXXVIId-CLXXVIId line in FIG. 176(b). It is a sectional view of the prize winning device 25065 in . Note that FIGS. 176(a) and 176(b) correspond to FIGS. 52(a) and 52(b), respectively.

As shown in FIGS. 176(a), 177(a), and 177(b), in the first state, there is a gap between the seesaw member 840 and the push-up portion 25817, so that the rotating shaft 25877 Both ends of the rotating shaft 25877 in the axial direction are supported by the bearing part 25816 of the front cover 25810 and the bearing part 24826 of the intermediate cover 24820, respectively, in a posture in which the axis of the rotating shaft 25877 is parallel to the horizontal direction (left-right direction in FIG. 177(a)). Ru. In this case, the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840 is tilted downward toward the discharge port 821d of the intermediate base 24820 at the first tilt angle.

When the seesaw member 840 is rotated from the first state shown in FIGS. 176(a), 177(a), and FIG. 177(b) toward the second state, and the discharge surface 846 forming portion of the seesaw member 840 is lowered. , the lower surface of the discharge surface 846 forming portion is brought into contact with the upper surface of the push-up portion 25817 (not shown).

When the seesaw member 840 is further rotated from this state toward the second state, the lower surface of the portion forming the discharge surface 846 is in contact with the upper surface of the push-up portion 25817, so that the seesaw member 840 rotates toward the rotation shaft 25877. is rotated while lifting one end in the axial direction (the left front side in FIG. 174, the left side in FIG. 177(a)), and the part forming the ejection surface 846 is placed on the side that is not in contact with the upper surface of the push-up part 25817 (the right back side in FIG. 174). , FIG. 177(b) right side) is lowered.

As a result, as shown in FIGS. 176(b), 27(c), and 177(d), when the seesaw member 840 reaches the second state, one axial end of the rotating shaft 25877 is connected to the inner periphery of the bearing portion 25816. It is lifted from the bottom surface, and the axis of the rotating shaft 25877 is tilted downward from the front base 25810 toward the intermediate base 24820. As a result, the inclination angle at which the ejection surface 846 of the seesaw member 840 is inclined downward toward the ejection port 821d of the intermediate base 24820 is increased to a second inclination angle that is larger than the above-described first inclination angle.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, when the seesaw member 840 is rotated from the first state to the second state, the initial stage (until the lower surface of the portion forming the discharge surface 846 comes into contact with the push-up portion 25817) In the final stage (the section where the discharge surface 846 is formed), the inclination angle of the downward slope of the discharge surface 846 is maintained at the first slope angle (that is, the slope angle of the downward slope of the discharge surface 846 is not changed). In the section after the lower surface of the discharge surface 846 comes into contact with the push-up part 25817), the inclination angle of the downward inclination of the discharge surface 846 can be rapidly increased to the second inclination angle.

As a result, in the initial stage, it is easier to prevent the game balls from being ejected from the ejection surface 846 more quickly (that is, it is easier to keep the game balls on the ejection surface 846), so the second state can be more reliably formed. . On the other hand, in the final stage, the game balls can be quickly and easily discharged from the discharge surface 846 to the discharge port 821d, so that the game balls are placed on the discharge surface 846 (i.e., the second state is not formed). It is possible to make the switching between the first state and the second state more smooth by shortening the time period during which the first state and the second state are running.

Although the present invention has been described above based on the above embodiments, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiments, and it is readily understood that various modifications and improvements can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. This can be inferred.

In each of the embodiments described above, a gaming machine may be constructed by replacing or combining part or all of one embodiment with part or all of one or more other embodiments.

In each of the above embodiments, a case has been described in which the groove 971 is provided in the front surface of the frame board 910 in the third path M3, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the groove 971 protrudes from the front surface of the frame board 910. It is also possible to provide a protruding strip that extends in a substantially sawtooth shape when viewed from the front. In this case, similarly to the case of the concave groove 971, the game ball flowing down the third path M3 can be guided along the outer surface of the convex strip and meandered left and right. Therefore, the falling speed of the game ball can be slowed down, and the movement of the game ball can be varied. Further, the protrusions can also be used as lenses that diffuse or condense light.

In each of the above embodiments, a case has been described in which the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840 is located above the downwardly inclined end of the guide bottom surface 824a of the intermediate bottom wall 824 in the second state, but this is not necessarily the case. In the second state, the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840 is aligned in the height direction with the downwardly inclined end of the guide bottom surface 824a of the intermediate bottom wall 824, or is located below the downwardly inclined end of the guide bottom surface 824a. It may be formed as follows.

In the third embodiment, a case has been described in which the third displacement member 3660 is slid relative to the first displacement member 3630 using the expansion and contraction movement of the slide rail 3662, but this is not necessarily the case. Instead, a groove is provided in one of the first displacement member 3630 or the third displacement member 3660, and a pin that slides along the groove is provided in the other of the first displacement member 3630 or the third displacement member 3660, and the pin relative to the groove is provided. The third displacement member 3660 may be slid relative to the first displacement member 3630 by utilizing the sliding motion.

In the eighth embodiment, a case has been described in which the relative rotation of the second displacement member 740 with respect to the first displacement member 730 is performed by the own weight (action of gravity) of the second displacement member 740, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. Instead, the second displacement member 740 is moved in either one direction or the other direction relative to the first displacement member 730 by using the elastic force of an elastic spring such as a coil spring or a torsion spring or an elastic body such as rubber or urethane. It may be energized. Thereby, the relative rotation of the second displacement member 740 with respect to the first displacement member 730 can be stabilized.

In the tenth embodiment, a case has been described in which the liquid LQ is used as the predetermined heavy object, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. The other heavy object may be anything as long as it can displace (e.g. roll or slide) the internal space of the retainer 10746 along the longitudinal direction as the attitude of the retainer 10746 changes; for example, iron or lead. Examples include a spherical body and a cylindrical body. Note that in that case, the internal space of the holder 10746 does not need to be sealed.

In the tenth embodiment, a case has been described in which a predetermined heavy object is held in the internal space of the holder 10746, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this, and a predetermined heavy object is held at the center of gravity through strings or links. The second displacement member 740 may be suspended from any position on the vertical line Z passing through G. This also allows a predetermined heavy object to be displaced in the same direction as the moving direction of the center of gravity G when the second displacement member 740 is rotated to one side or the other side about the rotation axis 741.

In the tenth embodiment, a case has been described in which the retainer 10746 is disposed at a position where the longitudinal center thereof coincides with the center of gravity G of the second displacement member 740, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. However, it is preferable to position the longitudinal center of the retainer 10746 on a vertical line Z passing through the center of gravity G.

In the eleventh embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the return operation of the second displacement member 740 to the intersection angle γ1 with respect to the first displacement member 730 is performed using the elastic recovery force of the biasing spring SP, but this is not necessarily the case. The displacement is not limited to this, and the biasing spring SP may be omitted and the displacement may be performed by the own weight (action of gravity) of the second displacement member 740.

In the twenty-fourth and twenty-fifth embodiments, a case has been described in which, in the first state, the rotating shaft 24877 is supported with its axis parallel to the horizontal direction (left-right direction in FIG. 173(a)). , but is not necessarily limited to this, in the first state, the height position of one axial end of the rotating shaft 24877 (the side where the cam portion 24877b is formed) is higher (or lower) than the other axial end. It may be set at a certain position. That is, the above-mentioned first inclination angle (the inclination angle at which the ejection surface 846 of the seesaw member 840 in the first state is inclined downward toward the ejection port 821d of the intermediate base 24820) is the above-mentioned second inclination angle (the It is sufficient that the ejection surface 846 of the seesaw member 840 in the second state is formed to be able to increase to a larger inclination angle than the inclination angle at which the ejection surface 846 of the seesaw member 840 is inclined downward toward the ejection port 821d of the intermediate base 24820.

In the twenty-first and twenty-second embodiments described above, a case has been described in which a sufficient gap is not formed between the rotating members 21870, 22870 and the front base 810, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. A predetermined gap may be provided between the receiving plate 21872 and the pushing plate 21873 and the front base 810. In this case, it is preferable to provide a predetermined gap only on the receiving plate 21872 side. As a result, the same effects as in the twenty-third embodiment can be obtained.

<First control example>
Next, a first control example of the pachinko machine 10 in each of the above-described embodiments will be described with reference to FIGS. 178 to 257. In this first control example, a normal state (low probability state of special symbols and a normal state of normal symbols), a variable probability state (high probability state of special symbols and a short time state of normal symbols), and a potential state ( There are three game states: a high probability state with special symbols, and a normal state with normal symbols. The system is configured such that the potential state is the most advantageous gaming state for the player. More specifically, in the probability state, the variation time of the variation display that is executed based on the ball entering the second ball entry port 1640 is made shorter than in other game states (600 seconds → 0.5 seconds) configuration. In addition, the normal state (low probability state) of the normal symbol and the time saving state (high probability state) of the normal symbol are configured so that the probability of winning the normal symbol is almost the same (231/240 → 232/240), The opening period of the electric accessory 1640a when the normal symbol hits is the same (1 second x 2 times). As a result, in the potential state where the normal state of the normal symbol is set, the ball is aimed at the second ball entry port 1640 rather than the first ball entry port 64 (so-called left-handed hitting). By striking out (so-called right-handed hitting), the special symbol lottery can be executed more efficiently. Hereinafter, the special symbol lottery executed based on the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 will be referred to as the first special symbol lottery, and the lottery performed based on the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 will be referred to as the first special symbol lottery. The special symbol lottery executed based on the ball being hit is referred to as the second special symbol lottery.

In this first control example, the lottery of the second special symbol is more advantageous to the player than the lottery of the first special symbol. Specifically, in the lottery of the second special symbol, the special winning hole 65a is opened for a predetermined period of time (1.648 seconds x 1 time, 0.06 seconds x 6 times, or 0.06 seconds x 8 times) for some of the losers. ) will be released. Therefore, even if you do not win the jackpot in the second special symbol lottery, you will be given more opportunities to enter the ball into the special winning hole 65a and win the prize ball, which is more advantageous than the first special symbol lottery. becomes. Hereinafter, to simplify the explanation, the winning lottery result in which the specific winning hole 65a is opened will be referred to as a "small win."

By configuring the specific winning hole 65a to be opened when there is a small hit in addition to a big hit in the lottery of the second special symbol, the number of prize balls is increased in a potential state where the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is short. You can continue to do so. Therefore, the game can be played in anticipation of a potential state. Although the details will be described later, in the normal state and variable probability state, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol becomes extremely long, so the frequency at which the special winning opening 65a is opened due to a jackpot or small win is in the probability state. significantly lower than that of Therefore, in a normal state or a variable probability state, even if the ball is hit to the right, there will be more balls used for the game than prize balls. Therefore, in normal states and variable probability states, it is more advantageous to hit left-handed. In a general gaming machine, the variable probability state is the most advantageous gaming state, but in this control example, the probability state is more advantageous than the variable probability state, so it is possible to provide a novel gaming experience.

In addition, in this first control example, the variable display based on the lottery of the first special symbol and the variable display based on the lottery of the second special symbol are configured to be executable at the same time (in parallel) (so-called simultaneous ). As a result, even if the variable display of one special symbol is in progress, the variable display of the other special symbol can be executed without waiting for the end of the variable display, so that the special symbol lottery can be executed more efficiently. can. In addition, when the first special symbol and the second special symbol are fluctuating at the same time, if one of them stops fluctuating due to a stop symbol of a jackpot or small win, the other fluctuation display will show the remaining fluctuation time and lottery. Regardless of the result, a missed stop symbol will be displayed. This makes it possible to prevent a problem in which the other variable display is confirmed to be a win or a small win while a jackpot or a small win is being executed, and the jackpot or small win is started overlappingly.

First, details of the variable prize winning device 65 in this control example will be explained with reference to FIGS. 178 to 180. FIG. 178 is a front view of the center frame 86 of the pachinko machine 10 in this control example. As shown in FIG. 178, a second through gate 67 is provided on the right side of the center frame 86, and a variable prize winning device 65 is provided on the lower left side of the second through gate 67. There is a possibility that a ball will reach these second through gates 67 and variable winning device 65 when the player hits right. In addition, in FIG. 178, in order to make it easier to understand the structure of the variable winning device 65, the cover body provided on the front side of the variable winning device 65 when viewed from the front is shown with all parts other than the outer periphery removed. (section CLXXIX in Figure 178).

Here, the configuration of the variable prize winning device 65 will be explained in detail with reference to FIGS. 179(a) and (b). FIG. 179 is an enlarged view of the CLXXIX section in FIG. 178. As shown in FIGS. 179(a) and (b), the variable winning device 65 is formed with a specific winning hole 65a which is an opening into which a game ball can enter. A detection port 65a1 constituted by a magnetic sensor for detecting winning of a game ball is arranged below the specific winning port 65a. The game balls that have passed through the detection port 65a1 are distributed to either the normal discharge channel 65e1 or the special discharge channel 65e2 provided on the downstream side thereof.

As shown in FIGS. 179(a) and 179(b), the opening of the specific winning hole 65a is in an open state where a game ball can enter through the opening/closing plate 65f1, and a closed state where a ball cannot enter (difficult to enter). It is variable. In the closed state, the opening is covered by the opening/closing plate 65f1, and the ball is configured to be able to flow down the right side of the opening/closing plate 65f1. In addition, in the open state, the opening/closing plate 65f1 is configured so that the opening of the specific prize opening 65a is opened by tilting it toward the right side when viewed from the front.

With this configuration, when the opening of the variable winning device 65 is closed, the game ball flows down the channel on the right side of the variable winning device 65 when viewed from the front to the second ball entrance 1640 side. It is configured to be guided as follows. Therefore, in the most advantageous probability state, the game ball is entered into the second ball entry hole 1640 to draw the second special symbol, and when a small hit or a jackpot is achieved, the special winning hole 65a is entered. This can be achieved by simply continuing to hit the ball to the right. Therefore, the player can play the game more easily in the probability state.

Next, referring to FIGS. 179(a) and 179(b), the opening/closing plate 65f1 is opened, and the game balls that have won the specific winning opening 65a are distributed to a normal discharge channel 65e1 and a special discharge channel 65e2, which will be described later. The following describes the configuration that can be used.

First, with reference to FIG. 179(a), a case where a game ball is guided to the normal discharge channel 65e1 will be described. In FIG. 179(a), the flow path solenoid 65k is inactive and the switching member 65h protrudes to the left side in front view (the flow path side where the ball flows down), so that the entrance of the special discharge flow path 65e2 is closed. It is a figure which shows the state where an opening surface is closed.

When the opening/closing plate 65f1 is opened, the game ball that has entered the specific winning opening 65a flows down the detection opening 65a1. The game ball guided to the distribution channel from the detection port 65a1 is guided to the upper surface of the switching member 65h, and as a result of being prevented from flowing down the special discharge channel 65e2 by the switching member 65h, the game ball is prevented from flowing down the special discharge channel 65e2. 65e1. At the end of this normal discharge channel 65e1, a discharge confirmation switch 65e4 is provided which is constituted by a magnetic sensor capable of detecting passage of a game ball. With this discharge confirmation switch 65e4, it is possible to accurately detect the number of out balls discharged from the normal discharge channel 65e1 to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 as out balls.

Next, with reference to FIG. 179(b), a case where the game ball is guided to the special discharge channel 65e2 will be described. FIG. 179(b) is a diagram showing a state in which the flow path solenoid 65k is activated and the switching member 65h is recessed to the right in front view, so that the opening surface of the entrance of the special discharge flow path 65e2 is opened. .

As shown in FIG. 179(b), the game ball that has passed through the detection port 65a1 flows down along the outer peripheral wall and is guided to the special discharge channel 65e2. The game ball guided to the special discharge channel 65e2 is detected by the V passing switch 65e3, which is provided in the special discharge channel 65e2 and is composed of a magnetic sensor capable of detecting the passage of the game ball, and is output as an out ball. It is discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10. Thereby, whether all the game balls that entered the variable winning device 65 have been ejected can be determined based on the sum of the out balls detected by the V passage switch 65e3 and the out balls detected by the ejection confirmation switch 65e4. Therefore, if a malfunction such as ball jamming occurs in the variable prize winning device 65, the malfunction can be discovered at an early stage.

Here, although the details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10 in this control example, the game state after the jackpot is changed to the special symbol probability change state ( The state is set to variable state (definite state or potential state). That is, the V passage switch 65e3 is configured as a winning opening for providing a special symbol probability change state. Further, the switching member 65h is configured to divide the gaming state after a jackpot into a special symbol low probability state or a variable probability state.

In this way, the game state set after the jackpot game is changed depending on the falling route of the game ball that entered the specific winning hole 65a during the jackpot game, so it is possible to improve the player's interest even during the jackpot game. . Note that the time required for passing from the opening of the variable prize winning device 65 to the entrance of the special discharge channel 65e2 (the opening surface closed by the switching member 65h) is 1 second at the longest. The operation timing and operation time of the switching member 65h are set in correspondence with the elapsed time after the start of the jackpot. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 180, but in this control example, the switching member 65h operates for 4 seconds after the start of the first round of the jackpot, and the special discharge flow continues to the V passing switch 65e3. The game ball is now able to pass through the path 65e2.

In this way, based on the fact that a game ball that has entered the specific winning hole 65a in the variable winning device 65 has been detected by the detection hole 65a1, a prize ball (in this control example, for one ball winning) is given to the player as a bonus. 15 prize balls) can be paid out. In addition, by using the game ball detected by the detection port 65a1 to determine whether or not it passes through the V passing switch 65e3, it is possible to determine whether or not to give the special symbol probability change state. A lottery can also be performed. Therefore, there is no need to provide a dedicated winning hole for providing variable probability states of special symbols separately from the variable winning device 65, and the space on the game board 13 can be used effectively.

Next, with reference to FIG. 180, the correspondence between the operation of the channel solenoid 65k and the opening/closing operation of the opening/closing plate 65f1 in the first jackpot will be explained. In this control example, the opening/closing pattern of the opening/closing plate 65f1 in the first round of the jackpot is varied according to the jackpot type, thereby varying the ease with which the ball flows down into the special discharge channel 65e2. In this control example, two types of patterns are provided as opening/closing patterns of the opening/closing plate 65f1 (a pattern in which it is difficult for the ball to enter the specific winning hole 65a, and a pattern in which the ball is easy to enter).

FIG. 180 is a diagram schematically showing a time-measured change in the operation of the channel solenoid 65k and a time-measured change in the opening/closing timing of the opening/closing plate 65f1 for each jackpot type. As shown in FIG. 180(a), the flow path solenoid 65k is kept in the off state before one round of jackpot starts. That is, before the start of one round, the ball is in a state where it can flow down into the normal discharge channel 65e1 (see FIG. 179(a)). This off state continues until one round starts. Then, when the first round starts, the flow path solenoid 65k is set to be in the ON state for only 4 seconds. That is, the ball is in a state where it can flow down into the special discharge channel 65e2 (see FIG. 179(a)). When the 4-second ON state period ends, the flow path solenoid 65k is set to the OFF state again (set to a state where the ball can flow down to the normal discharge flow path 65e1), and from then on, it remains OFF until the jackpot ends. is maintained.

Further, as shown in FIG. 180(b), in the case of a jackpot C, the closed opening/closing plate 65f1 is opened when one round starts. By opening the opening/closing plate 65f1, a ball can enter the inside of the variable prize winning device 65. This open state lasts only 0.2 seconds. After 0.2 seconds have elapsed since the opening/closing plate 65f1 was opened, the opening/closing plate 65f1 is kept closed until the elapsed time from the start of one round reaches 2.9 seconds. Then, when 2.9 seconds have passed from the start of one round, the opening/closing plate 65f1 is set to the open state again. This open state lasts for only 0.1 second, and after that, the opening/closing plate 65f1 is kept in the closed state until one round ends and the second round starts after a 5 second interval period. In addition, one round in this control example ends when 10 balls enter the specific winning a prize opening 65a, or when 3 seconds elapse after the start of one round. It is very difficult to let the ball enter the special winning hole 65a during the 0.2 second open period and the 0.1 second open period, so if you get a jackpot C, basically , the jackpot ends without allowing the ball to flow down into the special discharge channel 65e2. That is, since the ball cannot pass through the V passage switch 65e3 during the jackpot, the probability change state of the special symbol is not given after the jackpot ends. Therefore, when the jackpot C occurs, the gaming state after the jackpot becomes disadvantageous for the player compared to other jackpot types. Although the probability is low, if the ball enters the specific winning hole 65a during 0.2 seconds or 0.1 seconds when the opening/closing plate 65f1 is opened, and the ball passes through the V passing switch 65e3. After the jackpot ends, the special symbol can be changed to a variable probability state. Therefore, even when the jackpot type is jackpot C, the game can be played with the expectation that the probability change state of the special symbol will be set after the jackpot ends.

Further, as shown in FIG. 180(c), when a jackpot A, B, D to G occurs, the opening/closing plate 65f1 is opened for 3 seconds after the start of the first round of the jackpot. That is, an opening/closing pattern is set that allows the ball to easily enter the specific winning hole 65a in the first round. Therefore, by letting the ball enter the specific winning hole 65a during the open period of 3 seconds, which is longer than the jackpot C, the ball can easily pass through the V passing switch 65e3. Therefore, in the case of a jackpot A, B, E to G, the ball can easily pass through the V passage switch 65e3 during the jackpot, so even if the ball is not launched toward the variable prize winning device 65 in the first round. Then, after hitting the jackpot, it is possible to shift to the special symbol probability change state.

The ON period of the flow path solenoid 65k is 1 second longer than the open period of the opening/closing plate 65f1 because the ball reaches the special discharge flow path 65e2 after entering the special prize opening 65a. This is because it takes a maximum of one second. That is, even if the ball that enters the specific winning hole 65a just before the end of the first round of the jackpot flows down in the maximum flow time, the ball is configured to be able to pass through the V passing switch 65e3. Thereby, when a ball enters the specific winning hole 65a in the first round of a jackpot, a special symbol probability change state can be given after the jackpot, regardless of the timing of ball entry.

In this way, in this control example, the ease of transition to the variable probability state is varied depending on the type of jackpot. This allows the player to play the game with the expectation that an opening/closing pattern will be set that will allow the player to easily transition to the variable probability state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 181, the transition of the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example will be described. FIG. 181 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a method of transitioning from one gaming state to another gaming state for three types of gaming states set in the pachinko machine 10 in this control example.

First, a method of changing the gaming state when staying in the normal state will be explained. As described above, in the normal state, playing the game with the left hand tends to increase the lottery frequency of special symbols than playing the game with the right hand, so it is more advantageous for the player to play with the left hand. This is because the ball enters the first ball entry opening 64 more easily when the ball is hit left-handed. As mentioned above, in the lottery of the first special symbol, which is executed based on the ball entering the first ball entrance 64, a small hit is not drawn, so unless a jackpot is achieved, the number of balls held is endless. It becomes a disadvantageous condition that continues to decrease. In this normal state, there is a possibility of shifting to another gaming state only when a jackpot is achieved. There are four types of jackpots A to D that can be won in the lottery of the first special symbol. Details of these jackpot types will be described later with reference to FIG. 192(a).

As shown on the left side of FIG. 181, when the jackpot A is determined at a rate of 32% in the case of a jackpot in the lottery of the first special symbol in the normal gaming state ST1 (normal state), after the jackpot ends, The game shifts to the variable probability gaming state ST2 (variable probability state) shown in the center of the figure. In addition, in the normal gaming state ST1 (normal state), when a jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, if the jackpot B or D is determined at a total rate of 58%, after the jackpot ends, the The game shifts to the potential probability variable gaming state ST3 (potential probability state) shown on the right side. On the other hand, when a jackpot C is determined at a rate of 10% when a jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery, the normal state is set again as the gaming state after the jackpot ends (the normal state is looped). do).

As described above, in the potential state, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is shortened, and the gaming efficiency when hitting right is increased, which is advantageous for the player. On the other hand, in the normal state and variable probability state, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol becomes longer, so the gaming efficiency when hitting right is extremely reduced, resulting in a disadvantageous gaming state compared to the probability state. . Therefore, in the normal state, the player can play the game in anticipation of the jackpots B and D, which will trigger a transition to the advantageous potential state.

Note that under normal conditions, it is normal to play the game by hitting the ball left-handed and aiming for the first ball entry port 64, but if the player intentionally hits the right-hand ball and the ball enters the second ball entry port 1640. Or, as a result of a part of the ball hit to the left entering the second ball entry port 1640, there is a possibility that a jackpot will be won in the lottery of the second special symbol. In this case, common to all the jackpot types (jackpot E to G), after the jackpot ends, the game shifts to a variable probability gaming state ST2 (variable probability state). If you get a jackpot by drawing the first special symbol in the normal state, there is a possibility that it will shift to an advantageous potential state at a rate of 58% (Jackpot B, D). When a jackpot is achieved by drawing a special symbol, the possibility of shifting to an advantageous potential state becomes zero. Therefore, it is possible to increase the disadvantages when playing an irregular game method in which the lottery of the second special symbol is executed by performing a right hit in the normal state, so that it is possible to suppress irregular games.

Furthermore, as mentioned above, even if the jackpot A, B, D to G occurs, if the ball cannot be passed through the V passing switch 65e3 during the jackpot due to not hitting the ball during the jackpot, etc. , the gaming state after the jackpot is set to the most disadvantageous normal state (the normal state is looped). On the other hand, even in the case of the most disadvantageous jackpot C, if the ball passes through the V passage switch 65e3 during the jackpot, the gaming state after the jackpot is set to the most advantageous potential state.

Next, a method of changing the gaming state when the player is staying in the variable probability state will be explained. As mentioned above, in the variable probability state, playing the game with the left hand tends to result in a higher lottery frequency of special symbols than playing the game with the right hand as in the normal state, so it is more advantageous for the player to play with the left hand. becomes. In addition, in the variable probability state, the jackpot probability of the special symbol increases compared to the normal state, so it is advantageous compared to the normal state, but it is disadvantageous compared to the probability state. In the variable probability gaming state ST2 (variable probability state), if a jackpot is reached or if the lottery of special symbols continues a specified number of times (120 times) after entering the variable probability state, the game will move to another gaming state. Transition.

Specifically, as shown in the center of FIG. 181, when the jackpot C is determined at a rate of 10% in the case of a jackpot in the first special symbol lottery, after the jackpot ends, the left side of FIG. A transition is made to the normal gaming state ST1 (normal state) shown in FIG. On the other hand, if a jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, and one of jackpots B and D is determined at a rate of 58% in total, after the jackpot ends, the latent probability variable gaming state ST3 shown on the right side of FIG. (transition to potential state). On the other hand, if the first special symbol is a jackpot in the lottery, and the jackpot A is determined at a rate of 32%, the variable probability state is set again after the jackpot ends (the variable probability state is looped). . In addition, if the special symbol is drawn out a specified number of times (120 times) in a probability variable state and the special symbol is drawn out continuously, the game shifts to the normal game state ST1 (normal state) after the specified number of times has elapsed.

In addition, in the variable probability state, it is normal to play the game by hitting to the left and aiming at the first ball entry port 64 as in the normal state, but the ball enters the second ball entry port 1640 and the second special ball enters the second ball entry port 1640. There is also the possibility of winning a jackpot by drawing lots of symbols. In this case, common to all jackpot types (jackpot E to G), after the jackpot ends, the variable probability gaming state ST2 (variable probability state) is looped. If a jackpot is achieved by drawing the first special symbol in a variable probability state, there is a possibility of shifting to a probability state with an advantageous probability of 58% (jackpots B and D) as in the normal state. If a jackpot is achieved by drawing the second special symbol in a variable probability state, the possibility of shifting to an advantageous probability state becomes zero. Therefore, it is possible to increase the disadvantages when playing an irregular game method in which the lottery of the second special symbol is executed by performing a right hit in a variable probability state, so that it is possible to suppress irregular games.

Next, a method of changing the gaming state when the player is staying in the potential state will be explained. As mentioned above, in the variable probability state, unlike the normal state and the variable probability state, the variation time of the second special symbol is shortened, so by playing the game with right-hand hitting, it is possible to efficiently draw the second special symbol. . Therefore, it is more advantageous for the player to play right-handed than to play left-handed. In the latent probability variable gaming state ST3 (potential sure state), if the winning state occurs continuously for a specified number of times (120 times) after the special symbol is drawn a specified number of times (120 times), the game state shifts to another gaming state. do.

Specifically, as shown on the right side of Figure 181, if the probability state is set and the special symbol is drawn consecutively for a specified number of times (120 times), then the normal Transition to gaming state ST1 (normal state). On the other hand, if the lottery of the second special symbol is executed in a potential state where the game is played right-handed (the lottery of the second special symbol is likely to be executed) and it becomes a jackpot, after the jackpot, basically (the lottery of the second special symbol is likely to be executed), If the ball is hit aiming at the winning hole 65a), the potential probability variable game state ST3 (potential probability state) is set again after the jackpot is completed. For this reason, in the probability state, by continuing to win the jackpot before losing 120 times in a row, the advantageous probability state and the jackpot that can win a large amount of prize balls are repeated. This creates a gaming state that is extremely advantageous for the player. Although details will be described later, when a special symbol lottery is executed in a probability state (special symbol high probability state), the probability of winning the jackpot is 1/80. The probability of losing 120 times in a row in a 1/80 jackpot lottery is about 22% (79/80 to the 120th power), so the probability of winning the jackpot within 120 times in a probability state is about 78%. Therefore, once the probability state is reached, it becomes an extremely advantageous state in which the jackpot and the probability state are looped at a rate of about 78%.

In addition, in the probability state, it is normal to play the game with right-handed batting, so basically the ball does not enter the first ball entry port 64 and the lottery of the first special symbol is not executed. , If the player makes a mistake in the launching direction, or if the ball shifts to the potential state with the first special symbol remaining in the normal state, the first special symbol will be released even if the player is in the potential state. A lottery may be held. In this case, if a jackpot is achieved, there is a possibility that the game will move to another gaming state. Specifically, when a jackpot C (distribution 10%) is achieved in the lottery of the first special symbol in the probability state, the state shifts to the normal state after the jackpot. On the other hand, if the jackpot A, B, or D is obtained by drawing the first special symbol, the probability state is set again even after the jackpot.

In addition, unlike the normal state and the variable probability state, the probability state is set even after jackpot A ends because the potential probability is set by the reserved balls of the first special symbol that were accumulated before the transition to the probability state. This is to reduce the possibility of shifting to a disadvantageous probability variable state when the lottery of the first special symbol is executed after the state transition and it becomes a jackpot. Immediately after the state shifts to the potential state, the first special symbol that has been put on hold is drawn and becomes a jackpot, and if the state shifts to the variable state, the player will not benefit from the potential state and will be at a disadvantage. Since the player falls, there is a risk that the player's motivation for playing the game may be reduced. On the other hand, in this first control example, when a jackpot is achieved in the lottery of the first special symbol in an advantageous probability state, the probability of looping through the probability state after the jackpot is higher than in the normal state or variable probability state. It is set as follows. As a result, even if a jackpot is achieved in the lottery of the first special symbol immediately after shifting to an advantageous potential state, the potential state is set again at a high rate (90%). Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player's motivation for playing from decreasing.

Next, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 182 to 189. FIG. 182 is a diagram for explaining the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 182(a) is a diagram schematically showing area division settings and effective line settings of the display screen, FIG. 182(b) is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen.

The third symbol is composed of nine types of main symbols numbered from "1" to "9". Each main pattern is composed of a rear pattern imitating various animals with numbers ``1'' to ``9'' attached thereto. Specifically, for example, the number "1" is assigned to the rear design imitating an elephant, and the number "2" is assigned to the rear design imitating a lion.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, when the special symbol lottery result performed by the main controller 110 is a jackpot, a variable display in which the same main symbols are aligned is performed, and the variable display ends. It is structured so that a jackpot will occur later. On the other hand, if the lottery result of the special symbol is a loss, a variable display is performed in which the same main symbols are not aligned.

As shown in FIG. 182(a), the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is roughly divided into upper and lower halves, with approximately 3/4 of the upper portion being the main display area Dm where the third symbol is displayed in a variable manner; Approximately 1/4 of the lower side is a sub-display area Ds that displays preview effects, characters, the number of reserved pitches, and the like.

In the main display area Dm, three symbol rows L1, L2, and L3, upper, middle, and lower, are displayed. In each of the symbol rows L1 to L3, the third symbols described above are displayed in a prescribed order. That is, in each of the symbol rows L1 to L3, the main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending numerical order, and a variable display is performed by periodically scrolling in the left and right direction for each symbol row L1 to L3. In particular, in the upper symbol row L1, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged in descending order, and in the middle symbol row L2 and lower symbol row L3, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged in ascending order.

Further, in the main display area Dm, third symbols are displayed in three rows on the left, middle, and right for each of the symbol rows L1 to L3. The left vertical line, middle vertical line, and right vertical line of this main display area Dm are set as effective lines V1 to V3, respectively. In addition, a diagonal line going down to the right and a diagonal line going up to the right in the main display area Dm are set as effective lines V4 and V5, respectively. During each game, third symbols are stopped and displayed on active lines V1 to V5 in the order of upper symbol row L1→lower symbol row L3→middle symbol row L2. This stopped display state is maintained for at least 1 second. In this way, by displaying the stopped third symbol for a certain period of time (more than 1 second), the player can check whether the combination of the third symbol corresponds to a jackpot (if the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot). It is possible to prevent overlooking (whether or not there is one). Furthermore, if a combination of jackpot symbols (in this control example, a combination of the same main symbols) is aligned on the active lines V1 to V5 when the third symbol is stopped, a jackpot video (opening effect) is displayed as a jackpot.

In addition, if the combination of the third symbol that is stopped and displayed is a combination that corresponds to a loss, and there are held balls, after a 1-second stop display, a fluctuating display corresponding to the lottery based on the held balls will start. . In addition, when a plurality of reserved balls exist, a lottery is executed based on the reserved ball corresponding to the oldest ball entered in terms of time.

On the other hand, when the third symbol of the combination corresponding to the removal of the special symbol is stopped and displayed for one second in a state where there are no reserved balls, the state in which the third symbol is stopped and displayed continues thereafter. This state continues until a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) passes or a new ball enters either the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 1640. If a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since the third symbol was stopped and displayed, a demonstration effect (customer waiting demonstration screen) indicating that the game is not being executed is displayed (see Figure 186). ). It is rare for a player to continuously shoot a ball for a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds) without a ball entering the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 1640. In many cases, when the third symbol is displayed in a stopped state for a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds), it is because the player has quit playing, and the pachinko machine 10 is not playing any games at all. to cause. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, when a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since the third symbol was stopped and displayed, it is determined that the player is not playing the game, and the demonstration effect is started. do. Thereby, a player who is about to select the pachinko machine 10 to start a game can easily determine whether or not a game is being played based on the presence or absence of a demonstration effect being displayed. On the other hand, if a new ball enters the first ball entry port 64 and the second ball entry port 1640 before a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed, the new ball is A variable display of the third symbol is executed.

The sub-display area Ds is provided in a laterally elongated manner below the main display area Dm. This sub-display area Ds is an area for displaying the number of reserved balls, which is the number of balls that have not been changed (reserved balls) among the balls that entered the first ball entrance 64. In this control example, a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 while the third symbol display device 81 (first symbol display device 37) is displaying a variable display based on the lottery of the first special symbol. In this case, the number of balls entered is reserved up to a maximum of four times, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by the first symbol display device 37 and also in the sub-area Ds1 of the sub-display area Ds. The number of pending symbols displayed in this sub-display area Ds allows the player to clearly recognize the number of pending balls whose variable display is currently pending. In this control example, only the variable display of the first special symbol can be held, and the variable display of the second special symbol is not stored. Therefore, only the number of reserved symbols corresponding to the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is displayed in the sub display area Ds.

Next, an example of display contents actually displayed on the third symbol display device 81 will be explained with reference to FIG. 182(b). On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 182(b), a total of nine main symbols and sub-symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. Furthermore, three main symbols and three sub-symbols are displayed on the right and left sides of the display area Dm. These show the lottery results of the first special symbol in the normal state and the variable probability state. Furthermore, a small area Dm1 for displaying a third symbol indicating the lottery result of the second special symbol is displayed in the upper center portion of the main display region Dm. In this small area Dm1, a variable display of three third symbols in a simple manner consisting only of numbers "1" to "9" is executed. Also in this small area Dm1, the jackpot starts when three third symbols composed of the same numbers are stopped and displayed. In addition, the reason why the third symbol indicating the lottery result of the second special symbol is displayed in a simpler manner than the third symbol indicating the lottery result of the first special symbol is that it is basic in the normal state and the variable probability state. This is because the lottery for the first special symbol is executed every day, and the lottery for the second special symbol is rarely executed. Therefore, by configuring the variable display of the first special symbol to be mainly executed to be displayed in a larger display area, the game result is displayed more clearly. In addition, in the following explanation, the variable display of the special symbol that is mainly executed in each gaming state (in the normal state and variable probability state, the variable display of the first special symbol corresponds to this) will be referred to as the main variation, and the A variable display of a special symbol that is rarely executed when playing a regular game method (in a normal state or a probability variable state, the variable display of the second special symbol corresponds to this) is referred to as a sub-variation.

In the small area Ds1 in the sub-display area Ds, the same number of reserved symbols imitating bird faces as the number of reserved balls of the first symbol are displayed. At the start of the variable display based on the corresponding reserved balls, the reserved symbols are shown to enter the inside of the house displayed on the right side in the small area Ds1. This allows the player to easily understand that the variable display corresponding to the reserved balls has started. Further, in the small area Ds1, a preview effect is sometimes performed such as a reserved symbol making a special movement or another character appearing.

In this control example, the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is held up to a maximum of 4 times, but the maximum number of balls held is not limited to 4 times, but may be held up to 3 times. It may be set to less than or equal to 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, it may be configured such that entry of the ball into the second ball entry port 1640 can be suspended. In addition, instead of displaying the number of reserved balls symbol in the small area Ds1, the number of reserved pitches may be displayed as a number on a part of the third symbol display device 81, or an area divided into four areas may be displayed in a manner that differs by the number of reserved balls. (For example, it may be displayed in different colors or lighting patterns.) Further, since the number of reserved balls is shown by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Furthermore, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four holding lamps corresponding to the maximum number of held balls to indicate the number of held balls, and the number of held balls may be displayed according to the number of held lamps that are in a lit state.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 183(a) and 183(b), the variable display effect (variable pattern effect) of the third symbol in this control example will be explained. FIG. 183(a) is a diagram showing an example of display contents when all the upper, middle, and lower symbol rows are changing in a variable display performance. When each symbol column is changing, each symbol column is scrolled from the right side of the screen to the left side (variable display). By executing the variable display, it is possible to easily make the player recognize that a special symbol lottery has been newly executed. Therefore, the game can be played with the expectation that after the end of the variable display performance, the symbols will become a jackpot stop symbol (the main symbols with the same numbers will align on any of the active lines V1 to V5).

FIG. 183(b) shows an example of the display contents when a reach effect that suggests to the player that there is a high possibility that a jackpot stop symbol is likely to be stopped and displayed occurs in the variable display effect of the third symbol. It is a diagram.

Here, reach means a state in which the upper symbol row L1 and the lower symbol row L3 are displayed in a stopped state in the variable display, and only the middle symbol row L2 is displayed in a variable manner, and on any of the active lines V1 to V5. This mode shows a state in which main symbols with the same numbers are displayed in a stopped state, and suggests that there is a chance that the main symbols with the same numbers will line up on the active line L1. In the example shown in FIG. 183(b), two main symbols with the number "1" are stopped and displayed on the active line V4, and the number "2" is shown on the active line V5. This shows a state in which two main symbols are stopped and displayed. In this case, the main symbol with the number "1" or "2" attached in the middle row of the middle symbol row L2 is stopped and displayed, and becomes the stop symbol of the jackpot, so the player is notified of the jackpot. It can make you look forward to what will happen.

The upper symbol L1 and the lower symbol row L3 are displayed in a stopped state, and when reach occurs, the words "Reach!" are displayed above the fluctuating middle symbol row L2, as shown in FIG. 183(b). . By displaying this character, it is possible to make the player more reliably aware of the occurrence of a reach. Therefore, it is possible to make the player expect that the jackpot stop symbol will be stopped and displayed at the end of the variable performance in which the reach has occurred.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 184 and 185, a special ready-to-reach effect, which is a type of ready-to-reach effect executed by the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example, will be described. This special ready-to-reach effect is performed once an effect (temporary stop effect) in which all symbol rows L1 to L3 are stopped and displayed with a combination of stop symbols corresponding to a miss, and then the symbol rows L1 to L3 are A special type of reach in which a different symbol row is newly displayed and a reach occurs between the newly displayed symbol row and some (two) symbol rows among the stopped and displayed symbol rows L1 to L3. It's a performance. This special reach effect is selected as part of the reach effect, and is set so that the expectation of a jackpot is higher than the normal reach effect (it becomes difficult to be selected if the lottery result of the special symbol is a loss). There is.

As shown in FIG. 184(a), when the special ready-to-reach effect is executed, first, each symbol row is stopped and displayed (temporarily stopped) as a stop symbol that is out without a reach. In this case, if there is another symbol row further above the upper symbol row L1, the stop symbol that is a miss is a stop symbol that is a combination of the upper symbol row L1 and the middle symbol row L2 that is a reach. Ru. In the example of FIG. 184(a), a main symbol numbered "1" is displayed in the middle of the upper symbol row L1 and on the left side of the middle symbol row L2. In other words, if there is a symbol row further above the upper symbol row L1, and the main symbol with a "1" symbol on the right side of that symbol row is stopped and displayed, the same number "1" will be displayed. The main symbols marked with are stopped and displayed in the order in which they line up in a straight line. In addition, there are multiple modes of temporary stop in the special reach effect, in addition to the mode in which main symbols with the same numbers are lined up upwards to the right on the left side of the upper symbol row L1 and in the middle of the middle symbol row L2. is provided. For example, in the upper symbol row L1 and the middle symbol row L2, the main symbols with the same number on the left, middle, or right side are lined up vertically, or the middle symbol in the upper symbol row L1 and the middle symbol There is also a mode in which the main symbols having the same number on the right side of the row L2 are arranged upward to the right.

In the special reach effect, after the third symbol of each symbol row L1 to L3 is temporarily stopped, as shown in FIG. 184(b), each third symbol displayed in the upper symbol row L1 and the middle symbol row L2 Among the symbols, the main symbol changes to look upward. By changing the aspect, it is possible to easily make the player recognize that the current variable display performance has not ended.

After each main symbol is changed to look upward, as shown in Figure 185(a), the screen angle (camera angle) is shifted toward the upward direction of each main symbol. is executed. When the screen angle is shifted, a new symbol row L4 that is being changed is displayed at the shifted location (the new symbol row L4 enters the frame). Along with this, the lower symbol row L4 goes out of frame from the screen.

Then, as shown in FIG. 185(b), as a new symbol row L4 appears (frame-in), the new symbol row L4 and the "1" displayed in the middle of the upper symbol row L1. A ready-to-win state is formed by the main symbols with numbers attached and the main symbols with the number "1" displayed on the left side of the middle symbol row L2. Along with this, the main symbol on which Reach is applied (the main symbol with the number "1") has been changed to an aura-covered form, and the words "Reach!" are displayed above the new symbol row L4. Is displayed. As a result, if the main symbol with the number "1" on the right side is stopped and displayed when the new symbol row L4 stops changing, the main symbol with the same number on the new active line V6 will be displayed. Since three of them line up (this is the stopping symbol for a jackpot), it is possible to clearly indicate to the player that this is a chance to win a jackpot.

In this way, in this first control example, as a type of reach effect, a special reach is provided in which a new symbol row is displayed and a reach occurs after the third symbol is once stopped and displayed in a winning combination. ing. Thereby, even when a winning combination is stopped and displayed, the combination of stopped symbols can be confirmed in the hope that it will develop into a special reach effect. That is, the combination of stop symbols can be checked by paying attention to whether the combination of stop symbols can develop into a special reach effect (a combination that will result in a reach if a new symbol row L4 is displayed). Therefore, each time a winning combination is stopped and displayed in the variable display, it is possible to expect development into a special reach effect, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

In the first control example, when the special ready-to-win effect is executed, the new symbol row L4 is displayed above the upper symbol row L1, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a new symbol row L4 may be displayed below the lower symbol row L3, and a reach may be formed by the middle symbol row L2, the lower symbol row L3, and the new symbol row L4. Furthermore, for example, a new symbol row L4 may be displayed between each symbol row. That is, a new symbol row L4 appears between the upper symbol row L1 and the middle symbol row L2, and a reach is formed by the upper symbol row L1, the middle symbol row L2, and the new symbol row L4. Good too. In addition, in this first control example, by erasing the lower symbol row L3 when a new symbol row L4 is displayed, the number of symbol rows displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is not changed. Since it is configured to change the type of symbol row displayed, it is possible to unify the size of each symbol displayed during the special reach effect and the size of each symbol displayed before the special reach effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a new symbol row L4 may be displayed so that the number of symbol rows displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is increased.

Next, with reference to FIG. 186, the demonstration performance (customer waiting demonstration screen) in the first control example will be described. FIG. 186(a) is a diagram showing a state where the result of the variable display of the first special symbol is a loss in the normal state or the variable probability state. If the first special symbol is not reserved (the number of reserved balls is 0), unless a ball enters the first ball entrance 64, the combination of the third symbol at the time of fluctuation stop will be within 30 seconds. continues to be displayed across the board. Then, after 30 seconds have elapsed, the screen switches to the customer waiting demo screen shown in FIG. 186(b). In the example of FIG. 186(b), a movie of the sun setting behind a mountain is displayed as a customer waiting demonstration screen. In this movie, the display content changes as time passes, and for example, the display content changes to three birds passing in front of a mountain as shown in FIG. 186(c), depending on the elapsed time. By switching to this customer waiting demonstration screen, a player who is not playing a game can easily determine whether or not there is an empty machine. In addition, when switching to the customer waiting demonstration screen, the stop symbol of the first special symbol is displayed in a simplified manner (with only numbers) at the upper left of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 186(c), in the normal state and variable probability state, the third symbol corresponding to the lottery result of the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner (sub-variable) while the customer waiting demo screen is displayed. The customer waiting demo screen will also be displayed if 30 seconds have passed with the 3rd symbol corresponding to the lottery result of the 1st special symbol being stopped and only the sub-variation being executed. It is configured so that As mentioned above, by setting the fluctuation time of the second special symbol to be extremely long (600 seconds) in the normal state and variable probability state, it is configured such that playing to the left is more efficient than hitting to the right. . Therefore, if the player accidentally hits the right hand in the normal state or variable probability state, and the player quits the game immediately after the variable display (sub-variation) of the second special symbol starts. In this case, the sub-variation will continue to be executed for about 600 seconds. Under this situation, if the customer waiting demo screen is not displayed during execution of the sub-variation, the third symbol display device 81 will be displayed for a maximum of about 600 seconds even though no one is playing. There is a risk that the displayed content may appear as if a game is being played. Therefore, other players may hesitate to start playing at the pachinko machine 10 until the sub-fluctuation ends, and the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 may decrease.

On the other hand, in the first control example, after 30 seconds have passed since the main variation ends, the screen is switched to the customer waiting demonstration screen regardless of whether the sub variation is being executed or not. This customer waiting demo screen is configured to continue to be displayed until the next first special symbol lottery is executed (until the main variation is started) regardless of whether or not the sub variation is being executed. There is. With this configuration, even if the player enters the second ball entrance 1640 and quits the game immediately after the 600-second variable display starts, the player will be able to play the ball for about 30 seconds. Later, a customer waiting demo screen can be displayed. Therefore, other players who have checked the customer waiting demonstration screen can easily understand that the pachinko machine 10 is empty, and can therefore start playing games on the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 from decreasing. In addition, in this first control example, as shown in FIG. 186(b), on the demonstration display screen when the first special symbol and the second special symbol are stopped and displayed, the stop symbol corresponding to the first special symbol and the The second special symbol and the corresponding stop symbol are displayed in approximately the same size, but for example, the size of the special symbol on the side that becomes the main variation is larger than the size of the special symbol on the side that becomes the secondary variation. It may also be displayed. In addition, in the display screen shown in FIG. 186(b), the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the upper left, and the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the upper center. It may be configured such that the special symbol is stopped and displayed at the upper left of the display screen, and the special symbol on the side that becomes the sub-variation is stopped and displayed at the center of the display screen. Thereby, regardless of the gaming state, it is possible to easily understand the fluctuation status of the main fluctuation by simply checking a specific location on the display screen.

Next, the display mode in the probable state will be described with reference to FIG. 187. As described above, in this first control example, the potential state is the most advantageous state. In this potential state, in the main display area Dm1, an effect different from the normal variable display (an effect in which the character 811 imitating a rabbit runs at a high speed) is performed.

As shown in FIG. 187(a), in the potential state, a character 811 resembling a rabbit is displayed in the center of the main display area Dm. Then, a variation display (sub-variation in the potential state) corresponding to the lottery result of the first special symbol is displayed at the upper center of the screen of the third symbol display device 81, and a variation corresponding to the lottery result of the second special symbol is displayed. The display (main fluctuation in the potential state) is displayed at the top right of the screen. As mentioned above, in the potential state, the regular game method is to hit the ball to the right and aim at the second ball entrance 1640, so the fluctuation display (main fluctuation) corresponding to the lottery result of the second special symbol. is displayed in a larger display area than the variation display (sub-variation) corresponding to the lottery result of the first special symbol. In other words, based on the transition of the gaming state from the normal state to the potential state, the special symbol that becomes the main variation is changed from the first special symbol to the second special symbol, and the special symbol that becomes the sub-variation is changed to the second special symbol. Even if the symbol is changed to the first special symbol, the area where the sub-variation is displayed is configured not to be changed from the upper center of the screen of the third symbol display device 81. Thereby, at least a part of the data for displaying the sub-variation (variation display or demonstration display) can be shared and used.

In addition, below the area where the variation display (main variation) corresponding to the lottery result of the second special symbol is displayed, the words "Right hit" are displayed. By displaying this character, it is possible to easily make the player recognize that right-handed playing is the legal gaming method.

Further, in the remaining number display area D1 displayed at the upper left of the main display area Dm, an estimate of the remaining number of times in the potential state (an estimate of the number of lottery rounds until transition to the normal state) is displayed. In the example shown in FIG. 187(a), "40 times remaining" is displayed, and the player is informed that if the special symbol lottery is unsuccessful 40 times in a row, there is a possibility that the state will shift to the normal state. It is suggested that The remaining number of times displayed in this remaining number of times display area D1 is 120 times, which is the number of times the potential state continues, when the game state first shifts from another gaming state (normal state or variable probability state) to the potential state. The value is subtracted by 1 and displayed in conjunction with the start of the variable display indicating the lottery result of the first special symbol or the second special symbol.

In addition, in this control example, even if a special symbol lottery results in a jackpot, the remaining number of times displayed in the remaining number of times display area D1 is not reset, and the number of times before becoming a jackpot continues to be displayed even after the jackpot ends ( In other words, when a jackpot occurs, the number of times displayed differs from the actual remaining number of times. If the player continues to hit the ball to the right according to the displayed instructions (letters of "hit right"), the ball can be passed through the V passing switch 65e3 in the event of a jackpot in the lottery of the second special symbol. Therefore, after the end of the jackpot, a new 120 probability state is set. Therefore, if a jackpot occurs during the probability state, the number of times the probability state actually continues will be greater than the remaining number of times displayed in the remaining number display area D1. The details will be explained later, but the difference between the remaining number of potential states on the display and the actual remaining number of potential states is the number of remaining times on the display when the number of remaining times on the display reaches 0. (see FIG. 189). Thereby, even if the remaining number of times on the display approaches 0, the player can play the game with the expectation that the number of times will be added when the remaining number of times on the display reaches 0.

As mentioned above, it is easier to win a small hit in the second special symbol lottery, so even if the opening/closing plate 65f1 is movable (variable) to the open state, it may not be possible to move due to winning the jackpot or not. It becomes difficult for the player to determine whether he has won and is able to move. In addition, in this control example, the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 is configured to be the same whether there is a big hit or a small hit. Specifically, even if there is a big hit or a small hit, by keeping the display mode in which the character 811 runs at a high speed during the big hit or small win, the appearance of the third symbol display device 81 indicates that it is a big hit. The configuration is such that it is difficult to determine whether it is a winning or a small hit. Therefore, in the potential state, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize whether or not there is a difference between the displayed remaining number of times and the actual remaining number of times, so that the remaining number of times displayed becomes 0. It is possible to make it difficult to predict whether or not the remaining number of times will be additionally displayed when the number of times remaining is reached. Therefore, when the remaining number of times displayed becomes 0, the player can play the game with a stronger expectation that the remaining number of times will be displayed in addition, thereby increasing the player's interest in playing the game. be able to.

As mentioned above, the variable prize winning device 65 and the second ball entry port 1640 are both arranged at positions where the ball can easily enter the ball by hitting the ball to the right, so the display during the jackpot and small winning. Even if the display mode is set to be the same as that during the variation of the third symbol or the stopped display of the third symbol, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from winning and missing the prize ball of a big hit or a small win. Therefore, when the remaining number of plays on the display reaches 0, it is possible to make the player more strongly expect that the number of plays will be added and displayed without causing any loss.

FIG. 187(b) is a diagram showing an example of the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 within 30 seconds after the variable display corresponding to the lottery result of the second special symbol ends. In this case, the same display mode as during fluctuation (display mode in which the character 811 imitating a rabbit is running) is displayed, except that the symbol corresponding to the lottery result of the second special symbol is stopped and displayed. Here, in this first control example, not only does it not have a function of suspending the display of the variation of the second special symbol, but also the variation time of the second special symbol is extremely short (0.5 seconds) in the potential state. Therefore, the frequency of fluctuation stoppage becomes extremely high. Under this situation, if the display mode is changed (switched) between when the symbols are changing and when the symbols are stopped, the display mode will change frequently, which may confuse the player. Furthermore, if the frequency of switching the display mode increases, the processing load on the pachinko machine 10 may also increase.

Therefore, in this first control example, the display mode of the main display area Dm is made common between when symbols are being displayed in a variable manner and when they are being displayed in a static manner. This makes it possible to suppress frequent switching of the display mode, thereby preventing (suppressing) the player from becoming confused. Further, the processing load on the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

Furthermore, if 30 seconds have passed while the fluctuation is stopped in the potential state, the display mode is switched to a display mode in which the character 811 imitating a rabbit stands still (demonstration display for potential certainty). By switching the display mode, it is possible to easily recognize that the fluctuation stop state has continued for a long time (30 seconds or more). In addition, when 30 seconds have passed since the fluctuation stopped state in the potential state, by displaying a screen (a potential demo display) different from the customer waiting demo screen (see FIG. 186(b)), It can be easily recognized that the current gaming state is in a potential state. Therefore, for example, if a player who is playing a game in a latent state temporarily leaves the pachinko machine 10 due to a break or the like, the trouble of another player starting a game on the pachinko machine 10 can be prevented (suppressed). can do. The stable state is the most advantageous state in this pachinko machine 10, and it is difficult to imagine that a player would quit playing while in the stable state, so the player who was playing the game is only temporarily away from the game. This is because other players can be made to recognize this.

Furthermore, in the potential state in this first control example, the variation time of the second special symbol is extremely short, so if the customer waiting demonstration screen (see FIG. 187(b)) is displayed, the second input When a ball enters the ball opening 1640, if it takes time to switch the screen, there is a possibility that the variable time period ends before the effect associated with the ball entering is displayed. Therefore, even though the ball has entered the second ball entrance 1640, there is a possibility that the player may feel distrustful that the performance is not executed. On the other hand, in this control example, in place of the customer waiting demo screen (see FIG. 187(b)) in the potential state, the potential confirmation demo display (see FIG. 187(c)) in which the same character 811 as during fluctuation continues to be displayed Since the configuration is such that the display mode (presentation mode) can be smoothly switched when a ball entering the second ball entry port 1640 is detected. Therefore, it is possible to prevent players from feeling distrustful.

Next, with reference to FIG. 188(a), a description will be given of a potential state end screen that is displayed when the potential state ends. FIG. 188(a) is a diagram showing this potential state end screen. This probable state end screen is displayed when the remaining number of drawings in the probable state becomes 0.

As shown in FIG. 188(a), when the potential state end screen is displayed, the rabbit-like character 811 is shown falling down on the ground, and the text above the character 811 says, ``End, please return to left-handed batting.'' A display area 812 in which the characters "!" are displayed is displayed. This allows the player to easily recognize that the advantageous potential state has ended. Further, on the right side of the character 811, the words "Return to left-handed batting" are displayed. This display allows the player to more reliably return to left-handed hitting. In addition, this potential state end screen detects the entry of the ball into the first ball entry port 64 and starts the fluctuating display, or after the potential state ends, the first special symbol is in a state where the fluctuation is stopped. It will continue to be displayed until 30 seconds have passed. When either of these two conditions is met, a result screen is displayed that shows the prize balls acquired during the probability state and the total number of times the probability state continued. The details of this result screen will be explained with reference to FIG. 188(b).

FIG. 188(b) is a diagram showing an example of a result screen displayed after the potential state ends. As shown in FIG. 188(b), after the potential state ends, when the entry of the ball into the first ball entrance 64 is first detected and the display of the first special symbol is started, the fluctuation A result screen is displayed that shows the result of the potential state using time. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 188(b), the characters "456 GAME" are displayed as the number of times the potential state has continued (the number of special symbol drawings performed during the potential state), and the number of times the state has continued is displayed. Below the characters indicating ``10030 points earned!'' indicating the total number of prize balls paid out during the potential state are displayed. By displaying these characters, it is possible for the player to clearly understand how many times the potential state continues and how many prize balls he or she has won. Therefore, the player can play the game in the normal state without having doubts about the completed potential state. Furthermore, by displaying the result screen after each potential state ends, the player can play the game with the aim of achieving a better result in the next potential state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

In addition, the result of the potential state is not displayed during the potential state, but is displayed during the variation time of the first special symbol that is executed first after the potential state ends. This is because the fluctuation time of the second special symbol during the potential state is extremely short. Therefore, if a configuration is adopted in which the results of the potential state are displayed during the last variable display performed in the potential state, the results can only be displayed for an extremely short period of time. On the other hand, in this first control example, after the end of the potential state, the result of the potential state is displayed during the variable display of the first special symbol executed first, so the result of the potential state is displayed. Status results can be displayed for a sufficiently long time. Although the details will be described later, in this first control example, in order to more reliably confirm the result of the potential state to the player, two special symbol drawings are held after the end of the potential state. A fixed variable time (12 seconds) is set regardless of the lottery result of the first special symbol. With this configuration, the result display can be performed each time within a fixed variable time period, so that the player can confirm the result display more reliably.

In addition, if the entry of the ball into the first ball entry port 64 is not detected even after 30 seconds have passed after the end of the potential state (the fluctuating display of the first special symbol has not started), , the results are displayed instead of the customer waiting demo screen. The result display in this case continues to be displayed until the first ball entry into the first ball entry port 64 is detected and the variable display of the first special symbol is completed. Thereby, even a player who leaves the pachinko machine 10 for a break or the like immediately after the completion of the probable state can reliably confirm the result of the probable state.

In the first control example, the result is not displayed until the variable display of the first special symbol starts, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the result of the probable state may be displayed immediately after the probable state ends. Then, the display may be continued until the first variable display of the first special symbol is finished. By displaying the result immediately after the probable state ends, the player can immediately know the result of the ended probable state. Therefore, even if it takes time for the ball to enter the first ball entry port 64 after the player returns to hitting left-handed, the result of the potential state will not be displayed, causing stress to the player. It is possible to prevent (suppress) storage.

In addition, if you want to display the result of a certain state immediately after the certain state ends, a measuring means for measuring the period after the end of the certain state is provided, and the measuring means is used for a predetermined period (for example, 12 The result may be displayed until the time period (seconds) elapses. In this case, if the first special symbol starts to fluctuate before the predetermined period of time has elapsed, the result will continue to be displayed until the variation ends, and the first special symbol will begin to fluctuate after the predetermined period has elapsed. In this case, the configuration may be such that a normal display instead of a result display is performed during the variation.

Furthermore, if the variation of the first special symbol that displays a potential result is a winning result, the display mode of the result may be changed. For example, it is preferable to display on the normal result display screen shown in FIG. 188(b) as a suggestion indicating that you have won a prize, ``Obtained 10,030 points or more!!''. In this way, by displaying the result of determining whether the special symbol is correct or not using the result content in the probable state, it is possible to notify the player of the result display in the probable state and the result of determining whether the special symbol is correct or not without feeling any discomfort. . In addition, if you win a jackpot during the period when the result display in the probability state is being executed and you want to switch to the probability state again, it is configured so that the result content in the previous probability state is inherited and updated. good. Thereby, the player can be motivated to play the game during the period in which the result display in the probable state is being executed.

In addition, as a performance during the potential state, a period of one special symbol change or multiple special symbol fluctuations is used to display the same display screen as the result display screen in the potential state that is displayed after the end of the potential state. An effect in which a screen is displayed (pseudo end effect) may be used. This makes it possible to provide a surprising performance to the player, and also allows the player to remain in a certain state even if the certain state actually ends and a result display in a certain state is executed. You will be able to make yourself look forward to it.

Next, with reference to FIG. 189, a resurrection effect, which is a type of effect executed during the potential state, will be described. This revival performance is a performance that may be displayed when the remaining number of drawings in the potential state displayed in the remaining number display area D1 of the third symbol display device 81 becomes 0. More specifically, if the remaining number of drawings on the display becomes 0 in a state where the remaining number of actual potential states is 1 or more, the actual remaining number of drawings is added to the remaining number on the display. This is a performance to be displayed.

When this revival effect is executed, first, the remaining number of times displayed in the remaining number of times display area D1 becomes 0 and the remaining number of times displayed in the remaining number of times display area D1 is , an effect is performed in which a character 811 imitating a rabbit falls to the ground. Then, as shown in FIG. 189, the character 811, which had once fallen to the ground, stands up, and the word "revival" is displayed around the character 811. By performing this type of performance, it is possible to make the player aware that an advantageous potential state will continue, thereby making the player happy. In addition, as the character 811 stands up, the actual number of remaining potential states is displayed in addition to the remaining number of times display area D1. FIG. 189 illustrates a case where the actual remaining number of potential states remains 10, so the display in the remaining number display area D1 is updated to read "10 remaining".

In this way, in this first control example, if a jackpot occurs in the second special symbol lottery during the potential state and the remaining number of times in the potential state (actual remaining number of times) is updated to 120, the remaining number of times in the potential state is updated to 120. The remaining number of times displayed in the number of times display area D1 (remaining number of times on display) is not reset, and the normal display content is inherited. If there is a difference between the actual remaining number of times and the displayed number of remaining times, and the number of remaining times on the display becomes 0, the difference between the actual number of remaining times and the remaining number of times will be added and notified. It is configured to perform a performance. With this configuration, even when the remaining number of times on the display approaches 0, the game can be played with the expectation that the revival effect will be executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's interest in playing the game during the doubtful state.

Note that in this control example, the difference between the actual remaining number of potential states and the displayed remaining number of times in the resurrection performance is added and displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this. In the first resurrection performance, a value smaller than the difference is added and displayed, and once the resurrection performance is executed, the resurrection performance may be executed a plurality of times. As a result, when a resurrection effect is executed for the first time in the potential state of 1, even if the remaining number of times added by that resurrection effect ends, it is certain that another revival effect will be executed, so the next resurrection effect will be executed. The game can be played with peace of mind until the performance is performed. Furthermore, the player can enjoy playing the game to see how many times the revival performance will be performed. Further, when this revival effect is executed, it is preferable to execute a result display that is displayed when the potential state ends, and then execute the revival effect. Thereby, it is possible to provide a surprising performance to the player.

<About the electrical configuration in the first control example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 190 to 207. First, details of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4) provided in the pachinko machine 10 will be explained.

The main control device 110 executes the main processing of the pachinko machine 10, such as jackpot lottery, display settings on the first symbol display device 37 and third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results on the second symbol display device 83. The RAM 203 is provided with a counter buffer (see FIG. 190) that stores various counters for controlling these processes.

Here, with reference to FIG. 190, the counter etc. provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be explained. These counters and the like are operated by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in order to perform jackpot lottery, display settings of the first symbol display device 37 and third symbol display device 81, lottery of display results of the second symbol display device 83, etc. used in

To set the jackpot lottery and the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, select the first winning random number counter C1 used for the jackpot (and small win) lottery and the jackpot type (jackpot symbol). A first win type counter C2 used for the selection of the variation pattern, a fluctuation type counter CS1 used for selecting the fluctuation pattern, and a first initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting the initial value of the first win random number counter C1 are used. Further, the second winning random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the normal symbols (second symbol display device 83), and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4. Further, a small winning type counter C5 is used to select the small winning type. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

Each counter is updated, for example, at 2 millisecond intervals, which is the execution interval of timer interrupt processing (see Figure 208), and some counters are updated irregularly during main processing (see Figure 227). The updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. Although the details will be described later, the RAM 203 stores the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a in which each counter value is stored for winnings to the first ball entrance 64, and the counter values for winnings to the second ball entrance 1640 are stored. A second special symbol execution area 203b is provided. In this control example, the first ball entry port 64 is provided with up to four reserved balls. Therefore, if a ball enters the first ball entry hole 64 during a period when a special symbol can be drawn, such as when a special symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner or when a special symbol jackpot game is not in progress, each counter value will be changed to the first ball slot. 1 special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, and when a game ball enters the second ball entrance 1640, each counter value is stored in the second special symbol execution area 203b. Thereafter, each counter value stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is moved to the execution area provided in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, and the first special symbol is displayed in a dynamic manner. various settings and control processes for displaying the image (display) are executed. Further, each counter value stored in the second special symbol execution area 203b is used as it is for various settings and control processing for variably displaying the second special symbol.

On the other hand, the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 during a period in which the first special symbol cannot be drawn during a variable display of the first special symbol or during a jackpot game of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, In addition, when the number of reserved balls in the first ball entrance 64 is less than the upper limit value (four in this control example), each counter value is acquired and stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. be done. Furthermore, if the number of balls reserved for the first ball entry port 64 is equal to or greater than the upper limit (in this example, 4 balls), each counter value etc. is not acquired and the prize balls (in this example, 5 balls) are (a prize ball) is treated as an invalid ball that is paid out to the player. In addition, if the ball enters the second ball entrance 1640 during a period in which the second special symbol cannot be drawn during a fluctuating display of the second special symbol or during a jackpot game of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. In this case, each counter value, etc. is not acquired, and only the prize balls (in this embodiment, five prize balls) are treated as invalid balls that are paid out to the player.

In this control example, the upper limit of the number of reserved balls is set to four for the first ball entrance 64, but it is not limited to this, and may be less than four (for example, three), There may be more than four (for example, eight). Alternatively, a configuration may be adopted in which no upper limit is provided. In addition, in this control example, the configuration was such that the ball entering the second ball entry port 1640 (fluctuating display based on the lottery of the second special symbol) is not held, but it is possible to store the ball into the second ball entry port 64 similarly to the first ball entry port 64. may be configured.

Each counter will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 190. The first random number counter C1 is sequentially incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 479), and becomes 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 479 for a counter that can take values from 0 to 479). It is configured to return to . In particular, when the first winning random number counter C1 completes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first winning random number counter C1.

Further, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, if the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value from 0 to 479, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter that can take a value from 0 to 479. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once every time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 208) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 227).

The value of the first winning random number counter C1 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this control example), for example, at the timing when the ball enters the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 1640. The ball is stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol execution area 203b of the RAM 203. The random number value for the special symbol jackpot is defined in the first winning random number table 202a (see FIG. 192(a)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, and If the value matches the value of the random number that results in a jackpot defined in the first winning random number table 202a, it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot. Moreover, the value of the random number that becomes the small win of the special symbol is defined in the small win random number table 202b (see FIG. 192(b)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110.

Here, the first winning random number table 202a will be explained with reference to FIG. 192(a). The first winning random number table 202a is a table in which random numbers (judgment values) are set that are determined to be a win in each gaming state in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 192(a), when the gaming state is a low probability gaming state, the first winning random number counter C1 obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol It is determined whether the value of is either "7 or 8", and if it is either "7 or 8", it is determined that it is a jackpot. In addition, when the gaming state is a high probability gaming state, the value of the acquired first winning random number counter C1 is within the range of "0 to 5" in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. If it is within the range of "0 to 5", it is determined that it is a jackpot.

Next, the small winning random number table 202b will be explained with reference to FIG. 192(b). The small hit random number table 202b is a table in which a random number value (judgment value) that is determined to be a small win in a special symbol lottery is set. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 192(b), in the lottery of the first special symbol, the random number value that results in a small win is not specified. That is, the first special symbol lottery does not result in a small win. On the other hand, in the lottery for the second special symbol, it is determined whether the acquired value of the first winning random number counter C1 is within the range of "212 to 432", regardless of the gaming state, and If it is within the range, it is determined that it is a small hit.

Here, if the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol execution area 203b is a random number that results in a small hit, the first symbol The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the display device 37 is the one when the special symbol is a small hit.

On the other hand, if the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol execution area 203b is a random number that results in a special symbol jackpot, the The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the 1-symbol display device 37 is the one when the special symbol is a jackpot. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the jackpot is the display mode indicated by the value of the first win type counter C2 stored in the same execution area.

The first winning random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 479. As mentioned above, in the low probability state of the special symbol, there are two values of the first winning random number counter C1 that will be a jackpot of the special symbol, and the random numbers "7, 8" are the first winning random number counter C1 as described above. It is stored in the random number table 202a. Since the total number of random numbers that result in a jackpot is 2 among the total number of random numbers that are 480, the probability that the special symbol will become a jackpot is "1/240". On the other hand, in the high probability state of the special symbol, there are four values of the first winning random number counter C1 that will result in a jackpot of the special symbol, and the random numbers "0 to 5" are as described above in the first winning random number table. 202a. Since the total number of random numbers that result in a jackpot is 6 among the total number of random numbers that are 480, the probability that the special symbol will become a jackpot is "1/80".

Furthermore, as mentioned above, there are 221 values of the first winning random number counter C1 that are small wins in the lottery of the second special symbol, and the random values "212 to 432" are stored in the small winning random number table 202b. ing. In this way, the total number of random numbers is 480, and the total number of random numbers that result in a small win is 221, so the probability of a small win with the special symbol is "221/480" (approximately 46%).

Returning to FIG. 190, the explanation will be continued. The value of the first winning type counter C2 is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. Then, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot, the jackpot type is selected based on the value of the first win type counter C2 and the jackpot type selection table 202d (see FIG. 193(a)). becomes. More specifically, this will be described later with reference to FIG. 193(a).

The small hit type counter C5 is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. Then, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a small win, the small win type (small win A -C) will be selected. Specifically, this will be described later with reference to FIG. 193(b).

The variation type counter CS1 is configured such that it is incremented one by one within the range of 0 to 198, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (ie, 198). The variation type counter CS1 determines one variation pattern from the set variation pattern selection table. A fluctuation time (dynamic display period) is set in this fluctuation pattern, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 is also a counter that determines the fluctuation time. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once each time a main process (see FIG. 227) to be described later is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time within the main process. Incidentally, the variation pattern selection table 202f (see FIGS. 194 to 196) that stores a random value for determining one variation time of symbol variation from the value (random value) of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. It is located inside.

The variation pattern selection table 202f defines a plurality of data tables for selecting variation patterns (see FIGS. 194 to 196). In this variable pattern selection table 202f, a plurality of variable pattern selection tables are set according to the gaming state, and a variable pattern selection table is set for each of the success/failure determination results. Details of each variation pattern selection table will be described later with reference to FIGS. 194 to 196.

The second winning random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that sequentially increments by 1 within the range of 0 to 239, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (ie, 239). Further, when the second winning random number counter C4 completes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4. In this control example, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is updated periodically, for example, every timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 208), and when the ball passes through the normal starting gate (through gate) 67 on either the left or right side. When this is detected, it is acquired and stored in the second symbol holding ball execution area of the RAM 203.

The random number value for a normal symbol win is defined in the second win random number table 202c (see FIG. 192(c)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller, and the value of the second win random number counter C4. If it matches the random number value defined in the second winning random number table 202c, it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) has won. The details of this second winning random number table 202c will be explained with reference to FIG. 192(c).

FIG. 192(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the second winning random number table 202c. In this second winning random number table 202c, when the probability of a normal symbol is low (during the normal state of a normal symbol), there are 231 random numbers that result in a win for a normal symbol, and the range is "0 to 230". . Since the total number of random numbers that can be taken by the second winning random number counter C4 is 240, the total number of random numbers that will be a win is 231, so the probability that the normal symbol will be a hit is "231/240".

On the other hand, when the probability of the normal symbol is high (during the time saving state of the normal symbol), there are 232 random numbers for winning the normal symbol, and the range is "0 to 231". Since the total number of random numbers that can be taken by the second winning random number counter C4 is 240, the total number of random numbers that become a win is 232, so the probability of a normal symbol winning is "232/240". In this way, in this control example, the random number value for winning the normal symbol differs by only one between the low probability state of the normal symbol and the high probability state of the normal symbol, so the probability of winning is almost the same. There is. Further, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol and the opening time of the electric accessory 1640a attached to the second ball entrance 1640 when the normal symbol hits are also the same. Therefore, the ease of entering the ball into the second ball entrance 1640 is the same in the low probability state of the normal symbol and the high probability state of the normal symbol. However, in the pachinko machine 10 in this control example, as described above, the variation time of the second special symbol in the normal state and the variable probability state is extremely long (600 seconds) compared to the variation time in the probability state. As a result, in the normal state and variable probability state, it is more difficult to draw the second special symbol than in the probability state. can be made to do so.

When the ball passes through the normal starting port 67, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is acquired, and a variable display of normal symbols is executed on the second symbol display device 83 for 3 seconds. Then, in the low probability state of the normal symbol, if the acquired value of the second winning random number counter C4 is within the range of "0 to 230", it is determined to be a win, and the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 ends. After that, the "O" symbol is displayed as a stop symbol (second symbol), and the second ball entry port 1640 is opened only "twice for one second." On the other hand, in the high probability state of the normal symbol, if the acquired value of the second winning random number counter C4 is in the range of "0 to 231", it is determined that it is a win, and the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 ends. Afterwards, the symbol "○" is displayed as a stop symbol (second symbol) by lighting up, and the second ball entry port 1640 is opened only "twice for one second." In addition, in this control example, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, the opening time of the normal electric accessory, and the number of openings may be changed as appropriate within a range that does not impair the gameplay.

The common figure variation type counter CS2 is configured as a loop counter that increments by 1 in the range of 0 to 198, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (ie, 198). When a game ball passes through the first through gate 66 or the second through gate 67, a normal pattern fluctuation pattern table 202g is used to select a normal symbol fluctuation pattern based on the value of the normal pattern fluctuation type counter CS2. (See FIG. 197) is defined in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. The details of this ordinary pattern fluctuation pattern table 202g will be described later with reference to FIG. 197.

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 208). At the same time, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 227).

In this way, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters, etc., and the main controller 110 controls the jackpot lottery and the display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 according to the values of the counters, etc. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of display results on the second symbol display device 83 can be executed.

Next, the contents of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in this control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 191 to 197. FIG. 191 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in this control example. The ROM 202 includes, in addition to the above-mentioned first random number table 202a, small winning random number table 202b, and second winning random number table 202c, a jackpot type selection table 202d, a small winning type selection table 202e, and a fluctuation pattern selection table. At least a table 202f and a regular figure variation pattern selection table 202g are provided.

First, details of the jackpot type selection table 202d will be explained with reference to FIG. 193(a). The jackpot type selection table 202d (see FIG. 193(a)) is a data table in which judgment values for determining the jackpot type are stored for each special symbol type, and the judgment value of the first winning type counter C2 is , are defined in association with each jackpot type. In the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, when it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot, the value of the first winning type counter C2 acquired based on the starting winning is compared with the jackpot type selection table 202d, and the first winning The jackpot type corresponding to the value of the type counter C2 is selected.

As shown in FIG. 193(a), for the first special symbol, the value of the first winning type counter C2 in the range of "0 to 31" is associated with "jackpot A" and defined. . This "Jackpot A" has 15 rounds, and the opening/closing pattern of the opening/closing plate 65f1 is such that it can (easily) pass through the V passing switch 65e3 in the first round of the jackpot (see FIG. 180(c)). is set. Out of the 100 counter values that the first winning type counter C2 can take, there are 32 counter values that become "Jackpot A", so when a jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, "Jackpot A" is determined. The percentage of respondents who are eligible is 32% (32/100).

In addition, in the case of "Jackpot A", whether or not the time saving state of the normal symbol is given depends on the gaming state at the time when "Jackpot A" was won and whether the V passing switch 65e3 was passed during the jackpot. It depends on whether or not. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 193(a), if the jackpot A occurs in the normal state and the variable probability state, and the ball passes through the V passage switch 65e3 during the jackpot, then when the jackpot ends A number of time saving times of 120 times is set. On the other hand, in other cases (if you do not pass the V passing switch e3 during a jackpot, or if you hit a jackpot in a potential state and pass the V passing switch 65e3 during a jackpot), the number of time reductions is not set. (set to 0 times). Therefore, when a "jackpot A" occurs in a normal state or a variable probability state, in most cases, the ball passes through the V passing switch 65e3 during the jackpot, so that the variable probability number of 120 times and the number of time saving times of 120 times are set, After hitting the jackpot, the gaming state becomes a certain state. On the other hand, when it becomes "Jackpot A" in the potential state, the ball passes through the V passing switch 65e3 during the jackpot, and the number of probability changes (and the time saving number of 0 times) is set to 120, and the game state after the jackpot. becomes a latent state. On the other hand, if the ball does not pass through the V passage switch 65e3 due to the player not hitting the ball during a jackpot, etc., the normal state, which is the most disadvantageous to the player, is set as the gaming state after the jackpot. Ru.

"Jackpot A" is one of the jackpot types with the largest number of rounds, so it is advantageous in terms of the number of prize balls that can be won, but in the normal state and probability variable state, basically the game state after the jackpot is a probability variable state. is set (no advantageous potential state is given), the player is at a disadvantage in terms of the gaming state after winning the jackpot. On the other hand, when a jackpot A occurs in the probability state, the probability state basically loops even after the jackpot ends, so in the probability state, it is a type of jackpot that is most advantageous for the player.

The value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "32 to 80", and "Jackpot B" is defined in association with it. This "Jackpot B" has 7 rounds, and the opening/closing pattern of the opening/closing plate 65f1 is such that it can (easily) pass through the V passage switch 65e3 in the first round of the jackpot (see FIG. 180(c)). is set. Further, after the end of "Jackpot B", the time saving state is not granted (the number of time saving times is set to 0). Therefore, after the end of "Jackpot B", a potential state (120 probability changes, 0 time saving times) is basically set. Out of the 100 counter values that the first winning type counter C2 can take, there are 48 counter values that become "Jackpot B", so when a jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, "Jackpot B" is determined. The percentage of respondents who are eligible is 48% (48/100).

“Jackpot B” is one of the jackpot types with the least number of rounds, so it is disadvantageous in terms of the number of prize balls that can be won, but if you hit the ball toward the variable winning device 65 during the jackpot (right-handed hit) ), the player will enter a potential state that is advantageous regardless of the gaming state, which will be advantageous in terms of the gaming state. In addition, if the ball does not pass through the V passing switch 65e3 during a jackpot due to not hitting the ball during the jackpot, etc., the gaming state after the jackpot will be set to the normal state regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning. .

The value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "81 to 90", and "Jackpot C" is defined in association with it. This "jackpot C" has 7 rounds, and the opening/closing pattern of the opening/closing plate 65f1 is set to an opening/closing pattern (see FIG. 180(b)) that makes it difficult to pass the V passing switch 65e3 in the first round of the jackpot. Ru. Further, after the end of "Jackpot C", the time saving state is not granted (the number of time saving times is set to 0). Therefore, after the end of "Jackpot C", the normal state is basically set (0 times as probability variation number and time saving number). Out of the 100 counter values that the first winning type counter C2 can take, there are 10 counter values that will be "jackpot C", so if a jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, "jackpot C" will be determined. The ratio is 10% (10/100).

“Jackpot C” is the most disadvantageous jackpot type for players because it has the least number of rounds and is basically set to the most disadvantageous normal state after the jackpot ends, regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning. be. Although the possibility is low, if the ball can be won into the specific winning hole 65a during the short time that the specific winning hole 65a is opened, the ball will pass through the V passing switch 65e3. In this case, the most advantageous potential state is set after the jackpot.

The value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "80 to 99", and "Jackpot D" is defined in association with it. This "Jackpot D" has 15 rounds, and the opening/closing pattern of the opening/closing plate 65f1 is such that it can (easily) pass through the V passage switch 65e3 in the first round of the jackpot (see FIG. 180(c)). is set. Further, after the end of "Jackpot D", the time saving state is not granted (the number of time saving times is set to 0). Therefore, after the end of "Jackpot D", a potential state (120 probability changes, 0 time saving times) is basically set. Out of the 100 counter values that the first winning type counter C2 can take, there are 10 counter values that will be a "jackpot D", so if a jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, a "jackpot D" will be determined. The ratio is 10% (10/100).

"Jackpot D" has the highest number of rounds and is basically the most advantageous potential state after the jackpot ends, regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning, so it is the most advantageous jackpot type for the player. one of. In addition, if the ball does not pass the V passing switch 65e3 during a jackpot due to not hitting the ball during the jackpot, etc., the gaming state after the jackpot will be set to the normal state regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning. .

On the other hand, as the type of jackpot based on the lottery of the second special symbol, "jackpot E" is defined in association with the value of the first winning type counter C2 in the range of "0 to 79". This "Jackpot E" has 7 rounds, and the opening/closing pattern of the opening/closing plate 65f1 is such that it can (easily) pass through the V passage switch 65e3 in the first round of the jackpot (see FIG. 180(c)). is set. Moreover, the number of time saving times is set under the same conditions as "Jackpot A". In other words, if it becomes a "jackpot E" in the normal state or the variable probability state, and the ball passes through the V passing switch 65e3 during the jackpot, the time saving number of 120 times is set, and the gaming state after the jackpot becomes the variable probability state. . Also, if you win "Jackpot E" in a potential state and the ball passes through the V passing switch 65e3 during the jackpot, the time saving number is set to 0, so the gaming state after the jackpot becomes a potential state. becomes (loop through the potential state). Furthermore, if the ball does not pass the V passage switch 65e3 during a jackpot, the time saving number is set to 0 regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning, so the gaming state after the jackpot becomes the normal state. Out of the 100 counter values that the first winning type counter C2 can take, there are 80 counter values that will be a "jackpot E", so when a jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, a "jackpot E" will be determined. The ratio is 80% (80/100).

This "Jackpot E" has the smallest number of rounds among the six jackpot types, so it is at a disadvantage in terms of the number of prize balls. On the other hand, the lottery for the second special symbol is basically held in the potential state, and if it becomes "Jackpot E" in the potential state, the potential state will basically loop even after the jackpot, so the game state after the jackpot will be is advantageous to the player.

In addition, the configuration in which it becomes "jackpot E" in the normal state or variable probability state and shifts to the variable probability state when the ball passes through the V passing switch 65e3 is an irregularity in which the ball is always hit to the right even in the normal state or variable probability state. This is in order to suppress illegal gaming methods. In other words, even if a jackpot E occurs in the normal state or the variable probability state, if the probability state is set after the jackpot, the player will not be able to enter the normal state or the probability state in the hope of transitioning to an advantageous probability state. Even in the variable probability state, there is a possibility that the player may perform an irregular gaming method of executing the lottery of the second special symbol (playing the game to the right). Therefore, in this control example, if the second special symbol becomes a jackpot (jackpot E to G) in the normal state or variable probability state, and the ball passes through the V passage switch 65e3 during the jackpot, the game state after the jackpot is changed to the variable probability state. is configured so that it is set. As a result, it is possible to eliminate the advantage of drawing the second special symbol in the normal state or in the variable probability state, so it is possible to prevent (suppress) an irregular gaming method in which the player always hits to the right.

The range in which the value of the first winning type counter C2 is "80 to 95" is associated with "Jackpot F" and defined. This "Jackpot F" has 15 rounds, and the opening/closing pattern of the opening/closing plate 65f1 is such that it can (easily) pass through the V passing switch 65e3 in the first round of the jackpot (see FIG. 180(c)). is set. Further, the number of time saving times is set under the same conditions as "Jackpot A" and "Jackpot E". That is, if "Jackpot F" is won in the normal state or the variable probability state, and the ball passes the V passing switch 65e3 during the jackpot, the time saving number of 120 times is set. On the other hand, in other cases, the number of time saving times is not set (set to 0 times). Out of the 100 counter values that the first winning type counter C2 can take, there are 15 counter values that become "Jackpot F", so when a jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, "Jackpot F" is determined. The ratio of 15% (15/100) is 15% (15/100).

Although this "Jackpot F" has a large number of rounds, the opening/closing pattern of the opening/closing plate 65f1 in each round other than the first round is different from other jackpot types. More specifically, in the 2nd to 15th rounds of "Jackpot F", an opening/closing pattern (special opening/closing pattern) is set in which the opening/closing plate 65f1 is opened only for a maximum of 0.06 seconds. Since it is difficult to make the ball enter the special winning hole 65a within 0.06 seconds, it is difficult to win the prize ball in the 2nd to 15th rounds of "Jackpot F". In this way, the reason why the special opening/closing pattern is set in the case of "Jackpot F" is that if the opening/closing plate 65f1 is opened in the potential state, it is a small hit or "Jackpot F". This is to make it ambiguous. Details will be described later, but the small win in this control example is small win A in which the opening/closing plate 65f1 is opened only once for a relatively long time (1.648 seconds), and small win A in which the opening/closing plate 65f1 is opened only once for a relatively long time (1.648 seconds). Small wins B and C are provided in which the opening action is repeated multiple times. Therefore, by setting a special opening/closing pattern when a "big hit F" occurs, it is possible to make the operation of the opening/closing plate 65f1 similar to that when a small win A occurs and then a small win B or a small win C occurs. can. As a result, it is difficult to discern whether the 120-time probability state has been reset due to a "jackpot F" during the probability state, or whether the number of successive small wins has been subtracted. Can be done. Therefore, it is necessary to check whether the number of remaining potential states on the display matches the actual remaining number of times (whether the potential state ends when the remaining number of times on the display reaches 0). Since it is difficult to distinguish from the appearance, when the remaining number of times on the display approaches 0, a revival effect (see Figure 189) will be performed and the remaining number of times on the display will be displayed in addition to the number of times remaining when playing the game. You can make it happen. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's interest in playing the game while in the tentative state.

The value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "95 to 99", and "Jackpot G" is defined in association with it. This "Jackpot G" has 15 rounds, and the opening/closing pattern of the opening/closing plate 65f1 is such that it can (easily) pass through the V passage switch 65e3 in the first round of the jackpot (see FIG. 180(c)). is set. Further, the number of time savings is set under the same conditions as "Jackpot A", "Jackpot E", and "Jackpot F". That is, if a "jackpot G" is won in the normal state or variable probability state, and the ball passes through the V passage switch 65e3 during the jackpot, the time saving number of 120 times is set. On the other hand, in other cases, the number of time reductions is not set (set to 0 times). Out of the 100 counter values that the first winning type counter C2 can take, there are 5 counter values that become "Jackpot G", so when the first special symbol lottery results in a jackpot, "Jackpot G" is determined. The proportion of these cases is 5% (5/100).

This "Jackpot G" has the largest number of rounds among the six jackpot types, so it is advantageous in terms of the number of prize balls. In addition, the lottery for the second special symbol is basically held in a potential state, and if it becomes "Jackpot G" in a potential state, the potential state will basically loop even after the jackpot, so the gaming state after the jackpot will be This is also advantageous to the player.

In this way, in this control example, if you hit left in the normal state or variable probability state and get a jackpot in the lottery of the first special symbol, the probability state is advantageous at a rate of 58% (jackpot B, D). It is configured to move to Then, when a right hit is made in a potential state and a jackpot is achieved in the lottery of the second special symbol, an advantageous potential state is looped at a rate of 100% (jackpot E to G). Therefore, once the potential state (the special symbol's variable probability state and the normal symbol's normal state) is set, by hitting the right ball into the second entrance 1640, the second special symbol is drawn. A state that is easy to execute and has a high jackpot probability and a jackpot of the second special symbol are likely to be repeated. Therefore, the player can be made to play the game with one purpose of shifting to the probable state, and thus the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Next, details of the small winning type selection table 202e will be explained with reference to FIG. 193(b). This small winning type selection table 202e is a data table that is referred to in order to determine the type of small winning when a small winning occurs in the first special symbol lottery. In this small win type selection table 202e, a corresponding small win type is defined for each value range of the small win type counter C5.

As shown in FIG. 193(b), "small win A" is defined in association with the value of the small win type counter C5 in the range of "0 to 93". This "small win A" is a small win type in which the opening/closing plate 65f1 of the variable winning device 65 is set to the open state only once for 1.648 seconds during the small win game. Out of the 100 random numbers that the small hit type counter C5 can take, there are 94 random numbers that result in a "small win A", so when a small win occurs in the lottery of the second special symbol, it is a "small win A". is determined at a rate of 94% (94/100).

Furthermore, "small win B" is defined in association with the value of the small win type counter C5 in the range of "94 to 98". This "small win B" is a small win type in which the opening/closing plate 65f1 is set to the open state for 0.06 seconds x 6 times during the small win game. Out of the 100 random numbers that the small hit type counter C5 can take, there are 5 random numbers that will be "small win B", so if the second special symbol lottery results in a small win, it will be "small win B". The rate at which this is determined is 5% (5/100).

Furthermore, the value "99" of the small win type counter C5 is defined in association with "small win C". This "small win C" is a small win type in which the opening/closing plate 65f1 is set to the open state 0.06 seconds x 8 times during the small win game. Out of the 100 random numbers that the small win type counter C5 can take, there is only one random number that will be a "small win C", so if a small win occurs in the special symbol lottery, it will be a "small win C". The ratio is 1% (1/100).

In this way, in this control example, a small winning game in which the opening/closing plate 65f1 performs the opening/closing operation one or more times is executed in response to a small winning in the special symbol lottery. Thereby, when the opening/closing plate 65f1 performs an opening/closing operation in the potential state, it is difficult to determine whether the opening/closing operation is due to winning a jackpot or winning a small hit. I can do it. Therefore, even if the lottery of the second special symbol executed during the potential state has never resulted in a jackpot, the revival effect will be performed when the remaining number of times in the potential state on the display approaches 0. can be expected. In addition, in this control example, when the second special symbol is drawn, the percentage of small wins is about 46%. For this reason, in the 120 special symbol drawings set as a probability state, the small win will be won approximately 55 times. Therefore, since the opening/closing plate 65f1 is frequently opened and closed during the probability state, it is difficult for the player to distinguish between a big win and a small win.

Next, details of the variation pattern selection table 202f will be described with reference to FIGS. 194 to 196. As described above, in this variation pattern selection table 202f, a random number value for determining the variation pattern (variation time) of the variation display is defined from the value (random number value) of the variation type counter CS1.

As shown in FIG. 194, the variation pattern selection table 202f includes a normal table A 202f1 and a normal table B 202f2 for determining a variation pattern (variation time) in a normal state, and a normal table B 202f2 for determining a variation pattern in a probability variable state. It includes at least a table for probability variation 202f3 and a table for probability variation 202f4 for determining a variation pattern in a probability state. The specific contents of these tables will be explained with reference to FIGS. 195 and 196. Note that in each of the tables shown in FIGS. 195 and 196, the variation time is expressed in milliseconds, but in the following explanation, the variation time is expressed in seconds for easy understanding.

First, the normal table A202f1 will be described with reference to FIG. 195. This normal table A is a table that is referred to when the gaming state is the normal state and a special symbol lottery is executed other than twice immediately after the end of the latent probability variable state. FIG. 195 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of this normal table A202f1. As shown in FIG. 195, the normal table A202f1 includes a random value (a counter of the fluctuation type counter value CS1) for determining the type of fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) for each special symbol type and special symbol stop type. value) is specified.

Specifically, the fluctuation pattern determined when a jackpot is achieved in the lottery of the first special symbol is that the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 50" and is associated with normal reach (20 seconds), Super reach A (30 seconds) is associated with the range "51-100", super reach B (30 seconds) is associated with the range "101-150", and super reach is associated with the range "151-198". C (30 seconds) is associated.

On the other hand, if the first special symbol is out of the lottery and this normal table A202f1 is referred to, the correspondence between the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the selected fluctuation pattern is variable according to the number of reserved balls. do. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 195, when the number of reserved pitches is within the range of 0 or 1, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is outside the range of "0 to 70" (10 seconds). A variation pattern of ``71 to 150'' is associated with a normal reach (20 seconds). Additionally, as the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, super reach A (30 seconds) is associated with the value in the range of "151 to 170", and super reach B (30 seconds) is associated with the value in the range of "171 to 198". It is being

On the other hand, when the number of balls on hold is 2 or 3, a short fluctuation pattern (8 seconds) is associated with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 in the range of "0 to 70", and the fluctuation type As the value of the counter CS1, a variation pattern of out-of-reach (10 seconds) is associated with a range of "71 to 150", and a variation pattern of out-of-reach (20 seconds) is associated with a range of "151 to 170". In addition, as the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, super reach A (30 seconds) is associated with the range of "171 to 185", and super reach B (30 seconds) is associated with the range of "185 to 198". It is being Note that the process of selecting the variation pattern of the first special symbol by referring to the normal table A202f1 (see S307 of S210) is faster than the process of subtracting the reserved balls of the first special symbol (see S303 of FIG. 210). Executed later. Therefore, the normal table A202f is never referred to when there are four reserved balls.

In this way, when the number of balls on hold is small (0 or 1), a variation pattern with a long variation time is more likely to be selected than when the number of balls on hold is large (2 or 3). With this configuration, when the number of reserved balls is small, it is possible to secure time to store the reserved balls and make it difficult for the variable display to be interrupted. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from getting bored with the game. On the other hand, when there are many balls on hold, the fluctuation time becomes short and it becomes difficult to accumulate balls, so when the number of balls on hold reaches the upper limit (4), balls are sent to the first ball entrance 64. It is possible to prevent (suppress) the ball from entering the ball. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel that he has lost money.

On the other hand, when the second special symbol lottery is executed and the normal table A202f1 is referred to, 600 seconds (10 minutes) is set as the variable time regardless of the lottery result. That is, when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a jackpot, the long winning variation A (600 seconds) is associated with the entire range (0 to 198) of the values that the variation type counter CS1 can take, If the lottery result of the second special symbol is a small win, a small win long variation A (600 seconds) is associated with the entire range (0 to 198) of the values that the variation type counter CS1 can take, When the lottery result of the second special symbol is a loss, the long fluctuation A (600 seconds) is associated with the entire range (0 to 198) of the possible values of the fluctuation type counter CS1. As a result, when the player plays right-handed in the normal state and the lottery of the second special symbol is executed, a variable time of 600 seconds is set each time, so the gaming efficiency is much worse than when the game is played left-handed. With this configuration, it is possible to suppress an irregular gaming method in which the player normally plays right-handed.

Next, details of the normal table B202f2 will be explained with reference to FIG. 196(a). This normal table B202f2 is a table that is referred to only when the gaming state is the normal state and the number of drawings of special symbols is within 2 after the potential state ends.

As shown in FIG. 196(a), when this normal table B202f2 is referred to, the same variable time is set regardless of the lottery result of the first special symbol or the number of reserved balls. Specifically, when the lottery result of the first special symbol is a jackpot, the variation after the winning ST (12 seconds) is associated with the entire range of values (0 to 198) that the variation type counter CS1 can take. ing. In addition, when the lottery result of the first special symbol is a loss, the fluctuation after the loss ST (12 seconds) is associated with the entire range of values (0 to 198) that the fluctuation type counter CS1 can take. Therefore, if the first or second special symbol lottery after the end of the potential state is the first special symbol lottery, a variable time of 12 seconds is set regardless of the lottery result. Note that during this 12 seconds, the above-mentioned result display in the potential state (see FIG. 188(b)) is configured. By selecting a fixed variable time, it is possible to secure sufficient time to display the results. Therefore, it is possible to allow the player to sufficiently confirm the result of the potential state.

Further, as shown in FIG. 196(a), for the lottery of the second special symbol, a variable time of 600 seconds is set regardless of the lottery result, similarly to the normal table A202f1. Since the contents are the same as the normal table A202f1 described above with reference to FIG. 195, detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

In addition, after the completion of the detection, the variable time of 12 seconds is set not only for the first special symbol lottery but also when the second special symbol lottery is the first special symbol lottery. This is because a ball may enter the second ball entry port 1640 between the end of the potential state and the time when the ball returns to left-handed batting, and the second special symbol lottery may be executed first. . If, as in this control example, the variable time is set to 12 seconds even in the second special symbol drawing after the end of the guess, even if the variable display of the second special symbol is started first, After that, by executing the first special symbol lottery, it is possible to set a variable time of 12 seconds, so regardless of whether or not the first special symbol lottery was executed first, the The result can be displayed for the same amount of time after the potential state ends. Further, in the potential state, it is possible that the first special symbol lottery is not executed and the second special symbol lottery is executed twice in a row. However, as mentioned above, if the fluctuation stop state of the first special symbol continues for 30 seconds or more after the potential state ends (that is, if the main fluctuation has not started for 30 seconds), the result display will be performed. It is structured as follows. Therefore, in this case as well, the results can be displayed for a sufficiently long time.

In addition, the result of the potential state is not displayed during the potential state, but is displayed during the variation time of the first special symbol that is executed first after the potential state ends. This is because the fluctuation time of the second special symbol during the potential state is extremely short. Therefore, if a configuration is adopted in which the results of the potential state are displayed during the last variable display performed in the potential state, the results can only be displayed for an extremely short period of time. On the other hand, in this first control example, after the end of the potential state, the result of the potential state is displayed during the variable display of the first special symbol executed first, so the result of the potential state is displayed. Status results can be displayed for a sufficiently long time. Although the details will be described later, in this first control example, in order to more reliably confirm the result of the potential state to the player, two special symbol drawings are held after the end of the potential state. A fixed variable time (12 seconds) is set regardless of the lottery result of the first special symbol. With this configuration, the result display can be performed each time within a fixed variable time period, so that the player can confirm the result display more reliably.

In addition, in this control example, a fixed variable time (12 seconds) is set regardless of the lottery result of the first special symbol, but the display content of the result display to be executed is It may be set based on the lottery result of the special symbol. For example, if the lottery result of the first special symbol is a win, a display suggesting a win may be performed in addition to the display contents of the result display. In addition, even if the lottery result of the second special symbol whose result display is executed based on the variation of the first special symbol is a win, the variation is executed simultaneously (in parallel) with the variation of the first special symbol. In addition to the display content of the result display executed based on the variation of the first special symbol, a display suggesting a win may be executed. With this configuration, it is possible to display game results in a potential state and special symbol lottery results in an easy-to-understand manner for the player.

In addition, in this control example, if the variation of the first special symbol is executed twice in a row after the potential state ends, the result display is executed only for the first variation, In the second variation, a variation display is performed based on the special symbol lottery results. Thereby, it is possible to suppress a situation in which a game result in a potential state is excessively displayed and a variable display based on a lottery result of a special symbol is not executed.

In addition, the probability variation table 202f3 has almost the same configuration as the normal table A202f1, so it will be briefly explained, but if the first special symbol is a jackpot in the lottery, it will be the same as the normal table A202f1. Each variation pattern (hit normal reach, winning super reach A to C) is selected based on the selection ratio. Further, even when the second special symbol lottery is executed, a variable time of 600 seconds is set regardless of the lottery result, as in the normal state. On the other hand, if the first special symbol is out of the lottery, a variation pattern with a shorter variation time compared to the normal state is more likely to be selected. This is because the probability of winning a jackpot increases in a variable probability state, so if a fluctuation pattern with a long fluctuation time occurs frequently despite a miss, there is a risk of making the player feel uncomfortable. Therefore, in this first control example, when the first special symbol is out of lottery during a state of variable probability, a variation pattern with a short variation time is more likely to be selected, and a variation pattern with a long variation time is selected. The configuration is such that the player is more likely to expect a jackpot if the selection is made.

Next, details of the potential confirmation table 202f4 will be explained with reference to FIG. 196(b). This probability table 202f4 is a table that is referred to in order to select a variation pattern corresponding to a lottery result when a special symbol lottery is executed in a probability state.

As shown in FIG. 196(b), the jackpot of the first special symbol is defined by associating the middle hit fluctuation (60 seconds) with the entire range of values (0 to 198) that the fluctuation type counter CS1 can take. has been done. In addition, for the first special symbol to be missed, a super short variation A (0.5 seconds) is defined in association with the entire range of values (0 to 198) that the variation type counter CS1 can take.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 196(b), when the second special symbol hits the jackpot, there is a very short variation (0.5 seconds) for the entire range of values (0 to 198) that the variation type counter CS1 can take. are defined in association with each other, and for the small win of the second special symbol, a small hit super short variation (0.5 seconds) is associated with the entire range of values (0 to 198) that the variation type counter CS1 can take. The deviation of the second special symbol is defined in association with the deviation super short fluctuation (0.5 seconds) for the entire range of values that the fluctuation type counter CS1 can take (0 to 198). . That is, when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed in the probability state, the variable time of 0.5 seconds is set regardless of the lottery result.

In the potential state, the second special symbol is basically drawn, so the fluctuation time is approximately 0.5 seconds. Therefore, by hitting right in an advantageous potential state, the game can be played efficiently (speedily). Also, even if the first special symbol is drawn out in a potential state, 0.5 seconds is selected as the variation time, so for example, if one or more first special symbols are pending, When entering a potential state, the reserved balls of the first special symbol can be quickly consumed. Therefore, the player can play the game while concentrating on the variable display of the second special symbol, which is the main variation in the probability state.

The reason for setting a relatively long fluctuation time (60 seconds) is that when the first special symbol is a jackpot in the probability state, if the first special symbol is a jackpot in the probability state, This is because the potential state may end. Specifically, when a jackpot C occurs in the potential state, an opening/closing pattern is set for the opening/closing plate 65f1 that makes it difficult for the ball to pass through the V passage switch 65e3 (see FIG. 180(b)), so basically it is a jackpot. The gaming state after the game ends becomes the normal state. If such a situation occurs, there is a risk that the player's motivation for playing the game may be reduced. Therefore, in this control example, by setting a relatively long fluctuation time when a jackpot is achieved in the lottery of the first special symbol, by performing a right hit during the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol, the second special symbol is It is configured so that the lottery of symbols can be executed multiple times. As mentioned above, in the second special symbol lottery, a small win is won approximately once every two times (approximately 46%), so the second special symbol is drawn before the first special symbol's jackpot fluctuation ends. It is possible to terminate small winning fluctuations with high probability. As described above, this control example employs a simultaneous variation method that allows the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol to be executed in parallel. In addition, if the fluctuating display of one special symbol is confirmed as a jackpot or small win stop symbol during simultaneous fluctuations, the fluctuating display of the other special symbol will be changed during the remaining fluctuation time or the lottery at the start of the fluctuation. Regardless of the result, a missed stop symbol will force a stop. Therefore, even if the first special symbol is in the middle of a jackpot change, the small win stop symbol is displayed as confirmed by the second special symbol's small win fluctuation, so that the jackpot of the first special symbol can be discarded. can. As a result, it is possible to prevent (suppress) with a high probability that the jackpot of the first special symbol that may end the potential state is started, so that the player can enjoy the potential state more reliably. You can do it.

In addition, in this control example, 0.5 seconds is selected as the variation time of the second special symbol set corresponding to the probability state, but if the probability is small (for example, "1/199") ) may be configured such that a long variation time (for example, 12 seconds) is selected. Furthermore, when the long variable time is selected, a result display indicating the game result in the potential state described above (actually, the game result during the potential state game) is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It is a good idea to make it visible. As a result, it is possible to perform a performance that makes the player think that the potential state has ended during the potential state, and it is possible to provide a surprising performance to the player, which has the effect of increasing the performance effect. There is.

Next, details of the normal pattern fluctuation pattern table 202g will be explained with reference to FIG. 197. As described above, the normal symbol fluctuation pattern table 202g is a table that is referred to in order to select a normal symbol fluctuation pattern when a normal symbol lottery is executed. As shown in FIG. 197, the normal pattern fluctuation pattern table 202g includes the value range of the normal pattern fluctuation type counter CS2 and the fluctuation pattern (variation time) for each gaming state at the time when the normal symbol lottery is executed. are defined in association with each other.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 197, when the gaming state is the normal state, the fluctuation time is 3 seconds for the entire range of values (0 to 198) that the normal pattern fluctuation type counter CS2 can take. Variation patterns are associated. Similarly, when the gaming state is in the variable probability state, a variation pattern with a variation time of 3 seconds is associated with the entire range of values (0 to 198) that the normal pattern variation type counter CS2 can take.

On the other hand, when the gaming state is in the definite state, a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 3 seconds is associated with the value of the normal pattern fluctuation type counter CS2 in the range of "0 to 190", and the normal pattern fluctuation type counter A variation pattern with a variation time of 1 second is associated with the range of CS2 values from 191 to 198. When a normal symbol lottery is executed in the probability state, by varying the fluctuation time of the normal symbols, the time from the execution of the normal symbol lottery until the electric accessory 1640a is released can be predicted. It can be made difficult. Therefore, if a ball is launched one by one to the first through gate 66, the second first through gate 66, or the second through gate 67, and the ball passes through any of the through gates, the symbol will normally be hit. It is possible to suppress an irregular game method in which the ball is hit by predicting the timing when the electric accessory 1640a will be released when the ball is released, and it is possible to have the player continuously hit the ball to the right while in a potential state.

In the first control example, a plurality of variation patterns are provided only in the case of the potential state, but the present invention is not limited to this. Even in the normal state and the variable state, the variation pattern (variation time) of the normal symbol may have variations.

In addition, in this control example, when a normal symbol lottery is executed in a potential state, one of two types of variation time, 1 second or 3 seconds, is set as the variation time, but there are two types of variation time. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration may be adopted in which more variable times can be selected. The more variation there is in the variation time, the more difficult it becomes for the player to predict the variation time, so it is possible to have the player perform consecutive right-handed hits more reliably during the probability state.

Furthermore, in this control example, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set based on the gaming state and the value of the acquired ordinary symbol fluctuation type counter CS2, but in addition to that, the variation time of the normal symbol is set based on the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol. It is also possible to use a configuration in which the fluctuation time is changed based on the number of drawings of the special symbol, a configuration in which the fluctuation time is changed based on the number of drawings of the special symbol, or a configuration in which the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set by a method that combines the various configurations described above. Specifically, 1 second is set as the normal symbol fluctuation time from when the gaming state shifts to the potential state until the special symbol lottery is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times), and after that (51 (up to 120 times) may be configured such that 3 seconds is set as the fluctuation time of the normal symbol. Also, while the even-numbered special symbol lottery is being executed after the gaming state shifts to the potential state, 1 second is set as the normal symbol fluctuation time, and otherwise (odd-numbered times), It may be configured such that 3 seconds is set as the normal symbol variation time. In this way, by configuring the fluctuation time of the normal symbol to be changed based on the number of times the special symbol lottery is executed, it becomes difficult for the player to predict the fluctuation time, so that You can make him hit right-handed consecutively. In addition, in this case, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol may be longer when the special symbol lottery is not being executed (longer than when the special symbol lottery is being executed), or the fluctuation time of the special symbol may be longer. It may be configured such that the smaller the number of stored drawings, the longer the fluctuation time of the normal symbols.

Further, when setting the fluctuation time of the normal symbol based on the number of reserved balls of the regular symbol, it is preferable to configure such that the larger the number of reserved balls of the regular symbol, the easier it is to select a long fluctuation time. By configuring in this way, the pachinko machine 10 that is adjusted to make it difficult to accumulate the number of reserved balls for normal symbols and the pachinko machine 10 that is adjusted to make it easier to accumulate the number of reserved balls for normal symbols, It is possible to equalize the number of normal symbol drawings.

Next, details of the RAM 203 will be explained with reference to FIG. 198. FIG. 198 is a block diagram showing the configuration of RAM 203 of main controller 110. As shown in FIG. 198, the RAM 203 includes a first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, a second special symbol execution area 203b, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c, a first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d, a normal symbol reserved ball Number counter 203e, V winning flag 203f, time saving counter 203g, winning counter 203h, special map 1 standby flag 203i, special map 2 standby flag 203j, probability variable counter 203k, jackpot flag 203m, winning state storage area 203n, small win It has at least a flag 203o, a special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203p, a look-ahead pending storage area 203r, a special figure 1 fluctuation timer 203s, a special figure 2 fluctuation timer 203t, a medium-big hit flag 203u, a medium-small hit flag 203v, and other memory areas 203z. ing.

The first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a has one execution area (first special symbol execution area) and four holding areas (first holding area to fourth holding area). Each value of a first winning random number counter C1, a first winning type counter C2, a small winning type counter C5, and a fluctuation type counter CS1 are respectively stored in the area.

More specifically, at the timing when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 (starting winning), the value of each counter is acquired, and the acquired data is divided into four holding areas (from the first holding area to the holding area). Among the vacant areas of the fourth area), the areas are stored in order from the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, the area with the smaller area number stores the data corresponding to the oldest winning in terms of time, and the data corresponding to the oldest winning in terms of time is stored in the first pending area. Note that if data is stored in all four reservation areas, nothing new is stored.

After that, in the main control device 110, when a special symbol lottery is performed, each value of each counter C1 to C3 stored in the first reserved area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is changed to the execution area. Based on the values of the respective counters C1 to C3 stored in the execution area, a determination such as a special symbol lottery is performed.

Note that when data is shifted from the first pending area to the execution area, the first pending area becomes vacant. Therefore, a shift process is performed to move the winning data stored in other holding areas (holding area 2 to holding area 4) to holding areas (holding area 1 to holding area 3) with one lower area number. It will be done. In this control example, in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, data is shifted only for holding areas (second holding area to fourth holding area) in which winning data is stored.

The second special symbol execution area 203b stores a determination value (counter value) for executing the special symbol lottery, similar to the first special symbol execution area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. In this second special symbol execution area 203b, each counter value acquired at the timing when the starting winning to the second ball entrance 1640 is detected is stored.

The normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c, like the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, has one execution area (normal symbol holding ball execution area) and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). ). A second winning random number counter C4 is stored in each of these areas.

More specifically, at the timing when the ball passes through either the first through gate 66 or the second through gate 67, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is acquired, and the acquired data is divided into four Among the vacant areas of the reservation area (first reservation area to fourth reservation area), the areas are stored in order from the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, similar to the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, data corresponding to the winnings are stored while the winning order is maintained. Note that if data is stored in all four reservation areas, nothing new is stored.

After that, in the main control device 110, when a winning lottery of normal symbols is performed, the value of the counter C4 stored in the first reservation area of the normal symbol reservation ball storage area 203c is shifted to the execution area ( Based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area, a determination is made as to whether the normal symbol is a hit or not.

In addition, when data is shifted from the first holding area to the execution area, the first holding area becomes vacant, so the data is stored in another holding area as in the case of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. Shift processing is performed to shift the winning data to a holding area with an area number one smaller. Further, data shifting is also performed only for the reservation area in which winning data is stored.

The first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d displays a variable display of special symbols (first symbol display device 37, This is a counter that counts the number of pending balls (number of times of standby) of the variable display performed on the third symbol display device 81 up to four times. The initial value of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d is set to zero, and each time a ball enters the first ball entry port 64 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, the maximum value is 4. is incremented by 1 (see S1504 in FIG. 222). On the other hand, the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 each time a new special symbol variable display is executed (see S303 in FIG. 210).

The value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of pending balls N1 of the variable display in the first special symbol) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the reserved ball number command (S304 in FIG. 210, S304 in FIG. 222). (See S1505). The reserved ball number command is a command sent from the main controller 110 to the audio lamp control device 113 every time the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is changed.

The audio lamp control device 113 controls the fluctuation display held in the main control device 110 by the held ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 every time the value of the first special symbol held ball counter 203d is changed. The value of the number of reserved pitches itself can be obtained. As a result, the number of pending balls in the variable display managed by the first special symbol pending ball counter 223c of the audio lamp control device 113 is changed from the actual number of pending balls in the variable display held in the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise etc. Even if there is a deviation from the pitch count, the deviation can be corrected by the next received held pitch count command.

The audio lamp control device 113 manages the number of balls on hold based on the number of balls on hold command, and displays the number of balls on display for notifying the display control device 114 of the number of balls on hold each time the number of balls on hold changes. Send pitch count command. The display control device 114 displays the number of reserved balls symbol on the third symbol display device 81 based on the number of reserved pitches notified by this display number of reserved pitches command.

The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is the reserved ball of the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) performed on the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the ball through the first through gate 66 or the second through gate 67. This is a counter that counts the number of times (the number of times of waiting) up to a maximum of four times. The initial value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e (the number of reserved times M of variable display in the normal symbol) is set to zero, and the ball passes through the first through gate 66 or the second through gate 67. Each time the number of reserved pitches in the variable display increases, 1 is added up to the maximum value of 4 (see S1704 in FIG. 224). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is decremented by 1 each time a new normal symbol (second symbol) is displayed in a variable manner (see S1605 in FIG. 223).

When the ball passes through the first through gate 66 or the second through gate 67, if the value of this normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e (the number of reserved balls M of variable display in the normal symbol) is less than 4, the second through gate 66 or the second through gate 67 The value of the winning random number counter C4 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c (see S1705 in FIG. 224). On the other hand, when the ball passes through the first through gate 66 or the second through gate 67, if the value of this normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is 4, there is no new one in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c. It is not stored (see S1703: No in FIG. 224).

The V winning flag 203f is a flag indicating whether or not to shift the gaming state after the jackpot game to a variable probability state. In this pachinko machine 10, whether or not the game state is set to the variable probability state is determined by whether or not a ball passes through the V passing switch 65e3 (see FIG. 179(b)) during the jackpot game. Here, when the ball passes through this V passing switch 65e3, the V winning flag 203f is set to ON (see S2410 in FIG. 231). On the other hand, this V winning flag 203f is set to OFF at the end of the jackpot (see S2307 in FIG. 230). Note that this V winning flag 203f is backed up when the power is turned off, and when the power is restored (when the power is turned on), it is set to the state immediately before the power was turned off. Further, when the pachinko machine 10 is initialized, it is set to off.

In addition, if the V winning flag 203f is set to ON when the power is turned on, it is determined whether the V passing switch 65e3 has passed before the power is turned off, and if it is determined that the V passing switch 65e3 has passed before the power is turned off, the V winning flag is set to ON. The configuration may be such that the flag 203f is officially set to ON and the process returns. In this case, it can be determined whether the V passing switch 65e3 has been passed before the power is turned off by checking whether a variable passing counter 203i, which will be described later, has a value larger than 0. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce damage to the gaming parlor side by identifying fraud such as rewriting only the V winning flag 203f to ON and then turning the power back on while the power is turned off. can.

The time saving counter 203g is a counter for counting the number of changes in the remaining special symbols in the time saving state. This time saving counter 203g is set to 120 when one of the jackpots A, E to G is won in the normal state or the variable probability state and the V winning flag 203f is on at the end of the jackpot game. Further, the time saving counter 203g is decremented by 1 in the game state update process executed immediately after setting the start of the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol (see S607 in FIG. 213). When drawing a normal symbol, if the value of this time saving counter 203g is 1 or more, it is determined that the normal symbol is in a time saving state, and the validity of the normal symbol is determined by referring to the table for high probability times. (See S1610 in FIG. 223). On the other hand, if the value of the time saving counter 203g is 0, it is determined that the normal state is a normal symbol, and a determination of the validity of the normal symbol is executed with reference to the table for low probability times (see S1611 in FIG. 223).

The winning counter 203h is a counter that counts the number of balls that have won (balls entered) into the specific winning hole 65a in each round of the jackpot. When the value of this winning counter 203h reaches the upper limit value of 5, it is determined that the round ending condition is satisfied and the round ends (see S2406 in FIG. 231). In each round of the jackpot, even if the value of the winning counter 203h is less than 5, the round ends if the round period set for each round is reached. This winning counter 203h has a value incremented by 1 every time a ball entering the specific winning hole 65a is detected during the validity period of the jackpot round. Also, the value is reset to 0 at the end of each round.

The special symbol 1 standby flag 203i is a flag indicating whether or not the first special symbol is in a non-fluctuating state. If this special figure 1 standby flag 203i is on, it indicates that the first special symbol is in a state where fluctuation is stopped, and if it is off, it indicates that the first special symbol is fluctuating or the first special symbol is on hold. This means the state immediately before starting variable display based on the sphere. This special figure 1 standby flag 203i is set to ON when the first special symbol is not changing and the number of reserved balls is 0 (see S311 in FIG. 210). On the other hand, when the start of variation of the first special symbol is set, it is set to off (see S309 in FIG. 210).

The special figure 2 standby flag 203j is a flag indicating whether or not the second special symbol is in a non-fluctuating state. If this special figure 1 standby flag 203j is on, it shows that the second special symbol is in a state where the fluctuation is stopped, and if it is off, it means that the second special symbol is in the fluctuating state. This special figure 2 standby flag 203j is set to ON when the second special symbol is not changing and no starting winning for the second ball entrance 1640 is detected (see S809 in FIG. 215). On the other hand, when the start of variation of the second special symbol is set, it is set to OFF (see S807 in FIG. 215).

The probability variation counter 203k is a counter that indicates whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol probability variation state (special symbol high probability state). If the value of this probability variation counter 203k is 1 or more, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a probability variation state with a special symbol, and if the value of the probability variation counter 203k is 0, the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state with a special symbol (special symbol). Indicates that the symbol is in a low probability state).

The initial value of the probability change counter 203k is set to 0, and when a ball passes through the V passage switch 65e3 during a jackpot, the probability change counter 203k is set to 120 at the end of the jackpot (see S2304 in FIG. 230). In addition, in the game state update process (see FIG. 213) that is executed immediately after setting the start of the variable display of the first special symbol or the start of the variable display of the second special symbol, the value is subtracted by 1 (see FIG. 213). (See S602). Further, the value of the probability change counter 203k is reset to 0 when a jackpot game is started (see S708 in FIG. 214 and S1309 in FIG. 220). This probability change counter 203k is referenced in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 211) and the second special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 216) to determine whether or not the special symbol is in a probability variable state. (See S402 in FIG. 211 and S902 in FIG. 216).

The jackpot flag 203m indicates that the value of the first winning random number counter C1 obtained based on the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 1640 is determined to match the jackpot determination value at the start of fluctuation. (See S406 in FIG. 211 and S906 in FIG. 216). This jackpot flag 203m is set to OFF when setting the display of a stop symbol corresponding to a jackpot (see S708 in FIG. 214 and S1309 in FIG. 220). A 2-bit storage area is allocated to this jackpot flag 203m, and the upper bit stores information corresponding to the first special symbol and the lower bit stores information corresponding to the second special symbol. More specifically, if the jackpot flag 203m is "10B", this indicates that the lottery of the first special symbol has resulted in a jackpot, and that the lottery result is being displayed in a variable manner. On the other hand, if the jackpot flag 203m is "01B", this indicates that the lottery of the second special symbol has resulted in a jackpot, and that the lottery result is being displayed in a variable manner. On the other hand, if the jackpot flag 203m is "00B", it indicates that the jackpot fluctuation is not executed.

When this jackpot flag 203m is on and the variable time of the variable display of the special symbol corresponding to the on state ends, a process is executed to forcibly stop the other special symbol as a missed symbol (S705 in FIG. 214, FIG. 220 (See S1306). Thereby, it is possible to prevent a problem in which one of the first special symbols and the second special symbol becomes a big hit or a small hit while the other one is executing a big hit.

The winning state storage area 203n is a storage area for storing information indicating the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot. Specifically, if the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is the normal state (if the values of the time saving counter 203g and the probability change counter 203k are both 0), the normal state is shown in the winning state storage area 203n. "00H" is stored as information. On the other hand, if the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is a variable probability state (if the values of the time saving counter 203g and the probability variable counter 203k are both 1 or more), information indicating the variable probability state is stored in the winning state storage area 203n. "01H" is stored. Furthermore, if the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is a potential state (if the value of the time saving counter 203g is 0 and the value of the probability change counter 203k is 1 or more), the potential is stored in the winning state storage area 203n. "02H" is stored as information indicating the reliable state.

The information stored in this winning state storage area 203n is held until the end of the jackpot, and is referenced when setting a time-saving game after the jackpot ends (see S2301 in FIG. 230). As mentioned above, if a jackpot A, E to G occurs and the ball passes through the V passing switch 65e3 during the jackpot, the gaming state after the jackpot will be different depending on whether the gaming state at the time of winning is a potential state or not. It's set. In this control example, information corresponding to the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is stored in this winning state storage area 203n, and by referring to it when the jackpot ends, information corresponding to the jackpot type and the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is stored. Appropriate gaming conditions can be set.

The small hit flag 203o is turned on when it is determined that the value of the first winning random number counter C1 obtained based on the ball entering the second ball entrance 1640 matches the small hit determination value at the start of fluctuation. This is a flag to be set (see S1002 in FIG. 217). This small hit flag 203o is set to OFF when setting the display of the stop symbol corresponding to the small win (see S1405 in FIG. 220). When the variable time of the variable display of the second special symbol ends while the small hit flag 203o is on, a process is executed to forcibly stop the other special symbol at the missed symbol (see S1403 in FIG. 221). As a result, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the occurrence of a problem in which a jackpot occurs in the lottery of the first special symbol while a small prize of the second special symbol is being executed, and the jackpot starts during the minor prize. can.

The special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203p is a flag indicating that the period is from when the fluctuation of the first special symbol is stopped (determined display) with the jackpot stop symbol until the jackpot starts. When this special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203p is set to on, even if a new ball enters the second ball entrance 1640, execution of the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is avoided. (See S801: Yes in FIG. 215). This special symbol 2 fluctuation stop flag 203p is set to ON when the 2nd special symbol is forcibly stopped by a missed symbol (see S703 in FIG. 214), and avoids the process for executing the fluctuation display of the 2nd special symbol. If so, it is set to off (S811 in FIG. 215).

The pre-read pending storage area 203r is a storage area for storing the prediction result when the special symbol lottery result is predicted before the timing when the original special symbol lottery is performed. In the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, immediately after a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 (starting winning) and each counter value is acquired, each of the acquired special symbols is From the counter value, various information that would be obtained if the original lottery was held is predicted (estimated). In this way, predicting various information that would be obtained when the original lottery is held before the original special symbol lottery is performed is hereinafter referred to as "pre-reading". The pre-reading pending storage area 203r stores the pre-reading results based on the counter values at the timing when each counter value is acquired based on the starting winning for the first ball entrance 64 (the result of judging whether the special symbol lottery is correct or not, in the case of a jackpot) jackpot type and fluctuation pattern) are stored. In addition, the pre-read pending storage area 203r can store the same number of pre-read results as the number of reserved pitches (ie, up to 4).

The special figure 1 variation timer 203s and the special figure 2 variation timer 203t are timers for measuring the variation time of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, respectively, and are timers for measuring the variation time of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. When a variation pattern is selected, a variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set. Based on the timing results of the special figure 1 variable timer 203s and the special figure 2 variable timer 203t, it is determined whether the variable time of each special symbol has ended (see S701 in FIG. 214 and S1301 in FIG. 220).

The jackpot flag 203u is a flag indicating whether or not it is a jackpot. If this jackpot flag 203u is on, it shows that the pachinko machine 10 is hitting a jackpot, and if it is off, it shows that it is not hitting a jackpot. This jackpot flag 203u is set to ON when the start of a jackpot is set (see S709 in FIG. 214 and S1310 in FIG. 220). On the other hand, it is set to off during the jackpot end process executed at the end of the jackpot (see S2307 in FIG. 230).

The small hit flag 203v is a flag indicating whether or not there is a small win. If this small winning flag 203v is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is making a small winning, and if it is off, it indicates that the small winning is not occurring. This flag 203v during a small win is set to ON when the start of a small win is set (see S1406 in FIG. 221). On the other hand, it is set to off at the end of the small win (see S2512 in FIG. 232).

The other memory area 203z is an area for temporarily storing other counter values used by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110.

In this way, the pachinko machine 10 of the first control example is provided with various flags, counters, and the like. Based on various tables provided in the ROM 202 and flags, counters, etc. provided in the RAM 203, the basic functions of the pachinko machine 10 and the novel state transition shown in FIG. 181 can be realized.

Next, details of the electrical configuration of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 199 and 200. FIG. 199(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 provided in the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. As shown in FIG. 199(a), the ROM 222 includes at least a variation pattern selection table 222a and a screen display selection table 222b.

In the fluctuation pattern selection table 222a, the audio lamp control device 113 selects, based on the fluctuation pattern command output from the main control device 110, the rough fluctuation contents (fluctuation time, fluctuation type (reach, miss, etc.) indicated by the fluctuation pattern command). ) is used to determine the details of the variable display to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. This makes it possible to determine even more diverse variations. Here, one variation mode among a plurality of types is determined by lottery for the rough variation content instructed by the main controller 110. The above-mentioned special reach effect (see FIGS. 184 and 185) is also defined in this variation pattern selection table 222a, and the variation content indicated by the variation pattern command is a hit super reach A or a miss super reach A. selected in some cases.

The screen display selection table 222b is a table that defines display contents when 30 seconds have passed since the first special symbol or the second special symbol stopped changing. As described above, in this control example, a simultaneous fluctuation method is adopted, and even if one special symbol is in a state where fluctuation is stopped, a situation frequently occurs in which the other special symbol is fluctuating. Further, depending on the game state, the variable display of the first special symbol becomes the main variation, or the variable display of the second special symbol becomes the main variation, and the special symbol that should attract the attention of the player is switched. This screen display selection table 222b is referred to in order to appropriately display the fluctuation display of the main symbol in each game state, and to set a demonstration display corresponding to the game state in a state where the main fluctuation is stopped. Details of this screen display selection table 222b will be explained with reference to FIG. 200.

FIG. 200 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the screen display selection table 222b. As shown in FIG. 200, this screen display selection table 222b matches the combination of the game state, the state of the special figure 1 standby flag 223s, and the state of the special figure 2 standby flag 223t, and Display contents (screen display type) to be displayed on screen 81 are defined. In addition, the special figure 1 standby flag 223s and the special figure 2 standby flag 223t indicate whether a predetermined time (30 seconds) has elapsed since the first special symbol and the second special symbol stopped changing. This is a flag to indicate. Each flag indicates that a predetermined time has elapsed when it is on, and when it is off, it indicates that a variable display is in progress based on the lottery result of the corresponding special symbol, or that a predetermined time ( 30 seconds).

As shown in FIG. 200, when the gaming state is the normal state or the variable probability state, the display contents (screen display type ) is normally displayed. In this normal display, the third symbol indicating the lottery result of the first special symbol and the third symbol indicating the lottery result of the second special symbol are displayed in a normal manner in a normal state (see FIG. 182(b)). This is the display content. In the normal state, the main variation is the variation display based on the lottery result of the first special symbol, so by setting it to the normal display, the main variation can be reliably displayed.

In the normal state or the variable probability state, a demonstration display is associated with a combination in which the special figure 1 standby flag 223s is on and the special figure 2 standby flag 223t is off. When this demonstration display is determined, a customer waiting demonstration screen (see FIGS. 186(b) and 186(c)) is set. After 30 seconds have passed after the main variation of the first special symbol has finished, the system will switch to the demo display (customer waiting demo screen) regardless of whether or not the secondary variation is in progress. Therefore, even if the player enters the ball into the second ball entrance 1640 and quits the game immediately after the 600-second variable display starts, the player will be able to enter the ball after the predetermined time (30 seconds) has elapsed. can display a customer waiting demo screen. Therefore, other players who have checked the customer waiting demonstration screen can easily understand that the pachinko machine 10 is empty, and can therefore start playing games on the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 from decreasing.

In the normal state or the variable probability state, a demonstration display is also associated with a combination in which both the special figure 1 standby flag 223s and the special figure 2 standby flag 223t are off. Therefore, a customer waiting demonstration screen (see FIGS. 186(b) and 186(c)) is also set in this case. This allows other players who have checked the customer waiting demo screen to easily understand that the pachinko machine 10 is empty.

On the other hand, when the gaming state is a potential state, a special display is associated with a combination in which the special figure 1 standby flag 223s is off and the special figure 2 standby flag 223t is on. This special display means the above-mentioned demonstration display for confirmation (see FIG. 187(c)), and a special mode of demonstration display is set in which the same character 811 as that during fluctuation continues to be displayed. Thereby, when a ball entering the second ball entry port 1640 is subsequently detected, the display mode (performance mode) can be smoothly switched. Note that a special display is also set in the case of a combination in which the special figure 1 standby flag 223s and the special figure 2 standby flag 223t are both turned on. In other words, regardless of the situation of the first special symbol corresponding to the sub-variation in the potential state, if 30 seconds or more have passed since the second special symbol corresponding to the main variation has stopped fluctuating, the special display will not be displayed. Set.

In the potential state, a normal display is associated with a combination in which the special figure 1 standby flag 223s is on and the special figure 2 standby flag 223t is off. Therefore, in the potential state, even if 30 seconds or more have elapsed since the first special symbol entered the fluctuation stop state, the fluctuation display or stop display corresponding to the lottery result of the second special symbol continues to be displayed as usual.

Next, with reference to FIG. 199, the RAM 223 in the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 199 is a block diagram showing the contents of RAM 223. The RAM 223 includes a command storage area 223a, a winning information storage area 223b, a first special symbol reserved ball counter 223c, a special symbol 1 variation start flag 223d, a special symbol 2 variation start flag 223e, and a special symbol 1 stop flag. Type selection flag 223f, special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223g, production counter 223h, status setting area 223i, sub special figure 1 standby flag 223j, special figure 1 standby counter 223k, sub special figure 2 Standby flag 223m, special figure 2 standby counter 223n, remaining probability variable number area 223o, production probability variable number area 223p, remaining time short number area 223q, special figure 1 standby flag 223s, special figure 2 standby flag 223t At least a memory area 223z and a memory area 223z are provided.

The command storage area 223a is an area where various commands output from the main control device 110 to the audio lamp control device 113 are temporarily stored until processing for the commands is executed. Specifically, it is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written using a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 238) of the audio lamp control device 113 is executed, the first stored command is read out of the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area 223a, and the command is read out by the command determination process. , the command is analyzed, and processing is performed according to the command.

The winning information storage area 223a has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area), and winning information is stored in each of these areas. In this pachinko machine 10, when the main controller 110 detects a starting winning for the first ball entrance 64, the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, which are acquired according to the starting winning, From each value of the small hit type counter C5 and the fluctuation type counter CS1, various information (win or failure, jackpot type in the case of a jackpot, fluctuation pattern) obtained when a special symbol lottery corresponding to the starting prize is drawn is obtained. It is predicted (estimated) in the main control device 110, and the predicted various information is notified from the main control device 110 to the audio lamp control device 113 by a winning information command.

When the winning information command is received, the audio lamp control device 113 extracts various information notified by the winning information command (win/fail, jackpot type in the case of jackpot, fluctuation pattern) as winning information, and extracts the winning information. is stored in the winning information storage area 223a. More specifically, the extracted winning information is stored in the four vacant areas (1st to 4th areas) in order from the area with the smallest area number (1st to 4th). be done. In other words, the area with the smaller area number stores the data corresponding to the oldest winning in time, and the first area stores the data corresponding to the oldest winning in time.

The first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c is a variable presentation (variable display) of the first special symbol performed on the first symbol display device 37 (and third symbol display device 81), and is reserved in the main controller 110. This is a counter that counts the number of pending balls (number of times of standby) of the variable performance of the first special symbol being played up to a maximum of four times for each type of special symbol.

As described above, the audio lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 and acquire the value of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the number of reserved balls command transmitted from the main controller 110, and the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c calculates the number of reserved balls as a special symbol. They are managed by type.

Specifically, in the main control device 110, when the number of pending balls in the variable display is added due to the ball entering the first ball entrance 64, or when the main control device 110 executes the variable display in the special symbol. When the number of reserved balls is subtracted, a number of reserved balls command indicating the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d after addition or subtraction is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the held ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, it acquires the value of the first special symbol held ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 from the held ball number command. , is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c (see S4310 in FIG. 238). In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c according to the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110, so the first special symbol of the main controller 110 The value can be updated while being synchronized with the value of the reserved pitch counter 203d.

The value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c is used to display the reserved ball number symbol on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in response to receiving the number of reserved balls command, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of reserved balls indicated by the command in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c, and also stores the number of reserved balls indicated by the command in the first special symbol reserved number counter 223c. In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of the pitch number counter 223c, a command for the number of reserved pitches for display is transmitted to the display control device 114.

When the display control device 114 receives this command for the number of reserved balls for display, the value of the number of reserved balls indicated by the command, that is, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c of the audio lamp control device 113 is reserved. The drawing of the image is controlled so that the ball count pattern is displayed in the sub-display area Ds of the third pattern display device 81. As described above, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c is changed in synchronization with the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110. Therefore, the number of reserved ball number symbols displayed in the sub-display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed while being synchronized with the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110. can. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of pending balls whose variable display is pending.

The special figure 1 variation start flag 223d and the special figure 2 variation start flag 223e are set respectively when the first special symbol variation pattern command and the second special symbol variation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110 are received. It is turned on (see S4304 and S4307 in FIG. 238), and turned off when the variable display setting in the third symbol display device 81 is made (see S4702 and S4706 in FIG. 243). When the special figure 1 variation start flag 223d and the special figure 2 variation start flag 223e are turned on, a display variation pattern command is set based on the variation pattern extracted from the received variation pattern command.

The display variation pattern command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and is executed during the command output process (S4102) of the main process (see FIG. 236) executed by the MPU 221. The information is transmitted to the display control device 114. In the display control device 114, by receiving this display variation pattern command, the third symbol is displayed in a variable manner on the third symbol display device 81 using the variation pattern indicated by this display variation pattern command. Display control of the variable effect is started.

The special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223f and the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223g are set when the first special symbol stop type command and the second special symbol stop type command transmitted from the main controller 110 are received. (see S4401 in FIG. 239), and is turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81 (see S4710 in FIG. 243). When the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223f or the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223g is turned on, the stop type is set based on the stop type extracted from the received stop type command (in the case of a jackpot, the jackpot type). It is determined.

The effect counter 223h is a counter used for selecting a variation pattern, selecting various effects, and the like. This performance counter 223h is composed of a 1-byte loop counter that is updated in the range of 0 to 198, and is updated by adding 1 each time the main process (see FIG. 236) is executed. be done.

The status setting area 223i is a storage area in which information corresponding to the gaming status of the pachinko machine 10 is stored. Each time a status command output from the main controller 110 is received, the status setting area 223i is updated with information corresponding to the status of the pachinko machine 10 indicated by the status command (S4011 in FIG. 235, (See S4506 of 240). More specifically, a 2-bit storage area is allocated to the state setting area 223i, and in order from the high-order bit, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is in the variable probability state, and whether it is the time-saving state of the normal symbol. The indicated value is stored. For example, if the value of the state setting area 223i is "11B", it means that the special symbol is in a variable probability state and the normal symbol is in a short time state (i.e., a variable probability state), and if it is "10B", it is a special symbol. This means that the symbol is in a variable probability state and the normal symbol is in a normal state (that is, a potential state). On the other hand, "00H" means a normal state.

By updating the status setting area 223i according to status commands output from the main controller 110, the audio lamp controller 113 can accurately grasp the status of the pachinko machine 10.

The sub-special figure 1 standby flag 223j and the sub-special figure 2 standby flag 223m are flags each indicating whether or not the first special symbol and the second special symbol are in a fluctuation stop state. If these flags are on, it means that the corresponding special symbol is in a stopped state of fluctuation, and if it is off, it means that it is fluctuating. These are updated in synchronization with the states of the special figure 1 standby flag 203i and the special figure 2 standby flag 203j of the main controller 110.

The special figure 1 standby counter 223k and the special figure 2 standby counter 223n are counters for counting the elapsed time since the first special symbol and the second special symbol have stopped changing, respectively. When the count value corresponding to the special symbol that is the main fluctuation in the current game state among the special symbol 1 standby counter 223k and the special symbol 2 standby counter 223n becomes a value corresponding to 30 seconds, the game starts. A demonstration performance is set according to the state (see S4211 in FIG. 237).

The remaining probability variation number area 223o and the remaining time shortening number area 223q are storage areas that store the remaining number of probability variation states of special symbols and time saving states of normal symbols, respectively. The remaining probability variation number area 223o and remaining time shortening number area 223q are notified by the remaining probability variation number command and remaining time shortening number command, which are output each time the values of the probability variation counter 203k and time saving counter 203g are updated in the main controller 110, respectively. (See S4652 and S4662 in FIG. 242). Thereby, the values stored in the remaining probability variable number area 223o and the remaining time saving number area 223q can be updated in synchronization with the values of the probability variation counter 203k and time saving counter 203g of the main controller 110, so that the voice lamp control device The remaining number of probability variations and the number of time reductions grasped by the controller 113 can be made to match the actual number of probability variations and the number of time reductions updated by the main controller 110.

The production probability variable number area 223p is a storage area for storing an estimate of the remaining number of times of the probability state displayed in the remaining number display area D1 of the third symbol display device 81 in the probability state. In this performance probability variation number area 223p, 120 is set when the state shifts from another gaming state to the probability state (see S4505 in FIG. 240). In addition, the value is subtracted by 1 each time the special symbol is changed in the potential state (see S4657 in FIG. 242).

The special figure 1 standby flag 223s and the special figure 2 standby flag 223t are flags that indicate whether the fluctuation stop state of the first special symbol and the second special symbol continues for 30 seconds or more, respectively, and if it is on, Indicates that the corresponding special symbol is in a non-fluctuating state for 30 seconds or more. On the other hand, if it is off, it indicates that the corresponding special symbol is in the process of changing or that it has been within 3 seconds since the change has stopped. These special figure 1 standby flag 223s and special figure 2 standby flag 223t are turned on when the count values of the special figure 1 standby counter 223k and the special figure 2 standby counter 223n respectively reach a value corresponding to 30 seconds. is set (see S4204 and S4208 in FIG. 237).

The standby setting flag 223u is activated when 30 seconds have elapsed since the first special symbol or the second special symbol stopped changing, and the demonstration effect is activated with reference to the screen display selection table 222b (see FIG. 200). This is a flag indicating whether or not a screen display such as (see FIGS. 186(b), (c), and 187(c)) is set. This standby setting completed flag 223u is set to ON when a new screen display is set by referring to the screen display selection table 223b during the customer waiting production process (see FIG. 237) (see S4212 in FIG. 237). ). Also, when the special figure 1 standby flag 223s or the special figure 2 standby flag 223t is newly set to ON (see S4204 and S4208 in FIG. 237), the special figure 1 standby flag 223s or the special figure 2 standby flag When the standby flag 223t is newly set to OFF, the standby set flag 223u is set to OFF.

The power outage flag 223y is a flag used to determine whether there has been a momentary power outage. This power-off flag 223y receives a power-off command from the main controller 110 and is set to on before the power-off process is executed (see S4115 in FIG. 236). After that, since the RAM 223 is a volatile memory, all information in the RAM 223 disappears after a certain period of time (100 milliseconds) has elapsed. Therefore, in the start-up process of the audio lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 235), if the power-off flag 223y is on (see 1508: Yes in FIG. 42), the power-off flag 223y is set to on and then remains constant. This is the case when the audio lamp control device 113 starts up before the time (100 milliseconds) has elapsed, that is, when there is a momentary power outage. In this case, all the information in the RAM 223 has not been deleted, and unnecessary information (or information that is incomplete because only a part of the information has been deleted) remains in the work area of the RAM 223. In some cases, the information in the work area of the RAM 223 is cleared (see S4009 in FIG. 235). This prevents processes from being executed based on unnecessary (or incomplete) information, so each process of the audio lamp control device 113 can operate normally.

The other memory area 223z is provided as an area for storing data other than the data mentioned above, and is an area for temporarily storing other counter values used by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113.

Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 201. FIG. 201 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

The output side of the audio lamp control device 113 is connected to the input side of the input port 238, and the MPU 231, work RAM 233, character ROM 234, and image controller 237 are connected to the output side of the input port 238 via a bus line 240. . The image controller 237 is connected to a resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236, and is also connected to an output port 239 via a bus line 241. Further, a third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

Note that even if the pachinko machine 10 is of a different model with a different lottery probability of a special symbol jackpot or a different number of prize balls paid out in one special symbol jackpot, the symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 Since there are models with exactly the same configuration and specifications, the display control device 114 is made into a common component and costs are reduced.

Below, the MPU 231, character ROM 234, image controller 237, resident video RAM 235, and normal video RAM 236 will be explained first, and then the work RAM 233 will be explained.

First, the MPU 231 controls the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the audio lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 has a built-in instruction pointer 231a, reads and fetches the instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is configured so that a system reset can be applied from the power supply 115 immediately after power is turned on (including power restoration from a power outage; the same applies hereinafter), and when the system reset is canceled, the instruction pointer 231a is automatically set to "0000H" by the hardware of the MPU 231. Each time an instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. Further, when the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the value of the pointer specified by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

Although the details will be described later, in this embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are stored in a dedicated program ROM as in conventional gaming machines. Instead of being stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Although the details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is constituted by a NAND flash memory 234a that can achieve a large capacity with a small area. This makes it possible to sufficiently store not only image data but also control programs and the like. If the control program and the like are stored in the character ROM 234, there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, manufacturing costs can be reduced, and an increase in the failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, NAND flash memories generally have a problem in that their read speed is slow, especially when performing random access. For example, when reading data that is consecutively arranged in multiple pages, the data from the second page onwards can be read at high speed, but when reading the data from the first page, an address is specified. It takes a long time until the data is output. Furthermore, when reading data that is not continuous, it takes a long time each time the data is read. As described above, since the read speed of the NAND flash memory is slow, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it will take time to read the instructions that make up the control program. Such a case may occur, and even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is first transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. and store it. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. The work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM), as will be described later, and data is read and written at high speed, so the MPU 231 can read instructions forming the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and using the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to easily perform diversified and complicated effects.

The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores control programs executed by the MPU 231 and image data displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via a bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 after the system reset is canceled via the bus line 240, and transfers the control program stored in a second program storage area 234a1 (described later) of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 transfers image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 (described later) of the character ROM 234 to a resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237, Transfer to the normal video RAM 236.

This character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

The NAND flash memory 234a is a nonvolatile memory provided as the main storage part in the character ROM 234, and stores most of the control programs executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 for storing data, and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of images (characters, etc.) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained with a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. As a result, in this pachinko machine, by using the NAND flash memory 234a with a capacity of 2 gigabytes, for example, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can. Therefore, in order to further enhance the player's interest, the images displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be made more diverse and complex.

Further, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a lot of image data in the character storage area 234a2, and also store control programs and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1. In this way, the third symbol display device 81 is provided to store image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without having to provide a dedicated program ROM to store control programs and fixed value data as in conventional gaming machines. Since the number of parts can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, manufacturing costs can be reduced, and an increase in the failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234, and for example, based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b reads the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like. is read out and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

Here, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits to which incorrect data is written) occur when data is written, and defective data blocks in which data cannot be written occur. or Therefore, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and performs known error correction so that data is read and written to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding defective data blocks. Perform data address translation.

This ROM controller 234b performs error correction on data read out from the NAND flash memory 234a that includes error bits, so even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, the It is possible to suppress the MPU 231 from performing processing or the image controller 237 from generating various images.

In addition, the ROM controller 234b analyzes the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a and avoids accessing the defective data block, so the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 can store different defective data in each NAND flash memory 234a. The character ROM 234 can be easily accessed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the access control to the character ROM 234 from becoming complicated.

The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address assigned to the character ROM 234 is specified from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b stores one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) containing data corresponding to the specified address. It is determined whether the data is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If it is not set, one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. do. The ROM controller 234b then performs known error correction processing and then outputs the data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

This buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set in each bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b can, for example, output the data in the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside by using the other bank while setting data in one bank, or output the data in the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside as specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. One page of data including data corresponding to the specified address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and the data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or image controller 237 is transferred to the other bank. The processing of reading data from the bank and outputting it to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 can be performed in parallel. Therefore, the responsiveness in reading the character ROM 234 can be improved.

The NOR type ROM 234d is a nonvolatile memory provided as a sub-storage section in the character ROM 234, and is designed to complement the NAND type flash memory 234a. ) is configured. Among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, this NOR type ROM 234d stores programs that are not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a. At least a first program storage area 234d1 is provided that stores a part of the boot program to be executed.

The boot program is a control program for starting the display control device 114 so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes this boot program after the system reset is released. This allows the display control device 114 to be in a state where various controls can be executed. The first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) of the boot program, which should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, instructions for 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes)) are stored. Note that the number of instructions of the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 only needs to be within the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and can be set as appropriate according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 uses hardware to set the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" and to specify the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is specified on the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 transfers the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. is set, and the corresponding data (instruction code) is output to the MPU 231.

When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, it executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds 1 to the instruction pointer 231a, and sends the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. Specify. Then, while the address specified by the bus line 240 indicates the program stored in the NOR ROM 234d, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 selects one of the programs previously set from the NOR ROM 234d to the buffer RAM 234c. , reads the instruction code of the corresponding address from the buffer RAM 234c, and outputs it to the MPU 231.

In this embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program that should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR ROM 234d. The reason for storing it in is as follows. That is, as mentioned above, the NAND flash memory 234a is unique to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time from specifying the address to outputting the data when reading data from the first page. There's a problem.

When all control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code that the MPU 231 should execute first after the system reset is released. In this case, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to read it and set it in the buffer RAM 234c, so the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then issues an instruction corresponding to the address "0000H". It takes a lot of waiting time to receive the code. Therefore, since it takes a long time to start up the MPU 231, a problem arises in that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, since the NOR type ROM is a memory that can read data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program that should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d. By doing so, when address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is canceled, the character ROM 234 immediately transfers the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d to the buffer RAM 234c. can be set to output the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", and the MPU 231 can be activated in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 made up of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow readout speed, control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

Now, the boot program is a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program other than the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. , fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc. to be described later) used in the control program is stored in a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) in the program storage area of the work RAM 233. 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, the MPU 231 first sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after canceling the system reset. A predetermined amount is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a while using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c currently used.

Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity equivalent to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, as described above, the address of the internal bus is specified as "0000H". When the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to this, the boot program is set in only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c is transferred. The transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, after the transfer process, there is no need to set the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 in the buffer RAM 234c again, so the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a, the boot program stores the instruction pointer 231a in the program storage area 233a. The first predetermined location is programmed to be set to a first predetermined location. As a result, when the MPU 231 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a after the system reset is canceled, the instruction pointer 231a moves to the first predetermined position in the program storage area 233a. Set to street address.

Therefore, when a predetermined amount of the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a, and Various types of processing can be executed. That is, instead of reading the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetching instructions, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetching the instructions. Then, various processes will be executed. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even if most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch instructions at high speed and execute processing for the instructions.

Here, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the rest of the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is included in the control program that is transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount. The instruction pointer 231a is programmed to be included, and the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a.

Thereby, the MPU 231 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a using the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a. Execute the remaining boot programs contained in the control program.

In this remaining boot program, all remaining control programs that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data used in the control programs (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc. to be described later) are stored in the second program storage area. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from area 234a1 to program storage area 233a or data table storage area 233b is executed. Furthermore, at the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to a second predetermined location within the program storage area 233a. Specifically, this second predetermined location is the initial setting process (see S6002 in FIG. 244) that is executed after the boot process (see S6001 in FIG. 244) by the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is completed. Set the start address of the program corresponding to .

By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to a second predetermined location, and thereafter the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

Therefore, even if most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow reading speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. This allows the MPU 231 to read control programs from a work RAM configured with a DRAM with a high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and using the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to easily perform diversified and complicated effects.

Furthermore, as described above, instead of storing the entire boot program in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is canceled, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d. Even if the control program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time by simply adding an extremely small capacity NOR ROM 234d, so that an increase in the cost of the character ROM 234 due to the reduction in time can be suppressed. I can do it.

The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and causes the third symbol display device 81 to display the drawn image at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on a drawing list (see FIG. 207), which will be described later, and which is sent from the MPU 231, and draws a frame in either a first frame buffer 236b or a second frame buffer 236c, which will be described later. The image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by developing the image drawn in the buffer and outputting the image information for one frame that was previously developed in the other frame buffer to the third symbol display device 81. . The image controller 237 performs the drawing process of the image for one frame and the display process of the image for one frame within the image display time for one frame (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) on the third symbol display device 81. Parallel processing within.

The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter referred to as "V interrupt signal") to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process for one frame of images is completed. Every time the MPU 231 detects this V-interrupt signal, it executes the V-interrupt process (see FIG. 246(b)) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw the next frame of image. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the process of drawing the image for the next one frame, and also executes the process of causing the third symbol display device 81 to display the image developed by drawing first.

In this way, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt processing in response to the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 and instructs the image controller 237 to draw, so the image controller 237 performs the drawing processing and display of the image. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 at every processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image before the image drawing process or display process is completed, so it cannot start drawing a new image in the middle of drawing an image, It is possible to prevent an image from being developed in the frame buffer in which image information being displayed is stored in response to a new drawing instruction.

The image controller 237 also executes processing for transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on transfer instructions from the MPU 231 and transfer data information included in the drawing list.

Note that image drawing is performed using image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on instructions from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

Generally, while NAND flash memory facilitates increasing the capacity of ROM, its read speed is slower than other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). In response, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer some of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after power is turned on. is configured to do so. As will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled so that it remains resident without being overwritten.

As a result, after the transfer of the image data that should reside in the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on is completed, the image controller 237 can draw the image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. can be processed. Therefore, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, there is no need to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured with the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, when drawing an image. The time required for reading the image can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 stores image data of images that are frequently displayed and image data of images that should be displayed immediately after the main controller 110 or display controller 114 decides to display them. Even if the character ROM 234 is configured with a NAND flash memory 234a, high responsiveness can be maintained until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In addition, when drawing an image using non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 sends the data necessary for drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used to draw an image; It is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured with the character ROM 234, and the time required for reading out can be omitted. Therefore, the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can.

Further, by storing image data in the normal video RAM 236, there is no need to keep all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so there is no need to prepare a large capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of a 132 kilobyte SRAM, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

The image data transfer instruction issued by the MPU 231 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list includes the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (storage source final address), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236), and beginning of transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) Contains address. Note that the data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the final address of the storage source.

The image controller 237 reads out one block of data from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 in accordance with the various information in the transfer instruction, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and stores it in the buffer RAM 237a when the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not in use. The image data stored in the memory is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Then, the process is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored from the storage source first address to the storage source final address indicated by the transfer instruction is transferred.

Thereby, the image data read out from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. I can do it. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the image data transfer. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of image data, these video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for image drawing processing, and as a result, it is not possible to draw the image by the required time. , it is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being delayed.

Also, since the image controller 237 transfers the image data from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and display the third symbol. It is possible to easily determine the period that is not used for display processing on the device 81, and it is possible to simplify the processing.

The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 continues to be retained without being overwritten while the power is turned on. 235e and an error message image area 235f, at least a power-on variation image area 235b and a third symbol area 235d are provided.

The power-on main image area 235a is used as the power-on main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after the power is turned on until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This is an area for storing corresponding data. Further, the power-on variation image area 235b is displayed when a game is started by the player while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance This is an area for storing image data corresponding to a power-on variation image that displays a lottery result performed in the main control device 110 using a variation effect when a ball entering the mouth 1640 is detected.

The MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a when power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started. A transfer instruction is sent to the controller 237 (see S6003 and S6004 in FIG. 244).

Here, the power-on variation image will be described with reference to FIG. 202. FIG. 202 shows the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 immediately after the display control device 114 is powered on. It is an explanatory view explaining a time image.

Immediately after the power is turned on, the display control device 114 transfers image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variation image area 235b. Then, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While this remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a to display the power-on main image area 235a as shown in FIG. 202(a). The image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

At this time, upon receiving the display variation pattern command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110, which is an instruction command to start variation, the display control device 114 executes the command as shown in FIG. 202(b). As shown in FIG. 202(c), on the display screen of the main image at power-on, there is a power-on fluctuation image with a "○" symbol at the lower right position facing the screen, and as shown in FIG. 202(c), a "○" A power-on variation image of an "x" symbol is alternately and repeatedly displayed at the same position as the symbol during the variation period. Then, based on the display variation pattern command and display stop type command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command and stop type command from the main control device 110, the lottery performed in the main control device 110 is determined. The result is judged, and if it is a "special symbol jackpot", the image shown in Figure 202 (b) is displayed for a certain period of time after the variable effect stops, and if it is a "special symbol miss", the image shown in Figure 202 (c) is displayed. The image shown is displayed for a certain period of time after the variable effect stops.

The MPU 231 causes the image controller 237 to use the image data stored in the main image area 235a at power-on until all the image data that should reside in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs to draw the main image when the power is turned on. As a result, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, players and hall personnel can confirm the power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can. Therefore, while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 81, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining image data that should be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. be able to. In addition, since the player or the like can recognize that some kind of processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at power-on, the image that should be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235 is To wait until the transfer of image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without having to worry about whether the operation is stopped until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Can be done.

In addition, when checking the operation at a factory or the like during manufacturing, the main image is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that the third symbol display device 81 can start operating without problems when the power is turned on. Furthermore, by using the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, as the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress deterioration in the efficiency of the operation check.

Furthermore, while the power-on main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player starts playing the game, and a ball entering the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 1640 is detected. In this case, the power-on variation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image resident in the power-on variation image area 235b, and the images shown in FIGS. 202(b) and 202(c) are alternately drawn. The MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to display the image on the third symbol display device 81. With this, it is possible to perform a simple variation effect using the power-on variation image. Therefore, even while the main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at power-on, the player can reliably confirm that the lottery has been drawn by the simple variation effect.

In addition, at the stage when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data corresponding to the power-on variation effect image is already resident in the power-on variation image area 235b. If a ball entering the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 1640 is detected while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a corresponding variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display. It can be displayed on the device 81 immediately.

Returning to FIG. 201, the explanation will be continued. The back image area 235c is an area that stores image data corresponding to the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Here, with reference to FIG. 203, the back image and the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c will be described. FIG. 203 is an explanatory diagram illustrating four types of back images and the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 for each back image. FIG. 203(b) shows back surfaces B to D corresponding to "forest stage," "river stage," and "sky stage," respectively, with respect to rear surface A corresponding to "city stage." . Further, FIG. 204 shows the back surface E corresponding to the "island stage".

As shown in FIG. 203, the back images corresponding to the back faces A to D are all images that are longer in the horizontal direction than the display area displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and are prepared in the character ROM 234. The image controller 237 draws the image so that the back image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while scrolling the image horizontally from left to right.

The images prepared for each of the back surfaces A to D (hereinafter referred to as "scrolling images") are configured such that the back images are continuous at position a and position c. The image between position c and position d and the image between position a and position a' are composed of images corresponding to the horizontal width of the display area, and the image between position c and position d is composed of images corresponding to the horizontal width of the display area. is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area, and then the image between position a and position a' is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area. The back image is scrolled and displayed in a connected manner.

When it is decided to change the back surface type based on the back surface type selection table 222b and the stage is changed to "city stage", "forest stage", "river stage", or "sky stage", the MPU 231 selects the corresponding back surface type. First, a region between position a and position a' of the image is set as the initial position of the display area, and the image controller 237 is controlled so that the image at that initial position is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Then, as time passes, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is moved from left to right with respect to the scrolling image, and the display area is sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81. When the area reaches an image between position c and position d, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is displayed again on the third symbol display device 81 as an image from position a to position a'. Therefore, on the third symbol display device 81, images between positions a to c can be repeatedly scrolled and displayed in a smooth manner so as to flow toward the left.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 204, the back image on the back surface E changes to the third pattern in the order of (a)→(b)→(c)→(a)→... in FIG. 204 as time passes. It is displayed on the display device 81. Specifically, the back E is a third pattern in which an image of the mountain towering over the island, an image of the sandy beach spreading at the foot of the mountain, and an image of the sea surrounding the island are displayed in fixed positions. It is displayed on the display device 81. On the other hand, the color tone of an image of the sky above a mountain changes over time.

When the stage is changed to the "island stage", the back image shown in FIG. 204(a) is displayed as the initial back image of the back surface E. In the rear image shown in FIG. 204(a), an orange sky indicating morning glow is displayed. Then, as time passes, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from orange to bright blue, and after a predetermined period of time, the back image shown in FIG. 204(b) is displayed. In the rear image shown in FIG. 204(b), a bright blue sky indicating daytime is displayed. Next, as time passes, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from bright blue to black, and after a predetermined period of time, the back image shown in FIG. 204(c) is displayed. In the rear image shown in FIG. 204(c), a black sky indicating night is displayed. After that, as time passes, the color of the sky gradually changes from black to white and then to orange. After a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the back image shown in FIG. 204(a) is returned to, and the back images shown in FIGS. 204(a) to 204(c) are displayed on the third symbol display device 81 again.

Next, in each back image, the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c will be explained. As shown in FIG. 203(a), the back surface A corresponding to the town stage, which is the initial stage, has the entire range of the back surface A, that is, all the image data corresponding to positions a to d are stored in the back surface of the resident video RAM 235. It is stored in the image area 235c. Normally, the game is often played without changing the stage with the initial stage "Town Stage" displayed, so the image data of the back A corresponding to the "Town Stage" that is frequently displayed is By making all the data reside permanently in the back image area 235c, the number of data accesses to the character ROM 234 can be reduced. Therefore, the processing load placed on the display control device 114 can be reduced.

On the other hand, the back surface B corresponding to the "forest stage", the back surface C corresponding to the "river stage", and the back surface D corresponding to the "sky stage" are partial areas of the back surface, as shown in FIG. 203(b). That is, only the image data corresponding to the image between position a and position b is stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. In addition, the image data corresponding to the back surface images between FIGS. 204(a) and 204(b) including FIG. 204(a) and excluding FIG. 204(b) for the back surface E corresponding to the island stage is During the start-up process, the image data is stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and becomes resident.

Here, in order to change the rear image immediately, it is ideal to have the entire range of image data for all rear images resident in the resident video RAM 235; Therefore, it is necessary to use a RAM with a very large capacity, which may lead to an increase in cost.

On the other hand, in this pachinko machine 10, when the stage is changed, the initial position of the back image that is displayed first is set in the range from position a to position a' (or in the range shown in FIGS. 204(a) to 204(b)). ), and the image data corresponding to the image between position a and position b including the initial position (or the image between FIGS. 204(a) and 204(b)) is stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Since the character ROM 234 is configured to be stored in the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow readout speed, when a stage change is determined by the lottery at the start of the fluctuation, the back side of the resident video RAM 235 By using the image data resident in the image area 235c, the initial positions of the back surfaces B to D can be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the scroll display or color tone can be changed as time passes. It can be displayed while Furthermore, since only image data corresponding to a partial range of images is stored for the rear surfaces B to D, an increase in the storage capacity of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed, and an increase in cost can be suppressed.

In addition, for rear surfaces B to D, after the image at the initial position is displayed, the range from position a to position b is directed from left to right using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. The range from position a to position b is set so that the image data corresponding to the image from position b' to position d can be completely transferred from character ROM 234 to normal RAM 236 while scrolling. As a result, while scrolling the range from position a to position b, image data from position b' to position d can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 can be transferred. After scrolling the range from position a to position b using It can be displayed on the symbol display device 81.

Similarly, on the back surface E, after the image at the initial position is displayed, the images shown in FIGS. 204(a) so that the image data of the images corresponding to FIGS. 204(b) to 204(c) and FIGS. 204(c) to 204(a) can be completely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236. The range from ~(b) is set. As a result, while the images in FIGS. 204(a) to 204(b) are displayed, the image data corresponding to the images in FIGS. 204(b) to 204(c) and 204(c) to 204(a) are Since the images can be transferred to the video RAM 236, the images shown in FIGS. 204(a) to 204(b) can be displayed using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and then stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay. 204(b) to 204(c) to 204(c) to (a) are sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as time passes. be able to.

Note that on the back faces B to E, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is stored in a sub-area dedicated to back images provided in the image storage area 236a (see FIG. 201) of the normal video RAM 236. Thereby, the back image data stored in the subarea dedicated to the back image is not overwritten by other image data, so the back image can be displayed reliably.

In addition, on rear surfaces B to D, the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 correspond to images between position b' and position b. Duplicate image data is stored. Then, under the control of the image controller 237 by the MPU 231, the image up to position b is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and then the normal video By displaying the image from position b' on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the RAM 236, the back image can be scroll-displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with a smooth connection. ing.

Furthermore, when the MPU 231 controls the image controller 237 using the image data of the normal video RAM 236 so that the image between position c and position d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area, then, The MPU 231 uses the image data of the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between position a and position a' is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area. do. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 can display images between positions a to c that are scrolled repeatedly in a smooth manner so as to flow toward the left.

Returning to FIG. 201, the explanation will be continued. The third symbol area 235d is an area where the third symbol used in the variable production displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is permanently resident. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-mentioned 10 kinds of main symbols numbered from "0" to "9" as the third symbol is resident. As a result, when performing a variable effect on the third symbol display device 81, there is no need to read the image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. Variable effects can be started quickly. Therefore, after the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 1640, even though the first symbol display device 37 has started the variable production, the third symbol display device It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the variable performance is not started immediately in step 81.

In addition, the third symbol area 235d includes main symbols that are not numbered from "0" to "9" and include a main symbol consisting of a backward symbol such as a wooden box, a backward symbol and a character such as a plane, a wrapping cloth, a helmet, etc. Image data corresponding to the main pattern consisting of an auxiliary pattern imitating the image is also resident. These image data are used for a demonstration effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variable effect associated with a winning start does not start even after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the first variable effect stopped. It will be done. As a result, when the demonstration performance is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the main symbol without a number is displayed as the third symbol in the demonstration performance. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demo state by visually recognizing the main symbols to which numbers are not attached from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.

The character pattern area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to character patterns used in various effects displayed on the third pattern display device 81. In this pachinko machine 10, various characters such as a "boy", "old man", and "girl" are displayed in accordance with various effects, and data corresponding to these characters is displayed in the character pattern area 235e. By being resident, when the display control device 114 changes the character design based on the contents of the command received from the audio lamp control device 113, the display control device 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but uses the resident image data. By reading the image data resident in advance in the character pattern area 235e of the video RAM 235, the image controller 237 can draw a predetermined image. Thereby, there is no need to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, so even if the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed is used as the character ROM 234, the character design can be changed immediately.

The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In this pachinko machine 10, for example, when the audio lamp control device 113 detects vibration from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back of the game board 13, the audio lamp control device 113 detects the occurrence of a vibration error. The display control device 114 is notified by an error command. Further, even when the audio lamp control device 113 detects the occurrence of another error, the audio lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of the error along with the error type using an error command. The display control device 114 is configured to, upon receiving an error command, cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message corresponding to the received error.

Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of an error, from the viewpoint of preventing players from cheating and protecting players from errors. In this pachinko machine 10, image data corresponding to various error messages is stored in advance in the error message image area 235f, so the display control device 114 displays error messages in the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading the image data resident in the image area 235f in advance, the image controller 237 can immediately draw each error message image. This eliminates the need to sequentially read image data corresponding to error messages from the character ROM 234, so even if the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed is used as the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is not read out after receiving the error command. It can be displayed instantly.

The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data can be overwritten and updated at any time, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c.

The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of subareas, and the type of image data stored in the subarea is predetermined for each subarea.

The MPU 231 transfers image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and is necessary for drawing subsequent images from the character ROM 234 to a subarea provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. , instructs the image controller 237 to transfer the type of image data to a predetermined subarea where it is to be stored. Thereby, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a designated predetermined subarea of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

Note that the image data transfer instruction is performed by including transfer data information in a drawing list, which will be described later, in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image. Thereby, the MPU 231 can issue an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction simply by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, thereby reducing the processing load.

The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes one frame's worth of image drawn according to instructions from the MPU 231 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, thereby writing one frame's worth of image into that frame buffer. While developing the image, while the image is being developed in one frame buffer, the image information for one frame developed earlier is read out from the other frame buffer, and sent to the third symbol display device 81 along with the drive signal. By transmitting the image information, a process of displaying the image for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

In this way, by providing two frame buffers, the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, the image controller 237 can simultaneously develop one frame's worth of images drawn in one frame buffer. , it is possible to read out one frame's worth of image developed earlier from the other frame buffer and display the read out one frame's worth of image on the third symbol display device 81.

The frame buffer that develops one frame's worth of images and the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read in order to display the image on the third symbol display device 81 are used to process the drawing of one frame's worth of images. Every 20 milliseconds, the MPU 231 alternately designates either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of image, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of one frame's worth of images is completed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of images, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of images. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image can be developed in the second frame buffer 236c. Ru.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing one frame of image, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read. be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image can be developed in the first frame buffer 236b. Ru. Thereafter, the frame buffer for developing one frame's image and the frame buffer for reading one frame's worth of image information are changed every 20 milliseconds to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c. By alternating and specifying, it is possible to continuously perform display processing for one frame of images in units of 20 milliseconds while performing drawing processing for one frame of images.

The work RAM 233 is a memory for temporarily storing control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234 and work data and flags used when the MPU 231 executes various control programs. configured. This work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a time counter 233h, and a stored image data determination It has at least a flag 233i, a drawing target buffer flag 233j, a back image change flag 233w, a back image discrimination flag 233x, a demo display flag 233y, and a final display flag 233z.

The program storage area 233a is an area for storing control programs executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. After all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 thereafter executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow readout speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third symbol display device 81 Using this, it is possible to easily perform diversified and complex performances.

The data table storage area 233b stores a display data table in which display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as time passes for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110, and a display data table. This is an area where transfer data information of image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and a transfer data table that defines the transfer timing among the image data used in one performance displayed by the table is stored.

These data tables are normally stored as a type of fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and are stored in accordance with the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. , these data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in this data table storage area 233b. Then, when all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 thereafter controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data tables stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow readout speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to easily perform diversified and complicated performances.

Here, details of various data tables will be explained. First, one display data table is prepared for each presentation mode of each presentation displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on commands from the main control device 110, such as variable presentation, opening presentation, etc. Display data tables corresponding to , round performance, ending performance, and demo performance are prepared.

The fluctuation performance is a performance that is started on the third symbol display device 81 when a display fluctuation pattern command is received from the audio lamp control device 113. Note that when the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the stop type of the variation effect is also received. For example, when a fluctuating performance is started, if the stop type of the fluctuating performance is a miss, the stop symbol indicating the miss is finally displayed, while the stop type of the fluctuating performance is jackpot A or jackpot B. In either case, the stop symbols indicating each jackpot are finally stopped and displayed. The player can recognize the type of jackpot by visually recognizing the stop symbols in this variable performance, and can easily determine the gaming value given according to the type of jackpot.

The opening performance is a performance to inform the player that the pachinko machine 10 will now move to a special gaming state and the large opening that is normally closed will be repeatedly opened.The round performance will start from now on. This is an effect to notify the player of the number of rounds to be played. The ending performance is a performance for notifying the player of the end of the special game state.

In addition, as mentioned above, the demonstration performance is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variable performance associated with the starting winning is not started even after a predetermined period of time has passed since the first variable performance stopped. This is an effect in which the third symbol consisting of the main symbol without numbers "0" to "9" is displayed in a stopped state, and only the back image changes. If the demonstration performance is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, players and hall personnel can recognize that no game is being played on the pachinko machine 10.

The data table storage area 233b stores one display data table each corresponding to an opening performance, a round performance, an ending performance, and a demo performance. Further, as for the variable display data table which is a display data table for variable effects, if there are 32 variable effect patterns to be set, one table is prepared for each variable effect pattern, 32 tables in total are prepared.

Here, details of the display data table will be explained with reference to FIG. 205. FIG. 205 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address that represents the time (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds) for one frame of image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as one unit. This specifies the content of an image (drawing content) for one frame in detail.

The drawing content specifies the type of sprite for each sprite that is a display object that makes up one frame of image, and also specifies display position coordinates, magnification, rotation angle, and translucency depending on the type of sprite. Drawing information for causing the third symbol display device 81 to draw the sprite, such as value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

The sprite type is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 where the sprite should be displayed. The magnification rate is information for specifying the magnification rate for a standard display size set in advance for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed is specified according to the magnification rate. Note that if the magnification rate is greater than 100%, the sprite will be displayed larger than its standard size, and if the magnification rate is less than 100%, the sprite will be displayed smaller than its standard size. Is displayed.

The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when rotating and displaying a sprite. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucency value, the more transparent the image is displayed on the back side of the sprite. The α-blending information is information for specifying a known α-blending coefficient that is used when performing overlapping processing with other sprites. The color information is information for specifying the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. The filter specification information is information for specifying an image filter to be applied to the specified sprite when the specified sprite is drawn.

In the variable display data table, the drawing contents for one frame defined corresponding to each address include one back image, nine third symbols (design 1, symbol 2, ...), and the light Drawing information for each sprite, such as effects expressing the insertion of images, characters used for various effects such as boy images and characters, is defined for each address. Note that one or more pieces of information regarding effects and characters are defined depending on the content to be displayed in the frame.

Here, the display position of the back image is fixed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter specification information are changed over time. Since it is assumed to be constant, only the back type, which is information for specifying the type of the back image, is defined in the variable display data table. This back type is the back side A to E that corresponds to the stage selected by the player (one of the "city stage", "forest stage", "river stage", "sky stage", and "island stage"). Information specifying whether to display any one of the images or to display a back image different from the back images A to E is described. Further, in the case of specifying that a back image different from back surfaces A to E is to be displayed, the back surface type also includes information specifying which back image is to be displayed.

If it is specified that any of the back surfaces A to E is to be displayed based on the back surface type, the MPU 231 specifies the back image corresponding to the stage determined by lottery among the back surfaces A to E as the drawing target, Furthermore, the range of the back image to be displayed for that frame is specified over time. On the other hand, if it is specified that a back image different from the back surfaces A to E is to be displayed, the back image to be displayed is specified based on the back surface type.

In this embodiment, a case will be described in which only the back type is defined as the drawing content of the back image in the display data table, but instead of this, the back type and the range of the back image corresponding to the back type It may also be possible to specify location information indicating whether the information should be displayed. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the back image to be displayed for that frame based on the elapsed time since the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information was displayed.

Further, the position information may be information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on this display data table (or the display on the third symbol display device 81) was started. In this case, the MPU 231 displays the range of the back image to be displayed for that frame based on the display database at the stage when image drawing (or display on the third symbol display device 81) is started. It is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time since the drawing of the image (or the display on the third symbol display device 81) started, which is indicated by the position information.

Further, the position information includes, depending on the back surface type, information indicating the elapsed time since the back surface image in the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed, and image drawing based on the display data table (or the third symbol display device 81 Display) may indicate any information indicating the elapsed time since the start of the display, or the type information of the position information (for example, the range corresponding to the initial position) may be displayed along with the back type and position information. The information indicates the elapsed time since the back image was displayed, or the information indicates the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) was started. (information indicating whether the background image is drawn) may be defined as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the position information may not be information indicating elapsed time but may be information indicating an address where the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored.

For the third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2, . . . ), symbol type offset information is written as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers attached to each third symbol. Rather than directly specifying the type of the 3rd symbol, the offset information is specified because the display of the 3rd symbol in the fluctuating performance is based on the stop symbol of the previous fluctuating performance and the current fluctuating performance. This is because it changes depending on the stopped symbol, and the symbol offset information from the start of variation until a predetermined time has elapsed describes the offset information from the stopped symbol of the previous variation performance. As a result, the variable performance is started from the stop symbol in the previous variable performance.

On the other hand, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation, the offset from the stop symbol is set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main controller 110 via the audio lamp controller 113. Enter information. Thereby, the variable performance can be stopped with a stop symbol according to the stop type specified by the main control device 110.

In addition, since each third symbol is assigned a unique number, the variable symbol in the previous variable performance or the stop symbol according to the stop type specified by the main controller 110 can be used as the third symbol. By managing the offset information by the numbers attached to each third symbol and expressing the offset information by the difference between the numbers attached to each third symbol, it is possible to easily specify the third symbol to be displayed from the offset information.

In addition, in the symbol offset information, during the predetermined time when the offset information of the stop symbol of the previous fluctuating performance is switched to the offset information of the stop symbol of the current fluctuating performance, the third symbol changes rapidly. It is set to match the displayed time. While the third symbol is being displayed in a high-speed fluctuating manner, the third symbol is not visible to the player. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the current variable performance, even if the continuity of the numbers in the third symbol is interrupted, the player will not be made aware of the interruption in the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

"Start" information indicating the start of the data table is written in "0000H" which is the first address of the display data table, and "02F0H" in the example of FIG. 205 is the last address of the display data table. "End" information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" where the "Start" information is written and the address where the "End" information is written, the drawing content is made to correspond to the presentation mode that should be specified in the display data table. is listed.

The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in accordance with a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, and displays the selected display data table. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Then, each time the drawing process for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by 1, and based on the drawing content specified in the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the next The image contents to be drawn are specified and a drawing list (see FIG. 207), which will be described later, is created. By transmitting this drawing list to the image controller 237, an instruction to draw the image is given. Thereby, as the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing contents are specified in the order specified in the display data table, so that the image as specified in the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In this way, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to commands (for example, display variation pattern commands) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on commands from the main control device 110, etc. Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by simply replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d as appropriate. .

Here, if a conventional pachinko machine is configured to start a program executed by the MPU 231 every time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, as the effect images become more diverse, Since the processing of starting and executing programs that are becoming increasingly complex and enormous in size places a heavy burden on the processing, the processing capacity of the display control device 114 becomes limited, and there is a risk that there will be a limit to the diversification of controllable effect images. there were. On the other hand, in this pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by simply replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capacity of the control device 114, a wide variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In addition, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each presentation mode in this way, a display data table buffer is set according to the presentation mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is drawn frame by frame according to the set data table. This is possible because, in the pachinko machine 10, the performance to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of a lottery performed based on the starting winnings. On the other hand, with game machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display content changes on the spot based on user operations, so the display content cannot be predicted, and therefore the various It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to each presentation mode. In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each presentation mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the presentation mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created one frame at a time according to the set data table. This configuration can only be realized based on the fact that the pachinko machine 10 is configured to determine in advance the performance mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of a lottery performed based on a starting prize.

Next, details of the transfer data table will be explained with reference to FIG. 206. FIG. 206 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared in correspondence with the display data table prepared for each performance, and as mentioned above, the transfer data table is the one that is prepared in correspondence with the display data table prepared for each performance. Transfer data information and transfer timing for transferring image data that is not resident in the normal video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 are defined.

Note that if all the image data of sprites used in the effects specified in the display data table are stored in the resident video RAM 235, no transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is prepared. Thereby, it is possible to suppress an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b.

The transfer data table contains transfer data information of sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as "transfer target image data") that is to be transferred at the time indicated by the address in correspondence with the address specified in the display data table. are written (corresponding to addresses “0001H” and “0097H” in FIG. 206). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, transfer data information of image data to be transferred is defined in association with an address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transferring at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, it means that there is no transfer target image data to start transferring corresponding to that address. Null data meaning ``0002H'' in FIG. 206 is defined.

The transfer data information includes the first address (storage source first address) and final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored, and the first address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236). is included.

Note that "0000H", which is the first address of the transfer data table, contains "Start" information indicating the start of the data table, similar to the display data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 206, "02F0H") contains "End" information indicating the end of the data table. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" where the "Start" information is described and the address where the "End" information is described, transfer data information of the image data to be transferred that should be specified in the transfer data table is provided. is listed.

When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, the MPU 231 selects the display data table to be used. If there is a transfer data table corresponding to , the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233, which will be described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 207), which will be described later, is created. At the same time, from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite whose transfer should be started at that point is acquired, and the transfer data information is added to the created drawing list. to add.

For example, in the example of FIG. 206, when the pointer 233f becomes "0001H" or "0097H", the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information specified for the address in the transfer data table based on the display data table. It is added to the drawing list, and the added drawing list is sent to the image controller 237. On the other hand, if the pointer 233f is "0002H", Null data is defined in the address "0002H" of the transfer data table, so it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start transfer, and the generated The drawing list is sent to the image controller 237 without adding transfer data information to the drawing list.

Then, if transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined subarea of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the processing to be performed.

Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address, by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and required for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured with the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow readout speed, images necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the display While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Also, by writing in the transfer data table, only the image data that is non-resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

In addition, in the present pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 transmits display data in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. When a table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, so the sprite image data used in the display data table is The data can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

Further, in the transfer data table, transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. Thereby, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while making the processing easier. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load required for transfer.

The transfer data table has the same data structure as the display data table, and transfers the image data to be transferred that should be started at the time indicated by the address in correspondence with the address specified in the display data table. Since the data information is defined, it is ensured that the image data of a predetermined sprite is stored in the normal video RAM 236 before it is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. Since the transfer start timing can be instructed as shown in FIG. be able to.

The simple image display flag 233c indicates whether or not to display the power-on images (power-on main image and power-on variable image) shown in FIGS. 202(a) to 202(c) on the third symbol display device 81. This is a flag to indicate. This simple image display flag 233c is set after the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on is transferred to the main image at power-on area 235a or the variable image at power-on area 235b of the resident video RAM. , is set to ON during the main processing (see FIG. 244) executed by the MPU 231 (see S6005 in FIG. 244). Then, when all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an image other than the power-on image, It is set to off (see S7605 in FIG. 255(b)).

This simple image display flag 233c is referenced in the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 every time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S6301 in FIG. 246(b)), and the simple image display flag 233c is When the image display flag 233c is on, the simple command determination process (see S6308 in FIG. 246(b)) and the simple display setting process (see S6308 in FIG. 246(b), S6309) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, command judgment is performed so that various images are displayed according to commands transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on commands from the main control device 110, etc. Processing (see FIGS. 247 to 251) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 252 to 254) are executed.

Further, the simple image display flag 233c is referenced in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S7501 in FIG. 255(a)), and when the simple image display flag 233c is on, Since there is resident target image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235, the resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 255(b)) is executed to transfer the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. However, if the simple image display flag 233c is off, normal image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 256) is executed to transfer image data necessary for drawing processing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to a performance mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to a command etc. transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command etc. from the main control device 110. It is a buffer for The MPU 231 determines the production mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the commands etc. transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113, and stores the display data table corresponding to the production mode from the data table storage area 233b. The selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, while adding the pointer 233f by 1, the MPU 231 sends the image controller 233 to the image controller 233 for each frame based on the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. A drawing list (see FIG. 207), which will be described later, is generated in which instructions for image drawing are described. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d.

The MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f by 1 and writes an image to the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. A drawing list (see FIG. 207), which will be described later, is generated in which drawing instruction contents are described. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays an effect corresponding to the display data table.

The transfer data table buffer 233e transfers a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command etc. transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command etc. from the main control device 110. This is a buffer for storing. In addition to storing a display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b, and transfers the selected transfer data table. It is stored in the data table buffer 233e. Note that if all of the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents of the transfer data table buffer 233e by writing null data indicating that there is no image data to be transferred.

Then, while adding the pointer 233f by 1, the MPU 231 determines whether the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. If so (that is, if Null data is not written), the transfer data information is added to the drawing list (see FIG. 207), which will be described later, which describes the contents of the image drawing instructions to the image controller 237 that are generated for each frame. to add.

As a result, if transfer data information is written in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined subarea of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process to transfer. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of image data to be transferred is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, by transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, the image data necessary for drawing the sprite is transferred. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured with the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow readout speed, images necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the display While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Also, by writing in the transfer data table, only the image data that is non-resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The pointer 233f indicates an address at which to obtain the corresponding drawing content or transfer data information of the image data to be transferred from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. This is for specifying. The MPU 231 once initializes the pointer 233f to 0 when the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting process of the V interrupt process (FIG. 246(b ), pointer update processing (see S7205 in FIG. 252) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by 1.

Each time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 identifies the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and creates a drawing list to be described later. (see FIG. 207), acquires the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite whose transfer should be started at that point from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and Add information to the drawing list you created.

As a result, an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, by simply changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, it is possible to easily change the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 341, a wide variety of effects can be displayed.

Furthermore, if a transfer data table is stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the sprite is Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and is used for drawing can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured with the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow readout speed, images necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the display While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Also, by writing in the transfer data table, only the image data that is non-resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The drawing list area 233g is used by the image controller to draw one frame worth of images generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing a drawing list to be instructed to 237.

Here, details of the drawing list will be explained with reference to FIG. 207. FIG. 207 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table that instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. Symbol 2,...), Effect (Effect 1, Effect 2,...), Character (Character 1, Character 2,..., Pending ball number pattern 1, Pending ball number pattern 2,..., Error Detailed drawing information (detailed information) for each sprite such as a pattern) is described for that sprite. The drawing list also describes transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (displayed object) is stored, and its The image controller 237 obtains the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and address. The detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, magnification, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter specification information. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is scaled according to the enlargement ratio, rotated according to the rotation angle, and made translucent according to the translucency value. , performs compositing processing with other sprites according to the alpha blending information, performs tone correction processing according to the color information, and performs filtering processing according to the method specified by that information according to the filter specification information. After that, various processes are applied to the display position indicated by the display position coordinates, and the resulting image is drawn. The drawn image is then developed by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j.

In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 draws the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the content of other images to be drawn (for example, a pending image that displays a pending pitch number pattern). image, warning image that notifies the occurrence of an error, etc.), generates detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used to draw one frame of image, and also generates detailed information for each sprite. Create a drawing list by sorting.

Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of the data of the sprite (displayed object) are the sprite type specified in the display data table or the sprite type specified from other image contents. generated accordingly. That is, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 or the subarea of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the image data of that sprite is stored is fixed, so the MPU 231 stores the image data of that sprite depending on the sprite type. Then, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

The MPU 231 also specifies other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter specification information) among the detailed information of each sprite as specified in the display data table. Copy the information as is.

In addition, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 sorts the sprites that should be placed closest to the back to the sprites that should be placed closest to the front among the images for one frame, and provides detailed drawing information for each sprite. (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, the detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, and then the third design (design 1, design 2, ...), the effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), and the character Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of (Character 1, Character 2, . . . , Pending pitch number symbol 1, Pending pitch number symbol 2, . . . , Error symbol).

The image controller 237 executes drawing processing for each sprite according to the order described in the drawing list, and develops the drawn sprites by overwriting them in the frame buffer. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the first drawn sprite can be placed furthest to the back, and the last sprite drawn can be placed furthest to the front.

Furthermore, when transfer data information is written at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the MPU 231 controls the transfer data information (the character in which the image data to be transferred is stored). The storage source start address and storage source end address in the ROM 234, and the storage destination start address of the subarea provided in the image storage area 236a where the image data to be transferred is to be stored) are added to the end of the drawing list. If the drawing list includes this transfer data information, the image controller 237 transfers an image from a predetermined area of the character ROM 234 (the area indicated by the storage source first address and the storage source final address) based on the transfer data information. The data is read and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined subarea (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

The time counter 233h is a counter that counts the performance time of the performance displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. At the same time as storing one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 sets time data indicating the performance time of the performance to be displayed based on the display data table. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the performance time by the image display time for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds).

Then, V interrupt processing (FIG. 246(b ) Each time the display setting process (see ) is executed, the time counter 233h is decremented by 1 (see S7207 in FIG. 252). As a result, when the value of the time counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the operation in accordance with the end of the effect. Execute various processing that should be performed.

The stored image data discrimination flag 233i indicates that for all sprites whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the image data corresponding to the sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. This is a flag indicating the storage state indicating whether or not there is.

This stored image data discrimination flag 233i is generated by the initial setting process (see S6002 in FIG. 244) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data determination flag 233i generated here is set to "off" indicating that the storage status of all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

The stored image data discrimination flag 233i is updated when a transfer instruction for transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set during the normal image transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 (see FIG. 256). be exposed. In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which a transfer instruction has been set is set to "on", which indicates that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Furthermore, the image data of other sprites that are to be stored in the same subarea of the image storage area 236a as that one sprite will always be in an unstored state when the image data of that one sprite is stored. Therefore, set the storage status corresponding to other sprites to "off".

Furthermore, when transferring the image data of a sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data discrimination flag 233i and selects the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether the image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 (see S7713 in FIG. 256). Then, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "off" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, a transfer instruction for that image data is set (see S7714 in FIG. 256). , causes the image controller 237 to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined subarea of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer process of that image data is stopped. Thereby, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and it is possible to reduce the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240. can.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j indicates a frame buffer (hereinafter referred to as a "drawing target buffer") that develops the image drawn by the image controller 237 from among the two frame buffers (first frame buffer 236b and second frame buffer 236c). When the rendering target buffer flag 233j is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the rendering target buffer, and when it is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is designated. Information on the specified drawing target buffer is then sent to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S7802 in FIG. 257).

Thereby, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process to expand the image drawn based on the drawing list onto the specified drawing target buffer. Further, in parallel with the drawing process, the image controller 237 reads the developed drawing image information from a frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer, and transmits the image to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, a display process for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated when the drawing target buffer information is sent to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233j, that is, if the value is "0", it is set to "1", and if it is "1", it is set to "0". carried out by Thereby, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time a drawing list is transmitted. Furthermore, the transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal sent from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and display process for one frame of images are completed. This process is performed every time the drawing process (see S6306 in FIG. 246(b)) is executed.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of image, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of one frame's worth of images is completed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of images, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of images. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image can be developed in the second frame buffer 236c. Ru.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of image, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read. be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image can be developed in the first frame buffer 236b. Ru. Thereafter, the frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of images and the frame buffer for reading one frame's worth of image information are changed every 20 milliseconds to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c. By alternating the designations, it is possible to perform the display processing of one frame of images continuously in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of one frame of images.

The back image change flag 233w is a flag for determining whether or not to change the type of the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. When this back image change flag 233w is on, it means that the type of the back image is changed, and when it is off, it means that no change is made. The back image change flag 233w is set to ON when a back image change command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 is received (see S7001 in FIG. 251(a)). The back image change flag 233w is referenced in the normal image transfer setting process (see S7709 in FIG. 256), and is set to off when the back image change process is executed (see S7710 in FIG. 256). Thereby, it is possible to display a back image corresponding to the back image change command or production mode change command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

The back image discrimination flag 233x is a flag indicating the set back image type. This flag is composed of, for example, one byte, and each bit is associated with each back surface type. If any bit of this back image discrimination flag 233x is on, it means that the back surface type corresponding to the turned on bit is set as the current back surface type. For example, if the 0th bit of the back image discrimination flag 233x is on, it means that the back surface A is set. In this rear image discrimination flag 233x, when a rear image change command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 is received, the bit corresponding to the rear image notified by the command is set to ON (FIG. 251(a) ), see S7002). At this time, all other bits are set to OFF. This back image discrimination flag 233x allows the currently set back type to be easily specified.

The demo display flag 233y is a flag indicating whether or not a demonstration performance is in progress. If the demonstration display flag 233y is on, it means that a demonstration is being performed, and if it is off, it means that a demonstration is not being performed. This demo display flag 233y is set to ON when the demo display data table is set to the display data table buffer 233d in the display setting process (see FIG. 252) (see S7221 in FIG. 252), and the demo display data table When a display data table other than the above is set for the display data table buffer 233d, it is set to off (S6505 in FIG. 248(a), S6705 in FIG. 249(a), S6805 in FIG. 249(b) , see S6905 in FIG. 250). This demonstration display flag 233y makes it possible to easily determine whether or not a demonstration is currently being performed.

The confirmed display flag 233z is a flag indicating whether or not a confirmed display effect is being executed. Here, the final display performance refers to a performance in which the stopped symbols are stopped and displayed for a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) after the fluctuation pattern (determined display). If this final display flag 233z is on, it means that a final display performance is in progress, and if it is off, it means that a final display performance is not in progress. The fixed display flag 233z is set to ON when the fixed display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d in the display setting process (see FIG. 252) (S7214 in FIG. 252), and when the fixed display data table is It is set to off when another display data table is set for the display data table buffer 233d (S6505 in FIG. 248(a), S6705 in FIG. 249(a), S6805 in FIG. 249(b), 250, S6905). With this confirmed display flag 233z, it can be easily determined whether or not a confirmed display performance is currently being performed.

<About the control process of the main controller in the first control example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts in FIGS. 208 to 234. The processing of the MPU 201 can be roughly divided into startup processing that is started when the power is turned on, main processing that is executed after the startup processing, and a timer that is started periodically (at 2 ms intervals in this control example). There are two types of interrupt processing: interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing that is started by inputting the power outage signal SG1 to the NMI terminal.For convenience of explanation, we will first explain the timer interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing, and then explain the startup processing. and main processing will be explained.

FIG. 208 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The timer interrupt process is a periodic process that is executed every 2 milliseconds, for example. In the timer interrupt process, first, a process for reading various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, it reads the states of various switches connected to the main control device 110, determines the states of the switches, and stores detection information (winning detection information).

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (479 in this control example), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (232 in this control example), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Furthermore, the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the second winning random number counter C4, and the small winning type counter C5 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the second winning random number counter C4, and the small winning type counter C5 are each incremented by 1, and the counter values are set to the maximum value (in this control example). 479, 99, 232, and 99), each is cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of each counter C1, C2, C4, and C5 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Next, a special symbol variation process is executed which is a process for displaying on the first symbol display device 37 and also sets a variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 (S104). Thereafter, a starting winning process is executed in response to a winning (starting winning) to the first ball entrance 64 (S105). The details of the special symbol variation process and the starting winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 209 to 222.

After executing the starting winning process, a process for displaying on the second symbol display device 83 and a normal symbol variation process for performing processing as the ball passes through the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67 are executed ( S106). The details of the normal symbol variation process (S106) will be described later with reference to FIG. 223. After executing the normal symbol variation process, the firing control process is executed (S108), and other processes that should be executed periodically are executed (S109), and the timer interrupt process is ended. Note that the firing control process starts when the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operating handle 51, and the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing is not operated. This is the process of determining whether to turn on or off. The main controller 110 instructs the launch control device 112 to launch the ball when the launch of the ball is on.

Next, with reference to FIG. 209, the special symbol variation process (S104), which is one process of the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 209 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation process (S104). The special symbol variation process (FIG. 209, S104) performs various judgments and decisions based on each counter value obtained based on the ball entering the first ball entry port 64 and the second ball entry port 1640, and performs a predetermined control to enable simultaneous variable display in the first symbol display device 37 and third symbol display device 81 in the determined variable display mode, or control to stop display in the display mode showing the determination result. is executed. The special symbol variation process (FIG. 209, S104) will be described below.

In the special symbol variation process (FIG. 209, S104), first, it is determined whether or not a jackpot game is in progress (whether the jackpot flag 203u is on or not) (S201), and the jackpot flag 203u is turned on. 203u is on) (S201: Yes), there is no need to set special symbol lottery, stop of variable display, etc., and the process ends as is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot is not in progress (the jackpot flag 203u is off) (S201: No), whether or not a small win game is in progress (whether the small jackpot flag 203v is on or not) is determined (S202). In the process of S202, if it is determined that there is a small win (the small win flag 203v is on) (S202: Yes), this process is directly ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no small hit (the small hit flag 203v is off) (S202: No), it is determined whether or not the first special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (S203). If it is determined that the first special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (S203: Yes), in the first special symbol variation stop processing (S205), if the variation time of the first special symbol that is being displayed in a variable manner has elapsed, , executes a first special symbol variation stop process for stopping and displaying a stop symbol indicating the lottery result of the first special symbol (S205), and moves the process to S206. In addition, in this first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S205), when the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot of the first special symbol is stopped and displayed, the second special symbol is also forcibly displayed with the stop symbol corresponding to the loss. The process of stopping and displaying is executed. Details of this first special symbol variation stop processing (S205) will be described later with reference to FIG. 214.

On the other hand, in the process of S203, if it is determined that the first special symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner (S203: No), at least one pending data (various counter values) is stored in the first special symbol pending ball storage area 203a. On the condition that the CPU 10 holds the same, a first special symbol variation start process is executed to execute a jackpot determination and a variation pattern selection process based on the pending data (S204), and the process moves to S206. Details of this first special symbol variation start process (S204) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 210 to 213.

In the process of S206 executed after the first special symbol variation start process (S204) or the first special symbol variation stop process (S205) is executed, it is determined whether or not the second special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner. (S206), if the second special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (S206: Yes), a second special symbol variation stop process is executed (S208), and this process is ended. This second special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S208) is similar to the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S205), when the prescribed fluctuation time of the second special symbol that is being displayed fluctuating has passed, the second special symbol This is a process for setting a stop display of a stop symbol indicating the lottery result. Details of this second special symbol variation stop processing (S208) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 220 and 221.

On the other hand, in the process of S206, if it is determined that the second special symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner (S206: No), the second special symbol is A second special symbol variation start process is executed to set the start of a new variation display by executing a special symbol lottery (S207), and this process ends. Details of this second special symbol variation start process (S207) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 215 to 219.

Next, with reference to FIG. 210, the first special symbol variation start process (S204), which is one process of the special symbol variation process (FIG. 209, S104), will be described. FIG. 210 is a flowchart showing this first special symbol variation start process (S204).

In the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 210, S204), first, the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d is acquired (S301), and the value of the acquired first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d is obtained (S301). It is determined whether (N1) is a value greater than 0 (S302). In the process of S302, if it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is larger than 0 (S302: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is determined. 1 is subtracted (S303), and a held ball number command is set to notify the voice lamp control device 113 of the held ball number command indicating the value of the first special symbol held ball number counter 203d after the subtraction (S304). .

The held pitch count command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is used as a voice in the external output process (S2001) of the main process (see FIG. 227) executed by the MPU 201, which will be described later. The signal is sent to the lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the held ball number command, it extracts the value of the first special symbol held ball number counter 203d from the held ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the first special symbol held ball number counter of the RAM 223. 223c. In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c according to the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110, so the first special symbol of the main controller 110 The value can be updated while being synchronized with the value of the reserved pitch counter 203d.

When the process of S304 is completed, next, the data in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is shifted to the previous data (S305). More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the following order: reservation area 1 → execution area, reservation area 2 → reservation area 1, reservation area 3 → reservation area 2, reservation area 4 → reservation area 3.

When the process of S305 is completed, the first special symbol jackpot determination process is then executed (S306). This first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 211, S306) will be described in detail later, but based on the value of the first winning random number counter C1 shifted to the execution area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, This is a process for executing a jackpot determination as to whether or not it is a jackpot based on the set gaming state.

When the process of S306 is completed, next, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process is executed (FIG. 212, S307). Although the details will be described later, this first special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process (S307) is based on the validity determination result of the first special symbol and the fluctuation type counter stored in the execution area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. This is a process for selecting a variation pattern based on the value of CS1.

When the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307) is completed, a game state update process is then executed (S308). This game state update process (FIG. 213, S308) will be described in detail later, but by updating the values of various counters (probability change counter 203k, time saving counter 203g) that indicate the state of the pachinko machine 10, This is a process for updating the status. When the process of S308 is completed, the special figure 1 standby flag 203i is set to OFF, and a special figure 1 standby command indicating OFF is set (S309), and this process is ended.

On the other hand, in the process of S302, if it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d is 0 (S302: No), it is determined whether the special symbol 1 standby flag 203i is on or not. It is determined (S310), and if it is determined that it is on (S310: Yes), this process ends. In the process of S310, if it is determined that it is off (that is, not on) (S310: No), the special figure 1 standby flag 203i is set to on (S311), and the special figure 1 standby command indicating on is issued. After setting (S312), this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 211, the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306), which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 210, S204), will be described. FIG. 211 is a flowchart showing this first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306).

In the first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 211, S306), first, each counter value stored in the execution area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is acquired (S401). Next, it is determined whether the value of the probability change counter 203k is 1 or more (S402). That is, it is determined whether or not it is a high probability state (probability variable state of special symbols). If it is determined that the value of the variable probability counter 203k is 1 or more (that is, the special symbol is in a variable probability state) (S402: Yes), the jackpot specified in the first random number table 202a for high probability times is determined. It is determined whether or not the random number value matches the value of the first winning random number counter C1 acquired from the counter buffer, and the determination result (lottery result) is acquired (S403). On the other hand, in the process of S402, if it is determined that the probability change counter 203k is 0 (that is, the special symbol is in a low probability state) (S402: No), the first winning random number table 202a for low probability It is determined whether or not the prescribed random number value for a jackpot matches the value of the first winning random number counter C1 acquired from the counter buffer, and the lottery result is acquired (S404).

Then, it is determined whether the lottery result obtained in S403 or S404 is a jackpot (S405), and if the lottery result is a jackpot (S405: Yes), the jackpot flag 203m is set to ON for the first special symbol. (S406), the lottery result of the first special symbol is set as a jackpot (S407). Then, based on the value of the acquired winning type counter, a jackpot symbol of the first special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set (S408), and a value corresponding to the current gaming state is set in the winning state storage area. 203n (S409), and ends this process.

On the other hand, in the process of S405, if it is determined that the lottery result is a loser (S405: No), a loser symbol of the first special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set (S410), and then , this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 212, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307), which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 210, S204), will be described. FIG. 212 is a flowchart showing this first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307).

In the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (FIG. 212, S307), first, in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 211, S306), it is determined whether the lottery result of the first special symbol is a jackpot or not. 1. It is determined whether or not a special symbol jackpot is set (S501). Here, whether or not it is a jackpot is determined by whether or not the jackpot flag 203m is on for the first special symbol. This jackpot flag 203m is set to ON in the process of S406 in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 211) described above.

In the process of S501, if it is determined that the first special symbol jackpot is set (S501: Yes), the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 211) described above is obtained in the process of S401. Based on the value of the first winning type counter C2, the jackpot type is determined from the jackpot type selection table 202d (see FIG. 193(a)) (S502), and the process moves to S503.

On the other hand, in the process of S501, if it is determined that the lottery result of the first special symbol is a loss (that is, the jackpot flag 203m for the first special symbol is off) (S501: No), the process of S502 is performed. This is skipped and the process proceeds to S503.

In the process of S503, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is acquired from the execution area of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a (S503). Next, the variable pattern selection table (see FIGS. 194 to 196) corresponding to the gaming state is read out (S504), and the process moves to S505. Note that the gaming state is determined based on the value of the probability change counter 203k and the value of the time saving counter 203g. In the process of S505, a variation pattern corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 is selected from the read variation pattern selection table (S505), and then a special figure 1 variation pattern command is set based on the selected variation pattern ( S506).

When the process of S506 is completed, a special figure 1 stop type command indicating a stop symbol is set (S507). Next, a start of variation of the first special symbol is set on the first symbol display device 37 (S508), and this process is ended.

Next, with reference to FIG. 213, the game state update process (S308), which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 210), will be described. FIG. 213 is a flowchart showing this gaming state update process (S308).

When the game state update process (see FIG. 213) is started, first, it is determined whether the value of the probability change counter 203k is greater than 0 (S601). If it is determined that the value of the probability change counter 203k is 0 (S601: No), the process of S602 to S605 is skipped and the process moves to the process of S606. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203k is greater than 0 (S601: Yes), the value of the probability variation counter is subtracted by 1 (S602), and a remaining probability variation number command indicating the value of the probability variation counter is set ( S603).

The remaining probability variation number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is used as an audio output in the external output process (S2001) of the main process (see FIG. The signal is sent to the lamp control device 113. When the audio lamp control device 113 receives the remaining probability variation number command, it extracts the value of the probability variation counter 203k from the remaining probability variation number command, and stores the extracted value in the remaining probability variation number area 223o of the RAM 223. In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the remaining probability variable number area 223o in accordance with the held pitch count command transmitted from the main control device 110, so it is synchronized with the value of the probability variation counter 203k of the main control device 110. However, you can update its value. Thereby, the audio lamp control device 113 can accurately grasp whether or not it is in a potential state, and can execute the corresponding effect.

When the process of S603 is finished, it is determined whether the value of the variable probability counter 203k after the subtraction is 0 (S604), and if it is determined that the value after the subtraction is not 0 (S604: No), the process of S605 is performed. The process is skipped and the process moves to S606. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the variable probability counter 203k is 0 (S604: Yes), a state command indicating the normal state is set (S605), and the process moves to S606.

In the process of S606, it is determined whether the value of the time-saving counter 203g is greater than 0 (S606), and if the value of the time-saving counter 203g is 0 (S606: No), this process is directly ended. On the other hand, in the process of S606, if it is determined that the time saving counter 203g is greater than 0 (S606: Yes), the value of the time saving counter 203g is subtracted by 1 (S607), and a remaining time saving number command indicating the value of the time saving counter is set. (S608), this process ends.

The remaining time shortening number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is used as an audio output in the external output process (S2001) of the main process (see FIG. 227) executed by the MPU 201, which will be described later. The signal is sent to the lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the remaining time reduction number command, it extracts the value of the time saving counter 203g from the remaining time reduction number command, and stores the extracted value in the remaining time reduction number area 223q of the RAM 223. In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the remaining time reduction number area 223q according to the number of reserved balls command transmitted from the main control device 110, so it is synchronized with the value of the time reduction counter 203g of the main control device 110. However, you can update its value.

Next, with reference to FIG. 214, the first special symbol variation stop process (S205), which is one process of the special symbol variation process (FIG. 209, S104), will be described. FIG. 214 is a flow chart showing this first special symbol variation stop processing (S205).

In the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (FIG. 214, S205), first, it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the fluctuation display of the first special symbol (S701), and if it is determined that it is the end timing, ( S701: Yes), it is determined whether the jackpot flag 203m is set on for the first special symbol (special symbol 1) (S702). If it is determined that the jackpot flag 203m is set on for the first special symbol (S702: Yes), the special symbol 2 fluctuation stop flag 203p is set on (S703), and the special symbol 2 fluctuation stop is set. A special figure 2 fluctuation stop command indicating that the flag 203p is turned on is set (S704). Next, the second special symbol on the first symbol display device 37 is stopped and displayed as a missed symbol (S705).

After completing the process of S705, a jackpot scenario corresponding to the selected jackpot type is set (S706), and the jackpot flag 203m, probability change counter 203k, and time saving counter 203g are reset (S707). Next, the jackpot flag 203u is set to ON (S708), and the process moves to S709.

On the other hand, in the process of S702, if the jackpot flag 203m is set to OFF for the first special symbol (S702: No), the process of S703 to S708 is skipped and the process proceeds to S709.

In the process of S709, a special symbol 1 confirmation command is set to notify the audio lamp control device 113 that the first special symbol is confirmed and stopped (S709). After that, a process is executed to stop the variable display of the first special symbol that is being displayed in a variable manner on the first special symbol display device 37 (S710), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S701, if it is determined that it is not the end timing of the variable display of the first special symbol being executed (S701: No), the display of the first special symbol on the first symbol display device 37 is updated ( S711), this process ends.

In this way, in the first special symbol stop process (S205), when the prescribed variation time of the first special symbol that is being displayed in a variable manner has elapsed (S701: Yes), the symbol indicating the determination result of the first lottery game is displayed. Processing to stop the variable display (S703 to S710) is executed. Further, when the lottery result of the first special symbol is determined to be a jackpot (S702: Yes), a process (S703, S704) for forcibly stopping the second special symbol that is being displayed in a variable manner is executed.

In addition, in this first control example, when the stop symbol of the first special symbol is stopped and displayed as a jackpot symbol, the second special symbol that is being displayed in a variable manner is forcibly stopped and displayed as a winning symbol. It is not limited to. For example, the variable display of the second special symbol may be interrupted (temporarily stopped) at the time when the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol is stopped and displayed. Then, after the jackpot of the first special symbol ends, the variable display of the second special symbol may be resumed. As a result, it is possible to create a more natural performance compared to the case where a forced stop is made due to a miss. Furthermore, in this control example, a jackpot scenario is set in the process of S706 based on the gaming state stored in the winning state storage area 203n in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 211). For example, a jackpot scenario is set in the process of S706 based on the game state stored in the winning state storage area 203n in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 211) using the opening period of the jackpot game. You may also do so.

Next, with reference to FIG. 215, the second special symbol variation start process (S207), which is one process of the special symbol variation process (FIG. 209, S104), will be described. FIG. 215 is a flowchart showing this second special symbol variation start process (S207).

In the second special symbol variation start process (FIG. 215, S207), first, it is determined whether the special symbol 2 variation stop flag 203p is set to ON (S801). When it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203p is set to ON (S801: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203p is set to OFF, and this process is ended. As mentioned above, the special figure 2 variation stop flag 203p is a flag that is set to ON when the jackpot variation of the first special symbol ends, and the second special symbol is stopped and displayed at the stop symbol corresponding to the loss. . That is, if the special symbol 2 fluctuation stop flag 203p is on, it means that a jackpot is started, so the fluctuation start of the second special symbol should not be set. Therefore, if the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203p is on in the process of S801, the present process is ended without executing the processes of S802 to S810 for setting the start of fluctuation.

On the other hand, in the process of S801, if it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203p is set to OFF (that is, not set to ON) (S801: No), It is determined whether a winning is detected (S802). If winning into the second ball entrance 1640 is detected (S802: Yes), then the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the fluctuation type counter CS1, and the small winning type counter C5 Each value is acquired and stored in the second special symbol execution area 203b (S803), and a second special symbol jackpot determination process is executed to execute a jackpot determination of the second special symbol based on each stored counter value. (S804). Details of this second special symbol jackpot determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 216.

When the process of S804 is completed, next, a second special symbol variation pattern selection process for selecting a variation pattern is performed based on the lottery result of the second special symbol and the value of the variation type counter CS1 acquired in the process of S803. Execute (S805). Details of this second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S805) will be described later with reference to FIG. 218. After the process of S805 is completed, the above-mentioned game state update process (see FIG. 213) is executed (S806), and the special figure 2 standby flag 203j is set to OFF, and the special figure 2 standby command indicating OFF is issued. After setting (S807), this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S801, if it is determined that a winning for the second ball entrance 1640 is not detected (S801: No), it is determined whether the special map 2 standby flag 203j is on (S808 ), if it is on (S808: Yes), this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S808, if it is determined that the special figure 2 standby flag 203j is off, the special figure 2 standby flag 203j is set to on (S809), and the second special symbol stops changing. A special figure 2 standby command is set to notify the audio lamp control device 113 of this fact (S810), and the process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 216, the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S804), which is one process of the second special symbol variation start process (FIG. 215, S207), will be described. FIG. 216 is a flowchart showing this second special symbol jackpot determination process (S804).

In this second special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 216, S804), the same process as the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 211) described above is executed, so the first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 211) is similar to the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 211). We will mainly explain the differences between the

When the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S804) is executed, each counter value stored in the second special symbol reserved ball execution area 203b is acquired (S901). Then, the process of S902 to S904 is executed to obtain a lottery result as to whether or not it is a jackpot based on each obtained counter value and the value of the variable probability counter 203k. These processes are the same as the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 211), except that the counter value used for lottery (judgment) is acquired from the second special symbol execution area 203b. Control is executed.

When the process of S903 or S904 is completed, it is determined whether the obtained lottery result is a jackpot (S905), and if it is determined that it is a jackpot (S905: Yes), the lottery result of the second special symbol is determined. The processing of S906 to S909 for setting the jackpot is executed, and the present processing ends. In each process of S906 to S909, the same process as each process of S406 to S409 for setting the lottery result of the first special symbol as a jackpot in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 211) is executed. be done.

On the other hand, in the process of S905, if it is determined that the obtained lottery result of the second special symbol is not a jackpot (S905: No), a stop symbol corresponding to a small hit or a miss of the second special symbol is set. The special figure 2 deviation variation process is executed (S910), and this process is ended. The details of this special figure 2 off variation processing will be explained with reference to FIG. 217. FIG. 217 is a flowchart showing this special figure 2 off variation processing (S909).

In the special figure 2 out-of-print fluctuation processing (S909), first, it is determined whether the lottery result obtained in the process of S903 or S904 in FIG. 216 is a small hit of the second special symbol (S1001), If so (S1001: Yes), the small hit flag 203o is set to ON (S1002), and the lottery result of the second special symbol is set as a small win (S1003). Then, the small winning symbol indicating the small winning type corresponding to the value of the obtained small winning type counter C5 is set as a stop symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 (S1004), and this process is ended.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the lottery result is a loser in the process of S1001 (S1001: No), a loser symbol of the second special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set (S1005), and then, This process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 218, the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S805), which is one process of the second special symbol variation start process (FIG. 215, S805), will be described. FIG. 218 is a flowchart showing this second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S805).

In the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (FIG. 212, S307), first, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is acquired from the second special symbol execution area 203b (S1101). Next, in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 216, S804), it is determined whether the lottery result of the second special symbol is a jackpot, that is, whether or not the jackpot of the second special symbol is set. (S1102). Here, whether or not it is a jackpot is determined by whether or not the jackpot flag 203m is on for the second special symbol. This jackpot flag 203m is set to ON in the process of S906 in the second special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 216) described above.

In the process of S1102, if it is determined that the jackpot of the second special symbol is set (S1102: Yes), the variable pattern selection table (see FIG. 195 and FIG. 1196) corresponding to the current gaming state is read out. (S1103). Then, based on the value of the first winning type counter C2 acquired in the process of S901 in the second special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 216), the jackpot is selected from the jackpot type selection table 202d (see FIG. 193(a)). The type is determined (S1105).

When the process of S1105 is completed, a variation pattern corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 is selected from the read variation pattern selection table (S1105), and then, a special figure 2 variation pattern command is set based on the selected variation pattern. (S1106). Then, the process moves to S1108.

On the other hand, in the process of S1102, if it is determined that the jackpot of the second special symbol is not set (S1102: No), the special symbol 2 out-of-balance fluctuation pattern selection process (S1107) is executed, and the process proceeds to S1108. Transition.

In the process of S1108, a special figure 2 stop type command indicating a stop symbol is set (S1108). Next, the start of variation of the second special symbol is set on the first symbol display device 37 (S1109), and then this process is ended.

Next, with reference to FIG. 219, this special figure 2 off variation pattern selection process (S1107) will be explained. FIG. 219 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure 2 off variation pattern selection process (S1107).

In the special figure 2 out-of-place variation pattern selection process (FIG. 219, S1107), first, it is determined whether the lottery result of the second special symbol is a small hit (S1201). Here, it is determined whether the small hit flag 203o is set to on (S1201). If it is determined that the small hit flag 203o is on (S1201: Yes), the value of the small hit type counter C5 is acquired from the second special symbol execution area (S1202). Then, based on the acquired value of the small winning type counter C5 and the small winning type selection table 202e (see FIG. 192(b)), the small winning type is selected (S1203).

Next, the fluctuation pattern selection table (see FIGS. 195 and 1196) corresponding to the current gaming state is read out (S1204), and the small winning fluctuation pattern corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is selected from the read fluctuation pattern selection table. is selected (S1205). Thereafter, a special figure 2 variation pattern command indicating the selected small hit variation pattern is set (S1206), and this process is ended.

On the other hand, in the process of S1201, if it is determined that the lottery result of the second special symbol is not a small hit (that is, a loss) (S1201: No), the fluctuation pattern selection table corresponding to the current gaming state (Fig. 195 and FIG. 1196) (S1207), and selects an outlier variation pattern corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 from the read variation pattern selection table (S1208). Thereafter, a special figure 2 variation pattern command is set based on the selected deviation variation pattern (S1209), and this process is ended.

Next, with reference to FIG. 220, the second special symbol variation stop process (S208), which is one process of the special symbol variation process (FIG. 209, S104), will be described. FIG. 220 is a flowchart showing this second special symbol variation stop processing (S208).

In the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S208), first, it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the fluctuation based on the second special symbol being executed (S1301). In the process of S1301, if it is determined that it is the end timing of the variation based on the second special symbol being executed (S1301: Yes), the jackpot flag 203m is turned on for the second special symbol (special symbol 2). It is determined whether it is set (S1303). If it is determined that the jackpot flag 203m is set on for the second special symbol (S1303: Yes), a special symbol 1 fluctuation stop command indicating the fluctuation stop of special symbol 1 is set (S1305), The process moves to step S1306.

Next, the process after S1306 differs from the process after S705 of the first special symbol variation stop process (FIG. 214, S205) described above in the following points. In the processing of S1306 and S1312, which correspond to the processing of S705 and S711, the first special symbol is changed to the second special symbol, and in the processing of S1311, which corresponds to the processing of S710, the special symbol 1 confirmation command is changed to the special symbol. They are different in that they are changed to 2 confirmation commands. Since other points are the same, detailed explanation will be omitted.

On the other hand, in the process of S1301, if it is determined that it is not the end timing of the variation based on the second special symbol being executed (S1301: No), the display of the second special symbol on the first symbol display device 37 is updated ( S1302), this process ends. In addition, in the process of S1303, if the jackpot flag 203m is set to OFF for the second special symbol (S1303: No), the special symbol 2 out-of-line stop process is executed (S1304), and this process is ended.

Next, with reference to FIG. 221, a description will be given of the special symbol 2 off-stopping process (S1304), which is one process of the second special symbol variation stopping process (FIG. 220, S208). FIG. 221 is a flowchart showing this special figure 2 off-track stop processing (S1304).

In the special figure 2 missing stop process (FIG. 221, S1304), first, it is determined whether the small hit flag 203o is set to ON (S1401). When it is determined that the small hit flag 203o is set to ON (S1401: Yes), a special figure 1 variation stop command indicating a stop of variation of the special figure 1 is set (S1402). Next, the first special symbol on the first symbol display device 37 is stopped and displayed as a missed symbol (S1403).

After completing the process of S1403, a small win scenario based on the selected small win type is set (S1404). Thereafter, the small hit flag 203o is set to OFF (S140), and the small hit medium flag 203v is set to ON (S1406).

When the process of S1406 is completed, a special symbol 2 confirmation command is set to instruct the audio lamp control device 113 to confirm and stop the second special symbol (S1407). Thereafter, the second special symbol that is being displayed in a variable manner on the first special symbol display device 37 is stopped varying at the small winning symbol (S1408), and this process is ended.

On the other hand, in the process of S1401, if it is determined that the small hit flag 203o is off (that is, the lottery result of the second special symbol is a loss) (S1401: No), the second special symbol is fixed and stopped. A special map 2 confirmation command is set to instruct the audio lamp control device 113 to do so (S1409). Thereafter, the second special symbol being variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 37 is removed, and the variation is stopped at the symbol (S1410), and this process is ended.

As described above, since the control of the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be executed independently and in parallel, the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be varied simultaneously. It can be displayed. Therefore, more special symbol lottery games can be executed within a predetermined time, and the probability that a jackpot will be awarded to a player within a predetermined time can be increased. Therefore, the player can play the game efficiently.

In addition, in this control example, when either the first special symbol or the second special symbol is displayed as a stop display for a jackpot or a small win, the other special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the other special symbol may be temporarily stopped or fluctuatingly displayed while measurement of the fluctuating time is interrupted. In such a case, the temporarily stopped special symbols are stopped in a display mode or notification mode that allows the player to know that they are temporarily stopped, so the player can see that the lottery game that was in the middle of a variable display disappears. It is possible to know that the player is not playing a jackpot game with peace of mind.

Next, with reference to FIG. 222, the start winning process (S105), which is one process of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 208) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 222 is a flowchart showing this starting winning process (S105). In the starting prize winning process (FIG. 222, S105), it is determined whether a game ball has won a prize in the first starting hole (first ball entering hole) 64, and if it has won, the maximum number of reserved balls (into the first starting hole 64) is determined. This is a process of storing each acquired counter value (up to 4) in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. In addition, when each counter value acquired based on the reserved balls is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, based on each counter value stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, , a process of predicting the validity determination result, the selected variation pattern, etc. is executed in advance. The starting winning process (FIG. 222, S105) will be described below.

In the starting winning process (FIG. 222, S105), first, it is determined whether the ball has won a prize (starting winning) in the first starting hole 64, which is the first starting hole (S1101). Here, winning into the first ball entrance 64 is detected. When it is determined that the ball has entered the first starting hole 64 (starting winning has occurred) (S1501: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is acquired (S1502). It is determined whether the acquired value (N1) is less than 4 (S1503). It is determined whether this is less than four, which is the upper limit of the number of items on hold for the first starting port 64 (that is, whether the number of items on hold has not been stored up to the upper limit). If it is determined that the acquired value (N1) is less than 4 (S1503: Yes), 1 is added to the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (1504). A command for the number of held balls to notify the audio lamp control device 113 of the number of held balls is set (S1505). Each value of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, and the fluctuation type counter CS1, which are various counter values, is read out (obtained) from the counter buffer, and the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 is read out (obtained) from the counter buffer. (S1506).

Next, based on each stored counter value, the determination result of the first special symbol, the determined winning type, and the fluctuation pattern are predicted (S1507). Then, a winning information command including the predicted success/failure determination result of the first special symbol, the winning type, and the variation pattern is set (S1508), and this process is ended.

In this way, in this control example, when a game ball enters the first starting hole (first ball entry hole) 64 and is newly held and stored, the validity determination result is determined based on the held and stored information. is determined before the start of the fluctuation and is notified to the audio lamp control device 113. This allows you to change the display mode of the held ball (for example, change the color of the held ball to a different color than usual) based on the stored validity judgment results, or display the held ball in a different color than normal. It is possible to display preview symbols and the like to perform an effect that suggests the result of the judgment to the player.

Next, with reference to FIG. 223, the normal symbol variation process (S106), which is one process of the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 223 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation process (S106). The normal symbol variation process (S106) is a process for controlling the variable display of the second symbol performed in the second symbol display unit 88, the opening time of the electric accessory 1640a, and the like.

In this normal symbol variation process (FIG. 223, S106), first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is currently hitting. (S1601). The period during which the normal symbol (second symbol) is winning includes the period from when the second symbol display device (not shown) displays the winning symbol to when the electric accessory 1640a is being controlled to open and close. If it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is hitting (S1601: Yes), this process is immediately ended.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hitting (S1601: No), it is determined whether the normal symbol on the second symbol display device is being displayed in a variable manner (S1602). If it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is being displayed in a variable manner (S1602: Yes), it is determined whether the variation time of the normal symbol being executed in the second symbol display device has elapsed (S1618). ). Incidentally, the fluctuation time here is a time that is preset by the process of S1617, which will be described later, before the fluctuation display is started in the second symbol display unit (not shown).

In the process of S1011, if the variable time has not elapsed (S1618: No), this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S1618, if it is determined that the fluctuation time of the normal symbol being fluctuatedly displayed has elapsed (S1618: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device is set (S1619). In the process of S1619, if the normal symbol lottery is a win and the display mode has been set in the process of S1613, the "○" symbol is stopped as the second symbol on the second symbol display device (not shown). It is set to be displayed (lit display). On the other hand, if the lottery of the normal symbol is a loss and the display mode at the time of loss is set by the process of S1615, an "X" symbol will be displayed on the second symbol display device (not shown) as the second symbol. It is set so that it is displayed as stopped (lit display). When the stop display is set by the process of S1619, the variable display on the second symbol display device ends, and the stop symbol (second symbol) is displayed as the second symbol in the display mode set in the process of S1613 and S1615. A stop display (lit display) is displayed on the symbol display device.

Next, it is determined whether the current lottery result of the normal symbol is a hit (S1620). If it is determined that the lottery result of this normal symbol is a win (S1620: Yes), the start of opening/closing control of the electric accessory 1640a is set (S1621). On the other hand, if it is determined that the current lottery result for the normal symbol is a loss (S1620: No), this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S1602, if it is determined that the normal symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner (S1602: No), the value of the normal symbol pending ball number counter 203e (number of times M of pending variable display in the normal symbol) is acquired. (S1603).

Next, it is determined whether the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is larger than 0 (S1604), and when it is determined that the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is 0 (S1604: No), this process is ended immediately. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is not 0 (S1604: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is subtracted by 1 (S1605).

Next, the data stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is shifted (S1606). In the process of S1606, the data stored in the normal symbol holding first to fourth areas of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the first area for normal symbol retention → execution area, the second area for regular symbol retention → the first area for regular symbol retention, the third area for regular symbol retention → the second area for regular symbol retention, the fourth area for regular symbol retention. → Shift the data in each area, such as the normal symbol holding area 3. After shifting the data, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is acquired (S1607).

Next, it is determined whether the gaming state is in a time saving state (S1608). More specifically, when the value of the time-saving counter 203g is 1 or more, it is determined that the time-saving state is present. In the process of S1608, if it is determined that the time saving state is not in progress (S1608: No), a validity determination is made based on the hit determination value of the normal symbol per random number table for low probability times (see FIG. 192(c)). The result is acquired (S1611). On the other hand, in the process of S1608, if it is determined that the time saving game is in progress (S1608: Yes), it is determined whether the first special symbol or the second special symbol is in the jackpot (S1609). In the process of S1609, if it is determined that the first special symbol or the second special symbol is hitting the jackpot (S1609: Yes), the process of S1611 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the first special symbol or the second special symbol is not a jackpot (S1609: No), the hit judgment value of the normal symbol per random number table for high probability times (see Figure 192(c)) Based on this, the validity determination result is obtained (S1610).

Next, it is determined whether the lottery result of the second symbol (normal symbol) is a win (S1612), and if it is determined that the lottery result of the second symbol (regular symbol) is not a win (that is, a loss), (S1612: No), sets the display mode of "x" which is the display mode when it is off (S1615), and moves to the process of S1616. On the other hand, in the process of S1612, if it is determined that the lottery result of the second symbol (normal symbol) is a win (that is, it is a win) (S1612: Yes), "○" which is the display mode at the time of a win. The display mode is set (S1613).

Next, the opening period of the electric accessory 1640a is set to 1 second, and the number of openings is set to 2 times (S1614). Then, in the process of S1616 executed after executing the process of S1614 or S1615, the general pattern fluctuation pattern table 202g (see FIG. 197) is read out (S1616), and the general pattern fluctuation type counter CS2 is calculated from the read general pattern fluctuation pattern table 202g. A fluctuation time corresponding to the value of is set (S1617), and this processing is ended.

Next, the through gate passage process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 224. FIG. 224 is a flowchart showing this through gate passing process (S107). This through gate passage process (S107) is executed during the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 208), and determines whether or not a game ball has passed through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67, and whether or not the game ball has passed through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67. This is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the second winning random number counter C4 if there is a winning random number counter C4.

In the through gate passage process (FIG. 224, S107), first, it is determined whether the game ball has passed through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 (S1701). Here, passage of a game ball through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the game ball has passed through the normal entry ball opening (through gate) 67 (S1701: Yes), the value of the normal symbol pending ball number counter 203e (the number of pending times M of variable display in the normal symbol) is acquired. (S1702). Then, it is determined whether the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is less than the upper limit value (4 in this control example) (S1703).

Whether the game ball has passed through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 (S1701: No), or even if the game ball has passed through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter If the value (M) of 203e is not less than 4 (S1703: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the game ball passes through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 (S1701: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is less than 4 (S1703: Yes), the normal The value (M) of the symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is incremented by 1 (S1704).

When the process of S1704 is finished, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the above-mentioned timer interrupt process (see FIG. 208) is stored in the empty holding area (holding first The data is stored in the first area (S1705) (from area to fourth reserved area), and the process ends. In addition, in the process of S1705, the value of the normal symbol holding ball counter 203e is referred to, and if the value is 1, the holding first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the second reserved area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the third reserved area is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the fourth reserved area is set as the first area.

Although details will be described later, in this control example, the lottery based on the second special symbol is set to be more advantageous to the player than the lottery based on the first special symbol. Therefore, the state in which a ball can enter the second ball entry opening 1640, which is provided when the lottery result of the normal symbol (second symbol) becomes a win, is a more advantageous gaming state than the normal gaming state.

By indicating the timing at which such a gaming state is provided based on the preliminary determination result of the normal pattern, the player can play the game without missing a gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state. In addition, when performing an effect using such a preliminary determination result of a common figure, not only the effect is based on the result of the judgment of the correctness of a common figure, but also the electric accessory 1640a is released when the common figure is determined to be a hit. It is a good idea to create a performance that suggests the timing. By doing this, in the normal game state, the game is played aiming at the left side game area of the game board 13, and the second ball entrance 1640 (the ball entrance with the electric accessory 1640a) is connected to the game board 13. Even if the electric accessory 1640a is placed on the right side, it is possible to switch to a game that aims at the right side of the game board 13 (so-called right-handed play) before the electric accessory 1640a performs the opening operation, and it is possible to switch to a game in which the game board 13 is aimed at the right side (so-called right-handed play). This also has the effect of increasing the possibility that the ball will enter the second ball entry port 1640.

FIG. 225 is a flowchart showing NMI interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or the like. Through this NMI interrupt processing, information on the occurrence of power outage is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power outage or the like, a power outage signal SG1 is output from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed, starts NMI interrupt processing, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information (S1801), and ends the NMI interrupt processing. do.

Note that the above NMI interrupt process is similarly executed by the payout control device 111, and information on the occurrence of power outage is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or the like, a power outage signal SG1 is output from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Then, NMI interrupt processing is started.

Next, with reference to FIG. 226, a startup process executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 when power is turned on to main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 226 is a flowchart showing this startup process.

This start-up process is started by a reset when the power is turned on. In the start-up process (FIG. 226), first, initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S1901). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, wait processing (1 second in this control example) is executed to wait for the sub-side control devices (peripheral control devices such as the audio lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to become operational. (S1902). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S1903).

Thereafter, it is determined whether the RAM erase switch (FIG. 3132) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S1904), and if it is turned on (S1904: Yes), the process moves to S1910. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch (FIG. 3132) is not turned on (S1904: No), it is further determined whether power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1905), and if it is not stored (S1905). : No), there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power shutdown did not end normally, so in this case as well, the process moves to S1910.

If power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1905: Yes), a RAM judgment value is calculated (S1906), and if the calculated RAM judgment value is not normal (S1907: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the judgment value does not match the RAM judgment value saved when the power was cut off, the backed up data has been destroyed, and the process also moves to S1910 in such a case. Note that the RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of this RAM judgment value, the effectiveness of the backup may be determined based on whether the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

In the process of S1910, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111 serving as a sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S1910). When the payout control device 111 receives this payout initialization command, it clears the area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and becomes ready to start controlling the payout of game balls. After transmitting the payout initialization command, the main control device 110 executes initialization processing of the RAM 203 (S1911, S1912).

As described above, in this pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is to be initialized when the power is turned on, such as when the hall starts business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch (FIG. 3132). Therefore, if the RAM erase switch (FIG. 3132) is pressed when the startup process is executed, the RAM 203 initialization process (S1911, S1912) is executed.

In addition, in the case where power-off occurrence information is not set or if a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.), the RAM 203 initialization processing (S1911, S1912) is similarly executed. . In the RAM initialization process (S1911, S1912), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S1911), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S1912). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process moves to S1913.

On the other hand, the RAM erase switch (Fig. 3132) is not turned on (S1904: No), the power-off occurrence information is stored (S1905: Yes), and the RAM judgment values (checksum value, etc.) are normal. If there is (S1907: Yes), the power-off occurrence information is cleared while retaining the data backed up in the RAM 203 (S1908). Next, a payout return command upon power restoration is transmitted to return the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the gaming state at the time of power cutoff (S1909), and the process moves to S1910. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, it becomes ready to start payout control of game balls while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

Next, a production permission command is output to the audio lamp control device 113 to permit execution of various productions (S1913). After that, each value of the variable probability counter 203k and the time saving counter 203g is read out (S1914), and a status command is set based on the read counter value (S1915). When the process of S1915 is completed, interrupts are permitted (S1916), and the process moves to the main process described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 227, the main processing (S2000) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the startup processing described above will be described. FIG. 227 is a flowchart showing this main processing (S2000). In this main process (S2000), a counter update process and a power-off process are executed.

In the main processing (FIG. 227, S2000), first, output data such as commands stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223 during the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 208) is sent to each of the sub-sides. External output processing to be sent to a control device (peripheral control device) is executed (S2001).

Next, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated (S2002). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this control example), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203.

When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is completed, the prize ball count signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S2003). Jackpot control processing is executed (S2004). Regarding this jackpot control process (S2004), the details will be described later with reference to FIG. 228, but a process for setting the operation of the variable prize winning device 65 in the jackpot game is executed.

After the jackpot game process (S2004) is executed, the small win control process (S2005) is executed. This small hit control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 232. After that, electric accessory opening/closing processing is executed (S2006). In this electric accessory opening/closing process (S2006), opening/closing processing of the electric accessory 1640a is executed. After that, display control processing of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S2007).

Next, the second symbol display device 83 executes a display control process for a second symbol (for example, a "○" or "x" symbol) (S2008). Briefly, on the condition that the ball passes through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is acquired at the timing of passing, and the value is displayed on the second symbol display device 83. A variable display of the second symbol (normal symbol) is performed. Then, a second symbol (normal symbol) is drawn based on the value of the second winning random number counter C4, and when the second symbol (normal symbol) becomes a winning state, the electric accessory 1640a is opened for a predetermined time.

Thereafter, it is determined whether or not power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S2009), and if the power outage occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S2009: No), a power outage signal is sent from the power outage monitoring circuit 252. SG1 is not output and the power is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether the execution timing of the next main process has arrived, that is, whether a predetermined time (4 msec in this control example) has elapsed since the start of the previous main process (S2010). If the predetermined time (4 ms) has already elapsed (S2010: Yes), the process moves to S2001, and each process from S2001 described above is repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet passed since the start of the current main processing (S2010: No), the The first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S2011).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S2011). Specifically, 1 is added to the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (479, 232 in this control example), it is cleared to 0. . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are respectively stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process in S2002 (S2012).

Here, since the execution time of each process from S2001 to S2008 changes depending on the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant but is displayed in a variable manner. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using this remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (i.e. , the initial value of the first random number counter C1, and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be randomly updated, and similarly, the variation type counter CS1 can also be randomly updated.

In addition, in the process of S2009, if the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S2009: Yes), the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power outage or the power is turned off, and the power outage signal SG1 is output from the power outage monitoring circuit 252. As a result, the NMI interrupt processing shown in FIG. 225 has been executed, so the processing at power-off after S2013 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S2013), and a power-off command indicating that the power has been cut off is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the audio lamp control device 113). and transmits it (S2014). Then, a RAM judgment value is calculated, the value is saved (S2015), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S2016), and an infinite loop is continued until the power is completely cut off and processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value in the backed up stack area and work area of the RAM 203.

Note that the process in S2009 is performed at the end of a series of processes corresponding to changes in the state of the game performed in S2001 to S2008, or at the end of one cycle of the processes in S2011 and S2012 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main processing of the main controller 110, information on the occurrence of a power outage is checked at the timing when each setting is completed, so when recovering from a power off state, the processing must be performed after the startup processing is completed. It is possible to start from the process of S2001. That is, the process can be started from the process of S2001, as in the case where it is initialized in the start-up process. Therefore, in the process when the power is turned off, without saving the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 to the stack area or saving the value of the stack pointer, in the initial setting process (FIG. 226, S1901), By setting the stack pointer to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the process of S2001. Therefore, the control burden on the main controller 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main controller 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 228, the jackpot control process (S2004) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 228 is a flowchart showing this jackpot control process (S2004). This jackpot control process (S2004) is executed during the main interrupt process (see FIG. 227), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in a jackpot state with a special symbol, it executes various effects according to the jackpot, and executes specific prize winnings. This is a process for opening or closing the opening (large opening) 65a.

In the jackpot control process (FIG. 228, S2004), first, it is determined whether a jackpot scenario is set (S2101). If it is determined that the jackpot scenario has not been set (S2101: No), the process is immediately ended. On the other hand, in the process of S2101, if it is determined that a jackpot scenario has been set (S2101: Yes), the jackpot scenario is updated (S2102), and it is determined whether it is the timing to start the opening of the jackpot scenario (S2103). ). More specifically, in the process of S2102, 1 is added to the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter (not shown), and in the process of S2103, the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter (not shown) is set to the opening start of the jackpot scenario. Determine whether the value corresponds to .

In the process of S2103, if it is determined that it is the timing to start the opening of the jackpot scenario (S2103: Yes), a jackpot opening command is set (S2104), and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no timing to start the opening of the jackpot scenario (S2103: No), then it is determined whether it is the timing to start a new round of the jackpot scenario (S2105).

In the process of S2105, if it is determined that it is the start timing of a new round of the jackpot scenario (S2105: Yes), a jackpot operation setting process is executed (S2106), and this process is ended. Details of this jackpot operation setting process (S2106) will be described later with reference to FIG. 229.

On the other hand, in the process of S2105, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of a new round of the jackpot scenario (S2105: No), then it is determined whether the round end condition of the currently executed round is satisfied ( S2107). Here, in this control example, when a predetermined number of balls (for example, 5 balls) win in total while the specific winning opening 65a is open, or when the opening period of the specific winning opening 65a has elapsed for a predetermined time. If so, it is determined that the round end condition has been met. If it is determined that the round end condition for the specific winning opening 65a is satisfied (S2107: Yes), the specific winning opening 65a is set to be closed in the process of S2108 (the opening/closing plate of the first specific winning opening 65a The solenoid is set to OFF so that 65f1 is in the closed state), and this processing is ended. Note that the above-described determination processing from S2105 to S2107 is repeatedly executed for the number of jackpot rounds set in the jackpot scenario.

On the other hand, in the process of S2107, if it is determined that the round end condition of the currently executed round is not satisfied (S2107: No), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the ending effect (S2109), and the ending effect is If it is the start timing (S2109: Yes), an ending command for jackpot is set (S2110), and this process ends. The ending command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is used for voice lamp control during the external output processing (S2001) of the main processing (see FIG. 227) executed by the MPU 201. It is sent to device 113. When the audio lamp control device 113 receives the ending command, it transmits a display ending command to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display ending command, the third symbol display device 81 starts an ending effect indicating the end of the jackpot.

On the other hand, in the process of S2109, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of the ending performance (S2109: No), it is determined whether it is the end timing of the jackpot (S2111). Here, the end timing of the jackpot refers to the case where the execution period of the ending performance has elapsed. In the process of S2111, if it is determined that it is the end timing of the jackpot (S2111: Yes), a jackpot end process is executed to set the gaming state after the jackpot ends (S2112), and this process ends. Details of this jackpot ending process (S2112) will be described later with reference to FIG. 230.

On the other hand, if it is not the end timing of the jackpot (S2111: No), the first winning process is executed (S2113), and this process ends. Details of this first winning process (S2113) will be described later with reference to FIG. 231.

Next, with reference to FIG. 229, the jackpot operation setting process (S2106), which is one process in the jackpot control process (FIG. 228, S2004), will be described. FIG. 229 is a flowchart showing the contents of this jackpot operation setting process (S2106). In the jackpot operation setting process (FIG. 229, S2106), first, an opening scenario in which an opening operation corresponding to the number of jackpot rounds to be started is set is read (S2201). The opening operation of the flow path solenoid (variable solenoid) 65k (see Fig. 179) is set based on the data read in S2201 (S2202). After that, the opening/closing plate 65f1 (see Fig. 179) attached to the specific prize opening 65a is set. The opening operation is set using the data read in the process of S2201 (S2203), and this process ends.

In this way, each operation of the variable prize winning device 65 is set at the start of each round, so even if an unexpected power outage occurs during a jackpot game, the jackpot game will not end prematurely. Problems can be suppressed.

In addition, in this control example, in the case of a small winning game, the operation of the variable probability solenoid 65k is not set, and only the opening operation of the opening/closing plate 65f1 is set. The small win consists of two rounds, and in each round, the opening/closing plate 65f1 is opened for one second.

Next, with reference to FIG. 230, the jackpot end process (S2112), which is one process in the jackpot control process (FIG. 228, S2004) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, will be described. This jackpot end process (S2112) is a process for setting the gaming state after the jackpot ends, as described above. FIG. 230 is a flowchart showing the contents of this jackpot ending process (S2112).

In the jackpot ending process (FIG. 230, S2112), first, the gaming state at the time of winning is specified based on the state at winning state storage area 203n (S2301). Next, it is determined whether the gaming state at the time of winning is not a probable state (S2302). In the process of S2302, if it is determined that the gaming state at the time of winning is not a probable state (S2302: No), it is determined whether the V winning flag 203f is on (S2303). In the process of S2303, if it is determined that the V winning flag 203f is on (S2303: Yes), it means that the ball passed through the V passing switch 65e3 during this jackpot, so the value of the probability change counter 203k is set to 120 (S2304).

Next, it is determined whether the current jackpot type is jackpot B to D (S2305). If it is not a jackpot B to D (S2305: No), the value of the time saving counter 203g is set to 120 (S2306), and the process moves to S2307.

On the other hand, in the process of S2302, if it is determined that the gaming state at the time of winning is a probable state (S2302: Yes), or in the process of S2303, it is determined that the V winning flag 203f is off (that is, not on). If it is determined (S2303: No), or if it is not a jackpot B to D in the process of S2305 (S2305: No), the process moves to S307. As a result, if the gaming state at the time of winning is not a probable state, and if the game ball does not pass the V passage switch 65e3 during the jackpot, the gaming state after the jackpot is set to the normal state. Further, when the game ball passes through the V passage switch 65e3 and the winning type is jackpot B to D, a probability change state of 120 times is set after the jackpot. On the other hand, when the game ball passes the V passing switch 65e3 and the winning type is jackpot A, 120 probability change states and 100 time saving states are set after the jackpot.

In the process of S2307, both the jackpot flag 203u and the V winning flag 203f are set to OFF, and the winning state storage area 203n is cleared (S2207). Thereafter, a status command is set according to the set gaming status (S2308), and this process is ended.

In this way, in this control example, at the end of the jackpot game, it is determined whether the variable probability setting flag 203h is on, and if it is on, the variable probability flag 203g is set to on. Therefore, at the end of the jackpot game, it is possible to set a high probability game state by determining whether the game ball has passed through the V passing switch 65e3. Therefore, it is possible to keep the player expecting to move to the high probability gaming state (latent probability variable gaming state ST2 or probability variable gaming state ST3) until the jackpot game ends. Furthermore, if the game ball can pass through the V passing switch 65e3 during a jackpot game, a high probability gaming state (latent probability variable gaming state ST2 or probability variable gaming state ST3) will be granted after the jackpot game, so during the jackpot game. Also, the player can play the game with an interest in whether or not the game ball passes through the V passing switch 65e3.

Next, details of the first winning process (S2113) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 231. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing this first winning process (S2113). This first winning process (S2113) is executed in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 228), and as described above, is a process for performing control according to the winning in the specific winning opening (large open opening) 65a. be.

In this first winning process (FIG. 231, S2113), first, it is determined whether the current round validity period is in effect (S2401). Here, the round validity period is the period during which the round game is set, that is, the period from when the specific winning hole (large open hole) 65a is set to the open state until the end of the interval period (5 seconds). It is. In the process of S2401, if it is not the round validity period (S2401: No), the winning counter 203h is reset (S2402), and the process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S2401, if it is determined that the current round validity period is reached (S2401: Yes), then it is determined whether a winning in the specific winning opening (large open opening) 65a has been detected (S2403), If a winning in the specific winning opening (large open opening) 65a is not detected (S2403: No), this process is ended as is.

On the other hand, in the process of S2403, if a winning for the specific winning opening (large open opening) 65a is detected (S2403: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the winning winning counter 203h and updated (S2404). Then, it is determined whether the value of the winning counter 203h is greater than or equal to the upper limit value (5 in this control example) (S2405), and if the value of the winning counter 203h is less than or equal to the upper limit value (5 in this control example) ( S2405: No), this process is ended as is.

On the other hand, if the value of the winning counter 203h is equal to or higher than the upper limit value (5 in this control example) (S2405: Yes), the closing of the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a (opening/closing plate 65f1 attached thereto) is set. (S2406). Next, the jackpot scenario is updated to the end of the round (S2407), and it is determined whether the V winning flag 203f is on (S2408). If the V winning flag 203f is on (S2408: Yes), the process is immediately ended.

On the other hand, if the V winning flag 203f is off (that is, not on) (S2408: No), it is determined whether the V passing switch 65e3 is on (S2409). In the process of S2409, if the V passing switch 65e3 is off (that is, not on) (S2409: No), this process is directly ended.

In the process of S2409, if the V passage switch 65e3 is on (S2409: Yes), the V winning flag is set on. Then, a V winning command is set, and this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 232, the small hit control process (S2005), which is one process in the main process (see FIG. 227) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 227 is a flowchart showing the details of this small hit control process (S2005).

In the small win control process (FIG. 232, S2005), first, it is determined whether a small win scenario is set (S2501). Specifically, the process of S1404 of the special drawing 2 out-of-game stop process (see FIG. 221) is executed, and it is determined whether a small winning scenario is set. In the process of S2501, if a small winning scenario is not set (S2501: No), this process is directly ended.

On the other hand, in the process of S2501, if a small winning scenario is set (S2501: Yes), the small winning scenario is updated (S2502), and it is determined whether it is the timing to start the opening of the small winning scenario (S2503). More specifically, in the process of S2502, 1 is added to the counter value of the small win scenario counter (not shown), and in the process of S2503, the counter value of the small win scenario counter (not shown) is set to the small win scenario. Determine whether the value corresponds to the opening start of .

In the process of S2503, if it is determined that it is the timing to start the opening of the small win scenario (S2503: Yes), a small win opening command is set (S2504), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the timing to start the opening of the small winning scenario (S2503: No), then it is determined whether it is the timing to start the round of the small winning scenario (S2505).

In the process of S2505, if it is determined that it is the timing to start the round of the small win scenario (S2505: Yes), the small win operation setting process is executed (S2506), and this process ends. The details of the small winning operation setting process (S2506) will be described later with reference to FIG. 233. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the timing to start the round of the small win scenario (S2505: No), then it is determined whether the round end condition of the currently executed round is satisfied (S2507). Here, in this control example, when a predetermined number of balls (for example, 5 balls) win in total while the specific winning opening 65a is open, or when the opening period of the specific winning opening 65a has elapsed for a predetermined time. If so, it is determined that the round end condition has been met.

In the process of S2507, if it is determined that the round end condition of the currently executed round is satisfied (S2507: Yes), the specific winning opening 65a is set to be closed in the process of S2108 (the first The solenoid is set to OFF so that the opening/closing plate 65f1 of the specific winning opening 65a is in a closed state), and this process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the round end condition of the specific winning hole 65a is not satisfied (S2507: No), it is determined whether it is the timing to start the ending effect (S2509).

In the process of S2509, if it is determined that it is the timing to start the ending effect (S2509: Yes), an ending command for a small win is set (S2510), and this process ends. The ending command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is used for voice lamp control during the external output processing (S2001) of the main processing (see FIG. 227) executed by the MPU 201. The information is sent to the device 113. When the audio lamp control device 113 receives the ending command, it transmits a display ending command to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display ending command, the third symbol display device 81 starts an ending effect indicating the end of the jackpot.

On the other hand, in the process of S2509, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of the ending performance (S2509: No), it is determined whether it is the end timing of the small win (S2511). Here, the end timing of the small hit indicates the case where the execution period of the ending effect has elapsed.

In the process of S2511, if it is determined that it is the end timing of the small win (S2511: Yes), the small win medium flag 203v is set to OFF (S2512), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is not the end timing of the small win (S2511: No), the second winning process is executed (S2513) and the present process ends. Details of this second winning process (S2513) will be described later with reference to FIG. 234.

Next, with reference to FIG. 233, the small winning operation setting process (S2506), which is one process in the small winning control process (FIG. 232, S2005), will be described. FIG. 233 is a flowchart showing the contents of this small winning operation setting process (S2506). In the small winning operation setting process (FIG. 233, S2506), first, an opening scenario in which an opening operation corresponding to the number of small winning rounds to be started is set is read (S2601). The opening operation of the specific winning opening 65a (the accompanying opening/closing plate 65f1 (see FIG. 179)) is set based on the data read in the process of S2601 (S2602), and this process is ended.

In this way, each operation of the variable prize winning device 65 is set at the start of each round, so even if an unexpected power outage occurs during a jackpot game, the jackpot game will not end prematurely. Problems can be suppressed.

Next, details of the second winning process (S2513) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 234. FIG. 234 is a flowchart showing this second winning process (S2513). This second winning process (S2513) is executed in the small winning control process (see FIG. 232), and as described above, is a process for performing control according to the winning in the specific winning opening 65a.

In this second winning process (FIG. 234, S2513), first, it is determined whether the current round validity period is in effect (S2701). Here, the round valid period is the period during which the round game is set, that is, the period from when the specific winning hole 65a is set to the open state until the end of the interval period (5 seconds). In the process of S2401, if it is not the round validity period (S2701: No), the winning counter 203h is reset (S2702), and the process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S2701, if it is determined that the current round validity period is reached (S2701: Yes), then it is determined whether a winning in the specific winning hole 65a has been detected (S2703), and the process goes to the specific winning hole 65a. If no winning has been detected (S2703: No), the process ends as is.

On the other hand, in the process of S2703, if a win for the specific winning hole 65a is detected (S2703: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the winning counter 203h and updated (S2704). Then, it is determined whether the value of the winning counter 203h is greater than or equal to the upper limit value (5 in this control example) (S2705), and if the value of the winning counter 203h is less than or equal to the upper limit value (5 in this control example) ( S2705: No), this process ends as is.

On the other hand, if the value of the winning counter 203h is the upper limit value (5 in this control example) or more (S2705: Yes), the closing of the specific winning opening 65a (the accompanying opening/closing plate 65f1) is set (S2706). Next, the small win scenario is updated to the end of the round (S2707), and the process ends.

<About the control process of the audio lamp control device in the first control example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 235 to 243. The processing of the MPU 221 can be roughly divided into startup processing that is started upon power-on, and main processing that is executed after the startup processing.

First, with reference to FIG. 235, the startup process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 235 is a flowchart showing this startup process. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

When startup processing is executed, first, initialization processing associated with power-on is executed (S4001). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether the power-off processing flag is on or not, the current startup process may be interrupted by an instantaneous voltage drop (instantaneous power outage, so-called "momentary power outage"), resulting in the power-off processing in S4116 (see Figure 236). ) is started during execution (S4002). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 236, upon receiving power-off occurrence information from the main control device 110 (see S4113 in FIG. 236), the audio lamp control device 113 executes power-off processing in S4116. Before executing the power-off processing, the power-off processing flag is turned on, and after the power-off processing is completed, the power-off processing flag is turned off. Therefore, whether or not the power-off processing in S4116 is in progress can be determined based on the state of the power-off processing flag.

If the power-off processing flag is off (S4002: No), the current startup process was started after the power was completely cut off, or after a momentary power outage occurred and the power-off processing in S4116 was started. The process was started after the execution of the process was completed, or the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). be. Therefore, in these cases, it is checked whether the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S4003).

Confirmation of data destruction in the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword "55AAh" has been written in the specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S4006. Therefore, it is possible to check the data stored in the specific area, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data destruction in the RAM 223, and conversely, if it is not "55AAh", it can be confirmed that the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed. If data destruction in the RAM 223 is confirmed (S4003: Yes), the process moves to S2004 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data destruction in the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S4003: No), the process moves to S4008.

Note that if the current startup process is started after the power is completely shut off, the keyword "55AAh" will not be stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 will be lost due to the power shutoff). ), it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S4003: Yes), and the process moves to S4004. On the other hand, the current start-up process was started after a momentary power outage occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S4116 was completed, or the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 was reset only due to noise or the like. When the process is started, the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, so the data in the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S4003: No), and the process moves to S4008.

If the power-off processing flag is on (S4002: Yes), the current startup process is performed after a momentary power outage has occurred, and during the execution of the power-off process in S4116, the audio lamp control device 113 The process was started when the MPU 221 of the computer was reset. In such a case, since the power-off process is in the middle of execution, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct. Therefore, in such a case, control cannot be continued, so the process moves to S4004 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the process of S4004, the entire storage area of the RAM 223 is checked (S4004). The checking method is to first write "0FFh" to each byte, read each byte to check whether it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. This write and check for each byte is performed in the order of "0FFh", "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". This read/write check of the RAM 223 clears all storage areas of the RAM 223 to zero.

If the read/write check is determined to be normal for all storage areas of the RAM 223 (S4005: Yes), a keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223, and RAM destruction check data is set (S4006). By checking the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data corruption in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read/write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S4005: No), the abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified (S4007), and an endless loop is performed until the power is cut off. An abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. Note that the audio output device 226 may output a sound to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be sent to the display control device 114 to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message. You can also do this.

In the process of S4008, it is determined whether the power-off flag is turned on (S4008). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process in S4116 is executed (see FIG. 236 and S4115). In other words, the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process in S4116 is executed, so the reason why the process in S4008 is reached with the power-off flag on is because the current startup process is instantaneous. This is a case where the process is started after a power outage has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S4116 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S4008: Yes), the RAM work area is cleared to initialize each process of the audio lamp control device 113 (S4009), and after setting the initial value of the RAM 223 (S4010), the state The status setting area is updated based on the command (S4011). Next, interrupt permission is set (S4011), and the process moves to main processing. Note that the work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main controller 110.

On the other hand, the reason why the process reaches S4008 with the power-off flag turned off is because the current startup process was started after, for example, the power was completely shut off. This is a case where the process has been started, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S4008: No), the process skips S4009, which is a process of clearing the work area of the RAM 223, moves to S4010, and sets the initial value of the RAM 223 (S4010).

Note that the reason why the clearing process in S4009 is skipped is because all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process in S4004 when the process reaches S4008 from S4004 through the process in S4006. If only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and startup processing is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared. This is because it is possible to continue controlling the

Next, with reference to FIG. 236, the main processing executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 after the startup processing of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 236 is a flowchart showing this main processing. When main processing is executed, first, it is determined whether 1 millisecond or more has passed since the main processing was started or since the processing in S4101 was previously executed (S4101), and 1 millisecond If the above period has not elapsed (S4101: No), the process proceeds to S4111 without performing the processes of S4102 to S4110. In the process of S4101, determining whether 1 millisecond has elapsed is the process of S4102 to S4110 related to display (effect), and there is no need to edit in short cycles (within 1 millisecond). This is because it is preferable to execute the command determination process in S4111 and the variable display setting process in S4112 in a short cycle. By executing the process in S4111 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent failure to receive commands sent from the main controller 110. By executing the process in S4111 in a short cycle, commands received by the command determination process can be prevented. Based on this, settings regarding the variable display effect can be made without delay.

If 1 millisecond or more has elapsed in the process of S4101 (S4101: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set in the processes of S4103 to S4112 are sent to the display control device 114 ( S4102). Next, the output of each lamp is set to match the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S4108, which will be described later (S4103), and then a power-on notification process is executed (S4104). The power-on notification process is to notify that the power has been turned on for a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on. be exposed. Further, a command may be sent to the display control device 114 to notify that power has been supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. Note that if the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to step S4105 without providing notification through the power-on notification process.

In the process of S4105, a customer waiting effect is executed, and then a pending number display update process is executed (S4106). In the customer waiting performance, when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by a player for a predetermined period of time, a setting is made to switch the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen, and this setting is sent as a command to the display control device. 114.

Thereafter, frame button input monitoring/presentation processing is executed (S4107). In this frame button input monitoring/production process, in order to enhance the production effect, the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player is pressed is monitored, and when the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed, a corresponding response is performed. This is a process of setting to perform a performance. In this process, when the player's operation of the frame button 22 is detected, a frame button operation command is set to notify the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated.

When the frame button input monitoring/presentation processing is completed, lamp editing processing is then executed (S4108), and then sound editing/output processing is executed (S4109). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination parts 29 to 33 are set to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing/output processing, the output pattern of the audio output device 226 is set to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81, and sound is output from the audio output device 226 according to the setting.

After the process of S4109, liquid crystal presentation execution management process is executed (S4110). After this, the process moves to S4111. In the liquid crystal presentation execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed on the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the variable pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. The lamp editing process of S4108 is executed based on the time set in this liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. Note that the sound editing/output processing in S4109 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed on the third symbol display device 81.

Thereafter, command determination processing (S4111) is executed to perform processing according to the command received from the main controller 110, and the process moves to S4112. Details of this command determination process (S4111) will be described later with reference to FIG. 238.

In the process of S4112, in order to display a variable display effect on the third symbol display device 81, a display variation pattern command is generated based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110, and the command is sent to the display control device 114. Execute the variable display setting process, which is the process to set up to send to. Details of this variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 243.

When the process of S4112 is completed, it is determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S4113). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main controller 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S4113 (S4113: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing flag are turned on (S4115), and the power-off process is executed (S4116). After the power-off process is executed, the power-off process flag is turned off (S4117), and the process is then looped infinitely. In the power-off processing, the generation of interrupt processing is prohibited, and each output port is turned off, and output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 is turned off. It also erases the memory of the power-off occurrence information.

On the other hand, if power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of S4113 (S4113: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S4114), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S4114: No), the process returns to S4101 and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S4114: Yes), the process is looped infinitely in order to stop the execution of subsequent processes. Here, if it is determined that the RAM has been destroyed and the process loops endlessly, the main process will not be executed, so the display by the third symbol display device 81 will not change thereafter. Therefore, the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, and can call the hall clerk or the like and ask them to repair the pachinko machine 10. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may be used to notify the RAM destruction.

Next, with reference to FIG. 237, the customer waiting effect processing (S4105) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 237 is a flowchart showing the customer waiting presentation process (S4105). This customer waiting production process (S4105) is performed by sub-special figure 1 stand-by flag 223j, which is set to ON when the special figure 1 standby command or special figure 2 standby command output from the main control device 110 is received, and the sub-special figure 1 standby flag 223j. Based on the setting status of the standby flag 223m in FIG. 2, processing for setting the standby display screen is executed. The details of the customer waiting presentation process (S4105) will be explained below.

In the customer waiting presentation process (FIG. 237, S4105), first, it is determined whether or not the sub special map 1 waiting flag 223j is set to ON (S4201). If it is determined that the sub-special figure 1 standby flag 223j is set on (S4201: Yes), the value of the special figure 1 standby counter 223k is updated (S4202). Then, it is determined whether the value of the special figure 1 standby counter 223k is the upper limit value (S4203). Here, in this control example, a value (30000) corresponding to 30 seconds is set as the upper limit value of the special figure 1 standby counter 223k. In other words, the configuration is such that the special map 1 standby flag is set to ON when 30 seconds have passed since the fluctuation of special map 1 has stopped (when the value of the special map 1 standby counter 223k reaches the upper limit value). has been done.

If the value of the special figure 1 standby counter 223k is less than the upper limit value (S4203: No), the process moves to S4205.

On the other hand, in the process of S4203, if the value of the special figure 1 standby counter 223k is the upper limit value (S4203: Yes), the special figure 1 standby flag 223s is set to ON, and the sub special figure 1 standby flag 223j, Then, the standby setting flag 223u is set to OFF (S4204), and the process moves to S4205. By setting the standby setting flag 223u to OFF in the process of S4204, for example, the standby display command for display is set based on the special figure 2 standby flag 223t described later being set to ON. , When the special figure 1 standby flag 223s is set to ON, the standby display type can be determined again. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately perform a standby display according to the fluctuation status (standby status) of each special figure (special figure 1, special figure 2).

In addition, in the process of S4201, if it is determined that the sub special map 1 standby flag 223j is set to OFF (that is, not set to ON) (S4201: No), the process of S4202 to S4204 is performed. This is skipped and the process moves to step S4205.

In the process of S4205, it is determined whether or not the sub special map 2 standby flag 223m is set to ON (S4205). If it is determined that the sub-special figure 2 standby flag 223m is set to on (S4205: Yes), the value of the special figure 2 standby counter 223n is updated (S4206). Then, it is determined whether the value of the special figure 2 standby counter 223n is the upper limit value (30000) (S4207). If the value of the special figure 2 standby counter 223n is less than the upper limit value (S4207: No), the process moves to S4209.

On the other hand, in the process of S4207, if the value of the special figure 2 standby counter 223n is the upper limit value (S4207: Yes), the special figure 2 standby flag 223t is set to ON, and the sub special figure 2 standby flag 223m, Then, the standby setting flag 223u is set to OFF (S4208), and the process moves to S4209. By setting the standby setting flag 223u to OFF in the process of S4208, for example, when the standby display command for display is set based on the special figure 1 standby flag 223s being set to ON, the special When the standby flag 223t in FIG. 2 is set on, the standby display type can be determined again. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately perform a standby display according to the fluctuation status (standby status) of each special figure (special figure 1, special figure 2).

In addition, in the process of S4205, if it is determined that the sub special map 2 standby flag 223m is set to OFF (that is, not set to ON) (S4205: No), S4206 and S4207 are executed. The process is skipped and the process moves to S4209.

In the process of S4209, it is determined whether the standby setting completed flag 223u is set to on (S4209). If it is determined that the standby setting flag 223u is set on (S4209: Yes), the process skips steps S4211 to S4214 for setting the standby display type and ends this process. In other words, the state in which the standby setting flag 223u is set to ON is a state in which the fluctuation status of each special symbol (standby flag setting status) has not been changed from the state in which the standby display type has already been set. Therefore, by configuring the system so that the process for setting the standby display type is not executed when such a state is determined, it is possible to reduce the load of the process for setting the standby display type.

Although the details will be described later with reference to FIG. 241, in this control example, a new special figure variation is performed while the standby flag (special figure 1 standby flag 223s or special figure 2 standby flag 223t) is set to on. Also when receiving a command indicating that the standby has started (a special figure standby command indicating off), the process of setting the standby set flag 223u to off is executed. Therefore, the standby display type can be reset every time the fluctuation status (standby flag setting status) of special figure 1 or special figure 2 is changed, so each special figure (special figure 1, special figure 2) It is possible to more appropriately display a standby display according to the changing situation (standby situation).

On the other hand, if it is determined that the standby setting flag 223u is set to off (that is, not set to on) (S4209: No), the special map 1 standby flag 223s or the special map 2 standby flag 223t It is determined whether or not it is set to on (S4210).

In the process of S4210, if it is determined that the special figure 1 standby flag 223s or the special figure 2 standby flag 223t is set to off (that is, not set to on) (S4210: No), this process is executed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special figure 1 standby flag 223s or the special figure 2 standby flag 223t is set to on (S4210: Yes), the game state set in the state setting area 223i is read (S4211) . Then, based on the read gaming state and the settings of the special figure 1 standby flag 223s and the special figure 2 standby flag 223t, the standby display type is determined from the screen display selection table 222b (see FIG. 200) (S4212).

Next, based on the determined standby display type, a display standby display command for notifying the standby display type to the display control device 114 is set (S4213). Thereafter, the standby setting completed flag 223u is set to on (S4214), and this processing ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 238, the command determination process (S4111) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 238 is a flowchart showing this command determination process (S4111). This command determination process (S4111) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 236) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and as described above, determines the command received from the main control device 110. . The details of the command determination process (S4111) will be described below.

In the command determination process (S2111), first, the first command received from the main control device 110 among the unprocessed commands is read out from the command storage area 223a provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the special command is sent from the main control device 110. It is determined whether a 1 stop type command or a special figure 2 stop type command has been received (S4301). If it is determined that either the special figure 1 stop type command or the special figure 2 stop type command has been received (S4301: Yes), the stop type command reception process is executed (S4302) and this process is ended. Details of this stop type command reception process will be described later with reference to FIG. 239.

On the other hand, in the process of S4301, if it is determined that neither the special figure 1 stop type command nor the special figure 2 stop type command has been received (S4301: No), it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 variation pattern command has been received. It is determined (S4303). Here, the special figure 1 variation pattern command is a command for notifying the variation pattern (variation time) of the first special symbol.

In the process of S4303, if it is determined that the special figure 1 variation pattern command has been received (S4303: Yes), the special figure 1 variation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S4304), and the command is received. The variation pattern type is extracted from the special figure 1 variation pattern command (S4305), and this processing is ended. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 in a format that allows it to be identified as the variation pattern type of the first special symbol, and is used in the variation display setting process (see FIG. 243) described later. , when notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variable display effect of the first special symbol and the display mode of the variable display effect of the first special symbol (setting a variable pattern command for display of the first special symbol) used in cases where

On the other hand, if it is determined that the special figure 1 variation pattern command has not been received (S4303: No), it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 variation pattern command has been received from the main control device 110 (S4306). The special figure 2 variation pattern command is a command for notifying the variation pattern (variation time) of the second special symbol.

In the process of S4306, if it is determined that the special figure 2 variation pattern command has been received (S4306: Yes), the special figure 2 variation start flag 223e provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S4307), and the received special figure 2 variation pattern command is set to ON (S4307). The variation pattern type is extracted from the variation pattern command in FIG. 2 (S4308), and this processing ends. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 in a format that allows it to be identified as the variation pattern type of the second special symbol, and is used in the variation display setting process (see FIG. 243) described later. , when notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variable display effect of the second special symbol and the display mode of the variable display effect of the second special symbol (setting a variable pattern command for display of the second special symbol) used in cases where

In the process of S4306, if it is determined that the special figure 2 variation pattern command has not been received (S4306: No), it is determined whether the reserved ball number command has been received from the main control device 110 (S4309). If it is determined that the held ball number command has been received (S4309: Yes), the value of the first special symbol held ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110 included in the received held ball number command (i.e., the first The value of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 223c provided in the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 is updated according to the extracted counter value (the number of reserved balls displayed in the variable display of the special symbol). S4310), this process ends. In addition, since this control example does not have a configuration to hold and store the drawing of the second special symbol (special symbol 2), in the process of S4310, the value of the first special symbol (special symbol 1) reserved ball number counter 223c is Only update processing is executed.

Here, the held ball count command is sent from the main controller 110 when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 (starting winning), so it is sent by the process of S4310 every time there is a starting winning. , the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c of the audio lamp control device 113 can be adjusted to the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110. Therefore, even if the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c of the audio lamp control device 113 deviates from the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110 due to the influence of noise, the start When the number of reserved balls command is notified based on winning a prize, the value of the first special symbol reserved number of balls counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 is corrected, and the value of the first special symbol reserved number of balls of the main controller 110 is changed. It can be adjusted to the value of the counter 203d.

Further, in the process of S4309, if it is determined that the number of reserved pitches command has not been received (S4309: No), it is determined whether the winning information command has been received from the main control device 110 (S4311). In the process of S4311, if it is determined that the winning information command has been received (S4311: Yes), the information of the received winning information command (the success or failure of the special symbol lottery, the winning type, and the fluctuation pattern) is converted into the corresponding winning information. It is set in the storage area 223b (S4312), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S4311, if it is determined that the winning information command has not been received (S4311: No), it is determined whether a status command has been received (S4313). If it is determined that a status command has been received (S4313: Yes), status command processing (S4314) is executed. The details of this state command processing (S4314) will be explained with reference to FIG. A process of setting the status) in the status setting area 223i is executed.

In the process of S4313, if it is determined that the status command has not been received (S4313: No), it is determined whether the special map 1 standby command or the special map 2 standby command has been received from the main controller 110 (S4315). . In the process of S4315, if it is determined that either the special figure 1 standby command or the special figure 2 standby command has been received (S4315: Yes), the customer wait command process (S4316) is executed. The details of this customer waiting command processing (S4316) will be explained with reference to FIG. Processing for setting the standby flag 223s or special figure 2 standby flag 223t is executed.

In the process of S4315, if it is determined that neither the special chart 1 standby command nor the special chart 2 standby command has been received (S4315: No), the remaining probability variable number of times command or the remaining time short number of times command is received from the main controller 110. It is determined whether it has been done (S4317). In the process of S4315, if it is determined that either the remaining probability varying number of times command or the remaining time shortening number of times command is received (S4317: Yes), the remaining number of times updating process (S4318) is executed. The details of this remaining number update process (S4318) will be explained with reference to FIG. Processing for setting the content of the effect display to be displayed on the screen is executed.

In the process of S4317, if it is determined that neither the remaining probability variable number of times command nor the remaining time shortening number of times command has been received (S4317: No), the process according to the other commands is executed (S4319) and this process ends. do. In the process of S4319, if the other command is a command used by the audio lamp control device 113, processing corresponding to that command is performed and the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the other command is a command used by the display control device 114, that command is executed. This command is used to set a command so as to send the command to the display control device 114.

Next, with reference to FIG. 239, the stop type command reception process (S4302) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 239 is a flowchart showing this stop type command reception process (S4302). This stop type command reception process (S4302) is executed during the command determination process (see FIG. 238) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. The details of the stop type command reception process (S4302) will be described below.

In the stop type command reception process (FIG. 239, S4302), first, in response to the received command, when the special figure 1 stop type command is received, the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223f is set to on, When the special figure 2 stop type command is received, the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223g is set to ON. (S4401). Next, the stop type (big hit A to jackpot G, small hit A to small hit C, off, out of reach, etc.) is extracted from the received special chart 1 stop type command or special chart 2 stop type command (S4402), and the main Finish the process.

The stop type extracted in S4402 is stored in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. In addition, the stop type extracted from the special figure 1 stop type command can be identified as the stop type of the first special symbol, and the stop type extracted from the special figure 2 stop type command is the stop type of the second special symbol. Each is stored in a way that allows identification of the stop type. As a result, even if the first special symbol (Special symbol 1) and the second special symbol (Special symbol 2) start varying at the same time, it is possible to manage the stop type respectively, and to execute appropriate variation display. I can do it.

Next, with reference to FIG. 240, the status command processing (S4314) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 240 is a flowchart showing this status command processing (S4314). This state command processing (S4314) is executed during the command determination processing (see FIG. 238) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. The details of the status command processing (S4314) will be explained below.

In the state command processing (FIG. 240, S4314), first, the gaming state before receiving the state command is determined from the value of the state setting area 223i provided in the RAM 223 (S4501). That is, it is determined in which gaming state the state command was received. Next, it is determined whether the gaming state before receiving the state command is a definite state (S4502). If it is determined that the gaming state before receiving the state command is not the probable state (S4502: No), it is determined whether the received command is a state command indicating a transition to the probable state (S4503). In the process of S4503, if the received command is a state command indicating transition to a potential state (S4503: Yes), a potential notification effect is set to notify entry into a potential state (S4504). Then, 120 is set in the effect probability variation number area 223p (S4505), and the process moves to S4506.

On the other hand, in the process of 4502, if it is determined that the gaming state before receiving the status command is a potential state (S4502: Yes), or in the process of 4503, the received command indicates that the gaming state is a potential state. If the status command is not the one indicated (S4503: No), the process moves to S4506.

In the process of S4506, the value corresponding to the gaming status notified by the received status command is stored in the status setting area 223i (S4506), and this process ends.

As explained above, the status command processing (S4314) in this control example is based on the gaming status set in the status setting area 223i and the gaming status indicated by the status command output from the main controller 110. , it is determined that the gaming state other than the potential state has shifted to the potential state, and when the gaming state other than the potential state has shifted to the potential state, the remaining number display area of the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. A process for controlling "120" as an initial value is executed in D1 (see FIG. 187(a)). On the other hand, if you win a jackpot while in the probability state and the probability state is set again after the end of the jackpot game, it is determined in the process of S4502 that the probability state is set in the state setting area 223i (S4502 :Yes), in order to skip the processing of S4504 and S4505, the number of production probability variations displayed in the remaining number display area D1 (see FIG. 187(a)) of the third symbol display device 81 is added (reset). Never. As a result, even if you win a jackpot while in a potential state and the actual number of probability variations is reset (set to 120), the display of the number of production probability variations will continue to be the value that was displayed before winning the jackpot. It will be displayed. Therefore, the remaining number of actual probability variations (residual probability variation number) and the remainder of the production probability variation number (remaining probability variation number) displayed in the remaining number display area D1 of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 187(a)) This can make it difficult for the player to understand the timing at which the potential state ends.

In addition, in the state command processing (S4314 in FIG. 240) described above, when entering a new potential state, the same number of probability changes (120 times) as the actual number of probability changes (120 times) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Although the configuration is such that it is displayed in the remaining count display area D1, other configurations may be used. For example, a count that is smaller than the actual variable probability count may be displayed in the remaining count display area D1.

Next, the standby command processing (S4316) will be described with reference to FIG. 241. FIG. 241 is a flowchart showing this standby command processing (S4316). This status command processing (S4314) is executed in the command determination processing (see FIG. 238) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and is executed based on each standby command output from the main control device 110. Based on the (special figure 1 standby command, special figure 2 standby command), a process of setting the special figure 1 standby flag 223s and the special figure 2 standby flag 223t on or off is executed. The setting status of the special figure 1 standby flag 223s and the special figure 2 standby flag 223t is referred to in the above-mentioned customer waiting production process (see S4105 in FIG. 237).

When the standby command process (S4316) is executed, first, it is determined whether the special figure 1 standby command has been received (S4601). In the process of S4601, if it is determined that the special figure 1 standby command has been received (S4601: Yes), the sub special figure 1 standby flag 223j is set to ON (S4602), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S4601, if it is determined that the special figure 1 standby command has not been received (S4601: No), it is determined whether the special figure 1 standby command indicating OFF of the special figure 1 standby flag 203i has been received. (S4603). In the process of S4603, if it is determined that a special figure 1 standby command indicating off of the special figure 1 standby flag 203i has been received (S4603: Yes), the sub special figure 1 standby flag 223j is set to off (S4604 ), the special map 1 standby counter 223k is reset (S4605). After that, it is determined whether the special figure 1 standby flag 223s is set to on (S4606).

In the process of S4606, if it is determined that the special figure 1 standby flag 223s is set to OFF (that is, not set to ON) (S4606: No), this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S4606, if it is determined that the special map 1 standby flag 223s is set to ON (S4606: Yes), the special map 1 standby flag 223s and the standby set flag 223u are set to OFF. (S4607), this process ends.

That is, in a state where the special figure 1 standby flag 223s is set to on (a state in which 30 seconds or more have passed without any change in the special figure 1), the special figure 1 standby flag 203i is set to off. (When a special figure 1 standby command indicating that the variation of special figure 1 has been executed) is received, the special figure 1 standby flag 223s is set to OFF, and the standby set flag 223u is set to OFF. , In the customer waiting presentation process (see S4105 in FIG. 237), a corresponding waiting display type is set when the special figure 1 waiting flag 223s is set to OFF. Therefore, the standby display type can be appropriately set according to the fluctuation status of each special figure (standby flag setting status).

On the other hand, in the process of S4603, if it is determined that the special figure 1 standby command indicating that the special figure 1 standby flag 203i is turned off has not been received (S4603: No), it is determined whether the special figure 2 standby command has been received. (S4608). In the process of S4608, if it is determined that the special figure 2 standby command has been received (S4608: Yes), the sub special figure 2 standby flag 223m is set to ON (S4609), and this process is ended.

On the other hand, in the process of S4608, if it is determined that the special figure 2 standby command has not been received (S4608: No), it is determined whether the special figure 2 standby command indicating OFF of the special figure 2 standby flag 203j has been received. (S4610). In the process of S4610, if it is determined that the special figure 2 standby command indicating the off of the special figure 2 standby flag 203j has been received (S4610: Yes), the sub special figure 2 standby flag 223m is set to off (S4611 ), the special map 2 standby counter 223n is reset (S4612). After that, it is determined whether the special figure 2 standby flag 223t is set to on (S4613).

In the process of S4613, when it is determined that the special figure 2 standby flag 223t is set to OFF (that is, not set to ON) (S4613: No), this process is ended. On the other hand, in the process of S4613, if it is determined that the special map 2 standby flag 223t is set to on (S4613: Yes), the special map 1 standby flag 223s and the standby set flag 223u are set to off. (S4614), this process ends.

That is, in a state where the special figure 2 standby flag 223t is set to on (a state in which 30 seconds or more have passed without any change in the special figure 2), the special figure 2 standby flag 203j is set to off. (When a special figure 2 standby command indicating that the variation of special figure 2 has been executed) is received, the special figure 2 standby flag 223t is set to OFF, and the standby set flag 223u is set to OFF. , In the customer waiting presentation process (see S4105 in FIG. 237), a corresponding waiting display type is set when the special figure 2 waiting flag 223t is set to OFF. Therefore, the standby display type can be appropriately set according to the fluctuation status of each special figure (standby flag setting status).

On the other hand, in the process of S4610, if it is determined that the special figure 2 standby command indicating the off of the special figure 2 standby flag 203j has not been received (S4610: No), this process is ended.

Next, the remaining number of times updating process (S4318) will be described with reference to FIG. 242. FIG. 242 is a flowchart showing the contents of this remaining number update process (S4318). This remaining number update process (S4318) is executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 238) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and is executed from the main controller 110 by the remaining probability variable number command. or based on receiving a short time remaining command. A process is executed to update the contents set in the remaining probability variable number area 223o, the production probability variable floor area 223p, and the remaining time short floor number area 223q.

In the remaining number update process (S4318), first, it is determined whether a remaining probability variable number command has been received from the main controller 110 (S4651). In the process of S4651, if it is determined that the remaining probability variation number command has been received (S4651: Yes), the value corresponding to the received command is stored in the remaining probability variation number area 223o (S4652). Next, it is determined whether data indicating a potential state is stored in the state setting area 223i (S4653).

In other words, in the process of S4653, it is determined whether the currently set gaming state is a probability state or a variable probability state, and if it is determined that it is a probability state, an effect dedicated to the probability state, which will be described later, is displayed. Processing will be executed to execute. On the other hand, if it is determined that the state is in the variable probability state, the pachinko machine 10 of this control example executes the same effect display in the variable probability state and the normal state, and thus ends this process without executing the dedicated effect display. do.

In the process of S4653, if it is determined that data indicating a probability state is stored (set) in the state setting area 223i (S4653: Yes), the number of remaining probability changes notified (received) from the main controller 110 It is determined whether it is 0 times (S4654). In the process of S4654, if it is determined that the number of remaining probability changes notified (received) from the main control device 110 is 0 (S4654: Yes), the end effect of the potential state to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is Set (S4657). Then, data indicating the normal state is overwritten in the state setting area 223i, and the process moves to S4661.

On the other hand, in the process of S4654, if it is determined that the remaining probability variation number notified (received) from the main control device 110 is 1 or more (that is, not 0 times) (S4654: No), the production probability variation number area The display count stored in 223p is subtracted by 1 (S4657). Then, it is determined whether the number of production probability variations after the subtraction is 0 (S4658). In the process of S4658, if it is determined that the number of production probability variations after the subtraction is 0 (S4658: Yes), the number of times in the remaining probability variation number area 223o is set in the production probability variation number area 223p (S4659). Thereafter, a revival performance is set to notify the set number of times in the performance probability variable number area 223p (S4660), and the process moves to S4661.

In other words, if the actual residual probability variation number (actual residual probability variation number) stored (set) in the remaining probability variation number area is 1 or more, and the performance probability variation number (performance remaining probability variation number) becomes 0, , in order to notify the player that the potential state continues, the value of the performance remaining probability variation number is updated to the value of the actual remaining probability variation number, and the value is displayed in the remaining number display area of the third symbol display device 81. The effect (resurrection effect) displayed in D1 is executed.

By executing such a performance, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the timing when the potential state ends, and the number of times the performance remaining probability change is increased again after making the player think that the potential state has ended. Therefore, it is possible to provide a surprising performance to the player.

In addition, in this control example, the timing at which this revival performance is executed is when the number of production probability variations (the number of production probability variations remaining) becomes 0, but other configurations may be used, for example, the number of production probability variations The configuration is such that a lottery is held to determine whether or not to perform a resurrection performance on the condition that (number of production probability variations remaining) is equal to or less than a predetermined number of times (for example, 5), and the resurrection production is executed based on the lottery result. You may. This allows the player to play the game while predicting at what timing (special figure fluctuation) the resurrection effect will occur, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

Further, instead of performing the revival performance based on the special symbol fluctuations, it may be performed using, for example, the ending period of the small winning game. In this case, on the condition that the number of production probability changes (the number of production probability variations remaining) is 0 (or a display mode indicating that it is not certain that the potential state will continue is displayed). It is desirable to carry out a revival performance. With this configuration, there is no need to set a long variable time during which a revival effect can be executed as the special symbol variation time in a potential state, and it is possible to smoothly provide a game in a potential state.

Further, it may be configured such that a long variable time during which a revival performance can be performed is set as the special symbol variable time only in the final stage of the potential state (for example, when the actual remaining probability variation is 10 times or less). As a result, a display state in which the revival performance is possible (a state in which the number of production probability changes (remaining production probability variation number) is 0 (or a display state indicating that it is not certain that the potential state will continue) is displayed. )) It is not necessary to set a long variable time in which a revival performance can be executed at the beginning of a potential state where it is difficult to execute, and a game in a potential state can be smoothly provided.

Next, with reference to FIG. 243, the variable display setting process (S4112) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 243 is a flowchart showing this variable display setting process (S4112). This variable display setting process (FIG. 243, S4112) is one of the main processes (see FIG. 236) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. As described above, the variable display setting process (FIG. 243, S4112) is based on the first or special pattern 2 variable pattern command received from the main controller 110 in order to display a variable display effect on the third symbol display device 81. Based on this, a process of setting a display variation pattern command for the first special symbol or the second special symbol and transmitting the command to the display control device 114 is executed. Also, based on the extracted stop type (Jackpot A to Jackpot G), a process is executed to set a display special figure 1 or special figure 2 stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type.

In the fluctuation display setting process (FIG. 243, S4112), first, it is determined whether the special symbol 1 fluctuation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S4701). If it is determined that the special figure 1 variation start flag 223d is off (S4701: No), it means that the special figure 1 variation pattern command has not been received from the main controller 110, so the process proceeds to S4705. Transition. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 variation start flag 223d is on (S4701: Yes), the special figure 1 variation start flag 223d is set to OFF (S4702).

Next, in the process of S4703, the variation pattern in the variation display performance of the first special symbol extracted from the special symbol 1 variation pattern command in the process of S4303 of the command determination process (FIG. 238, S4111) is stored in other memory areas of the RAM 223. 223z and generates a variable pattern command for displaying the first special symbol (S4703). The variable pattern command for display of the first special symbol is configured to be able to identify whether it is a variable pattern command for display corresponding to the first special symbol or a variable pattern command for the second special symbol. Specifically, if the upper two bits of the upper byte of the 2-byte display variation pattern command are "10", it indicates that it corresponds to the first special symbol, and if it is "01", it indicates that it corresponds to the second special symbol. It is configured to indicate that it is compatible with .

The first special symbol display variation pattern command set in the process of S4703 is temporarily stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed by the command output process (S4102) of the main process (see FIG. 236). control device 114. In the display control device 114, by receiving the first special symbol display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 displays the corresponding special symbol on the third symbol display device 81 with the first special symbol variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. Display control of the fluctuating display performance is started so that the fluctuating display of symbols is performed.

With the setting of the display variation pattern command of the first special symbol, the reserved balls of the special symbol corresponding to the set display variation pattern command are consumed (i.e., the variation corresponding to the reserved balls of the first special symbol). The data corresponding to the first special symbol in the winning information storage area 223b is shifted in accordance with the display setting (S4704).

Next, it is determined whether the special figure 2 variation start flag 223e provided in the RAM 223 is set to on (S4705). If it is determined that the special figure 2 variation start flag 223e is not on (that is, off) (S4705: No), the special figure 2 variation pattern command is not received from the main controller 110. Since there is, the process of S4709 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 2 variation start flag 223e is on (S4705: Yes), the special figure 2 variation start flag 223e is set to OFF (S4706). In the process of S4306 of the command determination process (FIG. 238, S4111), the variation pattern in the variation display performance of the second special symbol extracted from the special symbol 2 variation pattern command is acquired from the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223, and 2. Set a variable pattern command for displaying special symbols (S4707).

The second special symbol display variation pattern command set in the process of S4707 is temporarily stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed by the command output process (S4102) of the main process (see FIG. 236). control device 114. By receiving this second special symbol display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 displays the corresponding special symbol on the third symbol display device 81 in the second special symbol variation pattern indicated by this display variation pattern command. Display control of the fluctuating display performance is started so that the fluctuating display of symbols is performed. Then, data corresponding to the second special symbol is shifted in the winning information storage area 223b (S4708).

Next, it is determined whether the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223f or the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223g is set to on (S4709). If it is determined that the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223f and the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223g are not set to on (that is, they are off) (S4709: No), this process is ended.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223f or the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223g is on (S2709: Yes), if the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223f is on, sets the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223f to OFF, and when the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223g is on, sets the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223g to OFF (S4710).

In the process of S4301 of the command determination process (FIG. 238, S4111), the stop type extracted from the received special figure 1 stop type command or special figure 2 stop type command is set (S4711), and this process is ended. When the extracted stop type is the stop type of the first special symbol, a display special figure 1 stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type is set based on the stop type. In addition, when the extracted stop type is the stop type of the second special symbol, based on the stop type, a display special figure 2 stop type command is set for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type. . In addition, the special map 1 or special map 2 stop type command notified from the main controller 110 is for notifying the jackpot type in the event of a jackpot, and will be notified even if the judgment result is a loss. be done. If the determination result is a loss, the stop type is not referred to and a loss symbol is set.

<About the control process of the display control device in the first control example>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. 244 to 257. The processing of the MPU 231 can be roughly divided into main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, and processing that is executed for one frame from the image controller 237. There is a V interrupt process that is executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal that is transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes main processing, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in response to receiving a command or detecting a V interrupt signal. Note that if command reception and V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, command reception processing is executed with priority. Thereby, the content of the command received from the audio lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected and the V interrupt processing can be executed.

First, with reference to FIG. 244, the main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 244 is a flowchart showing this main processing. The main process is to execute initialization process when the power is turned on.

Specifically, this main processing is started according to the following flow. When power is applied to the display control device 114 from the power supply circuit 115 and the system reset is canceled, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" depending on its hardware configuration, and , specifies the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified on the bus line 240 is "0000H", it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. , and outputs corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231. Then, the MPU 231 starts the main processing by fetching the instruction code received from the character ROM 234 and starting execution of processing according to the fetched instruction.

Here, if all the boot programs that are first processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 will not know that the address specified on the bus line 240 is "0000H". When detected, one page of data including data (instruction code) corresponding to address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to read it and set it in the buffer RAM 234c, so the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then receives the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H". This will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, since it takes a long time to start up the MPU 231, a problem arises in that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, as in this control example, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program that should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR ROM 234d, so that the NOR ROM can be used at high speed. Since it is a memory from which data can be read, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 is immediately stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234c and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the main processing in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow readout speed, control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (S6001), and the display control device 114 executes various controls on the third symbol display device 81. Start.

Here, the boot process (S6001) will be described with reference to FIG. 245. FIG. 245 is a flowchart showing boot processing (S6001) executed in the main processing in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

As described above, in this control example, the control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are stored in the third symbol display device 81, instead of being stored in a dedicated program ROM as in conventional gaming machines. It is stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing data of images to be displayed. The character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a that can have a large capacity with a small area, so it can sufficiently store not only image data but also control programs, etc. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, manufacturing costs can be reduced, and an increase in the failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, since the read speed of NAND flash memory is slow, especially when performing random access, if the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the MPU 231 Even if a high-performance processor is used, there is a risk that the processing performance of the display control device 114 will be deteriorated. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a provided in the work RAM 233 constituted by DRAM and the data table. A process of transferring and storing the data to the storage area 233b is executed.

Specifically, first, based on the hardware operations of the MPU 231 and character ROM 234 described above, the first program is read out from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c after the system reset is canceled. A predetermined amount of the control programs stored in the 2-program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S6101). The predetermined amount of control programs transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined location of the program storage area 233a, that is, the start address of the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a (S6102). Thereby, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot programs included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a through the process of S6101.

Furthermore, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined location in the program storage area 233a in the process of S6102, the MPU 231 can execute various processes while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, instead of reading the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetching instructions, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetching the instructions. and execute various processing. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch instructions at high speed and execute processing for the instructions.

When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the process of S6102, the remaining boot program whose execution is started by the set instruction pointer 231a is subsequently stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a. The remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a among the control programs currently stored are transferred in predetermined amounts to the program storage area 233a or data table storage area 233b (S6103). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and among the fixed value data, the above-mentioned various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) are stored in the data table. Transfer to storage area 233b.

After executing other processes necessary for the boot process (S6104), the instruction pointer 231a is moved to the second predetermined location of the program storage area 233a, that is, the instruction pointer 231a is moved to the second predetermined location of the program storage area 233a, that is, the instruction pointer 231a is moved to the second predetermined location of the program storage area 233a, that is, the instruction pointer 231a is By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the initialization process (see S6002 in FIG. 244) (S6105), the execution of the boot program is finished, and the main boot process is ended.

As described above, by executing the boot process (S6001), the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 composed of DRAM. The data is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and data table storage area 233b. Then, at the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the above-mentioned second predetermined location, and from then on, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. It is used to perform various processes.

Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow readout speed, the control program and fixed value data can be stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 and the fixed value data after the system reset is released. By transferring data to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read control programs and fixed value data from a work RAM configured with a DRAM with a high read speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated performances can be easily executed using the auxiliary performance section.

On the other hand, instead of storing the entire boot program in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored starting from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the NAND type flash memory 234a. Even if the control program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time by simply adding an extremely small capacity NOR ROM 234d, so that an increase in the cost of the character ROM 234 due to the reduction in time can be suppressed. I can do it.

In the boot process shown in FIG. 245, all remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 are included in the predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a in the process of S6101. The predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S6101 is a boot program that executes the boot process to be processed following the process of S6102. It may be part of. The boot program transferred here transfers a predetermined amount of the control program including all the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a, and further transfers the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a to the instruction pointer. 231a. Then, the processes of S6103 to S6105 may be executed using all remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

In addition, the boot program transferred by the process of S6101 further transfers a predetermined amount of a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a, and then transfers a predetermined amount of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a. It may also execute a process of setting an address in the instruction pointer 231a. In addition, some of the boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a through this process are further transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and then a part of the remaining boot programs is transferred to the program storage area 233a. It may also execute processing for setting the start address of the stored boot program in the instruction pointer 231a. Then, in step S6101, a predetermined amount of a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a, and then the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is set in the instruction pointer 231a. After repeating the process of S6102 and S6102 multiple times, the process of S6103 to S6105 may be executed.

As a result, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at once, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. A predetermined amount of the boot program can be transferred to the program storage area 233a using the boot program.

Furthermore, in this control example, a case has been described in which a part of the boot program that is first executed by the MPU 231 when the system reset is released is stored in the first program storage area 234d1, but all boot programs are stored in the first program storage area 234d1. It may be stored in one program storage area 234d1. In this case, when the MPU 231 starts the boot process, it may execute the processes of S6103 to S6105 without performing the processes of S6101 and S6102. This eliminates the need for the process of transferring the boot program to the program storage area 233a, reducing the number of times the program is transferred to either the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the processing time of the boot process. Therefore, it is possible to start controlling the auxiliary effect section in the MPU 231 more quickly, which becomes possible after the boot process.

Here, we return to the description of FIG. 244. When the boot process is completed, an initial setting process is executed in accordance with the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S6002). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings for the register group in the MPU 231, the I/O device, etc. are performed. Further, processing for clearing the memories in the work RAM 233, resident video RAM 235, and normal video RAM 236 is performed. Furthermore, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set for each flag. Note that the initial value of each flag is set to "off" or "0" unless otherwise specified.

Furthermore, in the initial setting process, after initial setting of the image controller 237 is performed, the image controller 237 is instructed to draw an image so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81. and instructs execution of display processing. As a result, immediately after the power is turned on, an image of a specific color is first displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be a different color depending on the model of the pachinko machine. As a result, in an operation check at a factory or the like during manufacturing, the pachinko machine 10 can be inspected to see whether an image in a color corresponding to the machine type is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately after power is turned on. It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not startup can be started normally.

Next, a transfer instruction is sent to the image controller 237 to transfer the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 (S6003). This transfer instruction includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is stored, information on the transfer destination (in this case, resident video RAM 235), and information on the transfer destination. In accordance with this transfer instruction, the image controller 237 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image in the resident video RAM 235. The image is transferred to the image area 235a.

When the transfer of all the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can understand that the transfer of the image data specified in the transfer instruction has been completed. Note that when the image controller 237 completes the transfer of all the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, the image controller 237 stores transfer end information indicating the end of the transfer in a register provided inside the image controller 237 or in a partial area of the built-in memory. You may also write it. Then, the MPU 231 reads information from this register or a partial area of the built-in memory at any time, and detects the writing of transfer end information by the image controller 237 to determine that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction has been completed. You can do it like this.

The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction sent to the image controller 237 in the process of S6003, the power-on variation image is then transferred. A transfer instruction is sent to the image controller to transfer the image data corresponding to the image data to the power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 (S6004). This transfer instruction includes the start address of the character ROM 234 in which image data corresponding to the power-on variation image is stored, the data size of the image data, and information on the transfer destination (in this case, the resident video RAM 235). , and the start address of the power-on variation image area 235b, which is the transfer destination.According to this transfer instruction, the image controller transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The image is transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b. The image data transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image to the power-on variation image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction sent to the image controller 237 in the process of S6004, the simple image display flag 233c is then set. is turned on (S6005). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all image data that should reside in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 255(a)), which will be described later. Resident image transfer setting processing is executed to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image (see S7502 in FIG. 255(a)).

In addition, the simple image display flag 233c indicates that all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on a transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by this resident image transfer setting process. It remains on until it is terminated. As a result, during that time, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 246(b)), a simple Command determination processing (see S6308 in FIG. 246(b)) and simple display setting processing (see S6309 in FIG. 246(b)) are executed.

As mentioned above, in this pachinko machine 10, since the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is It takes a long time to transfer the data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in this main process, after the power is turned on, the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the main image at power-on is transferred to the third image. By displaying the image data on the third symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, players and hall personnel can display the image data displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. You can check the main image. Therefore, while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 114, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. be able to. On the other hand, the player etc. can recognize that some initialization process is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. Until the desired image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the user can wait until the initialization is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped.

In addition, when checking the operation at a factory or the like during manufacturing, the main image is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that the third symbol display device 81 can start operating without problems when the power is turned on. By using the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, as the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress deterioration in the efficiency of the operation check.

In addition, in the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, after the power is turned on, the power-on variation image is also transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the power-on main image, so that the power-on main image is the third symbol. When the player starts playing the game while the display is displayed on the display device 81, a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 (start winning), and an instruction to start the variable production is issued. If a display variation pattern command is received from the main controller 110 via the audio lamp control device 113, the power-on variation image is immediately displayed during the variation performance period, and a simple variation is displayed. Can perform. Therefore, even while the power-on main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player can reliably confirm that the lottery has been drawn by the simple variation effect.

Further, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image at power-on continues to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, but the character ROM 234 is constituted by a NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow readout speed, and since it takes time to transfer the data, the time during which the main image continues to be displayed after the power is turned on becomes long. However, in this pachinko machine 10, it is possible to perform a simple fluctuation effect using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. To allow a player to play a game with peace of mind even while the main image is being displayed immediately after power is turned on.

After the process in S6005, interrupt permission is set (S6006), and thereafter, the main process executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. As a result, after the interrupt permission is set by the process in S6006, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

Next, command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 246(a). FIG. 246(a) is a flowchart showing the command interrupt processing. As described above, upon receiving a command from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes the command interrupt process.

This command interrupt processing extracts the received command data, sequentially stores the extracted command data in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S6201), and ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt processing are read out by command determination processing or simple command determination processing of the V interrupt processing, which will be described later, and processing according to the commands is performed.

Next, the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 246(b). FIG. 246(b) is a flowchart showing the V interrupt processing. In this V-interrupt processing, various processes corresponding to the commands stored in the command buffer area are executed by the command interrupt processing, and an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and the image is drawn. By creating a list and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute drawing processing and display processing for the image.

As described above, execution of this V interrupt processing is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated in the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process for one frame of image is completed, and is transmitted to the MPU 231 . Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process for one frame of image is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image before the image drawing process or display process is completed, so it cannot start drawing a new image in the middle of drawing an image, It is possible to prevent an image from being developed in the frame buffer in which image information being displayed is stored in response to a new drawing instruction.

Here, first, an outline of the flow of V interrupt processing will be explained, and then details of each process will be explained with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt processing, as shown in FIG. 246(b), first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6301), and if the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, If it is off (S6301: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed, so the normal effect image is used as the third symbol instead of the power-on image. In order to display the command on the display device 81, a command determination process (S6302) is executed, and then a display setting process (S6303) is executed.

In the command determination process (S6302), the content of the command from the audio lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process is analyzed, and the process corresponding to the command is executed. If a display variation pattern command is stored, a demonstration display data table or a variation display data table according to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer corresponding to the set display data table is set. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

In this command determination processing, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and processing is executed. This is because command determination processing is performed at 20 millisecond intervals when V interrupt processing is executed, and there is a high possibility that multiple commands are stored in the command buffer area during those 20 milliseconds. be. In particular, when the main control device 110 decides to start a variable effect, there is a high possibility that a display variable pattern command, a display stop type command, etc. are stored in the command buffer area at the same time. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, it is possible to quickly grasp the mode and stop type of the variable effect selected by the main controller 110 and the audio lamp control device 113, and create the effect image according to the mode. Drawing of the image can be controlled so that it is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Note that details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 247 to 251.

In the display setting process (S6303), one frame of image to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is determined based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S6302) etc. Specifically specify the content. Further, depending on the processing situation, etc., the performance mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined, and a display data table corresponding to the determined performance mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. Note that details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 252 to 254.

After the display setting process is executed, task processing is then executed (S6304). In this task process, the image is configured based on the content of the next frame of image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, which is specified by the display setting process (S6303) or the simple display setting process (S6309). In addition to specifying the type of sprite (displayed object) to be displayed, various parameters necessary for drawing, such as display coordinate position, magnification ratio, and rotation angle, are determined for each sprite.

Next, transfer setting processing is executed (S6305). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. Further, while the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is sent to the image controller 237 from the character ROM 234 for normal use based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. In addition to setting a transfer instruction to transfer to a predetermined subarea of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236, when a continuous preview command or rear image change command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the image controller 237 is continuously A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous preview images used in the preview effect and the image data of the changed rear image from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined subarea of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. Note that details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 255 and 256.

Next, drawing processing is executed (S6306). In this drawing process, the types of sprites constituting one frame and the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite, determined in the task process (S6304), and the transfer instructions set in the transfer setting process (S6305) are used. , generates a drawing list shown in FIG. 207, and transmits the drawing list together with the drawing target buffer information to the image controller 237. Thereby, the image controller 237 executes image drawing processing according to the drawing list (S6306). Note that details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG. 257.

Next, updating processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S6307). Then, the V interrupt processing ends. The counter updated by the process of S6307 includes, for example, a stopped symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stopped symbol. The value of this stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and updated every time the V interrupt process is executed. In the command determination process, when reception of the display stop type command is detected, the stop type (jackpot A, jackpot B, front/back off reach, front/back off reach, complete miss) indicated by the display stop type command is detected. The corresponding stop type table and stop type counter are compared, and the stop symbol after the variable performance displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

On the other hand, in the process of S6301, if it is determined that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6301: Yes), it means that the transfer of all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, a simple command determination process (S6308) is executed, then a simple display setting process (S6309) is executed, and the process moves to S6304.

Next, details of the above-mentioned command determination process (S6302), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIGS. 247 to 251. First, FIG. 247 is a flowchart showing this command determination process.

In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 247, it is first determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S6401), and if there is no unprocessed new command (S6401: No), The command determination process ends and returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes), a new command flag that notifies the display setting process (S6303) that a new command has been processed is set to ON (S6402), and then the command The types of all unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area are analyzed (S6403).

Then, it is determined whether there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S6404). If there is a display variation pattern command (S6404: Yes), variation pattern command processing is executed (S6405), and the process returns to S6401.

Here, details of the variable pattern command processing (S6405) will be described with reference to FIG. 248(a). FIG. 248(a) is a flowchart showing the variable pattern command processing (S6405). This variation pattern command processing (S6405) is to execute processing corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the audio lamp control device 114.

In the variation pattern command processing, first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, the determined variation display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b. It is set in the buffer 233d (S6501).

Here, since the main controller 110 always determines the start of a fluctuation at intervals of several seconds or more, two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore, the command determination process is not performed. When executing the command, it is unlikely that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but some of the commands may change due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command may be mistakenly used for display. There is also a possibility that it will be interpreted as a variable pattern command. In preparation for such a case, in the process of S6501, if it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time is is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

If a variable display data table corresponding to a variable pattern with a long variation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, a variable effect with a shorter variation time than the set display data table will actually be displayed by the main controller. 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main controller 110 while the third symbol display device 81 is displaying a variation effect according to the set variation display data table. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, which may give the player a sense of discomfort.

On the other hand, as in this control example, by setting a fluctuation display data table corresponding to a fluctuation pattern with the shortest fluctuation time in the display data table buffer 233d, the fluctuation time is actually longer than the set display data table. Even if a fluctuating performance with time is instructed by the main controller 110, as will be described later, after the fluctuating performance according to the display data table buffer 233d is completed, the main controller 110 will issue a command for the next display. Until the pattern command is received, the display on the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demonstration effect is displayed. You can keep watching the changes in the 3 symbols.

Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S6501 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6502). Then, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S6501, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the clock counter 233h (S6503), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6504). Then, both the demo display flag and the final display flag are set to OFF (S6505), the variable pattern command is ended, and the process returns to the command determination process.

By executing this variation pattern command processing, in the display setting processing, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the processing of S6505, the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6501 is updated. , extracts the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, and specifies the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81. At the same time, the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is extracted, and at the same time, the content is transferred to the transfer data table buffer 233e by the process of S6502. The transfer data information specified in the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in The image controller 237 is controlled so that the image is transferred to the image storage area 236a.

In addition, in the display setting process, the time counter 233h whose time data has been set in the process of S6503 is used to measure the time of the variable effect specified in the variable display data table, and when the variable effect in the variable display data table is finished. If it is determined, the setting of the stop display is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main controller 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, we return to the description of FIG. 247. In the process of S6404, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S6404: No), then it is determined whether there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S6406), If there is a display stop type command (S6406: Yes), the stop type command process is executed (S6407), and the process returns to S6401.

Here, details of the stop type command processing (S6407) will be described with reference to FIG. 248(b). FIG. 248(b) is a flowchart showing stop type command processing. This stop type command processing is to execute a process corresponding to the display variation type command received from the audio lamp control device 114.

In the stop type command processing (S6407), first, a stop type table corresponding to the stop type information (one of jackpot A to G, small hit A to C, out of reach, or completely out) indicated by the display stop type command is created. (S6601), compares the stop type table with the value of the stop type counter that is updated every time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 246(b)) is executed, and displays the stop type table in the third symbol display device. The stop symbol after the variable effect displayed at 81 is finally set (S6602).

Then, among the stop symbol discrimination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set in the process of S6602 is turned on, and the stop symbol discrimination flags corresponding to the other stop symbols are turned on. It is set to on (S6603) and returns to the command determination process.

Here, as described above, in the fluctuation display data table, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of fluctuation based on the data table, type information that specifies the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is used as type information. , offset information from the stopped symbol (symbol offset information) set by the process of S6602 is described. In the above-mentioned task process (S6304), after a predetermined period of time has passed since the start of variation, the stopped symbol set in the process of S6602 is specified from the stopped symbol discrimination flag set in S6603, and the identified stopped symbol is The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the symbol. Then, the address where the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. The image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235, as described above.

Note that since the main controller 110 always determines the start of fluctuation at intervals of several seconds or more, it will not receive two or more display stop type commands within 20 milliseconds, and therefore executes the command determination process. Although it is unlikely that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, some of the commands may change due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command may be mistakenly displayed as a display stop type command. There is also a possibility that it will be interpreted as a type command. In preparation for such a case, in the process of S6601, if it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, the stop type is changed assuming that the stop type is completely off. Decide on the table. As a result, a stop symbol corresponding to a complete miss is set by the process of S6602.

If the stop symbol corresponding to the "special symbol jackpot" is set, the third symbol display device 81 will display the "special symbol" even if it is actually a "miss of the special symbol". A stop pattern corresponding to a "jackpot of a special symbol" is displayed, causing a player to misunderstand that the pachinko machine 10 has won a "jackpot of a special symbol", and there is a risk of lowering the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, as in this control example, by setting a stop symbol that corresponds to a complete miss, if it is a "special symbol jackpot", the third symbol display device 81 will display a stop symbol that corresponds to a complete miss. Even if the symbols are displayed, the pachinko machine 10 receives a "special symbol jackpot", so the player can be pleased.

Returning to FIG. 247, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S6406, if it is determined that there is no display stop type command (S6406: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display opening command among the unprocessed commands (S6408), and the display If there is an opening command for use (S6408: Yes), opening command processing is executed (S6409), and the process returns to S6401.

Here, details of the opening command processing (S6409) will be described with reference to FIG. 249(a). FIG. 249(a) is a flowchart showing opening command processing. This opening command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the opening command received from the audio lamp control device 114.

In the opening command process, first, an opening display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6701). Thereafter, a transfer data table corresponding to the opening display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6702), and time data is set in the time counter 233h based on the set opening display data table (S6703). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6704). Then, the demo display flag 233y and the confirmed display flag 233z are both set to OFF (S6705), the opening command is ended, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Returning to FIG. 247, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S6408, if it is determined that there is no display opening command (S6408: No), then it is determined whether there is a display round number command among the unprocessed commands (S6410), and the display If there is a round number command for use (S6410: Yes), round number command processing is executed (S6411), and the process returns to S6401.

Here, details of the round number command processing (S6411) will be described with reference to FIG. 249(b). FIG. 249(b) is a flowchart showing round number command processing. This round number command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display round number command received from the audio lamp control device 114.

In the round number command processing, first, a round number display data table corresponding to the number of rounds indicated by the display round number command is determined, the determined round number display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data is read out from the data table storage area 233b. It is set in the table buffer 233d (S6801). Next, by writing Null data into the transfer data table buffer 233e, its contents are cleared (S6802).

Then, based on the round number display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d in the process of S6801, time data representing the performance time is set in the time counter 233h (S6803), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S6804). Then, the demo display flag 233y and the final display flag 233z are both set to OFF (S6805), the round number command process is ended, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Returning to FIG. 247, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S6410, if it is determined that there is no round number command for display (S6410: No), then it is determined whether there is an ending command for display among the unprocessed commands (S6412), and the display command is If there is an ending command (S6412: Yes), the ending command process is executed (S6413), and the process returns to S6401.

Here, details of the ending command process (S6413) will be described with reference to FIG. 250. FIG. 250 is a flowchart showing ending command processing. This ending command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display ending command received from the audio lamp control device 114.

In the ending command processing, first, an ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of the ending effect indicated by the display ending command is determined, the determined ending display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b. It is set in the buffer 233d (S6901). Next, by writing Null data into the transfer data table buffer 233e, its contents are cleared (S6902).

Next, based on the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d in the process of S6901, time data representing the performance time is set in the time counter 233h (S6903), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6903). S6904). Then, the demo display flag 233y and the confirmed display flag 233z are both set to OFF (S6905), the ending command process is ended, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Returning to FIG. 247, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S6412, if it is determined that there is no display ending command (S6412: No), then it is determined whether there is a rear image change command among the unprocessed commands (S6414), and the rear image is changed. If there is a change command (S6414: Yes), back image change command processing is executed (S6415), and the process returns to S6401.

Here, details of the rear image change command processing (S6415) will be described with reference to FIG. 251. FIG. 251 is a flowchart showing back image change command processing. This back image change command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the back image change command received from the audio lamp control device 114.

In the back image change command process, first, the back image change flag 233w is set to on (S7001), which notifies the normal image transfer setting process (S7503) of the change in the back image caused by receiving the back image change command in the on state. ). Then, among the bits of the back image discrimination flag 233x provided for each back image type (back side A, B), the bit corresponding to the back side image type indicated by the back side image change command is set to ON, and the other bits are set to ON. The bit corresponding to the back image type is set to OFF (S7002), this back image change command processing is ended, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the back image change flag 233w set in the process of S7001 is turned on, the changed back image type is determined from the back image discrimination flag 233x set in the process of S7002. Identify.

In addition, in the task processing, if it is specified that either the back surface A or B should be displayed according to the back surface type of the back surface image defined in the display data table, based on the back surface image discrimination flag 233x set in S7002, The type of back image to be displayed at that time is specified, the range of the back image to be displayed is specified over time, and the RAM type ( (Resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) and the address of that RAM.

Note that since the player does not operate the frame button 22 continuously for less than 20 milliseconds, two or more rear image change commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore, the command determination process is executed. In this case, there should be no case where two or more rear image change commands are stored in the command buffer area, but some of the commands change due to the influence of noise etc., and another command may accidentally change the rear image. There is a possibility that it may be interpreted as a command. In the process of S7002, if it is determined that two or more rear image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the rear image determination flag 233x corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the previously received rear image command is turned on. Alternatively, the rear image determination flag 233x corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image command received later may be turned on. Alternatively, any one back image change command may be extracted and the back image determination flag 233x corresponding to the back image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since this change of the back image does not directly affect the gaming value of the Pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to set it appropriately according to the characteristics and operability of the Pachinko machine 10.

Here, we return to the description of FIG. 247. In the process of S6414, if it is determined that there is no rear image change command (S6414: No), then it is determined whether there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S6416), and if there is an error command, it is determined that there is no command. If (S6416: Yes), error command processing is executed (S6417), and the process returns to S6401.

Here, details of the error command processing (S6417) will be described with reference to FIG. 251(b). FIG. 251(b) is a flowchart showing error command processing. This error command processing is to execute processing corresponding to an error command received from the audio lamp control device 114.

In the error command processing, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the on state is set to on (S7101). Then, among the error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are set to off (S7102). The process ends and returns to the command determination process.

In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set in the process of S7101, the type of error that has occurred is determined based on the error determination flag set in the process of S7102, and a response is taken according to the error type. Processing is executed so that a warning image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is displayed.

Note that if it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, in step S7102, error determination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by the respective error commands are set on. As a result, warning images corresponding to all error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that players and hall personnel can accurately grasp the error occurrence situation.

Here, we return to the description of FIG. 247. In the process of S6416, if it is determined that there is no error command (S6416: No), then the process corresponding to other unprocessed commands is executed (S6418), and the process returns to S6401.

In the process of S6401, which is executed again after each command process is executed, it is determined again whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes). ), the processes of S6402 to S6418 are executed again. Then, the processes of S6401 to S6418 are repeatedly executed until there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, and when it is determined in the process of S6401 that there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, this command is determined. Finish the process.

Note that the simple command determination process (S6308) that is executed when the simple image display flag 233c is on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 246(b)) is similar to the command determination process. However, in the simple command judgment process, only the commands necessary to display the power-on image, that is, the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command, are selected from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area. Extract and execute the fluctuation pattern command processing (see FIG. 248(a)) and stop type command processing (see FIG. 248(b)), which are the processing corresponding to each command. Performs processing to discard the command without executing the processing corresponding to the command.

Here, in the fluctuation pattern command processing (see FIG. 248(a)) executed in this case, in the processing of S6501, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the power-on fluctuation image is transferred to the display data table buffer 233d. The image data of the power-on main image and the power-on variation image that are set and required in that case are stored in the power-on main moving image area 235a and the power-on variation moving image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S6502, null data is written to the transfer data table buffer 233b and the contents thereof are cleared.

Next, details of the above-mentioned display setting process (S6303), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIGS. 252 to 254. FIG. 252 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 252, it is first determined whether the new command flag is on (S7201), and if the new command flag is not on, that is, off (S7201: No). ), it is determined that no new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, the process skips steps S7202 to S7204, and proceeds to the process S7205. On the other hand, if the new command flag is on (S7201: Yes), it is determined that a new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, and after setting the new command flag to off (S7202), S7203 to S7204 The process corresponding to the new command is executed by the process.

In the process of S7203, it is determined whether the error occurrence flag is on (S7203). If the error occurrence flag is on (S7203: Yes), a warning image setting process is executed (S7204).

Here, details of the warning image setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 253. FIG. 253 is a flowchart showing warning image setting processing. This process is a process for developing image data for displaying a warning image corresponding to an error that has occurred on the third symbol display device 81. First, the error determination flag is referred to, and all error determination flags set to on are Warning image data for displaying an error warning image corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is developed (S7301).

In task processing (S6304), based on this expanded warning image data, the type of sprite (displayed object) that makes up the warning image is specified, and for each sprite, the display coordinate position, magnification rate, rotation angle, etc. Determine various parameters necessary for drawing.

In the warning image setting process, after the process in S7301, the error occurrence flag is set to OFF (S7302), and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, we return to the description of FIG. 252. After the warning image setting process (S7204) or in the process of S7203, if it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, it is off (S7203: No), then the process moves to S7205.

In S7205, pointer update processing is executed (S7205). Here, details of the pointer update process will be described with reference to FIG. 254. FIG. 254 is a flowchart showing pointer update processing. This pointer update process acquires the corresponding drawing content or transfer data information of the image data to be transferred from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. This is a process of updating the pointer 233f that specifies the target address.

In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S7401). That is, the pointer 233f is updated in such a way that it is incremented by 1 each time the V interrupt process is executed. In addition, as mentioned above, in the various data tables, the Start information is written at the address "0000H", and the substance of each data is specified after the address "0001H", and the display data table is displayed. If the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 when it is stored in the data table buffer 233d, that value is updated to 1 by this pointer update process, so each Substantive data can be read from the data table.

After the value of the pointer 233f is updated by the process of S7401, next, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is determined whether the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is End information. (S7402). As a result, if it is End information (S7402: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f has been updated past the address where the actual data is written in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Therefore, it is determined whether the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demonstration display data table (S7403), and if it is a demonstration display data table (S7403: Yes), the display data table is The time data corresponding to the performance time of the demonstration display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the time counter 233h (S7404), the pointer 233f is set to 1 and initialized (S7405), and this processing ends. and returns to display setting processing. Thereby, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be developed in order from the beginning of the demonstration display data table, so that the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly display the demonstration effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S7403, if it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not a demonstration display data table (S7403: No), the value of the pointer 233f is subtracted by 1 ( S7406), this process ends and returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, if a display data table other than the demonstration display data table, for example, a variable display data table, is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the previous address in which the End information is written is Since the drawing content of is always developed, the third symbol display device 81 can display the last image defined in the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S7402, if the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not End information (S7402: No), this process is ended and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, returning to FIG. 252, the explanation will be continued. After the pointer update process, the drawing content at the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process is obtained from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7206). In task processing (S6304), the types of sprites (displayed objects) that make up the image are specified based on the drawing content developed in the process of S7206, as well as the warning image developed earlier, and , determine various parameters necessary for drawing, such as display coordinate position, magnification ratio, and rotation angle.

Next, the value of the time counter 233h is subtracted by 1 (S7207), and it is determined whether the value of the time counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S7208). If the value of the time counter 233h is 1 or more (S7208: No), the display setting process is ended and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if the value of the time counter 233h is 0 or less (S7208: Yes), it means that the performance time of the performance corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing to end the variable display and stop display, so check whether the fixed display flag is on or not. (S7209).

As a result, if the final display flag is off (S7209: No), the final display has not yet been performed and it is time to perform the final display, so first, the final display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. setting (S7210), and then writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear its contents (S7211). Then, time data corresponding to the production time in the final display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S7212), and further, the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7213). Then, after setting the confirmed display flag indicating that the confirmed display performance is in progress in the on state (S7214), the contents of the stopped symbol discrimination flag are copied as they are to the previous stopped symbol discrimination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S7215), returning to the V interrupt processing.

As a result, in a case where a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the final display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the end of that effect. You can set the drawing contents as follows. Further, by simply changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d to the final display data table, the performance displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed to the final display performance. And, compared to the conventional case where the display contents are changed by starting another program, the program does not become complicated and bloated, and therefore, there is no heavy load on the MPU 231. Regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 114, a wide variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

In addition, the previous stop symbol discrimination flag set by the process of S7215 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variable performance. In other words, as mentioned above, the display of the third symbol in a fluctuating performance changes depending on the stop symbol of the previous fluctuating performance, and in the fluctuating display data table, the display of the third symbol in the fluctuating performance changes based on the data table. Until a predetermined time has elapsed since the start, symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the previous variable performance is written. In task processing (S6304), until a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation, the stop symbol of the previous variation performance is specified from the previous stop symbol discrimination flag set in S7215, and the stop symbol of the previous variation performance is identified. The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol. As a result, the variable performance is started from the stop symbol in the previous variable performance.

On the other hand, in the process of S7209, if the confirmed display flag is on (S7209: Yes), it is determined whether the demo display flag is on (S7216). If the demo display flag is off (S7216: No), it means that the value of the time counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the confirmed display effect, so a certain period of time has elapsed since the end of the confirmed display effect. Later, processing for displaying a demonstration effect on the third symbol display device 81 is performed.

First, the demo display data table is acquired and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7217), and the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S7218). Then, time data corresponding to the presentation time in the demo display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S7219). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7220), and a demonstration display flag indicating that a demonstration performance is in progress is set to ON (S7221), and this process is ended and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

As a result, if a display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variable production is not received after the confirmed display production is finished, the demonstration production will be automatically displayed on the third symbol display device 81. You can set the content of the drawing.

In the process of S7216, if the demo display flag is on (S7216: Yes), it means that the demo effect is performed after the finalized display effect is finished, and that the demo effect has ended, so the display setting process is ended. Then, the process returns to the V interrupt processing. In this case, the pointer update process executed in the next V-interrupt process makes various settings so that the demonstration effect is started again as described above, so the audio lamp control device 113 The demonstration performance can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until a new display variation pattern command is received.

Note that the same process as the display setting process is also performed in the simple display setting process (S6309) that is executed when the simple image display flag 233c is on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 246(b)). However, in the simple display setting process, after the production time of the fluctuation effect using the power-on fluctuation image ends, one of the power-on fluctuation images corresponding to the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command is displayed for a predetermined period of time. A process is performed in which a display data table specifying that the image of is to be displayed in a stopped state is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 255 and 256, details of the above-mentioned transfer setting process (S6305), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 255(a) is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether the simple image display flag 233c is on (S7501). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S7501: Yes), all the image data that should reside in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so the resident image transfer setting is set. The process is executed (S7502), the transfer setting process is ended, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 to transfer the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Note that details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 255(b).

On the other hand, as a result of the processing in S7501, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, off (S7501: No), all the image data that should reside in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. It has been transferred to RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S7503), the transfer setting process is ended, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. Note that details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 256.

Next, with reference to FIG. 255(b), the resident image transfer setting process (S7502), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 255(b) is a flowchart showing this resident image transfer setting process (S7502).

In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer untransferred image data (S7601), and if the transfer instruction has been sent (S7601: Yes). ), and further determines whether the image data transfer process performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has been completed (S7602). In the process of S7602, after instructing the image controller 237 to transfer image data, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined in the process of S7602 that the transfer process has not finished (S7602: No), the image transfer process is continuing in the image controller 237, so this resident image transfer setting process is finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S7602: Yes), the process moves to S7603. Also, as a result of the process in S7601, if no transfer instruction for untransferred image data has been sent to the image controller 237 (S7601: No), the process proceeds to S7603.

In the process of S7603, it is determined whether all the resident target image data that should reside in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S7603), and if there is any resident target image data that has not been transferred (S7603: No), the untransferred resident target image data is transferred. A transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 so that the resident image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S7604), and this process ends.

As a result, the drawing list sent to the image controller 237 in the drawing process includes transfer data information regarding the untransferred resident target image data, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer data described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the resident target image data is stored, information on the transfer destination (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (the image data to be transferred here). The start address of the area (provided in the resident video RAM 235) in which the resident target image data is to be stored is included. The image controller 237 executes the image transfer process based on this transfer data information, reads out the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and then stores it in the buffer RAM 237a while the resident video RAM 235 is not in use. Then, it is transferred to the designated address in the resident video RAM 235. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is sent to the MPU 231.

As a result of the process in S7603, if all the resident target image data has been transferred (S7603: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S7605), and this process ends. As a result, in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 246(b)), the command Since the determination process (see FIGS. 247 to 251) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 252 to 254) are executed, the normal image drawing is set, and the third symbol display device 81 The normal image is displayed. Further, subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by normal image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 256) (see S7501: No in FIG. 255(a)).

By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 transfers all resident images that should reside in the resident video RAM 235, excluding the power-on main image and the power-on variation image that have already been transferred during the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 controls the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 so that it continues to be held without being overwritten while the power is turned on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process is made to reside in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

Therefore, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 and transfers the image data to the image controller 237. Image drawing processing can be performed with . As a result, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, there is no need to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured with the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow readout speed, when drawing an image. Therefore, the time required for reading the image can be omitted, the image can be drawn immediately, and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 stores image data of frequently displayed images such as rear images, third symbols, character symbols, and error messages, the main controller 110, the audio lamp controller 113, and the display controller 114. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is immediately resident after the display is determined by the above method, even if the character ROM 234 is configured with the NAND flash memory 234a, it will not be affected by various operations performed by the player at any timing. , it is possible to maintain high responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Next, with reference to FIG. 256, the normal image transfer setting process (S7503), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 256 is a flowchart showing this normal image transfer setting process (S7503).

In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S7205) of the previously executed display setting process (S6303) is used. The information written in the indicated address is acquired (S7701). Then, it is determined whether the acquired information is transfer data information (S7702), and if it is transfer data information (S7702: Yes), the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored is determined based on the transfer data information. The start address (storage source start address) and the end address (storage source end address), and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( S7703), the transfer start flag, which is provided in the work RAM 233 and indicates that there is image data whose transfer should be started in the ON state, is set to ON (S7704), and the process proceeds to S7705.

Further, in the process of S7702, if the acquired information is not transfer data information but Null data (S7702: No), the process of S7703 and S7704 is skipped and the process moves to the process of S7705. In the process of S7705, it is determined whether a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer has been completed (S7705), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S7705: Yes), it is further determined whether the image data transfer performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has been completed (S7706).

In the process of S7706, after setting an image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined in the process of S7706 that the transfer process has not finished (S7706: No), the image transfer process is still being performed in the image controller 237, so this normal image transfer setting process is not completed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S7706: Yes), the process moves to S7707. Further, as a result of the process in S7705, if the image data transfer instruction has not been set for the image controller 237 after the previous transfer process was completed (S7705: No), the process proceeds to S7707.

In the process of S7707, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S7707). If the transfer start flag is on (S7707: Yes), there is image data to start transferring, so the transfer start flag is set. is turned off (S7708), the image data of the sprite indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer in the process of S7703 is set as the image data to be transferred, and the process moves to the process of S7713. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S7707: No), then it is determined whether the back image change flag 233w is on (S7709). Then, if the back image change flag 233w is not on but off (S7709: No), there is no image data to start transfer, and the normal image transfer setting process is ended.

On the other hand, if the back image change flag 233w is on (S7709: Yes), it means that the back image has been changed, so after setting the back image change flag 233w to off (S7710), the Among the back image discrimination flags 233x, the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag 233x in the on state is specified, and the image data is set as the image data to be transferred (S7711). Furthermore, the start address (storage source first address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag 233x in the on state is stored, and the transfer destination ( The start address of the normal video RAM 236) is acquired (S7712), and the process moves to S7713.

In the process of S7713, it is determined whether the image data to be transferred is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S7713). The determination in the process of S7713 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233i. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the transfer target image data is read from the stored image data discrimination flag 233i, and if the storage state is "on", the image data of the sprite that is the transfer target is normal video data. If it is determined that the image data is stored in the RAM 236 and the storage state is "off," it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

As a result of the process in S7713, if the image data to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S7713: Yes), there is no need to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. , and then ends the normal image transfer setting process. This makes it possible to prevent image data from being unnecessarily transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, thereby reducing the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240. can be achieved.

On the other hand, as a result of the process in S7713, if the image data to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S7713: No), a transfer instruction for the image data to be transferred is set (S7714). As a result, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is included in the drawing list sent to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 uses the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the image to be transferred can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the image to be transferred is stored, information on the transfer destination (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and information on the transfer destination (in this case, the transfer destination). This includes the start address of a subarea (provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the image to be transferred is to be stored. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on this transfer data information, reads out the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and transfers the image data to the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). forwarded to the specified address. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is sent to the MPU 231.

After the process of S7714, the stored image data determination flag 233i is updated (S7715), and this normal transfer setting process is ended. As described above, the storage image data discrimination flag 233i is updated by setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the image data to be transferred to "on", and by setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the image data to be transferred to "ON", and by This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to the other sprites that are to be stored in the area to "off."

In this way, by executing this normal image transfer process, the process corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the previously executed command determination process, and as a result, the display stop type command When it is determined that the displayed stop type information is a jackpot stop type, the image data used in the fanfare performance can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. In addition, if the back image is changed based on the reception of a back image change command in the previously executed command determination process, among the image data used for that back image, the back side of the resident video RAM 235 is Image data not stored in the image area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

In addition, in this control example, the display data table is changed to the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. At the same time that the display data table is set, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Then, by executing the normal image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 sends the image to the image controller 237 according to the transfer data information written in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction for the image data to be transferred is set, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at the desired timing. I can do it.

Here, in the transfer data table, the image data to be transferred is stored in the transfer data table so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table. When drawing a sprite, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and necessary for drawing that sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured with the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow readout speed, images necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the display While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Also, by writing in the transfer data table, only the image data that is non-resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the transfer data table, transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. Thereby, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while making the processing easier. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load required for transfer.

Next, with reference to FIG. 257, details of the above-mentioned drawing process (S6306), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 257 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

In the drawing process, the types of sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S6304) and the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information) , color information, filter designation information) and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S6305), a drawing list (FIG. 207) is generated (S7801). That is, in the process of S7801, from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S6304), for each sprite, the storage RAM type and address where the image data of that sprite is stored are identified. Then, parameters necessary for the sprite determined by task processing are associated with the identified storage RAM type and address. Then, after sorting the sprites in the order of the sprite that should be placed at the backmost side of the image for one frame to the sprite that should be placed at the front side, the details for each sprite are A drawing list is generated by describing, as drawing information (detailed information), the type and address of the storage RAM in which the image data of the sprite is stored, and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite. In addition, when a transfer instruction is set in the transfer setting process (S6305), the start address of the character ROM 234 where the image data to be transferred is stored (the storage source start address) is added as transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. , the final address (storage source final address), and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236).

As mentioned above, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 or the subarea of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 where the image data of that sprite is stored is fixed, so the MPU 231 According to the sprite type, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

Once the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j are transmitted to the image controller (S7802). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the drawing target buffer information includes information instructing to develop the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b, and when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1. includes information instructing to develop the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c as drawing target buffer information.

The image controller 237 draws images in order from the sprite described at the head of the drawing list based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, and develops the images by overwriting into the frame buffer designated by the drawing target buffer information. As a result, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the first drawn sprite can be placed furthest to the back, and the last sprite drawn can be placed furthest to the front.

In addition, if the drawing list includes transfer data information, from the transfer data information, the first address (storage source first address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 where the image data to be transferred is stored are determined. ) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236), and sequentially reads the image data stored from the storage source start address to the storage source final address from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination head address of the normal video RAM 236 at a time when the normal video RAM 236 is in an unused state. The image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is then used based on a drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231, and images are drawn according to the drawing list.

The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information, and transmits the image information together with the drive signal to the third symbol display device 81. Send to. This allows the third symbol display device 81 to display the image developed in the frame buffer. Further, while the image drawn in one frame buffer is being developed, the image developed from the other frame buffer can be displayed on the third pattern display 81, and the drawing process and the display process can be processed in parallel at the same time. I can do it.

In the drawing process, after the process in S7802, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated (S7803). Then, the drawing process is ended and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting the value to "1" if it was "0" and to "0" if it was "1". It will be done. Thereby, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time a drawing list is transmitted.

Here, the transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on a V interrupt signal sent from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and display process for one frame of images are completed. This process is performed every time the drawing process (see FIG. 246(b)) is executed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of image, the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read, and the image 20 milliseconds after the drawing process and display process for the image for one frame are completed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the image for one frame is The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information for 20 minutes is read. Therefore, the image information of the image developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. .

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of image, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read. be done. Therefore, the image information of the image developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. . Thereafter, the frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of images and the frame buffer for reading one frame's worth of image information are changed every 20 milliseconds to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c. By specifying alternately, it is possible to perform the display processing of one frame of images continuously in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of one frame of images.

As explained above, the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example is configured to switch back and forth between the three gaming states of the normal state, variable probability state, and potential state in response to a jackpot or the like. Then, the potential state is set to the most advantageous gaming state. Specifically, compared to the first special symbol lottery, we increased the percentage of small wins in the second special symbol lottery (from 0% to about 46%), and in the potential state, other games The configuration is such that the lottery of the second special symbol is more likely to be executed than the state. As a result, in the potential state, if the second special symbol is drawn, there will be a small hit with a high probability, and the probability of a jackpot will also increase, so the prize ball can be won by placing the ball into the specific winning hole 65a. This allows the player to have more opportunities to win than in other gaming states. Therefore, it is possible to have the player play the game with the expectation that the player will transition to the potential state.

In addition, in this first control example, the type of special symbols that are likely to be drawn by lottery is switched according to the gaming state (switching between the main variation and the sub variation). Specifically, in the normal state and the variable probability state, the variable display of the first special symbol is the main variation, and in the potential state, the variable display of the second special symbol is the main variation. In each gaming state, if the elapsed time after the main fluctuation stops is longer than a predetermined time (30 seconds), a demonstration according to the gaming state will be displayed even if the secondary fluctuation is in progress. (Customer waiting demo screen, latent confirmation demo display) are displayed. Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines determine that the player is not playing the game and display a demonstration when a certain period of time has passed since the fluctuation stopped state. In such conventional gaming machines, it is possible to easily recognize whether or not a game is being played based on the presence or absence of a demo display. You can start playing on the machine. Thereby, it is possible to improve the operating rate of the gaming machine.

However, in such conventional gaming machines, when applied to a gaming machine with specifications in which multiple symbols fluctuate at the same time, even if some symbols stop fluctuating, as long as other symbols continue to fluctuate. , I was unable to run the demo display. Therefore, it may be difficult for a player searching for an empty machine to determine from the displayed content whether or not the machine is empty.

On the other hand, in this first control example, in a normal state or a variable probability state, it is determined whether or not to display the customer waiting demonstration screen depending only on the state of the main change (regardless of the state of the sub-change). . As a result, even if the player enters the ball into the second ball entrance 1640 and quits the game immediately after the 600-second variable display starts, after the predetermined time (30 seconds) has elapsed, can display a customer waiting demo screen. Therefore, other players who have checked the customer waiting demonstration screen can easily understand that the pachinko machine 10 is empty, and can therefore start playing games on the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 from decreasing.

In addition, in this control example, if 30 seconds or more have passed since the main fluctuation stopped in the potential state, a special mode of demonstration display (special display) in which the same character 811 as during the fluctuation continues to be displayed is displayed. The configuration is set. That is, the configuration is such that the same type of display content is displayed during normal display and during demo display. As a result, when a ball entering the second ball entrance 1640 is subsequently detected, the display mode (presentation mode) can be smoothly switched, so the processing load on the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced. .

In addition, in this first control example, as a type of reach effect, a special reach is provided in which after the third symbol is stopped and displayed in a winning combination, a new symbol row is displayed and a reach occurs. . Here, in some gaming machines such as pachinko machines, a plurality of symbols are displayed in a variable manner, and when the symbols are stopped and displayed in a predetermined combination, a winning state advantageous to the player is given. In such a gaming machine, when one symbol is fluctuating and other symbols are stopped and displayed, a reach state is generated in which the symbols that are stopped and displayed form part of a predetermined combination, resulting in a win. The aim is to increase interest by making players look forward to it.

However, in such conventional gaming machines, if a reach state does not occur, even if all the symbols are not stopped and displayed, there is no possibility of a winning state at that point, and the player's play is affected. There was a risk of losing interest. On the other hand, in this control example, a special ready-to-win effect is provided in which after the third symbol is once stopped and displayed in a winning combination, a new symbol sequence enters the frame and develops into a ready-to-reach effect. Thereby, even if the third symbol is once stopped and displayed due to an unsuccessful combination, it can be expected that it will develop into a special reach effect. That is, the combination of stop symbols can be checked by paying attention to whether the combination of stop symbols can develop into a special reach effect (a combination that will result in a reach if a new symbol row L4 is displayed). Therefore, each time a winning combination is stopped and displayed in the variable display, it is possible to expect development into a special reach effect, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

In addition, although in this 1st control example, the variable display of the 1st special symbol and the 2nd special symbol was comprised so that it could be performed simultaneously in parallel, it is not restricted to this. For example, regardless of whether it is the first special symbol or the second special symbol, in a state where one variable display is being executed, other variable displays may not be executed. When there are held balls, a configuration may be adopted in which the variable display is performed in order from the held balls with the oldest starting winnings in terms of time. With this configuration, control can be simplified and processing load can be reduced.

In the first control example, the potential state is set to the most advantageous state, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the variable probability state may be set to the most advantageous state. That is, in the variable probability state, the ball enters the second ball entry port 1640 more easily, and in the normal state or the probability state, the ball enters the first ball entry port 64 rather than the second ball entry port 1640. The configuration may be such that it is easier for the ball to enter the ball. Specifically, for example, in a normal state or a probability state, a variation pattern with a variation time of 600 seconds is selected as the variation pattern when the second special symbol lottery is executed; , a variation pattern having an extremely short variation time (0.5 seconds) may be selected. That is, the specified contents of the probability variation table 202f3 and the potential probability table 202f4 in the first control example may be replaced. In addition, if the second special symbol becomes a jackpot (jackpot E to F) in a variable probability state and the ball passes through the V passing switch 65e3 during the jackpot, the number of time reductions is set to 120, and in the normal state or potential state, The configuration may be such that the number of time reductions is set to zero. As a result, when the second special symbol hits a jackpot in a variable probability state, the gaming state after the jackpot is more likely to be set to a variable probability state again (it becomes easier to loop the variable probability state), increasing the superiority of the variable probability state. be able to.

Furthermore, the normal state may be set as the most advantageous state instead of the probable state or the variable probability state. Specifically, for example, the prescribed contents of the normal table A202f1 and the potential table 202f4 in the first control example are exchanged, and in the case of a jackpot in the normal state, the normal state is likely to be looped (the V passage switch 65e3 is turned It is configured so that it is easy to win a jackpot type (in which the ball is difficult to pass through), and in a probability state or variable probability state, it is configured so that it is easy to win a jackpot type with an opening/closing pattern in which the ball easily passes through the V passing switch 65e3. Good too.

In this first control example, among the opening/closing patterns set for the opening/closing plate 65f1, a pattern in which it is difficult for a ball to pass through the V passing switch 65e3 is set, and the opening/closing plate 65f1 is kept in the open state for 0.2 seconds after the start of one round. Although the configuration is such that a set opening/closing pattern is provided, it may be configured to shorten the period in which the opening state is established and reliably prevent the ball from entering the specific winning hole 65.

In this first control example, when a special reach effect is executed and each symbol row L1 to L3 is temporarily stopped, all the main symbols temporarily stopped in the upper symbol row L1 and the middle symbol row L2 are changed to new symbols. Although the configuration is such that it faces in the direction of column L4, it is not limited to this. For example, when the new symbol row L4 appears (frame-in), only the main symbol (in the example of FIG. 185(a), the main symbol with the number "1") that has a reach will be replaced by the new symbol row L4. It may also be configured to look up in the direction of. Furthermore, for example, the degree of expectation of a jackpot may be suggested by the number of main symbols that look up at the new symbol row L4 among the main symbols other than the main symbols that are reachable. That is, it may be configured such that the greater the number of main symbols looking up in the direction of the new symbol row L4, the higher the expectation of a jackpot in the special ready-to-win performance. In this case, when all the main symbols look up at the new symbol row L4, a configuration may be adopted in which a jackpot is determined (for example, it is selected only in the case of a hit super reach). With this configuration, when the symbols that have been fluctuating are stopped and displayed in an incorrect combination, it is possible to draw more attention to the aspect of each main symbol, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game. .

In this first control example, when the special reach effect is executed, all the main symbols temporarily stopped in the upper symbol row L1 and the middle symbol row L2 are configured to face the new symbol row L4. It is not limited to this. Not only the main symbols but also the reserved symbols may be configured to face the new symbol row L4. In this case, the number of pending symbols facing the new symbol row L4 may be configured to indicate the degree of expectation of a jackpot in the special ready-to-win performance. That is, it may be configured such that the greater the number of pending symbols facing the direction of the new symbol row L4, the higher the expectation of a jackpot. Furthermore, instead of indicating the expectation level of a jackpot in the special ready-to-win performance based on the number of pending symbols, it may be configured to suggest the expectation level that the pending ball corresponding to the pending symbol will be a jackpot. For example, from the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a, the fluctuation pattern of each reserved ball is read in advance, and the fluctuation pattern that develops into a super reach effect (missing super reach or winning super reach) is suspended among the reserved balls. If it is determined that a ball is included, the held symbol corresponding to the held ball that develops into the super reach effect is directed to a new symbol row L4 at the time of temporary stop in the special reach effect. It may also be a configuration. Thereby, at the time of temporary stop in the special super reach performance, the player can pay attention to the reserved symbols and play the game, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In this first control example, the new symbol row L4 that is displayed when the special reach effect is executed is configured to be scrolled and displayed in parallel with each of the symbol rows L1 to L3, but the new symbol row L4 is , it is not necessarily necessary to scroll the display in parallel with each of the symbol rows L1 to L3. For example, a new symbol row L4 may be displayed on the right side or left side of each symbol row L1 to L3, and may be scrolled in the vertical direction (perpendicular to each symbol row L1 to L3). Thereby, it is possible to further increase the degree of freedom of presentation when the special ready-to-reach presentation is selected. Further, the number of new symbol rows is not limited to one, and a configuration may be adopted in which a plurality of symbol rows are newly displayed when a special ready-to-win effect is executed. By displaying a plurality of symbol rows, it is possible to increase the combinations of main symbols during a temporary stop that can develop into a special reach. Therefore, when the player stops at a stop symbol that corresponds to a miss, it is possible to increase the possibility that the stop symbol will develop into a special reach effect, which will encourage the player to develop into a special reach effect. It can be expected with high frequency. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

In this first control example, the result display (see FIG. 188(b)) showing the result of the potential state is performed from the end of the potential state until the variable display of the first special symbol starts. However, this is not limited to this. For example, the result of the probable state may be displayed immediately after the probable state ends. Then, the display may be continued until the first variable display of the first special symbol is finished. By displaying the result immediately after the probable state ends, the player can immediately know the result of the ended probable state. Therefore, even if it takes time for the ball to enter the first ball entry port 64 after the player returns to hitting left-handed, the result of the potential state will not be displayed, causing stress to the player. It is possible to prevent (suppress) storage.

In this first control example, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol was fixed at 12 seconds for two special symbol drawings after the potential state ended, but it is not limited to 12 seconds, and the result The time period may be set to any value (for example, 10 seconds or 20 seconds) within a range where the display can be sufficiently confirmed by the player.

In this first control example, when either the first special symbol or the second special symbol is stopped and displayed as a jackpot or small win, the other special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the other special symbol may be temporarily stopped or fluctuatingly displayed while measurement of the fluctuating time is interrupted. In addition, if either the first special symbol or the second special symbol wins a jackpot or small hit, the other special symbol will win the jackpot or small prize until the jackpot or small prize is stopped. It may also be configured such that a forced lottery is executed in which no one wins, and the lottery result is always a loss. Thereby, it is possible to suppress a situation in which both the first special symbol and the second special symbol win a jackpot or a small jackpot. In this case, it is preferable to configure the system so that the remaining probability variation number and the remaining time reduction number are not subtracted based on the number of times the forced lottery has been executed. This makes it possible to provide fair games to players.

<Second control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 258 to 289. In the first control example described above, the first ball entry port 64 into which the ball is likely to enter when the ball is hit to the left, and the second ball entry port 1640 into which the ball is likely to enter when the ball is hit to the right are provided, so that the left-hand ball game is In the normal state and variable probability state, a game (special pattern 1) in which a first special symbol (hereinafter referred to as special pattern 1) is mainly drawn based on the ball entering the first ball entry hole 64 is played. In a potential state where a right-handed game (substantially variable game) is executed, the lottery of the second special symbol (hereinafter referred to as special symbol 2) based on the ball entering the second ball entry port 1640 is mainly performed. It was configured so that the game to be executed (special figure 2 real fluctuation game) was executed. Then, in a potential state where a right-handed game is executed, the variable winning device 65 is activated for a predetermined period (e.g. , approximately 1.65 seconds)) A small win was set that would be an open state (the lottery probability was approximately 1/2), and the configuration was such that it was possible to expect to receive a ball from the small win.

On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example is configured so that both the lottery of special figure 1 and the lottery of special figure 2 can be executed by right-handed hitting, and the fluctuation of each special figure in the potential state. By setting the variation time of the special figure 2 shorter than the variation time of the special figure 1, it is configured so that the lottery of the special figure 2 is easier to be executed than the lottery of the special figure 1 in a probability state. In addition, the number of time reductions granted in the variable probability state (high probability state of special symbols and time reduction state of normal symbols) is set to be shorter than the number of times the high probability state of special symbols is set (for example, 120 times). (for example, 100 times), and when the number of drawings of special symbols (the number of fluctuations of special symbols) exceeds 100 times in the variable probability state, the state is configured to shift from the variable probability state to the probable state. .

Furthermore, a long variation (180 seconds) and a short variation (3 seconds) are set for the variation time of the second special symbol in the probability variation state, and the variation of the second special symbol at the timing of transition from the probability variation state to the potential probability state. The system is configured to vary the degree of occurrence of small hits in the potential state depending on the situation. Specifically, if the second special symbol starts a long fluctuation (180 seconds) and immediately shifts to the potential state, the fluctuation by the first special symbol will continue until the second special symbol starts to fluctuate next. is executed, the number of times the second special symbol is drawn during the probability state is reduced, and as a result, the degree of occurrence of small wins can be reduced. On the other hand, if the second special symbol transitions to a potential state during a short fluctuation (3 seconds) or near the end timing of a long fluctuation (180 seconds), the second special symbol will change immediately after the transition to a potential state. Since the symbols start to fluctuate, it is possible to increase the occurrence of small wins as a result. In addition, although the details will be described later, in the area where the ball is launched when the ball is hit to the right (right-handed ball area), there is a mechanism that causes the ball to alternately enter the right first ball entry port 64b and the second ball entry port 1640b. is provided, and is configured so that it is impossible (or difficult) to allow a ball to enter only one of the ball entry ports (for example, the second ball entry port 1640a).

With this configuration, as in the first control example described above, it is possible to increase the opportunity for transition to the potential state, which is the gaming state most advantageous to the player, and improve the player's motivation for playing. can. Furthermore, since the degree of advantage (degree of occurrence of small winnings) when transitioning from a variable probability state to a potential state can be varied depending on the timing of the state transition, it is possible to provide more complex gameplay to the player, and the game This can prevent you from getting bored with it early. In addition, balls are alternately placed in the first right ball entrance 64b, which executes the lottery of the first special symbol by entering the ball, and the second ball entrance 1640b, which executes the lottery of the second special symbol by entering the ball. By providing a configuration in which the ball enters the right-handed area, it is possible to prevent only the lottery of the second special symbol that is advantageous to the player from being executed, thereby preventing a situation that is excessively advantageous to the player. It is possible to prevent this from being added.

Furthermore, in the first control example, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are configured to execute the lottery at the same time (execute variation), and the lottery result of either one of the special symbols (for example, the second special symbol) becomes a hit (big hit or small hit), and at the timing when the symbol indicating the winning lottery result stops being displayed (at the timing when the win is confirmed), the fluctuation of the other special symbol (for example, the first special symbol) is missed. It was configured so that it would be forced to stop depending on the design.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example, the lottery result of either one of the special symbols (for example, the second special symbol) is a win (big hit or small win), and the symbol indicating the winning lottery result At the timing when is stopped and displayed (when the win is confirmed), the measurement (counting) of the fluctuation time for the fluctuation of the other special symbol (for example, the first special symbol) is interrupted, and the lottery result of one special symbol is At the timing when the winning game based on the winning game ends (timing when the special symbol can vary), the measurement (count) of the suspended variation time for the variation of the other special symbol is restarted.

As a result, when the first special symbol and the second special symbol are drawn at the same time (performing variation), it becomes possible to reliably provide the player with the lottery results of each special symbol, and the player can enjoy the game. You can prevent them from feeling dissatisfied.

The difference in configuration between the pachinko machine 10 in this second control example and the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example is that on the game board 13, the placement position of the variable winning device 65 is changed from the right-handed area to the left-handed ball. Also, the ball hit to the right has moved to the lower center region where the ball can enter, the distribution unit 660 has been provided in place of the second ball entry port 1640, and the ball has moved into the second ball entry port 1640. The contents of the ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110 have been partially changed in that an electric accessory 660f that restricts the entry of balls into the distribution unit 660 is provided in place of the electric accessory 1640a that restricts the entry of balls. The contents of the RAM 203 provided in the main control device 110 have been partially changed, and some of the processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 have been changed from the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example. The contents of the ROM 222 provided in the audio lamp control device 113 have been partially changed, the contents of the RAM 223 provided in the audio lamp control device 113 have been partially changed, and The point is that some processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 are changed from the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example. Regarding other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, This is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the first control example will be denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustrations and explanations thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 258, the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example will be described. FIG. 258 is a front view of the board 13 in the second control example. As shown in FIG. 258, in the second control example, the distribution unit 660 is placed in the position where the variable winning device 65 was arranged in the first control example (to the right of the variable display unit 80 (right-handed hitting area)). The electric accessories 660f are arranged above the distribution unit 660, and the second input is arranged on the downstream side of the right-hand hitting region (lower right side of the board surface 13) in the first control example. The difference is that the ball opening 1640 is removed and the variable winning device 65 is disposed below the central area of the board (below the first ball entrance 64). Although the details will be described later, this distribution unit 660 is configured to allow balls to enter through a passage hole provided at the upper part of the distribution unit 660. Inside the sorting unit 660, there is a first right ball entrance 64b where a lottery for a first special symbol is executed when a ball enters, and a lottery for a second special symbol is executed when a ball enters. A second ball entry port 1640b is provided, and balls that enter the distribution unit 660 through the passage port are distributed to one of these ball entry ports. Therefore, by hitting the ball to the right and aiming at the distribution unit 660, it is possible to execute the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol.

Further, above the sorting unit 660, an electric accessory 660f is disposed which can be changed between a permissible position for allowing balls to flow into the passage hole provided at the top of the sorting unit 660 and a regulating position for restricting them. There is. This electric accessory 660f, like the electric accessory 640a of the first control example described above, is used for a predetermined period of time when the result of the normal symbol lottery, which is executed based on the ball passing through the through gate 67, is a win. (1 second x 2 times) It is controlled to vary to the permissible position. As a result, in a normal state, it is better to aim at the first ball entrance 64 in a game in which the ball is hit to the left (hereinafter referred to as a left-hand ball game), and it is better to aim at the first ball entrance 64 in a game in which the ball is hit to the right (hereinafter referred to as a right-hand ball game). The configuration is such that the first special symbol can be varied more efficiently than aiming at the ball entrance 64b.

Here, the configuration of the distribution unit 660 will be described with reference to FIG. 259. FIGS. 259(a) and 259(b) are diagrams showing the internal structure of the distribution unit 660. In reality, a cover body is placed on the front side, and the cover body is made of a material whose interior can be seen through, with a spiral pattern on the surface that is colored so that the interior cannot be seen through or is difficult to see through. It is constructed so that it is difficult to see the inside.

As shown in FIGS. 259(a) and 259(b), a passage hole into which a ball can enter is provided in the upper part of the distribution unit 660, and a transmission through which it is possible to detect that a ball has passed through the passage hole is provided. A type ball entry sensor 660a is arranged. A distribution member 900 for distributing balls to the right first ball entry port 64b or the second ball entry port 1640b is provided below the passage port. A right first ball entry port 64b is provided in the lower left direction of the distribution member 900 when viewed from the front, and a second ball entry port 1640b is provided in the lower right direction of the distribution member 900 when viewed from the front. The balls that have passed through the passage port are distributed alternately to the right first ball entry port 64b and the second ball entry port 1640b by the distribution member 900.

The sorting member 900 is configured to be able to receive balls that have entered the sorting unit 660 using the accommodating portion 900a or 900c. When the receiving portion 900a receives a ball, the weight of the ball causes the entire distribution member 900 to rotate counterclockwise when viewed from the front. As a result, the accommodating portion 900a is tilted downward to the lower left (see FIG. 89(b)), and the right first incoming ball is disposed in the lower left direction in front view with respect to the distribution member 900. The ball falls toward the opening 64b (the ball is guided to the right first ball entry opening 64b).

Here, the distribution member 900 is configured to be able to rotate approximately 15 degrees clockwise and counterclockwise when viewed from the front, and a magnet 900b is provided on the boundary wall between the housing section 900a and the housing section 900b. ing. On the other hand, the base body provided on the rear side of the sorting unit 660 has a state in which the sorting member 900 is not rotated clockwise or counterclockwise (the bottom surfaces of the accommodating portions 900a and 900c are horizontal). In this state, the base-side magnet 901 is arranged at a position on the back side (on the center line of the passage port) of the position where the magnet 900b is arranged.

The magnet 900b of the distribution member 900 and the base-side magnet 901 are configured to have polarities that repel each other. In detail, the base-side magnet 901 is composed of a bar-shaped magnet fixed to a base body, and is configured so that a magnetic pole (S pole or N pole) is generated at the tip. The base side magnet 901 is arranged and fixed so that its tip portion faces toward the distribution member 900 side. The magnet 900b is also a rod-shaped magnet similar to the base magnet 901, and is fixed to the distribution member 900 so that the tip thereof faces toward the base magnet 901. At a position where the distribution member 900 rotates and the boundary wall between the accommodating portions 900a and 900c is directly above (on the center line of the interval that allows approximately one game ball to enter at the passage opening), the base side magnet is rotated. This is the position where the magnet 901 and the magnet 900b of the distribution member 900 are closest to each other (the tips thereof face each other). Here, since the magnets are arranged so that their polarities are the same (for example, N-pole and N-pole), they repel each other and can stop at a position where the boundary wall of the distribution member 900 faces directly upward. Instead, it will be maintained in a rotated position to either the left or right.

As a result, when the magnet 900b is on the center line of the passageway (the upper position), the magnet 900b and the base-side magnet 901 repel each other, so that the distributing member 900 can be moved to the left or right. Then, either the accommodating part 900a or the accommodating part 900c will face the side that receives the balls entering the distribution unit 660 (the passage port side of the distribution unit 660). Therefore, the balls entering the distribution unit 660 can be reliably distributed to the right first ball entrance 64b and the second ball entrance 1640b.

In addition, as the magnet 900b and the base-side magnet 901 repel, for example, the accommodating portion 900a receives the ball and rotates about 30 degrees to the left, guiding the ball to the right first ball entry port 64b, and then shaking it. It is possible to prevent the division member 900 from rotating clockwise (with the accommodating portion 900a facing upward). As a result, after the ball is guided to the right first ball entrance 64b, the accommodating part 900c is in a state facing upward, and the accommodating part 900c receives the ball that then enters the distribution unit 660. Due to the weight of the ball, the distribution member 900 rotates approximately 30 degrees clockwise, and the housing section 900c is tilted in the lower right direction when viewed from the front, so that the ball falls from the housing section 900c. , the ball enters the second ball entry port 1640b (the ball is guided to the second ball entry port 1640b). In this way, the distributing member 900 can alternately guide the balls entering the distributing unit 660 to the right first ball entrance port 64b and the second ball entrance port 1640b. 64b and the second ball entrance 1640b, the balls can be evenly distributed to win prizes. Thereby, the lottery for the first special symbol and the lottery for the second special symbol can be executed in parallel.

A guide plate 900z1 is provided between the sorting member 900 and the first right ball entrance 64b to guide the balls accommodated in the accommodation section 900a to the first right ball entrance 64b. A guide plate 900Z2 is provided between the member 900 and the second ball entry port 1640b for guiding the ball accommodated in the accommodation portion 900a to the second ball entry port 1640b. Thereby, the balls sorted by the sorting member 900 can be smoothly guided to each ball entry port.

Further, a regulating member (not shown) for regulating the rotation range of the distributing member 900 is provided on the upper end side (distributing member 900 side) of each guide plate 900z1, 900z2, and the distributing member 900 and the regulating member The range of rotation is regulated by the contact between the members. Thereby, it is possible to suppress excessive rotation of the distribution member 900 (further counterclockwise rotation than the state shown in FIG. 259(b)) due to the weight of the balls accommodated in the accommodation portion 900a. The balls sorted by the sorting member 900 can be smoothly guided to each ball entrance.

<Game explanation of second control example>
Next, the content of the game in this second control example will be explained with reference to FIGS. 260 to 268. In the second control example, compared to the first control example described above, the transition ratio to each gaming state (normal state, variable probability state, potential state) was changed, and the number of time reductions given in the variable probability state was changed. point, the point of changing the fluctuation time of each special symbol in the variable probability state and the probability state, and when the first special symbol and the second special symbol are fluctuating at the same time, one special symbol stops at the winning symbol. The measurement of the fluctuation time for the fluctuation of the other special symbol is interrupted (temporarily stopped) at the displayed timing (timing when the win is confirmed), and the suspended fluctuation time is stopped after the winning game based on the lottery result of one special symbol ends. The difference is that the configuration uses a configuration that restarts the measurement.

First, with reference to FIG. 260, the flow of gaming state transition in the second control example will be explained. FIG. 260 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the flow of gaming state transition in the second control example. As shown in FIG. 260, the pachinko machine 10 of the second control example is configured to shift between three gaming states (normal state, variable probability state, and potential state) similarly to the pachinko machine 10 of the first control example described above. It is configured.

Among the three gaming states described above, in the normal state (normal gaming state), the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) of each special symbol (first special symbol and second special symbol) is set in the same manner as in the first control example described above. has been done. Therefore, the normal state is a gaming state in which the lottery of the first special symbol (special symbol 1) is mainly performed (actually special symbol 1 variation). Further, in this control example, since a small win is not set in the lottery result of the first special symbol (special symbol 1), a small win game is not executed.

Next, in the variable probability state (variable probability game state), the variation time of the second special symbol is set to be shorter than the first control example described above, and the right area of the board 13 (the area on the right side of the variable display unit 80 ) (hereinafter referred to as a right-handed game) is executed, and a game is executed in which balls flow into the distribution unit 660 and both the first special symbol and the second special symbol are varied at the same time. The details of the fluctuation time of the second special symbol will be described later with reference to FIG. Short-time fluctuations (3 seconds) shorter than the fluctuation time of Figure 1) and long-term fluctuations (180 seconds) longer than the fluctuation time of special chart 1 are set, and the probability change state depends on the fluctuation time selected. The ratio of the lottery (variation) to be executed is set to be different.

Further, in this control example, the number of time reductions during the variable probability state is set to a smaller number (100 times) than the number of times the variable probability state is set (120 times). Therefore, in the variable probability state, if the special symbol fluctuates more than 100 times without winning the special symbol jackpot, the gaming state is configured to shift from the variable probability state to the probability state (20 times). There is. As a result, for example, even if after the end of a jackpot game in which a player wins in the normal state, the player is not in the most advantageous potential state but in a variable probability state, the player will not have to go through the special symbol jackpot. Since it is possible to shift to a potential state, it is possible to maintain a sense of expectation in the player.

In addition, as mentioned above, in this control example, short-time fluctuation (3 seconds) and long-time fluctuation (180 seconds) are set as the fluctuation time of the second special symbol during the variable probability state, so the special symbol during the variable probability state is When the number of variations of the symbol exceeds 100 times and the gaming state changes from the probability variation state to the probability state (20 times), depending on the variation status of the second special symbol, a small hit may occur during the probability state (20 times). You can make a difference in the number of times you win. Specifically, for example, when the time saving state ends with the start of a long-term fluctuation (180 seconds) of the second special symbol and the gaming state shifts from the variable probability state to the potential state, the second special symbol The timing at which the next variation is executed is 180 seconds later. On the other hand, since the variation time of the first special symbol is set to 10 seconds in the variable probability state (see Figure 270 (b)) and 5 seconds in the probability state (see Figure 271), the next variation of the second special symbol The first special symbol is set to be variable 20 times until 180 seconds have elapsed until it is executed.

Furthermore, in this control example, when a right-handed game is executed, balls flow into the distribution unit 660 and are configured to alternately enter the right first ball entry port 64b and the second ball entry port 1640b. Therefore, it is impossible (difficult) to keep changing only the second special symbol. Therefore, it is possible to easily make a difference depending on the number of variations of each special symbol (first special symbol and second special symbol) executed during the potential state (20 times).

In the potential game state (potential gaming state), the variation time of the first special symbol is set to be short compared to the first control example described above, and the lottery (fluctuation) of the first special symbol and the variation of the second special symbol are It is configured so that the lottery (variation) is executed together (special figure 1 special figure 2 real variation). Since the other elements are the same as those in the first control example described above, detailed explanation will be omitted.

As explained above, in this second control example, the player's motivation to play is provided by providing an opportunity to shift to the potential state, which is the most advantageous gaming state for the player, without winning the jackpot of the special symbol. It has the effect of being able to continuously increase the Furthermore, if the special symbol moves to the potential state without winning the jackpot, it is possible to vary the degree of advantage in the potential state depending on the transition timing and the fluctuation situation of the second special symbol. This has the effect of being able to provide players with a variety of gaming features and preventing them from getting bored with the games early.

In addition, in the potential state, the variation of the second special symbol (lottery) in which a small win is set in the lottery result and the variation (lottery) of the first special symbol in which a small win is not set in the lottery result are executed. This configuration has the effect of suppressing the occurrence of excessive small winning games.

In addition, in the game state (probable variable state, potential state) in which the right-handed game is executed, the fluctuation ratio between the fluctuation of the first special symbol (lottery) and the fluctuation of the second special symbol (lottery) is the same as that of each special symbol. It is set differently depending on the fluctuation time set for fluctuation. Therefore, even in the same gaming state, the degree of advantage varies depending on the variation time of each special symbol that is set, so the player can play the game while expecting that the second special symbol will have many variations that are advantageous. The effect is that it can be done.

In addition, in this control example, a small win is not set in the lottery result of the first special symbol, but the lottery is configured so that the lottery of the second special symbol is more advantageous to the player than the lottery of the first special symbol. For example, the lottery result of the first special symbol may be set so that a small win is won with a lower winning probability than the small win probability of the second special symbol. In addition, the probability of winning a small hit is set to be the same for the first special symbol and the second special symbol. A small winning game may be provided in which winning a small winning with the second special symbol makes it easier for the ball to enter the variable winning device 65 during the small winning game. In this case, a plurality of small winning games with different opening periods and opening patterns of the variable winning device 65 are set, and the case where the small winning is won with the second special symbol is higher than the case where the small winning is won with the first special symbol. In this case, it is preferable to make the opening period of the variable winning device 65 longer or to select an opening pattern in which a ball can easily enter the ball.

Next, with reference to FIG. 261, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second control example, in a state where special figure 1 and special figure 2 are fluctuating at the same time, either one (special figure 2) is a hit (a jackpot or a jackpot). The flow of each special symbol variation and effect display (effect display displayed on the third symbol display device 81) in the case of a small hit will be explained. FIG. 261 is a timing chart showing an example of the flow of each special symbol variation, and the third symbol display device 81 executes an effect display based on the variation of special symbol 1 (effect display using the third symbol). In the probability change state, the fluctuation of special drawing 1 (10 seconds) and the fluctuation of special drawing 2 (3 seconds) are executed simultaneously, and the flow is shown when special drawing 2 has won a small hit.

Here, in a gaming machine such as the pachinko machine 10 of this second control example in which special symbols 1 and 2 can be varied (lottery) at the same time, the third symbol display device 81 can respond to variations in each special symbol. In some cases, a certain effect display is executed. In this control example, among each special figure (special figure 1 or special figure 2), a variation display (main variation) corresponding to the variation of one of the special figures, and a variation display (sub-variation) corresponding to the variation of the other special figure. variation) is executed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 182).

These main fluctuations and sub-variations are configured so that the corresponding special symbol fluctuations are switched depending on the gaming state. For example, in the normal state, the fluctuation display corresponding to special symbol 1, which is a real fluctuation, becomes the main fluctuation, The variation display corresponding to special figure 2 is set to be the sub variation. In this way, by displaying the special pattern variation that is actually executed in the set gaming state among the special pattern 1 variation and special pattern 2 variation as the main variation, the player can The results of the game can be displayed on the device 81 in an easy-to-understand manner.

In addition, in this second control example, an example was shown in which the variation display of each special figure (special figure 1 or special figure 2) is switched and set to the main variation and the sub-variation according to the gaming state, but this is not limited to this. The structure may be such that the variation display corresponding to the special figure 1 variation and the variation display corresponding to the special figure 2 variation are randomly switched to the main variation and the sub-variation, or according to a predetermined rule (for example, alternating ) may be configured. Alternatively, a configuration may be adopted in which the player can select. Even with such a configuration, the same problem will occur if a winning is won with a special symbol variation on the side that does not correspond to the main variation executed by the third symbol display device 81.

Returning to FIG. 261, the explanation will be continued. First, the variations of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are started at the same time, and the special figure 1 effect display (10 seconds) is executed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the timing of the start of the variation of the special figure 1. Then, 3 seconds after the fluctuation of each special drawing starts (after the fluctuation time of special drawing 2 has elapsed), a symbol indicating that special drawing 2 has won a small hit will be stopped and displayed, and the fluctuation of special drawing 1 will be stopped. Measurement of fluctuation time for is interrupted. Although the details will be described later with reference to FIG. 275, during the period in which the measurement of the variation time for the variation of special figure 1 is interrupted (the interruption period in FIG. 261), the measurement of the variation time is interrupted, but the measurement of the variation time is interrupted. 1 symbol display device 37 is configured so that the variation of special symbol 1 is continuously executed. With this configuration, when a small winning game is executed, it is possible to notify the player that the variation of the special drawing 1 has not been forcibly stopped.

On the other hand, in this second control example, since the same process as the variable display setting process (see S4112 in FIG. 243) of the first control example described above is executed, the third symbol display device 81 The variation display (or production display) of the third symbol executed will be performed for a predetermined period (corresponding to the variation time of the special symbol variation) even if the special symbol variation is interrupted (the measurement of the special symbol variation time is interrupted). It is configured to run continuously (for 8 seconds). As a result, when the special symbol variation is interrupted (the measurement of the special symbol variation time is interrupted), the third symbol variation display ( It is possible to prevent a situation in which the game (or effect display) is interrupted and gives a sense of discomfort to the player.

Here, when the special symbol variation is interrupted as described above (the measurement of the special symbol variation time is interrupted), the variation display (or effect display) of the third symbol executed on the third symbol display device 81 will be explained. In the case of continuous execution, the interrupted special symbol variation is restarted, and the timing at which the restarted special symbol variation ends and the variation display (or production) of the third symbol executed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined. There was a problem in that there was an error of a predetermined period (interruption period of special figure fluctuation) between the timing at which the display (display) ended.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the second control example, similarly to the pachinko machine 10 of the first control example described above, the fluctuation pattern (variable display of the third symbol or The third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is not completely stopped until the symbol confirmation command output from the main controller 110 is received after the completion of the execution (effect display). , it is configured so that a shaking effect is executed in which each symbol is slightly shaken. Therefore, a predetermined period (interruption period of special symbol fluctuation) that occurs between the timing at which the above-mentioned special symbol fluctuation ends and the timing at which the fluctuation display (or effect display) of the third symbol executed on the third symbol display device 81 ends. ) during the error period, the third symbol display device 81 continues to produce a shaking effect for the third symbol, reducing the player's desire to play by making him think that a problem has occurred in the pachinko machine 10. There was a problem with letting it happen.

On the other hand, in the second control example, the above-mentioned problem is solved by configuring the additional effect to be executed using the above-mentioned error period. In other words, as shown in FIG. 261, the pachinko machine 10 of the second control example receives a small hit at the timing when the 8-second normal effect is finished as the special figure 1 effect display executed on the third symbol display device 81. If the gaming state has not ended, a shaking effect is performed in which the third symbol corresponding to special symbol 1 is oscillated on the third symbol display device 81 for a period (1 second) until the small winning gaming state ends. is executed, and thereafter, when the small winning game state ends and the special figure 1 variation is restarted, an additional performance corresponding to the special figure 1 variation period after restarting is executed. With this configuration, the interrupted special symbol fluctuation is restarted, and the timing at which the restarted special symbol fluctuation ends and the third symbol fluctuation display (or effect display) executed on the third symbol display device 81 are determined. ) ends and the error period (6 seconds in FIG. 261) that occurs, it is possible to suppress the situation in which the third symbol is continuously displayed in a oscillating manner, thereby reducing the player's desire to play. It is possible to prevent the situation from occurring.

Although details will be described later, in this second control example, the length of the above-mentioned error period is calculated, and the content of the additional performance to be executed is varied depending on the error period. This makes it possible to display a more suitable effect for the player.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 262 to 264, the contents of the additional effect executed by the third symbol display device 81 will be explained. Although details will be described later with reference to FIG. 273(b), in this control example, the type of additional performance to be executed is different based on the length of the period during which the additional performance is performed. As a result, players may feel uncomfortable with the effect display (additional effect display) that is executed in the remaining period that occurs when the effect display corresponding to the main change is continuously executed regardless of the lottery result of the sub-change. can be suppressed from giving.

FIG. 262(a) is a schematic diagram showing a display screen when no additional effects are performed in the remaining period. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 273(b), but in this control example, the additional effect is not executed in some cases where the remaining period is less than a predetermined period (less than 2 seconds). . This is done intentionally because if the remaining period is so short that it is difficult for the player to understand the content of the additional effect, if the additional effect is executed, it will make the player feel uncomfortable. This prevents additional effects from being executed. In this case, as shown in FIG. 262(a), until the stop command is received from the main controller 110 (see points D to E in FIG. 261), the shaking continues with the effect corresponding to the main fluctuation completed. Stop display.

Next, FIG. 262(b) is a schematic diagram showing a display screen when additional performance A is executed as the type of additional performance during the remaining period. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 273(b), but in this control example, the additional effect A is configured to be executed in some cases where the remaining period is less than a predetermined period (less than 2 seconds). There is. As shown in FIG. 262(b), in this additional effect A, the number (identification information) displayed next to each symbol is changed to "?" after the effect corresponding to the main variation has finished. Shaking stops appearing. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player from knowing the result of the main fluctuation until the remaining period has elapsed.

Although this control example uses a display mode in which only the numbers attached to each symbol are hidden, for example, a display mode may be used in which the characters (such as "animals") of each symbol are also hidden. By doing so, it is possible to further prevent the player from knowing the result of the main fluctuation until the remaining period has elapsed. In addition, this additional effect A is an effect that simply changes the display mode (display mode of symbols) of a part of the effect corresponding to the executed main fluctuation, so even if it is executed when the remaining period is short, It is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

FIG. 263(a) is a schematic diagram showing a display screen when additional performance B is executed as the type of additional performance during the remaining period. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 273(b), but in this control example, additional effect B is configured to be executed in some cases where the remaining period is a predetermined period (2 seconds to 6 seconds). ing. As shown in FIG. 263(a), in this additional effect B, the same display as in FIG. 262(a) is executed in the main display area Dm, and a change is executed for the player in the sub display area Ds. A telop is displayed in the small area Ds5 to notify that the person is present. As a result, even if the main fluctuation continues to be displayed in a stopped state, it is possible for the player to easily understand that the main fluctuation is being fluctuated.

In addition, in this control example, as additional effect B, the display in the main display area Dm is configured to be the same as that in FIG. 262(a), that is, the effect is not added to the display in the main display area Dm, and the additional effect is Although the control load when executing is reduced, the control load is not limited to this, and for example, as additional effect B, the display in the main display area Dm may be executed in the same manner as in FIG. 262(b). . Thereby, it becomes possible to execute the additional performance using the entire area of the third symbol display device 81, and there is an effect that the player can easily understand that the additional performance is being executed.

Next, FIG. 263(b) is a schematic diagram showing a display screen when additional performance C is executed as the type of additional performance during the remaining period. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 273(b), but in this control example, the additional effect C is configured to be executed in some cases where the remaining period is a predetermined period (2 seconds to 6 seconds). ing. As shown in FIG. 263(b), in this additional effect C, the main variation display is displayed in a reduced size in the small area Dm5 at the upper right corner of the main display area Dm when viewed from the front, and in the center of the main display area Dm, the pachinko machine 10 is A game explanation will be displayed. In this way, by configuring the system to provide the player with information different from the information suggesting the lottery result of the main variation during the remaining period after the main variation effect ends, it is possible to give the player a sense of discomfort. The remaining period of the main fluctuation can be completed without any change. Further, in the sub-display area Ds, similar to FIG. 263(a), a telop is displayed to inform the player that a change is being executed in the small area Ds5. This allows the player to easily understand that the value is changing.

FIG. 264 is a schematic diagram showing a display screen when additional performance D is executed as the type of additional performance during the remaining period. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 273(b), but in this control example, the additional effect D is executed when the remaining period is longer than a predetermined period (6 seconds or more). As shown in FIG. 264, this additional effect D is similar to the additional effect C shown in FIG. In the center of the area Dm, the main variation effect is displayed again (replay display). In this way, if the period (remaining period) during which the additional performance is executed is longer than a predetermined period (six seconds or more), the performance dedicated to the additional performance (replay display performance) is executed without making the player feel uncomfortable. Therefore, the performance effect using the remaining period can be enhanced.

As explained above, in this second control example, in a configuration in which fluctuations of each special figure (special figure 1, special figure 2) are executed simultaneously, one of the special figures stops at a symbol indicating a win. When displayed, the measurement of the fluctuation time of the other special figure is stopped, and after the winning game ends, the measurement of the fluctuation time of the special figure is restarted, so the first control example described above As such, it becomes possible to play the game without forcibly stopping the variation of the special symbols, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the game content.

Furthermore, the variation display (for example, main variation) corresponding to the special symbol variation executed on the third symbol display device 81 is set in advance even if the measurement of the variation time of the special symbol is stopped. Since it is executed continuously during the period (period corresponding to the fluctuation time of the special drawing), it is possible to prevent the fluctuation display corresponding to the fluctuation of the other special drawing from being interrupted due to the lottery result of one special drawing. can. As a result, for example, when a story-like production is being executed as a variable display corresponding to the other special figure variation, if one of the special figure variations wins and the winning game starts. Even when the other special symbol changes, it is possible to perform the story-like production without interruption. Therefore, there is an effect that the presentation effect of the game can be enhanced.

Furthermore, when the measurement of the variation time of the other special symbol is stopped, the period until the variation of the other special symbol is completed and the variation of the other special symbol executed on the third symbol display device 81. Although the period in which the corresponding fluctuating display is completed will be different, since the configuration is such that the different period (remainder period) is used to execute additional effects, the fluctuation of the special figure will not be displayed to the player. It is possible to suppress giving a sense of discomfort due to a difference between the period and the period of the variable display corresponding to the special figure variation.

In addition, in this second control example, the additional effect that is executed when the variation period of the special symbol and the period of the variation display corresponding to the variation of the special symbol are different is adjusted to the length of the different period (remainder period). Since it is configured to change accordingly, it is possible to further suppress giving the player a sense of discomfort.

Specifically, if the remaining period is less than a predetermined period (for example, less than 2 seconds), the additional performance may be intentionally prevented from being performed so that the player does not feel uncomfortable with the additional performance. , an additional effect (short-term additional effect) is executed in which only a part of the display content indicating that the variable display corresponding to the special figure change has been completed is changed. Thereby, even if there is an extra period during which it is difficult to provide additional performance to the player, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable. In addition, in this second control example, as an additional effect that changes only a part of the display content indicating that the variable display corresponding to the special figure change has ended, the change of the special figure among the variable displays corresponding to the special figure change. It is configured such that an additional effect is executed in which the display mode showing the lottery results is changed. As a result, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the player grasps the lottery result of the special symbol variation by the variable display corresponding to the special symbol variation before the special symbol variation period ends.

In addition, if the remaining period is a predetermined period (for example, from 2 seconds to 6 seconds), the period during which the additional effect is being executed (the fluctuation display of the special symbol fluctuation has ended, but the fluctuation of the special symbol has not been completed) Since no new special symbol variations are executed during this period, there is a possibility that the player may suspect that the pachinko machine 10 is malfunctioning. Therefore, in this control example, when the remaining period is the predetermined period, the third symbol display device 81 displays a display to inform the player that the special symbol is changing (“changing display”). This allows the player to easily understand that the state where no new special symbol variation is executed is a normal state.In addition, in the main subject 2 control example, the remainder period is a predetermined period. The system is configured so that the above-mentioned "fluctuating display" is displayed at the same time as the additional effect is started. It may be configured so that "display during fluctuation" is executed later. With this configuration, immediately after the additional performance is executed (for example, 2 seconds from the start), the same performance as the short-term additional performance described above will be performed, so the execution period of the additional performance is It is possible to prevent people from understanding the information.

In addition, in this second control example, when the remainder period of the predetermined period (2 seconds to 6 seconds) is set, information unrelated to the lottery result of the special drawing (for example, information explaining the game content, etc.) Additional effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are also configured to be executed. With this configuration, it is possible to effectively utilize the period in which new special symbol fluctuations are not started on the display on the third symbol display device 81 to notify the player of information regarding the game. Furthermore, by displaying information unrelated to the lottery result of the special drawing, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to the surplus period. In addition, in this second control example, information explaining the game content is displayed as information unrelated to the lottery result of the special drawing, but even if other information is displayed. For example, past game history may be displayed, or information unrelated to the game itself (fortune-telling, games, etc.) may be displayed.

In addition, in this second control example, among the special pattern 1 variation and special pattern 2 variation that are executed at the same time, the special pattern variation that the player expects more from the lottery result is the main variation, and the others are considered the sub-variations. The third symbol display device 81 is configured so that the area where the main variation is executed is larger than the area where the sub-variation is executed, so that the player can easily understand the content of the main variation. There is. This allows the player to easily understand the details of the main fluctuation.

Furthermore, in this second control example, the special figure that the player expects in the lottery result (the special figure that is subject to real fluctuation) is configured to change depending on the gaming state, but the special figure that is subject to real change Since this is executed as the main variation, it is possible to display (notify) the game content in an easy-to-understand manner to the player.

Next, with reference to FIG. 265, the flow of changes in each special figure (special figure 1 or special figure 2) when the gaming state shifts from the potential state to the normal state in this second control example will be explained. do. FIG. 265(a) is a timing chart showing the flow when the special symbol fluctuation in the first rotation after the end of the potential state (121st rotation after the end of the previous jackpot) is special symbol 2, and FIG. 265(b) This is a timing chart showing the flow when the special symbol fluctuation of the first rotation after the end of the potential state (the 121st exhibition after the end of the previous jackpot) is the special symbol 1.

As shown in FIGS. 265(a) and 265(b), in a pachinko machine 10 in which special drawings 1 and 2 can change simultaneously, an advantageous state (potential state) in which the player is advantageous occurs a predetermined number of times (e.g. 120 times), when the special pattern variation (special pattern 1 variation or special pattern 2 variation) is executed during the advantageous state, the number of times the advantageous state is set (i.e., the number of guaranteed variations) ) is subtracted. In this case, the special pattern variation executed in the first rotation after the end of the advantageous state (the number of variations "121" in Fig. 265) becomes the special pattern 1 variation (see Fig. 265(b)), and the special pattern 2 variation (see FIG. 265(a)) occurs.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second control example, in order to efficiently play (play) games during the potential state, a short variation time is set as the special symbol variation time during the potential state. (See FIG. 270(b)), the game result displayed when the potential state ends (see FIG. 188(b)) is configured to be displayed during the special symbol variation executed after the potential state ends. are doing. Specifically, the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 fluctuation (main fluctuation in the normal state) executed first after transitioning from the potential state to the normal state allows the player to grasp the game result (Fig. 188(b)). (12 seconds in this control example).

However, as described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second control example, the special figure 1 variation executed first after transitioning from the potential state to the normal state is the special symbol of the first rotation after the end of the potential state. Whether it will be a fluctuation or a special symbol fluctuation in the second rotation will vary depending on the gaming situation during the potential state, so simply setting the special symbol fluctuation time for the first rotation after the end of the potential state to 12 seconds will not result in a There was a problem in that it was not possible for the player to understand the game result of the state.

Therefore, in this second control example, the fluctuation time for two rotations after the end of the potential state is set to a sufficient time (12 seconds in this control example) for the player to understand the game result (FIG. 188(b)). The system is configured so that when the variation of special figure 1 is executed in any special figure variation, the game result is notified using the variation time.This ensures that the player is accurately informed. It is possible to notify the game results of the state.

In other words, in the case shown in FIG. 265(a), the special symbol fluctuation in the second rotation (number of fluctuations "122") after the end of the potential state becomes the special symbol 1 fluctuation, and the game result is announced using that fluctuation time. , In the case shown in FIG. 265(b), the special symbol fluctuation of the first rotation after the end of the potential state (number of fluctuations "121") becomes the special symbol 1 fluctuation, and the game result is announced using the fluctuation time. .

In addition, in the case shown in FIG. 265(a), the gaming result is calculated using the period from the transition from the potential state to the normal state until the start of the special symbol 1 variation, which is the main variation in the normal state. It may also be configured to notify.

Next, with reference to FIG. 266 and FIG. 267, the screen display contents set based on the setting status of the special figure 1 standby flag 223s and the special figure 2 standby flag 223t will be explained. FIG. 266(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of demo display A, FIG. 266(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of demo display B, and FIG. 267(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of demo display B. 267(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the content of special display A, and FIG. 267(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the content of special display B. FIG.

<About the electrical configuration in the second control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 268 to 271, the configurations of the ROM 202 and RAM 203 provided in the main control device 110 in the second control example will be described. In the ROM 202 of the second control example, the contents of the jackpot type selection table 202d are partially changed and the contents of the fluctuation pattern selection table 202f are partially changed from the configuration of the ROM 202 of the first control example described above. The difference is that

First, the contents of the jackpot type selection table 202d in the second control example will be explained with reference to FIG. 268(a). FIG. 268(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the jackpot type selection table 202d.

The jackpot type selection table 202d used in this second control example is a first win type counter in which each jackpot type is defined, in contrast to the jackpot type selection table 202d (see FIG. 193) used in the first control example described above. The value of C2 has been changed, the jackpot H has been specified instead of the jackpot G, which is the jackpot type selected when the symbol type is special drawing 2, and the jackpot H has been specified in place of the jackpot G, which is the jackpot type selected when the symbol type is special drawing 2. The difference is that the number of time reductions granted is defined as 100 times instead of 120 times. The rest is the same as the first control example described above, and detailed explanations of the same elements will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 268(a), when the symbol type is special figure 1 and the value of the first winning type counter C2 is "0 to 29", jackpot A is selected as the jackpot type, and the first winning When the value of the type counter C2 is "30 to 79", jackpot B is selected as the jackpot type, and when the value of the first winning type counter C2 is "80 to 89", jackpot C is selected as the jackpot type. If it is selected and the value of the first winning type counter C2 is "90 to 99", jackpot D is selected as the jackpot type.

In addition, when the symbol type is special figure 2 and the value of the first winning type counter C2 is "0 to 44", jackpot E is selected as the jackpot type, and the value of the first winning type counter C2 is " 45-49'', jackpot F is selected as the jackpot type, and when the value of the first winning type counter C2 is ``50-99'', jackpot H is selected as the jackpot type.

Here, the jackpot H, which is the jackpot type defined in the jackpot type selection table 202d of the second control example, will be explained. This jackpot H is a jackpot in which a two-round (R) jackpot game is executed, and the same opening pattern as the small winning game is set as the opening pattern of the variable winning device 65 executed during the jackpot game. . As a result, it becomes possible to execute a jackpot game and a small win game with the same opening pattern of the variable winning device 65, and by understanding the opening pattern of the variable winning device 65, the type of winning game (big winning game or small winning game) games) can be difficult to identify.

Therefore, for example, if a winning game is executed during a probability state, is the winning game a winning game (that is, a jackpot game H) that resets the value of the actual remaining probability variation number to the initial value (120 times)? , it is possible to make it difficult for the player to identify whether it is a winning game (in other words, a small winning game) in which the value of the actual remaining probability variable number is not changed, so that the game is in an advantageous gaming state for the player. It is possible to make it difficult to grasp the period during which a certain probable state will continue, and to have the user play a game while predicting the period during which a certain probable state will continue.

In addition, in this second control example, the number of time reductions set when transitioning to a variable probability state (high probability/time saving state) is set to 100 times, which is smaller than the number of times the variable probability state continues (120 times). When the special symbol fluctuation exceeds 100 times without winning a jackpot in the variable probability state, the game state is shifted from the variable probability state to the probability state. With this configuration, it is possible to set an opportunity other than the opportunity to win a jackpot on a special drawing as an opportunity to shift to the potential state, which is an advantageous gaming state for the player, and increase the interest of the game. can be improved.

Next, the contents of the variation pattern table 202f of the second control example will be explained with reference to FIG. 268(b). FIG. 268(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the variation pattern table 202f. As shown in FIG. 268(b), in this second control example, the period in which the normal table A 202f1 is referred to is set to the potential state with respect to the fluctuation pattern table 202f (see FIG. The 9th rotation after the end of the definite state was used instead of the 3rd rotation after the end, the regular table Bb202fb2 was provided instead of the regular table B202f2, and the definite change table was replaced with the definite change table 202f3. b202fb3 is provided, a potential confirmation table b202fb4 is provided in place of the potential confirmation table 202f4, and a normal table Cb202fb5 is provided, which is referred to during the period from the 3rd rotation to the 8th rotation after the completion of the potential state. The difference is that

Here, a description will be given of a characteristic variation pattern set for the characteristic gameplay of the second control example (games that are different from the first control example described above). As described above, this second control example is configured to be able to suspend and store up to four lottery tickets for the special drawing 2. Therefore, for example, if you execute a right-handed game while in a potential state and the game state shifts from the potential state to the normal state with four special drawings 2 drawings being held and stored, the pending memory will be The lottery of the special figure 2 that has been set will be executed in a state where the normal state is set as the gaming state.

Also, in this second control example, similarly to the first control example described above, in order to suppress the lottery of the special drawing 2 from being executed frequently in the normal state, a variation pattern with a long variation time (e.g. , a variation pattern with a variation time of 10 minutes) was set to be selected, so there was a problem that the lottery for special drawing 2 that was stored on hold during the potential state was executed in the normal state. .

Therefore, in this second control example, even if the lottery of the special symbol 2 that was stored pending during the potential state is executed during the normal state, in order to suppress the execution of the special symbol variation with a long variation time, The predetermined period after the gaming state transitions from the potential state to the normal state (the period until the special drawing lottery is executed 8 times) is set so that the fluctuation time for the special drawing 2 lottery is shortened. There is. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the special figure 2 fluctuates for a long time even though the player is playing a proper game.

Furthermore, in this second control example, when one of the special symbols stops at a symbol indicating a hit (big hit or small hit) as described above, until the winning game based on that hit ends (the winning game ends) However, until the special figure variation becomes executable), the other special figure variation is temporarily stopped (the subtraction of the special figure variation time is temporarily stopped), so the long-term variation of special figure 2 is executed. If this happens, even if you win a jackpot in the special drawing 1 drawing and the gaming state changes from the normal state to the potential state, the special drawing 2 drawing will not be held until the long-term fluctuation ends. If this is not executed, there is a risk that it will not be possible to provide an advantageous gaming state to the player.

Regarding such problems, the predetermined period after the gaming state transitions from the potential state to the normal state (the period until the special drawing lottery is executed 8 times) is the same as the period after that in the normal state. The above-mentioned problem can be solved by configuring so that a variation pattern with a short variation time is selected for (the period after the special drawing lottery has been executed 8 times).

Here, the normal table Bb202fb2 will be explained with reference to FIG. 269(a). FIG. 269(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the normal table Bb202fb2. This normal table Bb202fb2 is different from the normal table B202f2 of the first control example described above in that the fluctuation times defined in some of the fluctuation patterns are changed, and other than that, the normal table Bb202fb2 is the same. Detailed explanations of the same elements will be omitted.

To specifically explain the difference from the first control example described above, in the regular table Bb202fb2, in any variation pattern selected when the symbol type is special symbol 2, the period of "12000 milliseconds (12 seconds)" is Variation time is specified. In other words, from the time the gaming state shifts from the potential state to the normal state until the special drawing lottery is executed twice, the fluctuation will be 12,000 milliseconds (12 seconds) regardless of the symbol type and the result of the judgment. A time will be set.

With this configuration, one of the two fluctuations after the gaming state shifts from the potential state to the normal state can be made into the fluctuation of the special figure 1. Therefore, for example, when a game result in a potential state is announced in response to a change in the special figure 1, there is an effect that a period for notifying the game result can be reliably secured.

In addition, in this second control example, in the normal table Bb202fb2, which is referenced only for a predetermined period after the gaming state shifts from the potential state to the normal state (the period until the special symbol fluctuation is executed twice) , it is stipulated that the same variation time (12 seconds) be set for all variations regardless of symbol type or validity judgment result, but it is not necessary to set all variation times the same, and other variation times may be set. It may be configured to set. In this case, it is preferable to set the variation time of special figure 2 to be longer than the variation time of special figure 1 (for example, 15 seconds). This prevents the situation where the fluctuation of special drawing 2 that won a jackpot is stopped and displayed during the fluctuation of special drawing 1 that is executed after the gaming state has transitioned from the potential state to the normal state, and the jackpot game is started. Therefore, it is possible to easily display the effects displayed for a predetermined period (12 seconds) in response to the fluctuations in the special figure 1.

In addition, in this second control example, in a pachinko machine 10 in which special figure 1 and special figure 2 can change simultaneously, an effect display that is executed in response to a change in special figure 1 (for example, a game in a potential state) In order to execute the result display that shows the result for a predetermined period (for example, 12 seconds), each special figure (special figure 1 Or, by configuring the variation time of special drawing 2) to be a predetermined period (for example, 12 seconds), special drawing 1 will fluctuate for 12 seconds regardless of the timing at which variation between special drawing 1 and special drawing 2 starts. A predetermined effect display for 12 seconds (for example, a result display showing the game result during the potential state) is executed in response to the fluctuation of the special figure 1. If the special figure 1 fluctuates continuously after the gaming state shifts from the potential state to the normal state, a predetermined effect display (for example, when the special figure 1 changes during the potential state) It is preferable that a normal effect display indicating the corresponding lottery result to the player is executed for the second special drawing 1 variation.

Next, the normal table Cb202fb5 will be explained with reference to FIG. 269(b). FIG. 269(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the normal table Cb202fb5. This normal table Cb202fb5 is a table that is referred to when selecting a variation pattern from the third rotation to the eighth rotation after the end of the potential state.

This normal table Cb202fb5 is set so that the variation time set for the variation pattern selected when the symbol type is special figure 2 is shorter than the above-mentioned normal table Bb202fb2. Specifically, the variation time selected when the symbol type is special figure 2 is set to be 0.5 seconds (500 milliseconds) regardless of the validity determination result. By configuring in this way, the lottery of special symbol 2 that has been stored on hold during the potential state is all consumed within a predetermined period (within 8 rotations of special symbol variation) after the gaming state shifts to the normal state. becomes possible. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player's motivation from being reduced due to long-term fluctuations when the game state changes even though the player is playing a proper game.

In addition, in this control example, in order to prevent the lottery of special drawing 2 stored in hold storage during the potential state from being executed with long-term fluctuation (approximately 10 minutes), the maximum number of holding memories of special drawing 1 is (4 pieces) and the maximum number of reserved memory numbers (4 pieces) of special drawing 2 (4 pieces), which is a total of 8 special drawing lots, is configured so that the special fluctuation pattern is selected during the period when the special drawing lottery is executed. It is sufficient if it is possible to prevent the lottery of the special drawing 2 stored on hold during the potential state from being executed over a long period of time (approximately 10 minutes), for example, it corresponds to the special drawing 1 specified in the regular table Bb202fb2. By configuring the shortest fluctuation time to be more than 4 times longer than the longest fluctuation time corresponding to special figure 2 specified in the regular table Bb202fb2, the fluctuation pattern was set with reference to the regular table Bb202fb2. Until the variation (lottery) of the special figure 1 ends, all the lots of the reserved special figure 2 may be executed. By doing this, it is possible to complete the stored special drawing 2 lottery in a shorter period of time.

In addition, a special performance period in which the results of the potential state are displayed is a period from when the gaming state shifts from the potential state to the normal state until all the reserved and stored drawings of special drawing 2 are consumed (the drawings are executed). Then, the third symbol display device 81 may perform a special effect. As a result, for example, even if the lottery for special drawing 2 whose lottery result is a jackpot is held and stored during the probability state, and the lottery is executed in the normal state, the jackpot will be stopped and displayed during the special performance period. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the performance effect.

Furthermore, the normal state effect display is executed by configuring the normal state effect display to be executed after the special effect period ends (after all the reserved memory of special figure 2 is consumed). It is preferable to prevent the special drawing 2 lottery from being executed (variation is executed) in between. As a result, the hall clerk can easily distinguish the state where the special symbol 2 is being displayed in a fluctuating manner while the normal state performance display is being executed on the third symbol display device 81 from the state where the proper game is not being performed. can be determined. Therefore, the hall clerk can respond appropriately to the player.

Next, the contents of the probability variation table b202fb3 in the second control example will be explained with reference to FIG. 270(a). FIG. 270(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the probability variation table b202fb3. This probability variation table b202fb3 is a table that is referred to when the gaming state is in the probability variation state.

As shown in FIG. 270(a), the pachinko machine 10 of this control example is configured so that the same variation time is set as the variation time of the special drawing 1 in the variable probability state, regardless of the number of reserved balls and the result of the judgment. are doing. Specifically, if the result of the judgment of special drawing 1 is a hit (jackpot), a winning probability variation (fluctuation time of 10 seconds) is stipulated, and if the judgment result of special drawing 1 is a loss, , the deviation probability variation (variation time 10 seconds) is specified.

In addition, as the variation time of special figure 2, it is configured such that a long variation longer than the variation time of special figure 1 and a short variation shorter than the variation time of special figure 1 are set for each validity judgment result. ing. Specifically, if the judgment result of special map 2 is a hit (jackpot), the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 159" and the long fluctuation (variation time 180 seconds (3 minutes)) is associated, and a probability variable short fluctuation (variation time of 3 seconds) is associated with the range "160 to 198".

If the judgment result of special drawing 2 is a small hit, a small hit probability variable long variation (variation time 180 seconds (3 minutes)) is associated with the range of "0 to 159" as the value of the variation type counter CS1, Small hit probability variable short fluctuations (variation time 3 seconds) are associated with the range "160 to 198". Furthermore, if the validity judgment result of the special map 2 is wrong, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is associated with a long fluctuation (fluctuation time 180 seconds (3 minutes)) with a probability of being wrong in the range of "0 to 159", The range of ``160 to 198'' is associated with an outlier short fluctuation (fluctuation time of 3 seconds).

Here, the relationship between the game content in the variable probability state in this second control example and the variable time set for each of the above-mentioned special figures (special figure 1 or special figure 2) will be explained. In this second control example, as described above with reference to FIG. 260, a variable probability state is set in which time reduction is given for the first 100 times among high probability states (120 times), and in the high probability state, It is configured such that a probability state is set in which no time saving is given if the number of special drawing drawings exceeds 100 without winning a jackpot.

Furthermore, in this second control example, a distribution unit 660 is provided in the right-handed ball area, and by executing a right-handed game, balls are alternately placed in the right first ball entrance 64b and the second ball entrance 1640b. The ball is configured to enter the ball (see FIG. 258). In the pachinko machine 10 of the second control example, the variable time is set so that both the special drawing 1 and special drawing 2 drawings can be executed during the variable probability state as described above. Unlike the control example, a right-handed game can be executed during the variable probability state.

That is, in this second control example, a right-handed game is executed during the probability variable state, a game is executed in which the balls are alternately entered into the right first ball entry port 64b and the second ball entry port 1640b, and the special figure is Since the lottery between 1 and 2 is executed based on the set variable time, for example, if a variable pattern with a variable time of 3 seconds is continuously set as the variable pattern of special figure 2, the special It is now possible to execute more drawings (variations) based on special drawing 2 than in Figure 1, and on the other hand, by setting a variation pattern with a variation time of 3 minutes as the variation pattern of special drawing 2, Also, many drawings (variations) based on special drawing 1 will be executed.

In this way, by varying the rate at which the special figure variation (special figure 2 variation) that is advantageous to the player is executed depending on the set variation time, it is possible to create a game that gives the player a sense of tension. It becomes possible to execute. Note that this control example consists of one type of variation time for special figure 1 (10 seconds) and two types of variation time for special figure 2 (3 seconds and 3 minutes), which is advantageous for the player. A feature that makes the shortest variation time of the special figure fluctuation (variation of special figure 2) shorter than the shortest variation time of the special figure fluctuation (variation of special figure 1) which is disadvantageous to the player, and which is advantageous to the player. It is only necessary that the longest variation time of the figure variation (the variation of the special figure 2) be longer than the longest variation time of the special figure variation (the variation of the special figure 1) which is disadvantageous to the player, and each feature It may be configured such that a plurality of types of variable times are set for the figures (special figure 1 and special figure 2).

Furthermore, as the variation time of the special symbol variation (variation of special symbol 1) that is disadvantageous to the player, there is a low probability (for example, only in the range of "1" as the value of variation type counter CS1) It may be configured such that a longer variation time (for example, 5 minutes) is set than the longest variation time of the special figure variation on the advantageous side (the variation of special figure 2). With this configuration, it is possible to provide a variable probability state in which a large number of special figure variations (variations in special figure 2) that are advantageous to the player are executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in this second control example, the variable time of each special figure in the variable probability state is configured to be set regardless of the number of balls on hold, but the variable time is configured to differ depending on the number of balls on hold. For example, the variation time of special symbol 2, which is advantageous to the player, may be made longer as the number of reserved balls decreases. As a result, in order to execute a large number of special drawing 2 drawings, it is possible to continuously execute the game (right-handed game) so that the number of reserved balls always reaches the upper limit.

In addition, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 corresponding to the special drawing lottery that is held and stored is determined, and a notification (pre-reading) that suggests the fluctuation time corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is issued while the special drawing is held and stored. It may also be configured to perform variable time notification). In this case, for example, if the number of reserved pitches is small (for example, when the number of reserved pitches is 0 or 1) as a variation pattern corresponding to the value of the specific variation type counter CS1 (for example, "10 to 30"), A long variation time (for example, 3 minutes) is selected, and when the number of pending balls is large (for example, when the number of pending balls is 2 or more), a short variation time (for example, 3 seconds) is set. With this configuration, the player may be notified by pre-reading fluctuation time notification that a fluctuation pattern corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 of "0 to 30" has been stored on hold. Thereby, the player can more actively play the game (right-handed game) in order to prevent the special figure 2 from fluctuating for a long time.

The content explained above is implemented for special pattern variations that are advantageous to the player (special pattern 2 variation), but the same technical idea can be applied to special pattern variations that are disadvantageous to the player (special pattern 1 variation). It may also be configured to be executed against fluctuations). In addition, the number of pending memories that is referenced when changing the fluctuation time according to the number of pending memories may refer to the sum of the number of pending memories of special figure 1 and special figure 2, or the value that is referred to when changing the fluctuation time according to the number of pending memories may be referred to. It is also possible to refer only to the number of reserved memories corresponding to the symbol type (special figure 1 or special figure 2).

In addition, in the variable probability state, without winning the jackpot, the number of special drawing drawings (number of fluctuations), which is the sum of the number of drawings of special drawing 1 (number of fluctuations) and the number of drawings of special drawing 2 (number of fluctuations), is 100. By exceeding the number of times, the gaming state is shifted from the variable probability state to the potential state. The advantage in the potential state can be varied depending on the fluctuation situation of the special figure 2 at the timing when the gaming state shifts to the potential state.

Next, the contents of the probability table b202fb4 will be explained with reference to FIG. 270(b). FIG. 270(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the potential confirmation table b202fb4. This potential probability table b202fb4 differs from the potential probability table 202f4 of the first control example described above in that the variation time of special symbol 1 is set shorter, and the variation time of special symbol 2 is determined by the number of reserved balls. The difference is that the variation time of special figure 2 has been changed.

Specifically, if the result of the judgment of special drawing 1 is a hit (jackpot), a short hit fluctuation (variation time of 5 seconds) is stipulated, and if the judgment result of special drawing 1 is a loss, , out-of-short fluctuation (fluctuation time of 5 seconds) is specified.

In addition, as for the variation time of special figure 2, if the judgment result of special figure 2 is a hit (jackpot), the number of reserved balls is 1 and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 198". Short variation A (variation time 1 second) is associated with the number of balls held, and short variation B (variation time 5 seconds) is associated with the number of held balls in the range of "0 to 198". . In addition, if the judgment result of special figure 2 is a small hit, the number of reserved balls is 1 and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 198". ) are associated, and the number of pending pitches is 0, 2, and 3, and the small hit short variation B (variation time 5 seconds) is associated with the range of "0 to 198". Furthermore, if the judgment result of special figure 2 is wrong, regardless of the number of reserved balls, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 falls within the range of "0 to 198" and short fluctuation A (fluctuation time 1 second) corresponds. It is attached.

In this way, in the potential probability table b202fb4 that is referred to during the potential probability state, by setting multiple types of variation times of the special figure 2 when the judgment result is a small hit, the timing at which a small hit is executed can be determined. It is possible to suppress a game in which a ball is fired at the target (so-called stop hitting).

Further, when the number of balls on hold is large (the number of balls on hold is 2 or 3), the set variation time is longer than when the number of balls on hold is small (number of balls on hold is 1). This is because when the number of reserved balls is large, there are many balls entering the right first ball entry port 64b and the second ball entry port 1640b, so balls enter each ball entry port. This is a state in which sufficient prize balls are paid out to the player. On the other hand, when the number of reserved balls is small (the number of reserved balls is 1), there are few balls entering the right first ball entry port 64b and the second ball entry port 1640b, so there are sufficient prize balls for the player. has not been paid out.

Therefore, by configuring the variable time to be set longer when the number of held balls is large (number of held balls 2 or 3) than when the number of held balls is small (number of held balls 1), each ball entrance It is possible to equalize the total number of prize balls, which is the sum of the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the ball and the number of prize balls paid out by a small winning game. As a result, even if adjustments are made to the pachinko machine 10 that are disadvantageous to the player (adjustments that make it difficult for balls to enter each ball entry hole), it is possible to easily obtain prize balls due to small hits. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player's motivation from decreasing.

In addition, in this control example, when the number of reserved balls for special chart 2 is 0, the same variable time is set as when the number of reserved balls is large (number of reserved balls 2, 3). . This is to prevent players from playing games where they shoot balls at intervals and aim for short fluctuation times. Thereby, it is possible to provide a game in which it is difficult for a player who plays a malicious game to win a prize ball due to a small hit.

Furthermore, in this control example, by executing a right-handed game, the second ball entrance 1640b is used to draw the special drawing 2 that is advantageous to the player, and the right opening 1640b is used to draw the special drawing 1 that is disadvantageous to the player. Since the configuration is such that balls alternately enter into the first ball entry opening 64b, it is further suppressed that a game in which the player intentionally aims only at the special drawing number 2 lottery for which a short variable time is set is played. can do.

In addition, in this second control example, two types of variable time can be set as the variable time of special figure 2 according to the number of reserved balls, but there is no limitation to this, and multiple types of variable time can be set in various ways. It may be configured to be set under certain conditions. For example, different fluctuation times may be set for each number of held balls, or the range of the fluctuation type counter CS1 may be divided so that different fluctuation times may be set even for the same number of held balls. You can also set the time. Further, a different variable time may be set only for a predetermined number of special drawing drawings that are executed after the end of the small winning game. For example, it is preferable to configure the variable time set in the case of winning a small win to be longer until the special drawing lottery is executed three times after the small win game ends. Thereby, it is possible to suppress excessive prize balls from being paid out in the event that the lottery winning the small win is biased.

Alternatively, only for a predetermined period after the end of the small winning game (for example, the period until the special drawing lottery is executed 3 times), there is a short fluctuation when the number of reserved balls of special drawing 2 is more than a predetermined number (for example, 2 or more). It is preferable to set a time (for example, 0.5 seconds). With this configuration, it is possible to allow the player to continue playing the game. Furthermore, it is preferable that the variable time set in this case be the same as the interval time between rounds in the jackpot game. This makes it possible to change the variable winning device 65 as if the player had won a jackpot even if he or she has won a small jackpot successively, thereby making the game more interesting.

As explained above, in this second control example, by configuring the frequency at which the small winning game is executed during the potential state to be settable based on the number of reserved balls of the special drawing 2, We are trying to equalize the number of prize balls paid out during the game (the number of prize balls based on balls entering each ball entrance and the number of prize balls based on small winning games), but other than that, It may be configured such that the fluctuation time of the general drawing lottery is set based on the number of pending memories. For example, if the number of pending memories for the general lottery is large, it is easy for balls to enter the sorting unit 660 (balls are easy to enter into each ball entrance), so the fluctuation time for the general lottery will be lengthened. If the number of reserved memory numbers for general drawing drawings is small, it is preferable to set the fluctuation time for general drawing drawings to be shorter than when there are many. As a result, it is possible to equalize the degree of entry of balls into the distribution unit 660, and as a result, the number of prize balls paid out during the probability state (the number of prize balls based on the number of balls entering each ball entrance). and the number of prize balls based on small winning games) can be made uniform.

Next, details of the RAM 203 provided in the main control device 110 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIG. 271. FIG. 271 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203 in this second control example.

As shown in FIG. 271, the RAM 203 in the second control example has the second special symbol execution area 203b and the special symbol 2 fluctuation stop flag 203p deleted from the configuration of the RAM 203 in the first control example (see FIG. 198). At the same time, a second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203ba, a second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203bb, a special symbol 1 temporary stop flag 203bc, and a special symbol 2 temporary stop flag 203bd are added.

The second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203ba is a variable display (third This is a counter that counts the number of pending balls (number of times of standby) of the variable display performed on the symbol display device 81 up to a maximum of four times. The initial value of the second special symbol reserved ball counter 203ba is set to zero, and each time a ball enters the second ball entry port 640 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, the maximum value is 4. is incremented by 1. On the other hand, the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203ba is decremented by 1 each time a new special symbol variable display is executed. The value of this second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203ba is also notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the reserved ball number command, similarly to the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d.

The second special symbol reserved ball number storage area 203bb has one execution area and four reserved areas similarly to the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. This second special symbol holding ball storage area 203bb stores each counter value acquired based on the ball entering the second ball entry port 1640b (starting winning). The method of storing the counter value, etc. is the same as that of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, so detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

The special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203bc is a flag indicating a period for stopping the update (subtraction) of the variable time of the special figure 1, and when set to on, stops the update (subtraction) of the variable time, When the setting is changed from the ON state to the OFF state, the stopped update (subtraction) of the variable time is restarted.

This special symbol 1 temporary stop flag 203bc is set to ON when stopping the variation of the second special symbol (special symbol 2) whose lottery result is a jackpot (S1332 in FIG. 281), 275) (S232 in FIG. 275). As a result of the reference, if it is set to on, the process of updating the display of the first symbol display device corresponding to the special figure 1 in the same way as during fluctuation is executed (S233 in FIG. 275). In other words, while the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203bc is set to ON, the update (subtraction) of the variable time is stopped, but the first symbol display device is in a state where the variable display continues to be executed. Become. Thereby, by setting the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203bc to ON, it is possible to notify that the fluctuation of the special figure 1 has not been forcibly stopped. Then, when it is determined in the first special symbol variation execution process (see FIG. 277) that it is set to ON (S2801 in FIG. 277: Yes), it is set to OFF (S2803 in FIG. 277). Although detailed explanation and illustration are omitted, this special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203bc performs the same processing even when the lottery result of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is a small hit as when it is a jackpot. is executed and set to on.

The special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203bd is a flag indicating a period for stopping the update (subtraction) of the variable time of the special figure 2, and when set to on, stops the update (subtraction) of the variable time, When the setting is changed from the ON state to the OFF state, the stopped update (subtraction) of the variable time is restarted.

This special symbol 2 temporary stop flag 203bd is set to ON when stopping the fluctuation of the first special symbol (special symbol 1) whose lottery result is a jackpot (S732 in FIG. 278), and special symbol fluctuation processing 2 (FIG. 275) (S232 in FIG. 275). Note that the content referred to in this process is the same as the above-mentioned special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203bc, so the explanation thereof will be omitted. Then, when it is determined in the second special symbol variation execution process (see FIG. 280) that it is set to ON (S2901 in FIG. 280: Yes), it is set to OFF (S2903 in FIG. 280).

Next, details of the ROM 222 provided in the audio lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIG. 272(a). FIG. 272(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 222 in this second control example.

As shown in FIG. 272(a), the ROM 222 in the second control example has a part of the contents of the screen display selection 2 table 222b in the configuration of the ROM 222 in the first control example (see FIG. 199(a)). The difference is that it has been changed and that an additional effect selection table 222ba has been added.

Here, the screen display selection 2 table 222b in this control example will be explained with reference to FIG. 272(b). FIG. 272(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the screen display selection 2 table 222b. The second screen display selection table 222b is different from the screen display selection table 222b of the first control example described above in that it is configured so that different screen display types are selected depending on whether the gaming state is a normal state or a variable probability state. The difference is that the display content (screen display type) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 has been changed. Other elements are the same, and detailed explanations of the same elements will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 272(b), when the gaming state is the normal state, the display contents (screen display type) for the combination of the special figure 1 standby flag 223s being off and the special figure 2 standby flag 223t being on. The normal display is specified as In this normal display, the third symbol indicating the lottery result of the first special symbol and the third symbol indicating the lottery result of the second special symbol are displayed in a normal state (see FIG. 182(b)). This is the display content. In the normal state, the main variation is the variation display based on the lottery result of the first special symbol, so by setting it to the normal display, the main variation can be reliably displayed.

In the normal state, demonstration display A is associated with a combination in which the special figure 1 standby flag 223s is on and the special figure 2 standby flag 223t is off. When this demo display A is determined, the demo display A screen (see FIG. 266(a)) is set. After 30 seconds have passed since the main variation of special figure 1 has ended, the demo display is switched to the A screen (customer waiting demo screen) regardless of whether the sub variation is in progress. By doing so, even if the player enters the ball into the second ball entry port 1640b and quits the game immediately after the long-term fluctuating display starts, the predetermined period of time (30 seconds) will still elapse. Afterwards, a customer waiting demo screen can be displayed. Therefore, other players who have checked the customer waiting demonstration screen can easily understand that the pachinko machine 10 is empty, and can therefore start playing games on the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 from decreasing. Furthermore, on this demo display A screen, since the special figure 2 is actually displayed in a variable manner, a small area Ds5 of the sub-display area Ds is displayed with " The message ``Ready to play'' is displayed. This allows the player to start playing the game with greater peace of mind.

In the normal state, demonstration display B (see FIG. 266(b)) is associated with a combination in which both the special figure 1 standby flag 223s and the special figure 2 standby flag 223t are off. This allows other players who have checked the customer waiting demo screen to easily understand that the pachinko machine 10 is empty.

Next, in the variable probability state, for a combination where the special figure 1 standby flag 223s is on and the special figure 2 standby flag 223t is off, or a combination where the special figure 1 standby flag 223s is off and the special figure 2 standby flag 223t is on. The normal display is associated with each. In the pachinko machine 10 in this control example, a game in which both special figure 1 and special figure 2 can be varied is executed in a variable probability state. , the special map 2 standby flag 223t) is set to OFF, the customer waiting demonstration screen is never displayed. This makes it possible to provide easy-to-understand games to players.

In this way, it is determined whether the special map is changing for each of the special map 1 and the special map 2 (whether or not a predetermined period of time has passed since the fluctuation of the special map stopped), and the results of each determination, By setting the screen display type based on the currently set gaming status, the symbol type (special figure 1, special figure 1, special figure 1, special figure 2) For a pachinko machine 10 that has a game feature that changes the game feature (a game feature that changes the symbol type (special symbol 1, special symbol 2) that substantially changes depending on the game state), the game feature that changes the It is possible to easily notify whether or not the variation (main variation) of the symbol type (special figure 1, special figure 2) that the user expects is being executed.

In the probability variable state, a special display A (see FIG. 267(a)) is associated with a combination in which both the special figure 1 standby flag 223s and the special figure 2 standby flag 223t are off. Thereby, the current gaming situation can be suggested to the player who has confirmed the customer waiting demo screen.

In the potential state, the display contents ( Special display B (FIG. 267(b)) is defined as the screen display type). This special display B is displayed in a state where the special figure 2 which becomes a substantial change in the potential state is not changing (the special figure 2 standby flag is set on).

Next, with reference to FIG. 273, the additional effect selection table 222ba in this control example will be explained. FIG. 273 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the additional performance selection table 222ba. This additional production selection table 222ba shows an additional production period ( This is a table that is referred to when selecting the type of additional performance (additional performance type) to be executed (see Figure 261), and shows the length of the period (residual variation time) during which the additional performance can be executed, and the acquired performance. The additional performance type is selected based on the value of the counter 223h.

Specifically, if the remaining variation time (period in which additional effects can be executed) is less than 2 seconds (period A), and the value of the obtained effect counter 223h is "0 to 99", additional effects are executed. "None" is selected as the type (see FIG. 262(a)), and in the case of "100 to 198", "additional effect A" is selected as the additional effect type (see FIG. 262(b)).

When the remaining variation time (period in which additional effects can be executed) is 2 seconds to 15 seconds (period B), and the value of the obtained effect counter 223h is "0 to 99", the additional effect type is " "Additional performance B" is selected (see FIG. 263(a)), and in the case of "100 to 198", "additional performance C" is selected as the additional performance type (see FIG. 263(b)).

If the remaining variation time (period in which additional effects can be executed) is 15 seconds or more (period C), and the value of the obtained effect counter 223h is "0 to 99", the additional effect type is "additional effect". C" is selected (see FIG. 263(b)), and in the case of "100 to 198", "additional effect D" is selected as the additional effect type (see FIG. 264).

As explained above, in this control example, the additional effect to be executed is selected based on the length of the period during which the additional effect can be performed (residual variation time). If the variation time is short (when it is difficult for the player to understand the content of the performance performed by the additional performance), an additional performance that changes a part of the normal performance (for example, additional performance A) is executed, and the remaining performance is If the remaining variation time is long (if the remaining variation time is long enough to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the performance executed during the variable time) (when the player can fully understand the content of the performance performed by the additional production) In this case, it is possible to perform an additional performance (for example, additional performance D) that is different from the normal performance to enhance the performance effect.

Next, with reference to FIG. 274, details of the RAM 223 provided in the audio lamp control device 113 in this second control example will be described. FIG. 274 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223 in this second control example.

As shown in FIG. 274, the RAM 223 in the second control example has a second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223ba, residual fluctuation time information A storage area 223bb and an additional performance information storage area 223bc are added.

The second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223ba is a counter that is updated based on the reserved ball number command regarding the second special symbol output from the main controller 110, and is a counter that is updated based on the reserved ball number command regarding the second special symbol output from the main controller 110, and The only difference from the symbol reserved ball number counter 223c is that the counter update target is the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203ba instead of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d, and other elements are the same. Therefore, detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

The remaining fluctuation time information storage area 223bb stores information regarding the remaining period (residual fluctuation time) of the currently set fluctuation pattern, which is calculated when the special map 1 or special map 2 temporary stop command is received from the main controller 110. This is an area for storing information, and the stored information is referred to when selecting an additional effect to be executed after resuming fluctuation.

This remaining fluctuation time information storage area 223bb is used to store fluctuation patterns when a special map 1 temporary stop command or a special map 2 temporary stop command is received in the temporary stop related process (see FIG. 286) (S4901: Yes in FIG. 286). The remaining fluctuation period is calculated (S4903 in FIG. 286), and the remaining fluctuation period information is set based on the length of the remaining fluctuation period (see S4907 to S4908 in FIG. 286). Then, in the fluctuation restart processing (see Figure 287), when the special figure 1 fluctuation restart command or the special figure 2 fluctuation restart command is received (S5001 in Figure 287: Yes) and it is determined that the fluctuation pattern is not being executed. (S5002 in FIG. 287: No), is used to determine the additional performance type (S5003 in FIG. 287), and then the set remaining fluctuation period information is cleared (S5009 in FIG. 287).

The additional performance information storage area 223bc is an area for storing the determined additional performance type, and the additional performance is executed based on the stored additional performance type. In this additional performance information storage area 223bc, the determined additional performance type is set (S5005, S5006 in FIG. 287) in the fluctuation restart process (see FIG. 287), and is read when setting the additional performance command for display. (S5007 in FIG. 287), and then cleared (S5009 in FIG. 287).

<About the control process of the main controller in the second control example>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second control example will be explained with reference to FIGS. 275 to 283. The control process of the main control device 110 in the second control example is the special symbol variation process 2 instead of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 209) with respect to the control process of the main control device 110 in the first control example described above. (see FIG. 275), gaming state update process 2 (see FIG. 276) instead of the gaming state update process (see FIG. 213), starting winning process 2 (see FIG. 282) instead of starting winning place (see FIG. 222), The difference is that the jackpot ending process 2 (FIG. 283) is executed instead of the jackpot ending process (see FIG. 230), and the other processes are the same. Note that the same processes are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

As mentioned above, in this second control example, in addition to the first special symbol (hereinafter referred to as special symbol 1) which is a special symbol (hereinafter referred to as special symbol), in contrast to the first control example described above, The lottery of the second special symbol (hereinafter referred to as special symbol 2) is also configured to be able to be stored and stored, and in the case where special symbol 1 and special symbol 2 are changing at the same time, either one of them When a special figure is stopped and displayed with a symbol indicating a win, the subtraction of the variable time of the other special figure will be interrupted, and the subtraction of the variable time will be resumed again after the winning game based on the winning of one special figure is completed. They differ greatly in their composition.

Note that the configuration in which the special drawing 2 lottery can be held and stored and the control processing based thereon are the same as the configuration and control processing for holding and storing the special drawing 1 drawing described in the first control example described above. Therefore, its explanation will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 275, the contents of the special symbol variation process 2 (S104) in this second control example will be explained. FIG. 275 is a flowchart showing the contents of special symbol variation processing 2 (S104). When the special symbol variation process 2 (S104) is executed, first, it is determined whether the current jackpot or small win is in progress (S231). If it is determined that it is a jackpot or a small hit (S231: Yes), then it is determined whether the special map 1 temporary stop flag 203bc or the special map 2 temporary stop flag 203bd is set to on (S232). . In the process of S232, it is determined whether the subtraction of the fluctuating time of the other special symbol is interrupted because one of the special symbols is stopped and displayed as a symbol indicating a win. In the process of S232, if it is determined that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203bc or the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203bd is set to on (S232: Yes), the first temporary stop flag corresponding to the temporarily stopped special figure The display of the symbol display device 37 is updated (S233), that is, the process of continuing the variable display of the first symbol display device 37 for the special symbol whose variation time subtraction has been interrupted is executed, and this processing end. Thereby, it is possible to notify the player that the special symbol variation has not been forcibly stopped.

On the other hand, in the process of S231, if it is determined that the current jackpot or small win is in progress (S231: No), the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time timer 203s is greater than 0 (i.e., the special figure 1 fluctuates). (S234), and if it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 variable time timer 203s is not greater than 0 (is 0) (S234: No), the first control example described above is performed. The same process as the first special symbol variation start process (S204) is executed, and then the process moves to S238 where the variation process regarding the special symbol 2 is executed.

In the process of S234, if it is determined that the value of the special symbol 1 variation time timer 203s is larger than 0 (S234: Yes), the first special symbol variation execution process (S235) is executed. This first special symbol variation execution process (S235) is to execute the process during special symbol 1 variation, and a detailed explanation thereof will be given later with reference to FIG. 277.

When the first special symbol variation execution process (S235) is finished, it is next determined whether it is the end timing of the variation time (whether the special symbol 1 variation time timer 203s is 0) (S236), and the end timing of the variation time is determined (S236). If it is determined that it is the end timing (S236: Yes), the first special symbol variation stop process 2 (S237) is executed, and then the process moves to S238. On the other hand, in the process of S236, if it is determined that it is not the end timing of the variable time (S236: No), the process of S237 is skipped and the process moves to S238.

In the processing of S238 to S242, the same processing as S234 to S237 executed for the special figure 1 is executed. When the process of S238 is executed, first, it is determined whether the value of the special figure 2 variation time timer 203t is greater than 0 (that is, whether the special figure 2 is changing) (S238), and the special figure 2 variation timer 203t is determined. If it is determined that the value of the time timer 203t is not larger than 0 (is 0) (S238: No), the second special symbol variation start process 2 (S239) is executed, and then this process is ended. This second special symbol variation start process 2 (S239) is the one in which a subtraction process for the number of pending memories is added to the second special symbol variation start process 2 (see S217 in FIG. 215) described above. will be described later with reference to FIG. 279.

On the other hand, in the process of S238, when it is determined that the value of the special symbol 2 variation time timer 203t is larger than 0 (S238: Yes), the second special symbol variation execution process (S240) is executed. This second special symbol variation execution process (S240) is to execute the process during special symbol 2 variation, and a detailed explanation thereof will be given later with reference to FIG. 280.

When the second special symbol fluctuation execution processing (S240) is finished, it is next determined whether it is the end timing of the fluctuation time (whether the special symbol 2 fluctuation time timer 203t is 0) (S241), and the end timing of the fluctuation time is determined (S241). If it is determined that it is the end timing (S241: Yes), the second special symbol variation stop process 2 (S242) is executed, and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S241, if it is determined that it is not the end timing of the variable time (S241: No), the process of S242 is skipped and the present process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 276, the contents of gaming state update processing 2 (S307) will be explained. FIG. 276 is a flowchart showing the contents of gaming state update processing 2 (S307). This gaming state update process 2 (S307) is different from the above-described gaming state update process of the first control example (see FIG. 213) when the value of the time saving counter 203g is 0 and the value of the probability change counter 203k is 0. The difference is that a configuration is added to set a status command that indicates a potential status if there is no such status. This is because, in this second control example, the number of times the time saving state is set in the variable probability state (100 times) is smaller than the number of times the variable probability state is set (120 times), and the special figure is set in the variable probability state. This is because the game state is configured to be able to shift from a variable probability state to a probability state without winning a jackpot when the number of drawings (variations) exceeds 100 times.

When the game state update process 2 (S307) is executed, first, the same processes as S601 to S608 of the above-mentioned game state update process (see FIG. 213) are executed, and when the process of S608 is finished, the time saving It is determined whether the value of the counter 203g is 0 (S631), and when it is determined that it is 0 (S631: Yes), it is then determined whether the value of the variable probability counter 203k is 0 (S632). Here, if it is determined that the value of the variable probability counter 203k is not 0 (1 or more) (S632: No), it is in a variable probability state (that is, a potential state) where no time-saving game is provided, so it is a probability state. A status command indicating this is set (S633), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S631, if it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203g is not 0 (S631: No), or in the process of S632, if it is determined that the value of the probability change counter 203k is 0 (S632: Yes) ), the process of S633 is skipped and the process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 277, the contents of the first special symbol variation execution process (S235) executed in the special symbol variation process 2 (see S104 in FIG. 275) will be explained. FIG. 277 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first special symbol variation execution process (S235). In this first special symbol variation execution process (S235), a process for restarting the subtraction of the variation time of the special symbol 1 when it has been interrupted, and a process for subtracting the variation time are executed.

When the first special symbol variation execution processing (S235) is executed, first, it is determined whether the special symbol 1 temporary stop flag 203bc is set to on (S2801). Here, a case where this process is executed in a state where the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203bc is set to ON will be briefly described. As mentioned above, the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203bc is set to ON when the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed with a pattern indicating a hit (big hit or small hit) while the special figure 1 is changing. be. Then, when the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203bc is set to on, the jackpot flag 203u is set to on in the process, so a timer interrupt executed every 2 milliseconds by the main controller 110 When the process loops and the special symbol variation process 2 (Fig. 275) is executed next time (2 milliseconds after the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203bc is set to on), it is determined that the jackpot has been hit in the process of S231. Since it is determined that there is, the first special symbol variation execution process (S235) is not executed. Then, when the jackpot game (or small win game) ends and it is determined in the process of S231 that there is no jackpot (or small win), the first special symbol variation execution process (S235) is executed. It turns out. With this configuration, the state in which the first special symbol variation execution process (S235) is executed while the special symbol 1 temporary stop flag 203bc is set to ON is the state in which the jackpot (or small win) game is It is configured such that it is the timing to restart the subtraction of the variation time of the special figure variation which has ended and the subtraction of the variation time has been interrupted.

Returning to FIG. 277, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S2801, if it is determined that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203bc is set to ON (S2801: Yes), then the special figure 1 fluctuation restart command is set (S2802), and the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203bc is set to ON (S2801: Yes). The stop flag 203bc is set to OFF (S2803), and the process moves to S2804. On the other hand, in the process of S2801, if it is determined that the special map 1 temporary stop flag 203bc is not set to on (set to off) (S2801: No), the process of S2802 and S2803 is skipped and S2804 Shift to processing.

In the process of S2804, the special figure 1 variable time timer (special figure 1 variable timer) 203s is updated by subtracting 1 (S2804), the display of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S2805), and this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 278, the contents of the first special symbol variation stop process 2 (S237) executed in the special symbol variation process 2 (see S104 in FIG. 275) will be explained. FIG. 278 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first special symbol variation stop processing 2 (S237). This first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 2 (S237) is to execute the processing when stopping the fluctuation of the special symbol 1, and is the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (FIG. 214) of the first control example described above. ), when the lottery result of special map 1 is a jackpot, instead of the configuration that forcibly stops the fluctuation of special chart 2, the fluctuation of special chart 2 is interrupted (the subtraction of the fluctuation time is interrupted). The difference is that

When the first special symbol fluctuation stop process 2 (S237) is executed, first, it is determined whether the lottery result of the first special symbol (special symbol 1) is a jackpot (S731), and it is determined that it is not a jackpot (a miss). ) (S731: No), the same process as S709 and S710 of the first special symbol variation stop process (FIG. 214) of the first control example described above is executed, and this process is ended.

On the other hand, in the process of S731, if it is determined that it is a jackpot (S731: Yes), then the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203bd is set to on (S732), and the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203bd is set to on. A special figure 2 temporary stop command indicating the setting is set (S733). Then, the same process as S706 and S708 of the first special symbol variation stop process (FIG. 214) of the first control example described above is executed, and this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 279, the contents of the second special symbol variation start process 2 (S239) executed in the special symbol variation process 2 (see S104 in FIG. 275) will be explained. FIG. 279 is a flowchart showing the contents of the second special symbol variation start process 2 (S239). In this second special symbol variation start process 2 (S239), a process for starting the variation of the special symbol 2 is executed.

In the second special symbol fluctuation start process 2 (S239), first, it is determined whether the special symbol 2 temporary stop flag 203bd is set to on (S831), and if it is determined that it is set to on (S831 :Yes), that is, the second special symbol fluctuation start processing 2 (Fig. If S239 in FIG. 279 is executed, all the various processes executed in the second special symbol variation start process 2 (S239 in FIG. 279) are skipped and this process ends. As a result, it is possible to prevent the variation of the special figure 2 from starting at the same time (within the same process) that the special figure 1 is stopped and displayed with a symbol indicating a win.

In the process of S831, if it is determined that the special symbol 2 temporary stop flag 203bd is not set to on (set to off) (S831: No), then the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203ba The value (N2) is acquired (S832), and it is determined whether the acquired value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter is a value larger than 0 (S833). In the process of S833, if it is determined that the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203ba is larger than 0 (S833: Yes), the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203ba is determined. 1 is subtracted (S834), and a held ball number command is set for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the held ball number command indicating the value (N2) of the second special symbol held ball number counter 203ba after the subtraction. (S835).

The held pitch count command set here is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113 in the external output process (S2001) of the main process (see FIG. 227), similarly to the first control example described above. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the held ball number command, it extracts the value of the second special symbol held ball number counter 203ba from the held ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the second special symbol held ball number counter 203ba of the RAM 223. 223ba. In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223ba according to the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110, so the second special symbol of the main controller 110 The value can be updated while synchronizing with the value of the reserved pitch counter 203ba.

When the process of S835 is completed, next, the data in the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203bb is shifted to the previous data (S836). More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the following order: reservation area 1 → execution area, reservation area 2 → reservation area 1, reservation area 3 → reservation area 2, reservation area 4 → reservation area 3.

When the process of S836 is completed, the same process as S804 to S807 of the second special symbol variation start process (see S207 in FIG. 215) of the first control example described above is executed, and this process ends. In addition, in the process of S833, even if it is determined that the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203ba is 0 (S833: No), the second special symbol fluctuation of the first control example described above is started. The same process as S808 to S810 of the process (see S207 in FIG. 215) is executed, and this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 280, the contents of the second special symbol variation execution process (S240) executed in the special symbol variation process 2 (see S104 in FIG. 275) will be explained. FIG. 280 is a flowchart showing the contents of the second special symbol variation execution process (S240). In this second special symbol variation execution process (S240), a process for restarting the subtraction of the variation time of the special symbol 2 when it has been interrupted, and a process for subtracting the variation time are executed.

When the second special symbol variation execution process (S240) is executed, first, it is determined whether the special symbol 2 temporary stop flag 203bd is set to ON (S2901). Here, a case where this process is executed in a state where the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203bd is set to on will be briefly described. As mentioned above, the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203bd is set to ON when the special figure 1 is stopped and displayed with a symbol indicating a hit (jackpot) while the special figure 2 is changing. Then, when the special map 2 temporary stop flag 203bd is set to on, the jackpot flag 203u is set to on during that process, so a timer interrupt executed every 2 milliseconds by the main controller 110 When the process loops and the next special symbol variation process 2 (Fig. 275) is executed (2 milliseconds after the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203bd is set to on), it is determined that the jackpot has been hit in the process of S231. Since it is determined that there is, the second special symbol variation execution process (S240) is not executed. Then, when the jackpot game ends and it is determined in the process of S231 that there is no jackpot, the second special symbol variation execution process (S240) is executed. By configuring in this way, the state where the second special symbol variation execution process (S240) is executed with the special symbol 2 temporary stop flag 203bd set to ON is the state where the jackpot game ends and the variation time It is configured so that the timing is such that the subtraction of the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation, which has been interrupted, is restarted.

Returning to FIG. 280, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S2901, if it is determined that the special map 2 temporary stop flag 203bd is set to on (S2901: Yes), then a special map 2 fluctuation restart command is set (S2902), and the special map 2 temporary stop flag 203bd is set to ON. The stop flag 203bd is set to OFF (S2903), and the process moves to S2904. On the other hand, in the process of S2901, if it is determined that the special map 2 temporary stop flag 203bd is not set to ON (set to OFF) (S2901: No), the processes of S2902 and S2903 are skipped and S2904 Shift to processing.

In the process of S2904, the special figure 2 variable time timer (special figure 2 variable timer) 203t is updated by subtracting 1 (S2904), the display of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S2805), and this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 281, the contents of the second special symbol variation stop processing 2 (S242) will be explained. FIG. 281 is a flowchart showing the contents of the second special symbol variation stop processing 2 (S242). This second special symbol fluctuation stop processing 2 (S242) is to execute the processing when stopping the fluctuation of the special symbol 2, and is the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing (FIG. 220) of the first control example described above. ), when the lottery result of special map 2 is a jackpot, the fluctuation of special map 1 is interrupted (suspending the subtraction of the fluctuation time) instead of the configuration that forcibly stops the fluctuation of special map 1. The difference is that a configuration is provided and a process that is executed when the lottery result of special drawing 2 is a small win is added.

When the second special symbol fluctuation stop process 2 (S242) is executed, first, it is determined whether the lottery result of the second special symbol (special symbol 2) is a jackpot (S1331), and it is determined that it is not a jackpot (a miss). ), (S1331: No), then it is determined whether the lottery result of special drawing 2 is a small hit (S1334). In the process of S1334, if it is determined that it is not a small hit (S1334: No), the same process as S1310 and S1311 of the second special symbol fluctuation stop process (FIG. 220) of the first control example described above is executed, This process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S1334, if it is determined that it is a small win (S1334: Yes), then a small win stop process is executed (S1335). In this small hit stop process, the same process as S1402 to S1406 of the special figure 2 off stop process (see S1304 in FIG. 221) of the first control example described above is executed. When this small hit stop process (S1335) is finished, the same processes as S1310 and S1311 of the second special symbol variation stop process (FIG. 220) of the first control example described above are executed, and this process is ended.

In the process of S1331, if it is determined that it is a jackpot (S1331: Yes), the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203bc is set to on (S1332), and the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203bc is set to on. The special figure 1 temporary stop command shown is set (S1333). Then, the same process as S1307 to S1311 of the second special symbol fluctuation stop process (FIG. 220) of the first control example described above is executed, and this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 282, the contents of the starting prize winning process 2 (S105) will be explained. FIG. 282 is a flowchart showing the contents of the starting winning process 2 (S105). This starting winning process 2 (S105) is different from the starting winning process of the first control example described above (see FIG. 222), and is different from the starting winning process (see FIG. 222) in which the process when a ball enters the second ball entrance 1640b is changed. They differ in some respects. Specifically, since this second control example has a configuration that allows the lottery of the special symbol 2 to be held and stored, when a ball enters the second ball entrance 1640b, the second special symbol held ball is A process of adding the value (N2) of the number counter 203ba is executed.

Regarding the process when a ball enters the second ball entry port 1640b, the ball enters the first ball entry port (ball entry) in the starting winning process (see FIG. 222) of the first control example described above. The only difference is that the target of processing has been changed from special figure 1 to special figure 2 compared to the process executed when the process is executed, so a detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 283, the contents of jackpot end processing 2 (S2112) will be explained. FIG. 283 is a flowchart showing the contents of jackpot end processing 2 (S2112). This jackpot end processing 2 (S2112) differs from the jackpot end processing of the first control example described above (see FIG. 230) only in that the value set in the time saving counter 203g is changed from 120 to 100, and in other respects. Since the processing is the same, detailed explanation thereof will be omitted. As a result, in this second control example, the number of time reductions (100 times) set when the gaming state becomes a variable probability state is smaller than the number of times (120 times) that a variable probability state is set, so in a variable probability state, When the special drawing lottery (variation) exceeds 100 times, it becomes possible to shift the gaming state to a definite state.

<About the control process of the audio lamp control device in the second control example>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 284 to 287. The control process of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second control example is the command determination process 2 in place of the command determination process (see FIG. 238) with respect to the control process of the audio lamp control device 113 in the first control example described above. The difference is that (S4111 in FIG. 284) is executed, but the other processes are the same. Specifically, a process is added that is executed when various commands outputted by changing the control content executed by the main control device 110 from the first control example are received.

Here, the contents of command determination processing 2 (S4111) will be explained with reference to FIG. 284. FIG. 284 is a flowchart showing the contents of command determination processing 2 (S4111). This command determination process 2 (S4111) is different from the command determination process (FIG. 238) of the first control example described above, and includes a process executed when the remaining probability varying number of times command or the remaining time shortening number of times command is received, and a temporary stop. A process to be executed when a related command is received has been added.

When command determination process 2 (S4111) is executed, first, the same processes as S4301 to S4317 of the command determination process (FIG. 238) of the first control example described above are executed. Then, in the process of S4317, if it is determined that the remaining probability varying number of times command or the remaining time shortening number of times command has been received (S4317: Yes), then remaining number of times updating process 2 (S4318) is executed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 285, the contents of the remaining number of times update process 2 (S4318) will be explained. FIG. 285 is a flowchart showing the contents of the remaining number update process 2 (S4318). When this remaining number update process 2 (S4318) is executed, the same processes as S4651 and S4652 of the remaining number update process (see FIG. 242) of the first control example described above are executed, and when the process of S4652 is finished, The same process as S4661 and S4662 of the remaining number update process (see FIG. 242) of the first control example described above is executed. That is, only the process of updating the information in the remaining probability variation number area 223o and the production probability variation number area 223q to the information corresponding to the value of the remaining probability variation number command or the remaining time short number number command output from the main control device 110 is executed. Note that in this second control example as well, the remaining number of times updating process (see FIG. 242) similar to that in the first control example described above may be executed.

Returning to FIG. 284, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S4317, if it is determined that the remaining probability varying number of times command or the remaining time shortening number of times command has not been received (S4317: No), then it is determined whether a temporary stop related command has been received (S4331). Here, the temporary stop related commands include a special figure 1 temporary stop command that is output when the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203bc is set to on, and a special figure 1 temporary stop command that is output when the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203bd is set to on. The special figure 2 temporary stop command output when the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203bc is set to OFF, the special figure 1 fluctuation restart command which is output when the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203bd is set to OFF, There is a special figure 2 fluctuation restart command that is output when

In the process of S4331, if it is determined that a temporary stop related command has been received (S4331: Yes), then the temporary stop related process is executed (S4332), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S4331, if it is determined that a temporary stop related command has not been received (S4331: No), the same process as S4319 of the command determination process of the first control example (see FIG. 238) described above is executed. Then, this process ends.

Next, the contents of the temporary stop related process (S4332) will be explained with reference to FIG. 286. FIG. 286 is a flowchart showing the contents of the temporary stop related process (S4332). In this temporary stop related processing (S4332), the process of determining the remaining time of the special figure fluctuation time when the special figure 1 temporary stop command or the special figure 2 temporary stop command is received, and the process of determining the remaining time of the special figure fluctuation time when the special figure 1 temporary stop command or the special figure 2 temporary stop command is received, and the special figure 1 fluctuation restart command or the special figure 2 temporary stop command. When the 2-variation restart command is received, a process of setting a production (additional production) to be executed on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

When the temporary stop related process (S4332) is executed, it is first determined whether the special map 1 temporary stop command or the special map 2 temporary stop command has been received (S4901), and if it is determined that it has not been received (S4901). :No), the process moves to S4902 and the fluctuation restart process is executed. On the other hand, in the process of S4901, if it is determined that the special figure 1 temporary stop command or the special figure 2 temporary stop command has been received (S4901: Yes), the remaining fluctuation period of the currently set fluctuation pattern is calculated (S4903 ). Then, it is determined whether the residual fluctuation period calculated in the process of S4903 is less than 2 seconds (S4904), and if it is determined that it is less than 2 seconds (S4904: Yes), the residual fluctuation period is stored in the residual fluctuation time information storage area 223bb. A period A indicating a short period is set (S4905), and the process moves to S4902.

On the other hand, in the process of S4904, if it is determined that the remaining fluctuation period is not less than 2 seconds (2 seconds or more) (S4904: No), then it is determined whether the remaining fluctuation period is less than 15 seconds ( S4906), if it is determined that it is less than 15 seconds (S4906: Yes), a period B indicating a normal residual fluctuation period is set in the residual fluctuation time information storage area 223bb (S4907), and the process proceeds to S4902. Transition.

In the process of S4906, if it is determined that the residual fluctuation period is not less than 15 seconds (15 seconds or more) (S4906: No), a period C indicating that the residual fluctuation period is long is stored in the residual fluctuation time information storage area 223bb. The settings are made (S4908), and the process moves to S4902. In this way, the variation time (remaining variation period) that will be executed when the special pattern variation restarts is calculated at the timing when the special pattern variation is interrupted (the subtraction of the special pattern variation time is interrupted), and the corresponding period is calculated. By setting the information to do so, it is possible to perform a performance (additional performance) suitable for the remaining fluctuation period without delay when restarting the special symbol fluctuation.

Next, the contents of the fluctuation restart processing (S4902) will be explained with reference to FIG. 287. FIG. 287 is a flowchart showing the contents of the fluctuation restart process (S4902). This fluctuation restart processing (S4902) is a process for setting an additional effect to be executed when the special figure 1 fluctuation restart command or the special figure 2 fluctuation restart command is received.

When the fluctuation restart process (S4902) is executed, it is first determined whether the special map 1 fluctuation restart command or the special map 2 fluctuation restart command has been received (S5001), and if it is determined that it has not been received (S5001: No ), this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S5001, if it is determined that the special figure 1 variation restart command or the special figure 2 variation restart command has been received (S5001), then it is determined whether the variation effect is currently being executed (S5002). . This process of S5002 is performed when the variation effect that is executed for the variation time (for example, 30 seconds) of the special symbol variation in accordance with the execution of the special symbol variation interrupts the special symbol variation (interrupts the subtraction of the special symbol variation time). When the special symbol variation is restarted after the winning game ends, it is determined whether it is in an uncompleted state.

In the process of S5002, if it is determined that the variable effect is being executed (S5002: Yes), additional effect A is set in the additional effect information storage area (S5006), and the process moves to S5007. On the other hand, in the process of S5002, if it is determined that the fluctuation effect is not being executed (S5002: No), then the residual fluctuation time information stored in the residual fluctuation time information storage area 223bb is read (S5003) , determines the additional performance type from the additional performance selection table 222ba based on the read residual variation time information and the performance counter 223h (S5004), and sets (stores) the determined additional performance type in the additional performance information storage area 223bc. (S5005).

When the process of S5005 or S5006 is finished, the additional effect type stored (set) in the additional effect information storage area 223bc is read out (S5007), and the additional effect command for display corresponding to the read additional effect week is set. (S5008), the information set in the residual variation time information storage area 223bb and the additional performance information storage area 223bc is cleared (S5009), and this process ends.

As explained above, in this second control example, when the special figure variation is interrupted, after the normal effect (the effect display executed when the special figure variation is started) ends, the special figure change A oscillating effect that displays the third symbol in a oscillating manner will be performed until the 3rd symbol is restarted, and when the special pattern fluctuation is restarted, an additional performance will be performed corresponding to the special pattern fluctuation period (remaining fluctuation period) after restarting. Although the configuration is configured to execute this, other configurations may be used.

For example, a performance period determining means for determining a normal performance period during which a normal performance is performed is provided, and when the performance period determination means determines that the normal performance period has ended, an additional performance may be executed. Good too. By configuring in this way, the normal performance and the additional performance can be executed continuously, so that it is possible to provide a more suitable performance display to the player. In addition, in this case, there may be an error between the end timing of the additional production period during which the additional production is executed and the special symbol fluctuation period after restarting, but the additional production will continue to be executed during the error period. Alternatively, a swinging effect may be performed in which the third symbol is displayed swinging. Furthermore, an error period determining means for determining the length of the error period is provided, and when the error period determining means determines that the error period is longer than a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds), an additional effect is performed again. It may be configured as follows.

In addition, in the second control example described above, as one special figure variation (for example, special figure 2) is stopped and displayed with a symbol indicating a win, the other special figure variation (for example, special figure 1) is interrupted (special figure 1). We have explained the case where the subtraction of the figure variation time is interrupted), and the normal performance corresponding to the other special figure variation has already ended by the time the other special figure variation is resumed (Fig. 261), for example, a case will be described with reference to FIG. 288 for a case where the normal performance corresponding to the other special symbol variation has not ended at the time when the other special symbol variation is restarted.

FIG. 288 is a timing chart showing an example of the flow of each special symbol variation, and the third symbol display device 81 executes an effect display based on the variation of special symbol 1 (effect display using the third symbol). In the probability change state, the fluctuation of special drawing 1 (10 seconds) and the fluctuation of special drawing 2 (3 seconds) are executed simultaneously, and the flow is shown when special drawing 2 has won a small hit.

An example shown in FIG. 288 shows a case where the normal performance (normal performance period of 10 seconds) executed on the third symbol display device 81 has not been completed at the time when the special figure 1 variation is restarted. In such a case, if the additional effect is executed at the timing when the special figure 1 variation is restarted, the additional effect will be executed before the normal effect is completed, resulting in an effect that gives the player a sense of discomfort. This will cause the problem that it will be executed. In order to solve this problem, in the example shown in FIG. 288, the additional effect is not executed at the timing when the special figure 1 variation is restarted, but after the normal effect is completed. It is composed of In this way, by setting the timing at which the additional performance is executed to the normal performance end timing rather than the special figure 1 variation restart timing, the normal performance and the additional performance can be performed without any discomfort, increasing the player's desire to play. It is possible to suppress a situation in which the amount of energy decreases.

In this case, the remaining period determining means determines the fluctuation time (remaining fluctuation period) after restarting when the special chart 1 fluctuation is interrupted, and the interruption period determining means determines the period during which the special chart 1 fluctuation is suspended. , a restart determination means for determining that the special figure 1 variation has been restarted; and a restart determination means that determines whether or not the normal production is being executed when the restart determination means determines that it is time for the special figure 1 variation to be restarted. If the performance status determination means determines that the normal performance is not being performed (has already ended), the remaining period determined by the remaining period determination means is provided. additional performance execution means for executing an additional performance corresponding to the above, and when it is determined that the normal performance is being executed, the execution of the additional performance is made to wait until the performance status determination means determines that the normal performance has ended. It is preferable to provide additional performance execution standby means. By configuring in this way, the timing for executing the additional performance (when the special pattern 1 variation restarts or when the normal performance ends It is possible to set an appropriate timing as the time (time), and it is possible to provide a performance that does not give a sense of discomfort to the player.

In addition, in this second control example, by providing the distribution unit 660 in the right-handed area of the game board 13, the special figure 1 variation and the special figure 2 variation are executed during the right-handed game. Similarly, other configurations may be used as the board configuration of the game board 13 on which the special figure 1 variation and special figure 2 variation are executed during right-handed games; for example, a configuration as shown in FIG. 289 may be used. good.

Here, with reference to FIG. 289, another example of the board configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example will be described. FIG. 289 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the board configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in another example of the second control example. In another example of the second control example, in the board configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the second control example described above (see FIG. 258), a second ball entrance 1640 and a second ball entrance The difference is that an electric accessory 1640a attached to the mouth is provided, and the variable winning device 65 is moved from the lower center area of the game board to the lower part of the right-handed area, but other than that, the configuration is the same. Identical components are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 289, in the pachinko machine 10 of this alternative example, the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 1640 is provided so that balls fired in a right-handed game can enter the ball. There is. With this configuration, in the game state (probability variable state or potential probability state) in which the right-handed game is executed, the special figure 1 variation and the special figure 2 variation will be executed. In addition, like the distribution unit 660 of the second control example described above, the entrance (right first ball entrance 64b) where the lottery (variation) of special figure 1 is executed and the lottery (variation) of special figure 2 are executed. Since there is no mechanism for distributing the balls so that they enter the ball entry port (second ball entry port 1640b) alternately, the balls may not enter the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 1640. You can randomize the rate of balls. As mentioned above, in the second control example, the degree of advantage for the player is different between the special drawing 1 lottery and the special drawing 2 lottery, so in this separate example, the ball fired in the right-handed game is The player can be made to pay close attention to whether the ball is entering the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 1640, and the player's desire to play can be increased. In addition, the percentage of balls fired in a right-handed game that flows down (rolls) toward the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 1640 is calculated using, for example, a nail planted on the game board 13. Since it can be changed by adjusting, it is possible to easily adjust the ratio of the special figure 1 variation and the special figure 2 variation in the special figure variation executed during the right-handed game.

As explained above, in this second control example, the number of times the time saving state is set (100) is smaller than the number of times (120 times) the high probability state of the special symbol is set as the variable probability state. Therefore, it is possible to increase the chances of transition to a potential state that is advantageous to the player, and it is possible to increase the player's desire to play. Furthermore, since the lottery based on the special drawing 1 and the lottery based on the special drawing 2 can be executed in the probable state, it is possible to suppress a situation where the player is excessively advantageous in the probable state.

In this second control example, the lottery result of one of the special symbols (for example, the second special symbol) becomes a hit (big hit or small win), and at the timing when the symbol indicating the winning lottery result is stopped and displayed ( At the timing when the winning is confirmed), the measurement (counting) of the fluctuation time for the fluctuation of the other special symbol (for example, the first special symbol) is interrupted, and at the timing when the winning game based on the lottery result of one special symbol ends ( It is configured to restart the measurement (counting) of the suspended variation time for the variation of the other special symbol at the timing when the variation of the special symbol becomes possible.

Here, when the special symbol variation is interrupted (the measurement of the special symbol variation time is interrupted), the variation display (or effect display) of the third symbol executed on the third symbol display device 81 is continued. In this case, the interrupted special symbol variation is restarted, and the timing at which the restarted special symbol variation ends and the variation display (or effect display) of the third symbol executed on the third symbol display device 81 ends. There was a problem in that an error of a predetermined period (interruption period of special symbol fluctuations) would occur in the timing.

On the other hand, in this second control example, the timing at which the restarted special symbol fluctuation ends and the timing at which the fluctuation display (or effect display) of the third symbol executed on the third symbol display device 81 ends When an error occurs for a predetermined period (interruption period of special symbol fluctuation), an additional performance (specific performance) can be executed using the error period. Thereby, it is possible to perform a performance that does not give the player a sense of discomfort.

<Third control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the third control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 290 to 303. This control example is different from the first control example described above in that the content of the effect display executed by the third symbol display device 81 during the potential state is different. Specifically, the display control of the remaining number of effects displayed in the remaining number display area D1 of the main area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 has been changed, and the possibility of winning a hit (big hit or small hit) during a guess. The difference is that an effect display that is executed when the game is performed is added, and other effect displays are changed to correspond to the above two points.

In the first control example described above, when entering the potential state (the potential state is set), the same number of times as the internally set probability variation number (120 times) is displayed in the remaining number display area D1. However, the remaining number of probability variations (hereinafter referred to as the actual remaining probability variation number) that is internally set each time a special figure variation is executed, and the remaining number of times for effect display displayed in the remaining number display area D1 ( Hereinafter, it was configured to update (subtract) the remaining performance probability variable number). In addition, in order to prevent players from easily knowing whether they have won a jackpot in which the actual remaining probability variation number is set again or a small win in which the actual remaining probability variation number is not set during the probability state, the probability If you win a hit (big hit or small win) while in a certain state, it is configured so that you can perform a performance that returns the number of changes in the remaining probability of the performance to the initial value (120 times) or a performance that does not return it, and changes the actual number of changes in the remaining probability and the number of changes in the remaining probability of the performance. The game was designed to have different numbers of games and keep players looking forward to the end. If the actual residual probability variation number and the performance residual probability variation number are different and the performance residual probability variation number becomes "0" (for example, the performance residual probability variation number is "0" and the actual residual probability variation number is "10") ''), the revival effect (see FIG. 189) is executed, and the number of times corresponding to the actual remaining probability variation number ("10 times") is displayed in the remaining number of times display area D1. This makes it possible for the player to expect that the potential state will continue even if the number of times displayed in the remaining number of times display area D1 becomes "0".

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the third control example, when entering the potential state (the potential state is set), the number of times the pachinko machine 10 is smaller than the internally set probability variation number (120 times) (for example, "100 times") is displayed in the remaining number display area D1. As a result, when the potential state is set, it is possible to make the actual remaining probability variation number different from the production remaining probability variation number (displaying the production remaining probability variation number less than the actual remaining probability variation number), so the probability During this state, it is possible to easily execute a performance that adds to the number of changes in the remaining probability of the performance. In addition, in this control example, as in the first control example described above, each time a variation of each special figure (special figure 1 and special figure 2) is executed (every time the actual remaining probability variation frequency is subtracted), the remaining number of variations is Although it is configured to subtract the number of effects remaining probability variation displayed in the display area D1, for example, if a variation of the special figure (special figure 1) on the side that is not advantageous to the player is executed in a probability state. It may be configured such that the remaining performance variable number of times is not subtracted. In this case, as in this control example, at the timing of starting the potential state (timing when the potential state is set), the remaining number of performance variations displayed in the remaining number display area D1 is displayed to be less than the actual remaining probability variation number. As a result, even without subtracting the number of performance remaining probability variations for the fluctuation of the special figure (special figure 1) on the side that is not advantageous to the player, a situation arises in which the number of production remaining probability variations is greater than the actual remaining probability variation number. can be restrained from doing so.

In addition, in this third control example, in the case of winning a jackpot in which the real remaining probability variation number is set to the initial value (120 times) as a result of the special drawing lottery, the actual remaining probability variation number is set as the jackpot game and the special symbol lottery result. is never set to the initial value (120 times) When a small win is won, an additional effect is executed to add the remaining probability variable number of effects by a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 to 40 times) during a small win game. It is composed of As a result, when a winning game (a game in which the variable winning device 65 opens and closes) is executed during a probability state, whether or not the actual probability variation number has been reset to the initial value (120 times) (during a probability state It is possible to further prevent the player from easily knowing whether or not he or she has won a special drawing jackpot.

In addition, in this third control example, the timing to start the potential state (timing when the potential state is set), the actual number of probability variations and the number of effects remaining probability variations that occur when winning a special jackpot during the probability state In order to make up for the difference, the system is configured to perform an additional performance that adds the remaining probability variable number of effects displayed in the remaining number display area D1 as a special figure variation effect during the probability state. As a result, it is possible to add on the remaining number of variations in the performance at various times during the potential state, so whether or not the actual number of variations in the performance is reset to the initial value (120 times) during the potential state (in the potential state It is possible to further prevent the player from easily knowing whether or not he or she has won a special drawing jackpot.

Furthermore, in this third control example, the number of additions displayed in the addition performance executed at each timing (special figure fluctuation timing, timing during winning game execution) (the number of effects remaining probability variation displayed in the remaining number display area D1) The value of (the number of times added to) is changed based on the difference between the actual probability variation number and the performance remaining probability variation number (see FIG. 290). As a result, when the number of remaining probability variations is greatly increased due to the additional production, the player is made to think that he or she has won a special jackpot where the actual number of probability variations becomes the initial value (120) while in the probability state. In addition, it is possible to prevent the remaining probability variation number of performances from becoming "0" in a state where the actual probability variation number and the performance remaining probability variation number are largely deviated.

In addition, in the first control example described above, in order to prevent the player from knowing that he or she has won a hit (big hit or small win) during the potential state, a winning game (for example, a ball out of a jackpot game) is Even if a jackpot game or a small win game with a small number of winnings is executed, the third symbol display device 81 is configured not to display an effect indicating a winning game, and at what timing during the probability state is the actual probability variation number initialized. The system was configured to make it difficult to identify whether a jackpot was won or not, which was set at a value of 120 times.

On the other hand, in this third control example, a winning game (a jackpot game or a small winning game) that is executed when a winning game (for example, a jackpot game or a small winning game with few balls out of the jackpot games) is won during the probability state. The third symbol display device 81 is configured to display a display based on the winning of a ball to the variable winning device 65 as a winning effect executed during a winning game (see FIG. 293). This allows the player to easily understand that a winning game will be executed during the probability state. As a winning performance executed during this winning game, the details will be described later, but the display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (for example, when a ball enters the variable winning device 65, a payout is The display mode for displaying the number of prize balls) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at a different rate depending on whether a jackpot game is being executed or a small winning game is being executed. . As a result, even if you win a jackpot in which the number of balls that enter the variable winning device 65 in one winning game is larger than that in a small winning game, the display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed to a small winning game. It becomes possible to make it similar to the winning performance corresponding to the game. Therefore, while informing (displaying) in an easy-to-understand manner to the player that a winning game will be executed during the probability state, it is also notifying (displaying) in a way that is difficult for the player to understand whether the winning game is a jackpot game or a small win game. This allows the player to play the game in a potential state while maintaining expectations until the end.

The difference in configuration between the pachinko machine 10 in this third control example and the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example is that the contents of the ROM 222 provided in the audio lamp control device 113 have been partially changed; The contents of the RAM 223 provided in the audio lamp control device 113 have been partially changed, and some processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 have been changed from the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example. The point is that Regarding other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, This is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the first control example will be denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustrations and explanations thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 290, the actual remaining probability variation number set while the pachinko machine 10 is in the probability state in the third control example and the effect remaining number displayed in the remaining number display area D1 of the third symbol display device 81. We will explain the changes in the number of probability changes. FIG. 290 is a timing chart showing the flow during the potential state in the third control example.

As shown in FIG. 290, when a jackpot game in which jackpot B or jackpot D is won in the normal gaming state is executed, the actual remaining probability change count becomes "120 times" at the end timing (during ending) of the jackpot game. is set, and the third symbol display device 81 displays a message indicating that the game will move to a potential state, and the remaining number display area D1 displays "100 times" as the remaining number of performance variations (see FIG. 291). .

Then, when the game in the probability state is started, the actual remaining probability variation number and the performance remaining probability variation number are subtracted by "1" each time the special symbol variation is executed. In this control example, as in the first control example, the actual remaining probability variation number and the performance remaining probability variation number are subtracted at the timing when the special symbol variation starts, so the first special symbol variation in the potential probability state is executed. During this period, "99" is displayed in the remaining number display area D1 as the remaining number of effects.

After that, if you execute the special figure variation (lottery) and win a small hit on the 14th special figure variation in the probability state (the special figure variation where "86th" is displayed as the number of remaining probability variations), there will be no remaining The small winning game is started while the probability variation number is maintained at "106 times". During this small winning game, if additional performance A (a performance in which the value of the remaining probability variable number of performances is added (added) by 5 times) is executed as a performance display on the third symbol display device 81, the remaining number of times is The value of the number of performance remaining probability changes displayed in the display area D1 is added and displayed from "86th time" to "91st time" (see FIG. 291(b)). In this way, during the winning game (small winning game) that is executed when the actual remaining probability variation number is not changed (not reset) and wins (small winning), the value of the production remaining probability variation number is changed. By executing the effect of adding (additional effect), it is possible to make the player expect that the actual remaining probability variation number has been reset due to the current winning game.

Then, when the small winning game ends, the special figure variation in the potential state (the special figure variation in which the actual remaining probability variation number "105" and the performance remaining probability variation number "90" correspond) continues. Next, if you win a jackpot with a special pattern variation where the actual remaining probability variation is ``30 times'' (a special pattern variation where the actual remaining probability variation is ``15 times''), the timing at which the jackpot game starts The actual remaining probability variation count is set to "0 times". Note that the remaining number of effects displayed in the remaining number of times display area D1 is not set to "0 times", but is configured such that content indicating "15 times" is continuously displayed. When the game returns to the probability state after the end of this jackpot game, "120" is reset as the actual remaining probability variation count at the timing when the jackpot game ends. In addition, during a jackpot game, an additional performance is executed as a performance display on the third symbol display device 81 in the same way as a small win game, and an additional performance C (the value of the remaining probability variation number of performances is set to ``20''). When a performance adding (additional) "times" is executed, the value of the performance remaining probability variable number displayed in the remaining number display area D1 is added and displayed from "15 times" to "35 times".

Although the details will be described later, in this control example, regardless of the type of hit (big hit or small hit), an additional amount is added based on the difference value between the actual remaining probability variation number and the production remaining probability variation number and the value of the obtained production counter 223f. It is configured to determine the number of additions (number of additions) to be displayed in the performance. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from understanding whether the current winning game was a small winning game or a big winning game based on the contents of the additional performance executed during the winning game.

Next, when the jackpot game ends, the special symbol variation in the potential probability state (substantially remaining probability variation number "119") is started. During this special figure fluctuation, the additional performance D is executed, and the value of the performance remaining probability variation number displayed in the remaining number display area D1 is added and displayed from "34 times" to "74 times". In this way, in this third control example, even during the special symbol fluctuation in the potential state, the performance that adds (adds) the value of the performance remaining probability variation number displayed in the remaining number display area D1 is executed. To make it difficult for a player to predict the actual number of remaining probability variations, and to make the player play a game while expecting how long a probability state will continue.

In addition, by making it possible to perform additional effects even during special figure variations, the value of the effect remaining probability variation count that is displayed in the remaining count display area D1 both during the winning game and during special figure variation during the probability state. It becomes possible to add (add). Therefore, since it is possible to increase the number of times that the additional performance is executed, even if the actual residual probability variation number and the performance residual probability variation number differ greatly (if the difference value is large), it will not make the player feel uncomfortable. You can make it easier to converge the value without giving it. Furthermore, in this third control example, the number of additions (number of additions) to be displayed in the additional performance is determined based on the difference value between the actual residual probability variation number and the performance residual probability variation number, The structure is such that the larger the difference between the actual residual probability variation number and the performance residual probability variation number, the more the performance residual probability variation number is added (added), so the value can be adjusted without making the player feel uncomfortable. Convergence can be made easier.

Then, the additional effect D is executed and the value of the effect residual probability variation number displayed in the remaining number display area D1 becomes "74 times." At the next variation, the additional effect (addition effect B) is executed again, and the actual The remaining probability variation number is "118 times" and the production remaining probability variation number is "83 times." After that, when the variation in which the remaining probability variation number of performances ends with "1 time" without winning a hit, the remaining number of production probability variations "???" will be displayed in the remaining number display area D1 as the final production display, and the actual remaining probability variation number will be It will continue to be displayed until it reaches "0 times". With this configuration, even if the actual remaining probability variation number and the performance remaining probability variation number do not ultimately match, it is possible to execute a game in a potential state without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

In addition, in this third control example, a configuration is used in which "???" is displayed in the remaining number of times display area D1 in the final performance display, but as in the first control example described above, the value of the number of times of performance remaining probability variation is used. When is "0 times", the value of the actual remaining probability variation count may be displayed in the remaining count display area D1 (in the example of FIG. 290, "35 times" is displayed). Further, the additional performance may be forcibly executed based on the value of the actual residual probability variation number when the value of the production remaining probability variation number is "0". With this configuration, it becomes possible for the player to play the game in the potential state with peace of mind.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 291 and 292, the display contents displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the case where the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 becomes the probable state in the third control example will be explained. Note that the same elements as those in the first control example described above are given the same reference numerals, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 291(a), the jackpot end screen when the gaming state shifts to the probable state will be described. FIG. 291(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the jackpot end screen. As shown in FIG. 291(a), when it is confirmed that the gaming state will shift to the potential state after the end of the jackpot (in the case of a V winning in a jackpot where the gaming state shifts to the potential state by winning a V prize during the jackpot game) , a remaining number display area D1 is provided in the upper left area of the jackpot end screen, and "100 times" is displayed as the remaining number of effects (see point A in FIG. 290). In the center of the main display area Dm, the words "RUSH ENTER" notifying the transition to the latent state and a rabbit-like character 811 used to display the latent state are displayed. It is displayed in a manner that congratulates you on your accomplishments. This allows the player to easily understand that the gaming state will shift to the probable state after the end of the jackpot game.

In addition, in this third control example, the above-mentioned display is executed on the jackpot end screen, but the above-mentioned display is executed when it is determined that the gaming state will shift to the potential state after the jackpot ends. It may be configured as follows. In addition, unlike the pachinko machine 10 used in this third control example, the jackpot game ends depending on the jackpot type when winning the jackpot, instead of being configured such that a variable probability state is given after the jackpot game ends by winning a V prize during the jackpot game. A configuration in which a variable probability state is added later may also be used.

Next, with reference to FIG. 291(b), the display screen during the winning game (during the small winning game) in the potential state will be explained. FIG. 291(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a display screen during a winning game. As shown in FIG. 291(b), even when a small winning game or a jackpot game is executed during the probability state, the effect in which the character 811 moves from the left to the right of the screen continues as in the case of special figure fluctuation. and executed. Then, when the additional effect is executed, the character 811 runs past the "treasure box", the "treasure box" opens, and the value of the remaining probability variable number of effects displayed in the remaining number display area D1 is added (added) from inside. The display mode corresponding to the value is displayed ("5 times" in FIG. 291(b)), and the value of the remaining probability variable number of effects is added "5 times" to display "95 times" (in FIG. 290). (See point B). In addition, in the display area D4 provided below the main display area, the value of the number of effects remaining probability variation ("5 times") added by this additional effect is displayed in characters.

In this way, in this third control example, the additional effect that is executed during the potential state is executed using a part of the effect that is always executed during the potential state (the effect that moves the character 811). Therefore, there is an effect that the value of the number of times of performance remaining probability variation ("5 times") can be added (added) without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

FIG. 292(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents displayed when the additional effect D (see point D in FIG. 290) is executed during the special symbol variation in the potential state. As shown in FIG. 292(a), during the special figure variation, an effect is performed in which the character 811 moves from the left direction to the right direction on the screen. Then, when the additional effect is executed, the character 811 runs past the "treasure box", the "treasure box" opens, and the value of the remaining probability variable number of effects displayed in the remaining number display area D1 is added (added) from inside. The display mode corresponding to the value is displayed ("40 times" in FIG. 292(a)), and the value of the remaining probability variable number of effects is added by "40 times" to display "74 times" (in FIG. 292(a)). (See point D). In addition, in the display area D4 provided below the main display area, the value of the number of effects remaining probability variation ("40 times") added by this additional effect is displayed in text.

As explained above with reference to FIG. 291(b) and FIG. 292(a), in the probability state, the value of the remaining probability variable number of performances displayed in the remaining number display area D1 during the winning game and during the special symbol variation. An additional effect that adds up (adds) is executed. Since the additional performance executed during the winning game and the additional performance executed during the special figure fluctuation are executed in the same performance mode, it is possible to determine whether the current winning game is being played depending on the additional performance executed. It is possible to suppress the player from grasping whether the value is changing or not.

In addition, the display form of the value is changed depending on the value of the number of effects remaining probability variation that is added (added) by the additional effect (the display form of "+5" in Fig. 291 (b) and the display form of "+5" in Fig. 292 (a) )), it is possible to visually notify the player of the effect of the additional effect. It should be noted that an effect display may be executed that suggests the value of the number of effects remaining probability variation that is added (added) by the additional effect, for example, the value of the number of effects remaining probability variation that is added (added) due to the additional effect is stored. The display form of the "treasure box" may be changed depending on the added value.

Next, with reference to FIG. 292(b), the final effect executed during the potential state will be explained. FIG. 292(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the content of the final performance in the potential state. This final performance is a performance that is executed when the value of the actual remaining probability variation count is greater than ``0 times'' and the value of the production remaining probability variation count displayed in the remaining count display area D1 becomes ``0 times.'' This is a performance that displays "???" as the value of the remaining performance probability variation count until the remaining actual remaining probability variation count is exhausted. Thereby, even if the values of the actual remaining probability variation number and the performance remaining probability variation number are different, the performance in the potential probability state can be executed without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

Furthermore, while the final performance is being executed, a performance in which the character 811 is chased by a rock 813 is performed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 as a performance suggesting that the potential state ends. Thereby, it is possible to visually suggest to the player the possibility that the potential state will end, and it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand performance to the player. Further, "pinch" is displayed in the display area D4 as a character indicating that the potential state has ended.

Next, with reference to FIG. 293, the display contents during the winning game in the potential state in the pachinko machine 10 of the third control example will be explained. FIG. 293 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the winning performance during the probability state. As shown in FIG. 293, when a winning game is executed during the probability state and a ball wins in the variable winning device 65, a winning display mode 815 is displayed indicating that a ball has won in the variable winning device 65. Ru. This winning display mode 815 moves from the lower right side (see 815c in FIG. 293) of the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 to the left side through the upper center (see 815b in FIG. 293), and is enlarged. The screen is stopped and displayed in the state shown in FIG. 293 (see 815a in FIG. 293). The winning display mode 815 displays a value (“15” in this control example) corresponding to the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball enters the variable winning device 65, and the variable winning device 65 is displayed to the player. The player is configured to be able to inform the player that a ball has won a prize and the number of prize balls paid out as a result of the winning.

In addition, if multiple balls enter the variable winning device 65 in one winning game and the winning display mode 815 is executed multiple times, multiple winning displays will be displayed until the single winning game ends. The aspect 815 is configured to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Note that other configurations may be used as a method of displaying the winning display mode 815. For example, the winning display mode 815 may be displayed without being stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Furthermore, in this control example, the winning display mode 815 is not displayed corresponding to all the balls that have won on the variable winning device 65 during the winning game, but the winning display mode 815 is displayed depending on the type of winning game (big winning game or small winning game). ) and information on the number of prizes won during the winning game to determine whether or not to display the winning display mode 815, and when it is determined that the winning display mode 815 is to be displayed, to execute the display of the winning display mode 815. It consists of With this configuration, even if the ease of winning a ball to the variable winning device 65 is varied depending on the type of winning game (if the period during which the variable winning device 65 is open is varied) ), since it is possible to adjust the number of winning display modes 815 displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the number of winning display modes 815 displayed on the third symbol display device 81 makes it possible to adjust the number of winning display modes 815 displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It is possible to prevent the person from knowing the type of winning game (big winning game or small winning game).

In addition, in this control example, the winning display mode is configured to display a value ("15" in this control example) corresponding to the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins in the variable winning device 65. For example, the value corresponding to the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the variable winning device 65 may be divided into a plurality of values (for example, "10" and "5") and displayed. This makes it possible to set a plurality of patterns for the number of times the winning display mode 815 is displayed in relation to the number of winning balls in the variable winning device 65. In addition, even if the player has a variable winning device that pays out different numbers of prize balls when winning a prize, by displaying the values corresponding to the number of prize balls paid out separately, it is possible for the player to distinguish between the types of winning games. (Jackpot game or small win game) can be suppressed from being grasped. Furthermore, the period until the winning display mode 815 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 may be varied depending on the winning type. Specifically, in the case of a winning type where many winnings can be expected (for example, 15R winnings), the winning display mode 815 is set to the third symbol more than the winning type that results in fewer winnings (for example, 7R winnings). It is preferable to set it so that the period until it is displayed on the display device 81 is long. Thereby, even if the winning type is determined by the winning display mode 815 displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the period until the winning type is determined can be extended. Even in this case, it is preferable to display the winning display mode 815 at the same timing for the first winning game ball.

<About the electrical configuration in the third control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 294, the configuration of the ROM 222 and RAM 223 provided in the audio lamp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 in the third control example will be described. FIG. 294(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 222 of the pachinko machine 10 in this third control example.

As shown in FIG. 294(a), the ROM 222 in the third control example is different from the configuration of the ROM 222 in the first control example in that an additional effect table 222ca and a winning effect table 222cb are added. do.

First, with reference to FIG. 295(a), details of the additional effect table 222ca in the third control example will be described. FIG. 295(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the additional effect table 222ca in this control example. This additional effect table 222ca is a table that is referred to when determining the type of additional effect to be executed during the potential state, and is obtained with a difference value indicating the difference between the actual residual probability change and the number of effects remaining probability changes. The type of additional performance is selected based on the value of the performance counter 223f. This additional effect is an effect that adds (adds) the value of the effect remaining probability variable number displayed in the remaining number display area D1 of the third symbol display area during the probability state, and the value differs depending on the type of additional effect. (value to be added (added)) is set.

This additional production table 222ca is used when it is determined that the value of the production remaining probability variation number is smaller than the value of the actual remaining probability variation number in the special symbol 2 variation setting process (see Fig. 299) in the potential state (see Fig. 299). S5103: Yes) and when a winning ending command is received during the probability state (see S5218 in FIG. 300).

As shown in FIG. 295(a), the additional effect table 222ca in this control example is set so that the types of additional effects to be selected differ depending on the difference between the value of the actual residual probability variation number and the value of the effect residual probability variation number. has been done. Specifically, if the difference value between the value of the actual residual probability variation number and the value of the production residual probability variation number is "1 to 40" and the value of the production counter 223f is "0 to 99", the additional production is executed. If not, and the value of the performance counter 223f is "100 to 179", additional performance A (number of additions + 5) is set as the additional performance. Further, when the value of the performance counter 223f is "180 to 198", additional performance B (number of additions + 5 times) is set as the additional performance.

If the difference value between the value of the actual remaining probability variation number and the value of the production remaining probability variation number is "41 to 80" and the value of the production counter 223f is "0 to 49", the additional production is not executed and the production is When the value of the counter 223f is "50 to 149", additional performance A (number of additions + 5) is set as the additional performance. Further, when the value of the performance counter 223f is "150 to 198", additional performance B (number of additions + 5 times) is set as the additional performance.

Furthermore, if the difference value between the value of the actual residual probability variation number and the value of the production residual probability variation number is "81 or more" and the value of the production counter 223f is "0 to 99", the additional production C (additional The number of times + 20) is set. Further, when the value of the performance counter 223f is "100 to 198", additional performance D (number of additions + 40 times) is set as the additional performance.

As explained above, in this control example, the difference value between the value of the actual residual probability variation number and the value of the production residual probability variation number is calculated, and the type of additional production is selected based on the calculated difference value. Therefore, it is possible to execute an additional performance suitable for the display situation of the remaining probability variation number of performances in the potential state. In addition, it is set that the larger the difference value between the value of the actual residual probability variation number and the value of the production residual probability variation number, the more likely the additional production will be executed. When there is a deviation (when the difference value becomes large), the difference can be made easier to converge. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the performance display in the potential state due to a large value of the actual residual probability variation remaining even though the value of the production remaining probability variation is "0". can.

Furthermore, in this control example, it is set so that the larger the difference value between the value of the actual remaining probability variation number and the value of the performance residual probability variation number, the larger the value to be added (added) in one additional production. Thereby, when the value of the actual residual probability variation number and the value of the performance residual probability variation number greatly deviate (when the difference value becomes large), it is possible to easily converge the difference. Therefore, even though the value of the production remaining probability variation number is "0", the actual residual probability variation number remains large, which prevents the player from feeling uncomfortable with the performance display in the potential state. be able to.

Next, the prize presentation table 222cb will be explained with reference to FIG. 295(b). FIG. 295(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the winning presentation table 222cb. This winning effect table 222cb is referred to when deciding whether to display the winning display mode (winning effect) when a ball wins in the variable winning device 65 in a winning game executed during the probability state. This is a table in which the presence or absence of a winning effect is determined based on the result of determining whether the special figure is correct (winning type), the number of winning balls in the winning game, and the value of the effect counter 223f. This winning performance is a performance that displays the winning display mode 815 shown in FIG. 293 on the third symbol display device 81.

Specifically, if the judgment results are jackpots A to E and jackpot G (that is, jackpots that can be expected to produce balls), and the number of winning balls is the first or second winning ball, regardless of the value of the production counter 223f. (If the value of the acquired performance counter 223f is "0 to 198"), the winning performance "Yes" is selected and the winning performance is executed (the display of the winning display mode 815 is executed). In other words, the winning display mode 815 is always displayed on the third symbol display device 81 for the first and second winning balls after the winning game is executed. This makes it possible for the player to easily understand that a winning game is being executed.

If the number of winning pitches is the third winning ball, if the value of the acquired performance counter 223f is "0 to 4", the winning performance "None" is selected, and the value of the acquired performance counter 223f is "5 to 198". ”, the winning production “Yes” is selected. In other words, the winning effect is set to be executed with a probability of approximately 97.5%, and the winning effect is not executed with a probability of 2.5%.

If the number of winning balls is the fourth winning ball, if the value of the acquired performance counter 223f is "0 to 119", the winning performance "None" is selected, and the value of the acquired performance counter 223f is "120 to 198". ”, the winning production “Yes” is selected. In other words, the winning effect is set to be executed with a probability of approximately 40%, and the winning effect is not executed with a probability of approximately 60%.

If the number of winning pitches is the fifth winning ball, if the value of the acquired performance counter 223f is "0 to 189", the winning performance "None" is selected, and if the value of the acquired performance counter 223f is "5 to 198" ”, the winning production “Yes” is selected. In other words, the winning effect is set to be executed with a probability of approximately 5%, and the winning effect is not executed with a probability of approximately 95%. If the number of winning balls is 6 or more, if the value of the acquired performance counter 223f is "0 to 193", the winning performance "None" is selected, and the value of the acquired performance counter 223f is "194 to 193". 198'', the winning presentation ``Yes'' is selected. In other words, the setting is such that the winning effect will be executed with a probability of about 2.5%, and the winning effect will not be executed with a probability of about 97.5%.

Next, if the result of the judgment is a jackpot F (that is, a jackpot in which no ball is expected to be played), regardless of the number of winning balls (the number of winning balls is the first or more), and regardless of the value of the production counter 223f. (When the value of the acquired performance counter 223f is "0 to 198"), a winning performance is executed. In other words, the winning display mode 815 is always displayed based on the fact that a ball has won in the variable winning device 65. In addition, even if the winning/failure judgment result is a small hit, as in the above-mentioned jackpot F, regardless of the number of winning balls (the number of winning balls is 1 or more), and even regardless of the value of the performance counter 223f (the acquired performance counter If the value of 223f is “0 to 198”), a winning effect is executed. In other words, the winning display mode 815 is always displayed based on the fact that a ball has won in the variable winning device 65.

As explained above, in this control example, the player is informed that a winning game (jackpot game or small winning game) has been executed during the probability state by the winning presentation based on the winning of the ball to the variable winning device 65. This makes it possible to notify the public. This makes it possible for the player to easily understand that a winning game has occurred during the probability state.

Furthermore, since the degree of occurrence of the winning effect based on the winning of a ball in the variable winning device 65 is varied depending on the type of winning game, it is possible to execute a winning effect suitable for each winning game.

In addition, in this control example, whether the winning game executed during the probability is a jackpot game in which the value of the actual remaining probability variation number can be set to the initial value (120 times) after the end of the game, or the value of the actual remaining probability variation number In order to prevent players from easily identifying whether or not the game is a small winning game in which the number is not changed, jackpot games (jackpot A to E, In and G), it is set so that the larger the number of winnings to the variable winning device 65, the more difficult it is to execute the winning effect. As a result, even if many balls actually win in the variable winning device 65 (even if more balls win than the number of balls that win in the small winning game), the number of times the winning effect is executed is suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from identifying the type of winning game based on the number of winning effects executed on the third symbol display device 81.

In addition, the cumulative value of the number of balls acquired during the potential state (the cumulative value of the number of prize balls paid out in each winning game executed while the potential state continues) is displayed on the third symbol display device. The configuration shown in 81 may also be used. If such a configuration is used, the number of prize balls may be cumulatively displayed regardless of the presence or absence of a winning performance, or the cumulative value of the number of prize balls may be displayed in accordance with the number of times a winning performance is executed. It may be configured to add. In this case, the actual cumulative value and the cumulative value on the display will differ by the number of winning balls for which the winning effect was not executed, so a means for storing the difference in the cumulative value is provided, and for example, When a winning game is executed, it is preferable to execute a winning performance without being based on the winning of a ball to the variable winning device 65, and to make it possible to execute a temporary winning performance that converges the difference in cumulative value. As a result, it is possible to display the winning performance and the cumulative display of the number of prize balls without any sense of incongruity. In addition, by executing the provisional winning effect, it becomes possible to display winning display modes 815 that are equal to or greater than the number of balls that actually won on the variable winning device 65 during the small winning game, so the third symbol display device 81 It is possible to further suppress the player from identifying the type of winning game based on the number of winning effects performed (the number of times the winning display mode 815 is displayed).

Returning to FIG. 294(b), the contents of the RAM 223 of the pachinko machine 10 in this third control example will be explained. FIG. 294(b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223 of the pachinko machine 10 in this third control example.

As shown in FIG. 294(b), the RAM 223 in the third control example has a remaining probability variable number displaying flag 223ca, an additional effect flag 223cb, and an additional effect type storage area 223cc, compared to the configuration of the RAM 223 in the first control example. has been added.

The remaining probability variable number display flag 223ca is a flag for indicating the period during which the production remaining probability variable number is displayed in the remaining number display area D1 (see FIG. 291(a)) of the third symbol display device 81, and is turned on. If it is set, the number of times the performance remaining probability change is displayed. This flag 223ca while displaying the remaining probability variable number determines that the winning ending command has been received in the winning related command processing 2 (see Figure 301) (S5207 in Figure 301: Yes), and then the current winning is the winning game. If it is determined that the game state is a win that will shift the gaming state to the probability state after the end (S5209 in FIG. 301: Yes), and furthermore, it is determined that the flag 223ca for displaying the remaining probability variable number is not set to ON (FIG. 301). 301, S5210: Yes), set it to on (S5213 in FIG. 301), and similarly, in the win-related command processing (see FIG. 301), it is determined whether the current winning game is a winning game in which an additional effect can be executed. (S5210 in FIG. 301). Then, in state command processing 2 (see FIG. 300), when a state command indicating the transition of the gaming state from the potential state to the normal state is received (S4531: Yes in FIG. 300), the gaming state is set to off (see FIG. 300). 300 S4532).

The additional effect flag 223cb is a flag for indicating that the third symbol display device 81 is in a state where an additional effect based on special symbol fluctuations is executed, and when set to on, the variable display setting process is executed. 2 (see Figure 303) is executed, the additional effect is set in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (S4736 in Figure 304) executed in the fluctuation display setting process 2 (see Figure 303) (see Figure 303). 304 S4813). This additional effect flag 223cb is set to ON (S5108 in FIG. 299) when the additional effect is selected in the special figure 2 variation setting process (see FIG. 299) (S5106 in FIG. 299: Yes), and the special figure 2 variation setting process (see FIG. 299) 2 is referenced in the fluctuation start process (see FIG. 304) (S4809 in FIG. 304), and if it is determined that it is set to on (S4809 in FIG. 304: Yes), it is set to off (S4810 in FIG. 304). , additional effects are set.

The additional effect type storage area 223cc is an area in which the additional effect type selected by referring to the additional effect table 222ca is set, and the additional effect corresponding to the set additional effect type is used in the special figure 2 variation start process (FIG. 304). (see). In this additional effect type storage area 223cc, the type of additional effect selected in the special figure 2 variation setting process (see FIG. 299) is set (S5107 in FIG. 299), and in the special figure 2 variation start process (see FIG. 304). When it is determined that the additional effect flag 223cb is set to ON (S4809 in FIG. 304: Yes), an additional effect is set based on the type of additional effect that has been set (S4812 in FIG. 304).

<About the control process of the main controller in the third control example>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the third control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 296 and 297. The control process of the main control device 110 in the third control example is different from the control process of the main control device 110 in the first control example described above, and the first winning process ( The first winning process 2 (see FIG. 296) is executed in place of the first winning process 2 (see FIG. 231), and the second winning process 2 (see FIG. 297), but otherwise the same processing is executed. Note that the same processes are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

First, the first winning process 2 (S2113) will be explained with reference to FIG. 296. FIG. 296 is a flowchart showing the first winning process 2 (S2113). This first winning process 2 (S2113 in FIG. 296) is similar to the first winning process in the first control example described above (see FIG. 231). Processing based on the winning ball in 65a) is executed.

When the first winning process 2 (S2113) is executed, the same processes as S2401 to S2404 of the first winning process (see FIG. 231) of the first control example described above are executed. When the process of S2404 is finished, a winning command is set (S2431), and then the same processes as S2405 to S2411 of the above-described first winning process (see FIG. 231) are executed, and this process ends. In this first winning process 2 (S2113), by setting a winning command, the main control device 110 sends the ball that won to the variable winning device 65 (specific winning opening 65a) during the jackpot game to the audio lamp control device 113. It is possible to output information regarding.

Information regarding the number of balls won during one round in the jackpot game is attached to this winning winning command, and when the audio lamp control device 113 receives the winning winning command, it performs the winning winning command processing described later. (See FIG. 302) is executed, and it is determined whether or not to execute the winning presentation (see FIG. 293) during the winning game.

Next, the second winning process 2 (S2513) will be explained with reference to FIG. 297. FIG. 297 is a flowchart showing the second winning process 2 (S2513). This second winning process 2 (S2513) is similar to the second winning process (see FIG. 234) in the first control example described above, in which the variable winning device 65 (specific winning opening 65a) is activated during a small winning game in the pachinko machine 10. Processing based on the winning ball is executed.

When the second winning process (S2513) is executed, the same processes as S2701 to S2704 of the second winning process (see FIG. 234) described above are executed. When the process of S2704 is finished, a winning command is set (S2731), and then the same processes as S2705 to S2711 of the second winning process (see FIG. 234) described above are executed, and this process ends. In this second winning process 2 (S2513), by setting a winning command, the main controller 110 sends a message to the audio lamp control device 113 indicating that a prize has been won in the variable winning device 65 (specific winning opening 65a) during the small winning game. Information about the ball can be output.

Information regarding the number of balls won during the small winning game is attached to this winning winning command, and when the audio lamp control device 113 receives the winning winning command, it processes the winning winning command (see FIG. 302), which will be described later. ) is executed, and it is determined whether or not to execute the winning presentation (see FIG. 293) during the winning game.

<About the control process of the audio lamp control device in the third control example>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the third control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 298 to 304. The control process of the audio lamp control device 113 in the third control example is the command determination process 3 in place of the command determination process (see FIG. 238) with respect to the control process of the audio lamp control device 113 in the first control example described above. (S4111 in FIG. 298) is different in that a variable display setting process 2 (S4112 in FIG. 303) is executed instead of the variable display setting process (see FIG. 243), but otherwise the same process is executed.

First, command determination processing 3 (S4111) will be explained with reference to FIG. 298. FIG. 298 is a flowchart showing the contents of command determination processing 3 (S4111). This command determination process 3 is a process in which various processes are executed when various commands output from the main control device 110 are received, similar to the command determination process in the first control example described above (see FIG. 238).

In command determination processing 3 (S4111), in contrast to the command determination processing (FIG. 238) of the first control example described above, when the special figure 2 variation pattern command is received (S4306 in FIG. 298: Yes), the special figure 2 The change setting process (S4351 in FIG. 299) is executed, and when a status command is received (S4313 in FIG. 298: Yes), status command processing 2 (see FIG. 300) is executed instead of the status command process (see FIG. 240). ) is executed, a process for determining whether a win-related command has been received (S4352 in FIG. 298), and a process for determining whether a win-related command is received (S4352 in FIG. 298: Yes), a win-related command The difference is that the process (see FIG. 301) is executed, and the other processes are the same. Note that the same processes are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

When the command determination process 3 (S4111) is executed, first, the processes of S4301 to S4306 are executed similarly to the command determination process of the first control example described above (see FIG. 238). Then, in the process of S4306, if it is determined that the special figure 2 variation pattern command has been received (S4306: Yes), the special figure 2 variation setting process is executed (S4351).

Here, special figure fluctuation setting process 2 (S4351) will be explained with reference to FIG. 299. FIG. 299 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure 2 variation setting process 2 (S4351). In this special figure 2 variation setting process 2 (S4351), the process of setting the special figure 2 variation start flag 223e on (S5101) and the reception A process (S5102) is executed to extract a variable pattern command from the command that has been executed, and a process (S5103 to S5108) is executed to determine whether or not to execute an additional effect (see FIG. 292(a)).

First, when the special figure 2 variation setting process 2 (S4351) is executed, the special figure 2 variation start flag 223e is set to on (S5101), and then a variation pattern command is extracted from the received command (S5102). . Note that the process of S5101 described above is the same as the process of S4307 of the command determination process of the first control example (see FIG. 238) described above, and the process of S5102 is the same as the process of S4307 of the command determination process of the first control example (see FIG. Since the process is the same as the process of S4308 (see 238), detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

Next, the remaining probability variation number (hereinafter referred to as the actual residual probability variation number) set in the remaining probability variation number area 223o and the remaining probability variation number (hereinafter referred to as the performance remaining probability variation number) set in the production probability variation number area 223o are determined. A comparison is made (S5103). In the process of S5103, if it is determined that the value of the remaining probability variation number of performances is smaller than the value of the actual residual probability variation number, that is, the number of production remaining probability variations displayed in the remaining number display area D1 of the third symbol display device 81 is It is determined that the value is smaller than the actually set remaining probability variation number (the remaining probability variation number updated in the game state update process of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 213)) and that the additional performance can be executed. If so (S5103: Yes), obtain the value of the production counter 223h (S5104), then refer to the additional production table 222cb, and calculate the difference value between the value of the actual residual probability variation number and the value of the production residual probability variation number. The additional performance type is selected based on the value of the performance counter 223h acquired in the process of S5104 (S5105).

On the other hand, in the process of S5103, if it is determined that the value of the number of production remaining probability variations is not less than (same or greater than) the value of the actual residual probability variation, that is, the value of the production remaining probability variation number is added by an additional production. If it is determined that it is not possible (S5103: No), this process is set as is.

After completing the process of S5105, it is then determined whether an additional effect has been selected (S5106). In the process of S5106, if no additional effect is selected, that is, in the process of S5105, the difference value between the value of the actual remaining probability variation number and the value of the effect remaining probability variation number is "1 to 40", and the acquisition is performed. If the value of the performance counter 223h obtained is "0 to 99", and the difference value between the value of the actual residual probability variation number and the value of the production residual probability variation number is "41 to 80", and the obtained value of the production counter 223h If the value is "0 to 49" (S5106: No), this process is immediately terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S5106, if it is determined that an additional effect has been selected (S5106: Yes), the type of the selected additional effect is set in the additional effect type storage area 223cc (S5107), and the additional effect flag 223cb is set. It is set to on (S5108), and this processing ends.

Returning to FIG. 298, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S4306, if it is determined that the special figure 2 variation pattern command has not been received (S4306), then the same steps as S4309 to S4318 of the command determination process (see FIG. 238) of the first control example described above are performed. Execute the process. In the process of S4317, if it is determined that the remaining probability varying number of times command or the remaining time shortening number of times command has not been received (S4317: No), it is determined whether a winning-related command has been received (S4352).

In the process of S4352, if it is determined that a hit-related command has not been received (S4352: No), the command determination process in response to other commands is performed similarly to the command determination process of the first control example described above (see FIG. 238). Various processes are executed (S4319), and this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined that a winning-related command has been received (S4352: Yes), winning-related command processing is executed (S4353). This win-related command processing (S4353) is a process that is executed when each command related to a win is output from the main control device 110, and specifically, it is a process that is executed when a win-related command is output from the main control device 110. An opening command that is output when a new round game is started in a jackpot game, a round start command that is output when a new round game is started in a jackpot game, and a winning game (jackpot game or small win game) is being executed. A winning command that is output based on the winning of a ball to the specific winning opening 65a between them, an ending command that is output when the ending period starts in a winning game (big winning game or small winning game), and other commands related to winning. (V winning command, etc.) is executed when it is determined that it has been output (received) from the main control device 110.

When the winning related command processing (S4353) is executed, it is first determined whether or not an opening command has been received (S5201), and if it is determined that an opening command has been received (S5201: Yes), then, A display opening command is set (S5202). On the other hand, in the process of S5201, if it is determined that an opening command has not been received (S5201: No), then it is determined whether a round start command has been received (S5203).

In the process of S5203, if it is determined that a round start command has been received (S5203), a round command for display is set (S5204), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S5203, if it is determined that the round start command has not been received (S5203: No), then it is determined whether a winning command has been received (S5205). This winning command is a command set in the first winning process 2 (see S2113 in FIG. 296) and the second winning process 2 (see S2513 in FIG. 297) executed in the main control device 110, and is This is a command that is output based on a ball entering the variable winning device 65 (specific winning hole 65a) during a game or a small winning game. The winning command includes information regarding the number of winning balls, the type of winning game being executed (big winning type or small winning type), and information that can be specified.

Here, the winning command processing (S5206) will be explained with reference to FIG. 302. FIG. 302 is a flowchart showing the contents of the winning command processing (S5206).

When this winning command processing (S5206) is executed, first, the gaming state at the time of winning is specified based on the state setting area (S5301), and then, whether the gaming state at the time of winning is a probable state or not. (S5302). If it is determined that it is not in a potential state (S5302: No), a winning presentation is selected (S5305), and the process moves to S5306. On the other hand, in the process of S5302, if it is determined that it is in the potential state (S5302: Yes), when selecting the winning effect to be executed in the winning game (big win game or small win game) in the potential state The value of the performance counter 223h to be used is acquired (S5303), and a winning performance is selected based on the acquired value of the performance counter 223h and the winning performance table 222cb (S5304).

After completing the process of S5304 or S5305, it is next determined whether a winning presentation has been selected (S5306), and if it is determined that a winning presentation has been selected (S5306: Yes), the selected winning presentation is indicated. A winning presentation command for display is set (S5307), and this processing is ended. On the other hand, in the process of S5306, if it is determined that the winning presentation has not been selected (S5306: No), this process is directly ended.

Next, the variable display setting process 2 (S4112) will be explained with reference to FIG. 303. FIG. 303 is a flowchart showing the contents of the variable display setting process 2 (S4112). This variable display setting process 2 (S4112) is different from the above-described variable display setting process of the first control example (see FIG. 243), and includes a process of updating the display content of the number of changes in the remaining probability of the effect, and turning on the additional effect flag 223cb. A process has been added that executes additional effects when set to . Note that other identical elements are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

First, in the variable display setting process 2 (S4112), the same processes as S4701 to S4704 of the variable display setting process (FIG. 243) of the first control example are executed. Based on the information provided. It is determined whether the current state is in a potential state (S4731).

In the process of S4731, if it is determined that the current state is not a probability state (S4731: No), a process of updating the number of effects remaining probability variation displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during a probability state (S4732~ S4736) is skipped and the process moves to S4705. On the other hand, if it is determined that the current gaming state is a potential state (S4731: Yes), then the remaining performance probability variation number set in the production probability variation number area 223p is subtracted by 1 (S4732); It is determined whether the value of the number of times of effect remaining probability variation is greater than 0 (S4733). In the process of S4733, if it is determined that the value of the number of effects remaining probability variation is larger than 0, in other words, a value of "1 time" or more is displayed in the remaining number display area D1 of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 291(a)). If the remaining performance probability variation number is displayed (S4733: Yes), a display remaining probability variation number command is set based on the value of the performance remaining probability variation number set in the production probability variation number area 223p (S4734).

On the other hand, in the process of S4733, if it is determined that the value of the production residual probability variation number is not larger than 0 (is 0) (S4733: No), next, the actual performance set in the residual probability variation number area 223o is determined. It is determined whether the value of the number of residual probability variations is greater than 0 (S4735). That is, it is determined whether or not the value of the number of variations in the remaining probability of production is 0, but the value of the number of actual variations in the actual probability is not 0 (1 or more).

In the process of S4735, if it is determined that the value of the actual residual probability variation number is not larger than 0 (is 0) (S4735: No), the process moves to the above-mentioned S4734, and the value of the actual residual probability variation number is Based on this, a display remaining probability variable number command (ie, a command for indicating "0 times" in the remaining number display area D1 of the third symbol display device 81) is set (S4734). Then, the process moves to S4705.

On the other hand, in the process of S4735, if it is determined that the value of the actual residual probability variation number is larger than 0 (S4735: Yes), a display residual probability variation number command indicating the production residual probability variation number "???" is set ( S4736), the process moves to S4705. By doing this, in a situation where the value of the actual remaining probability variation number is not 0, if the performance remaining probability variation number displayed in the remaining number display area D1 of the third symbol display device 81 becomes "0", Instead of displaying "0 times", "???" can be displayed (see FIG. 292(b)). Therefore, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the uncertain state continues even after "0 times" is displayed as the number of changes in the remaining probability of the performance. Furthermore, by setting the number of variations in the remaining performance probability to "???", the player can play the game while predicting how long the probability state will continue, and the performance effect can be enhanced.

In the process of S4701, if it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag is not set to on (set to off) (S4701: No), in the process of S4731 it is determined that the flag is not in a potential state. If (S4731: No) and the process of S4734 or the process of S4736 is finished, then the same process as S4705 of the variable display setting process (see FIG. 243) of the first control example described above is executed.

In the process of S4705, when it is determined that the special figure 2 variation start flag 223e is set to ON (S4705: Yes), next, the special figure 2 variation start process is executed (S4737). The detailed contents of this special figure 2 variation start process (S4737) will be described later with reference to FIG. 304.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the special figure 2 variation start flag 223e is not set to on (set to off) (S4705: No), the special figure 2 variation start process (S4737) is skipped. The process moves to S4709, and the same processes as S4709 to S4711 of the variable display setting process (see FIG. 243) of the first control example described above are executed, and this process ends.

As explained above, in the third control example, when entering the potential state (the potential state is set), the number of times (120 times) is smaller than the internally set probability variation number (120 times) For example, "100 times") is displayed in the remaining number display area D1. As a result, when the potential state is set, it is possible to make the actual remaining probability variation number different from the production remaining probability variation number (displaying the production remaining probability variation number less than the actual remaining probability variation number), so the probability During this state, it is possible to easily execute a performance that adds to the number of changes in the remaining probability of the performance. In addition, in this control example, as in the first control example described above, each time a variation of each special figure (special figure 1 and special figure 2) is executed (every time the actual remaining probability variation frequency is subtracted), the remaining number of variations is Although it is configured to subtract the number of effects remaining probability variations displayed in the display area D1, for example, when a variation of the special figure (special figure 1) on the side that is not advantageous to the player is executed in a probability state. It may be configured such that the remaining performance variable number is not subtracted. In this case, as in this control example, at the timing of starting the potential state (the timing at which the potential state is set), the remaining number of performance variations displayed in the remaining number display area D1 is displayed to be less than the actual remaining probability variation number. As a result, even without subtracting the number of performance remaining probability variations for the fluctuation of the special figure (special figure 1) on the side that is not advantageous to the player, a situation arises in which the number of production remaining probability variations is greater than the actual remaining probability variation number. can be restrained from doing so.

In addition, in this third control example, in the case of winning a jackpot in which the real remaining probability variation number is set to the initial value (120 times) as a result of the special drawing lottery, the actual remaining probability variation number is set as the jackpot game and the special symbol lottery result. is never set to the initial value (120 times) When a small win is won, an additional effect is executed to add the remaining probability variable number of effects by a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 to 40 times) during a small win game. It is composed of As a result, when a winning game (a game in which the variable winning device 65 opens and closes) is executed during a probability state, whether or not the actual probability variation number has been reset to the initial value (120 times) (during a probability state It is possible to further prevent the player from easily knowing whether or not he or she has won the special drawing jackpot.

In addition, in this third control example, the timing of starting the potential state (timing when the potential state is set), the actual number of probability changes and the number of effects remaining probability changes that occur when winning a special jackpot during the probability state In order to make up for the difference, the system is configured to perform an additional effect that adds the remaining probability variation number of effects displayed in the remaining number display area D1 as a special figure variation effect during the probability state. As a result, it is possible to add on the number of changes remaining in the performance at various times during the potential state, so whether or not the actual number of changes remaining in the performance is reset to the initial value (120 times) during the potential state (in the potential state It is possible to further prevent the player from easily knowing whether or not he or she has won a special drawing jackpot.

Furthermore, in this third control example, the number of additions displayed in the addition performance executed at each timing (special figure fluctuation timing, timing during winning game execution) (the number of effects remaining probability variation displayed in the remaining number display area D1) The value of (the number of times added to) is changed based on the difference between the actual probability variation number and the performance remaining probability variation number (see FIG. 290). As a result, when the number of remaining probability variations is greatly increased due to the additional production, the player is made to think that he or she has won a special jackpot where the actual number of probability variations becomes the initial value (120) while in the probability state. In addition, it is possible to prevent the remaining probability variation number of performances from becoming "0" in a state where the actual probability variation number and the performance remaining probability variation number are largely deviated.

In this third control example, during a winning game (a jackpot game or a small winning game) that is executed when a winning is won during the probability state (for example, a jackpot game or a small winning game with few balls out of the jackpot game). The third symbol display device 81 is configured to display a display based on the winning of a ball to the variable winning device 65 as a winning effect to be executed (see FIG. 293). This allows the player to easily understand that a winning game will be executed during the probability state. Then, as a winning performance executed during this winning game, the display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (for example, displaying the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball enters the variable winning device 65) The ratio at which the display mode) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is configured to be different between when a jackpot game is being executed and when a small win game is being executed. As a result, even if you win a jackpot in which the number of balls that enter the variable winning device 65 in one winning game is larger than that in a small winning game, the display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed to a small winning game. It becomes possible to make it similar to the winning performance corresponding to the game. Therefore, while informing (displaying) in an easy-to-understand manner to the player that a winning game will be executed during the probability state, it is also notifying (displaying) in a way that is difficult for the player to understand whether the winning game is a jackpot game or a small win game. This allows the player to play the game in a potential state while maintaining expectations until the end.

<Fourth control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 305 to 325. In the first control example described above, when a jackpot occurs during the probability state and a new probability state of 120 is set (the value of the probability change counter 203k is overwritten to 120), the probability on the display The remaining number of times in the state was configured to continue displaying the number of times before the jackpot hit. If there is a difference between the remaining number of potential states on the display and the actual number of remaining potential states, and the number of remaining times on the display becomes 0, the actual remaining number of times will be changed. The configuration was such that a revival effect was added and displayed. In other words, the timing at which the remaining number of times is additionally displayed on the display is limited to the timing when the remaining number of times becomes 0.

On the other hand, in this fourth control example, when there is a difference between the actual remaining number of potential states and the remaining number on the display, a configuration is provided in which multiple triggers are provided to add and display the remaining number on the display. And so. More specifically, in a state where there is a difference, a lottery is held to determine whether or not to perform an additional effect at the start of the fluctuation, and if you win the lottery, there is a possibility that the remaining number of times displayed will be added. The structure was designed to carry out an additional effect that suggests something. This additional performance is configured to vary the number of times the additional display is performed depending on the timing of operation of the frame button 22. This is intended to increase the player's desire to participate in the additional performance. Hereinafter, an additional effect in which the remaining number of times on the display is added by operating (pressing) the frame button 22 will be referred to as a press additional effect.

In addition, in this fourth control example, when the remaining number of times on the display becomes 0 and the actual remaining number of times is not 0 (1 or more), the estimated remaining number of times is not displayed (hidden). ) The configuration is such that the hidden mode can be set. This makes it difficult for the player to determine when the potential state ends, so it is possible to provide a tense gameplay experience in the potential state. Furthermore, when the non-display mode is set, if the second special symbol hits the jackpot while the remaining number of actual potential states (value of the probability change counter 203k) is within the predetermined number of times (5 times) ( In other words, if the remaining number of times in the potential state is updated to 120 immediately before the end of the potential state, a special additional performance (special additional performance) that is different from the normal additional performance is executed. It is said that As a result, the player who has confirmed the special bonus effect can be made aware that he won the jackpot just before the actual remaining number of times reached 0, and that the probability status has been newly set. can give you greater joy.

Furthermore, in this fourth control example, in addition to the additional effects, effects whose effects can be changed by operating the frame button 22 are provided. Specifically, in a normal state or a variable probability state, a reservation notice effect is provided that changes the mode of the reservation symbol according to the operation content of the frame button 22. In this pending notice performance, the range of pending symbols for which the notice performance is to be executed is determined based on the player's operation on the frame button 22 (player's selection), and based on the pre-reading results for the reserved balls in the range selected by the player. The system is configured to execute a preview performance using reserved symbols. Thereby, when a highly anticipated performance is executed as a preview performance for the selected range, it is possible to increase the player's expectation of a jackpot. In addition, even if a low-expectation performance was executed as a preview performance for the selected range, if a holding ball different from the selected range had been selected, a highly anticipated preview performance might have been executed. It is possible to make the player think that he or she does not know. Therefore, it is possible to provide an innovative performance that makes the player expect a jackpot for the reserved balls corresponding to the reserved symbols outside the selection range.

The difference in configuration between the pachinko machine 10 in this fourth control example and the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example is that the configurations of the RAM 222 and RAM 223 provided in the audio lamp control device 113 have been partially changed. One point is that some of the processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 has been changed. Regarding other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, the first This is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the control example. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the first control example will be denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustrations and explanations thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIGS. 305 to 310, display modes of characteristic various performances executed in the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth control example will be described. 304 and 306 are diagrams showing the display mode when the hold notice effect is executed in the fourth control example, and FIGS. 307 and 308 are diagrams showing the display mode when the hold notice effect is executed in the fourth control example. FIG. 309 and FIG. 310 are diagrams showing the display mode when executed, and FIGS. 309 and 310 are diagrams showing the display mode when the non-display mode in which the remaining number of times is hidden in the probable state is set. .

FIG. 304(a) is a diagram showing the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 when the pending notice performance in this control example is started. As shown in FIG. 305(a), when the hold preview performance starts, the display area Ds1a displays the words "Decide who to feed with PUSH" on the upper left side of the sub-display area Ds1. is formed. This character can prompt the player to press the frame button 22. Also, below the reserved symbols Dh1 to Dh4, a tray Ds1b on which a smaller number of bone-in meat is placed than the number of reserved symbols is displayed. In the example of FIG. 305(a), there are four reserved balls and three pieces of bone-in meat. This tray Ds1b is displayed in a manner that it reciprocates in the left and right direction.

When the player presses the frame button 22 according to the characters displayed in the display area Ds1a, the reciprocating movement of the tray Ds1b is stopped at the timing of the press. FIG. 305(b) illustrates a case where the frame button 22 is pressed at the timing when the tray Ds1b is placed below the reserved symbols Dh2 to Dh4. In this case, the tray Ds1b is stopped below the reserved symbols Dh2 to Dh4, and the mode of the reserved symbols Dh2 to Dh4 displayed above the stopped tray Ds1b is changed to a smiling and happy mode. Thereby, the player can be made aware that the pending symbols Dh2 to Dh4 whose appearance has been changed are the targets of the current pending notice.

Note that if the player does not press the frame button 22 while the display area Ds1a is being formed, the reciprocating movement of the tray Ds1b is stopped when the display time of the display area Ds1a (for example, 2 seconds) has elapsed. Ru.

Next, as shown in FIG. 305(c), an effect of eating the bone-in meat placed on the tray is executed based on the reserved symbols in the range selected by the player's operation (the tray is stopped at the bottom). After each of the reserved symbols has eaten all the meat with bones, an effect is performed in which some or all of the reserved symbols that have eaten the meat with bones lay eggs. In FIG. 305(c), a mode in which the reserved symbol Dh2 and the reserved symbol Dh4 lay eggs Dh2a and Dh4a, respectively, is illustrated. The pending symbol that laid an egg is displayed to suggest to the player that it is a pending symbol based on a highly anticipated pending ball. More specifically, if the reserved balls indicated by the reserved symbols in the selection range include a reserved ball that causes a reach, the reserved symbol corresponding to the reserved symbol has completely eaten the bone-in meat. Later, an egg-laying effect will be performed. It should be noted that if the selection range does not include a pending symbol corresponding to a pending ball in which a reach occurs, the production of laying an egg will not be executed. As a result, it is possible to make the player aware that the reach effect will occur before the lottery of the first special symbol based on the reserved balls is executed, so it is possible to let the player play the game looking forward to the reach effect. can. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

Note that the pending preview performance is configured so that it is easier to decide to execute it when there is a reserved ball in which a reach performance occurs. Therefore, if the effect of laying an egg is not executed after the effect of eating bone-in meat, a hold effect in which a reach effect occurs on a hold symbol outside the range of the hold symbol selected by the player by operating the frame button 22 There is a high possibility that a reserved symbol corresponding to the ball is included. Therefore, if the effect of laying an egg is executed using a reserved symbol within the range selected by the player, not only can the player expect a jackpot for the reserved ball that corresponds to the reserved symbol that laid the egg, but also When the spawning performance is not executed, a novel performance can be provided in which the player can expect a jackpot for the reserved balls corresponding to the reserved symbols outside the range selected by the player. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

After the performance in which the reserved symbol lays an egg is executed, as shown in FIG. 306(a), an image prompting the user to repeatedly press the frame button 22 is displayed inside the display area Ds1a. This image allows the player to recognize that the performance will develop by repeatedly pressing the frame button 22, so that the player can be made to press the frame button 22 continuously. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's desire to participate in the pending notice performance.

When the player repeatedly presses the frame button 22 according to the instructions of the image displayed in the display area Ds1a and reaches the prescribed number of consecutive presses determined when the effect occurs, the inside of the house Ds1c displayed on the right side of the reserved symbols Dh1 to Dh4 is displayed. A production in which the eggs move is performed. Note that the eggs are moved in order from the oldest reserved symbol. FIG. 306(b) illustrates a case where only the egg Dh2a displayed above the reserved symbol Dh2 moves inside the house Ds1c. The movement to the house Ds1c suggests that there is a possibility of developing into a super reach in the variable display based on the held ball. Super reach is likely to be selected when the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot, and difficult to be selected when it is a miss, so the expectation of a jackpot is high. Therefore, the player can be made to repeatedly hit the frame button 22 more seriously. It should be noted that it is not determined whether or not a super reach will occur just by moving to the house Ds1c, and as shown in Figure 306(c), the egg Dh2a is broken and the words "Super reach confirmed" are found inside. If this happens, Super Reach is confirmed.

In this way, in the fourth control example, when the pending preview performance is executed, the range of pending symbols for which a preview is generated is determined by the player's selection. Thereby, depending on the content of the reservation notice performance, it is possible to create a sense of expectation for the reserved balls within the range selected by the player, or for the reserved balls outside the range selected by the player. Therefore, it is possible to provide an unprecedented and novel suspension notice performance.

In the fourth control example, the configuration is such that it is notified whether or not the egg pattern moves to the house Ds1c by repeatedly pressing the frame button 22, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the effect of moving to the house Ds1c may be omitted, and an effect may be performed in which a super reach is confirmed if the egg is broken by successive hits. In other words, it may be configured to notify all egg symbols at once whether or not a single successive hit by the player will lead to a super reach. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide an easier-to-understand presentation.

Next, with reference to FIG. 307 and FIG. 308, a description will be given of the press-on additional effect executed during the potential state. This press addition effect is an effect indicating that there is a possibility that by pressing (operating) the frame button 22, the remaining number of times of the potential state on the display may be added. This push-down top-up performance includes a normal mode in which the number of top-ups is relatively small (or zero) when the player operates the frame button 22, and a special mode in which the number of top-ups is relatively large when the player operates the frame button 22. It is being The special mode is when the difference between the number of remaining potential states on the display and the actual number of remaining potential states is 30 or more, or the lottery result of the second special symbol is a jackpot. This mode is easily selected in some cases. On the other hand, the normal mode is a mode that is likely to be selected when the difference between the displayed remaining number of times and the actual remaining number of times is less than 30.

First, the normal mode will be explained with reference to FIG. 307 and FIG. 308(a). FIG. 307(a) is a diagram showing an example of the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 at the time of starting execution of the press-up effect in the normal mode. As shown in FIG. 307(a), when the push-down effect starts, a button D2 with the word "push" written on it is displayed near the center of the main display area Dm, and above it there is a "push chance". ' will be displayed. Furthermore, below the button D2, a display area D3 having a horizontally elongated rectangular shape is displayed, and below the display area D3, a display area D4 in which the words "Press the button at the right time!!" is displayed. is displayed. The display area D3 includes small areas D3b and D3f marked with the characters "?", small areas D3c and D3e marked with the characters "Chance!", and small regions D3c and D3e marked with the characters "Super Hot!!!" The scroll bar D3a scrolls over each small area from the left side to the right side when viewed from the front. These display contents allow the player to easily recognize that the number of probability changes on the display may increase by operating the frame button 22 in a timely manner. Note that the number of additions is the highest when the frame button 22 is pressed at the timing when the scroll bar D3a is placed on the small area D3d, and when the frame button 22 is pressed at the timing when the scroll bar D3a is placed on the small areas D3b and D3f. If you press 22, it will be the least.

FIG. 307(b) is a diagram showing the display contents when the frame button 22 is pressed at the timing when the scroll bar D3a is placed on the small area D3d. As shown in FIG. 307(b), when the player operates (presses) the frame button 22 at the timing when the scroll bar D3a is placed on the small area D3d labeled with the words "Super Hot!!!" A number-of-additions display area D5 in which the characters "+5" are displayed is displayed, and at the same time, the characters "GET" are displayed above the number-of-additions display area D5. Further, 5 times is additionally displayed on the remaining number of times displayed in the remaining number of times display area D1. Furthermore, the words "Get 5 extra times!!" are displayed in the display area D4. These display contents make it possible for the player to easily understand the remaining number of times on the display that has been added in the current push-up effect. Note that the correspondence between the timing of pressing down the scroll bar D3a and the remaining number of times added on the display is defined in the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113.

FIG. 308(a) shows the display content when the player presses the frame button 22 at the timing when the scroll bar D3a is placed on the small area D3f marked with the character "?" with a low expectation of being added. FIG. In this case, as shown in FIG. 308(a), the button D2 is split in two, and the words "Unfortunate..." are displayed above the button D2. Furthermore, the words "Additional failure..." are displayed in the display area D4. These display contents allow the player to easily recognize that the timing of operating the frame button 22 was inappropriate. Therefore, when the push-up bonus performance is executed next time, it is possible to make the player want to press the frame button 22 at a better timing, so that the player's desire to participate in the press-down bonus performance can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 308(b), a special mode of press-on addition effect will be described. When the special mode press top-up effect is executed, a button D2 that is larger than the one displayed in the normal mode is displayed near the center of the screen in the main display area Dm, and a message "Super top-up chance" is displayed above the button D2. ' will be displayed. This allows the player to understand that a special performance that is visually different from the normal mode has started.

Further, in each of the small areas D3b to D3h of the display area D3, the number of times (5 to 30 times) that will be displayed additionally when the frame button 22 is pressed at the timing when the scroll bar D3a is arranged is displayed. At the same time, the words "Decide the number of additions by yourself!!" are displayed in the display area D4. With these, the player can be made aware that the timing at which the player operates the frame button 22 affects the number of additions (that is, it is not a so-called winning race). Therefore, since the player can be made to press the frame button 22 more actively, it is possible to improve the player's desire to participate in the push-up bonus performance.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 309 and 310, the non-display mode during the potential state will be described. As mentioned above, this non-display mode may be set when the remaining number of potential states on the display reaches 0, and it is unclear when the potential state will end, making it difficult for players to This is a performance designed to create a sense of tension.

As shown in FIG. 309(a), when the remaining number of potential states displayed in the remaining number display area D1 reaches 0, the rabbit-like character 811 falls to the ground, similar to the first control example. is set to Furthermore, in this control example, the words "End...?" are displayed in the display area 812 displayed above the character 811. In other words, the display content is set as if it is not yet known whether or not the potential state will end.

If the remaining number of actual potential states is not 0, the display mode shifts to the non-display mode shown in FIG. 309(b). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 309(b), an effect is performed in which a rock 813 approaches from behind a character 811 imitating a rabbit, and a message "Pinch!" is displayed below the main display area Dm. A display area appears in which multiple characters such as "!" are displayed. Furthermore, the characters "???" are displayed inside the remaining number of times display area D1 instead of a guideline for the number of remaining potential states. These displays allow the user to recognize that although the potential state has not yet ended, it is unclear when it will end. Therefore, the player can play the game with a sense of tension because of the anxiety that the end of the potential state may be near.

FIG. 310(a) is a diagram showing display contents when the remaining number of actual potential states becomes 0 and the potential state ends in the non-display mode. As shown in FIG. 310(a), when the potential state ends with the non-display mode set (when the value of the probability change counter 203k becomes 0), an effect in which the character 811 is crushed by the rock 813 is performed. be exposed. In the display area 812 above the crushed character 811, the words "End!!" are displayed. These displays allow the player to clearly understand that the potential state has ended.

Further, FIG. 310(b) is a diagram showing the display mode (pinch escape effect) when the non-display mode is set and the remaining number of potential states is 5 or less and a jackpot is achieved. . If the second special symbol hits the jackpot just before the end of the potential state, it is advantageous for the player because the potential state is basically set 120 times after the jackpot. In this case, as shown in FIG. 310(b), an effect is performed in which the character 811 jumps over a rock 813 approaching from behind. Furthermore, the words "Escape from the pinch!!" are displayed on the left side of the rock 813, and the display in the remaining number of times display area D1 is updated to "100 times remaining." This pinch escape performance is performed only when a jackpot is achieved just before the end of the potential state (within 5 remaining potential states), so players who have confirmed this pinch escape performance are required to Just before the end of the state, it becomes a jackpot, and it can be recognized that a new potential state has been added. Therefore, it is possible to make the player happy that he or she has hit the jackpot at the right time, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

<Electrical configuration in the fourth control example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 311 to 315. First, FIG. 311(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 in this fourth control example. As shown in FIG. 311(a), in addition to the configuration of the ROM 222 in the first control example, the ROM 222 in the fourth control example includes an additional effect selection table 222da, a press period table 222db, and a pending notice determination table 222dc. is provided.

The additional effect selection table 222da is a data table that is referred to in order to determine whether or not to execute the press additional effect in the potential state and the mode of the press additional effect to be executed (normal mode or special mode). be. The details of this additional effect selection table 222da will be explained with reference to FIGS. 312 and 313.

FIG. 312(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the additional effect selection table 222da. As shown in FIG. 312(a), the additional performance selection table 222da indicates that the lottery result of the special symbol is a small hit, and the player's degree of participation in the press-down additional performance is normal (game with the additional performance within the past 5 times). The participation level normal table 222da1 is referred to when the player is operating the frame button 22), and the lottery result of the special symbol is a small hit, and the player's participation level in the push-up add-on effect is low (in the past 5 A low participation level table 222da2 is referenced when the player does not operate the frame button 22 during additional production for more than one time, and a jackpot table 222da3 is referenced when a special symbol lottery results in a jackpot. is provided.

First, details of the normal participation level table 222da1 will be explained with reference to FIG. 312(b). FIG. 312(b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the regular participation level table 222da1. As shown in FIG. 312(b), the participation level normal table 222da1 changes the value of the performance counter 223h for each difference between the remaining number of potential states on the display and the remaining number of actual potential states. The range and the type (aspect) of the press-on addition effect are defined in association with each other.

As shown in FIG. 312(b), if the difference between the remaining number of potential states on the display and the remaining number of actual potential states is within the range of 5 to 29, the value of the production counter 223h "No additional effects" is defined in association with the range of "0 to 95". On the other hand, a "normal mode" is defined in association with a range in which the value of the performance counter 223h is "96 to 99." For this reason, if a special symbol lottery results in a small hit and the normal participation level table 222da1 is referred to, "no additional effect" will be selected 96% (96/100) of the time, so press the additional effect. is not executed. In addition, the press-on addition effect in the normal mode is executed at a rate of 4% (4/100). Note that not selecting the special mode when the difference between the remaining number of times in the displayed potential state and the remaining number of times in the actual potential state is within the range of 5 to 29 times is due to the difference between the remaining number of times on the display and the actual number of times in the potential state. This is to prevent an additional display that exceeds the difference from the remaining number of times.

In addition, if the difference between the remaining number of potential states on the display and the actual number of remaining potential states is 30 or more, the value of the performance counter 223h is "additional performance" for the range of "0 to 90". "None" is defined in association. On the other hand, when the value of the production counter 223h is in the range of "91 to 97", a "normal mode" is defined in association with the range, and when the value of the production counter 223h is in the range of "98, 99", a "special mode" is defined. They are defined in correspondence. For this reason, when a special symbol lottery results in a small hit and the regular participation level table 222da1 is referred to, "no additional effect" is selected at a rate of 91% (91/100), so press the additional effect. is not executed. Further, the press additional effect in the normal mode is executed at a rate of 7% (7/100), and the press additional effect in the special mode is executed at a rate of 2% (2/100).

In this way, if the difference between the displayed number of remaining times and the actual remaining number of times is large (if it is 30 or more), the probability of occurrence of the additional press effect increases, so the difference is prevented from becoming too large. can do.

Next, details of the low participation level table 222da2 will be described with reference to FIG. 313(a). FIG. 313(a) is a diagram showing the stipulated contents of this low participation level table 222da2. As shown in FIG. 313(a), if the difference between the remaining number of times in the displayed potential state and the remaining number of times in the actual potential state is within the range of 5 to 29 times, the value of the production counter 223h "No additional effect" is defined in association with the range of "0 to 90". On the other hand, a "normal mode" is defined in association with a range in which the value of the performance counter 223h is "91 to 99". For this reason, when a special symbol lottery results in a small hit and the normal participation level table 222da1 is referred to, "no additional effect" is selected at a rate of 91% (91/100), so press the additional effect. is not executed. In addition, the press-on addition effect in the normal mode is executed at a rate of 9% (9/100). That is, when the player's degree of participation in the press-up bonus performance is low, the frequency of the press-down bonus performance is increased (from 4% to 9%). Thereby, it is possible to improve the player's desire to participate in the push-up bonus performance.

In addition, if the difference between the remaining number of potential states on the display and the actual number of remaining potential states is 30 or more, the value of the performance counter 223h is "additional performance" for the range of "0 to 80". ``None'' is associated and specified. On the other hand, when the value of the production counter 223h is in the range of "81 to 94", a "normal mode" is defined in association with the range, and when the value of the production counter 223h is in the range of "95 to 99", a "special mode" is defined. They are defined in correspondence. For this reason, when a special symbol lottery results in a small hit and the normal participation level table 222da1 is referred to, "no additional effect" is selected at a rate of 81% (81/100), so press the additional effect. is not executed. Furthermore, the press-on additional effect in the normal mode is executed at a rate of 14% (14/100), and the press-on additional effect in the special mode is executed at a rate of 5% (5/100). In other words, even if the difference between the remaining number of times the displayed potential state is active and the actual remaining number of times the potential state is 30 times or more, the frequency of the press-down addition effect is increased (from 9% to 19%). . Thereby, it is possible to improve the player's desire to participate in the push-up bonus performance.

Next, the jackpot table 222da3 will be explained with reference to FIG. 313(b). As described above, this jackpot table 222da3 is a table that is referred to when a jackpot is achieved in a special symbol lottery during a potential state. As shown in FIG. 313(b), if the difference between the remaining number of times of the displayed potential state and the remaining number of times of the actual potential state is within the range of 5 to 29 times, the value of the production counter 223h A "normal mode" is defined in association with a range of "0 to 99". That is, the press-on addition effect in the normal mode is always executed.

In addition, if the difference between the remaining number of potential states on the display and the actual number of remaining potential states is 30 or more, the value of the production counter 223h is "normal mode" for the range of "0 to 49". ” are defined in association with each other, and a “special aspect” is defined in association with the value of the performance counter 223h in the range of “50 to 99”. In other words, the press-on addition effect in the normal mode or the special mode is always executed. In this way, in the probability state, if the difference between the remaining number of times on the display and the actual remaining number of times is 5 or more and the jackpot is achieved, the push-up bonus performance is always executed. By configuring in this way, when a push-up bonus effect occurs, it is possible to make the player expect a jackpot. In particular, the selection rate of the special mode additional effects is significantly increased compared to the normal expectation level table 222da1 and the low expectation level table 222da2. Therefore, when a special press-down bonus effect occurs, it is possible to make the player expect a stronger jackpot. Therefore, it is possible to make the player play the game while paying attention to the aspect of the press-up effect, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

In addition, in this fourth control example, if the difference between the remaining number of times on the display and the actual remaining number of times is 5 or more and the second special symbol hits the jackpot, the press-down bonus effect is always set. However, it is not limited to this. For example, the ratio at which the press-down additional effect is set may be lowered, and the configuration may be such that the press-down additional effect is set at a rate of 80%. With this configuration, it is possible to easily create a difference between the remaining number of times on the display and the actual remaining number of times, so it is possible to more effectively execute the press-up effect.

Returning to FIG. 311, the explanation will be continued. The press period table 222db is a data table that defines the number of times of additional display according to the timing of pressing the frame button 22 during execution of the press additional effect. The details of this press period table 222db will be explained with reference to FIG. 313(c) and FIG. 314.

First, FIG. 313(c) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the press period table 222db. As shown in FIG. 313(c), the press period table 222db includes a normal table 222db1 that is referred to when the press additional effect of the normal mode is set, and a normal table 222db1 that is referred to when the press additional effect of the special mode is set. A special table 222db2 is included. When the execution of the press additional effect is determined, a table corresponding to the determined press additional effect is read out and stored in a press period storage area 223da of the RAM 223, which will be described later. When the press of the frame button 22 is detected during the execution of the press add-on effect, the table stored in the press period storage area 223da is referred to and the number of add-on is determined.

First, details of the normal table 222db1 will be described with reference to FIG. 314(a). FIG. 314(a) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the normal table 222db1. As shown in FIG. 314(a), in the normal table 222db1, the number of times to be added to the remaining number of times display area D1 (additional value) is defined in association with the elapsed time after the start of the press-down addition effect. ing. Note that the elapsed time from the start of the performance is counted by the press period timer 223db of the RAM 223.

As shown in FIG. 314(a), the range of elapsed time from 0 to 699 milliseconds is associated with "0" as an additional value. The display mode of the third symbol display device 81 during this period (in the range of 0 to 699 milliseconds from the start of the push-up effect) is such that the scroll bar D3a moves over the small area D3b marked with the character "?" It becomes a mode. Furthermore, an additional value of "3" is associated with the range of elapsed time from 700 milliseconds to 999 milliseconds. The display mode of the third symbol display device 81 during this period (in the range of 700 to 999 milliseconds from the start of the push-up effect) is such that the scroll bar D3a moves over the small area D3c marked with the words "Chance!" This will be the mode of doing so. Furthermore, an additional value of "5" is associated with the range of elapsed time from 1000 milliseconds to 1499 milliseconds. The display mode of the third symbol display device 81 during this period (in the range of 1000 to 1499 milliseconds from the start of the push-up effect) is such that the scroll bar D3a changes to a small area D3d with the words "Super Hot!!!" It will move on top.

Similarly, "2" is associated with the elapsed time range of 1500 to 1799 milliseconds (period in which the scroll bar D3a overlaps the small area D3e), and "2" is associated with the elapsed time range of 1800 to 2500 milliseconds. "0" is associated with the additional value (the period during which the scroll bar D3a overlaps the small area D3f).

In this way, the normal table 222db1 defines the correspondence between the elapsed time and the additional value according to the presentation mode (time-measured change in the position of the scroll bar D3a) of the press-down additional presentation in the normal mode. Thereby, it is possible to additionally display the number of times according to the display mode (position of the scroll bar D3a) at the time when the player presses the frame button 22.

Next, details of the special table 222db2 will be described with reference to FIG. 314(b). FIG. 314(b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the normal table 222db2.

As shown in FIG. 314(b), an additional value of "5" is associated with the elapsed time range of 0 to 799 milliseconds (the period during which the scroll bar D3a overlaps the small area D3b), and the elapsed time is 800 milliseconds. 999 milliseconds (period in which the scroll bar D3a overlaps the small area D3c) is associated with "10" as an additional value, and the elapsed time is in the range 1000 to 1099 milliseconds (the period in which the scroll bar D3a overlaps the small area D3c). "20" is associated with the additional value (period in which the scroll bar D3a overlaps with the small area D3e), and "10" is associated with the elapsed time range of 1100 to 1299 milliseconds (the period in which the scroll bar D3a overlaps the small area D3e). "5" is associated with the elapsed time range of 1300 to 1999 milliseconds (period in which the scroll bar D3a overlaps the small area D3f), and "5" is associated with the elapsed time range of 2000 to 2049 milliseconds. (the period when the scroll bar D3a overlaps the small area D3g) is associated with "30" as an additional value, and the elapsed time in the range of 2050 to 2500 milliseconds (the period when the scroll bar D3a overlaps the small area D3h) , "5" is associated as an additional value.

With this special table 222db2, the additional number displayed in the small area through which the scroll bar D3a is passing can be accurately added and displayed in the remaining number display area D1 at the timing when the frame button 22 is pressed.

Returning to FIG. 311(a), the explanation will be continued. The pending notice determination table 222dc is a table that is referred to in order to determine whether or not to execute the pending notice effect. As mentioned above, there is a possibility that the reservation notice performance will be executed when the number of reserved balls with the first special symbol increases in the normal gaming state or the variable probability state, and there is a highly anticipated lottery result among the reserved balls. This is a performance performed to suggest the existence of The details of this suspension notice determination table 222dc will be explained with reference to FIG. 315.

FIG. 315 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the pending notice determination table 222dc. As shown in FIG. 315, the reservation notice determination table 222dc includes a table for when there is a reach, which is referred to when there is a reserved ball in which a reach effect occurs among the reserved balls, and a table for when a reach effect occurs among the held balls. It consists of a table for when there is no reach, which is referred to when there are no reserved balls to be played. Each table is associated with the value of the performance counter 223h, which determines the execution of the reservation notice performance, for each number of reserved balls.

As shown in FIG. 315, in the ready-to-reach table, the value of the performance counter 223h is not defined for the number of reserved balls in the range of 0 to 2. That is, when the number of balls on hold is 2 or less, the hold preview performance is not set. On the other hand, when the number of balls on hold is 3, "0 to 9" is associated as the range of the value of the production counter 223h, and when the number of balls on hold is 4, the range of the value of the production counter 223h is associated with "0 to 15" are associated. That is, the configuration is such that the larger the number of balls on hold, the easier it is to execute the hold preview effect. Therefore, the player can be encouraged to actively shoot balls in an attempt to accumulate more reserved balls, thereby increasing the player's desire to participate.

Further, as shown in FIG. 315, even in the no-reach table, the value of the performance counter 223h is not defined in the range of 0 to 2 pending pitches. On the other hand, when the number of balls held is 3, "0" is associated with the value of the production counter 223h, and when the number of balls held is 4, the range of the value of the production counter 223h is "0, 1". ” is associated. That is, the table for when there is no reach has fewer random values (counter values) for determining execution of the pending notice performance compared to the table for when there is reach. Therefore, if there is a held ball on which a reach effect is performed among the held balls, it becomes easier for the held notice effect to be executed, so that when the held advance notice effect is started, it develops into a reach effect for the player. It can give you strong expectations.

Next, the configuration of the RAM 223 provided in the audio lamp control device 113 in the fourth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 311(b). FIG. 311(b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223. It is. The RAM 223 in the fourth control example differs from the configuration of the RAM 223 in the first control example in that a press period storage area 223da, a press period timer 223db, and a continuous hit counter 223dc are added.

The press-down period storage area 223da is a storage area for storing the press-down period corresponding to the determined type of press-down effect when the execution of the press-down effect is determined. That is, when it is decided to start the push-up effect, the table (normal table 222db1 or special table 222db2) read from the push-down period table 222db is stored (see S4392 in FIG. 321). When the press of the frame button 22 is detected during the execution of the press additional effect, the additional value is determined based on the table stored in the press period storage area 223da and the timer value of the press period timer 223db, which will be described later. , the remaining number of times displayed in the remaining number of times display area D1 is updated.

The press period timer 223db is a timer that measures the time that has elapsed since the start of the press additional effect. Based on the timer value of the press period timer 223db and the table stored in the press period storage area 223da, an additional value in the press additional effect is determined.

The continuous hit counter 223dc is set to a predetermined upper limit value for each performance when a performance that prompts the player to repeatedly hit the frame button 22 during a pending preview performance (see FIG. 306(a)) is generated. is a counter whose value is decremented by 1 each time the frame button 22 is operated (see S5703 in FIG. 318). When the value of this repeated-hit counter 223dc becomes 0 during execution of the performance that encourages repeated hits of the frame button 22, the performance progresses to the next stage (the egg pattern moves inside the house Ds1c).

The pressed flag 223dd is a flag indicating whether or not the player has already operated (pressed) the frame button 22 in the first press additional effect. If this pressed flag 223dd is on, it means that the operation (press) of the frame button 22 has been detected in the 1st press additional effect, and if it is off, the operation (press) of the frame button 22 is detected. This means that it has not been detected. When an operation (press) of the frame button 22 is detected during execution of the press addition effect, this pressed flag 223dd is referenced, and only when the state is off, the press stored in the press period table storage area 223da is detected. The additional value corresponding to the period is read out and additionally displayed in the remaining count display area D1 (see S5605 in FIG. 317). That is, even if the player operates (presses) the frame button 22 multiple times in one top-up performance, only the top-up for the first operation (press) is executed. Further, when the press additional effect is completed while the press completed flag 223dd is off, 1 is added to the value of a participation degree counter 223df, which will be described later. That is, the number of times the player did not participate in the push-up performance (press the frame button 22) is counted by the participation level counter 223df. This control example is configured to vary the execution frequency of the press-on additional effect according to the count value of the participation degree counter 223df.

The pending notice flag 223de is a flag indicating whether or not the pending notice performance (see FIGS. 305 and 306) is being executed. Indicates that the performance is not in progress. This pending notice flag 223de is set to ON when it is decided to execute the pending notice performance (see S5808 in FIG. 322), and is set to OFF when the pending notice performance ends (see S5835 in FIG. 325). While this pending notice flag 223de is on, execution of a new pending notice performance is avoided. Thereby, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the repeated execution of pending notices, which confuses the players.

The participation degree counter 223df is a counter that indicates the degree of participation of the player with respect to the press-up bonus effect. This participation degree counter 223df is incremented by 1 when the press additional effect ends without detecting any operation of the frame button 22 (see S5509 in FIG. 316). When an operation is detected, the value is reset to 0 (see S5609 in FIG. 317). In other words, the value of the participation level counter 223df counts the number of consecutive times that the player did not press the frame button 22 (did not participate) in the press-add effect. In this control example, the frequency of execution of the press-up bonus effect is varied according to the count value of the participation level counter 223df. That is, if the count value of the participation level counter 223df is greater than 5 (unless the player has participated in the press-up bonus effects six or more times in a row), the determination ratio of the press-up bonus effects is increased. This increases the chances of prompting the player to operate (press) the frame button 22, thereby increasing the player's desire to participate in the push-up bonus performance.

The non-display setting flag 223dg is a flag indicating whether the non-display mode (see FIG. 309(b)) is set as the display mode during the potential state. If the non-display setting flag 223dg is on, it indicates that the non-display mode is set, and if it is off, it indicates that the non-display mode is not set. This non-display setting flag 223dg is set to ON when the non-display mode is set (see S5896 in FIG. 324), and when an additional effect (press additional effect, special additional effect) is set (see FIG. 321). S4395, see S5860 in FIG. 323), and is set to OFF when the potential state ends during the non-display mode (see S5858 in FIG. 323).

<About the control process of the audio lamp control device in the fourth control example>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fourth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 316 to 325. First, with reference to FIG. 316, the frame button input monitoring/presentation processing (S4107) executed in the main processing of the audio lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 236) will be described. FIG. 316 is a flowchart showing this frame button input monitoring/presentation processing (S4107).

When this frame button input monitoring/production process (see FIG. 316) is started, first, it is determined whether or not the press of the frame button 22 is detected (S5501), and if it is determined that the press of the frame button 22 is detected (S5501: Yes), and then it is determined whether or not the press additional effect is being executed (S5502).

In the process of S5502, if it is determined that the press additional effect is being executed (S5502: Yes), the additional value corresponding to the operation timing of the frame button 22 in the press additional effect is displayed in addition to the remaining number of times display area D1. A pressing process during an additional effect is executed to perform the additional effect (S5503), and the present process ends. The details of this pressing process during additional presentation (S5503) will be described later with reference to FIG. 317.

On the other hand, in the process of S5502, if it is determined that the push-up additional effect is not being executed (S5502: No), then it is determined whether or not the pending preview effect is being executed (S5504). In the process of S5504, if it is determined that the pending preview presentation is in progress (S5504: Yes), a press during pending notice processing is executed to execute the presentation corresponding to the operation of the frame button 22 in the pending notification presentation ( S5505), this process ends. Details of this pressing process during pending notice (S5505) will be described later with reference to FIG. 318. Further, in the process of S5504, if it is determined that the pending preview performance is not being executed (S5504: No), other processes according to the press timing are executed (S5506), and this process ends. Note that other pressing timings are, for example, timings at which the rear image can be changed. In the fourth control example, as described above, a plurality of back images are defined, and the back type is switched each time the player operates the frame button 22 in the fluctuation stop state. Thereby, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the game from becoming monotonous.

In addition, in the process of S5501, if it is determined that the press of the frame button 22 is not detected (S5501: No), then it is determined whether it is the end timing of the press additional effect (S5507), and the press If it is determined that it is the end timing of the additional effect (S5507: Yes), then it is determined whether the pressed flag 223dd is on (S5508). If it is determined that the pressed flag 223dd is off (S5508: No), the press additional effect has ended without the player operating (pressing) the frame button 22 in the press additional effect (the player This means that the user is not participating in the current push-up effect, so 1 is added to the value of the participation degree counter 223df to update it (S5509), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S5507, if it is determined that it is not the end timing of the press additional effect (S5507: No), or in the process of S5508, if it is determined that the pressed flag 223dd is on (S5508: Yes), S5509 This process ends without executing the process.

By executing these processes of S5507 to S5509, it is possible to accumulate the degree of participation of the player in the push-up additional effects over a plurality of additional effects. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately set the press-up bonus effect according to the degree of participation of the player.

Next, with reference to FIG. 317, details of the pressing process during additional presentation (S5503) will be explained. As described above, this push-down process during additional performance (S5503) is a process for displaying an additional value corresponding to the operation timing of the frame button 22 in the remaining number of times display area D1.

When this pressing process during additional production (S5503) is started, first, it is determined whether or not the pressed flag 223dd is on (S5601), and if it is determined that it is on (S5601: Yes), Since the additional value has already been displayed in the remaining count display area D1 in the press additional effect and there is no need to execute a new additional value, this process is ended as is.

On the other hand, in the process of S5601, if it is determined that the pressed flag 223dd is off (S5601: Yes), then the pressed period set in the pressed period table storage area is read out (S5602), and the pressed period is read out. Among the pressed periods, an additional value corresponding to the value of the pressed period timer 223db is read out (S5603). Next, it is determined whether the read-out additional value is 0 (S5604), and if it is not 0 (S5604), an effect is set to display the read-out additional value in the remaining count display area D1 (S5605).

After the process of S5605, the additional value read in the process of S5603 is added to the number of times stored in the performance probability variation number area 223p to update (S5606), and the process moves to S5608. On the other hand, in the process of S5604, if it is determined that the readout value is 0 (S5604: Yes), an add-on failure effect (see FIG. 308(a)) is set to notify that the add-on has failed (S5607 ), the process moves to S5608.

In the process of S5608 executed after the process of S5606 or S5607 is completed, the pressed flag 223dd is set to on (S5608), the value of the participation level counter 223df is reset to 0 (S5609), and the main process is completed. end. By executing this press-down process during additional effects (see FIG. 317), when a press-down additional effect occurs, the additional value of the number of times corresponding to the position where the scroll bar D3a is displayed is displayed in the remaining number of times display area D1. It can be displayed in addition to the number of times. Therefore, it is possible to provide a presentation that does not make the user feel uncomfortable.

Next, details of the hold notice press process (S5505) will be described with reference to FIG. 318. As described above, this pending notice pressing process (S5505) is a process for executing the performance corresponding to the operation of the frame button 22 in the pending notice performance. In this press processing during pending notice (S5505), first, it is determined whether it is the press period in the pending notice presentation (see FIG. 305(a)) (S5701), and if it is not the press period (S5701: No), then, It is determined whether it is the continuous hit period (see FIG. 306(a)) (S5702).

In the process of S5702, if it is determined that it is not the continuous hitting period (S5702: No), this process is directly ended. On the other hand, in the process of S5702, if it is determined that the continuous hit period is in progress (S5702: Yes), the value of the continuous hit counter 223dc is updated by subtracting 1 (S5703), and whether the updated counter value is 0 or not. (S5704). If it is determined that the updated counter value has become 0 (S5704: Yes), a development effect (see FIG. 306(b)) in which the egg pattern moves to the house Ds1c is set (S5705), and the book is displayed. Finish the process. On the other hand, in the process of S5704, if it is determined that the value of the updated continuous hit counter 223dc is greater than or equal to 1 (S5704: No), the process of S5705 is skipped and the process is directly ended.

In addition, in the process of S5701, if it is determined that the current time is the pressing period (S5701), first, at the pressing timing of the frame button 22, the tray Ds1b specified on the third symbol display device 81 (the tray Ds1b is displayed directly below) The winning information corresponding to the pending symbol (which has been held) is read out from the winning information storage area 223a (S5706). Next, it is determined whether the winning information within the range specified by pressing the frame button 22 includes winning information that causes a reach effect (S5707). It should be noted that the reach effect refers to any one of a normal reach that misses, a super reach that misses A and B, a normal reach that hits, and a super reach that hits A to C.

In the process of S5707, if it is determined that winning information that causes a reach effect is included within the specified range (S5707: Yes), then the reserved symbol corresponding to the winning information that causes a reach effect is An effect is set in which an egg symbol is displayed (the pending symbol lays an egg) (S5708). Then, a continuous press period for executing a continuous press effect that encourages repeated presses of the frame button 22 is set (S5709), a value corresponding to the value of the continuous press counter 223dc is set (S5710), and this processing is ended.

In the process of S5707, if it is determined that the winning information for which a reach effect occurs is not included within the specified range (S5707: No), the pending notice flag 223de is set to indicate the end of the pending notice effect. It is set to off (S5711), and this processing ends.

By executing this pressing process during pending preview (see FIG. 318), when pressing of the frame button 22 is detected during a pending preview performance, an appropriate performance mode can be set according to the pressing timing. Furthermore, as described above, in this control example, the range of pending symbols for which the pending notice performance is to be executed is configured to be selectable by the player's operation. As a result, if a preview (display of an egg symbol) is not given for a pending symbol within the selection range, it is possible to notify the player that there is a highly anticipated pending symbol among the pending symbols outside the player's selection range. It can make you look forward to it. Therefore, even if the reservation notice performance does not occur, it is possible to provide an innovative performance that makes the player expect a big hit with the reserved ball.

Next, with reference to FIG. 319, details of command determination processing 4 executed in place of the command determination processing in the first control example (see FIG. 238) will be described. Of the command determination process 4 in the fourth control example (see FIG. 319), each process of S4301 to S4306, S4309 to S4311, S4313 to S4315, and S4319 is the command determination process in the first control example (see FIG. 238). ) The same processes as S4301 to S4306, S4309 to S4311 to S4315, and S4319 are executed.

In addition, in the command determination process 4 (see FIG. 319) in the fourth control example, if it is determined that the special symbol 2 variation pattern command has been received in the process of S4306 (S4303: Yes), the variation of the second special symbol starts. The special figure 2 fluctuation start process for setting is executed (S4361), and this process is ended. The details of this special figure 2 variation start process (S4361) will be described later with reference to FIG. 320. In addition, in the command determination process 4 (see FIG. 319) in the fourth control example, if it is determined that a winning command has been received in the process of S4311 (S4311: Yes), based on the winning information notified by the winning command. A pending notice setting process is executed to determine whether a pending notice is to be executed (S4362), and this process ends. Details of this hold notice setting process (S4362) will be described later with reference to FIG. 322.

In addition, in the process of S4315, if it is determined that neither the special chart 1 standby command nor the special chart 2 standby command has been received (S4315: No), it is determined whether the remaining probability variable number command has been received (S4363 ), if the residual probability variation number command is received (S4363), the residual probability variation number command processing is executed to execute the process according to the number of times notified by the residual probability variation number command (S4364), and this process is executed. finish. Details of this remaining probability variation number command processing (S4364) will be described later with reference to FIG. 324.

Furthermore, in the process of S4363, if it is determined that the remaining probability variation number command has not been received (S4363: No), then it is determined whether at least one of the special map 1 confirmation command or the special map 2 confirmation command has been received. (S4364), and if at least one of the special pattern 1 confirmation command or the special pattern 2 confirmation command is received (S4364: Yes), the confirmation display of the third symbol corresponding to the special symbol according to the command is performed. A confirmation command process for setting is executed (S4364), and this process ends. Details of this confirmed command processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 325.

Next, details of the special figure 2 variation start process (S4361) will be described with reference to FIG. 320. FIG. 320 is a flowchart showing details of the special figure 2 fluctuation start process. When this special figure 2 variation start process (see Figure 320) is started, the special figure 2 variation start flag 223e is first set to ON (S4371), and then the special figure 2 variation start flag 223e is set to ON (S4371), and then the special figure 2 variation start flag 223e is set to on (S4371). A fluctuation pattern is extracted (S4372).

When the process of S4372 is completed, it is then determined whether the current gaming state is a definite state (S4373), and if it is a definite state (S4373: Yes), it is determined whether or not to set a press-up bonus effect. The additional effect setting process (S4374) for performing the above is executed (S4374), and the process moves to S4376. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4373 that the current gaming state is not a potential state (S4373: No), the display mode corresponding to the variation pattern extracted in the processing of S4372 is specified from the variation pattern selection table 222a. , the process moves to S4376. In the process of S4376, a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the selected variation pattern is set (S4376), and the process ends.

Next, details of the additional effect setting process (S4374) will be explained with reference to FIG. 321. As described above, this press-down additional effect setting process (S4374) is a process for determining execution of the press-down additional effect in the potential state.

When the additional effect setting process (see FIG. 321) is started, first, it is determined whether the current lottery of the second special symbol is a lottery result that is a small win stop type (S4381), and is not a small win stop type. If it is determined that (S4381: No), then the time when the special figure 2 variation pattern command is received is when the non-display mode (see Figure 309(b)) is being set and the remaining number of probability variations is 5 or less. It is determined whether it is (S4382). In the process of S4382, if the non-display mode is not being set or if the remaining probability variation count is 6 or more (S4382: No), the process moves to S4391.

On the other hand, in the process of S4382, if it is determined that the non-display mode is set and the remaining number of probability variations is 5 or less (S4382: Yes), then the lottery of the second special symbol this time is a jackpot E~ It is determined whether the lottery result is a stop type of G (S4383), and if it is determined that it is not one of the jackpots E to G (S4383: No), the process moves to S4391. On the other hand, in the process of S4383, if it is determined that the jackpot is any one of the jackpots E to G (S4383: Yes), the jackpot effect selection table 222da is used as a table for determining the setting of the press-down add-on effect. The table 222da3 is read (S4384). Next, the difference between 120, which is the number of chances given after a jackpot, and the number stored in the production probability variable number storage area 223p is calculated (S4385), and the process moves to S4391.

In addition, in the process of S4381, if it is determined that the current stop type is a small hit (S4381: Yes), then it is determined whether the value of the participation degree counter 223df is larger than 5 (S4386), If the value of the participation degree counter 223df is greater than 5 (S4386: Yes), the participation degree normal table 222da1 is read from the additional effect selection table 222da as a table for determining the setting of the press additional effect (S4387). Next, the difference between the remaining number of actual potential states stored in the remaining probability variation number area 223o and the remaining number of potential states on the display stored in the production probability variation number area 223p is calculated, and the process is performed in S4391. transition to.

On the other hand, in the process of S4386, if it is determined that the value of the participation degree counter 223df is less than 5 (S4386: No), the low participation degree table 222da1 is read from the additional effect selection table 222da (S4387). Next, the difference between the remaining number of actual potential states stored in the remaining probability variation number area 223o and the remaining number of potential states on the display stored in the production probability variation number area 223p is calculated, and the process is performed in S4391. transition to.

In the process of S4391 executed after any one of S4385, S4388, and S4391 is completed, the difference calculated in any one of S4385, S4388, and S4391, and the difference calculated in any one of S4384, S4387, and S4388 are Based on the read table, the mode of press-down additional effects (any of no additional effects, normal mode, or special mode) is specified (S4391), and the process moves to S4392.

In the process of S4392, it is determined whether or not it has been decided to execute the press-down additional effect (S4392), and if it has been decided to execute the press-down additional effect (S4392: Yes), the mode of the press-down additional effect determined this time is determined. The corresponding press period is read from the press period table 222db (see FIGS. 314(a) and 314(b)) and set in the press period storage area 223da (S4393). The press period set here will be referenced when the player's operation (press) on the frame button 22 is detected during the execution of the press add effect that has been decided to be executed this time, and the press period will be referred to when the player's operation (press) on the frame button 22 is detected during the execution of the press add effect that has been decided to be executed this time. The value is displayed in addition to the remaining count display area D1. As a result, the player can actively operate (press) the frame button 22 in the hope that the number of remaining potential states on the display will be added, so that Motivation to participate can be improved. After the process of S4393, the non-display setting flag 223dg is set to OFF (S4394), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S4392, if it is determined that the execution of the press additional effect has not been determined (S4392: No), the effect mode corresponding to the variation pattern extracted from the variation pattern command is specified from the variation pattern selection table 222a. (S4395), this process ends. By executing this add-on performance setting process, it is possible to select an appropriate form of press-down add-on performance according to the player's participation status in past press-up add-on performances, the lottery result of the second special symbol, etc.

In addition, in this control example, in the potential state, the push-down additional effect is set only when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a small hit or a jackpot E to G, but the present invention is not limited to this. . For example, it may be configured such that even if the lottery result of the special symbol is a loss, the push-up bonus performance can be set. Thereby, the degree of freedom in production can be increased.

Next, details of the hold notice setting process (S4362) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 322. As described above, this pending notice setting process (S4362) is a process for determining whether to execute a pending notice based on the winning information notified by the winning command. When this pending notice setting process (S4362) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the gaming state is in a potential state (S5801), and if it is determined that the gaming state is in a potential state (S5801), Each process of S5802 to S5809 for setting a preview effect is skipped, and the present process is directly ended. Note that the reason why the pending notice performance is not executed in the potential state is because the main variation in the potential state is the variable display of two special symbols that cannot be stored in a pending state. Therefore, in the potential state, the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is 0 in most cases, and there is no need to determine whether or not to execute a reservation notice. Therefore, by skipping the execution determination itself of the pending notice, it is possible to reduce the processing load on the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the potential state.

On the other hand, in the process of S5801, if it is determined that the current gaming state is not a potential state (normal state or variable probability state) (S5801: No), then whether the pending notice flag 223de is on or not (S5802), and if it is determined that the pending notice flag 223de is on (the pending notice performance is already being executed) (S5802). :Yes), this process ends immediately. On the other hand, if it is determined that the pending notice flag 223de is off in the process of S5802 (S5802: No), then the winning information of the first special symbol is read from the winning information storage area 223a (S5803), It is determined whether the read winning information includes winning information corresponding to a variation pattern in which a reach effect occurs (S5804).

In the process of S5804, if it is determined that winning information corresponding to the fluctuation pattern in which a reach effect occurs is included (S5804: Yes), a table for when there is a reach effect is used as a table for determining whether to execute a pending notice effect. The table is read from the pending notice determination table 222dc (see FIG. 315) to determine whether the pending notice is to be executed, and the process proceeds to S5807. On the other hand, in the process of S5804, if it is determined that the winning information corresponding to the fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect occurs is not included (S5804: No), the no reach effect is used as a table for determining the execution of the pending notice effect. The time table is read from the pending notice determination table 222dc to determine whether the pending notice is to be executed, and the process proceeds to S5807.

In the process of S5807 that is executed after the process of S5805 or S5806, it is determined whether or not the execution of the pending notice effect has been determined in the process of S5805 or S5806 (S5807), and it is determined that the execution of the pending notice effect has been decided. If so (S5807: Yes), the pending notice flag 223de is set to ON (S5808). Next, an effect (see FIG. 305(a)) that prompts the user to press the frame button 22 is set (S5809), and this process ends.

By executing this pending notice setting process, it is possible to set the pending notice effect at an appropriate ratio according to the number of pending balls and the contents of each pending ball.

Next, with reference to FIG. 323, details of the remaining probability variation number command processing (S4364) will be explained. As described above, this remaining probability variation number command process (S4364) is a process for executing control according to the probability variation number notified by the remaining probability variation number command. When this remaining probability variation number command processing (S4364) is started, first, the remaining probability variation number notified by the remaining probability variation number command is stored in the remaining probability variation number area 223o (S5851), and then the current gaming state is It is determined whether the status is the same (S5852).

In the processing of S5852, if it is determined that the gaming state is not the probable state (S5852: No), this processing is directly ended. On the other hand, in the process of S5852, if it is determined that the gaming state is a potential state (S5852: Yes), then whether or not the non-display setting flag 223dg is on (whether the non-display mode is set or not) is determined. (S5853), and if the non-display setting flag 223dg is off (S5853), a non-display setting process is executed to determine whether or not to set a non-display mode (S5861). ), this process ends. Details of this non-display setting process (S5861) will be described later with reference to FIG. 324.

On the other hand, in the process of S5853, if it is determined that the non-display setting flag 223dg is on (S5854), this means that the non-display mode (see FIG. 309(b)) is set. In the process, it is determined whether the remaining probability variation number stored in the remaining probability variation number area 223o is 5 or less (S5854). In the process of S5854, if it is determined that the number of residual probability variations is 6 or more (S5854: No), this process is directly ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the remaining probability variation number is 5 or less (S5854: Yes), then it is determined whether the current lottery result is one of the jackpots E to G (S5855), and the jackpot E to G is determined (S5855). If it is determined that it is not any of G (S5855: No), then it is determined whether the remaining probability variation number is 0 (whether the number stored in the residual probability variation number area 223o is 0 or not). It is determined (S5856).

In the process of S5856, if it is determined that the number of remaining probability variations is not 0 (S5856: No), this process is directly ended in order to continue the non-display mode. On the other hand, in the process of S5856, if it is determined that the remaining probability change count is 0 (S5856: Yes), it means that the potential state in which the non-display mode is set has ended, so the end effect of the non-display mode (see FIG. 310(a)), sets the non-display setting flag 223dg to OFF (S5858), and ends this process. On the other hand, in the process of S5855, if it is determined that the current lottery result is one of the jackpots E to G (S5855: Yes), a probability state of 120 times is set after the jackpot, so first , sets the execution of the special additional effect (see FIG. 310(b)) (S5859), then overwrites 100 times in the effect probability variable number area 223p, sets the non-display setting flag 223dg to off ( S5860), this process ends.

In this way, in the fourth control example, when the non-display mode is set, the second In the case of a special symbol jackpot (that is, when the remaining number of potential conditions is updated to 120 just before the potential state ends), a special top-up effect that is different from the normal press-down top-up effect will be applied. It is configured to perform a performance (special additional performance). As a result, the player who has confirmed the special bonus effect can be made aware that he won the jackpot just before the actual remaining number of times reached 0, and that the probability status has been newly set. can give you greater joy.

Next, details of the non-display setting process (S5861) will be described with reference to FIG. 324. As described above, this non-display setting process (S5861) is a process for determining whether or not to set a non-display mode. As shown in FIG. 324, when the non-display setting process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the remaining number of times stored in the performance probability variation number area 223p is 0 (S5891), and if it is 1 or more, If it is determined (S5891: No), the remaining number stored in the performance probability variable number area 223p is subtracted by 1 (S5892), and the remaining number of times is displayed in the remaining number display area D1 according to the value stored in the production probability variable number area 223p after the subtraction. The number of display times to be displayed is updated (S5893), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S5891, if it is determined that the remaining number stored in the performance probability variation number area 223p is 0 (S5891: Yes), the actual remaining number stored in the remaining probability variation number area 223o is It is determined whether the remaining number of times is 0 (S5894), and if the actual remaining number of times is not 0 (S58994: No), the non-display mode (see FIG. 309(b)) is set (S5895), and the non-display is The setting flag 223dg is set to on (S5896), and this processing ends. By setting the non-display mode, it is possible to create a state in which it is not known when the potential state will end, so it is possible to give the player a sense of tension in the remaining potential state games.

On the other hand, in the process of S5894, if it is determined that the remaining number of actual potential states stored in the remaining probability variation number area 223o is 0 (S5894: Yes), the display will be displayed at the end timing of the potential state. This means that the remaining number of times has also been updated to 0, so a normal end effect (see FIG. 188(a)) is set (S5897) and this process is ended.

In this way, in the non-display setting process in the fourth control example, if the potential state does not end when the remaining number of times on the display reaches 0, the non-display mode is set. This makes it possible to create a state in which it is unclear how long the potential state will last. Therefore, while the non-display mode is set, the game can be played with a sense of tension.

Next, details of the confirmed command processing (S4366) will be explained with reference to FIG. 325. As described above, this confirmation command processing (S4366) is a process for setting the confirmation display of the third symbol. When this confirmation command processing (see FIG. 325) is started, first, it is determined whether or not the received command is the special figure 1 confirmation command (S5831), and if it is determined that it is the special figure 1 confirmation command, then (S5831), the final display of the first special symbol is set (S5832). Next, it is determined whether or not the pending notice flag 223de is on (S5833), and if it is determined that it is on (S5833: Yes), the pending notice effect is displayed during the variable display for which the confirmed display is set this time. It is determined whether the process has ended (S5834). In the process of S5834, if it is determined that the pending preview performance has ended (S5834: Yes), the pending preview flag 223de is set to OFF (S5835), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S5833, if it is determined that the pending notice flag 223de is off (S5833: No), or in the process of S5834, if it is determined that the pending notice effect is continuing (S5834: No) ), this process ends. In addition, in the process of S5831, if it is determined that the received confirmation command is the special symbol 2 confirmation command (S5831: No), the confirmation display of the second special symbol is set (S5836), and this process ends. .

As explained above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth control example is configured to be able to execute a pending notice performance as an entertainment performance in a normal state or a variable probability state. In this pending notice performance, the pending symbol for which the notice is to be executed can be selected by the player's operation on the frame button 22.

Here, among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are known gaming machines that are capable of executing a pending notice performance that indicates the degree of expectation of a pending variable display. In such conventional gaming machines, by changing the color and shape of the reserved symbols, it is possible to indicate the degree of expectation of a jackpot in the variable display corresponding to the pending symbol, before the variable display starts. This made it possible to increase the expectations of players.

However, in such conventional gaming machines, when a suspension notice effect occurs, there is a possibility that the player may have difficulty in having expectations for the pending symbols that are not subject to the suspension notice. This is because it was usual to set a reservation notice performance for a reservation symbol corresponding to a reservation ball with high expectations within the reservation.

On the other hand, in this fourth control example, the range of pending symbols for which the pending notice performance is to be executed can be specified. Furthermore, the system is configured such that the rate at which the pending notice performance is executed is higher when the ball includes a pending ball that is highly expected to become a jackpot. As a result, in cases where no pending notice performance is set for pending symbols within the specified range, or when a pending notice performance with a low level of expectation is executed, the system will respond to pending symbols outside the range specified by the player. It is possible to create expectations of a jackpot for the held ball. Therefore, when a highly anticipated pending notice performance occurs in the selection range, it creates a sense of expectation that the pending ball corresponding to the pending symbol for which the pending notice has occurred will be a jackpot, and whether the pending notice does not occur or not. When a reservation notice with low expectations occurs, it is possible to provide a novel performance that can create a sense of expectation for reserved balls outside the selection range.

In addition, in the fourth control example, as a type of push-up additional effect executed in the potential state, the remaining number of potential states is displayed in the remaining count display area D1 according to the timing when the player presses the frame button 22. There is a performance that increases the number of times.

Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines have operation means such as operation buttons that can be operated by the player, and can perform an operation effect that prompts the player to operate the operation means as a type of entertainment effect. be. In this conventional gaming machine, by operating an operation button in an operation performance, a special performance different from normal performance is generated, a win is notified, etc., in an attempt to improve the player's interest.

However, in such conventional gaming machines, the operation effect is performed as part of the effect to notify the predetermined winning lottery result, so the result of the player's operation on the frame button is the result of the effect (the winning result is It had nothing to do with whether it was reported or not. Therefore, there has been a problem in that it is difficult to increase the player's desire to participate in the operation performance.

On the other hand, in the fourth control example, there is a case where a difference occurs between the actual remaining number of times in the potential state and the remaining number on the display. Then, when the press-up bonus effect is executed, a different bonus value is added and displayed according to the timing at which the player presses the frame button 22, as long as the remaining number of times on the display does not exceed the actual remaining number of times. It is said that As a result, the remaining number of top-ups on the display can be varied depending on the timing of the player's operation, allowing the player to more actively participate in the top-up effect (pressing the frame button 22 at the right time). . Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's desire to participate in the game.

Furthermore, in this fourth control example, in the potential state, the remaining number of times of the potential state is set to a non-display mode in which the remaining number of times of the potential state is hidden, and the actual remaining number of times of the potential state is If the second special symbol becomes a jackpot within a predetermined number of times (5 times) (the potential state is newly set 120 times), it is now possible to perform a special add-on effect that is different from the normal add-on effect. It consists of

Here, in some gaming machines such as pachinko machines, an advantageous state that is more advantageous than the normal state is set over a predetermined number of drawings based on a predetermined opportunity such as a win. In such conventional gaming machines, when an advantageous state is entered, it is difficult to tell how long the advantageous state will last, thereby creating a sense of expectation that the advantageous state will continue for a longer time. There are some things that are aimed at increasing interest.

However, in such conventional gaming machines, when an advantageous condition is reset (overwritten) due to a predetermined trigger such as a win, it is unclear at what stage of the advantageous condition the advantageous condition was reset. There is a possibility that the player may feel uncomfortable.

On the other hand, in this fourth control example, a special add-on effect is provided that is executed only when the remaining number of chances is 5 or less and the jackpot is achieved, so the player who has confirmed the special add-on effect is On the other hand, it is possible to clearly recognize that the potential state has been added just before the end of the potential state. Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel greater joy when he or she realizes that he or she has won the jackpot at the right time. Furthermore, since the remaining number of potential conditions at the time of a jackpot becomes clear, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

Note that in the fourth control example, the special additional effect is executed only when the non-display mode is set, but the present invention is not limited to this. Even if the remaining number of times is displayed in the remaining number of times display area D1, if the remaining number of actual potential states (the value stored in the remaining number of variable number area 223o) is less than 5 times, a special It may also be configured to perform additional effects. As described above, in the fourth control example, there may be a difference between the remaining number of times the potential state is displayed and the actual remaining number of times the potential state is present. In other words, even if the number of times remaining on the display is less than five, it is difficult for the player to determine whether the actual number of times remaining is less than five. Therefore, even if you win a jackpot in a situation where the number of times remaining on the display is less than 5 times, and the number of times remaining on the display is added on, the actual number of times remaining will be less than 5 times (i.e., near the end of the potential state). It becomes unclear whether there are enough actual numbers remaining, and there is a risk that the player may feel uncomfortable. On the other hand, if the actual remaining number of times is 5 or less, the special additional effect is executed regardless of whether or not the non-display mode is set, so that when the potential state is about to end, When winning a jackpot, the player can surely be made aware of the fact. Therefore, it is possible to more reliably prevent (suppress) the player from feeling uncomfortable. Note that the presentation mode of the special additional presentation may be configured to differ depending on whether the non-display mode is set or not. That is, if the non-display mode is not set, for example, the running character 811 may become gigantic and 100 times may be added to the remaining number of times displayed in the remaining number of times display area D1. . By performing different special additional effects depending on whether a non-display mode is set, a more natural flow of effects can be executed in each display mode. In addition, presentation modes can be diversified.

In the fourth control example, the configuration is such that it is notified whether or not the egg pattern will move to the house Ds1c by a performance that prompts repeated hits of the frame button 22 in the hold notice performance, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the effect of moving to the house Ds1c may be omitted, and an effect may be performed in which a super reach is confirmed if the egg is broken by successive hits. In other words, it may be configured to notify all egg symbols at once whether or not a single successive hit by the player will lead to a super reach. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide an easier-to-understand presentation.

In this fourth control example, when a reservation notice effect occurs and the player does not operate (press) the frame button 22, the range of pending symbols for which a reservation notice is to be given is automatically determined. However, it is not limited to this. For example, if the player does not operate (press) the frame button 22 within a predetermined period (for example, within 2 seconds) from the occurrence of the suspended preview performance, the suspended preview performance itself may be terminated. With this configuration, it is possible to meet the needs of players who do not want to see the pending preview performance (who simply want to enjoy the fluctuating display). That is, if the expectation level of a jackpot is suggested by the reservation notice performance, there is a possibility that the player will not be able to enjoy the fluctuating display corresponding to the reservation ball for which the expectation level is low. Therefore, by configuring the player to be able to select not only the range of pending symbols for which the pending notice performance is to be executed, but also whether or not to perform the pending notice performance itself, expectations can be adjusted in the fluctuating display corresponding to each pending symbol. It can make you feel. Therefore, it is possible to meet a wide range of needs of each player.

In this fourth control example, the expectation level of each pending symbol is suggested based on whether the pending symbol lays an egg and whether the egg breaks or not, but the mode of the pending notice performance is limited to this. It's not something you can do. It is sufficient that the reserved symbols can be changed in different ways depending on the expectation level of the corresponding reserved ball. For example, the color of the reserved symbols in the range selected by the player may be changed according to the expectation level. good. More specifically, for example, the expectation level increases in the order of white → blue → yellow → green → red → rainbow color. Then, when the player selects a pending symbol that causes a pending notice performance to be performed, the pending symbol in the selected range is changed to white. Then, when the player repeatedly hits the frame button 22, the color of each pending symbol may change. In this case, the extent to which the color changes for each pending symbol depending on the number of consecutive hits may be determined in advance at the start of the pending notice or when the player selects the pending symbol. Specifically, for example, when a pending symbol corresponding to a pending ball that has a variation pattern of short miss, missed normal reach, and hit super reach A is selected, the pending symbol corresponding to the short miss changes from white to another color. Set it so that it does not change, and set it so that the pending symbol corresponding to the missed normal reach changes up to yellow depending on the number of consecutive hits (changes in the order of white → blue → yellow), and the reserved symbol corresponding to the hit super reach A. The pattern may be set to change up to a rainbow color depending on the number of consecutive hits (change in the order of white → blue → yellow → green → red → rainbow color). With this configuration, the player can actively make repeated hits while looking forward to seeing to what color each reserved symbol changes. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's desire to participate.

<First modification of the first control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the first modification of the first control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 326 to 331. In the first control example described above, when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed in the potential state, the same (0.5 seconds) variation time is set regardless of the lottery result of the second special symbol. It was configured as follows. This makes the game more efficient in the potential state.

On the other hand, in this first modification, the variation time of the second special symbol is changed depending on the remaining number of times of the potential state. In the first half of the potential state, a relatively short variation time is likely to be set, and in the second half, a relatively long variation time is likely to be set. As a result, in the first half of the probability state, the interval between small hits or jackpots becomes shorter, making it possible to increase the number of prize balls in a relatively short time, while in the second half of the probability state, the interval between small hits or jackpots becomes shorter. By increasing the interval between balls, it is possible to make the increase in the number of prize balls relatively gradual. Therefore, it is possible to vary the way the number of prize balls increases, so it is possible to make the pitches more varied. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the game in the potential state from becoming monotonous.

This first modification of the first control example differs from the first control example in terms of configuration in that the configurations of the RAM 202 and RAM 203 provided in the main controller 110 have been partially changed; The only difference is that some of the processes executed by the MPU 201 of the control device 110 have been changed. Regarding other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, the first This is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the control example. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the first control example will be denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustrations and explanations thereof will be omitted.

<About the electrical configuration in the first modification of the first control example>
First, the electrical configuration in the first modification of the first control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 326 to 328. FIG. 327(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 in the first modification of the first control example. As shown in FIG. 326(a), a variation pattern scenario table 202ea is added to the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 in the first modification with respect to the configuration of the ROM 202 in the first control example (see FIG. 191). They are different in that they are Furthermore, in this modification, the contents of the variation pattern selection table 202f are partially changed.

First, the variation pattern selection table 202f in the first modification will be described with reference to FIG. 326(b). FIG. 326(b) is a diagram showing the configuration of the variation pattern selection table 202f in this control example. As shown in FIG. 326(b), the variation pattern selection table 202f in the first modified example replaces the potential confirmation table 202f4 provided in the variation pattern selection table 202f (see FIG. 194) in the first control example. A potential (first half) table 202f4a and a potential (second half) table 202f4b are provided.

The potential probability (first half) table 202f4a is a table that is referred to in order to select a variation pattern during the first half of the potential state (when the 1st to 50th special symbol lottery is executed). The second half) table 202f4b is a table that is referred to in the second half of the potential state (when the 51st to 120th special symbol lottery is executed). The details of this potential (second half) table 202f4b will be explained with reference to FIG. 327(a). The specified contents of the potential probability (first half) table 202f4a are the same as the potential probability table 202f4 in the first control example (see FIG. 196(b)), and 0 regardless of the lottery result of the second special symbol. A variation time of .5 seconds is selected. Therefore, detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 327(b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the potential (second half) table 202f4b. Among these, the regulation contents for the lottery of the first special symbol are the same as the potential (first half) table 202f4a (and the potential probability table 202f4 in the first control example), so detailed explanation thereof will be omitted. . Furthermore, for the lottery of the second special symbol, a variable time of 2 seconds is selected regardless of the lottery result. In other words, when a jackpot is achieved in the second special symbol lottery, the short winning variation (2 seconds) is selected in the entire range of possible values of the variation type counter CS1 (0 to 198), and the second special symbol is drawn in the lottery. In the case of a small hit, the small hit short variation (2 seconds) is selected in the entire range of possible values of the variation type counter CS1 (0 to 198), and the second special symbol is a loss in the lottery. , the short fluctuation (2 seconds) is selected in the entire range (0 to 198) of the possible values of the fluctuation type counter CS1.

In this way, when the potential (second half) table 202f4b is referenced, the fluctuation time is longer (from 0.5 seconds to 2 seconds) than when the potential (first half) table 202f4a is referenced. By doing so, in the second half of the potential state (51st to 120th time), it is possible to lengthen the interval at which a small win or a big win occurs. Therefore, in the first half of the potential state, the number of balls in possession increases easily, and in the second half, the increase in the number of balls in possession slows down, so it is possible to create a wave in how the number of balls in possession increases, and the game becomes monotonous. can be prevented (suppressed).

Next, details of the variation pattern scenario table 202ea will be described with reference to FIG. 327(b). This variation pattern scenario table 202ea is a table in which the number of drawings of special symbols after the end of the jackpot and a table for selecting a variation pattern are defined in association with each other. When selecting a variation pattern, a table for selecting a variation pattern is specified from this variation pattern scenario table 202ea.

As shown in FIG. 327(b), when the normal state is set as the gaming state after the jackpot, the fluctuation pattern is A normal table A202f1 is associated as a selection table. Therefore, when the normal state is set after a jackpot, the normal table A202f1 is always referred to to determine the fluctuation pattern.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 327(b), when the probability variable state is set as the gaming state after the jackpot, the probability variation table 202f3 is defined in association with the normal table A202f1 for the number of special symbols drawn after 121. Therefore, if the number of special symbol drawings is 120 or less, the probability variation table 202f3 is referred to as a table for selecting a variation pattern selection table, and if it is 121 or more, the normal table A202f1 is referenced. Ru.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 327(b), when the potential state is set as the gaming state after the jackpot, the probability (first half) A table 202f4a for special symbols is defined in association with a range of 51 to 120, and a potential (second half) table 202f4b is defined in association with a range of 121 and 122. 123 and subsequent tables, a normal table A 202f1 is defined in association with each other.

As a result, in the first half of the probability state, the variation pattern can be determined by referring to the probability (first half) table 202f4a in which a short variation time is easily determined, so it is possible to shorten the interval between small wins or jackpots. can. Therefore, it is possible to increase the rate of increase in the number of prize balls in the first half of the potential state. On the other hand, in the latter half of the potential state, the fluctuation pattern can be determined by referring to the potential (second half) table 202f4b in which it is difficult to determine a long fluctuation time, so the interval between small wins or jackpots becomes longer. Therefore, in the latter half of the potential state, the rate of increase in the number of prize balls can be slowed down, so the degree of increase in the number of prize balls can be varied. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the game from becoming monotonous during the potential state.

In addition, after the potential state ends, a variation pattern can be selected by referring to the normal table B202f2 in the two special symbol drawings, so as in the first control example, the result of the potential state Sufficient performance time for displaying can be secured. Further, when the number of special symbols drawn exceeds 123, the normal table A202f1 is referred to.

Next, with reference to FIG. 328, the configuration of the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 in the first modification will be described. FIG. 328 is a block diagram showing the configuration of RAM 203. As shown in FIG. 328, the RAM 203 in the first modified example has a scenario storage area 203ea and a lottery number counter 203eb added to the configuration of the RAM 203 in the first control example (see FIG. 198). There is a difference.

The scenario storage area 203ea is a storage area for storing a scenario corresponding to a gaming state after a jackpot among the scenarios defined in the variable pattern scenario table 202ea. This scenario storage area 203ea stores a variable pattern scenario corresponding to the gaming state after the jackpot at the end of the jackpot (see S2351 in FIG. 331). At the start of variation, a variation pattern selection table for selecting a variation pattern is determined by referring to the scenario stored in this scenario storage area 203ea.

The lottery number counter 203eb is a counter for counting the number of special symbol lots that have been executed after the jackpot has ended. When selecting a variable pattern selection table from the scenario storage area 203ea, the number of lottery of the special symbol is determined based on the value of this lottery number counter 203eb, and the variable pattern selection table is selected.

<About the control process of the main controller in the first modification of the first control example>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the first modification of the first control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 329 to 331. First, with reference to FIG. 329, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 5 (see FIG. 329) will be explained.

Of the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 5 (see FIG. 330) in this first modification, each of the processes S501 to S503 and S505 to S508 is the first special symbol variation pattern selection process in the first control example. The same processes as S501 to S503 and S505 to S508 (see FIG. 212) are executed. In the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 5 (see FIG. 329) in this modification, when the process of S503 is completed, the variation pattern selection table corresponding to the value of the lottery number counter 203eb is then extracted from the scenario storage area 203ea. (S551), and the process moves to S505. Using the variation pattern selection table read here, a variation pattern is selected in the process of S505. Although not shown in the drawings, in the second special symbol variation pattern selection process, when reading the variation pattern selection table, the same process as S551 is executed to determine the table.

Next, with reference to FIG. 330, a description will be given of gaming state update processing 5 (see FIG. 330) that is executed in the first modified example instead of the gaming state updating processing (see FIG. 213) in the first control example. Of the gaming state update process 5 (see FIG. 330) in the first modification of the first control example, each process of S601 to S608 is different from S601 to S601 of the gaming state update process (see FIG. 213) in the first control example. The same processes as those in S608 are executed.

Furthermore, in the game state update process 5 (see FIG. 330) in the first modification, after the process of S608, the value of the lottery number counter 203eb is updated by adding 1 (S651), and this process ends. In the game state update process 5 (see FIG. 330), by updating the value of the lottery number counter 203eb every time, the value of the lottery number counter 203eb can always be made to match the number of special symbol lottery numbers executed after a jackpot. .

Next, with reference to FIG. 331, a description will be given of the jackpot ending process 5 (see FIG. 331) that is executed in the first modified example instead of the jackpot ending process (see FIG. 230) in the first control example. In this jackpot end process 5 (see FIG. 331), each process of S2301 to S2308 is the same as each process of S2301 to S2308 in the jackpot control process of the first control example (see FIG. 230). .

In the jackpot control process 5 (see FIG. 331) in the first modification, when the process of S2308 is finished, the variable pattern scenario corresponding to the gaming state set in the processes of S2302 to S2306 is then stored in the variable pattern scenario table 202ea. , and set it in the scenario storage area 203ea (S2351). Next, the value of the lottery number counter 203eb is reset to 0 (S2352), and this process is ended. This jackpot ending process 5 (see FIG. 331) makes it possible to set an appropriate variation pattern scenario according to the gaming state after the jackpot ends.

As explained above, in the pachinko machine 10 in the modification of the first control example, either the first half of the potential state (the number of drawings after the jackpot is 1 to 50) or the second half (the number of drawings after the jackpot is 51 to 120) The variation pattern selection table that is referred to in order to select a variation pattern is switched depending on whether the variation pattern is selected (times) or not. The configuration is such that a variation pattern with a longer variation time is more likely to be selected in the latter half of the potential state than in the first half of the potential state. This makes it possible to vary the intervals at which a small or jackpot occurs in the first half and the second half of the potential state, thereby increasing the possibility that a small or jackpot occurs at a shorter interval in the first half. That is, in the first half of the potential state, the rate of increase in the number of prize balls can be increased, and in the second half, the rate of increase in the number of prize balls can be made relatively slow. Therefore, since the speed at which the prize balls increase can be varied, it is possible to vary the manner in which the prize balls increase. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the game from becoming monotonous during the potential state. Furthermore, since the rate of increase in prize balls is faster in the first half of the probability state, the player's expectations for the first half of the probability state can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to make the player win the jackpot in the first half of the probability state (before entering the second half) and make the player want to play the game in the first half of the probability state again. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's desire to participate in the game.

In addition, in this first modification, when the second special symbol is drawn in the first half of the potential state, a variation time of 0.5 seconds is always set, and in the second half of the potential state, the second special symbol is drawn. Although the configuration is such that a variable time of 2 seconds is always set when a lottery is executed, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, even in the first half of the potential state, the variable time may be set to 2 seconds at a predetermined rate (eg, 20%). Similarly, even in a trial in a potential state, a configuration may be adopted in which a variable time of 0.5 seconds is set at a predetermined rate (for example, a rate of 20%). This makes it difficult to distinguish from the variable time whether it is the first half or the second half of the potential state, so even if a two-second variable time is set, the game is played in the expectation that it is the first half. be able to.

<Second modification of first control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 332 and 333, the pachinko machine 10 in the second modification of the first control example will be described. In the first control example described above, the third symbol is displayed based on the fluctuation status of the first special symbol and the second special symbol (setting status of each standby flag) with reference to the screen display selection table 222b (see FIG. 200). It is configured to set the display content (screen display type) to be displayed on the device 81, and in the normal state, the fluctuation status of the second special symbol which is the sub fluctuation (setting status of the special symbol 2 standby flag 223t) Regardless, by executing the demonstration display only when the special symbol 1 standby flag 223s, which indicates that a predetermined period of time has passed since the fluctuation of the first special symbol, which is the main fluctuation, has been set to on, The structure was designed to reliably display the main fluctuations.

Here, in the first control example described above, in the normal state, that is, in the state where left-handed hitting is executed, the symbol indicating the lottery result of the second special symbol, which is the sub-variation, continues to be stopped and displayed in the small area Dm1. Met. This is because the second ball entrance 1640, through which the second special symbol lottery is executed, is provided in the right-handed hitting area.

As described above, if the symbol indicating the lottery result of the second special symbol is displayed in a stopped state in the small area Dm1, the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 where the lottery result of the first special symbol is executed. When this happens, there is a possibility that the player may feel strange that the pachinko machine 10 is malfunctioning when looking at the symbols displayed in the small area Dm1 where fluctuations do not start.

On the other hand, in this second modification, the special figure 2 standby flag 223t indicating that a predetermined period of time has passed since the variation of the second special symbol, which is a sub-variation, has stopped during the normal state is set to on. In this case, the sub-variation demo display (special figure 2 demo display) is configured to be executed in the small area Dm1. As a result, in the pachinko machine 10 where simultaneous fluctuations are executed, it is possible to suppress the situation where the symbol indicating the lottery result of the special symbol on the side of the secondary fluctuation (second special symbol) continues to be displayed in a stopped state, and the player It is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the content of the game.

This second modification of the first control example differs from the first control example in that the configuration of the RAM 222 provided in the audio lamp control device 113 has been partially changed. Regarding other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, the first control This is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the example. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the first control example will be denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustrations and explanations thereof will be omitted.

First, the contents of the sub-variation demonstration display (second special symbol demonstration display) displayed in this second modification will be explained with reference to FIG. 332. FIG. 332 is a diagram showing an example of a sub-variation demonstration display (second special symbol demonstration display) displayed in the small area Dm1 in the normal state (or probability variable state).

As shown in FIG. 332, in the normal state (or variable probability state), the first special symbol is fluctuating, and the second special symbol is not fluctuating for a predetermined period (30 seconds in this modification). In the state, instead of the stop display (see FIG. 182) showing the lottery result of the second special symbol in the small area Dm1, there is a sub-fluctuation demonstration display indicating that the first special symbol is fluctuating, "In game". characters are displayed. In this way, by displaying a symbol other than the lottery result of the second special symbol in the small area Dm1 as a demonstration display for sub-variation, it is possible to display a symbol other than the lottery result of the second special symbol in the small area Dm1, even though the game is being executed (when a left-handed game is being executed). Even though the ball enters the first ball entry port 64), a symbol (second special symbol) that does not change is continuously displayed, giving the player a sense of discomfort. can be suppressed.

Furthermore, the content of the sub-variation demo display (second special symbol demo display) is configured to be settable based on the variation status of the first special symbol (setting status of the special symbol 1 standby flag 223s). As shown in 332, when the first special symbol is fluctuating (when the special symbol 1 standby flag 223s is set to off), the first special symbol, which is the main fluctuation, is fluctuating. Since the content is displayed, it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand display format.

<About the electrical configuration in the second modification of the first control example>
The electrical configuration in the second modification of the first control example will be described with reference to FIG. 333. FIG. 333 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the screen display selection 3 table 222b in the second modification of the first control example. As shown in FIG. 333, the screen display selection 3 table 222b in the second modification example differs from the screen display selection table 222b in the first control example (see FIG. 200) in that the gaming state is the normal state or the variable probability state. The difference is that the screen display type defined in accordance with the state where the special figure 1 standby flag 223s is set to OFF and the special figure 2 standby flag 223t is set to ON is changed. There is. The rest of the configuration is the same as the configuration of the first control example described above, so detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 333, when the gaming state is the normal state or the variable probability state, the special figure 1 standby flag 223s is set to OFF, and the special figure 2 standby flag 223t is set to on, the screen is "Special figure 2 demo display" is correspondingly defined as the display type. This "special figure 2 demo display" is a screen display type in which a "playing" display (see FIG. 332) is executed using the small area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 as the demonstration display area of the second special symbol. .

As explained above, in the second modified example, in the pachinko machine 10 in which two types of special symbols are changed at the same time, one of the two types of special symbols (which is advantageous for the player) A special symbol) is displayed in a variable manner as a main variation using most of the third symbol display device 81, and the other special symbol (a special symbol that is more disadvantageous to the player than the main variation) is a part of the third symbol display device 81. (A region smaller than the display area where the main variation is displayed) When using a configuration where the variation is displayed as a sub-variation, the area where the sub-variation is displayed (sub-variation display area) Since the configuration is such that a demo display corresponding to the sub-variation can be executed, it is possible to prevent the situation where the symbol indicating the lottery result of the sub-variation is stopped and displayed for a long period of time (30 seconds or more), which makes it possible for the player to feel uncomfortable. It is possible to prevent this from occurring. Further, the player can be made to pay attention to the variation display (effect display) corresponding to the main variation displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It is possible to provide an easy-to-understand presentation to the player.

Furthermore, by setting the content of the demonstration display executed for the sub-variation (second special symbol) based on the fluctuation status of the main variation (first special symbol), the sub-variation (second special symbol) will be displayed. It becomes possible to inform the player of the fluctuation status of the main fluctuation (first special symbol) using the area (sub-fluctuation display area). Therefore, in a state where the demonstration display is executed in the sub-variation area, all (almost) of the third symbol display device 81 can be used to display the main variation, providing an easy-to-understand performance to the player. be able to.

In addition, in this second modification, the configuration is such that a demonstration display for the second special symbol is executed instead of the stop symbol indicating the lottery result of the second special symbol, which is a sub-variation, but other configurations may also be used. Often, for example, the stop symbol indicating the lottery result of the second special symbol may be displayed in a reduced size, and a demonstration display for the second special symbol may be executed in the empty space of the sub-variation display area. You may use the structure which performs the 2nd special symbol demonstration display in a different area|region from this.

In addition, in this second modification, the configuration of the second special symbol demo display (subvariation demo display) in the normal state or the probability variation state where the first special symbol is the main variation and the second special symbol is the sub variation has been explained. However, for example, a similar configuration may be used in a potential state where the second special symbol is the main variation and the first special symbol is the sub variation. In this case, by setting the small area Dm1 of the third symbol display area 81 as the variable display area of the first special symbol and making the small area Dm1 the sub-variable display area regardless of the gaming state, the demonstration display for the sub-variable It becomes possible to share display data and display control, and there is an effect that the processing load of display control on the third symbol display device 81 can be reduced.

<First modification of the fourth control example>
Next, a first modification of the fourth control example described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 334 to 350. In the fourth control example described above, when there is a difference between the actual remaining number of potential states and the remaining number on the display, the remaining number on the display is added to the display, and the special symbol is changed. When the remaining number of times on the display is 0 and the actual remaining number of times is not 0 (1 or more), a non-display mode (see FIG. 309(b)) is set. , in the case where the hidden mode is set, a special additional effect is executed when the remaining number of actual potential states is within a predetermined number of times (5 times) and a jackpot is achieved, At various times during the potential state, an effect was performed to add to the remaining number of times on the display.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a specific gaming state (potential state) in which the player is advantageous is executed a predetermined number of times (120 times), and is updated and managed by the main controller 110. There is a method of creating a difference between the actual remaining number of times and the remaining number of times displayed on the third symbol display device 81, making it difficult for the player to understand how long a specific game state will continue. In such gaming machines, by executing an effect that adds up the remaining number of times on the display and converging the difference between the actual number of remaining times and the remaining number of times on the display, a specific gaming state can be presented to the player without causing any discomfort. It is configured to play a game.

In this case, the effects that add on the remaining number of times on the display include the additional effect that is executed based on the fluctuation of the special symbol (pressing additional effect) as described in the fourth control example above, and the remaining number of times on the display. An additional effect (special additional effect) that is executed based on the fact that the number of times is within a predetermined number can be considered. By executing various additional effects in this way, it is possible to make it more difficult to understand the remaining number of times a specific gaming state (potential state) will be executed, creating a state of tension for the player. The player can be allowed to continue playing the game, and furthermore, when a large number of games are added due to the additional performance, a sense of security can be given.

However, different players have different preferences regarding effects (additional effects) for converging the difference between the actual remaining number of times and the remaining number of times displayed, and by executing various patterns of additional effects, players can There was a risk that their motivation would decline. Specifically, for players who prefer an effect in which the actual remaining number of times is not known until the remaining number of times on the display becomes small, and the actual remaining number of times is added when the number of remaining times on the display becomes low. On the other hand, if an additional effect is performed before the remaining number of times on the display decreases, the difference between the remaining number of times on the display and the actual remaining number of times will be reduced by the number of times added by the additional effect. When the remaining number of times is reduced, the number of times that the actual remaining number of times is added will be reduced, and there is a fear that the player's motivation for the performance will decrease.

On the other hand, in this first modification, as an additional performance executed during the potential state, there is a performance mode (addition chance mode) that can be expected for every variable additional performance, and when the remaining number of times on the display is below a predetermined number. Since the player is configured to be able to select the performance mode (post-announcement mode) in which the additional performance is executed when the game is turned on, the player can arbitrarily set the mode of the additional performance desired by the player. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the player's motivation for performance decreases.

Furthermore, in a gaming machine in which the performance mode of the additional performance can be selected as described above, for example, a first performance mode is set in which the additional performance can be performed every time a variation of the special symbol is executed, and the remaining performance on the display is set. If 3 times is displayed as the number of times and you select the second effect mode in which the additional effect is executed when the remaining number of times on the display reaches a predetermined number (for example, 5 rotations), the additional effect will be executed. There is a problem in that the execution timing is missed and the production effect is degraded.

On the other hand, in this modification, during a jackpot game where the actual remaining number of times is reset to 120, it is possible to select the performance mode of the additional performance, and furthermore, as the performance mode, the remaining number of times on the display is set to a predetermined number of times. (For example, 5 rotations) Based on the selection of the second performance mode in which the additional performance is executed, the remaining number of times on the display during the jackpot performance is set to 100.

Thereby, in a game machine in which a player can arbitrarily select a performance mode of an additional performance, a performance corresponding to the selected performance mode can be executed no matter which performance mode is selected at any timing.

This first modification of the fourth control example differs from the fourth control example described above in terms of configuration, in that the configurations of the ROM 222 and RAM 223 provided in the audio lamp control device 113 have been partially changed; The contents of some processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 have been changed, and the contents of some processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 have been changed. Regarding other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and other processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, This is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth control example. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the fourth control example will be denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustrations and explanations thereof will be omitted.

Here, the contents of the effect display executed according to the first modification will be explained with reference to FIGS. 334 to 337. In the first modified example, as a performance display executed by the third symbol display device 81, after the symbol fluctuation display that moves horizontally is stopped (temporarily stopped) (after a reach loss), some symbols are moved vertically. A moving variation pattern (scroll change effect) is set (see FIGS. 334 and 335). Further, when a jackpot G is won during the probability state, a plurality of performance modes are selectable in which different additional performance modes are executed during the jackpot game (see FIGS. 336 and 337).

First, the contents of the scroll change effect will be explained with reference to FIGS. 334 and 335. FIG. 334(a) is a schematic diagram showing a state in which the reach (first reach mode) in which the symbol moves horizontally is stopped (temporary stop) due to a miss in the scroll change effect, and FIG. 334(b) is 335(a) is a schematic diagram showing a state in which some symbols are displayed in a suggestive manner suggesting that they will move in the vertical direction after the first reach mode is removed and stopped (temporary stop), and FIG. 335(a) is It is a schematic diagram showing a state in which a reach (second reach mode) in which the symbol moves in the vertical direction is executed, and FIG. 335(b) is a schematic diagram showing a state in which the second reach mode stops at a winning symbol. . In addition, since the content of the reach (first reach mode) in which the symbol moves in the horizontal direction is the same as the fourth control example described above, detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 334(a), in this first modification, the display area of the third symbol display device 81 is configured to be controllable by dividing it into a left display area Dz1 and a right display area Dz2. During symbol fluctuation display (horizontal symbol fluctuation display), by collectively executing display control of the left display area Dz1 and right display area Dz2, the fluctuation is displayed for the entire display area of the third symbol display device 81. When the display is executed and a special symbol variation display (vertical symbol variation display) different from normal is executed, the areas subject to vertical symbol variation (left display area Dz1 and right display area Dz2) ) is configured so that control is executed to update only the displayed data. As a result, it is possible to perform an appropriate symbol display effect simply by updating the display data of an area suitable for symbol variation display, and therefore it is possible to reduce the processing load of control related to symbol variation processing.

This figure 334(a) shows that the symbol row L1 and the symbol row L3 are first stopped and displayed (first reach mode), and as a result, the symbols that are stopped and displayed when the lottery result of the special symbol is a win. The symbol row L2 is stopped and displayed in a manner shifted by one frame (shifted by one frame in the plus direction) with respect to the combination (a combination of symbols in which symbols indicating the same number are stopped and displayed in a straight line).

After that, among the symbols stopped and displayed in the left display area Dz1 (the symbol row L1 is a symbol imitating a "lion", the symbol row L2 is a sub-symbol, and the symbol row L3 is a symbol imitating a "snake"), A pattern imitating a character is displayed in a movement direction suggesting mode indicating an action suggesting vertical (downward) movement, and a vertical (downward) pattern row is displayed in the left display area Dz1. Specifically, by displaying a sub-symbol above the symbol column L1 displayed in the left display area Dz1 and displaying the sub-symbol below the symbol column L3 displayed in the left display area Dz1, the left display A vertical symbol row (from the top, a symbol row displayed in the order of a sub-symbol, a symbol imitating a "lion", a sub-symbol, a symbol imitating a "snake", and a sub-symbol) is displayed in the area Dz1. (See Figure 334(b)).

Thereby, it is possible to suggest that each symbol displayed in the left display area Dz1 changes in the vertical direction, and it is possible to perform an effect that gives the player a sense of anticipation. Furthermore, in this first modification, the display content in the left display area Dz1 is changed (that is, the display mode of each symbol stopped and displayed in the left display area Dz1 is changed, and a new display is displayed in the left display area Dz1. This is because the configuration suggests that a reach (second reach mode) in which the symbols change vertically will be executed in the future by simply executing the process of adding a symbol and displaying an additional vertical symbol row. , it is possible to reduce the processing load of control related to symbol variation processing.

In addition, a configuration that suggests that the second reach mode is executed by changing the display mode of the symbol that is stopped and displayed (temporarily stopped) in the right side display area Dz2 without using the configuration of the first modification example. You may also use As a result, it becomes possible to execute a suggestive effect using the entire third symbol display device 81, so that it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand notification to the player.

Then, when the second reach mode (reach in which the symbols vary vertically) is executed, as shown in FIG. 335(a), the symbol row L5 formed in the left display area Dz1 changes vertically (downward). As a second reach mode, the main symbol (main symbol imitating an elephant) with the number "1" attached to the active line V5 or V6 is displayed in a stopped state, indicating a jackpot. A special double reach mode is executed. In this way, by combining the normal horizontal reach mode (first reach mode) and vertical reach mode (second reach mode), the variation display of the symbol rows (L1 to L3) in a single direction can be improved. It is also possible to easily display complex symbol variations. Furthermore, as shown in Figure 335(a), it is now possible to set multiple stopping positions where a specific main symbol (main symbol with the number "1") indicates a jackpot, increasing expectations for a jackpot. Able to perform a performance.

Then, when the execution of the second reach mode is completed and the lottery result of this special symbol is a jackpot, the main symbol with the number “1” attached to either active line V5 or V6 (representing an elephant) main symbols) are stopped and displayed in a line (see FIG. 335(b)). After that, a jackpot game is executed.

In addition, in the display example described above, from the state where the first reach mode is stopped (temporarily stopped) (see FIG. 334(a)) to the state where the second reach mode is stopped (temporarily stopped), the left display area Dz1 Although we have shown an example in which the display data in other areas is not changed, the display data corresponding to each symbol (main symbol and sub symbol) that is stopped and displayed within the right display area Dz2 is not updated, and other than that, The display data (for example, the display of "reach" displayed in the right display area Dz2, etc.) may be updated. As a result, when the special double reach mode shown in FIG. 334(a) is executed, the "reach" display is changed to the "multi-reach" display, which indicates that the expectation of a jackpot is higher than the normal reach mode. It becomes possible to update, and the production effect can be enhanced.

In addition, a display area showing the current symbol fluctuation status (the area displaying "Reach" in Fig. 334(a)) is provided in the left display area Dz1, and the displayed contents are changed as appropriate depending on the symbol fluctuation status. It may be configured to do so. As a result, by simply executing the process of updating the display data of only a specific display area (left display area Dz1) among the display areas of the third symbol display device 81, the second reach mode is executed and the symbol fluctuation situation is Since the display can be executed in accordance with the above, it is possible to reduce the processing load of the control related to the symbol variation process, and it is also possible to execute an effect that increases the expectation of a jackpot.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 336 and 337, the contents of the additional mode selection performance for selecting the additional performance executed during the potential state in the first modified example of the fourth control example will be explained. This additional mode selection performance is performed on the display in order to converge the difference between the actual remaining number of times in the potential state (value of the remaining probability variation number area 223o) and the remaining number of times on the display (value of the performance probability variation number counter 223p). This is a performance for selecting the performance mode (addition mode) of the additional performance that adds (adds) the remaining number of times, and it is determined whether or not to perform the additional performance every time the special symbol starts changing. A performance mode (additional chance mode), a performance mode in which an additional performance is executed when the remaining number of times on the display reaches a predetermined number of times (post-notification mode), and a performance mode in which the player can select any performance mode (additional chance mode). This is a selectable performance.

This makes it possible for the player to select a performance mode in which an additional performance that suits his/her preference is executed, and it is possible to prevent motivation from decreasing due to execution of an unintended additional performance. .

First, with reference to FIG. 336(a), the display contents of the additional mode selection effect in the first modification will be described. FIG. 336(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display contents of the additional mode selection effect. As shown in FIG. 336(a), in this first modification, the additional mode selection performance is executed during the jackpot game that is executed when jackpot G is won in the probability state.

When the additional mode selection performance is executed, the remaining number of times displayed when winning the jackpot G (performance remaining probability variable number) continues in the remaining number display area D1 of the main display area Dm of the third symbol display area 81. will be displayed. This makes it possible to easily check the remaining number of times on the display even during a jackpot game. In addition, in the main control device 110, when a jackpot game is executed, the value of the probability change counter 203k is cleared (set to 0), but the remaining number of times displayed in the production probability variable number area 223p of the audio lamp control device 113 is By storing (setting) the (remaining performance probability variable number of times), the remaining number of times on the display can be continuously displayed even during a jackpot game.

Then, in the center area of the main display area Dm, a button D6a with the word "push" written thereon that prompts the user to operate (press) the frame button 22 is displayed, and on both sides of the button D6a are displayed "Additional chance mode". A first selected display D6b written thereon and a second selected display D6c written as "later notification mode" are displayed, and a first selection position for selecting the first selected display D6b and a second selected display D6c are displayed. A selection display D6d is displayed that moves at a predetermined interval between the second selection position where the display D6c is selected. In the display area D4, a telop is displayed to explain the content of the additional mode selection effect, and in FIG. 336(a), a message ``Select your favorite mode with the buttons'' is displayed. Further, on the left side of the sub-display area Ds, the additional effect mode (additional effect mode) that was selected in the state of winning the jackpot is displayed, making it easy to see which additional effect mode the player has selected. I'm trying to make it easier to understand.

During this additional mode selection performance, the designated additional mode is set by operating (pressing) the frame button 22 with the selection display D6d specifying the desired additional mode.

In FIG. 336(a), when the additional chance mode (first selected display D6b) is selected, as shown in FIG. 336(b), "RUSH continuation" is displayed to notify that the potential state continues. are displayed, and a character 811 in a display mode congratulating the continuation of the potential state is also displayed. In addition, in this case, since the additional performance mode is not changed in the additional mode selection performance (because it is "additional chance mode" when winning a jackpot → "additional chance mode" after the additional mode selection performance), the remaining number of times display area D1 ``3 remaining times'' will continue to be displayed, the same as when winning the jackpot. As a result, it is possible to restart the potential state in the same situation (remaining number of times displayed) as when winning the jackpot (remaining number of times displayed), so the potential state can be restarted without making the player feel uncomfortable. You can play games.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 336(b), the additional mode selected in the additional mode selection effect is displayed on the right side of the sub-display area Ds. Thereby, by looking at the display contents of the sub-display area Ds, it is possible to easily understand both the top-up mode at the time of a jackpot and the top-up mode after the top-up mode selection performance.

On the other hand, in FIG. 336(a), when the later notification mode (second selected display D6c) is selected, "+97" is added so that the remaining number display area D1 indicates 100 times, as shown in FIG. 337. Display is executed. Other than that, the same contents as those explained in FIG. 336(b) are displayed. Note that the same parts are given the same reference numerals and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted. In this way, if the top-up mode at the time of winning a jackpot and the top-up mode selected in the top-up mode selection performance are different, by setting the remaining number display area D1 to 100 times, the top-up mode to be newly executed is changed. It becomes possible to smoothly perform an additional performance without any sense of discomfort, and the performance effect can be enhanced.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 336(a), a jackpot game based on the jackpot G is executed in a state where the remaining number of times display area D1 shows "3 times", and the additional mode selection performance during the jackpot game is executed. When the add-on mode is changed from the add-on chance mode to the post-announcement mode, if the number of times displayed in the remaining count display area D1 is left as "3 times", the add-on effect will be executed in the post-notice mode. There is a risk of losing the opportunity to play (the number of times displayed in the remaining number of times display area D1 is "5 times or less"), and there is a problem that a suitable performance cannot be provided to the player. However, as in the first modification, when the add-on mode is changed, the number of times displayed in the remaining number display area D1 is set to 100, so that the add-on effect is executed in the later notification mode. It is possible to secure the opportunity (the number of times displayed in the remaining number of times display area D1 is "5 times or less").

In addition, in this first modification, it is configured such that it is determined in the 7th round of the jackpot game whether or not a potential state is given after the end of the jackpot game (if the ball passes through the V in the 7th round) Since the configuration is such that a potential state is given when the switch 65e3 (see FIG. 179) is passed), the above-mentioned additional performance mode selection performance is configured to be executed after the 8th round during the jackpot game. has been done. As a result, it is possible to execute an effect in which the additional mode is selected with the actual remaining number of times being reset to 120, so the ball does not pass through the V passing switch 65e3 during a jackpot, and the jackpot is hit. If the potential state is not given after the end, the jackpot game can be ended without executing the additional performance mode selection performance.

<Electrical configuration in the first modification of the fourth control example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the first modification of the fourth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 338 and 339. First, FIG. 338 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the second normal table A202ff1 provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 in the first modification of the fourth control example. As shown in FIG. 338, this second normal table A202ff1 has a part of the prescribed variation pattern changed from the normal table 202f1 (see FIG. 195) used in the fourth control example described above. They are different in that they are Since the other configurations are the same, detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

Here, among the variation patterns defined in the second normal table A202ff1, the variation patterns changed from the normal table A202f1 will be explained. In the first modification of the fourth control example, a scroll change effect (see FIGS. 334 and 335) is executed as a special symbol variation pattern. Specifically, when the lottery of the first special symbol becomes a jackpot, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "101 to 150", and the super reach D (30 seconds) is associated with "151". Super reach E (30 seconds) is associated with the range of 198 to 198.

Furthermore, if the lottery of the first special symbol is a loss and the number of reserved balls is 0 or 1, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is out of the range of "71 to 150" and the normal reach B (20 seconds) is Super reach C (30 seconds), which falls outside the range of "171 to 198", is associated. In addition, if the lottery of the first special symbol is a loss and the number of reserved balls is 2 or 3, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is out of the range of "131 to 170" and corresponds to normal reach B (20 seconds). Super reach C (30 seconds) is associated with a range of 186-198.

When hit super reach D (30 seconds) is set as a variation pattern, a reach effect (first reach mode) in which the third symbol moves horizontally is executed for the first 17 seconds (see Figure 183(b)). , a mode indicating that the first reach mode is off (a mode in which the symbol row L2 is shifted by +1 frame) is displayed in a stopped state (temporary stopped display) (see FIG. 334(a)), and then a suggestion indicating a scroll change effect is displayed. The effect is executed for 3 seconds, which is the suggestive effect period (Fig. 334(b)), and after the suggestive effect period passes, the reach effect (second reach mode) in which the third symbol moves vertically is executed for 10 seconds (Fig. 335(a)). Then, the third symbol is stopped and displayed in combination indicating a win (see FIG. 335(b)).

When hit super reach E (30 seconds) is set as a variation pattern, a reach effect (first reach mode) in which the third symbol moves horizontally is executed for the first 17 seconds (see Figure 183(b)). , a mode indicating that the first reach mode is off (a mode in which the symbol row L2 is shifted by +1 frame) is displayed in a stopped state (temporary stopped display) (see FIG. 334(a)), and then a suggestion indicating a scroll change effect is displayed. The effect is executed for 3 seconds, which is a suggestive effect period (FIG. 334(b)), and after the suggestive effect period passes, a ready-to-win effect (third reach mode) in which the third symbol moves horizontally is executed for 10 seconds. Then, the third symbol is stopped and displayed in combination indicating a win.

When the off-normal reach B (20 seconds) is set as the variation pattern, a reach effect (first reach mode) in which the third symbol moves horizontally is executed for the first 17 seconds (see Fig. 183(b)), A mode in which the first ready-to-reach mode is off (a mode in which the symbol row L2 is shifted by plus one frame) is displayed in a stopped state (temporary stopped display) (see FIG. 334(a)). Thereafter, after the suggestive performance suggesting the scroll change performance is executed for 3 seconds, which is the suggestive performance period (FIG. 334(b)), the third symbol is stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a miss.

When out-of-reach super reach C (30 seconds) is set as a variation pattern, a reach effect (first reach mode) in which the third symbol moves horizontally is executed for the first 17 seconds (see Figure 183(b)). , a mode indicating that the first reach mode is off (a mode in which the symbol row L2 is shifted by +1 frame) is displayed in a stopped state (temporary stopped display) (see FIG. 334(a)), and then a suggestion indicating a scroll change effect is displayed. The effect is executed for 3 seconds, which is a suggestive effect period (FIG. 334(b)), and after the suggestive effect period passes, a ready-to-win effect (third reach mode) in which the third symbol moves horizontally is executed for 10 seconds. Then, a third symbol is stopped and displayed in a combination that indicates a miss.

As explained above, in the first modified example of the fourth control example, the first reach mode (17 seconds) and the suggestion effect ( 3 seconds) is executed, and the second reach mode (10 seconds) is executed in the remaining 10 seconds. As a result, after the end of the suggestion effect, the third symbol is stopped and displayed in a winning combination with a variation time of 20 seconds (missing normal reach B), and the third reach mode (missing normal reach B) with 10 seconds remaining, which is different from the second reach mode ( 10 seconds) is performed (win super reach E, miss super reach C), it is possible to perform a performance that makes the player expect to win at various timings during symbol fluctuations.

Specifically, while the suggestion effect is being executed, the player can play the game while expecting that the temporarily stopped third symbol will restart. In addition, in this first modification, the degree of winning expectation is different depending on the direction in which the third symbol restarts, so the player can play the game while also expecting the direction in which the third symbol will restart. be able to. During execution of this suggestion effect, as shown in FIG. 334(b), the third symbol display device 81 indicates whether or not the third symbol is to be restarted, or the direction in which the third symbol is to be restarted. Since the production (suggestion production) is executed, the player can check whether the third symbol will restart or not, or the direction in which the third symbol will restart, by checking the contents of the production executed as the suggestion production. You can play the game while predicting.

In addition, in FIG. 334(b), a suggestion effect is executed in which the display form of the third symbol is changed to a display form (movement direction suggestion display form) that suggests the movement direction (downward), but other suggestions are executed. For example, in order to suggest that the third symbol restarts laterally (leftward), the third symbol may be changed to a display format in which the character faces to the left (direction of movement) (second movement). direction suggestion display form), a suggestion effect in which the pending symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 changes to a display format that suggests the restart direction of the third symbol, and a suggestion effect that is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. There is a suggestion effect that suggests the restart direction of the third symbol using other display bodies.

Furthermore, instead of suggesting the restart direction of the third symbol, it may be configured to simply execute a suggestion effect that suggests that the third symbol will restart. In this case, during the suggestion performance period, first a suggestion performance suggesting that the third symbol will restart (restart suggestion performance) is executed, and then a suggestion suggesting the direction of movement of the third symbol when restarting is performed. It is preferable to configure the system to perform a performance (restart direction suggestion performance). Thereby, it is possible to inform the player of the degree of expectation of winning in stages, and it is possible to make the player continue to pay attention to the performance.

In addition, in this first modification, when the third symbol is restarted, it is configured to move in the vertical direction (downward) or in the horizontal direction (leftward). The direction in which the three symbols restart may be provided in other directions. For example, a variation pattern may be provided in which the three symbols are restarted upward in addition to the downward direction described above as the restart in the vertical direction. In this case, the expected success rate of the fluctuation pattern in which the third symbol restarts vertically (upward, downward) is set to be different, and as a suggestion effect, it is suggested that the third symbol restarts vertically. By providing a suggestion performance that suggests that the third symbol restarts upward, a suggestion performance that suggests that the third symbol restarts downward, it is possible for the player to The degree of expectation of winning can be announced in stages.

Next, with reference to FIG. 339, the electrical configuration of the audio lamp control device 113 in the first modification of the fourth control example will be described. FIG. 339(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 of the first modification. As shown in FIG. 399(a), the ROM 222 in the first modified example is provided with an additional mode selection table 222fa in addition to the configuration of the ROM 222 in the first control example.

This top-up mode selection table 222fa stores the contents of each top-up effect executed in the top-up mode (top-up chance mode, late notification mode) that can be selected by the player during the potential state, and includes the top-up mode selection table 222fa. A performance corresponding to the additional mode performance selected in the process is read out and executed.

FIG. 223(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the electrical configuration of the audio lamp control device 113 in the first modification. In this first modification, a pressed a flag 223fa, pressed b flag 223fb, scroll change flag 223fc, mode change flag 223d, mode addition flag 223fd, and additional mode setting area 223fe are added to the fourth control example described above. are doing.

The pressed a flag 223fa indicates that the frame button 22 was operated during the period set during the reach (the pressed period during the reach) of the period during which the operation (press) of the frame button 22 is determined to be valid (operation valid period). This flag is set to ON based on the frame button 22 being operated (pressed) during the press period during reach. This pressed a flag 223fa is set to ON when the press-in-reach processing (see S5332 in FIG. 341) of the frame button input monitoring/production processing 2 (see FIG. 340) is executed (see S8002 in FIG. 341), It is referenced in the pressing end process (see S5537 in FIG. 343) (S8201 in FIG. 343), and is then set to off (S8204 in FIG. 343).

The pressed b flag 223fb indicates that the frame button 22 has been operated during a period set during a jackpot game (a press period during a jackpot) out of the period (operation valid period) in which the operation (press) of the frame button 22 is determined to be valid. This flag is set to ON based on the fact that the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) during the pressing period during the jackpot. This pressed b flag 223fb is set to ON when the jackpot press process (see S5334 in FIG. 341) of the frame button input monitoring/production process 2 (see FIG. 340) is executed (see S8102 in FIG. 342), It is referenced in the pressing end process (see S5537 in FIG. 343) (S8207 in FIG. 343), and is then set to off (S8212 in FIG. 343).

The scroll change flag 223fc is a flag that is set to ON when a condition for changing the scroll is satisfied in a scroll change effect (see FIGS. 334 and 335) in which the direction of variation of the third symbol changes midway. This scroll change flag 223fc is set when the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) during the press period (suggestion effect period) during the reach of the fluctuation pattern (hit super reach D) in which the fluctuation direction of the third symbol can be switched midway. Then, it is determined that the condition for changing the scroll in the scroll change effect is satisfied and is set to ON (see S8005 in FIG. 341). Then, it is referenced in the pressing end process (see S5537 in FIG. 343) (S8202 in FIG. 343), and if it is determined to be on (see S8202: Yes in FIG. 343), it is set to off (see S8203 in FIG. 343). ). In this pressing end process (see S5537 in FIG. 343), a scroll change effect can be executed by changing the display command output to the display control device 114 depending on the setting status of the scroll change flag 223fc. are doing.

The mode change flag 223fd is a flag indicating that the currently set add-on mode has been changed in the add-on mode selection performance executed during the jackpot game, and is turned on when the add-on mode is changed by the add-on mode selection performance. It is set to . This mode change flag 223fd is set to ON (S8105 in FIG. 342) when it is determined that the mode has been changed (S8104 in FIG. 342: Yes) in the press process during jackpot (see S5534 in FIG. 342). It is referenced in the termination process (see S5537 in FIG. 343) (S8208 in FIG. 343), and if it is determined that it is set to on (S8208 in FIG. 343: Yes), it is set to off (S8209 in FIG. 343). ). In this pressing end process (S5537 in FIG. 343), the value of the performance probability variation number area 223p is configured to be varied according to the setting status of the mode change flag 223fd, and the mode change flag 223fd is set to on. If so, 100 is set in the performance probability variation number area 223p (S8210 in FIG. 343). As a result, when the add-on mode is changed by the add-on mode selection effect, the value of the effect probability change count area 223p is set to 100, that is, it is displayed in the remaining count display area D1 of the third symbol display device 81. It becomes possible to execute a game in a potential state from a state where the remaining number of times on the display (remaining performance variable number of times) is set to 100, and it is possible to suitably provide an additional performance that is executed in the added addition mode after the change. can.

The additional mode setting area 223fe is an area for setting (memorizing) at least the currently set additional mode and the previously set additional mode, and is selected in the pressing end process (S5537 process in FIG. 343). The additional mode is set (S8211 in FIG. 343). In addition, information indicating that the additional chance production mode is set in the initial setting (S4001 in FIG. 235) of the startup process (see FIG. 235) executed when the power is turned on is set in this additional mode setting area 223fe. In addition, when the player does not select the top-up mode, the top-up chance mode in the potential state is executed. The information set (stored) in this add-on mode setting area 223fe (currently set add-on mode) is referred to in the special chart 2 variation start process 6 (see S4361 in FIG. 344) (see S4391 in FIG. 344), In addition, it is referred to in the remaining number of times command processing 6 (see S4364 in FIG. 345) (see S5871 in FIG. 345), and is configured so that an additional effect corresponding to the currently set additional mode is executed.

<About the control process of the audio lamp control device in the first modification of the fourth control example>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the first modification of the fourth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 340 to 345. First, with reference to FIG. 340, frame button input monitoring/presentation processing 2 (see FIG. 340) of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 340 is a flowchart showing this frame button input monitoring/presentation processing 2 (S4107).

When this frame button input monitoring/production process 2 (see FIG. 340) is started, it is first determined whether or not the depression of the frame button 22 is detected (S5501), and it is determined that the depression of the frame button 22 is detected. If so (S5501: Yes), then it is determined whether the reach-to-press period is in progress (S5531).

In the process of S5531, if it is determined that it is in the reach-to-press period (S5531: Yes), a reach-to-reach press process is executed to change the fluctuating direction (scroll direction) of the third symbol during the reach (S5532). ), this process ends. Details of this push-down process during reach (S5532) will be described later with reference to FIG. 341.

On the other hand, in the process of S5531, if it is determined that there is no reach pressing period (S5531: No), then it is determined whether it is a jackpot pressing period (S5533). In the process of S5533, if it is determined that the jackpot press period is in progress (S5533: Yes), a jackpot press process is executed to select one top-up mode from a plurality of top-up modes with different types of top-up effects to be executed. The process is executed (S5534) and ends. Details of this jackpot press processing (S5534) will be described later with reference to FIG. 342.

In addition, in the process of S5533, if it is determined that it is not the pressing period during the jackpot (S5533: No), other processes according to the pressing timing are executed (S5535), and this process ends. In addition to the process of S5507 of the fourth control example described above, the other press timings are additional effects executed in the frame button input monitoring/effect processing (S4107 of FIG. 316) of the fourth control example described above. A middle press process (S5503 in FIG. 316) and a press process during a pending notice (S5505 in FIG. 316) are executed.

In the process of S5501, if the operation (press) of the frame button 22 is not detected (S5501: No), then it is determined whether it is the end timing of the press period (S5536), and it is determined that it is the end timing of the press period. If so (S5536: Yes), the pressing end process (see FIG. 343) is executed (S5537), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S5501, if it is determined that the frame button 22 is not operated (pressed), the pressing end process (see FIG. 340) is skipped and the present process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 341, the contents of the press-down process during reach (S5532) executed in the frame button input monitoring/production process 2 (see FIG. 340) will be explained. FIG. 341 is a flowchart showing the contents of the push-down process during reach (S5532). This press-down process during reach (S5532) is a process executed when the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) during the press-down period during reach. Specifically, a process is executed to determine whether a condition for changing the direction of variation (scroll direction) of the third symbol is satisfied in the scroll change effect (see FIGS. 334 and 335).

When the pressing process during reach (S5532) is executed, first, it is determined whether the pressed a flag 223fa is set to on (S8001), and if it is determined that it is not set to on, (S8001: No) , sets the pressed a flag 223fa to on (S8002), and then sets the display ready-to-reach pressed command (S8003). By setting this display press command during reach, a pressed display mode indicating that the frame button 22 has been pressed within the press period during reach is notified (displayed) on the third symbol display device 81. In addition, this pressed display mode is continuously displayed during the pressed period during reach (suggestive effect period), and although not shown, it is used to indicate whether or not the third symbol will restart in the scroll change effect. It is displayed in a manner that suggests the degree of expectation or the direction in which to restart.

After completing the process of S8003, it is next determined whether the variation pattern being executed is the winning super reach D (see FIG. 338) (that is, whether it is a variation pattern corresponding to the scroll change effect) (S8004) . In the process of S8004, if it is determined that the variation pattern is the winning super reach D (S8004: Yes), the scroll change flag 223fc is set to ON (S8005), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the variation pattern is not a winning super reach D (S8004: No), the process is immediately ended.

In addition, if it is determined in the process of S8001 that the pressed a flag 223fa is set to on (S8001: Yes), the frame button 22 has already been operated within the pressing period during reach (second or subsequent time). (frame button operation has been executed), all processing is skipped and this processing ends. In addition, in the first modification of the fourth control example, the reach-to-reach press processing (S5532) is configured to be executed when the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) for the first time within the reach-to-reach press period. However, for example, when the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) a predetermined number of times, the pressing process during reach (S5532) is executed, or a lottery is executed every time the frame button 22 is operated (pressed), and the lottery result is It may be configured such that when a hit occurs, a press-down process during reach (S5532) is executed. By configuring in this way, the content of the performance to be executed can be complicated, and the performance effect can be enhanced.

Next, with reference to FIG. 342, the contents of the jackpot pressing process (S5534) executed in the frame button input monitoring/presentation process 2 (see FIG. 340) will be explained. FIG. 342 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot press process (S5534). This press-down process during a jackpot (S5534) is executed when the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) during a press-down period during a jackpot (additional mode selection performance period). Specifically, based on the content of the operation (pressing) of the frame button 22 in the top-up mode selection performance (see FIG. 336), the process for setting the top-up mode during the potential state that is executed after the end of the jackpot is executed. executed.

When the jackpot press process (S5534) is executed, first, it is determined whether the pressed b flag 223fb is set to on (S8101), and if it is determined that it is not set to on, (S8101: No) , sets the pressed b flag 223fb to ON (S8102), and then sets the jackpot press command for display (S8103). By setting this display jackpot press command, a pressed display mode indicating that the frame button 22 has been pressed within the jackpot press period is notified (displayed) on the third symbol display device 81. Although not shown in the figure, this pressed display mode is displayed as if the button D6a shown in FIG. The selected display (D6b or D6c) on the side that has been selected is displayed in a manner that indicates that it has been selected.

After completing the process in S8103, it is then determined whether the additional mode has been changed (S8104). Here, the add-on mode set before the jackpot game is executed is read from the add-on mode setting area 223fe, and the add-on mode is changed by comparing it with the add-on mode selected in the current add-on mode selection performance. It is determined whether the In the process of S8104, if it is determined that the additional mode has been changed (S8104: Yes), the mode change flag 223fd is set to ON (S8105), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the additional mode has not been changed (S8104: No), this process is directly ended.

In addition, if it is determined in the process of S8101 that the pressed b flag 223fb is set to on (S8101: Yes), the frame button 22 has already been operated within the pressed period during the jackpot (second or subsequent time). (frame button operation has been executed), all processing is skipped and this processing ends. In addition, in the first modification of the fourth control example, when the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) for the first time during the jackpot pressing period, the jackpot pressing process (S5532) is executed, and the top-up mode is determined. However, for example, the add-on mode may be configured to be set again within the pressing period during the jackpot.

Next, with reference to FIG. 343, the contents of the pressing end process (S5537) executed in the frame button input monitoring/presentation process 2 (see FIG. 340) will be described. FIG. 343 is a flowchart showing the contents of the pressing end process (S5537). This pressing end process (S5537) is a process that is executed at the timing when the pressing period (pressing period during reach, pressing period during jackpot) that effectively determines the operation of the frame button 22 ends, and is executed during each pressing period. To set the content of the effect to be executed after the press period ends, based on the status of the flag set.

When the pressing end process (S5537) is executed, first, it is determined whether the pressed a flag 223fa is set on (S8201). Here, if it is determined that the pressed a flag 223fa is not set to on (set to off) (S8201: No), the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) within the pressing period during reach. Since this is the case, the process based on the frame button operation within the pressing period during reach (S8202 to S8205) is skipped and the process proceeds to S8207.

On the other hand, in the process of S8201, if it is determined that the pressed a flag 223fa is set to ON (S8201: Yes), then it is determined whether the scroll change flag 223fc is set to ON (S8202). , if it is determined that it is set to on (S8202: Yes), the scroll change flag 223fc is set to off (S8203), a scroll change command for display is set (S8204), and the process proceeds to S8206.

In the process of S8202, if it is determined that the scroll change flag 223fc is not set to ON (set to OFF), a display scroll non-change command is set (S8205), and the process proceeds to S8206. In the process of S8206, the pressed a flag 223fa is set to OFF (S8206).

After completing the process in S8206, it is then determined whether the pressed b flag 223fb is set to on (S8207). Here, if it is determined that the pressed b flag 223fb is not set to on (set to off) (S8207: No), the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) within the pressed period during jackpot. Since this is the case, the process based on the frame button operation within the pressing period during the jackpot (S8208 to S8212) is skipped and the process ends. In other words, if the frame button 22 is not operated during the pressing period during the jackpot (during the top-up mode selection performance), the value of the performance probability variable number area 223p and the setting content of the top-up mode setting area 223fe will not be changed. The potential state after the end of the jackpot game is executed in a manner that continues the state at the time of winning the jackpot (additional mode and remaining number of times displayed in the remaining number display area D1). Therefore, if the player does not intentionally operate (press) the frame button 22 during the top-up mode selection performance because he does not want to change the top-up mode in the potential state, the top-up mode and It is possible to prevent the remaining number of times displayed in the remaining number of times display area D1 from being changed.

On the other hand, in the process of S8207, if it is determined that the pressed b flag 223fb is set to on (S8207: Yes), then it is determined whether the mode change flag 223fd is set to on (S8208), If it is determined that it is set to on (S8208: Yes), the mode change flag 223fd is set to off (S8209), the value of the production probability variation number area is set to 100 (S8210), and the selected additional mode is set. is set in the additional mode setting area 223fe (S8211). Then, the pressed b flag 223fb is set to OFF, and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S8208, if it is determined that the mode change flag 223fd is not set to on (set to off) (S8208: No), the process of S8209 and S8210 is skipped and the process proceeds to S8211. Transition. In this way, when the additional mode is changed during the additional mode selection performance, by setting the value of the performance probability change number area 223p to 100, the changed additional mode can be changed in the probability state executed after the end of the jackpot game. The used additional effects can be suitably executed. In addition, if the additional mode is selected so that the additional mode is not changed during the additional mode selection performance (see S8208), the process of setting the value of the performance probability variation area 223p (S8210) is skipped, so the probability If the player intentionally selects the same top-up mode as the currently set top-up mode during the top-up mode selection performance because he/she does not want to change the top-up mode in the current state, the top-up mode and remaining balance will be changed after the end of the jackpot game. It is possible to prevent the remaining number of times displayed in the number of times display area D1 from being changed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 344, details of the special figure 2 variation start process 6 (S4361) will be explained. FIG. 344 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure 2 variation start process 6. This special figure 2 variation start process 6 (S4361) is an additional effect based on the type of the currently set add-on mode for the special figure 2 variation start process 4 (see FIG. 319) of the fourth control example described above. The difference is that a process for determining whether or not to execute a process is added. The other elements are the same, and the same elements are given the same reference numerals and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

When the special figure 2 variation start process 6 (S4361) is executed, first, the same processes as S4371 to S4373 and S4375 of the special figure 2 variation start process 4 (see FIG. 320) of the fourth control example described above are executed. , In the process of S4373, if it is determined that the gaming state is a potential state (S4373: Yes), then it is determined whether the currently set top-up mode is the top-up chance mode (S4391). In the process of S4391, information set in the additional mode setting area 223fe (additional mode information) is read out, and determination is performed based on the additional mode information.

In the process of S4391, if it is determined that the currently set top-up mode is the top-up chance mode (S4391: Yes), S4374 of the above-mentioned fourth control example special figure 2 variation start process 4 (see FIG. 320) , S4376 is executed, and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the currently set top-up mode is not the top-up chance mode (later notification mode) (S4391: No), the process of S4374 is skipped and the process ends.

With this configuration, when the special symbol 2 variation start process 6 (S4361) is executed (when the variation of the second special symbol is executed), the currently set top-up mode is the top-up chance mode. In this case, the additional effect setting process is executed, and it is possible to provide an additional mode that can be expected for each fluctuation additional effect, and if the currently set additional mode is the later notification mode, the additional effect setting process is not executed, and the additional effect setting process is not executed. By preventing the difference between the remaining number of times and the remaining number of times on the display from converging, the number of additional times displayed at the time of post-announcement (additional effect that is executed when the remaining number of times on the display reaches a predetermined number) can be reduced. Can be made larger. Therefore, it is possible to perform a surprising performance for the player.

Next, with reference to FIG. 345, details of the remaining probability variable number command processing 6 (S4364) will be described. FIG. 345 is a flowchart showing the contents of the remaining probability variation number command processing 6 (S4364). This residual probability variation number command processing 6 (S4364) is related to the additional effect based on the type of the currently set addition mode, in contrast to the residual probability variation number command processing (see FIG. 323) of the fourth control example described above. The difference is that a process for determining whether or not to execute a process is added. The other elements are the same, and the same elements are given the same reference numerals and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

When residual probability variable number command processing 6 (S4364) is executed, first, the same processing as S5851 and S5852 of the residual probability variation number command processing (see FIG. 323) of the fourth control example described above is executed, and in the processing of S5851, If it is determined that the gaming state is a potential state (S5852: Yes), then it is determined whether the currently set add-on mode is a post-notification mode (S5871). In the process of S5871, information set in the additional mode setting area 223fe (additional mode information) is read out, and determination is performed based on the additional mode information.

In the process of S5871, if it is determined that the late notification mode is set (S5871: Yes), the same process as S5853 to S5861 of the residual probability variation number command process (see FIG. 323) of the fourth control example described above is performed. Execute and end this process. On the other hand, in the process of S5871, if it is determined that the late notification mode is not set (the additional chance mode is set) (S5871: No), the process skips the processes of S5853 to S5861 and ends this process. .

With this configuration, when the remaining probability variation number command process 6 (S4364) is executed (when the second special symbol variation is executed), the currently set top-up mode is the top-up chance mode. In this case, the additional effect setting process is executed, and it is possible to provide an additional mode that can be expected for each variable additional effect, and if the currently set additional mode is the later notification mode, the additional effect setting process is not executed, and the actual By preventing the difference between the remaining number of times and the number of remaining times on the display from converging, the number of additional times displayed at the time of post-announcement (an additional effect that is executed when the number of remaining times on the display reaches a predetermined number) can be increased. can do. Therefore, the performance effect of the performance desired by the player can be enhanced.

<About the control process executed by the display control device in the first modification of the fourth control example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in the first modification of the fourth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 346 to 350. This modified example is different from the fourth control example described above in that a press-related command process is added in command determination process 6 (see FIG. 346), and other points are the same. Identical parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, command determination processing 6 executed by the MPU 221 in the display control device 114 in this control example will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 346. In the command determination process 6, the processes of S6401 to S6417 are executed similarly to the command determination process in the fourth control example described above (see FIG. 247).

If it is determined in the process of S6416 that an error command has not been received (S6416: No), then it is determined whether a display press-related command has been received (S6431).

In the process of S6431, if it is determined that a display press-related command has been received (S6431: Yes), the press-related command process is executed (S6432), and the process returns to S6401. Details of the press-related command processing (S6432) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 347 to 350.

On the other hand, in the process of S6431, if it is determined that a press-related command has not been received (S6431: No), then other command processes are executed as in the first control example (S6418), and Return to processing.

Next, details of the press-related command processing (S6432) will be described with reference to FIGS. 347 to 350. The press-related command processing (S6432) is a process for performing processing corresponding to various commands for displaying (executing) press-related effects.

In the press-related command processing (S6432), first, it is determined whether or not a display-ready press command has been received (S8301). In the process of S8301, if it is determined that the display ready-to-reach press command has been received (S8301: Yes), the reach-to-reach press command process is executed (S8302), and the process moves to S8303.

Here, details of the press command processing during reach (S8302) will be described with reference to FIG. 348. FIG. 348 is a flowchart showing press command processing during reach. This press-down command processing during reach executes processing corresponding to the press-down command during reach for display received from the audio lamp control device 113.

In the reach press command processing, first, a reach press display data table corresponding to the timing type indicated by the reach press command for display is determined, and the determined press display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b. It is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S8401). Next, by writing Null data into the transfer data table buffer 233e, its contents are cleared (S8402).

Then, based on the press-on-reach display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S8401, time data representing the production time is set in the time counter 233h (S8403), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S8404). Then, the demo display flag 233y and the confirmed display flag 233z are both set to OFF (S8405), the reach-in-the-reach press command process is ended, and the process returns to the press-related command process.

Returning to FIG. 347, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S8301, if it is determined that the display reach press command has not been received (S8301: No), then it is determined whether a display scroll change command has been received (S8303).

In the process of S8303, if it is determined that the display scroll change command has been received (S8303: Yes), the scroll change command process is executed (S8304), and the process moves to S8305.

Here, details of the scroll change command processing (S8304) will be described with reference to FIG. 349. FIG. 349 is a flowchart showing scroll change command processing. This scroll change command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display scroll change command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

In the scroll change command processing, first, a pattern arrangement for vertical scrolling is set based on the display content and validity related information displayed in the display area Dm1, and is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S8501). Next, a vertical scroll effect display data table corresponding to the display content of the display area Dm1 is determined, and the determined vertical scroll effect display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S8502 ). Thereafter, the content is cleared by writing Null data into the transfer data table buffer 233e (S8503).

Then, based on the vertical scroll effect display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S8502, time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S8506), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S8507). Then, the demo display flag 233y and the confirmed display flag 233z are both set to OFF (S8508), the scroll change command processing is ended, and the process returns to the press-related command processing.

Returning to FIG. 347, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S8303, if it is determined that a display scroll change command has not been received (S8303: No), then it is determined whether a display scroll non-change command has been received (S8305).

In the process of S8305, if it is determined that the display scroll non-change command has been received (S8305: Yes), the scroll non-change command process is executed (S8306), and the process moves to S8307.

Here, details of the scroll non-change command processing (S8306) will be described with reference to FIG. 350(a). FIG. 350(a) is a flowchart showing scroll non-change command processing. This scroll non-change command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display auto press start command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

In the scroll non-change command processing, first, a scroll non-change display data table corresponding to the timing type indicated by the display scroll non-change command is determined, and the determined auto press start display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b. and sets it in the display data table buffer 233d (S8601). Next, by writing Null data into the transfer data table buffer 233e, its contents are cleared (S8602).

Then, based on the scroll non-change display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S8601, time data representing the performance time is set in the time counter 233h (S8603), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S8604). Then, both the demo display flag 233y and the confirmed display flag 233z are set to OFF (S8605), the scroll non-change command processing is ended, and the process returns to the press-related command processing.

Returning to FIG. 347, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S8305, if it is determined that the display scroll non-change command has not been received (S8305: No), then it is determined whether the display jackpot press command has been received (S8307).

In the process of S8307, if it is determined that the display jackpot medium press command has been received (S8307: Yes), the jackpot press command process is executed (S8308), and this process ends.

Here, details of the jackpot press command processing (S8308) will be described with reference to FIG. 350(b). FIG. 350(b) is a flowchart showing the jackpot press command processing. This jackpot press-down command process is to execute processing corresponding to the display jackpot press-down command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

In the jackpot press-down command processing, first, a jackpot press-down display data table corresponding to the timing type indicated by the jackpot press-down command for display is determined, and the determined jackpot press-down display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b. and sets it in the display data table buffer 233d (S8701). Next, by writing Null data into the transfer data table buffer 233e, its contents are cleared (S8702).

Then, based on the jackpot press display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S8701, time data representing the production time is set in the time counter 233h (S8703), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S8704). Then, both the demo display flag 233y and the confirmed display flag 233z are set to OFF (S8705), the jackpot press command process is ended, and the process returns to the press related command process.

Returning to FIG. 347, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S8307, if it is determined that the display jackpot medium press command has not been received (S8307: No), this process ends.

<Another example of the first modification of the fourth control example>
Next, another example of the first modification of the fourth control example described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 351 to 354. In this other example, the special reach effect (see FIG. 184, (See FIG. 185) is configured to be able to execute a composite reach effect in combination. Thereby, it is possible to execute a complicated reach effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

This different example differs from each of the control examples described above in that the character storage area 234a2 set in the character ROM 234 of the display control device 114 is partially changed, and the part executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 is The difference is that the partial processing has been changed. The other configurations are the same as each configuration and various control processes used in each control example described above. Identical parts are given the same reference numerals, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 351(a), the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 used in this other example will be explained. FIG. 351(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the display screen (display area) of the third symbol display device 81. As shown in FIG. 351(a), in this alternative example, for each of the control examples described above, a symbol row L4 that is scrolled in the left-right direction and displayed in a variable manner is added above the symbol row L1, and The difference is that a symbol column L8, which is scrolled and displayed in a variable manner, is added below the symbol column L3.

Furthermore, in this other example, the main display area Dm in which symbols are variably displayed in the third symbol display device 81 has five (5 columns) symbol columns (L1 to L4) which are scrolled left and right and are variably displayed. , and L8), the number of symbol rows that can be displayed simultaneously in the display area is three (three rows), and by switching the display area displayed by the main display area Dm in the vertical direction, Among the five (5 columns) symbol columns (L1 to L4, and L8) that are variably displayed by scrolling in the left-right direction, the symbol column displayed in the main display area Dm is configured to be changeable.

Then, fluctuation control of five (5 rows) symbol rows (L1 to L4, and L8) is executed for the fluctuation region Dz3, which is a wider area than the display area in which the main display region Dm can display. , it is configured such that display control is executed for the symbol rows displayed in the main display area Dm. As a result, when changing the symbol row displayed in the main display area Dmm, the changed symbol row can be displayed simply by executing display control based on the fluctuation control contents that have been executed in advance. , it is possible to perform variable display of symbol rows without delay for the player.

In addition, this different example is different in that symbol rows L5 to L7 are preset corresponding to scroll display in the vertical direction (vertical direction) used when a scroll change effect is executed. In other words, when the scroll change effect is executed, a combination pattern of symbols that are stopped and displayed (temporarily stopped) in the first reach mode is set in advance, and the display mode corresponding to the symbol combination pattern is changed. A symbol array corresponding to the second ready-to-reach mode is set so that the second ready-to-reach mode is executed.

Specifically, when the scroll change effect is executed, the display is controlled so that the third symbol is stopped (temporarily stopped) displayed when the third symbol is off by +1 frame as the first reach mode, and the first reach mode is stopped. (Temporary stop) In the display state, the vertical display area where the symbol indicating the combination of reach (reach symbol) and the symbol that stops (temporary stop) and is displayed if you miss by +1 frame (miss symbol) are not displayed. A second reach mode is executed in which the display is displayed variably in the vertical direction (vertical direction). In this way, by setting the stop (temporary stop) display pattern of the first reach mode to a predetermined pattern (reach plus one frame off stop (temporary stop) display pattern), the initial reach mode when the second reach mode is executed can be changed. It becomes possible to pattern the pattern arrangement.

In this separate example, a symbol array corresponding to the stop (temporary stop) display pattern of the first reach mode is stored in advance for each of symbol arrays L5 to L7 as a symbol array corresponding to the second reach mode. The second reach mode is configured to be executable in response to the stop (temporary stop) display pattern of the first reach mode. Thereby, when executing the second ready-to-reach mode using a part of the third symbol that has been stopped (temporarily stopped) in the first ready-to-reach mode, it is possible to perform the performance without delay.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 351(b) to 352(b), the contents of the composite ready-to-reach effect in another example of the first modification of the fourth control example will be described. FIG. 351(b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a state in which symbol variation in the left and right direction is executed in the compound ready-to-reach effect, and FIG. FIG. 352(b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a state in which the area displayed in the area has been changed, and FIG. be. This composite ready-to-reach effect executes symbol variation in the left and right direction (normal symbol variation) using symbol rows L1 to L3 for 10 seconds (see FIG. 351(b)), and then displays the display area in the main display area Dm. Execute the reach effect (first reach mode) in which the symbol row is changed upward or downward for 10 seconds (see Figure 352(a)), and then change the direction of symbol variation (scroll direction) from the left-right direction to the up-down direction. The ready-to-reach effect (second reach mode) is executed for 10 seconds (see FIG. 352(b)) and is composed of a total of 30 seconds of effect.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 351(b), the normal symbol variation is executed, and the third symbol stops (temporarily stops) at a combination that indicates a miss in the symbol rows L1 to L3 displayed in the main display area Dm. )Is displayed. At this point, variation control (updating variation data in accordance with the progression of variation time (elapsed time)) of the symbol rows (L4, L8) that are not displayed in the main display area Dm is being executed. In other words, when the composite reach effect is executed, firstly, execution of variation control is started for all symbol rows (L1 to L4, L8) corresponding to symbol variation in the left and right direction, and among them, the main display For the symbol rows (L1 to L3) displayed in the area Dm, fluctuation control and display control for 10 seconds are executed, and for the symbol rows (L4, L8) set outside the main display area Dm, , 20 seconds (period until the first reach mode (see FIG. 352(a)) is stopped (temporarily stopped)) is executed. In this way, by performing variation control in synchronization with the elapsed time of the reach effect even for symbol rows that are not displayed in the main display area Dm, the symbol row displayed in the main display area Dm is changed and new When displaying a symbol row (for example, symbol row L4 or L8), it can be displayed without delay.

In the example shown in FIG. 351(b), the third symbol with the number 1 (the third symbol with a character imitating an "elephant") is located at the center of the symbol row L1 and at the right side of the symbol row L2. Temporary stop display is performed once in the stopped (temporary stop) out-of-line display mode (first temporary stop mode). In addition, when a losing variation pattern with a variation time of 10 seconds is executed, the third symbol is stopped and displayed in the missing display mode shown in FIG. 351(b), and the symbol variation ends.

Then, with the third symbol stopped (temporarily stopped) in the first temporary stop mode, there is a suggestion effect that suggests that the symbol row displayed in the main display area Dm will be changed (for example, as shown in FIG. 184(b) As shown in , the display format of the character attached to the third symbol is changed to suggest that the display area is changing, or the third symbol display device 81 is provided with a display that suggests that the display area is changing. After that, the symbol sequence displayed in the main display area Dm is changed (see FIG. 352(a)).

In the example shown in FIG. 352(a), the display area is moved upward so that symbol rows L1, L2, and L4 are displayed in the main display area Dm (upper moving area), and the first temporary stop mode ( In FIG. 351(b)), the symbol row L3 that was displayed within the main display area Dm has moved outside the main display area Dm. As a result, the third symbol with the number 1 (the third symbol with a character imitating an "elephant") is changed from the first temporary stop mode, which was a stop (temporary stop) display mode indicating a miss, to the symbol row. It will be displayed in a ready-to-reach display mode (first ready-to-reach mode) that is stopped (temporarily stopped) at the center position of L1 and the right side position of symbol row L2. As a result, by executing the process of changing the display area (symbol row) displayed by the main display area Dm, the stop display mode (first temporary stop mode) that once made the player think that he or she won is changed to a win. Since it is possible to change the reach display mode (first reach mode) in which players can expect to win, even after the third symbol indicating a miss is stopped and displayed, it is possible to continue to have a feeling of expectation for a win. It is possible to maintain the player's motivation for playing the game.

In addition, in this other example, the third symbols (each of the third symbols displayed in FIG. 351(b)) in the first temporary stop mode can be reached by moving the display area displayed by the main display area Dm upward. The display area of the main display area Dm is moved upward because the display is stopped (temporarily stopped) in a combination that allows the production (first reach mode) to be executed. If the third symbol is stopped (temporarily stopped) and displayed in a combination that allows the reach effect (first reach mode) to be executed by moving it downward, move the display area of the main display area Dm downward. Processing is executed. In this way, by configuring the display area of the main display area Dm to be movable in two different directions (upward or downward), a combination of third symbols that can be stopped (temporarily stopped) and displayed in the first temporary stop mode can be created. can be increased.

In other words, when the display area of the main display area Dm is configured to be movable in only one direction, in order to execute a reach effect (first reach mode) in the display area after the movement, the main display area Dm before the movement It was necessary to display the same third symbol in a row in the symbol rows displayed at the top and center, but now the display area of the main display area Dm can be moved in two different directions (up or down). When using the configuration, the same symbol column is displayed on the upper side and center of the main display area Dm before movement, or the same pattern line is displayed on the lower side and center of the main display area Dm before movement. By displaying the third symbol in a row, it becomes possible to perform a reach effect (first reach mode) in the display area after movement, so the third symbol can be stopped (temporarily stopped) and displayed in the first temporary stop mode. It is possible to increase the number of combinations, and it is possible to prevent the player from easily predicting whether the symbol fluctuation will develop into the first reach mode, that is, the symbol fluctuation performance that will be executed in the future. It has the effect of increasing the effectiveness.

Then, in the ready-to-reach effect (first reach mode) shown in FIG. ” is stopped (temporarily stopped) and displayed, that is, among the symbol rows displayed in the main display area Dm, the upper symbol row (symbol row L4) and the lower symbol row The same third symbol (the third symbol with the number 1 in FIG. 352(b)) is displayed at the right side of the row (symbol row L2) and the middle symbol row (symbol row L1) (temporary stop) ( When the symbol is stopped (temporarily stopped) in the second temporary stop display mode, as shown in FIG. It is displayed variably in the vertical direction as column L5.

As a result, the same reach effect as the second reach mode (see FIG. 335(a)) explained in the first modification of the fourth control example described above is executed.The contents of the second reach mode are as described above. Since this is the same as the first modification of the fourth control example, the description thereof will be omitted.

As explained above, in another example of the first modification of the fourth control example, as a composite reach effect, a normal symbol variation is temporarily stopped in the first temporary stop display mode, and then a new symbol is displayed. The display area was changed so that the array was displayed, the first reach mode was made executable, the first reach mode was temporarily stopped and displayed in the second temporary stop display mode, and then the direction of symbol fluctuation was changed. The second reach mode is configured to be executable. Thereby, it is possible to perform a reach performance with a high performance effect for the player.

In addition, since it is configured to temporarily stop in the temporary stop display mode multiple times during the composite reach effect, by matching the timing of temporary stopping with the stop display timing of the off variation pattern, when the off variation pattern is executed. It becomes possible to execute the same effect as when the composite reach effect is temporarily stopped and displayed (at least part of the display data can be reused), and the amount of display data used for the effect can be reduced. In addition, even when a losing variation pattern is executed, the player can be made to think that a composite reach effect is being executed, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 353, an electrical configuration in another example of the first modification of the fourth control example will be described. This different example is different from the electrical configuration used in any of the control examples described above in that the contents of the character storage area 234a2 set in the character ROM 234 of the display control device 114 are partially changed. All other elements are the same. Identical elements are given the same reference numerals and detailed explanations thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 353(a), the contents of the character storage area 234a2 in another example of the first modification of the fourth control example will be described. FIG. 353(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the character storage area 234a2. As shown in FIG. 353(a), the character storage area 234a2 stores a command specifying the display area of the third symbol display device 81 (display area change information included in the variation pattern command output from the audio lamp control device 113). ) and the display area storage area 234a2a which stores the display area corresponding to the symbol display area 234a2a, which stores the display area corresponding to An array storage area 234a2b and another storage area 234a2c in which display data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are stored are defined.

Here, the contents of the display area storage area 234a2a will be explained with reference to FIG. 353(b). FIG. 353(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the display area storage area 234a2a. This display area storage area 234a2a has display area 1 (reference area) in which symbol arrays L1 to L3 are displayed in the main display area Dm, and symbol arrays L1, L2, and L4 in the main display area Dm as display area types. A display area 2 (upward movement area) to be displayed and a display area 3 (downward movement area) in which symbol arrays L2, L3, and L8 are displayed in the main display area Dm are set, and the third symbol display device 81 The display area displayed in the main display area Dm is set based on a command specifying the display area (display area change information included in the variation pattern command output from the audio lamp control device 113).

Although a detailed explanation will be omitted, the variation pattern command output from the audio lamp control device 113 includes information for executing symbol variation for all symbol arrays L1 to L4 and L8. , the display control device 114 is configured to execute processing so that the display contents are updated for all of the symbol arrays L1 to L4 and L8. Specifically, the variable pattern command processing (see FIG. 248) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 is executed for all symbol arrays L1 to L4 and L8 based on the received display variable pattern command. . Then, in the drawing process (see FIG. 257), a drawing list is created for the pattern row corresponding to the currently set display area, and the drawing list and drawing target buffer information are sent to the image controller. are doing. Thereby, all the display information of the symbol arrays L1 to L4, L8 can be updated in correspondence with the time data, and the display process can be executed only for the symbol rows to be displayed. In this case, a flag (storage area) is provided for determining the currently set display area type among the display area types stored in the display area storage area 234a2a, and the determination is performed by referring to the flag. good.

Next, the contents of the symbol array storage area 234a2b will be explained with reference to FIG. 353(c). FIG. 353(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the symbol array storage area 234a2b. This symbol array storage area 234a2b stores a normal symbol array (for horizontal scrolling) used when the normal variation is executed and a vertical scrolling symbol array used when the second reach mode is executed. has been done. The symbol array for vertical scrolling includes a symbol array (1 for vertical scrolling) corresponding to symbol row L5 (see FIG. 351(a)) and a symbol array (1 for vertical scrolling) corresponding to symbol row L6 (see FIG. 351(a)). 2) for vertical scrolling and a symbol array (3 for vertical scrolling) corresponding to symbol row L7 (see FIG. 351(a)) are stored, and the second reach mode is executed for each of them. A symbol arrangement corresponding to the third symbol stopped and displayed is stored.

Specifically, as a symbol array for vertical scrolling 1 (symbol row L5), when the second reach mode is executed, the third symbol with the number 1 is stopped (temporarily stopped) in an out-of-reach display mode. When the "Symbol Arrangement 1" to the second reach mode is executed when it is set (see Figure 334), the third symbol with the number 9 is stopped (temporarily stopped) in the out-of-reach display mode. Nine types are set up to "Symbol Arrangement 9" which is set when it is set. In addition, in this example, the display mode (first temporary stop mode) of the third symbol that is stopped (temporarily stopped) and displayed when the second reach mode is executed is set to be a predetermined stop mode. Therefore, the number of symbol array types for vertical scrolling stored in this symbol array storage area 234a2b can be reduced.

Similarly to the symbol arrays 1 to 9 stored corresponding to the vertical scroll 1 (symbol row L5), the vertical scroll 2 (symbol row L6) and the vertical scroll 3 (symbol row L7) are also stored respectively. Nine types of pattern arrangements are set. In addition, when displaying the third symbol that is stopped (temporarily stopped) and displayed at the center position of the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 while fluctuating in the vertical direction (vertical scroll display), 2 is used as the first temporary stop mode. This is a case where the third symbol of the type is in a reach state (so-called double reach state) and the third symbol is stopped (temporarily stopped) and displayed in a combination indicating a miss.

In this way, by storing in advance the symbol arrangement used in the second reach mode (the reach mode executed after changing the fluctuation direction (scroll direction) of the third symbol), the second reach mode can be delayed. It can be executed without Furthermore, by predetermining the combination of the third symbols that are stopped (temporarily stopped) and displayed in the first temporary stop mode, it is possible to reduce the types of symbol arrays used when executing the second reach mode. .

<About the control process executed by the display control device in another example of the first modification example of the fourth control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 354, pointer update processing 2 executed in another example of the first modified example of the fourth control example will be described. This pointer update process 2 is different from the pointer update process described above (S7205 in FIG. 254) in that a process for changing the display area displayed in the main display area Dm is added. The other elements are the same, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 354 is a flowchart showing the contents of pointer update processing 2 (S7205). When pointer update processing 2 (S7205) is executed, first, the same process as S7401 of the above-mentioned pointer update process (see FIG. 254) is executed, and then it is determined whether it is time to change the display area. (S7431). In the process of S7431, if it is determined that it is time to change the display area (S7431: Yes), then the display area corresponding to the command is set with reference to the display area storage area 234a2a (S7432). , overwrites the display data table buffer with the determined display area data (S7433). Then, the process moves to S7402.

On the other hand, in the process of S7431, if it is determined that it is not the timing to change the display area, the process of S7432 and S7433 is skipped and the process moves to S7402. In S7402 to S7406, the same processes as S7402 to S7406 of the above-described pointer update process (see FIG. 254) are executed, and this process ends.

As explained above, in another example of the first modified example of the fourth control example, as a composite reach effect, a normal symbol variation is temporarily stopped and displayed in the first temporary stop display mode, and then a new symbol arrangement is displayed. is displayed, the first reach mode is made executable, the first reach mode is temporarily stopped and displayed in the second temporary stop display mode, and then the direction of symbol fluctuation is changed. It is configured to be able to execute a 2-reach mode. Thereby, it is possible to perform a reach performance with a high performance effect for the player. In addition, in this example, two types of fluctuation directions of the symbol rows, ie, the left-right direction and the up-down direction, are set, but the symbol rows may be configured to fluctuate in other directions.

In addition, since it is configured to temporarily stop in the temporary stop display mode multiple times during the composite reach effect, by matching the timing of temporary stopping with the stop display timing of the off variation pattern, when the off variation pattern is executed. It becomes possible to execute the same effect as when the composite reach effect is temporarily stopped and displayed (at least part of the display data can be reused), and the amount of display data used for the effect can be reduced. In addition, even when a losing variation pattern is executed, the player can be made to think that a composite reach effect is being executed, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Furthermore, since the symbol row data used when executing the first reach mode and the symbol row data used when executing the second reach mode are stored and set differently, each symbol row By combining data, you can perform a variety of effects. In addition, the first reach mode is set so that the combination of symbols displayed when the first reach mode is stopped (temporarily stopped) matches the symbol combination set in the symbol row used in the second reach mode. Since the stop (temporary stop) display mode of the ready-to-reach mode is set, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable when switching the presentation mode from the first ready-to-reach mode to the second ready-to-reach mode.

In addition, while the display control of each symbol row (L1 to L4, L8) is being executed in the first reach mode, the display control of each symbol row (L5 to L7) is executed in the second reach mode. may be executed in advance. In this case, a layer in which the first reach mode is displayed and a layer in which the second reach mode is displayed are provided separately, and when the first reach mode is being executed, the second reach mode is displayed in the game. The display control of each layer may be controlled so that the second reach mode is not visible to the player, and the display control of each layer is switched at the timing when the second reach mode is executed, so that the second reach mode is visible to the player.

In each of the control examples explained above, the case was explained using a gaming machine in which the first special symbol (special symbol 1) and the second special symbol (special symbol 2) are executed at the same time. The symbol display device 81 may be configured to simultaneously display variations between the special symbol (special symbol 1 or special symbol 2) and the normal symbol, and the techniques described in each of the control examples described above may be applied. In this case, the effect can be made more effective by making the benefit that will be executed when the normal symbol is a winning result to be the same as the benefit that will be executed when the special symbol is a winning result. can.

The present invention may be implemented in a different type of pachinko machine or the like from the above embodiments. For example, there are pachinko machines (commonly known as 2-hit, 3-hit, and 3-hit machines) that increase the expected value of a jackpot once you hit the jackpot once and until you hit the jackpot multiple times (for example, 2 or 3 times). It may also be implemented as Furthermore, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that provides a predetermined game value to the player, with the necessary condition of landing a ball in a predetermined area. Furthermore, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine that has a winning device having a special area such as a V zone and enters a special gaming state with the requirement that a ball be won in the special area. Furthermore, in addition to pachinko machines, the present invention may be implemented as various gaming machines such as arepachi, mahjong ball, slot machines, and so-called gaming machines that are a combination of a pachinko machine and a slot machine.

Note that the slot machine is a well-known slot machine in which, for example, the symbols are changed by operating a control lever after inserting a coin and determining the symbol active line, and the symbols are stopped and fixed by operating a stop button. It is something. Therefore, the basic concept of a slot machine is that it is equipped with a display device that variably displays an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information, and then definitively displays the identification information. The fluctuating display of the identification information is started, and the fluctuating display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of a stop operation means (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, and the display is confirmed. A slot machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined gaming value to the player, with the necessary condition that the combination of identification information at the time is a specific one, and in this case, the gaming medium is typically coins, medals, etc. Examples include:

Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine that is a combination of a pachinko machine and a slot machine, it is equipped with a display device that displays a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols in a variable manner, and then displays the symbol in a fixed manner, and is equipped with a handle for launching a ball. Here are some things that are not. In this case, after a predetermined amount of balls are thrown in based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the pattern starts to fluctuate due to, for example, the operation of the operating lever, and the fluctuation of the symbol starts due to, for example, the operation of the stop button, or As time passes, the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped, and a special game is generated in which the player is given a predetermined gaming value with the necessary condition that the determined symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol. In this case, a large number of balls are paid out into the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used instead of a slot machine, only balls can be treated as the gaming value in the gaming hall, which reduces the gaming value seen in current gaming halls where pachinko machines and slot machines coexist. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on where gaming machines can be installed can be resolved.

Below, concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be shown.

<About the concept of the invention using the right rotation unit 600 as an example>
a base member, a first displacement member and a second displacement member formed to be displaceable with respect to the base member, a transmission member that transmits driving force to the first displacement member and the second displacement member, and the transmission member In the game machine, the transmission member includes a drive pin, the first displacement member and the second displacement member each include a first groove and a second groove, and The first groove includes an action section that receives an action from the drive pin and a non-interference section that does not interfere with the drive pin, and the second groove includes at least an action section that receives an action from the drive pin, and a non-interference section that receives an action from the drive pin. The first displacement member and the second displacement member are disposed on the base member in a posture such that the groove and the second groove are overlapped and the drive pin is inserted into the first groove and the second groove. Game machine A1.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko, a base member, a first displacement member and a second displacement member disposed displaceably on the base member, and a driving force applied to the first displacement member and the second displacement member. The production member includes a transmission member that transmits the transmission and a driving means that applies a driving force to the transmission member, and the first displacement member and the second displacement There is a game machine in which a member is connected to a transmission member (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2009-100994).

According to this gaming machine, when the driving force of the driving means is applied to the transmission member, the performance member transmits the driving force from the transmission member to the first displacement member and the second displacement member via the first groove and the second groove. is transmitted, and the first displacement member and the second displacement member are displaced with respect to the base member.

However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, since the first groove and the second groove are arranged side by side, the space required for arranging the first groove and the second groove is increased, and the front view of the performance member increases accordingly. There was a problem in that the external size of the device became larger. In particular, in recent years, there has been a demand for larger liquid crystal display devices, and it is undesirable for the outer shape of the presentation member to become larger when viewed from the front because this hinders the enlargement of the liquid crystal display device.

On the other hand, according to the game machine A1, the first displacement member and the second displacement member are arranged on the base member in an attitude in which the first groove and the second groove are superimposed (superimposed), so that the first displacement member and the second displacement member are disposed on the base member. Compared to a conventional product in which the grooves and the second grooves are arranged side by side, the space required for arranging the first grooves and the second grooves can be reduced. As a result, it is possible to reduce the size of the external shape when viewed from the front. In this case, even if the liquid crystal display device is required to be larger, there is relatively more space in the thickness direction (back and forth direction). If the structure is such that the liquid crystal display devices are stacked one on top of the other, it is possible to reduce the external size when viewed from the front by utilizing a relatively generous space in the thickness direction, which is particularly effective for increasing the size of the liquid crystal display device.

Further, according to gaming machine A1, since the driving pin is inserted through the overlapping first and second grooves, one driving pin transfers the driving force from the transmission member to the first displacement member and the second displacement member. This makes it unnecessary to provide a drive pin for each of the first groove and the second groove. In other words, the parts can be used in common, and the cost of parts can be reduced accordingly.

According to the gaming machine A1, when the driving force of the driving means is applied to the transmission member, the driving force is transmitted from the transmission member to the first displacement member and the second displacement member, and the driving force is transmitted from the transmission member to the first displacement member and the second displacement member. A member is displaced relative to the base member. In this case, in a state in which the working sections of the first groove and the second groove receive the action from the transmission member, the first displacement member and the second displacement member are respectively displaced, while only the working section of the second groove receives the action from the transmission member. In a state where the transmission member is acted upon (the transmission member does not interfere with the first groove due to the non-interference section), the first displacement member is stopped and the second displacement member is displaced.

In gaming machine A1, the second displacement member is displaceably disposed on the back surface of the first displacement member, and is connected to a driven member in which the second groove is formed, and the driven portion thereof. A game machine A2 comprising: a connected displacement member displaceably disposed on the back surface of the first displacement member and having a decorative portion.

According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A1, the second displacement member includes a driven member that is displaceably disposed on the back surface of the first displacement member and has a second groove formed therein; Since the connecting displacement member is connected to the driven part and displaceably disposed on the back surface of the first displacement member, a link structure can be formed by the driven member and the connecting displacement member. Thereby, when the driven member is driven by the transmission member, the decorative portion of the connected displacement member can be largely displaced relative to the first displacement member.

A gaming machine A3 in the gaming machine A2, wherein the second displacement member is capable of forming a posture in which the driven member and the connected displacement member are superimposed.

According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A2, the second displacement member can form a posture in which the driven member and the connected displacement member are superimposed, so that the second displacement member The outer shape of the displacement member when viewed from the front can be made smaller.

In gaming machine A3, the first displacement member is formed to be movable between a retracted position and an extended position, and the second displacement member is configured to be in a position in which the driven member and the connected displacement member are superimposed. A gaming machine A4, characterized in that it is formed so as to be able to be placed on the back side of the first displacement member in the retracted position.

According to the game machine A4, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine A3, the second displacement member can be placed on the back side of the first displacement member in the retracted position in a posture in which the driven member and the connected displacement member are overlapped. Therefore, the outer dimensions of the first displacement member and the second displacement member disposed at the retracted position can be reduced in size by the amount of overlap when viewed from the front.

In any one of gaming machines A2 to A4, the connecting displacement member includes an overhanging portion that is formed to overhang on the opposite side of the decorative portion across a portion that is displaceably disposed on the first displacement member. A gaming machine A5 characterized by the following.

According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines A2 to A4, the connecting displacement member protrudes to the side opposite to the decorative portion across the portion that is displaceably disposed on the first displacement member. Since the projecting portion is provided, the projecting portion can serve as a weight.

For example, when lifting the decorative part of the connecting displacement member upward by driving the driven part, the overhanging part is formed on the opposite side of the decorative part, so that the weight of the overhanging part can be used. , it is possible to easily lift the decorative part upward. Therefore, the projecting portion can be quickly lifted and the driving force required for lifting can be suppressed. In addition, after the decorative part is lifted, the weight of the decorative part and the weight of the overhanging part can be suspended, so compared to the case where only the decorative part is formed in a cantilevered state, the decorative part is The lifted posture can be stabilized, and the driving force required to maintain the lifted posture can be suppressed.

A gaming machine A6 in the gaming machine A5, wherein the protruding portion of the connecting displacement member is formed so as to be able to come into contact with the back surface of the first displacement member.

According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine A5, the protruding portion of the connecting displacement member is formed so as to be able to come into contact with the back surface of the first displacement member, so the driven portion is driven and the connecting When the displacement member is displaced, the protruding portion is brought into contact with the back surface of the first displacement member, so that rattling of the connected displacement member (decorative portion) can be suppressed. In addition, since the overhanging part that serves as a weight can also serve as abutting against the first displacement member and suppressing rattling, the structure can be simplified and parts costs can be reduced accordingly. can be achieved.

A gaming machine A7 in the gaming machine A6, wherein the overhanging portion of the connecting displacement member is formed into a substantially box shape.

According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine A6, since the overhanging portion of the connecting displacement member is formed in a substantially box shape, it is possible to reduce the external size while ensuring its weight and rigidity. can. Therefore, while the connecting displacement member can be displaced with the overhanging portion hidden behind the first displacement member (that is, in a state where it is not visible from the front), it functions as a weight and the rear surface of the first displacement member. It is possible to reliably perform the function of suppressing rattling by coming into contact with.

In any of gaming machines A1 to A7, the base member includes a bearing portion rotatably supporting the first displacement member, and a protruding portion protruding from an outer peripheral surface of the bearing portion, and The first displacement member includes a contact portion formed to be able to come into contact with the protrusion, and the bearing portion pivotally supports the first displacement member in a raised state from the base member, and the first displacement member A game machine A8 characterized in that relative rotation of the first displacement member with respect to the base member is regulated within a predetermined range by abutting the abutting portion.

According to gaming machine A8, in the gaming machine described in any one of gaming machines A1 to A7, the base member includes a bearing portion that rotatably supports the first displacement member, and the bearing portion supports the first displacement member. Since the shaft is supported in a raised state from the base member, a space in which the second displacement member is disposed can be formed between the base member and the first displacement member by such raising. Therefore, the first displacement member and the second displacement member can be arranged in an overlapping posture.

In this case, according to gaming machine A8, the base member further includes a protrusion formed to protrude from the outer circumferential surface of the bearing, and the first displacement member has a contact portion formed so as to be able to come into contact with the protrusion. By having the abutting portion abutting the protruding portion, relative rotation of the first displacement member with respect to the base member can be restricted within a predetermined range. That is, in order to arrange the first displacement member and the second displacement member in an overlapping posture, the bearing portion that raises the first displacement member from the base member has relatively high rigidity, and the outer circumferential side thereof has a Where a dead space is formed, a protrusion is provided protruding from the outer circumferential surface of the bearing part, and a contact part is brought into contact with the protrusion, thereby preventing the relative rotation of the first displacement member with respect to the base member. The rigidity of the regulating portion can be ensured to improve durability, and the dead space can be used effectively, so that the size can be reduced accordingly.

A gaming machine A9 in the gaming machine A8, wherein the protruding portion of the base member is formed so as to be able to come into contact with the back surface of the first displacement member.

According to the game machine A9, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine A8, the protruding portion of the base member is formed so as to be able to come into contact with the back surface of the first displacement member, so that when the first displacement member is displaced, By bringing the protrusion of the base member into contact with the back surface of the first displacement member, it is possible to suppress the wobbling of the first displacement member. In addition, the structure can be simplified because the protrusion, which has the role of regulating the relative displacement of the first displacement member with respect to the base member, can also have the role of abutting against the first displacement member and suppressing rattling. Therefore, parts costs can be reduced accordingly.

In particular, in the game machine A9 subordinate to the game machine A2, since the second displacement member (driven member and connected displacement member) is disposed on the first displacement member, the first displacement member It is necessary to rotate it relative to the base member while supporting it, which tends to cause wobbling. Therefore, a configuration in which the protruding portion of the base member is brought into contact with the back surface of the first displacement member to suppress rattling of the first displacement member is effective.

In gaming machine A9, the first displacement member is pivotally supported at one end in the longitudinal direction by a bearing portion of the base member, and the protrusion of the base member is located at the edge of the first displacement member at one end in the longitudinal direction. A gaming machine A10 characterized in that it is formed so as to be able to come into contact with the back surface.

According to the gaming machine A10, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine A9, one longitudinal end of the first displacement member is pivotally supported by the bearing portion of the base member, and the protrusion of the base member is attached to one longitudinal end of the first displacement member. Since it is formed so as to be able to come into contact with the back surface of the side edge, when the first displacement member tilts due to its own weight, the protrusion can be placed at a position where the tilting can be suppressed. As a result, rattling of the first displacement member can be effectively suppressed.

In the game machine A10, the game machine A11 is characterized in that the protruding part projects from the outer circumferential surface of the bearing part and is connected to the front surface of the base member.

According to the gaming machine A11, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine A10, since the protruding part projects from the outer peripheral surface of the bearing part and is connected to the front surface of the base member, the rigidity of the protruding part can be increased. Can be done. In particular, when the first displacement member tilts due to its own weight, it is possible to increase the rigidity in the direction that supports the tilting (that is, the direction in which the protrusion is pressed against the front surface of the base member), so that the first displacement member tilts due to its own weight. It is possible to effectively suppress sticking.

Gaming machine A12, which is any one of gaming machines A2 to A11, wherein the base member has an inclined surface formed by chamfering the ridgeline portions of the side and front surfaces thereof.

According to the gaming machine A12, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines A2 to A11, the base member has an inclined surface formed by chamfering the ridgeline portions of the side and front surfaces, so that It is possible to prevent the second displacement member from being locked to the side surface of the base member and becoming unable to be displaced. In this case, in the present invention, the connecting displacement member of the second displacement member is disposed on the back surface of the first displacement member in a displaceable cantilever state, so that the first displacement member or (and) the second displacement member When the second displacement member is displaced, the connected displacement member of the second displacement member tends to swing in a direction toward and away from the base member, and the connected displacement member is likely to be locked to the side surface of the base member. Therefore, a configuration in which the base member is provided with an inclined surface is particularly effective.

In the game machine A12, in the second displacement member, the connecting displacement member is formed of a light-transmitting material, and the base member is protruded from the front surface thereof and extends along the displacement direction of the second displacement member. A gaming machine A13 characterized by having a protruding strip.

According to the game machine A13, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine A12, the base member is provided with a protrusion that projects from the front surface and extends along the displacement direction of the second displacement member. can be brought into contact with the second displacement member. Therefore, compared to the case where the entire front surface of the base member comes into contact with the second displacement member, the contact area can be made smaller and sliding resistance can be suppressed.

Here, since the second displacement member is formed of a light-transmissive material, when the second displacement member is displaced to be visually recognized by the player, the irradiated light is transmitted through the second displacement member to create a production effect. can be increased. In this case, when the second displacement member is displaced, if the entire front surface of the base member comes into contact with the connecting displacement member, fogging will be formed on the connecting displacement member due to rubbing with the front surface of the base member. The effect of transmitting light through the connecting displacement member is impaired. On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A12, a protruding strip is formed on the front surface of the base member, and only the tip of the protruding strip can be brought into contact with the connecting displacement member, so that the rubbing of the connecting displacement member can be avoided. It is possible to cause partial clouding due to cloudy weather. As a result, it is possible to produce a dramatic effect by transmitting light through the connected displacement portion.

In the gaming machine A13, the second displacement member connects the driven member and the connection displacement member and includes a connection pin made of a metal material, and the protrusion of the base member is such that the second displacement member A gaming machine A14, characterized in that it extends along the trajectory of the connecting pin when it is displaced.

According to the game machine A14, in addition to the effects of the game machine A13, the second displacement member connects the driven member and the connection displacement member and includes a connection pin made of a metal material, and the convex strip of the base member. is extended along the trajectory of the connecting pin when the second displacement member is displaced, so that the connecting pin can be brought into contact with the protruding tip of the protruding strip. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the formation of fogging on the part of the connecting displacement member made of the light-transmitting material due to friction between the convex stripes and to exhibit the performance effect by transmitting light through the connecting displacement member. Can be done.

The gaming machine A13 or A14 includes a gear interposed between the driving means and the transmission member, and the base member includes a gear receiving part for pivotally supporting the gear in its internal space, and A game machine A15 characterized in that a gear receiving portion is protruded from the front surface of the base member, and the protruding strip is extended to a position corresponding to the gear receiving portion.

According to the gaming machine A15, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine A13 or A14, the protruding strip extends to a position corresponding to the gear receiving portion protruding from the front surface of the base member, so that the second displacement member It is possible to prevent the member from being locked by the gear receiving portion protruding from the side surface and becoming unable to be displaced or whose displacement is inhibited. In other words, by providing a protruding strip on the front surface of the base member and extending the protruding strip to a position corresponding to the gear receiving portion, it is possible to make the gear receiving portion protrude from the front surface of the base member. It can be done. Thereby, the gear can be rotatably stored in the internal space while reducing the thickness of the base member. As a result, for example, it is not necessary to fix the drive shaft of the drive means to the gear (i.e., the gear is held in the gear receiver of the base member, so the drive shaft of the drive means only needs to be inserted through the gear). ) Therefore, manufacturing costs can be reduced accordingly.

In any of gaming machines A1 to A15, the first displacement member and the transmission member are rotatably supported by the base member, and the first displacement member is in a retracted position located in front of the base member. The first displacement member is formed to be displaceable between the base member and an extended position extending in a direction away from the base member, and the rotation axis of the first displacement member is disposed closer to the extended position than the rotation axis of the transmission member. A gaming machine A16 characterized by the following.

According to gaming machine A16, in addition to the effects of any of gaming machines A1 to A15, the first displacement member and the transmission member are rotatably supported by the base member, and the rotation axis of the first displacement member is rotatably supported by the transmission member. Since the area of the first displacement member that is extended to the extended position can be increased, it is possible to increase the area of the first displacement member that is extended to the extended position. Even in the case where the first displacement member is disposed on the back side of the first displacement member, it is possible to easily make it invisible to the player.

In the gaming machine A16, the base member includes a bearing portion that rotatably supports the first displacement member, and the transmission member is configured to rotate the first displacement member when the second displacement member is extended to the extended position. A gaming machine A17 characterized in that it is formed so as to be able to come into contact with a bearing part.

According to the game machine A17, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine A16, the base member includes a bearing portion that rotatably supports the first displacement member, and the transmission member is configured such that the second displacement member is extended to the extended position. Since the second displacement member is formed so as to be able to come into contact with the bearing portion of the base member when the second displacement member is moved, relative rotation of the second displacement member with respect to the first displacement member can be restricted within a predetermined range. In other words, the transmission member that transmits the driving force of the driving means can also serve as a stopper that restricts the relative rotation of the second displacement member with respect to the first displacement member within a predetermined range. By simplifying the structure, it is possible to reduce component costs accordingly.

Further, the bearing part is a part for raising the first displacement member from the base member and arranging the first displacement member and the second displacement member in an overlapping posture, and has relatively high rigidity and , where a dead space is formed on the outer periphery side, by configuring the transmission member to come into contact with such a bearing part, the rigidity of the part that restricts the relative rotation of the second displacement member with respect to the first displacement member is ensured. As a result, durability can be improved, dead space can be used effectively, and the size can be reduced accordingly.

In the gaming machine A17, the transmission member is provided with a recess corresponding to the outer shape of the bearing, and when the second displacement member is extended to the extended position, the bearing is received in the recess. A gaming machine A18 characterized in that it can be formed.

According to the gaming machine A18, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A17, the transmission member is provided with a recess corresponding to the outer shape of the bearing, and when the second displacement member is extended to the extended position, the bearing Since the portion is formed to be receivable in the recess, the movable range of the transmission member can be increased accordingly. Therefore, the amount of displacement of the first displacement member and the second displacement member can be ensured. In other words, while ensuring the movable range of the transmission member, the position of the rotation axis of the transmission member can be brought close to the bearing part, so the first displacement member can be retracted while suppressing the outer shape of the first displacement member. While being displaced between the position and the extended position, it is possible to easily create a state in which the transmission member is hidden behind the first displacement member (that is, a state in which it is not visible from the front).

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A18, when the transmission member is driven in the forward direction, the action sections of the first groove and the second groove receive an action from the transmission member, and the first displacement member and the second After each displacement member is displaced in the first direction, the action section of the second groove receives an action from the transmission member, and the transmission member is made non-interfering with the first groove by the non-interference section; A19 gaming machine characterized in that the first displacement member is stopped, the second displacement member is displaced in a second direction, and the first direction and the second direction are opposite directions. .

According to the game machine A19, in addition to the effects provided by the game machines A1 to A18, when the transmission member is driven in the forward direction, the first displacement member and the second displacement member are respectively displaced in the first direction, and then the second displacement member is displaced in the first direction. The first displacement member is stopped, and the second displacement member is displaced in the second direction. In this case, since the first direction and the second direction are opposite directions, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines A1 to A18, the inertia caused by the stoppage of the first displacement member that has been displaced in the first direction The force can be canceled out by an inertial force when the second displacement member is displaced in the second direction. As a result, the load on the parts due to the action of inertial force can be reduced, and durability can be improved.

The gaming machine A19 includes one or more gears that are interposed between the driving means and the transmission member to transmit driving force, and the weight of the first displacement member is heavier than the weight of the second displacement member. A gaming machine A20 characterized by the following.

According to the game machine A20, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine A19, the weight of the first displacement member is made heavier than the weight of the second displacement member, so when the transmission member is driven in the forward direction, the weight increases. The heavier first displacement member can be stopped first, and the lighter second displacement member can be stopped last. Thereby, the load on the gear can be reduced.

That is, from a state in which the transmission member is driven in the forward direction and the first displacement member and the second displacement member are respectively displaced in the first direction, the first displacement member is stopped and the second displacement member is displaced in the second direction. The transition to the state of being displaced in the direction is performed by the transmission member moving from the transmission section of the first groove to the non-interference section, so the rotation of the drive means and the gear continues. Therefore, even if the first displacement member is stopped, no load is placed on the gear. On the other hand, the transition from the state in which the first displacement member is stopped and the second displacement member is displaced in the second direction to the state in which the second displacement member is also stopped is caused by the rotation of the driving means and the gear. However, in this case, the only member that is stopped is the second displacement member, which is light in weight, so that the load on the gear can be reduced accordingly.

Any one of gaming machines A1 to A20 includes a third displacement member disposed displaceably on the first displacement member, and the third displacement member is displaced under the action of the second displacement member. A gaming machine A21 characterized by:

According to the game machine A21, in addition to the effects of any of the game machines A1 to A20, a third displacement member disposed displaceably on the first displacement member is provided, and the third displacement member has a second displacement member. Since the third displacement member is displaced by the action of the member, the third displacement member can also be displaced in conjunction with the displacement of the second displacement member with respect to the first displacement member.

In the game machine A21, one of the second displacement member and the third displacement member is provided with a drive pin, and the other of the second displacement member and the third displacement member is provided with a third groove, and the third groove is A gaming machine A22, characterized in that it includes an action section that receives an action from the drive pin, and a non-interference section that does not interfere with the drive pin.

According to the game machine A22, in addition to the effects of the game machine A21, one of the second displacement member or the third displacement member is provided with a drive pin, and the other of the second displacement member or the third displacement member is provided with a third groove. The third groove includes an action section that receives an action from the drive pin and a non-interference section that does not interfere with the drive pin, so that both the second displacement member and the third displacement member are displaced with respect to the first displacement member. A mode in which only one of the second displacement member or the third displacement member is displaced with respect to the first displacement member can be formed.

A gaming machine A23 in the gaming machine A21, wherein the second displacement member is disposed so as to be displaceable by the third displacement member.

According to the game machine A23, since the second displacement member is disposed to be displaceable to the third displacement member, when the third displacement member is displaced relative to the first displacement member, the second displacement member is disposed relative to the third displacement member. The relative displacement of the second displacement member with respect to the third displacement member can be superimposed on the relative displacement of the third displacement member with respect to the first displacement member, and as a result, the relative displacement of the second displacement member with respect to the third displacement member The amount of relative displacement of the second displacement member with respect to the displacement member can be increased.

<About the concept of the invention using the left rotation unit 700 as an example>
a base member, a first displacement member disposed displaceably on the base member, a second displacement member disposed displaceably on the first displacement member, and the first displaceable member and the second displaceable member. and a connecting member that connects the base member and the second displacement member, and as the first displacement member is displaced, the second displacement member In a game machine that is relatively displaced with respect to a first displacement member, the connecting member includes a first connecting member that has one end connected to the base member, and another end that is connected to the other end of the first connecting member. and a connecting second member having one end connected to the second displacement member, and a connecting portion between the other ends of the first connecting member and the second connecting member is displaceably connected to the first displacement member. A gaming machine B1 is characterized by the following.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko, a base member, a first displacement member displaceably disposed on the base member, a second displacement member disposed displaceably on the first displacement member, There is a game machine that is equipped with a drive means that generates a driving force for displacing the first displacement member and the second displacement member, and a connecting member that connects the base member and the second displacement member (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-20103 -17886).

According to this game machine, when the first displacement member is displaced by the driving force of the driving means, the connecting member acts between the base member and the second displacement member, so that the first displacement member is displaced. , the second displacement member can be displaced relative to the first displacement member. However, in the conventional game machine described above, when the first displacement member is displaced in the direction away from the base member, the connecting member connecting the base member and the second displacement member is exposed, so that the game There was a problem in that it became visible to people and the appearance was impaired.

On the other hand, according to game machine B1, the connecting members include a first connecting member whose one end is connected to the base member, and a second displacement member whose other end is connected to the other end of the first connecting member. a connecting second member whose one end is connected, and the connecting portion between the other ends of the first connecting member and the second connecting member is movably connected to the first displacement member, so that the first displacement member is connected to the base. Even when the player is displaced in a direction away from the member, the connecting member (the first connecting member and the second connecting member) can be arranged on the back side of the first displacement member to make it difficult for the player to see the connecting member. As a result, it is possible to prevent the connecting member from being exposed and spoiling the appearance.

In the game machine B1, the first displacement member is rotatably disposed on the base member, and the second connecting member of the connecting member is disposed so as to be slidable on the first displacement member. A gaming machine B2.

According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine B1, the first displacement member is rotatably disposed on the base member, and the connecting second member of the connecting member is slidably displaceable by the first displacement member. Therefore, when the first displacement member is rotated relative to the base member, the amount of rotation is large (that is, it is necessary to increase the amount of displacement of the first connecting member and the second connecting member). Even in this case, it is possible to maintain the state in which the second connecting member of the connecting member is disposed on the back surface of the first displacement member and to avoid being visually recognized by the player. As a result, it is possible to prevent the second connecting member of the connecting member from being exposed and spoiling the appearance.

Further, even when an electrical connection line is wired to the first displacement member, the connection second member of the connection member is disposed so as to be slidable on the first displacement member, so that the connection line and the connection second member This makes it easier to suppress interference with Therefore, it is no longer necessary to secure a large space for wiring connection lines in order to avoid interference, and the front view shape of the first displacement member can be made smaller accordingly.

The gaming machine B1 or B2 includes a driving body driven by the driving means, the driving body is connected to the first connecting member of the connecting member, and the driving force of the driving means is transmitted from the driving body to the first connecting member. A game machine B3 characterized in that the first displacement member and the second displacement member are driven by the transmission to the member.

According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine B1 or B2, it is provided with a driving body driven by a driving means, the driving body is connected to the first connecting member of the connecting member, and the driving force of the driving means is Since the first displacement member and the second displacement member are driven by the transmission from the driving body to the first connecting member, it is possible to reduce the size of the first displacement member when viewed from the front.

That is, the connection member is located between the first displacement member and the base member because the connection portion between the other ends of the first connection member and the second connection member is movably connected to the first displacement member. When connecting the driving body to the first displacement member, there is a risk of interference between the driving body and the connecting member, so it is necessary to connect the driving body to the first displacement member at a position that does not overlap with the displacement locus of the connecting member. There is. Therefore, the front view shape of the first displacement member needs to be large enough to include the displacement locus of the connecting member and the connecting portion to which the driving body is connected, and the front view shape of the first displacement member becomes larger accordingly. do. On the other hand, according to the game machine B3, there is no need to avoid interference between the driving body and the connecting member, and the front view shape of the first displacement member only needs to be made to a size that corresponds only to the displacement locus of the connecting member. Since there is no need to include a connecting portion to which the driving body is connected, the front view shape of the first displacement member can be made smaller accordingly.

In gaming machines B1 to B3, the first displacement member is rotatably disposed on the base member and is formed to be movable between a retracted position and an extended position, and the base member is connected to the base-side engaging member. and a displacement-side engagement member formed to be able to engage with the base-side engagement member in a state where the first displacement member is displaced to the retracted position, of the first displacement member or the second displacement member. A game machine B4 characterized in that one side is provided with the game machine B4.

Here, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the connecting member connects the base member and the second displacement member in an erected state, and in the retracted position, at a position relatively distant from the rotation axis of the first displacement member, The base member and the second displacement member are connected by a connecting member. Therefore, even if the first displacement member attempts to tilt its portion opposite to its rotation axis (i.e., the second displacement member side) in a direction away from the base member, there will be no space between the base member and the second displacement member. Due to the action of the intervening connecting member, the tilting can be suppressed.

However, in the gaming machine B4, the connecting portion of the connecting member between the other ends of the first connecting member and the second connecting member is movably connected to the first displacement member. With the rotating shaft as the base end, the portion on the opposite side to the rotating shaft (ie, the second displacement member side) becomes the free end. Therefore, due to its own weight and the weight of the second displacement member, the portion of the first displacement member on the opposite side to the rotation axis (the second displacement member side) tends to tilt in a direction away from the base member.

In this case, according to the game machine B4, in addition to the effects provided by the game machines B1 to B3, the base member includes a base side engagement member, and one of the first displacement member or the second displacement member is disposed on the displacement side. member, and when the first displacement member is displaced to the retracted position, the base-side engagement member and the displacement-side engagement member are formed to be able to engage with each other. It is possible to suppress the portion (second displacement member side) from tilting in the direction away from the base member.

A gaming machine B5 in the gaming machine B4, wherein the second displacement member includes the displacement-side engaging member.

According to the game machine B5, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine B4, the second displacement member includes the displacement side engagement member, so that the engagement position between the base side engagement member and the displacement side engagement member is adjusted to the first position. The position can be relatively far from the rotation axis of the displacement member. Therefore, by utilizing the engagement between the base-side engaging member and the displacement-side engaging member, the portion of the first displacement member on the opposite side to the rotation axis (the second displacement member side) is tilted in a direction away from the base member. It is possible to effectively prevent this from happening.

In gaming machine B5, the base-side engaging member and the displacement-side engaging member are formed by a base that stands up from the front surface of the base member or the back surface of the second displacement member, and a tip of the base that is bent. and bent portions each having an inner surface serving as an engaging surface, and the engaging surfaces of the bent portions are engaged with each other when the first displacement member is displaced from the extended position to the retracted position. , the engagement surface of the bent portion of the base-side engagement member is inclined in a direction that moves away from the front surface of the base member as the engagement tip side thereof approaches, or (and) the engagement surface of the bent portion of the displacement-side engagement member A gaming machine B6 characterized in that the surface is inclined in a direction such that the closer the engagement tip side thereof is, the further away from the back surface of the second displacement member.

Here, when the second displacement member includes a displacement side engagement member as in game machine B5, the engagement position of the base side engagement member and the displacement side engagement member is away from the rotation axis of the first displacement member. Since they are located relatively far apart, it becomes difficult to engage the base-side engaging member and the displacement-side engaging member due to the shaking of the first displacement member.

On the other hand, according to game machine B6, the engagement surface of the bent portion of the base-side engagement member is inclined in a direction that moves away from the front surface of the base member as the engagement tip side approaches, or (and) the displacement-side engagement The engagement surface of the bent portion of the member is inclined in a direction that moves away from the back surface of the second displacement member as the engagement tip side approaches, that is, the engagement surface of the bent portion and the front surface of the base member or the back surface of the second displacement member. Since the distance between the base-side engaging member and the displaceable-side engaging member is wider toward the distal end of the engagement member, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B5, even if the first displacement member shakes, the base-side engagement member and the displacement-side engagement member are can be easily engaged.

Furthermore, according to game machine B6, the engagement surface of the bent portion of at least one of the base-side engagement member and the displacement-side engagement member is inclined as described above, so that the first displacement member is directed toward the retracted position. When the second displacement member is displaced, the second displacement member can be brought closer to the base member as the engagement surface of the bent portion inclines. Thereby, in the retracted position, it is possible to suppress the protrusion dimension of the second displacement member from the base member, and it is also possible to absorb the rattling of the second displacement member and maintain its posture.

In the gaming machine B5 or B6, the base-side engaging member and the displacement-side engaging member include a base that stands up from the front surface of the base member or the back surface of the second displacement member, and a tip of the base that is bent. and bent portions whose inner surfaces serve as engaging surfaces, and the engaging surfaces of the bent portions are engaged with each other when the first displacement member is displaced from the extended position to the retracted position. A gaming machine B7, characterized in that a receiving portion for receiving a bent portion of an opponent is formed on the front surface of the base member and the back surface of the second displacement member.

According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine B5 or B6, receiving portions for receiving the bent portion of the opponent are formed on the front surface of the base member and the back surface of the second displacement member. When the displacement member is disposed at the retracted position (the base-side engaging member and the displacement-side engaging member are engaged), the bent portion is received in the receiving portion and the second displacement member approaches the base member. displacement in the direction can be tolerated. Therefore, while increasing the upright dimensions of the bases of the base-side engaging member and the displacement-side engaging member to facilitate engagement between the base-side engaging member and the displacement-side engaging member, the second By allowing the displacement member to move in a direction approaching the base member, damage caused by a collision can be prevented.

In any of gaming machines B3 to B7, when the first displacement member is disposed at the extended position, the displacement side engaging member is engaged with the first displacement member. Game machine B8.

According to the game machine B8, in addition to the effects produced by any of the game machines B3 to B7, when the first displacement member is disposed in the extended position, the displacement side engaging member is moved to the first displacement member. In other words, the first displacement member and the second displacement member can be coupled via the displacement-side engagement member. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the second displacement member from shaking relative to the first displacement member in the extended position. In addition, the displacement-side engagement member, which has the role of engaging with the base-side engagement member at the retracted position and coupling the second displacement member to the base member, engages with the first displacement member at the extended position and performs the second displacement. Since the member can also serve the role of coupling the member to the first displacement member, the structure can be simplified and the cost of parts can be reduced accordingly.

Any one of gaming machines B1 to B8 includes intervening means interposed between the second displacement member and one end of the second connecting member, and the intervening means Different modes of action occur between the second displacement member and one end of the second connecting member depending on whether the first displacement member is displaced in the first direction or in the second direction. Game machine B9 is characterized by:

According to the gaming machine B9, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines B1 to B8, the gaming machine B9 includes an intervening means interposed between the second displacement member and one end of the second connecting member, and the intervening means is the effect that occurs between the second displacement member and one end of the second connecting member when the first displacement member is displaced in the first direction and when it is displaced in the second direction with respect to the base member. Since the modes are different, the mode of displacement of the second displacement member with respect to the first displacement member is determined depending on whether the first displacement member is displaced in the first direction or in the second direction with respect to the base member. can be made different.

In gaming machine B9, the intervening means includes a guided portion disposed at one end of the first displacement member or the second connected member, and a guided portion disposed at one end of the first displacement member or the second connected member. a guide part disposed on the other side to guide the guided part, and when the first displacement member is displaced in the first direction and in the second direction with respect to the base member, A gaming machine B10 characterized in that the mode of action produced between the second displacement member and one end of the second connecting member is made different by guiding the guide part along different routes of the guide part.

According to the game machine B10, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine B9, the intervening means has different effects when the first displacement member is displaced in the first direction and in the second direction with respect to the base member. By guiding the guide part along different paths of the guided part, the modes of action that occur between the second displacement member and one end of the second connecting member are made different, so that the The mode of displacement of the second displacement member relative to the first displacement member can be easily changed. That is, the degree of freedom in its design can be increased.

In gaming machine B9, the intervening means acts between the second displacement member and one end of the second connecting member when the first displacement member is displaced in the first direction with respect to the base member. on the other hand, when the first displacement member is displaced in the second direction with respect to the base member, the action between the second displacement member and one end of the second connecting member is released. A gaming machine B11.

According to the gaming machine B11, the intervening means causes an action between the second displacement member and one end of the connecting second member when the first displacement member is displaced in the first direction with respect to the base member. On the other hand, when the first displacement member is displaced in the second direction with respect to the base member, the action between the second displacement member and one end of the connected second member is released, so that the first displacement member with respect to the base member is The manner in which the second displacement member is displaced with respect to the first displacement member can be easily made to differ greatly between when the member is displaced in the first direction and when the member is displaced in the second direction.

<About the concept of the invention using the center frame 86 as an example>
A game board having a play area on the front side and an opening formed in the center, and a retracted position on the back side of the game board and an extended position that is visible through the opening. The game machine includes a center frame made of a light-transmitting material and installed in an opening of the game board, and the center frame forms a part of the game area. A gaming machine C1 characterized by comprising an area forming section.

Here, in a game machine such as pachinko, there is a game board that has a play area on the front and an opening in the center, and a retracted position on the back side of the game board and a wall that is visible through the opening. There is a gaming machine that includes a displacement member that is formed to be displaceable between exit positions (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2014-176580).

According to this gaming machine, the opening of the gaming board is made larger than the outer shape of the liquid crystal display device, thereby ensuring an area in which the displacement member can be viewed. However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, it is necessary to secure an area in the gaming area for the ball to flow down, so there is a limit to increasing the opening of the gaming board, and the area where the displacement member can be seen is limited. There was a problem that it was not possible to secure enough.

On the other hand, the gaming machine C1 includes a center frame that is made of a light-transmitting material and is installed inside the opening of the gaming board, and the center frame includes an area forming part that forms a part of the gaming area. Therefore, the displacement member can be visually recognized through the area forming portion. Therefore, while securing an area in the game area for the ball to flow down, it is possible to secure a sufficient area in which the displacement member can be visually recognized.

In the gaming machine C1, the area forming portion of the center frame forms a continuous area from the inner edge of the opening of the gaming board to the outer edge of the gaming area as part of the gaming area. C2.

According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C1, the area forming portion of the center frame forms a continuous area from the inner edge of the opening of the gaming board to the outer edge of the gaming area as part of the gaming area. Therefore, the area where the displacement member can be visually recognized can be secured to the maximum extent.

In gaming machine C2, gaming machine C3 is characterized in that the area forming portion of the center frame is set to a width that allows only one gaming ball to pass through.

According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C2, the area forming portion of the center frame is set to a width that allows only one game ball to pass through (through the opening of the game board). That is, it is possible to secure the maximum area in which the displacement member can be visually recognized (without using the center frame).

A gaming machine C4 in the gaming machine C2 or C3, wherein the area forming part of the center frame includes a downstream wall part that is erected on the downstream side of the area and is integrally formed with the center frame.

Here, if the center frame is made of a resin material and nails cannot be implanted therein, the falling speed of the game balls increases, making it difficult for the player to visually recognize the falling game balls.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C4, the area forming part of the center frame includes a downstream wall part erected on the downstream side of the area, so that the game ball flowing down the area forming part hits the downstream wall part. can be brought into contact. Therefore, in addition to the effects of the game machine C2 or C3, the falling speed of the game ball can be reduced to make it easier for the player to visually recognize it. In addition, since the downstream wall part is integrally formed with the center frame, it can be easily molded by molding, and there is no need to fasten and fix separate parts, so manufacturing costs can be reduced accordingly. .

In the gaming machine C4, the area forming part of the center frame is provided with a side wall part that is erected in the area and defines a passage through which the game balls flow and is integrally formed with the center frame, and the side wall part is provided with a side wall part that is integrally formed with the center frame. A game machine C5 characterized in that it is connected to a wall.

According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C4, the area forming part of the center frame is provided with a side wall part that is erected within the area and partitions a passage through which the game balls flow, and the side wall part is arranged downstream Since it is connected to the wall, it is possible to increase the rigidity of the downstream wall that receives the game balls flowing down. This can prevent damage to the downstream wall. In addition, since the connecting wall is integrally formed with the center frame, it can be easily molded by molding, and there is no need to fasten and fix separate parts, so manufacturing costs can be reduced accordingly. . Furthermore, the side wall portion that serves to divide the path through which the game balls flow can also serve the role of increasing the rigidity of the downstream wall portion, simplifying the structure and reducing component costs accordingly. be able to.

The game machine C5 is characterized in that it includes an inner rail that is erected from the front surface of the game board and guides the shot game balls to the game area, and the side wall portion is arranged in parallel with the inner rail. Machine C6.

In conventional game machines, the game ball flowing down the game area collides with the inner rail after colliding with a nail and bouncing, and the speed is relatively slow, which can cause damage to the inner rail. There were no problems such as inviting In contrast, in the present invention, in order to maximize the area where the displacement member can be seen, the width of the area forming part that forms part of the game area is narrow (for example, only one game ball can pass through). width). That is, the width of the game area is narrowed down by the area forming section. Therefore, on the upstream side of the area forming part, it becomes necessary to guide the game balls that have flowed down the gaming area towards the area forming part, and as a result of this guidance, some of the game balls move at a relatively high speed to the inner rail. There is a risk of collision and bending of the inner rail.

On the other hand, according to the game machine C6, since the side wall portion is arranged in parallel with the inner rail, the game ball flowing down the game area is guided toward the area forming portion, and as a result, the game ball is directed toward the inner rail. Even if the game ball flows down, the side wall portion can catch the game ball and prevent it from colliding with the inner rail. As a result, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C5, bending of the inner rail can be suppressed.

The gaming machine C5 or C6 includes a light emitting means that is arranged on the back side of the area forming part of the center frame and is formed to be able to emit light, and the side wall part is configured to emit light emitted from the light emitting means. A gaming machine C7 characterized in that it is formed to be able to function as a light guide that guides to the front side of the gaming area.

According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine C5 or C6, the side wall portion is formed to be able to function as a light guide that guides the light emitted from the light emitting means to the front side of the gaming area. It is possible to achieve a dramatic effect. In particular, in the gaming machine C7 that is subordinate to the gaming machine C6, since the side wall portion is arranged in parallel with the inner rail, leakage of light can be reduced by the inner rail, and the amount of light that can be guided can be increased accordingly. . As a result, the effect of light can be enhanced.

A gaming machine C8 in the gaming machine C7, wherein the light emitting means is disposed on the displacement member, and a retracted position of the displacement member is on the back side of the area forming portion of the center frame.

According to the game machine C8, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine C7, the light emitting means is disposed on the displacement member, and the retracted position of the displacement member is the back side of the area forming portion of the center frame, so that the displacement member is placed in the retracted position, the displacement member is made visible through the area forming portion of the center frame, and the light emitted from the light emitting means of the displacement member is guided through the side wall portion. It can be visually recognized. This makes it possible to enhance the effect of light.

In any of the gaming machines C1 to C8, the area forming part of the center frame defines a passage that is erected within the area and through which the game balls flow, and also has a pair of side walls formed integrally with the center frame. A gaming machine C9 comprising: one or more protrusions protruding from opposing surfaces of the pair of side wall portions.

Here, if the center frame is made of a resin material and nails cannot be planted in the area forming part, the speed of the game ball flowing down the passage divided by the pair of side walls will increase, and the game ball will be It becomes difficult for people to see.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C9, since one or more protrusions are provided protruding from each of the opposing surfaces of the pair of side walls, when the game ball flows down the passage defined by the pair of side walls, In addition, the game ball can be made to collide with the protrusion to prevent it from flowing down. As a result, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines C1 to C8, the falling speed of the game balls can be slowed down, making it easier for the player to visually recognize the falling game balls.

A gaming machine C10 in the gaming machine C9, characterized in that the protrusions on one opposing surface of the pair of side walls and the protrusions on the other opposing surface are arranged in a staggered manner.

According to the gaming machine C10, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine C9, the protrusions on one opposing surface of the pair of side walls and the protrusions on the other opposing surface are arranged in a staggered manner, so that the pair of side walls are partitioned. When a game ball flows down a passageway, the game ball can alternately collide with the right and left protrusions to cause the game ball to meander. As a result, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C9, the falling speed of the game ball can be made slower, making it easier for the player to see the falling game ball, and the falling game ball can also be moved in a direction perpendicular to the flowing direction. It is possible to change the movement of the game ball by displacing it.

In the gaming machine C10, the area forming portion of the center frame is provided with a groove recessed in the front surface thereof and extending in a substantially saw blade shape.

According to the gaming machine C11, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine C10, the area forming part of the center frame is provided with a recessed groove that is recessed in the front surface and extends in a substantially saw blade shape, so that the area forming part can be used for playing games. When the ball flows down, the game ball can be guided by the inner surface of the groove and made to meander. Thereby, the falling speed of the game balls can be slowed down, making it easier for the player to visually recognize the falling game balls. Furthermore, according to the gaming machine C11 subordinate to the gaming machine C7, the concave groove can be used as a lens to guide the light emitted from the light emitting means to the front of the gaming area, thereby producing a performance effect using light. can do.

In the gaming machine C11, the gaming machine C12 is characterized in that the bent portion of the concave groove is disposed offset from the protrusion in the downstream direction of the game ball.

According to the gaming machine C12, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C11, the bent portion of the concave groove is disposed offset from the protrusion in the direction in which the game ball flows down, so that the game ball flows down the area forming part. In this case, the meandering game balls guided by the inner surface of the concave groove can easily collide with the protrusions alternately. Therefore, a synergistic effect can be obtained by utilizing both the effect of the groove and the effect of the protrusion. As a result, the falling speed of the game balls can be made slower, making it easier for the player to visually recognize the falling game balls. Moreover, the change in the movement of the game ball can be made larger.

In the gaming machine C10, the area forming portion of the center frame is provided with a convex strip that projects from the front surface and extends in a substantially saw blade shape.

According to the gaming machine C13, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine C10, the area forming part of the center frame is provided with a convex strip that protrudes from the front surface and extends in a substantially saw blade shape. When the ball flows down, the game ball can be guided by the outer surface of the convex stripes and made to meander. Thereby, the falling speed of the game balls can be slowed down, making it easier for the player to visually recognize the falling game balls. Furthermore, according to the gaming machine C13 that is subordinate to the gaming machine C7, the light emitted from the light emitting means can be guided to the front of the gaming area by using the convex strip as a lens, and the effect of the light can be exhibited. can do.

In the gaming machine C13, the gaming machine C14 is characterized in that the bent portion of the protrusion is arranged so as to correspond to the downward direction of the game ball with respect to the protrusion.

According to the game machine C14, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine C13, the bent portion of the convex strip is arranged so as to match the downward direction of the game ball with respect to the protrusion, so that the game ball does not flow down the area forming part. In this case, the meandering game balls guided by the outer surface of the protrusions can easily collide with the protrusions alternately. Therefore, a synergistic effect can be obtained by utilizing both the effect of the protrusions and the effect of the protrusions. As a result, the falling speed of the game balls can be made slower, making it easier for the player to visually recognize the falling game balls. Moreover, the change in the movement of the game ball can be made larger.

In any of the gaming machines C11 to C14, the end side of the groove or the protrusion has an extension direction that overlaps the downstream wall portion and is directed toward the exit of the passage defined by the pair of side wall portions. Characteristic gaming machine C15.

According to the gaming machine C15, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines C11 to C14, the terminal end side of the concave groove or the convex strip has an extension direction that overlaps with the downstream wall section and is partitioned by a pair of side wall sections. Since it is oriented toward the exit of the passage, the game ball guided to the end side of the concave groove or convex strip can collide with the downstream wall from an oblique direction, thereby suppressing the bouncing of the game ball and preventing it from bouncing. The game balls can be flown down toward the exit of the passage while reducing the speed of flow. As a result, the game balls can be smoothly flowed out from the exit of the passage.

<About the concept of the invention using the winning device 65 as an example>
The seesaw member includes a seesaw member rotatably supported between one end side and the other end side by a rotating shaft, and the seesaw member has a first end side that is lowered and the other end side is raised in an unloaded state. In the game machine, the seesaw member forms a second state in which one end is raised and the other end is lowered by placing the game ball on the other end side of the rotating shaft. The seesaw member includes a guide means for guiding the game ball to the guide means, and the seesaw member includes a receiving surface for receiving the game ball guided from the guide means, and the receiving surface is located closer to the one end than the rotating shaft. A gaming machine D1.

Here, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine is provided with a seesaw member whose one end side and the other end side are rotatably supported by a rotating shaft, and when the seesaw member is in an unloaded state, one end side is lowered. A first state is formed in which the other end is raised and the other end is raised, and a second state in which one end is raised and the other end is lowered by placing the game ball on the other end side of the rotation axis. There is a gaming machine that forms the following (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2007-283136).

According to this gaming machine, when a game ball is dropped onto the seesaw member in the first state and placed between the rotating shaft and the other end, due to the weight of the game ball, The other end is lowered and one end is raised, forming a second state. On the other hand, when the game ball placed between the rotating shaft and the other end side is ejected, the other end side is raised and the one end side is lowered, returning to the first state. That is, the first state and the second state can be made to appear alternately by using the weight of the dropped game ball, and the effect is created by the movement in which one end side and the other end side of the seesaw member are displaced up and down. It can be carried out.

However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, when a plurality of game balls are dropped in succession, they are maintained in the second state in which the other end is lowered and one end is raised, and the first state and the second state are changed. There was a problem in that it was not possible to switch between the two.

On the other hand, according to the game machine D1, the receiving surface of the seesaw member that receives the game balls guided from the guide means is located closer to one end than the rotating shaft, so the other end is lowered and the one end is raised. Even in the second state, the one end side can be lowered by the weight of the game ball received by the receiving surface. That is, a first state can be formed in which one end is lowered and the other end is raised. As a result, even if a plurality of game balls are continuously dropped, it is possible to easily switch between the first state and the second state.

The gaming machine D1 is characterized in that, when the receiving surface receives a gaming ball guided from the guiding means in the first state, the receiving surface can send the gaming ball to the other end side. Game machine D2.

According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D1, the receiving surface is formed so that when a gaming ball guided from the guiding means is received in the first state, the receiving surface can send out the gaming ball to the other end side. Therefore, switching from the first state to the second state can be performed reliably.

In addition, examples of the form in which the game ball can be delivered to the other end include a form in which the receiving surface is inclined downward from one end side to the other end even in the first state, a form in which a projection is formed on the receiving surface, An example is a form in which the protrusion is formed in a shape that bounces the game ball guided from the guide means to the other end side.

The gaming machine D1 or D2 includes a rotatably supported decorative member, one end side of the seesaw member is connected to the decorative member, and as the seesaw member rotates about the rotation axis, the decorative member A gaming machine D3 characterized in that the is displaced.

According to the game machine D3, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine D1 or D2, the game machine D3 includes a rotatably supported decorative member, one end of the seesaw member is connected to the decorative member, and the game machine D3 has the effects of the game machine D1 or D2. Since a link mechanism is formed in which the decorative member is displaced as the decorative member rotates, the movable range of the decorative member can be expanded depending on the link ratio, and the performance effect can be enhanced.

Here, in order to reliably switch the seesaw member between the first state and the second state, it is necessary to set the seesaw member to the first state in which one end is lowered and the other end is raised when the no-load state is reached. It is preferable that the seesaw member can be returned to its original position quickly. In this case, according to the gaming machine D3, since a decorative member is connected to one end of the seesaw member, the weight of the decorative member is applied to the one end of the seesaw member to lower the one end. be able to. Therefore, when the no-load state occurs, the seesaw member can be easily returned to the first state in which one end is lowered and the other end is raised, and as a result, the seesaw member can be changed between the first state and the second state. You can easily switch between states.

The weight of the decorative member prevents one end of the seesaw member from rising (forming the second state), but since the weight of the game ball is sufficiently heavy, the weight of the game ball is higher than the rotation axis of the seesaw member. By also placing it on the other end side, a second state can be formed in which one end side is raised and the other end side is lowered.

In any of the gaming machines D1 to D3, the guide means includes a passage through which the game ball passes, and at the end of the passage there is a rolling device extending in a substantially horizontal direction and on which the game ball rolls. A game machine D4 characterized in that a horizontal passage having a guide surface is formed, and a game ball rolling on the rolling guide surface of the horizontal passage is guided to the receiving surface of the seesaw member from a substantially horizontal direction.

According to the game machine D4, in addition to the effects provided by the game machines D1 to D3, the guide means is provided with a passage through which the game balls pass, so that a plurality of game balls can be stored using the passage. , the plurality of game balls can be sequentially guided from the passage to the receiving surface of the seesaw member.

However, even in this case, in a configuration in which the game balls are guided by falling onto the receiving surface of the seesaw member from above, if multiple game balls are guided in succession, these multiple game balls will fall onto the receiving surface. Therefore, the seesaw member cannot be alternately switched between the first state and the second state.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D4, a horizontal passage is formed at the end of the passage and has a rolling guide surface extending in a substantially horizontal direction and on which a game ball rolls, and the horizontal passage has a rolling guide surface on which a game ball rolls. Since the game balls rolling on the moving guide surface are guided to the receiving surface of the seesaw member from a substantially horizontal direction, the balls can be guided one by one from the horizontal path to the receiving surface of the seesaw member (i.e., the receiving surface is horizontal). Balls can be received one by one from the passage), and it is possible to avoid a plurality of game balls from being piled up on the receiving surface. Therefore, the seesaw member can be easily switched between the first state and the second state.

In the gaming machine D4, the guide means includes an upstream passage connected to the upstream side of the horizontal passage and extending in a direction different from the extending direction of the horizontal passage, and the guiding means has an upstream passage connected to the upstream side of the horizontal passage and extending in a direction different from the extending direction of the horizontal passage. A game machine D5, wherein the size is set to be smaller than twice the diameter of a game ball.

According to the game machine D5, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine D4, the guide means includes an upstream passage connected to the upstream side of the horizontal passage and extending in a direction different from the extending direction of the horizontal passage, Since the extended length of the horizontal passage is set to be smaller than twice the diameter of the game ball, even if multiple game balls are stored in the passage, each game ball can be placed one by one on the receiving surface of the seesaw member. Guidance can be provided at intervals.

That is, since the extended length of the horizontal passage is set to be smaller than twice the diameter of the game ball, only one game ball can exist in the horizontal passage, and the length of the horizontal passage can be set to be smaller than twice the diameter of the game ball. Since the installation direction and the extension direction of the upstream passage are different from each other, when the ball flows from the upstream passage to the horizontal passage, it becomes necessary to change the inflow direction. The time required for flowing into the horizontal passage can be increased. Therefore, when the first game ball existing in the horizontal passage is guided to the receiving surface of the seesaw member, the game ball after the upstream passage flows into the horizontal passage while taking time to change direction, and after that, A game ball is guided from the horizontal passage to the receiving surface of the seesaw member. That is, the later game ball is spaced apart from the previous game ball. As a result, the game balls can be guided one ball at a time to the receiving surface of the seesaw member at intervals.

A gaming machine D6, which is the gaming machine D4 or D5, wherein at least in the second state, the receiving surface of the seesaw member is located above the rolling guide surface of the horizontal passage.

According to the game machine D6, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine D4 or D5, at least in the second state (the state in which one end is raised and the other end is lowered), the receiving surface of the seesaw member is rotated in the horizontal passage. Since a step is formed between the receiving surface and the rolling guide surface located above the guide surface, the game ball that has rolled on the rolling guide surface of the horizontal path is guided to the receiving surface of the seesaw member. When the game ball is played, it can be caused to ride on the receiving surface (collide with a step), and this riding motion (collision) can be used to make it easier to lower the receiving surface of the seesaw member. As a result, it is possible to easily create the first state in which one end is lowered and the other end is raised.

In the gaming machine D6, at least in the first state, the receiving surface of the seesaw member is located flush with the rolling guide surface of the horizontal passage or located below the rolling guide surface of the horizontal passage. Characteristic gaming machine D7.

Here, the seesaw member being in the first state means that the seesaw member is in an unloaded state and promptly sends the game ball guided from the horizontal passage and received on the receiving surface to the other end side. This means that it is required to apply the weight of the game ball to the other end side of the rotation axis and lower the other end side (forming the second state).

In this case, according to the gaming machine D7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D6, at least in the first state, the receiving surface of the seesaw member is located flush with the rolling guide surface of the horizontal passage, or the receiving surface of the seesaw member is located flush with the rolling guide surface of the horizontal passage. Since it is located below the rolling guide surface, the game ball can be smoothly guided from the rolling guide surface of the horizontal passage to the receiving surface of the seesaw member. That is, there is no need for the game ball to ride on the receiving surface (collide with the step) as in the case of the second state, and it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a time lag in such an operation. Therefore, the game ball can be quickly sent out to the other end, and as a result, the second state in which one end is raised and the other end is lowered can be easily formed.

In addition, in the first state, it is preferable that the receiving surface of the seesaw member is located flush with the rolling guide surface of the horizontal passage. If the receiving surface of the seesaw member is located below the rolling guide surface of the horizontal path, the game ball guided from the rolling guide surface of the horizontal path will fall onto the receiving surface of the seesaw member, so the game ball will This is because the bounce causes a time lag and the impact of the fall increases the load on the rotating shaft of the seesaw member.

In any of the gaming machines D1 to D7, the seesaw member is formed such that the other end thereof is bent upward in a substantially dogleg shape when viewed in the axial direction of the rotating shaft. Machine D8.

According to the gaming machine D8, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines D1 to D7, the other end of the seesaw member is bent upward in a substantially dogleg shape when viewed in the axial direction of the rotating shaft. Therefore, the space required for disposing the seesaw member can be suppressed, and the seesaw member can be easily switched between the first state and the second state.

That is, if the seesaw member has an insufficient downward slope on the other end side than the rotation axis, the time during which the game ball is placed on the other end side (i.e., the other end side is lowered and the second state is The formation time) becomes longer, and alternating switching between the first state and the second state is inhibited. However, if the entire area on the other end side of the rotating shaft is sloped downward, the other end side will protrude from the space allowed for arranging the seesaw member (in other words, the space required for arranging the seesaw member will increase). ). On the other hand, if the length from the rotating shaft to the other end is shortened to fit within the space allowed for the seesaw member, the length of time the game ball is placed on the other end (i.e., The time during which the other end is lowered and the second state is formed becomes shorter, and the formation of the second state becomes uncertain, which impedes alternating switching between the first state and the second state. In addition, in order to fit the seesaw member into the allowable space while maintaining the length from the rotating shaft to the other end, the downward slope of the other end from the rotating shaft is insufficient. .

On the other hand, by forming the other end of the seesaw member into a shape that is bent upward in a substantially dogleg shape when viewed in the axial direction of the rotating shaft, each of the above-mentioned problems can be solved, and as a result, The seesaw member can be easily switched between the first state and the second state while suppressing the space required for disposing the seesaw member.

Any one of the gaming machines D1 to D8 is provided with an inlet into which a game ball rolled from the rotation axis of the seesaw member toward the other end side flows in, and the other end side of the seesaw member is provided with A game machine D9 is characterized in that a claw portion is provided in a protruding manner so as to be able to switch the rolling direction of the game balls rolled from the rotating shaft toward the other end side to the direction toward the inflow port.

According to the game machine D9, in any of the game machines D1 to D8, the other end side of the seesaw member has a rolling direction of the game ball rolled from the rotating shaft toward the other end side toward the inflow port. Since the protruding claw portion is formed so that the direction can be changed, the game balls can be quickly flowed into the inflow port. Therefore, the time during which the game ball is placed on the other end of the seesaw member (that is, the time during which the other end is lowered and the second state is formed) becomes too long, and the first state and the second state are It is possible to prevent interference with alternating switching between the two.

A gaming machine D10 in the gaming machine D9, wherein the claw portion is disposed biased toward a side opposite to the inlet in the width direction of the seesaw member.

According to the game machine D10, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine D9, the pawl portion is disposed on the opposite side of the inlet in the width direction of the seesaw member, so that the rolling position of the game ball is aligned with the position of the seesaw member. Even if there is variation in the width direction, the time during which the game ball is placed on the other end side of the rotation axis of the seesaw member (i.e., the time during which the other end side is lowered and the second state is formed) is determined. It can be easily kept constant.

That is, the claw portion is disposed biased toward the side opposite to the inflow port in the width direction of the seesaw member, so that the game ball rolling on the back side of the seesaw member in the width direction (opposite side to the inflow port) Since the distance to the inflow port in the width direction of the seesaw member is long, a game in which the seesaw member collides with the claw part at an early stage and rolls toward the inflow port, while rolling on the front side of the seesaw member in the width direction (closer to the inflow port). Since the ball has a short distance to the inlet in the width direction of the seesaw member, it is possible to delay the ball from colliding with the claw portion. Thereby, in each of the former and the latter, the time during which the game ball is placed on the other end side of the rotation axis of the seesaw member can be made similar to each other.

As a result, even if the rolling position of the game ball varies in the width direction of the seesaw member, the time the game ball is placed on the other end side of the rotation axis of the seesaw member (i.e., the other end side is It is possible to easily keep the period during which the second state is formed (the time during which the first state is lowered and the second state is formed) constant.

Any of the gaming machines D1 to D10 is provided with an inlet into which a game ball rolled from the rotation axis of the seesaw member toward the other end flows in, and the width of the inlet is equal to the diameter of the game ball. A game machine D11 characterized in that the size is set to be larger than twice.

According to the gaming machine D11, any one of the gaming machines D1 to D10 is provided with an inlet into which the game ball rolled from the rotation axis of the seesaw member toward the other end side flows in, and the width of the inlet is is set to a size larger than twice the diameter of the game ball, so the next game ball is further rolled toward the other end while the previous game ball is present at the other end of the seesaw member. In this case, each of these game balls can be smoothly flowed into the inflow port. For example, even if a later game ball collides with a previous game ball and these game balls are simultaneously rolled into the inflow port, each can be made to flow in smoothly.

In the game machine D11, the game machine D12 is characterized in that the height of the inlet on the rotating shaft side is set to be larger than the height on the other end side of the seesaw member.

According to the game machine D12, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine D11, the height of the inflow port on the rotating shaft side is set to be larger than the height on the other end side of the seesaw member. Even if the next game ball rolls further toward the other end and collides with the previous game ball at the other end of the seesaw member, each of these game balls can be smoothly guided to the inflow port. can be allowed to flow in. In other words, even if the game ball bounces up after colliding with the previous game ball, the height of the inflow port on the rotating shaft side is increased, so the height can be used to bounce the subsequent game ball. It can be discharged smoothly. On the other hand, even if the first game ball is collided with the second game ball, it is difficult to be thrown up, so by lowering the height dimension at the other end, the first game ball can smoothly flow into the inlet. At the same time, the space required for the inlet can be suppressed, and the space for arranging other members can be secured accordingly.

Any one of the gaming machines D1 to D12 is characterized by comprising a suppressing means for suppressing guidance of the game ball from the guiding means to the seesaw member when the seesaw member is disposed in at least the second state. Game machine D13.

According to the gaming machine D13, any one of the gaming machines D1 to D12 includes a suppressing means for suppressing the guiding of the game ball from the guiding means to the seesaw member when the seesaw member is disposed in at least the second state. , it is possible to secure the time for the game ball on the other end side of the seesaw member to be ejected. As a result, even if a plurality of game balls are continuously dropped, it is possible to easily switch between the first state and the second state.

In the game machine D13, the guide means includes a delivery port for sending game balls to the seesaw member, and the suppressing means includes a regulating portion disposed closer to one end of the seesaw member than the rotating shaft, When the seesaw member is rotated to at least a second state, at least a portion of the regulating portion projects toward the delivery port, thereby suppressing delivery of game balls from the delivery port to the seesaw member. A gaming machine D14.

According to the gaming machine D14, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine D13, the restraining means includes a regulating portion disposed closer to one end of the seesaw member than the rotating shaft, and the seesaw member is rotated to at least the second state. By causing at least a portion of the regulating portion to protrude toward the delivery port, delivery of game balls from the delivery port to the seesaw member is suppressed, so the structure can be simplified and product costs can be reduced. That is, the seesaw member can also serve as a mechanism for protruding the restricting portion from the outlet, and a drive mechanism for displacing the restricting portion and a control means for controlling the timing of displacement thereof can be omitted.

In addition, the state in which the regulating portion protrudes toward the delivery port and the delivery of game balls is suppressed means that the gaming machine cannot pass through the delivery port, and the game ball can pass through the delivery port. Including both. Even in the latter case (passable), the regulation part is projected toward the delivery port and the passage width of the delivery port is narrowed, so that the game ball collides with the inner wall of the delivery port and the outer wall of the regulation part. Since the game ball is sent out from the delivery port, throwing of the game ball is suppressed. In other words, the connected game balls can be separated.

<About the concept of the invention using the winning device 65 as an example>
The seesaw member includes a seesaw member rotatably supported between one end side and the other end side by a rotating shaft, and the seesaw member has a first end side that is lowered and the other end side is raised in an unloaded state. In the gaming machine, the game ball is placed on the other end side of the rotating shaft to form a second state in which one end side is raised and the other end side is lowered. A game machine E1 characterized in that it is equipped with a discharge means that makes it easier to discharge game balls placed on the other end side.

Here, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine is provided with a seesaw member whose one end side and the other end side are rotatably supported by a rotating shaft, and when the seesaw member is in an unloaded state, one end side is lowered. A first state is formed in which the other end is raised and the other end is raised, and a second state in which one end is raised and the other end is lowered by placing the game ball on the other end side of the rotation axis. There is a gaming machine that forms the following (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2007-283136).

According to this gaming machine, when a game ball is dropped onto the seesaw member in the first state and placed between the rotating shaft and the other end, due to the weight of the game ball, The other end is lowered and one end is raised, forming a second state. On the other hand, when the game ball placed between the rotating shaft and the other end side is ejected, the other end side is raised and the one end side is lowered, returning to the first state. That is, the first state and the second state can be made to appear alternately by using the weight of the dropped game ball, and the effect is created by the movement in which one end side and the other end side of the seesaw member are displaced up and down. It can be carried out.

However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, when a plurality of game balls are dropped in succession, they are maintained in the second state in which the other end is lowered and one end is raised, and the first state and the second state are changed. There was a problem in that it was not possible to switch between the two.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E1, the seesaw member is provided with a discharging means that facilitates discharging the game balls placed on the other end side, so that the second Even in this state, the game ball can be discharged from the other end side by the discharge means, the weight of the game ball at the other end side can be removed, and the one end side can be easily lowered. That is, the state in which the game ball is placed on the other end side of the rotating shaft (that is, the state in which the second state is formed) is ended early, and one end side is lowered while the other end side is raised. A first state can be formed. As a result, even if a plurality of game balls are continuously dropped, it is possible to easily switch between the first state and the second state.

In the gaming machine E1, the ejecting means includes a rotatably supported shaft, a receiving portion disposed on one side of the shaft supporting and receiving a game ball guided from the guiding means, and the receiving portion. and an extrusion section disposed across the shaft support part, and when the receiving part receives the game ball guided from the guide means, rotation about the shaft support part causes the extrusion part to be pushed out. A game machine E2 characterized in that a portion of the seesaw member protrudes toward the other end side of the seesaw member.

According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E1, when the receiving part receives the game ball guided from the guiding means, the ejecting part rotates about the shaft support, and the ejecting part moves from the seesaw member. Since it is protruded to the other end side, the game ball placed on the other end side of the seesaw member can be pushed out by the extrusion part and discharged from the seesaw member. As a result, the other end of the seesaw member can be raised by ejecting the game balls by the extrusion part, and the one end of the seesaw member can be lowered by the weight of the game balls received by the receiving part, so that the second state can be maintained. By ending the process early, it is possible to easily switch between the first state and the second state. Further, since the ejection means is rotated (the extrusion part is made to protrude) by utilizing the action of the receiving part receiving the game balls, a drive mechanism for such rotation and a control means for controlling the rotation timing can be eliminated.

In the game machine E2, the game machine E3 is characterized in that the shaft support of the discharge means is rotatably supported by the seesaw member.

According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine E2, the shaft support of the ejecting means is rotatably supported by the seesaw member, so that the relative position of the ejecting means with respect to the seesaw member can be kept constant. . Therefore, the game ball guided from the guide means can be easily received by the receiving part, and rotation about the shaft support can be reliably formed, and the extrusion part that is projected toward the other end of the seesaw member due to the rotation can be easily received by the receiving part. The game ball can be reliably pushed out (discharged) from the seesaw member by making it easier to contact the ball. As a result, it is possible to easily switch between the first state and the second state.

In the gaming machine E2 or E3, the receiving part of the ejecting means has a larger retractable amount than the extruding part with respect to a virtual plane perpendicular to the rotating shaft of the seesaw member and the shaft support of the ejecting means. A game machine E4 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E2 or E3, the ejecting means has a larger retractable amount of the receiving part than the extruding part, so that the ejecting means when the game ball is received by the receiving part By ensuring a rotation angle of , the energy received from the received game ball can be increased accordingly. As a result, it is possible to secure the force for pushing out the game ball by the pushing section as the receiving section retreats. That is, the game balls can be quickly and easily discharged.

On the other hand, by making the amount of retraction of the extrusion part smaller than that of the receiving part, when the game ball rolling toward the other end of the seesaw member moves the extrusion part backward, the rolling locus of the game ball increases. can be suppressed, and such game balls can be quickly and easily discharged.

In any one of the gaming machines E1 to E4, the ejecting means is mounted on the other end side of the rotating shaft of the seesaw member by raising one axial direction of the rotating shaft of the seesaw member relative to the other axial direction. A game machine E5 characterized in that the game balls placed therein are easily ejected.

According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines E1 to E4, one axial direction of the rotating shaft of the seesaw member is raised relative to the other axial direction by the ejecting means, so that By increasing the downward slope angle of the seesaw member from one axial direction of the rotating shaft to the other axial direction, the game ball placed on the other end side of the rotating shaft can be ejected from the seesaw member. This makes it easy to alternately switch between the first state and the second state.

Note that one axial direction of the rotating shaft is relatively raised relative to the other axial direction of the rotating shaft, which means that it is sufficient that the amount of rise in one axial direction is larger than the amount of rise in the other axial direction. Therefore, after being raised, one axial direction may be located at a lower position than the other axial direction.

In the gaming machine E5, when the seesaw member is rotated from the first state to the second state, in the first section, the ejecting means moves one of the rotating shafts of the seesaw member in the axial direction. In a second section where the rotational shaft of the seesaw member is not raised relative to the other and is closer to the second state than the first section, one axial direction of the rotating shaft of the seesaw member is moved relative to the other axial direction. A gaming machine E6 is characterized in that it raises the target.

According to the game machine E6, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine E5, when the seesaw member is rotated from the first state to the second state, in the first section, the ejecting means displaces the rotating shaft of the seesaw member. In a second section where one axial direction of the rotating shaft of the seesaw member is not raised relative to the other axial direction and is closer to the second state than the first section, one axial direction of the rotating shaft of the seesaw member is raised relative to the other axial direction. Since the first state is raised relative to the first state, the second state can be reliably formed, and the first state and the second state can be alternately switched smoothly.

That is, if the action of raising one axial direction of the rotating shaft of the seesaw member relative to the other axial direction is performed from the first section, the ejection of the game ball will be accelerated, and the second state will be reliably formed. Can not. On the other hand, if the action of raising one axial direction of the rotating shaft of the seesaw member relative to the other axial direction is not performed, the ejection of the game balls will be delayed (retention time will be longer), and the second state will occur. will be easier to maintain.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E5, when the seesaw member is rotated from the first state to the second state, in the first section, one axial direction of the rotating shaft of the seesaw member is changed to the other axial direction. On the other hand, since it is not raised relatively, it is possible to suppress the ejection of the game ball from being accelerated (that is, to keep the game ball in place), and to make it easier to form the second state reliably. On the other hand, in the second section, one axial direction of the rotating shaft of the seesaw member is raised relative to the other axial direction, so the game ball can be quickly discharged, and the game ball is placed. The time (that is, the time during which the second state is formed) can be shortened. As a result, the second state can be reliably formed, and the first state and the second state can be alternately switched smoothly.

In the gaming machine E5 or the gaming machine E6, the seesaw member has a cam formed on at least one axial direction of the rotating shaft, and as the rotating shaft rotates, the seesaw member extends from the axis of the rotating shaft to the outer peripheral surface of the cam. A gaming machine E7 characterized in that one axial direction of the rotating shaft of the seesaw member is raised relative to the other axial direction by increasing the distance.

According to the gaming machine E7, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine E5 or E6, a cam is formed on at least one axial direction of the rotating shaft, and as the rotating shaft rotates, the rotation from the axis of the rotating shaft to the outer peripheral surface of the cam By increasing the distance, one axial direction of the rotating shaft of the seesaw member is raised relative to the other axial direction, so the drive mechanism for operating such a rotating shaft and the control that controls the drive timing. You can eliminate the need for means. Further, the first section and the second section can be reliably formed, and the degree of freedom in designing the ratio of the first section and the second section can be increased.

Any one of the gaming machines E5 to E7 includes a push-up part disposed on a movement trajectory when the seesaw member is rotated from the first state to the second state, and the push-up part hits the seesaw member. A game machine E8 characterized in that, by being brought into contact with each other, one axial direction of the rotating shaft of the seesaw member is raised relative to the other axial direction.

According to the game machine E8, in addition to the effects of any of the game machines E5 to E7, a push-up portion is provided that is disposed on the movement trajectory when the seesaw member is rotated from the first state to the second state, When the push-up portion comes into contact with the seesaw member, one axial direction of the rotating shaft of the seesaw member is raised relative to the other axial direction, so a drive mechanism for operating the rotating shaft and its drive are used. A control means for controlling timing can be eliminated. Further, the first section and the second section can be reliably formed, and the degree of freedom in designing the ratio of each section can be increased.

<About the concept of the invention as an example of the base side engaging member 12726>
A game machine comprising a base member and a displacement member whose proximal end side is rotatably disposed on the base member and rotated between a retracted position and an extended position, wherein the base member comprises a base-side engaging member. In addition, the displacement member includes a displacement-side engagement member that is formed to be able to engage with the base-side engagement member in the retracted position, and when the first displacement member is disposed in the extended position, the base A gaming machine F1 characterized in that the base-side engaging member is formed so as to be difficult to visually recognize from a player when the member is viewed from the front.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko, a base member, a first displacement member and a second displacement member disposed displaceably on the base member, and a driving force applied to the first displacement member and the second displacement member. The production member includes a transmission member that transmits the transmission and a driving means that applies a driving force to the transmission member, and the first displacement member and the second displacement There is a game machine in which a member is connected to a transmission member (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2009-100994).

In this conventional gaming machine, the connecting member connects the base member and the second displacement member in an erected state, and in the retracted position, the base member and the second displacement member are connected to each other at a position relatively distant from the rotation axis of the first displacement member. The two displacement members are connected by a connecting member. Therefore, even if the first displacement member attempts to tilt its portion opposite to its rotation axis (i.e., the second displacement member side) in a direction away from the base member, there will be no space between the base member and the second displacement member. Due to the action of the intervening connecting member, the tilting can be suppressed.

However, in the game machine F1, while the base end of the displacement member is rotatably supported, the side opposite to the base end (tip side) is a free end. Therefore, in the retracted position, the side opposite to the proximal end (distal end) tends to tilt (fall forward) in a direction away from the base member due to its own weight and the weight of the decorative portion disposed on the front side.

In this case, according to the gaming machine F1, the base member includes the base-side engagement member, the displacement member includes the displacement-side engagement member, and when the displacement member is displaced to the retracted position, the base-side engagement Since the member and the displacement-side engaging member are formed to be engageable, it is possible to suppress the side opposite to the proximal end side (distal end side) of the displacement member from tilting in the direction away from the base member.

On the other hand, when the base member is provided with the base-side engagement member and the displacement member is provided with the displacement-side engagement member as described above, when the displacement member is extended to the extended position, the front surface of the base member Since the base-side engaging member is exposed, the base-side engaging member is visible to the player, and the appearance is impaired. On the other hand, according to the gaming machine F1, since the base-side engaging member is formed so as to be difficult for the player to see when the base member is viewed from the front, it is possible to suppress the appearance from being impaired.

In the game machine F1, the base-side engaging member is disposed so as to be able to appear and retract from the front of the base member, and when the displacement member is rotated to the retracted position, the base-side engaging member moves to the front of the base member. A game machine F2, wherein when the displacement member is rotated to the extended position, the base-side engaging member is retracted toward the back side of the base member.

According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine F1, the base side engaging member is disposed so as to be able to protrude and retract from the front of the base member, and when the displacement member is rotated to the extended position, the base side engaging member Since the mating member is retracted toward the back side of the base member, the base-side engaging member can be difficult to see from the player when the base member is viewed from the front, and it is possible to suppress the appearance from being impaired.

Furthermore, when the displacement member is rotated to the retracted position, the base-side engagement member protrudes from the front of the base member, so the height of the displacement-side engagement member protruding from the back surface of the displacement member is reduced accordingly. be able to. Thereby, when the displacement member is rotated, interference of the displacement-side engaging member with other members can be suppressed. In other words, since the protruding height of the displacement-side engaging member can be reduced, a space for displacement of other members can be secured.

The gaming machine F2 includes a driving means for rotationally driving the displacement member with respect to the base member, and the base side engaging member is projected from the front side of the base member by the action of the driving force of the driving means. A game machine F3 featuring the following.

According to the game machine F3, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine F2, the game machine F3 is provided with a driving means for rotationally driving the displacement member relative to the base member, and the base side engaging member is moved from the base member by the action of the driving force of the driving means. Since it protrudes from the front, it can also be used as a driving means, reducing product costs. That is, the driving force for rotationally driving the displacement member can also be used as the driving force for protruding the base-side engaging member, making it unnecessary to separately provide a driving means for such protrusion.

In addition, as a form in which the base-side engaging member is protruded by the action of the driving force of the driving means, when the displacement member is rotated by the driving force of the driving means, the base-side engaging member is directly or indirectly protruded by the displacement member. When the member is displaced in the protruding direction, or when the transmission member that transmits the driving force of the driving means to the displacement member is displaced, the base-side engaging member is directly or indirectly displaced in the protrusion direction by the displacement member. Examples include the form in which it is carried out.

The gaming machine F3 is provided with a biasing means for biasing the base-side engaging member in the retracting direction, and when the action of the driving force of the drive means is released, the action of the biasing force of the biasing means causes A game machine F4 characterized in that the base-side engaging member is returned to a retracted position.

According to the game machine F4, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine F3, it is provided with a biasing means for biasing the base-side engaging member toward the retracting direction, and when the action of the driving force of the drive means is released, the biasing is performed. Since the base-side engaging member is returned to the retracted position by the action of the biasing force of the biasing means, there is no need to link both the protruding direction and the retracting direction with the action of the driving force of the driving means, and only the protruding direction is linked. Therefore, the structure can be simplified accordingly.

In the gaming machine F1, the base-side engaging member is arranged to be retractable from the front of the base member, and when the displacement member is rotated to the retracted position, the base-side engaging member moves from the front of the base member. The gaming machine F5 is characterized in that when the displacement member is rotated to the extended position while being retracted from the base member, the base-side engaging member is advanced toward the front side of the base member.

According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine F1, the base-side engaging member is retracted from the front of the base member when the displacement member is rotated to the retracted position. By engaging the base-side engaging member and the displacement-side engaging member, it is possible to not only prevent the base end side and the opposite side (distal end side) of the displacement member from tilting in the direction away from the base member, but also prevent the base-side engaging member from tilting away from the base member. By narrowing the interval between the engagement surfaces (inner surfaces) of the member and the displacement-side engagement member, it is possible to suppress rattling in the front-rear direction on the distal end side of the displacement member.

Furthermore, when the displacement member is rotated to the extended position, the base-side engaging member is advanced toward the front of the base member, so that the base-side engaging member is not visible to the player when the base member is viewed from the front. It is possible to prevent the appearance from being damaged.

<About the concept of the invention using the right rotation unit 18600 as an example>
a base member, a first displacement member disposed displaceably on the base member, a second displacement member disposed displaceably on the first displacement member, and the first displaceable member and the second displaceable member. In the game machine, the first displacement member is formed to be displaceable at least in a first direction, and the second displacement member is capable of abutting against the first displacement member or the base member. and causing the inertia force generated by the contact between the second displacement member and the first displacement member or the base member to act as a force in the direction of displacing the first displacement member in the first direction. Characteristic game machine G1.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko, a base member, a first displacement member and a second displacement member disposed displaceably on the base member, and a driving force applied to the first displacement member and the second displacement member. There is a gaming machine equipped with a drive means for giving a bonus (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2009-100994). According to this gaming machine, it is possible to create a mode in which both the first displacement member and the second displacement member are displaced, and a mode in which only one of the first displacement member or the second displacement member is displaced.

However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, for example, in a mode in which only the second displacement member is displaced, the load on the driving means is relatively small, whereas in a mode in which both the first displacement member and the second displacement member are displaced, Since the load on the drive means is relatively large, the load on the drive means changes (increases) rapidly when the mode is switched. As a result, there are problems in that the durability of the driving means is reduced and that stable (constant) displacement is difficult, such as a decrease in displacement speed when switching modes.

On the other hand, according to the game machine G1, the second displacement member is formed so as to be able to come into contact with the first displacement member or the base member, and when the second displacement member comes into contact with the first displacement member or the base member, Since the inertial force acting as a force in the direction of displacing the first displacement member in the first direction, the first mode of displacing the second displacement member is switched to the second mode of displacing the first displacement member. In this case, the action of the inertial force can be used as an auxiliary force, and it is possible to suppress a sudden change (increase) in the load of the driving means. As a result, it is possible to improve the durability of the driving means, suppress a decrease in the displacement speed when switching from the first mode to the second mode, and make it easier to perform stable (constant) displacement. .

Note that the first aspect and the second aspect include, for example, an aspect in which the first aspect displaces only the second displacement member, and the second aspect displaces both the first displacement member and the second displacement member. Alternatively, an example is illustrated in which the first aspect displaces only the second displacement member, and the second aspect displaces only the first displacement member. The latter aspect is particularly suitable when the load required to displace the first displaceable member is sufficiently larger than the load required to displace the second displaceable member (for example, the weight of the first displaceable member relative to the second displaceable member is (e.g., if you think it is sufficient).

In the game machine G1, the first displacement member is rotatably supported by the base member, and the second displacement member is rotatably supported by the first displacement member, and the first displacement member is rotatably supported by the base member. and a game machine G2, wherein the rotational axes of the second displacement members are oriented parallel to each other.

According to the game machine G2, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine G1, the first displacement member is rotatably supported by the base member, and the second displacement member is rotatably supported by the first displacement member. Since the rotational axes of the first displacement member and the second displacement member are oriented parallel to each other, the inertia force generated when the second displacement member contacts the first displacement member or the base member can be reduced. , it is possible to efficiently act on the first displacement member as a force for displacing the first displacement member in the first direction.

In the gaming machine G1 or G2, the direction of displacement of the second displacement member when the second displacement member comes into contact with the first displacement member or the base member is a direction including a downward component in the direction of gravity. Game machine G3 featuring:

According to the game machine G3, in addition to the effects produced by the game machine G1 or G2, the direction of displacement of the second displacement member when the second displacement member comes into contact with the first displacement member or the base member is downward in the direction of gravity. Since the direction includes a component directed toward the base member, it is possible to easily secure the inertia force generated by the contact between the second displacement member and the first displacement member or the base member.

In any of the gaming machines G1 to G3, the gaming machine G4 is characterized in that the first direction is a direction including an upward component in the direction of gravity.

According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines G1 to G3, since the first direction includes an upward component in the direction of gravity, the second displacement member and the first displacement member or the base It is particularly effective to use the inertia force generated by contact with the member as an auxiliary force for displacing the first displacement member in the first direction.

In any of gaming machines G1 to G4, one end of the first displacement member is rotatably supported by the base member, and one end of the second displacement member is rotatably supported by the first displacement member. When the other end of the second displacement member is rotatably supported, and the other end of the second displacement member is brought close to one end of the first displacement member from a direction opposite to the first direction, the second displacement member A gaming machine G5 characterized in that the other end side is brought into contact with the base member.

According to the game machine G5, in addition to the effects of any of the game machines G1 to G4, one end side of the first displacement member is rotatably supported by the base member, and one end side of the second displacement member has the first displacement. The other end of the second displacement member is rotatably supported on the other end of the member, and when the other end of the second displacement member is brought close to one end of the first displacement member from a direction opposite to the first direction, the other end of the second displacement member Since the side is in contact with the base member, the inertia force generated by the contact between the second displacement member and the base member can be effectively made to act as a force in the direction of displacing the first displacement member in the first direction. I can do it. That is, when switching from the first mode of displacing the second displacement member to the second mode of displacing the first displacement member, the action of the inertial force is used to assist in displacing the first displacement member in the first direction. It can be used efficiently as power.

As a result, it is possible to suppress a sudden change (increase) in the load on the drive means, improve the durability of the drive means, and reduce the displacement speed when switching from the first mode to the second mode. This can be suppressed to facilitate stable (constant) displacement.

In any of gaming machines G1 to G4, one end of the first displacement member is rotatably supported by the base member, and one end of the second displacement member is rotatably supported by the first displacement member. When the other end of the second displacement member is rotatably supported, and the other end of the second displacement member is brought close to one end of the first displacement member from the same direction as the first direction, the second displacement member A game machine G6 characterized in that the other end side is brought into contact with the first displacement member.

According to the game machine G6, in addition to the effects of any of the game machines G1 to G4, one end side of the first displacement member is rotatably supported by the base member, and one end side of the second displacement member has the first displacement. When the other end of the member is rotatably supported, and the other end of the second displacement member is brought close to one end of the first displacement member from the same direction as the first direction, the other end of the second displacement member Since the side is brought into contact with the first displacement member, the inertia force generated by the contact between the second displacement member and the first displacement member is efficiently converted into a force in the direction of displacing the first displacement member in the first direction. can be made to act. That is, when switching from the first mode of displacing the second displacement member to the second mode of displacing the first displacement member, the action of the inertial force is used to assist in displacing the first displacement member in the first direction. It can be used efficiently as power.

As a result, it is possible to suppress a sudden change (increase) in the load on the drive means, improve the durability of the drive means, and reduce the displacement speed when switching from the first mode to the second mode. This can be suppressed to facilitate stable (constant) displacement.

Any one of gaming machines G1 to G7 includes a transmission member having a drive pin for transmitting the driving force of the drive means to a first displacement member and a second displacement member, and the first displacement member The second displacement member includes a first groove having an action section that receives an action from the drive pin and a non-interference section that is connected to the action section and does not interfere with the drive pin, and the second displacement member is arranged in the action section that receives an action from the drive pin. The first displacement member and the second displacement member are displaced by displacing the drive pin through the overlapping first groove and second groove. Game machine G8.

According to the gaming machine G8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines G1 to G7, the first groove of the first displacement member is connected to the working section that receives the action from the driving pin and the working section, and the driving pin interferes with the working section. Since the second groove of the second displacement member includes at least an action section that receives an action from the drive pin, the drive pin displaces the non-interference section of the first groove and the action section of the second groove. In this manner, the second displacement member is displaced while the first displacement member is maintained in a stopped state, and the drive pin is displaced through the working section of the first groove and the working section of the second groove. By doing so, it is possible to form a second mode in which both the first displacement member and the second displacement member are displaced, and also to smoothly transition from the first mode to the second mode.

<Feature H group> (Demonstration control with AT type and special map 1 on standby)
a first acquisition means that acquires first information based on the establishment of a first acquisition condition; a first determination means that performs a first determination based on the first information acquired by the first acquisition means; A first performance execution means that executes a first performance in a first performance period based on the result of the first determination by the first determination means, and based on the establishment of a second acquisition condition different from the first acquisition condition, a second acquisition means for acquiring second information; a second determination means for executing a second determination based on the second information acquired by the second acquisition means; a second performance execution means for executing a second performance based on the result in a second performance period; and a specific first performance or the second performance based on the fact that the result of the first determination is a specific first determination result. A gaming machine having a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game that is advantageous to the player when a specific second effect is executed based on the determination result being a specific second determination result. a first timer that starts a first time measurement when execution of the first effect is completed and the first information is not acquired by the first acquisition means; and execution of the second effect is terminated. and a second timer that starts second timekeeping when the second information has not been acquired by the second acquisition means; notification execution means that starts execution of a second notification mode based on the fact that the second time measurement becomes a second setting value; and when the second acquisition condition is satisfied; A gaming machine H1 characterized in that it has a setting means capable of switching and setting a first period in which the first notification mode being executed is ended and a second period in which it is continued.

Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines display symbols in a variable manner based on the winning of a game ball into a starting prize opening, and inform the player of the lottery result after the variable display ends. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2006-000392). Such gaming machines are configured to display a specific screen (demonstration screen) when the symbols are not changing (playing), allowing players to easily find empty machines. .

In addition, some of the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines have a first symbol in which a variable display is performed based on the winning of a game ball in the first starting winning hole, and a variable display based on the winning of the gaming ball in the second starting winning hole. There is also a second symbol whose variable display is executed based on the symbol, and each symbol can be varied at the same time (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2005-319221). Such a gaming machine is configured so that the first symbol and the second symbol have different fluctuation periods, and a long fluctuation period (for example, 10 minutes) is executed as the fluctuation period of one symbol. There is something.

If such a conventional gaming machine is configured to display a specific screen (demonstration screen) when the fluctuating display of both symbols ends, the player cannot When a player finishes playing a game, the state (but the screen) continues that makes it difficult for the next player to play a game on that game machine, resulting in a problem in that the performance of the game decreases. The purpose is to solve the problems exemplified above.

According to the gaming machine H1, based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition, the first determination means executes the first determination based on the first information acquired by the first acquisition means, and the result of the first determination is Based on this, the first performance is executed by the first performance execution means for the first performance period. Further, based on the establishment of a second acquisition condition different from the first acquisition condition, a second determination is performed by the second determination means based on the second information acquired by the second acquisition means, and the second determination is performed by the second determination means based on the second information acquired by the second acquisition means. Based on the result, the second performance execution means executes the second performance for the second performance period. Then, a specific first effect based on the result of the first judgment being a specific first judgment result or a specific second effect based on the result of the second judgment being a specific second judgment result. A bonus game that is advantageous to the player when executed is executed by the bonus game execution means, and the execution of the first performance has ended and the first information has not been acquired by the first acquisition means. In this case, when the first timekeeping means starts the first timekeeping, the execution of the second effect is finished, and the second information is not acquired by the second acquisition means, the second timekeeping means starts the second timekeeping. be done. The notification execution means starts execution of the first notification mode based on the fact that the first time measurement has become the first setting value, and starts the execution of the first notification mode based on the fact that the second time measurement has become the second setting value. Execution of the aspect begins. In addition, the setting means switches and sets a first period in which the first notification mode being executed is ended when the second acquisition condition is satisfied, and a second period in which it is continued.

Thereby, even if the second performance is being executed, it is possible to continue the first notification mode indicating that the first performance is not being executed. Therefore, it is possible for the player to easily understand the status of the gaming machine, and there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a decline in gaming performance. Furthermore, when the second effect is executed, the setting means can switch between the first period in which the first notification mode indicating that the first effect is not executed is ended and the second period in which it is continued. , it is possible to perform an appropriate performance according to the gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand game to the player.

The configuration of the gaming machine H1 is, for example, a gaming machine configured to be able to execute a first performance and a second performance at the same time, and there is a period in which the second performance is not substantially executed depending on the gaming state, and a period in which the second performance is not executed. It is preferable to use this method in a gaming machine having a period in which the performance is substantially executed. In this case, during the period in which the second effect is not substantially executed, the first notification mode that is being executed is continued even if the second acquisition condition is met, and during the period in which the second effect is substantially executed. can terminate the first notification mode being executed when the second acquisition condition is satisfied.

The gaming machine H1 is characterized by having a gaming state setting means capable of setting a first gaming state that makes it easier to execute the first determination and a second gaming state that makes it easier to execute the second determination. Game machine H2.

According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine H1, the following effects are achieved. That is, a first gaming state that makes it easier to perform the first determination and a second gaming state that makes it easier to perform the second determination are set by the gaming state setting means.

Thereby, it becomes possible to set the first period or the second period according to the gaming state set by the gaming state setting means. Therefore, it is possible to perform an appropriate performance according to the gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand game to the player.

In the gaming machine H2, the setting means sets the second period when the first gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means, and the setting means sets the second period when the gaming state setting means sets the first gaming state. A gaming machine H3 characterized in that when a gaming state is set, the first period is set.

According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine H2, the following effects are achieved. That is, the setting means sets the second period when the first gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means, and sets the first period when the second gaming state is set.

As a result, in a gaming state where the first determination is likely to be performed, the first notification mode being executed is continued even if the second acquisition condition is satisfied, and in a gaming state where the second determination is likely to be performed, the second notification mode is continued. When the acquisition condition is satisfied, the first notification mode being executed can be ended. Therefore, it is possible to provide an appropriate performance according to the gaming state, and it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand game to the player.

In any of the gaming machines H1 to H3, the gaming machine H4 is characterized in that the notification execution means ends the second notification mode that is being executed based on the fulfillment of the second acquisition condition. .

According to the gaming machine H4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines H1 to H3, the second notification mode being executed is terminated by the notification execution means based on the second acquisition condition being satisfied, so that the second performance is It is possible to perform effects according to the execution state. Therefore, it is possible to provide a game that is easy to understand for the player.

In any of gaming machines H1 to H4, the notification execution means executes the second notification mode while suppressing interference with the first performance even when the first performance is being executed. Gaming machine H5 is characterized by certain things.

According to the gaming machine H5, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machines H1 to H4, the following effects are achieved. That is, even while the first performance is being executed, the second notification mode is executed by the notification execution means while suppressing interference with the first performance.

As a result, it is possible to notify that the second performance is not being performed while the first performance is being performed, while suppressing interference with the first performance. Therefore, it is possible to provide a game in which the game situation is easy to understand for the player.

In any of the gaming machines H1 to H5, the first performance execution means and the second performance execution means are capable of simultaneously executing the first performance and the second performance. A gaming machine H6.

According to the gaming machine H6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines H1 to H5, the first performance execution means and the second performance execution means are configured to be able to execute the first performance and the second performance at the same time. There is an effect that the status of the first performance and the second performance that are executed simultaneously can be notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

A gaming machine H7, which is characterized in that, in any of the gaming machines H1 to H6, the notification execution means is capable of simultaneously executing the first notification mode and the second notification mode.

According to the gaming machine H7, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines H1 to H6, since the notification execution means is configured to simultaneously execute the first notification mode and the second notification mode, the first notification mode and the second notification mode can be executed simultaneously. This has the effect that the status of the performance and the second performance can be notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

In any of gaming machines H1 to H7, the notification execution means notifies predetermined information other than information indicating the result of the second effect as the second notification mode when the first effect is being executed. A gaming machine H8 characterized in that it executes a predetermined notification mode.

According to the gaming machine H8, in addition to the effects provided by any of the gaming machines H1 to H7, the following effects are achieved. That is, when the first performance is being executed, the notification execution means executes a predetermined notification mode that notifies predetermined information other than the information indicating the result of the second effect as the second notification mode.

Thereby, when the first effect is being executed, it is possible to suppress information indicating the result of the previously executed second effect from being reported. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from confusing the results of the first performance and the result of the second performance, and it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand game to the player.

In any of the gaming machines H1 to H8, when the first performance is being executed, the notification execution means executes a first performance indicating that the first performance is being executed as the second notification mode. A gaming machine H9 characterized in that it executes a medium notification mode.

According to the gaming machine H9, in addition to the effects provided by any of the gaming machines H1 to H8, the following effects are achieved. That is, when the first performance is being executed, the notification execution means executes the first performance execution notification mode indicating that the first performance is being executed as the second notification mode.

This makes it possible for the player to easily understand the performance being executed, and has the effect that the game situation can be provided in an easy-to-understand manner.

Furthermore, according to the configuration of the gaming machine H6, information regarding the first performance that is actually being executed out of the first performance and the second performance that can be executed simultaneously can be displayed as a second notification mode. This has the effect that the gaming situation can be provided to the players more easily.

In any of the gaming machines H1 to H9, a first display area for displaying either the first notification mode or the second notification mode executed by the notification execution means, and a second display area for displaying the other. and a display control means for controlling display contents in the first display area and the second display area of the display means, the display control means having at least a display area, and a display control means for controlling display contents in the first display area and the second display area of the display means. When a first period is set, the first notification mode is displayed in the first display area, and when the second period is set, the second notification mode is displayed in the first display area. A gaming machine H10 characterized in that display contents of the display means are controlled so as to.

According to the gaming machine H10, in addition to the effects provided by any of the gaming machines H1 to H10, the following effects are achieved. That is, the display means has a first display area where either the first notification mode or the second notification mode executed by the notification execution means is displayed, and a second display area where the other is displayed, When the first period is set by the setting means, the first notification mode is displayed in the first display area, and when the second period is set, the second notification mode is displayed in the first display area. The display contents of the display means are controlled by the display control means.

Thereby, the notification mode displayed in the first display area can be changed according to the gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to display an easy-to-understand notification mode according to the gaming state, and it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand gaming machine to players.

<Characteristics Group I> (Demonstration control when the gaming state is varied)
a first acquisition means that acquires first information based on the establishment of a first acquisition condition; a first determination means that performs a first determination based on the first information acquired by the first acquisition means; A first performance execution means that executes a first performance in a first performance period based on the result of the first determination by the first determination means, and based on the establishment of a second acquisition condition different from the first acquisition condition, a second acquisition means for acquiring second information; a second determination means for executing a second determination based on the second information acquired by the second acquisition means; a second performance execution means for executing a second performance based on the result in a second performance period; and a specific first performance or the second performance based on the fact that the result of the first determination is a specific first determination result. A gaming machine having a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game that is advantageous to the player when a specific second effect is executed based on the determination result being a specific second determination result. an advantageous state setting means for setting an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player until the first performance and the second performance are executed a predetermined number of times when a specific condition is satisfied, and the advantageous state setting means Variable control that makes it easier to execute the second determination than the first determination when the advantageous state is set, and makes it easier to execute the first determination than the second determination when the advantageous state ends. and setting a first setting when the first effect is not performed for a predetermined first period, and setting a second setting when the second effect is not performed for a predetermined second period. setting means; and setting a first display setting in the display means based on the fact that the first setting is set when the advantageous state is set; display setting means for setting a second display setting on the display means based on the second display setting being set; The gaming machine I1 is characterized in that, when the second display setting is completed, a specific display setting different from the second display setting is set.

Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines display symbols in a variable manner based on the winning of a game ball into a starting prize opening, and inform the player of the lottery result after the variable display ends. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2006-000392). Such gaming machines are configured to display a specific screen (demonstration screen) when the symbols are not changing (playing), allowing players to easily find empty machines. .

In addition, some of the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines have a first symbol in which a variable display is performed based on the winning of a game ball in the first starting winning hole, and a variable display based on the winning of the gaming ball in the second starting winning hole. There is also a second symbol whose variable display is executed based on the symbol, and each symbol can be varied at the same time (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2005-319221). Furthermore, some games are configured to improve the interest of the game by setting a game state in which the first symbol is likely to be displayed in a variable manner and a game state in which the second symbol is likely to be displayed in a variable manner depending on the game state.

In such conventional gaming machines, if the gaming state changes while a specific screen (demonstration screen) indicating that the fluctuating display of one of the symbols has ended, the player cannot change the displayed content. There was a problem that it was difficult to grasp the

For example, in a given game state, if the display area for symbols that are likely to be displayed in a variable manner is set larger than the display area for symbols that are difficult to be displayed in a variable manner, the displayed content will be larger as the game state changes. There was a problem in that the games were different and the game was difficult to understand for the player. The purpose is to solve the problems exemplified above.

According to the gaming machine I1, the first information is acquired by the first acquisition means based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition, the first determination is executed by the first determination means based on the first information, and the first determination is performed by the first determination means based on the first information. A first performance based on the result of the first determination is executed by the first performance execution means in the first performance period. Further, based on the establishment of a second acquisition condition different from the first acquisition condition, second information is acquired by the second acquisition means, and a second determination is performed by the second determination means based on the second information, A second performance based on the result of the second determination is executed in a second performance period by the second performance execution means. A specific first effect based on the result of the first judgment being a specific first judgment result or a specific second effect based on the result of the second judgment being a specific second judgment result is executed. In this case, the bonus game execution means executes a bonus game that is advantageous to the player. Then, when the specific condition is satisfied, an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player is set by the advantageous state setting means until the first performance and the second performance are executed a predetermined number of times. When the advantageous state is set, the variable control means makes it easier to execute the second judgment than the first judgment, and when the advantageous state ends, the first judgment is made easier to execute than the second judgment. The setting means sets the first setting when the first effect is not executed for a predetermined first period, and sets the second setting when the second effect is not executed for a predetermined second period. . Further, the display setting means sets the first display setting to the display means based on the fact that the first setting is set when the advantageous state is set, and the second display setting is set when the advantageous state is set. Based on the setting being set, the second display setting is set on the display means. In addition, if the advantageous state ends while the second display setting is set, the display setting means sets a specific display setting different from the second display setting.

As a result, when the advantageous state ends while the second display setting is set, the display setting means sets a specific display setting different from the second display setting, so that the second display setting is set. Even if the player is in an advantageous state, the player can easily understand that the advantageous state has ended. Therefore, it is possible to provide a game that is easy to understand for the player.

In the gaming machine I1, the first display setting is set so that a predetermined first display mode is displayed on the display means, and the second display setting is set so that a predetermined second display mode is displayed on the display means. A gaming machine I2 characterized in that it is displayed on a display means.

According to the gaming machine I2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine I1, the following effects are achieved. That is, by setting the first display setting, a predetermined first display mode is displayed on the display means, and by setting the second display setting, a predetermined second display mode is displayed on the display means. Ru.

This allows the player to easily understand the execution status of the first determination by the first determination means and the second determination by the second determination means. Therefore, it is possible to provide a game that is easy to understand for the player.

In the gaming machine I1 or I2, when the second effect is executed during a period in which the second display setting is being executed, the second effect is handled while the second display setting is maintained. A gaming machine I3 characterized in that the performance mode is displayed on the display means.

According to the gaming machine I3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine I1 or I2, the following effects are achieved. That is, when the second effect is executed during the period in which the second display setting is being executed, the effect mode corresponding to the second effect is displayed on the display means while the second display setting is maintained. .

Thereby, when the second effect is executed during the period in which the second display setting is being executed, the second effect can be executed without giving the player a sense of discomfort. Therefore, there is an effect that the presentation effect can be enhanced.

Here, the configuration of the gaming machine I3 may be provided, for example, in a gaming machine in which the second performance period during which the second performance is executed is set to be short. In this case, when the second performance is executed during the period in which the second display setting is being executed, the second performance in which the short second performance period is set can be executed in an easy-to-understand manner for the player.

In any of the gaming machines I1 to I3, the second display setting is a setting for displaying on the display means a suggestive display mode indicating that the period in which the advantageous state is set is set. A gaming machine I4 characterized by the following.

According to the gaming machine I4, in addition to the effects provided by any of the gaming machines I1 to I3, the following effects are achieved. That is, by setting the second display setting, a suggestive display mode indicating that it is a period in which an advantageous state is set is displayed on the display means.

This makes it possible to display information regarding the gaming state to the player using the period in which the second performance is not being executed. Therefore, it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand game to the player by effectively utilizing the period in which the second performance is not performed.

In any of the gaming machines I1 to I4, when the advantageous state is set, a determining means for determining whether a specific condition is satisfied based on information based on execution of the first performance and the second performance, and the determination unit A gaming machine I5 comprising: regulating means for regulating the setting of the second display setting when the means determines that a specific condition is met.

According to the gaming machine I5, in addition to the effects provided by any of the gaming machines I1 to I4, the following effects are achieved. That is, when an advantageous state is set, the determining means determines whether the specific condition is satisfied based on information based on the execution of the first effect and the second effect, and when it is determined that the specific condition is satisfied, the regulating means The settings of the second display settings are regulated.

Thereby, by not setting the second display setting, it becomes possible to notify the player that the specific condition is satisfied. Therefore, it is possible to provide a game that is easy to understand for the player.

In any of the gaming machines I1 to I5, when the second determination is executed, a second performance period determining means for determining the second performance period from a plurality of second performance periods; When the normal gaming state is set, the probability that a longer period will be selected as the second performance period determined by the second performance period determining means than when the advantageous state is set is set to be higher. A gaming machine I6 characterized in that it has a probability variable means.

According to the gaming machine I6, in addition to the effects provided by any of the gaming machines I1 to I5, the following effects are achieved. That is, when the second determination is executed, the second performance period is determined from a plurality of second performance periods by the second performance period determining means. When one normal game state other than the advantageous state is set by the probability variable means, the second performance period determined by the second performance period determination means is longer than when the advantageous state is set. The probability that the period will be selected is set high.

As a result, when an advantageous state is set, it is possible to perform more second determinations than when one normal gaming state other than the advantageous state is set. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be motivated to play the game aiming for an advantageous state in which the second determination is executed more frequently.

A gaming machine I7 characterized in that, in any of the gaming machines I1 to I6, the first effect and the second effect can be executed simultaneously.

According to the gaming machine I7, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines I1 to I6, the first performance and the second performance are executed simultaneously, so that the game can be executed efficiently.

<Characteristics Group J> (Ensures good results in AT type)
a first acquisition means that acquires first information based on the establishment of a first acquisition condition; a first determination means that performs a first determination based on the first information acquired by the first acquisition means; a first performance execution means for executing a first performance in a first performance period based on the result of the first determination by the first determination means; a second determination means for executing the second determination; a second performance execution means for executing a second performance in a second performance period based on the result of the second determination by the second determination means; When a specific first performance based on a specific first determination result or a specific second performance based on the result of the second determination being a specific second determination result is executed, the game A gaming machine having a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game that is advantageous to the player, wherein the game becomes advantageous to the player from a plurality of game states until the first performance and the second performance are executed a predetermined number of times. A gaming state setting means capable of setting an advantageous gaming state; and a second performance period setting means that makes it easier to set the second performance period short when the advantageous gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means. and, when the advantageous gaming state ends, a specific first performance period is set as the first performance period until the first performance and the second performance are executed a predetermined number of times. A gaming machine J1 characterized in that it has a first performance period determining means.

Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines display symbols in a variable manner based on the winning of a game ball into a starting prize opening, and inform the player of the lottery result after the variable display ends. In this way, a gaming machine is set up with an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player by increasing the probability of a winning lottery or making it easier for the lottery to be executed, and during the period when the advantageous state continues. There are some games that display game results such as the number of hits that have occurred and the number of prize balls that have been won on the display screen (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-35664). In such gaming machines, a game result display is displayed on the display screen after the advantageous state ends.

In addition, some of the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines have a first symbol in which a variable display is performed based on the winning of a game ball in the first starting winning hole, and a variable display based on the winning of the gaming ball in the second starting winning hole. There is also a second symbol whose variable display is executed based on the symbol, and each symbol can be varied at the same time (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2005-319221).

In such conventional gaming machines, both symbols are configured to fluctuate at the same time, so whether the first symbol to be executed after the advantageous state ends is the first symbol or the second symbol depends on the gaming situation. It may be different. In such a gaming machine, if only the first fluctuation period after the end of an advantageous state is set as the fluctuation period in which game results can be displayed, the game result display may not be possible depending on the symbol that changes first after the end of an advantageous state. There was a problem in that the game could not be displayed for a sufficient period of time, resulting in a decrease in player motivation. The purpose is to solve the problems exemplified above.

According to the gaming machine J1, based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition, the first determination means executes the first determination based on the first information acquired by the first acquisition means, and the result of the first determination is Based on this, the first performance is executed by the first performance execution means for the first performance period. Further, based on the establishment of a second acquisition condition different from the first acquisition condition, a second determination is performed by the second determination means based on the second information acquired by the second acquisition means, and the second determination is performed by the second determination means based on the second information acquired by the second acquisition means. Based on the result, the second performance execution means executes the second performance for the second performance period. Then, a specific first effect based on the result of the first judgment being a specific first judgment result or a specific second effect based on the result of the second judgment being a specific second judgment result. A bonus game that is advantageous to the player when executed is executed by the bonus game execution means, and the game is played until the first effect and the second effect are executed a predetermined number of times from a plurality of game states. An advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to a player is configured to be settable by a gaming state setting means, and when the advantageous gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means, the second performance period is set short by the second performance period setting means. When the advantageous gaming state ends, a specific first performance period is set as the first performance period until the first performance and the second performance are executed a predetermined number of times. Determined by the determining means.

This makes it possible to set a specific period as the first performance period when the advantageous gaming state ends, so that the player can understand the content of the performance that will be executed when the advantageous gaming state ends. This has the effect of suppressing a situation in which the player's motivation decreases due to not being able to grasp the content of the performance.

In addition, as a performance executed when the advantageous gaming state ends, it is preferable to perform a performance indicating the game result during the advantageous gaming state (for example, the number of jackpots executed during the advantageous gaming state or the total number of prize balls). In this case, there is an effect that the player can easily grasp the game result during the advantageous gaming state after the advantageous gaming state ends.

In addition, like the gaming machine J1, by setting the first performance period that is executed after the end of the advantageous gaming state as a specific first performance period, the first performance that is executed using the specific first performance period is advantageous. It can be executed after the game state ends. As a result, for example, it is no longer necessary to set the first performance period that is executed at the end (late stage) of an advantageous gaming state as the first performance period, so it is possible to have the player smoothly execute the advantageous gaming state. effective.

In gaming machine J1, gaming machine J2 is characterized in that the predetermined number of times is two or more times.

According to the gaming machine J2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine J1, the predetermined number of times is set to two or more, so even if the first performance and the second performance are executed at the same time, the first performance cannot be executed. It can be executed using a specific first performance period, and allows the player to understand the content of the performance that will be executed when the advantageous gaming state ends. This has the effect of suppressing situations where motivation decreases.

In the gaming machine J1 or J2, the first performance period determining means selects a shortened first performance period shorter than the specific first performance period when a game state different from the advantageous game state is set. The game machine J3 is characterized in that it has a high rate of play.

According to the gaming machine J3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine J1 or J2, the following effects are achieved. That is, when a game state different from an advantageous game state is set, the first performance period determining means increases the ratio of selecting a shortened first performance period shorter than a specific first performance period.

As a result, it is possible to set only a specific first performance period that is set for a predetermined number of times after the advantageous gaming state ends, so that the first performance period is longer than other first performance periods. By setting the first performance period to be executed to be long as a whole, it is possible to suppress the progress of the game from slowing down and the player's motivation from decreasing.

In any of gaming machines J1 to J3, the probability that the first determination is determined to be the specific first determination result and the probability that the second determination is determined to be the specific second determination result are set to be the same. and the second determination means determines, with a predetermined probability, that a special second determination result different from the specific second determination result is obtained when the second determination is not determined to be the specific second determination result. The bonus game execution means executes a special bonus game in which a bonus equal to or lower than the bonus game is given when the second performance based on the special second determination result is executed. A gaming machine J4 characterized by the following.

According to gaming machine J4, in addition to the effects of any of gaming machines J1 to J3, the following effects are achieved. That is, the probability that the first determination is determined to be a specific first determination result and the probability that the second determination is determined to be the specific second determination result are set to be the same, and the probability that the second determination is determined to be the specific second determination result is set to be the same. If it is not determined, the second determination means determines a special second determination result different from the specific second determination result with a predetermined probability. Then, when the second performance based on the special second determination result is executed, the special bonus game in which a bonus less than the bonus game is given is executed by the bonus game execution means.

Thereby, the second determination in which the second performance is performed can be more advantageous to the player than the first determination in which the first performance is performed. Therefore, the advantageous gaming state in which the second performance period during which the second performance is executed is likely to be short can be reliably made advantageous to the player, and there is an effect that the player's desire to play can be increased. .

According to the gaming machine J4, by executing the special bonus game based on the determination result of the second determination means being the special second determination result, an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player is configured. However, it is only necessary to configure the game state in which the second performance period is set to be short to be an advantageous game state that is advantageous to the player. The special bonus game may be configured to be executed with a lower probability than the probability of the special bonus game (first special bonus game) executed based on the determination result of the first determination means. The bonus game may be configured to have a lower value than the special bonus game (second special bonus game) executed based on the determination result.

In any of gaming machines J1 to J4, when the advantageous gaming state is set, the second judgment is more likely to be executed than the first judgment, and the second judgment is executed when the advantageous gaming state ends. A gaming machine J5 characterized in that it has a variable control means for varying a state in which the first determination is more likely to be executed than the determination.

According to gaming machine J5, in addition to the effects provided by any of gaming machines J1 to J4, the following effects are achieved. That is, when an advantageous gaming state is set, there is a state where the second determination is more likely to be executed than the first determination, and a state where the first determination is more likely to be executed than the second determination when the advantageous gaming state ends. It is varied by variable control means.

Thereby, the second determination can be made easier to execute in the advantageous gaming state compared to gaming states other than the advantageous gaming state. Therefore, the advantageous gaming state can be made more advantageous to the player, and the player's desire to play can be increased as he or she aims for the advantageous gaming state.

Note that the variable control means of the gaming machine J4 includes, for example, a configuration that varies the length of the performance period between the first performance period and the second performance period, and a configuration that changes the ease with which the second acquisition condition is satisfied. is possible.

The gaming machine J5 is characterized in that the variable control means is configured to vary and set the selection ratio so as to vary the length of the performance period between the first performance period and the second performance period. Game machine J6.

According to the gaming machine J6, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine J5, the following effects are achieved. That is, the selection ratio is variably set so as to vary the length of the first presentation period and the second presentation period by the variable control means.

This has the effect that the ease of execution of the first determination and the second determination can be easily varied.

<Characteristics Group K> (AT type, even if one side hits a small hit, the other side's variable performance continues, and after the small hit, the variable performance that balances the balance is executed)
a first acquisition means that acquires first information based on the establishment of a first acquisition condition; a first determination means that performs a first determination based on the first information acquired by the first acquisition means; a first performance execution means for executing a first performance in a first performance period based on the result of the first determination by the first determination means; a first performance period determining means for determining a performance period from a plurality of performance periods; a second determination means for performing a second determination based on establishment of a second acquisition condition different from the first acquisition condition; a second performance execution means that executes a second performance in a second performance period based on the result of the second determination by the determination means; and a second performance period of the second performance executed by the second performance execution means. a second performance period determination means that determines from a plurality of performance periods; and a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game that is advantageous to the player when a specific second performance is executed based on the second determination result, the bonus game execution unit a temporary stop means for temporarily stopping timing of the first performance period of the first performance or the second performance period of the second performance that is being executed when the bonus game is executed; a release means for canceling the temporary stop by the temporary stop means based on the termination of the temporary stop means; a continuation means for causing the first performance or the second performance to be executed; and even when the first performance or the second performance ends, if there is a remaining period of the first performance period or the second performance period; , and a specific performance execution means for executing a specific performance in the remaining period.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a variable display is performed for a predetermined period of time based on the winning of a game ball to the first starting winning hole, and the first symbol is displayed based on the winning of the gaming ball to the second starting winning hole. There is also a second symbol whose variable display is executed for a predetermined period based on the symbol, and each symbol can be varied at the same time (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2005-319221). In such a gaming machine, when one of the first and second symbols is stopped and displayed in a manner indicating that it has won, the fluctuation period of the other symbol that is being displayed fluctuates. Some games are configured so that when measurement is interrupted and a winning game ends, measurement of the interrupted fluctuation period is restarted.

In such conventional gaming machines, if the fluctuating display based on a symbol for which the fluctuating period measurement was interrupted during the fluctuating display is stopped based on the fluctuating period measurement being interrupted, the player's expectations There was a problem in that the fluctuating display that the player was watching suddenly stopped, causing a loss of interest in the game. Furthermore, even if the measurement of the fluctuation period is interrupted, if the fluctuation display continues to be displayed, there will be an error between the end timing of the fluctuation period and the end timing of the fluctuation display (in other words, an error corresponding to the interruption period). ) occurs, and a performance that gives the player a sense of discomfort is executed, causing a problem in which the interest in the game is lost. The purpose is to solve the problems exemplified above.

According to the gaming machine K1, based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition, the first determination means executes the first determination based on the first information acquired by the first acquisition means, and the result of the first determination is Based on this, the first performance execution means executes the first performance for a first performance period determined from a plurality of performance periods by the first performance period determining means. Further, based on the establishment of a second acquisition condition different from the first acquisition condition, a second determination is performed by the second determination means based on the second information acquired by the second acquisition means, and the second determination is performed by the second determination means based on the second information acquired by the second acquisition means. Based on the result, the second performance execution means executes the second performance for a second performance period determined from a plurality of performance periods by the second performance period determining means. Then, a specific first effect based on the result of the first judgment being a specific first judgment result or a specific second effect based on the result of the second judgment being a specific second judgment result. A bonus game that is advantageous to the player when executed is executed by the bonus game execution means, and when the bonus game is executed by the bonus game execution means, the first performance being executed is Timing of the first performance period or the second performance period of the second performance is temporarily stopped by the temporary stop means, and based on the end of the bonus game, the temporary stop by the temporary stop means is canceled by the release means. Even when the time measurement is temporarily stopped by the temporary stop means, the continuation means causes the first performance execution means or the second performance execution means to execute the first performance or the second performance, and the first performance or the second performance is continued. Even when the period ends, if there is a remaining period of the first presentation period or the second presentation period, the specific presentation execution means executes the specific presentation during the remaining period.

As a result, even if the timing of the first performance period of the first performance or the second performance period of the second performance being executed by the temporary stop means is temporarily stopped, the first performance or the second performance period continues to be Able to perform a performance. Therefore, it becomes possible for the player to continue executing the performance that he/she has been looking forward to, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

Furthermore, even when the first performance or the second performance ends, if there is a remaining period of the first performance period or the second performance period, the specific performance execution means executes the specific performance during the remaining period. , even if there is an error between the timing at which the first performance or the second performance ends and the timing at which the first performance period or the second performance period ends, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the player feels uncomfortable; This has the effect of increasing the performance effect.

In the gaming machine K1, the first performance is set in advance as a performance period corresponding to a plurality of first performance periods determined by the first performance period determining means, and the second performance is the same as the first performance period. A gaming machine K2, characterized in that the performance period is preset with performance periods corresponding to the plurality of second performance periods determined by a second performance period determining means.

According to the gaming machine K2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine K1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the first performance is preset with a performance period corresponding to a plurality of first performance periods determined by the first performance period determining means, and the second performance is set in advance with a plurality of second performance periods determined by the second performance period determination means. It is set in advance with a performance period corresponding to the performance period.

As a result, the performance period in which the first performance is performed and the performance period in which the second performance is performed are determined in advance, and the timing at which the first performance or the second performance ends and the first performance period or the second performance period are determined in advance. It becomes possible to execute a specific performance when an error occurs in the timing at which the event ends. Therefore, the period during which the first effect or the second effect is executed can be set in advance regardless of the temporary stop of time measurement by the temporary stop means, so that the processing load for setting the effect period can be reduced. be.

In the gaming machine K1 or K2, the first performance and the second performance are based on the results of the first determination or the second determination during a predetermined period until the respective first performance period or second performance period elapses. A gaming machine K3 characterized in that a confirmed performance mode indicating the following is set.

According to the gaming machine K3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine K1 or K2, the following effects are achieved. That is, the first performance and the second performance are set with a final performance mode that indicates the result of the first determination or the second determination for a predetermined period until the respective first performance period or second performance period elapses.

Thereby, even if the temporary stop of time measurement by the temporary stop means is not executed, the result of the first determination or the second determination can be shown by executing the first effect or the second effect. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to execute a performance that is easy for the player to understand.

The gaming machine K3 is characterized in that the specific performance is constituted by at least a part of the confirmed performance mode.

According to the gaming machine K4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine K3, the specific performance is composed of at least a part of the confirmed performance mode, so that the specific performance was executed after the first performance or the second performance ended. Even so, there is an effect that the performance can be executed without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

In any of the gaming machines K1 to K4, the bonus game execution means is executed based on the fact that the first determination means determines that the special first determination result is different from the specific first determination result. When a special first performance is executed, or when the second determination means determines that a special second determination result is different from the specific second determination result, a special second performance is executed. A gaming machine K5 is characterized in that it executes a special game that is more advantageous to the player than the bonus game when executed.

According to the gaming machine K5, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines K1 to K4, the following effects are achieved. That is, when a special first performance is executed based on a special first determination result that is determined by the first determination means to be a special first determination result different from a specific first determination result, or when the second determination means specifies When a special second performance is executed based on a special second determination result that is different from the second determination result of A special game that is advantageous is executed.

This allows the player to play the game while having expectations for both the game in which the first determination means is executed and the game in which the second determination means is executed. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines K1 to K5, the specific performance executing means is configured to execute a process different from the specific performance if the first performance or the second performance ends during the period in which the bonus game is being executed. A gaming machine K6 characterized in that a special performance is executed at least during the remaining period.

According to the gaming machine K6, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines K1 to K5, the following effects are achieved. That is, when the first performance or the second performance ends during the period in which the bonus game is being executed by the specific performance execution means, a special performance different from the specific performance is executed for at least the remaining period.

As a result, when the first performance or the second performance ends, a special performance different from the specific performance is executed if a remaining period that is longer than the remaining period of the first performance period or the second performance period occurs. be able to. Therefore, even if an error occurs to the extent that the specific performance alone is not sufficient, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

Note that the special performance used in the gaming machine K6 is a performance different from the specific performance using the period from the end of the first performance or the second performance until the end of the first performance period or the second performance period. The configuration may be such that the first performance or the second performance is completed during the period from the end of the first performance or the second performance until the end of the first performance period or the second performance period. A new performance may be executed in the period from 1 to 2 until the end of the bonus game, and a specific performance may be executed in the period from the end of the bonus game until the end of the first performance period or the second performance period. . In this case, the latter configuration has the effect of reducing the amount of performance data.

In any of the gaming machines K1 to K6, a remaining period for determining the length of the remaining period from the end of the first performance or the second performance until the end of the first performance period or the second performance period is determined. A gaming machine K7 characterized in that it has a period determining means and a specific performance mode determining means for determining the performance mode of the specific performance based on the result of determination by the remaining period discriminating means.

According to the gaming machine K7, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines K1 to K6, the following effects are produced, that is, after the first performance or the second performance ends, the first performance period or the second performance is started. The length of the remaining period until the end of the period is determined by the remaining period determining means, and the performance mode of the specific performance is determined by the specific performance mode determining means based on the result of the determination.

As a result, the performance mode of the specific performance can be determined based on the length of the remaining period, so that a performance suitable for the player can be executed and the performance effect can be enhanced.

Here, as the specific performance determined based on the length of the remaining period, for example, it is determined that the remaining period is so short that it is difficult for the player to grasp the content of the specific performance that will be executed during the remaining period. In this case, the performance mode using all or part of the first performance or the second performance is set as the performance mode of the specific performance. Thereby, it becomes possible to execute the specific performance as if the first performance or the second performance is extended, and it is possible to execute the specific performance without giving a sense of discomfort to the player. In this case, it is preferable to execute the specific performance including a mode of notifying that the first performance or the second performance is extended. As a result, for players who cannot grasp the content of the specific performance, the specific performance is executed as if the first performance or second performance was extended, and for players who can understand the content of the specific performance, By notifying the user that the performance mode of the first performance or second performance is being extended, it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that the first performance or the second performance will not end due to a malfunction of the gaming machine. It has the effect of being able to

In addition, if it is determined that the remaining period is long enough for the player to fully understand the contents of the specific performance that will be executed during the remaining period, information indicated by the first performance or the second performance in the specific performance. It is preferable to use a production mode that can display information other than (information indicating the determination result of the determination means). Thereby, the remaining period can be used to provide new information to the player, and there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a decrease in the desire to play.

In the gaming machine K7, the bonus performance mode determining means selects at least one of the confirmed performance modes as the performance mode of the specific performance when the remaining period determining means determines that the remaining period is less than a predetermined period. A gaming machine K8 is characterized in that it determines a specific performance mode comprised of sections.

According to the gaming machine K8, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine K7, the following effects are achieved. That is, when the remaining period determining means determines that the remaining period is shorter than the predetermined period, the special presentation mode that is made up of at least a part of the confirmed presentation mode is the special presentation mode as the presentation mode of the specific presentation. determined by

Thereby, it becomes possible to perform the specific performance as if the first performance or the second performance is extended, and it is possible to perform the specific performance without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

In the gaming machine K7 or K8, when the remaining period determining means determines that the remaining period is longer than a predetermined period, the bonus performance mode determining means selects the first performance or The gaming machine K9 is characterized in that it determines a specific performance mode that includes information different from information included in the second performance.

According to the gaming machine K9, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine K7 or K8, the following effects are achieved. That is, when the remaining period determining means determines that the remaining period is longer than the predetermined period, a specific presentation mode that includes information different from information included in the first presentation or the second presentation is selected as the presentation mode of the specific presentation. It is determined by the bonus performance mode determining means.

Thereby, the remaining period can be used to provide new information to the player, and there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a decrease in the desire to play.

<Feature L group> (ST number display control)
a specific game executing means that can execute a specific game advantageous to the player a specific number of times when a predetermined condition is met; a number updating device that updates the number of times the specific game has been executed by the specific game executing means; a remaining number determining means for determining the remaining number of the specific number of times; a number notifying means for notifying a number of times less than the remaining number determined by the remaining number of times determining means; and increasing the number of times notified by the number notifying means. A gaming machine L1 is characterized in that it is equipped with a privilege notification executing means that can execute a privilege notification based on a predetermined rule, and a rule switching means that can switch the predetermined rule.

Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines display symbols in a variable manner based on the winning of a game ball into a starting prize opening, and inform the player of the lottery result after the variable display ends. In this way, gaming machines are configured so that a specific game that is advantageous to the player can be executed a specific number of times by increasing the probability of a winning lottery or making it easier for the lottery to be executed. There are some devices that display the remaining number of times the remaining number of times the number of times the number of times the number of times the remaining number of times is exceeded is displayed on a display screen (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-6562).

In such conventional gaming machines, the remaining number of times a specific game can be executed is displayed on the display screen, so when the remaining number of times an advantageous state is set becomes fewer, the player's motivation may decrease. There was a problem with putting it away. The purpose is to solve the problems exemplified above.

According to the gaming machine L1, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, a specific game advantageous to the player is executed a specific number of times by the specific game execution means, and the number of times the specific game has been executed by the specific game execution means is updated. Updated by means. The remaining number of times of the specific number of times is determined by the remaining number of times determination means, and the number of times that is equal to or less than the remaining number of times determined by the remaining number of times determination means is notified by the number of times reporting means. Privilege notification for increasing the number of notifications by the number of times notification means is executed by the privilege notification executing means based on a predetermined rule, and the predetermined rule is switched by the rule switching means.

This makes it possible to notify the number of times that the specific game is to be executed less than or equal to the remaining number of times. Therefore, even if the number of notifications has decreased, the player can play the game while expecting that the specific game will continue to be played, and it is possible to prevent the player's motivation from decreasing. It has the effect of being able to.

Further, by executing a benefit notification that increases the number of times that the number of times notification is given by the number of times notification means, it is possible to increase the number of times that the specific game is confirmed to be performed for the player. This allows the player to play the game while continuing to have a moderate sense of security.

Moreover, since the rule for executing the benefit notification can be changed, it is possible to increase the number of times the reward notification is performed by the number of times notification means in various patterns. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game early.

A gaming machine L2, which is the gaming machine L1, has an operating means that can be operated by a player, and the rule switching means switches the predetermined rule based on an operation on the operating means.

According to the gaming machine L2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine L1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the predetermined rule is switched by the rule switching means based on the operation on the operation means that can be operated by the player.

Therefore, since the player can change the predetermined rules according to his/her preference, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine L1 or L2, the rule switching means executes a lottery to determine whether or not to execute the bonus notification every time the number of games is updated, and executes the bonus notification based on the lottery result. The first rule is configured to be switchable between the first rule and the second rule, which determines whether to execute the benefit notification based on the number of times the notification is made by the number of times notification means becomes a predetermined number or less. Gaming machine L3 has certain characteristics.

According to the gaming machine L3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine L1 or L2, the following effects are achieved. That is, the first rule is that the rule switching means determines whether or not to perform a bonus notification every time the number of games is updated, and the bonus notification is executed based on the determination result; The second rule is configured to be switchable to a second rule in which it is determined whether to execute the benefit notification based on the fact that the number of notifications has become equal to or less than a predetermined number of times.

As a result, bonus notifications can be executed using rules with different tastes, which has the effect of increasing the interest of the game.

In any of gaming machines L1 to L3, the benefit notification execution means executes the benefit notification if the remaining number of times is equal to or greater than a predetermined number of times when the predetermined rule is switched by the rule switching device. A gaming machine L4 characterized by the following.

According to the gaming machine L4, in addition to the effects provided by any of the gaming machines L1 to L3, the following effects are achieved. That is, when the predetermined rule is switched by the rule switching means and the remaining number of times is equal to or greater than the predetermined number of times, the privilege notification is executed by the benefit notification execution means.

Thereby, the benefit notification can be executed at the timing when the predetermined rule is switched. Therefore, it becomes possible to have the player play the game while expecting that the predetermined rule will be switched by the rule switching means, and there is an effect that the presentation effect can be enhanced.

The gaming machine L4 is characterized in that the bonus notification execution means executes the bonus notification indicating that a possible number of times out of a preset upper limit number of times is to be increased within the range of the remaining number of times. Game machine L5.

According to the gaming machine L5, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine L4, the following effects are achieved. That is, the benefit notification is executed by the benefit notification execution means, which indicates that the possible number of times within the remaining number of times is increased from the preset upper limit number of times.

This makes it possible to complicate the manner of award notification, and has the effect of preventing players from getting bored with the game early.

<Characteristics Group M> (Attack winning performance will be determined by lottery)
A bonus game in which one bonus game is executed among a plurality of different bonus games based on a determination means that executes a determination based on the establishment of a determination condition, and a determination result by the determination means is a specific determination result. When the bonus game is executed by the execution means and the bonus game execution means, a predetermined condition is established in which the game ball changes from a first state where it is difficult to enter the ball to a second state where it is easier to enter the ball than the first state. a variable ball entering means that varies until the game ball enters the variable ball entering means; a condition determining means that determines whether an execution condition is satisfied based on the fact that a game ball enters the variable ball entering means; and a condition determining means that determines that the execution condition is satisfied. a performance execution means that can execute a performance when the bonus game execution means executes a performance; and a ratio variable means that varies and sets a ratio at which the execution condition is satisfied based on the type of the bonus game executed by the bonus game execution unit; A gaming machine M1 having the following features.

Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines display symbols in a variable manner based on the winning of a game ball into a starting prize opening, and inform the player of the lottery result after the variable display ends. In this way, some gaming machines notify that when a winning game is executed, a specific winning hole is opened and a game ball has won in the specific winning hole (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2014-138735). . In addition, some games are configured to set multiple winning games with different opening patterns of the specific winning opening, and the number of game balls that can be won in the specific winning opening varies depending on the winning game executed. Some games increase the interest of the game by making it difficult for the player to predict which winning game is being executed.

In such conventional gaming machines, a notification is executed each time a game ball enters a specific winning hole, so it is possible for the player to easily understand that a winning game is being executed. However, since the notification is executed every time a game ball enters a specific winning hole, you can easily understand the winnings by just knowing the notification contents that are executed every time a game ball enters a specific winning hole. There was a problem in that the player could easily grasp the type of game.

Furthermore, in a gaming machine that shifts the gaming state after the winning game to a state advantageous to the player depending on the type of winning game to be executed, it is possible to increase the interest of the game by making it difficult to understand the type of winning game to be executed. However, when using such a gaming machine, if a notification is executed every time a game ball enters a specific winning slot, the game state will change after the winning game ends. There has been a problem in that players cannot play winning games, which reduces the player's desire to play. The purpose is to solve the problems exemplified above.

According to the gaming machine M1, the determination is performed by the determination means based on the establishment of the determination condition, and based on the determination result being a specific determination result, one bonus game is selected from among a plurality of different bonus games. The bonus game is executed by the bonus game execution means. When a bonus game is executed by the bonus game execution means, a predetermined condition is established in which the variable ball entry means changes the game ball from a first state where it is difficult to enter the ball to a second state where it is easier to enter the ball than the first state. It is variable until The condition determining means determines whether the execution condition is met based on the game ball entering the variable ball entering means, and when the condition determining means determines that the execution condition is satisfied, the performance execution means executes the performance. be done. Then, based on the type of bonus game executed by the bonus game execution means, the rate at which the execution condition is satisfied is variably set by the rate variable means.

Thereby, it is possible to vary the rate at which the performance is performed based on the game ball entering the variable ball entry means based on the type of bonus game. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the type of bonus game due to the performance executed by the performance execution means and reducing his or her desire to play.

The gaming machine M1 has a payout means that pays out a predetermined number of game balls as prize balls to the player based on the game balls entering the variable ball entry means, and the performance includes: A gaming machine M2, characterized in that it is set based on the number of prize balls paid out by the payout means.

According to the gaming machine M2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine M1, the following effects are achieved. That is, based on the entry of game balls into the variable ball entry means, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the player as prize balls by the payout means, and the number of prize balls paid out by the payout means is The performance is set based on the number.

As a result, the performance is executed by the performance execution means, making it possible for the player to easily understand that a bonus game is being executed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player does not notice that a bonus game that is advantageous to the player has been executed, and it is possible to perform a performance that is easy for the player to understand.

In the gaming machine M1 or M2, the bonus game executing means executes a first bonus game in which it is easy for the game ball to enter the variable ball entry means, and a first bonus game in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter the variable ball entry means. 2 bonus games, and the ratio variable means sets the ratio lower when the first bonus game is executed than when the second bonus game is executed. A gaming machine M3 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine M3, the bonus game execution means creates a first bonus game in which it is easy for the game ball to enter the ball entry means, and a second bonus game in which it is more difficult to enter the game ball into the ball entry means than in the first bonus game. At least one of these is executed. Then, by the ratio variable means, when the first bonus game is executed, the rate at which the execution condition is satisfied is set lower than when the second bonus game is executed.

Thereby, when the first bonus game and the second bonus game are executed in which the ease of entering the ball into the ball entering means is different, it is possible to approximate the number of times the performance is executed by the performance execution means. becomes. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the type of bonus game due to the performance executed by the performance execution means and reducing his or her desire to play.

Here, when using the configuration of the gaming machine M2, regardless of the type of the bonus game execution means, the game ball that first enters the ball entry means is always (with high probability) played by the performance execution means. It is better to allow the performance to be executed. Thereby, it is possible to make the player easily understand that a bonus game has been executed, and furthermore, it is possible to provide an effect in which the player does not easily know the type of bonus game that is being executed.

In any of the gaming machines M1 to M3, the gaming machine M4 is characterized in that the performance is one in which a display mode is displayed on the display means as at least one of the performance modes.

According to the gaming machine M4, in addition to the effects produced by any one of the gaming machines M1 to M3, a display mode is displayed on the display means as at least one of the performance modes, so that the player can enjoy the content displayed on the display means. This has the effect that the player can easily understand that the bonus game has been executed based on the above information.

In the gaming machine M3 or M4, in the first bonus game, a period from when the variable ball entry means is changed to the second state until the predetermined condition is satisfied is set longer than in the second bonus game. The gaming machine M5 is characterized by being

According to the gaming machine M5, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine M3 or M4, the following effects are achieved. That is, in the first bonus game, the period from when the variable ball entry means is changed to the second state until the predetermined condition is satisfied is set longer than in the second bonus game.

This has the effect that the first bonus game can be reliably executed as a bonus game that is easier to enter than the second bonus game.

A gaming machine M6 characterized in that in the gaming machine M3 or M5, the number of times the first bonus game is changed to the second state is set to be greater than the second bonus game.

According to the gaming machine M6, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine M3 or M4, the following effects are achieved. That is, the number of times that the first bonus game is changed to the second state is set to be greater than the second bonus game.

This has the effect that the first bonus game can be reliably executed as a bonus game that is easier to enter than the second bonus game.

In any one of claims M1 to M6, the game apparatus further includes a second ratio variable means for variably setting the ratio at which the execution condition is met based on the number of game balls that enter the variable ball entry means. The gaming machine M7 is characterized by the following.

According to gaming machine M7, in addition to the effects provided by any of gaming machines M1 to M6, the following effects are achieved. That is, the second ratio variable means variably sets the ratio at which the execution condition is satisfied based on the number of game balls that enter the variable ball entry means.

This makes it possible to change the rate at which the performance is performed based on the number of game balls that enter the variable ball entry means. Therefore, it becomes possible to set the performance execution ratio in a more complicated manner.

In the gaming machine M7, the bonus game execution means executes a first bonus game in which it is easy for a game ball to enter the ball entry means, and a second bonus game in which it is more difficult to enter the game ball into the ball entry means than in the first bonus game. A gaming machine capable of executing at least the following, and wherein the second ratio variable means makes it more difficult for the execution condition to be satisfied as the number of game balls that enter the variable means increases. M8.

According to the gaming machine M8, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine M7, the following effects are achieved. That is, at least one of a first bonus game in which the game ball enters the ball entering means easily by the bonus game execution means, and a second bonus game in which it is more difficult to enter the game ball into the ball entering means than in the first bonus game. is executed. Then, the second ratio variable means makes it more difficult for the execution condition to be satisfied as the number of game balls entering the variable means increases.

Thereby, it becomes possible to approximate the number of performances performed by the performance execution means between when the first bonus game is executed and when the second bonus game is executed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the type of bonus game due to the performance executed by the performance execution means and reducing his or her desire to play.

In any of the gaming machines M2 to M8, the performance execution means displays a divided display mode indicating the number of divided prize balls to be paid out by the payout means as the performance. A gaming machine M9 characterized in that settings are made to correspond to the number of prize balls.

According to gaming machine M9, in addition to the effects provided by any of gaming machines M2 to M8, the following effects are achieved. That is, the performance execution means sets a divided display mode indicating the number of divided prize balls put out by the payout means as a performance so as to correspond to the number of prize balls paid out by the payout means.

This makes it possible to display a plurality of divided display modes in one performance. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the type of bonus game due to the performance executed by the performance execution means and reducing his or her desire to play. Further, even in a gaming machine having bonus games with different numbers of prize balls, the same effect can be achieved by executing the performance using the split display mode.

<Feature N group> (Variable number of additions with PUSH effect)
A benefit information determining means for determining benefit information advantageous to the player, a storage means capable of storing the benefit information determined by the benefit information determining means, and at least the benefit information stored in the storage means. a benefit granting means for granting a benefit advantageous to a corresponding player; and when the benefit granting means grants the benefit, the benefit corresponds to benefit information stored in the storage means. a benefit information updating means for updating the benefit information to the reduced benefit information; a display means for displaying identification information based on less benefit information than the benefit information stored in the storage means; a determining means for determining the privilege information with the privilege information stored in the storage means as an upper limit; an operating means operable by a player; and, when the operating means is operated, corresponding to the operation timing. a setting means for varying and setting the privilege information; a variable setting means for varying the privilege information set by the setting means based on a specific condition; and a setting means for varying the privilege information set by the setting means based on the operation of the operating means. display updating means for acquiring the privilege information set by and updating the privilege information corresponding to the identification information displayed on the display means to the corresponding identification information; Gaming machine N1 is characterized by certain things.

Here, gaming machines such as pachinko machines have operation means such as operation buttons that can be operated by players, and are capable of performing operation effects that prompt players to operate the operation means as a type of entertainment effect. (For example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2006-263523). In this conventional gaming machine, by operating an operation button in an operation performance, a special performance different from normal performance is generated, a win is notified, etc., in an attempt to improve the player's interest.

However, in such conventional gaming machines, the operation effect is performed as part of the effect to notify the predetermined winning lottery result, so the result of the player's operation on the frame button is the result of the effect (the winning result is It had nothing to do with whether it was reported or not. Therefore, there has been a problem in that it is difficult to increase the player's desire to participate in the operation performance. The purpose is to solve the problems exemplified above.

According to the gaming machine N1, bonus information that is advantageous to the player is determined by the bonus information determining means. The bonus information determined by the bonus information determining means is stored in the storage means, and a bonus advantageous to the player corresponding to at least a part of the stored bonus information is awarded by the bonus granting means. When a privilege is awarded by the privilege granting means, the privilege information updating means updates the privilege to privilege information that is reduced from the privilege corresponding to the privilege information stored in the storage means. Identification information based on less privilege information than the privilege information stored in the storage means is displayed on the display means. The award information to be displayed on the display means is determined by the determining means, with the award information stored in the storage means being the upper limit. When the operating means is operated by the player, bonus information corresponding to the timing of the operation is variably set by the setting means. The benefit information set by the setting means is varied by the variable setting means based on specific conditions. Benefit information set by the setting means is acquired based on the operation of the operating means, and benefit information corresponding to the identification information displayed on the display means is updated to corresponding identification information by the display updating means. .

This allows the privilege information to be updated based on the operation of the operating means. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's desire to participate in the operation performance can be improved.

In the gaming machine N1, there is a determining means that executes a determination based on the establishment of a determining condition, and a privilege that executes a bonus game that is advantageous to the player based on the fact that the determination result by the determining means is a specific determination result. and a game execution means, wherein the privilege granting means operates in a high probability state that increases the probability that the determination result is determined by the determination means a predetermined number of times until the determination by the determination means is executed. A gaming machine N2 characterized in that the privilege is continuously set each time the determination is executed.

According to the gaming machine N2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine N1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the determination is performed by the determination means based on the establishment of the determination condition. A bonus game that is advantageous to the player is executed by the bonus game execution unit based on the fact that the determination result by the determination unit is a specific determination result. Then, the high probability state that increases the probability that the determination result will be determined by the determination means is set as a benefit each time the determination is performed by the benefit granting means until the determination is performed a predetermined number of times by the determination means. Continuously set.

As a result, the high probability state that increases the probability of a specific judgment result being determined by the judgment means is set to continue until the judgment means executes the judgment a predetermined number of times, so the high probability state is set. The player can easily understand that the Therefore, there is an effect that the player can play the game with peace of mind.

In gaming machine N2, gaming machine N3 is characterized in that the identification information is information indicating the number of times that the high probability state is confirmed and notified that it will continue.

According to the gaming machine N3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine N2, the identification information indicates the number of times that the high probability state will be determined and notified.

Thereby, the player can easily grasp the number of times it is certain that the high probability state will continue. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can play the game with peace of mind.

In any of the gaming machines N1 to N3, a suggestion display control means for displaying on the display means a suggestion display mode indicating the timing to operate the operation means; and a suggestion display mode displayed on the suggestion display control means. A gaming machine N4 characterized in that it has a suggestion display mode determining means that determines based on the timing of the bonus information set in the setting means.

According to gaming machine N4, in addition to the effects provided by any of gaming machines N1 to N3, the following effects are achieved. That is, the suggestion display mode that suggests the timing to operate the operating means is displayed on the display means by the suggestion display control means. The suggestion display mode displayed on the suggestion display control means is determined by the suggestion display mode determining means based on the timing of the benefit information set in the setting means.

As a result, bonus information is given by operating the operating means based on the suggestion display mode displayed on the display means, so that it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand performance to the player.

In the gaming machine N4, the suggestion display mode includes a variable display mode that is displayed variably based on the passage of time, and a discrimination mode that allows the privilege information set in the setting means to be determined based on the variable display mode. A gaming machine N5 characterized in that at least is displayed.

According to the gaming machine N5, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine N4, the following effects are achieved. That is, as the suggestion display mode, a variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner based on the passage of time, and a discrimination mode is displayed in which the privilege information set in the setting means can be determined based on the variable display mode.

As a result, the bonus information to be provided can be determined based on the display content displayed in the variable display mode, so it is possible to make the player aim at the timing to operate the operating means. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be motivated to play the game.

<Characteristics Group O> (Reduces the frequency of small hits)
a discriminating means that performs discrimination based on the satisfaction of a discriminating condition; a privilege granting means that awards a privilege to a player based on a result of the discrimination by the discriminating means being a specific discrimination result; a discrimination condition storage means capable of storing a plurality of occurrences of the discrimination condition; and a suppression means for suppressing the frequency with which the discrimination is performed by the discrimination means, the suppression means storing information in the discrimination condition storage means. A gaming machine O1 characterized in that the frequency with which the determination is executed is more easily suppressed when the number of the determination conditions determined is equal to or greater than the predetermined number than when the number is less than the predetermined number.

Here, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine pays out a predetermined number of game balls based on the winning of the game ball into the starting winning hole, displays a variable pattern, and after the variable display ends, draws a lottery to the player. There is something that notifies you of the results. Some of these gaming machines are configured to be able to hold and store multiple drawings that are executed based on the winning of game balls in the starting winning slot (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open Publication No. 2010-35664). .

In such conventional gaming machines, when the frequency of winning of game balls in the starting winning hole is high, more game balls are paid out compared to when the frequency of winning of game balls in the starting winning hole is low. The winnings will be paid out and many drawings will be executed, and the benefits received by the player will vary greatly depending on the frequency of winning of game balls in the starting winning hole. There was a problem in that the operation of gaming machines that were infrequent was reduced. In addition, in order for a player to understand whether the frequency of winning of game balls in the starting winning hole is appropriate or not, it is necessary to play many games. The problem was that I couldn't do it. The purpose is to solve the problems exemplified above.

According to the gaming machine O1, the discrimination is performed by the discrimination means based on the satisfaction of the discrimination condition, and based on the result of the discrimination by the discrimination means being a specific discrimination result, the bonus granting means awards the player. will be given benefits. A plurality of determination conditions are stored in the determination condition storage means. The frequency with which the discrimination is performed by the discrimination means is suppressed by the suppression means. In addition, the suppression means makes it easier to suppress the frequency with which the determination is performed when the number of determination conditions stored in the determination condition storage means is greater than or equal to the predetermined number than when the number is less than the predetermined number.

This makes it possible to suppress the frequency with which determination is performed when the number of determination conditions stored in the determination condition storage means is greater than or equal to the predetermined number than when the number is less than the predetermined number. Therefore, there is an effect that a fair gaming machine can be provided to players who play games.

In the gaming machine O1, a display means for displaying identification information indicating a determination result of the determination by the determination means, a dynamic display execution means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means, and the dynamic display. dynamic display period setting means for setting a dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the execution means; A gaming machine O2 characterized in that the frequency at which the determination is performed is suppressed by setting a period.

According to the gaming machine O2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine O1, the following effects are achieved. That is, identification information indicating the determination result of the determination by the determining means is displayed on the display means, and dynamic display of the identification information is executed by the dynamic display execution means on the display means. A dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means is set by the dynamic display period setting means. By setting a long dynamic display period by the dynamic display period setting means, the frequency at which the determination is performed is suppressed by the suppressing means.

As a result, by setting a long dynamic display period, the frequency at which discrimination is executed is suppressed, so it is possible to reliably suppress the frequency at which discrimination is executed, and it is fair to players who play games. This has the effect of increasing the precision with which gaming machines are provided.

In the gaming machine O2, a second discriminating means executes discrimination based on the satisfaction of a second discriminating condition, and a second display means displays second identification information indicating a result of discrimination by the second discriminating means. , a second dynamic display execution means for dynamically displaying the second identification information in the second display means; and a dynamic display of the second identification information executed by the second dynamic display execution means. A second dynamic display period setting means for setting a second dynamic display period, and a second determination means based on the fact that the result of the determination by the second determination means is a specific second determination result. A gaming machine O3 comprising: a second privilege granting means for granting a privilege, and the second discrimination condition is more likely to be satisfied by the privilege granting means granting the privilege. .

According to the gaming machine O3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine O2, the following effects are achieved. That is, the second discrimination means performs discrimination based on the second discrimination condition being satisfied, and second identification information indicating the result of the discrimination by the second discrimination means is displayed on the second display means. In the second display means, a second dynamic display execution means executes a dynamic display of the second identification information, and a second operation in the dynamic display of the second identification information executed by the second dynamic display execution means. The dynamic display period is set by the second dynamic display period setting means. Based on the fact that the result of the determination by the second determination means is a specific second determination result, the second benefit granting means grants the second benefit to the player. Then, by granting a benefit by the benefit granting means, the second discrimination condition is more likely to be satisfied.

Thereby, it is possible to suppress the suppression unit from providing a benefit that makes it easier to satisfy the second discrimination condition. Therefore, there is an effect that a fair gaming machine can be provided to players who play games.

In the gaming machine O2, a second discriminating means executes discrimination based on the satisfaction of a second discriminating condition, and a second display means displays second identification information indicating a result of discrimination by the second discriminating means. , a second dynamic display execution means for dynamically displaying the second identification information in the second display means; and a dynamic display of the second identification information executed by the second dynamic display execution means. A second dynamic display period setting means for setting a second dynamic display period, and a second determination means based on the fact that the result of the determination by the second determination means is a specific second determination result. a second benefit granting means for granting a benefit, and the second benefit granting means grants the second benefit, thereby making it easier for the discrimination condition to be met. Machine O4.

According to the gaming machine O4, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine O2, the following effects are achieved. That is, the second discrimination means performs discrimination based on the second discrimination condition being satisfied, and second identification information indicating the result of the discrimination by the second discrimination means is displayed on the second display means. In the second display means, a second dynamic display execution means executes a dynamic display of the second identification information, and a second operation in the dynamic display of the second identification information executed by the second dynamic display execution means. The dynamic display period is set by the second dynamic display period setting means. Based on the fact that the result of the determination by the second determination means is a specific second determination result, the second benefit granting means grants the second benefit to the player. Then, the second benefit is granted by the second benefit granting means, thereby making it easier to satisfy the discrimination condition.

Thereby, it is possible to prevent the suppression means from providing the second benefit that makes it easier to satisfy the discrimination condition. Therefore, there is an effect that a fair gaming machine can be provided to players who play games.

In any of the gaming machines O1 to O4, the suppressing means facilitates suppressing the frequency with which the discrimination is performed when the discrimination result by the discrimination means is the specific discrimination result. A gaming machine O5.

According to the gaming machine O5, in addition to the effects provided by any of the gaming machines O1 to O4, the following effects are achieved. That is, when the result of the discrimination by the discrimination means is a specific discrimination result, the frequency at which the discrimination is performed is likely to be suppressed by the suppression means.

This makes it possible to suppress the frequency at which the determination is performed when a benefit is awarded by the benefit granting means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which a large number of benefits are granted in a short period of time.

In any one of gaming machines O2 to O5, the suppressing means is configured to suppress a first predetermined number of discriminating conditions stored in the discriminating condition storage means from a first predetermined number less than the predetermined number. The gaming machine O6 is characterized in that the frequency at which the determination is performed is easily suppressed when the number of times the determination is performed is 2 or a predetermined number.

According to the gaming machine O6, in addition to the effects provided by any of the gaming machines O2 to O4, the following effects are achieved. That is, when the number of discrimination conditions stored in the discrimination condition storage means is a second predetermined number less than the first predetermined number than the first predetermined number less than the predetermined number, the frequency at which discrimination is performed by the suppression means is lower. more likely to be suppressed.

Thereby, when the number of discrimination conditions stored in the discrimination condition storage means is less than a predetermined number, the discrimination is executed more when the second predetermined number is less than the first predetermined number than the first predetermined number. This makes it easier to suppress the frequency at which discrimination is executed, so when players intentionally play games with a small number of discrimination conditions stored, it is possible to suppress the frequency at which discrimination is executed, and it is easier for players who play games to This has the effect of providing a fair gaming machine.

<Feature P group> (Variable range of pending notice)
an information acquisition means for acquiring information based on the establishment of an acquisition condition; an information storage means capable of storing the information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined upper limit; Based on the information, a discriminating means executes discriminating when a discriminating condition is established, and a bonus game advantageous to the player is executed based on a particular discriminating result obtained by the discriminating means. A gaming machine comprising: a bonus game execution means; a preliminary determination means capable of performing a preliminary determination based on the information stored in the information storage means before the determination condition is established; and the information identification symbol display control means for displaying an identification symbol corresponding to each piece of information stored in a storage means on a display means; and for the information before being discriminated by the discriminating means; a variable means for varying the identification symbol based on the result of preliminary discrimination by the preliminary discrimination means; A gaming machine P1 comprising: determining means for determining a combination of identification symbols.

Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines display symbols in a variable manner based on the winning of a game ball into a starting prize opening, and inform the player of the lottery result after the variable display ends. Furthermore, the lottery executed based on the winning of the game ball in the starting winning hole can be stored multiple times, and the reserved symbols corresponding to the number of reserved symbols are displayed, and the currently displayed reserved symbols are There are some devices that are configured to be able to execute a pending notice effect that can be used to notify information regarding the corresponding lottery in advance (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2009-297071).

In such conventional gaming machines, by changing the color and shape of the reserved symbols, it is possible to indicate the degree of expectation of a jackpot in the variable display corresponding to the pending symbol, before the variable display starts. This made it possible to increase the expectations of players.

However, in such conventional gaming machines, when a reservation notice effect occurs, it becomes difficult for the player to develop a sense of expectation for the pending symbols that are not covered by the reservation notice, and this reduces the player's desire to play. There was a problem with putting it away. The purpose is to solve the problems exemplified above.

According to the gaming machine P1, information is acquired by the information acquisition means based on the establishment of acquisition conditions, and the information acquired by the information acquisition means is stored up to a predetermined upper limit number by the information storage means. Based on the information stored in the information storage means, the determination means executes a determination upon the establishment of the determination condition, and based on the determination by the determination means resulting in a specific determination result, it is determined that the determination is advantageous to the player. A bonus game is executed by the bonus game execution means. Based on the information stored in the information storage means, prior determination is performed by the prior determination means before the determination condition is satisfied. An identification symbol corresponding to each piece of information stored in the information storage means is displayed on the display means by the identification symbol display control means. The identification pattern is varied by the variable means based on the result of preliminary discrimination by the preliminary discrimination means with respect to the information before being discriminated by the discrimination means. Among the plurality of identification symbols displayed on the identification symbol display control means, a combination of identification symbols to be varied by the variable means is determined by the determining means.

This makes it possible to determine a combination of identification symbols to be varied by the variable means among the plurality of identification symbols displayed on the identification symbol display control means. Therefore, since it is possible to suppress the variable means from being executed for all the identification symbols displayed on the display means, it is possible to suppress the player's desire to play from decreasing.

In the gaming machine P1, the variable means changes the information corresponding to the identification symbol if a predetermined condition is satisfied during a period until the discrimination condition for the information corresponding to the displayed identification symbol is satisfied. A gaming machine P2 characterized in that the manner in which information based on the result of the preliminary determination is displayed is variable.

According to the gaming machine P2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine P1, the following effects are achieved. In other words, if a predetermined condition is satisfied during the period until the determination condition for the information corresponding to the displayed identification symbol is satisfied by the variable means, information based on the result of preliminary determination of the information corresponding to the identification symbol being displayed is generated. The display mode can be changed.

This allows the player to focus on the variable content of the identification symbol. Therefore, there is an effect that the presentation effect can be enhanced.

The gaming machine P1 or P2 has a specific display control means that uses the identification symbol varied by the variable means to display a specific display mode corresponding to the identification symbol on the display means for a specific period of time. A gaming machine P3 characterized by the following.

According to the gaming machine P3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine P1 or P2, the following effects are achieved. That is, by using the identification pattern varied by the variable means, a specific display mode corresponding to the identification pattern is displayed on the display device for a specific period by the specific display control device.

Thereby, it becomes possible to execute a specific performance mode using the identification symbol varied by the variable means, and there is an effect that a performance advantageous to the player can be executed.

In any of the gaming machines P1 to P3, when the identification symbol is varied by the operating means that can be operated by the player and the variable means, the setting of a specific performance is executed based on the operation of the operating means. A gaming machine P4 characterized in that it has a specific performance execution means.

According to the gaming machine P4, in addition to the effects provided by any of the gaming machines P1 to P3, the following effects are achieved. That is, when the identification symbol is varied by the variable means, the setting of the specific performance is executed by the specific performance execution means based on the operation of the operating means by the player.

This has the effect that a specific performance mode can be executed for a specific period using the identification symbol varied by the variable means.

In the gaming machine P4, when the pre-discrimination means determines the specific discrimination result, the number of the identification symbols is varied by the variable means, compared to when it is determined that the discrimination result is other than the specific discrimination result. A gaming machine P5 characterized in that it has variable number setting means for setting a large number of.

According to the gaming machine P5, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine P5, the following effects are achieved. That is, when a specific discrimination result is determined by the pre-discrimination means, the number of identification symbols to be varied by the variable means is set to be larger by the variable number setting means than when it is determined that the discrimination result is other than the specific discrimination result. Ru.

This has the effect that the frequency at which the identification symbols are displayed can be changed depending on the gaming state, and the presentation effect can be enhanced.

<Characteristics Q group> (Execute a specific performance when the remaining number of STs is less than a predetermined number and it becomes a jackpot)
A discriminating means for executing a discrimination based on the establishment of a discriminating condition; a privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game advantageous to a player based on a specific discrimination result obtained by the discrimination by the discriminating means; The game state after the bonus game executed by the bonus game execution means is a plurality of game states including a first game state and a second game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state. When the second gaming state is set by a gaming state setting means for setting one gaming state from among the gaming states, and the second gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means, the identification is more likely to be established as the number of times the determination is performed by the determining means increases. a specific condition determining means for determining whether or not a condition has been met; and a game state changing from the second gaming state to the first game based on the fact that the specific condition determining means has determined that the specific condition has been met. a gaming state changing means for changing the state; and a suggesting effect execution means for executing a suggestive effect suggesting the ease with which the specific condition is satisfied when the second gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means. , a comparison means for comparing the ease with which the specific condition is satisfied as suggested by the suggestive effect and the actual ease with which the specific condition is satisfied, and the comparison result by the comparison means is a specific comparison result; A gaming machine Q1 characterized in that it comprises a specific effect execution means for executing a specific effect corresponding to the specific comparison result based on the establishment of a predetermined condition.

Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines display symbols in a variable manner based on the winning of a game ball into a starting prize opening, and inform the player of the lottery result after the variable display ends. In this way, gaming machines are configured so that a specific game that is advantageous to the player can be executed a specific number of times by increasing the probability of a winning lottery or making it easier for the lottery to be executed. There are some games that do not notify the player of the number of times the game is played (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2015-6562).

In such conventional gaming machines, the number of times a specific game will be played is not notified to the player, so if a player wins while playing a specific game, he or she cannot know the remaining number of times the specific game is played, and the player is unable to play the game. There has been a problem in that it is not possible to provide players with a sufficient sense of satisfaction with the results. The purpose is to solve the problems exemplified above.

According to the gaming machine Q1, the determination is performed by the determination means based on the establishment of the determination condition, and based on the determination by the determination means having a specific determination result, a bonus game that is advantageous to the player is determined to be a bonus game. It is executed by the execution means. A plurality of game states including a first game state and a second game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state as the game state after the bonus game executed by the bonus game execution means ends. One gaming state is set from among them by the gaming state setting means. When the second game state is set by the game state setting means, the specific condition discriminating means determines whether a specific condition is established, which is more likely to be satisfied as the number of executions of the discrimination by the discriminating means increases. Based on the specific condition determining means determining that the specific condition is satisfied, the gaming state is changed from the second gaming state to the first gaming state by the gaming state changing means. When the second game state is set by the game state setting means, a suggestive performance suggesting the ease with which the specific condition is satisfied is executed by the suggestive performance executing means. The ease with which the specific condition is satisfied as suggested by the suggestive effect is compared with the actual ease with which the specific condition is satisfied, and when the comparison result by the comparison means is a specific comparison result, the predetermined condition is Based on the establishment of the specific effect, a specific effect corresponding to the specific comparison result is executed by the specific effect execution means.

As a result, when the ease of establishing a specific condition suggested by the suggestive effect and the actual ease of establishing a specific condition are a specific comparison result, a specific comparison result is determined based on the establishment of the predetermined condition. The corresponding specific performance is executed by the specific performance execution means. Therefore, by executing the specific performance, it is possible to make the player grasp the current situation of the second game state, and there is an effect that the performance effect can be enhanced.

Here, by configuring the predetermined condition to be satisfied when the determination result of the determination means becomes a specific determination result, the player can grasp the situation of the second game state when the bonus game is executed. It becomes like this. Therefore, when the bonus game is executed just before the end of the second gaming state, there is an effect that the player can feel satisfied.

The gaming machine Q1 includes a specific condition setting means for setting a predetermined number of times of execution by the determining means at which the specific condition is satisfied when the second gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means. A gaming machine Q2 characterized by the following.

According to the gaming machine Q2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine Q1, the following effects are achieved. That is, when the second gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means, the specific condition setting means sets a predetermined number of executions by the determining means at which the specific condition is satisfied.

Thereby, the specific condition can be set based on the number of times the determining means is executed, so the number of times the second gaming state is set can be set in advance. Therefore, it is possible to make the player play the game while being conscious of the remaining number of times the second game state is set, and there is an effect that motivation for the game can be increased.

In the gaming machine Q1 or Q2, when the suggestive performance is executed by the suggestive performance execution means, the suggested performance that is being executed is adjusted based on the establishment of the performance condition to determine the ease with which the actual specific performance is established. A gaming machine Q3 characterized in that it has a variable performance means for changing the suggestive performance close to .

According to the gaming machine Q3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine Q1 or Q2, the following effects are achieved. That is, when a suggestion performance is being executed by the suggestion performance execution means, based on the establishment of the performance condition, the suggestion performance being executed by the variable performance means is a suggestion that approaches the ease with which the actual specific performance is established. It is variable depending on the performance.

As a result, the number of times that the second gaming state is set can be increased, and the player can play the game with peace of mind.

In the gaming machine Q3, the suggestive performance is a performance that suggests the number of remaining determinations by the determining means until the specific condition is satisfied, and the variable performance means is a suggestive performance that indicates a number of determinations close to the remaining number of determinations. A gaming machine Q4 characterized in that it is variable.

According to the gaming machine Q4, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine Q3, the following effects are achieved. That is, the number of remaining discriminations is suggested by the discriminating means until the specific condition is satisfied by the suggestive effect, and the suggestive effect is varied by the variable effect means to indicate the number of discriminations close to the remaining number of discriminations.

This makes it possible to suggest the number of determinations close to the remaining number of determinations, which has the effect of creating a sense of tension in the player.

In any of the gaming machines Q1 to Q4, if the bonus game is executed when the comparison result is other than the specific comparison result, the gaming machine has means for executing a performance different from the specific performance. Characteristic gaming machine Q5.

According to gaming machine Q5, in addition to the effects of any of gaming machines Q1 to Q4, the following effects are achieved. That is, if the bonus game is executed in a case other than the specific comparison result, a performance different from the specific performance is executed.

Thereby, by executing a performance different from the specific performance, the player can understand that the second bonus game has been performed when the result is other than the specific comparison result. Therefore, there is an effect that the presentation effect can be enhanced.

<Characteristic R group> (After a temporary stop, form a reach using a new pattern row)
a display means for displaying identification information; a dynamic display execution means for dynamically displaying a plurality of identification information strings constituted by a plurality of identification information arranged in a predetermined order; A bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game advantageous to a player based on a predetermined combination of identification information being stopped and displayed in the dynamic display of the identification information string by the display execution means. In the machine, when a predetermined condition is met, a combination of identification information different from the predetermined combination of identification information is stopped and displayed in the dynamic display of the identification information string. identification information string display means for dynamically displaying a new identification information string while at least a part of the combination of identified identification information is displayed in a stopped state; and the new identification information string is displayed by the identification information string display means. Based on this, when the predetermined combination of identification information is stopped and displayed using at least a part of the combination of identification information stopped and displayed and the new identification information string, the bonus game is executed. A gaming machine R1 comprising: execution means for causing the bonus game to be executed by the means.

Here, in some gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a plurality of symbols are displayed in a variable manner and each symbol is stopped and displayed in a predetermined combination, a win state advantageous to the player is given (for example, , Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 10-265). In such a gaming machine, when one symbol is fluctuating and other symbols are stopped and displayed, a reach state is generated in which the symbols that are stopped and displayed form part of a predetermined combination, resulting in a win. The aim is to increase interest by making players look forward to it.

However, in such conventional gaming machines, if a reach state does not occur, even if all the symbols are not stopped and displayed, there is no possibility of a winning state at that point, and the player's play is affected. There was a problem that spoiled the interest. The purpose is to solve the problems exemplified above.

According to the gaming machine R1, the dynamic display execution means dynamically displays a plurality of identification information strings made up of a plurality of identification information arranged in a predetermined order. Based on the predetermined combination of identification information being stopped and displayed in the dynamic display of the identification information string by the dynamic display execution means, the bonus game execution means executes a bonus game advantageous to the player. Then, when a predetermined condition is met, based on the fact that a combination of identification information that is different from the predetermined combination of identification information is stopped and displayed in the dynamic display of the identification information string, the identification information that is stopped and displayed is A new identification information string is dynamically displayed by the identification information string display means while at least part of the combination of information is still displayed. Based on the display of a new identification information string by the identification information string display means, a predetermined combination of identification information using at least a part of the combination of identification information that was stopped and displayed and the new identification information string. is stopped and displayed, the execution means executes the bonus game by the bonus game execution means.

As a result, a new identification information string is dynamically displayed by the identification information string display means while at least a part of the combination of identification information that was once stopped and displayed, providing a surprising effect to the player. can be provided. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine R1, the identification information string display means displays a special identification symbol string combined with the plurality of identification information displayed in the plurality of identification information strings in a direction in which it is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display execution means. A gaming machine R2 is characterized in that the characters are dynamically displayed in different directions.

According to the gaming machine R2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine R1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the identification information string display means dynamically displays the special identification symbol string, which is a combination of multiple pieces of identification information displayed in multiple identification information strings, in a direction different from the direction in which it is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display execution means. Is displayed.

Thereby, the dynamic display direction of the symbol row can be changed to a different direction, so that it is possible to provide a surprising performance to the player. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine R2, the identification information string display means dynamically displays the special identification symbol string in a direction orthogonal to the direction of the identification symbol string dynamically displayed by the dynamic display execution means. Gaming machine R3 is characterized by:

According to gaming machine R3, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machine R2, the following effects are achieved. That is, the identification information string display means dynamically displays the special identification symbol string in a direction orthogonal to the direction of the identification symbol string dynamically displayed by the dynamic display execution means.

This has the effect of making it easier for the player to notice that the dynamically displayed direction has changed, thereby increasing the performance effect.

In the gaming machine R1, the identification information string display means dynamically displays a new identification information string different from the identification information string dynamically displayed on the dynamic display execution means, and the identification information string When the new identification information string is displayed by the display means, a non-display setting for setting at least one of the plurality of identification information strings dynamically displayed by the dynamic display execution means to non-display; A gaming machine R4 characterized in that it has a means.

According to the gaming machine R4, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine R1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the identification information string display means dynamically displays a new identification information string different from the identification information string dynamically displayed on the dynamic display execution means, and the identification information string display means displays the new identification information string. In this case, the non-display setting means sets at least one of the plurality of identification information strings dynamically displayed by the dynamic display execution means to non-display.

This makes it possible to dynamically display a new identification information string without changing the area in which the identification information string is displayed. Therefore, there is an effect that the control load for dynamic display can be reduced.

In the gaming machine R1 or R4, display data for displaying the new identification information string dynamically displayed by the identification information string display means and the identification information string dynamically displayed by the dynamic display execution means. The display data to be displayed are those that are set at the same time, and the display data to be displayed is determined as the area set in the display area of the display means, from among the set display data. A gaming machine R5 characterized in that it has a means.

According to gaming machine R5, in addition to the effects of gaming machine R1 or R4, the following effects are achieved. That is, the display data for displaying a new identification information string dynamically displayed by the identification information string display means and the display data for displaying the identification information string dynamically displayed by the dynamic display execution means are: The determining means determines the display data to be displayed among the display data set at the same time and set as the display area of the display means.

This has the effect of reducing the control load for dynamic display.

The gaming machine Z1 is characterized in that each of the gaming machines is a slot machine. Among these, the basic configuration of a slot machine is that it is equipped with a variable display means that dynamically displays an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information, and then displays the identification information definitively, and that is The dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, and when the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped. and a special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, with the necessary condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, typical examples of game media include coins and medals.

The gaming machine Z2 is characterized in that each of the gaming machines is a pachinko gaming machine. Among these, the basic structure of a pachinko game machine is that it is equipped with an operating handle, and in response to the operation of the operating handle, a ball is launched into a predetermined gaming area, and the ball is fired into an operating port located at a predetermined position within the gaming area. One example is one in which the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is fixed and stopped after a predetermined period of time, with winning a prize (or passing through an operating port) as a necessary condition. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning hole) placed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to allow balls to be won, and a value corresponding to the number of winnings is given. Examples include those that are given value (including not only prize balls but also data written to magnetic cards, etc.).

A game machine Z3 characterized in that each of the game machines is a combination of a pachinko game machine and a slot machine. Among these, the basic configuration of the integrated gaming machine is as follows: ``Equipped with a variable display means that dynamically displays an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information and then definitively displays the identification information, and a starting operating means (for example, an operating lever). The dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. A special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player with the necessary condition that the confirmed identification information at the time of stopping is specific identification information, and a ball is used as a gaming medium and the identification information is A gaming machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required to start the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when a special gaming state occurs.
<Others>
2. Description of the Related Art Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, display symbols in a variable manner based on the winning of a game ball into a starting prize opening, and notify players of the lottery results after the variable display ends. Furthermore, the lottery executed based on the winning of the game ball in the starting winning hole can be stored multiple times, and the reserved symbols corresponding to the number of reserved symbols are displayed, and the currently displayed reserved symbols are There are some devices that are configured to be able to execute a pending notice effect that can be used to notify information regarding the corresponding lottery in advance (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-297071).
However, there was a need to further improve the interest of the game.
The present technical idea has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can improve the interest of players.
<Means>
In order to achieve this purpose, the gaming machine of technical idea 1 includes an information acquisition means that acquires information based on the establishment of an acquisition condition, and the information acquisition means acquires the information up to a predetermined upper limit. a memorizable information storage means; a determination means that executes a determination upon establishment of a determination condition based on the information stored in the information storage means; and a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game advantageous to the player based on the fact that the discrimination condition is satisfied based on the information stored in the information storage means. a pre-discrimination means capable of performing a pre-discrimination beforehand; and an identification symbol display control means for displaying on a display means an identification symbol corresponding to the number of pieces of information stored in the information storage means for each piece of information. , a variable means for varying the identification pattern based on a result of preliminary discrimination by the preliminary discrimination means with respect to the information before being discriminated by the discrimination means; The apparatus further comprises a determining means for determining a combination of the identification symbols to be varied by the variable means among the plurality of identification symbols.
The gaming machine according to technical idea 2 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 1, in which the variable means adjusts the predetermined condition in a period until the discrimination condition of the information corresponding to the displayed identification symbol is satisfied. When the above is established, information based on the result of the preliminary determination for the information corresponding to the identification symbol is displayed.
The gaming machine according to technical idea 3 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 1 or 2, in which the specific display mode corresponding to the identification pattern is displayed using the identification pattern changed by the variable means. It has specific display control means for causing the means to display the information for a specific period of time.
A gaming machine according to technical idea 4 is a gaming machine according to any one of technical ideas 1 to 3, which includes an operation means that can be operated by a player, and when the identification symbol is varied by the variable means, the The apparatus includes a specific effect execution means for executing settings of a specific effect based on the operation of the operating means.
The gaming machine according to technical idea 5 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 4, in which when the pre-discrimination means determines that the result is the specific discrimination result, the gaming machine is determined to have a result other than the specific discrimination result. The present invention includes a variable number setting means for setting a larger number of the identification symbols to be varied by the variable means than in the case of the present invention.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Idea 1, information is acquired by the information acquisition means based on the establishment of the acquisition condition, and the information acquired by the information acquisition means is stored up to a predetermined upper limit by the information storage means. be done. Based on the information stored in the information storage means, the determination means executes a determination upon the establishment of the determination condition, and based on the determination by the determination means resulting in a specific determination result, it is determined that the determination is advantageous to the player. A bonus game is executed by the bonus game execution means. Based on the information stored in the information storage means, prior determination is performed by the prior determination means before the determination condition is satisfied. An identification symbol corresponding to each piece of information stored in the information storage means is displayed on the display means by the identification symbol display control means. The identification pattern is varied by the variable means based on the result of preliminary discrimination by the preliminary discrimination means with respect to the information before being discriminated by the discrimination means. Among the plurality of identification symbols displayed on the identification symbol display control means, a combination of identification symbols to be varied by the variable means is determined by the determining means.
Thereby, it is possible to suppress the variable means from being executed for all the identification symbols displayed on the display means, so that the player's interest can be improved.
According to the gaming machine according to technical idea 2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine according to technical idea 1, the following effects are achieved. In other words, if a predetermined condition is satisfied during the period until the determination condition for the information corresponding to the displayed identification symbol is satisfied by the variable means, information based on the result of preliminary determination of the information corresponding to the identification symbol being displayed is generated. The display mode can be changed.
This allows the player to focus on the variable content of the identification symbol. Therefore, there is an effect that the presentation effect can be enhanced.
According to the gaming machine according to technical idea 3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine according to technical idea 1 or 2, the following effects are achieved. That is, by using the identification pattern varied by the variable means, a specific display mode corresponding to the identification pattern is displayed on the display device for a specific period by the specific display control device.
Thereby, it becomes possible to execute a specific performance mode using the identification symbol varied by the variable means, and there is an effect that a performance advantageous to the player can be executed.
According to the gaming machine according to technical idea 4, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine according to any one of technical ideas 1 to 3, the following effects are achieved. That is, when the identification symbol is varied by the variable means, the setting of the specific performance is executed by the specific performance execution means based on the operation of the operating means by the player.
This has the effect that a specific performance mode can be executed for a specific period using the identification symbol varied by the variable means.
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Idea 5, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine described in Technical Idea 4, the following effects are achieved. That is, when a specific discrimination result is determined by the pre-discrimination means, the number of identification symbols to be varied by the variable means is set to be larger by the variable number setting means than when it is determined that the discrimination result is other than the specific discrimination result. Ru.
This has the effect that the frequency at which identification symbols are displayed can be changed depending on the gaming state.

10 Pachinko machine (gaming machine)

Claims (1)

a firing means capable of firing a game ball into a game area;
a first ball entry means into which the game ball launched by the launch means can enter;
an acquisition means capable of acquiring predetermined information when a predetermined condition that can be established based on the game ball entering the first ball entry means is satisfied;
a storage means capable of storing the predetermined information acquired by the acquisition means;
A gaming machine comprising: a determining means capable of executing a determination based on the predetermined information stored in the storage means when a first execution condition is satisfied;
Means capable of generating a specific gaming state based on the fact that the result of the discrimination by the discrimination means is a specific discrimination result;
a second ball entry means into which the game ball launched by the launch means is different from the first ball entry means;
A first position where it is possible to enter the game ball into the second ball entry means, and a second position where it is more difficult to enter the game ball into the second ball entry means than at the first position. and a displacement means capable of displacing the
a first displacement control that displaces the displacement means located at the second position to the first position; and a second displacement control that displaces the displacement means located at the first position to the second position. displacement control; and displacement control means capable of at least
The displacement control means executes the first displacement control based on a first condition that can be satisfied in the specific gaming state, and the first displacement control positions the displacement means at the first position. configured to execute the second displacement control based on the establishment of a second condition that can be established in a situation where
The gaming machine is
It is configured such that a predetermined value is given to the player when a game ball enters at least the first ball entry means,
A first mode based on the execution of the discrimination by the discrimination means, a second mode based on the occurrence of the specific gaming state, and a third mode based on the predetermined ball entering the second ball entering means. A gaming machine characterized in that it is configured such that at least the following can occur.

Images